Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract 62512-V2CONFORMED OCTOBER 2024 CSC No. 62512-V2 FORTWORTH PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF VCRWF PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS City Project No. 103295 Mattie Parker David Cooke Mayor City Manager Chris Harder, P.E. Water Director Shannon Dunne Assistant Water Director Plant Operations Tony Sholola, P.E. Assistant Water Director Capital Projects Delivery Farida Goderya, PhD, P.E. Senior Project Manager Volume 2 of 3 Prepared for The City of Fort Worth Water Department ISSUED FOR BID JUKE 2024 CDM Smith. 801 Cherry Street, Unit 33 Suite 1820 Fort Worth, Texas 76102 TBPE Firm No. F-3043 In Association With: r�P�E �F•TF.�'h ..L......................1... r SAGAR H. KHOLE ............................. 106105 �t� ��ONA►-ENG' 20/ o1 i�3t ' FRE ESE OFFICIAL RECORD lnfri5tructwe •1 <NICHOLS CITY SECRETARY FT. WORTH, TX THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 00 00 01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 1 of 3 Division 00 - General Conditions 00 00 01 Table of Contents 00 00 02 Specification Seal Sheet 0005 10 Mayor and Council Communication 0005 15 Addenda 0011 13 Invitation to Bidders 0021 13 Instructions to Bidders 0035 13 Conflict of Interest Affidavit 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 42 43 Proposal Form 0043 13 Bid Bond 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Nonresident Bidder 0045 11 Bidders Pre -qualifications 00 45 12 Prequalification Statement 0045 13 Prequalification Application 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers' Compensation Law l 00 45 40 minority BusMess Fm.,.,.,,p&e c , .' Business Equity Goal 00 52 43 Agreement 0061 13 Performance Bond 0061 14 Payment Bond 0061 19 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 00 74 00 TWDB Supplemental Conditions Division 01 - Geioeral Requirements 01 1100 Summary of Work 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 33 Measurement and Payment 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meeting 01 3120 Project Meetings 01 32 13 Schedule of Values 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 32 35 Aerial Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittals 0135 13.24 Special Procedures for MOPO and Sequence of Construction 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 of 8 01 45 27 Equipment Testing and Startup 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 7123 Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23.16.01 Attachment A Survey Staking Standards 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 23 Cleaning 01 76 00 Asset Management 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 0188 19 Tightness Testing Performance Requirements Division 02 - Existing Conditions 0241 15 Paving Removal 0241 16 Structure Demolition 0241 19 Selective Demolition Division 03 - Concrete 03 01 30 Repair and Rehabilitation of Cast -in -Place Concrete 03 1100 Concrete Forming 03 1500 Concrete Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast -in -Place Concrete 0334 13 Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) 03 60 00 Grouting 03 74 00 Modifications to Existing Concrete Division 04 — Masonry 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry Division 05 — Metals 05 05 33 Anchor Systems 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 23 Steel Roof Decking 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 0553 16 Aluminum Grating Division 06 — Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 82 53 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Miscellaneous Fabrications CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 of 8 Division 07 — Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 1326 Self -Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07 1900 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 26 00 Vapor Retarders 07 54 23 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Division 8 - Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 0851 13 Aluminum Windows 0871 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing Division 9 - Finishes 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 96 76.23 Wastewater Treatment Coatings Division 10 - Specialties 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23 Panel Signage 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers Division 22 - Plumbing 2205 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 2205 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 2205 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 33 Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 2207 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 2211 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 14 29 Sump Pumps 22 21 23 Facility Natural -Gas Piping CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 of 8 Volume 2 of 3 Division 23 — Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 2305 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 2305 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 2307 13 Duct Insulation 2307 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 09 23.12 Control Dampers 23 09 23.14 Flow Instruments 23 09 23.27 Temperature Instruments 2331 13 Metal Ducts 2331 16 Nonmetal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 2337 13.23 Registers and Grilles 23 74 23.16 Packaged, Indirect -Fired, Outdoor, Heating — Only Makeup Air Vents Division 26 - Electrical 2605 13 Medium -Voltage Cables 2605 19 Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 23 Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduits for Electrical System 26 05 33.16 Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Power System Studies 26 12 19 Pad -Mounted, Liquid -Filled, Medium -Voltage Transformers 26 13 29 Medium -Voltage, Pad -Mounted Switchgear 26 22 00 Low -Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Motor Control Centers 26 25 05 480V Control Panels 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2628 13 Fuses 2628 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 23.26 Eddy Current Drive Controllers 26 36 00 Transfer Switches 2651 19 LED Interior Lighting 26 52 13 Emergency and Exit Lighting 26 56 13 Lighting Poles and Standards 2656 19 LED Exterior Lighting CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 "A Division 31- Earthwork 3105 15 Soils Aggregate for Earthwork 31 09 00 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring 31 20 00 Earthwork 3123 16 Unclassified Excavation 312319 Dewatering 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 31 50 00 Excavation Support and Protection Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 3201 17 Permanent Asphalt Paving Repair 32 1123 Flexible Base Courses 32 1129 Lime Treated Base Courses 32 1216 Asphalt Paving 32 1273 Asphalt Paving Crack Sealants 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 1320 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways and Barrier Free Ramps 32 1373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 1613 Curb Gut and Valley Gut 32 92 14 Non -Native Seeding Division 33 - Utilities 33 01 30 Sewer and Manhole Testing 33 01 31 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection — Sanitary Sewer 3303 10 Bypass Pumping of Existing Sewer Systems 33 04 40 Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 33 04 50 Cleaning of Pipes 3305 13.10 Frame, Cover and Grade Rings — Composite 3305 13 Frame, Cover and Grade Rings 3305 16 Concrete Water Vaults 3305 17 Concrete Collars 33 05 26 Utility Markers/Locators 33 05 30 Location of Existing Utilities 33 05 93 25 Concrete Gravity and Lowe Pressure Pipe 33 1105 Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 33 11 10 Ductile Iron Pipe 33 11 11 Ductile Iron Fittings 33 1200 Buried Plug Valves 33 1220 Resilient Seated Gate Valve 33 1225 Connection to Existing Water Mains 33 1240 Fire Hydrants 3331 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe for Gravity Sanitary Sewers 3331 15 HDPE Pipe for Sanitary Sewer 33 31 20 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe 3339 10 Cast -in -Place Concrete Manholes 33 39 20 Precast Concrete Manholes 33 39 60 Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures 33 46 02 Trench Drains 3349 10 Cast -in -Place Storm Drain Manholes and Junction Boxes 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 5 of 8 CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 6 of 8 33 49 20 Curb and Drop Inlets 33 51 00 Natural Gas Distribution Division 40 — Process Interconnections 40 05 06 Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping 40 05 07 Hangers and Supports for Process Piping 4005 19 Ductile Iron Process Pipe 40 05 31 Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 51 Common Requirements for Process Valves 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping 40 05 57 Actuators for Process Valves and Gates 40 05 59.17 Composite Stop Logs 40 05 59.23 Stainless steel Slide Gates 04 05 61.43 Knife Valves 40 05 62 Plug Valves 40 05 63 Ball Valves 40 05 65.16 Globe Valves 40 05 65.33 Rubber Flapper Check Valves 40 05 67.36 Pressure Regulating Valves 40 05 71.13 Duckbill Check Valve 40 05 78.21 Air Release Valves for Wastewater Service 40 05 82 Solenoid Valves for Process Service 40 05 93.23 Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment 4041 13.13 Process Piping Electrical Resistance Heat Tracing 4042 13 Process Piping Insulation 4061 00 Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions 40 61 21.20 Process Control System Testing (Contractor Performs Programming) 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 4061 96 Process Control Descriptions 4067 17 Industrial Enclosures 40 67 33 Panel Wiring 40 68 63 Configuration of HMI Software 40 70 00 Instrumentation for Process Systems 40 70 OOA Instrumentation List 4071 13 Magnetic Flow Meters 40 71 66 Transit Time Flow Meters 40 71 79 Flow Switches 40 72 23 Radar Level Meters 40 72 76 Level Switches 4073 13 Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges 40 73 36 Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches 40 73 63 Diaphragm Seals 4078 13 Indicators and Meters 40 78 56 Isolators, Intrinsically Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 7 of 8 Division 41— Material, Processing and Handling 1 41 22 13.13 1 Bridge Cranes Division 43 — Process Gas, Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage Equipment 43 21 50 Seal Booster Water Pump Station 43 23 35 Recessed Impeller Pumps 43 23 57 Progressing Cavity Pump 43 41 63.00 Wire and Strand Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Tank Division 46 — Water and Wastewater Equipment 46 05 53 Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment 46 24 23 Inline Grinders 46 41 21.31 Jet Mixing Equipment - Wastewater 4643 13.11 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Weirs, Baffles and Flumes 46 43 21 Circular Clarifier Equipment 46 61 20.13 FRP Launder Covers - Bucklin CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 8 of 8 Volume 3 of 3 Appendices I GG6.06D A,r;n,,rity and Women n...u, d BusinessE,it .. i-i ,. G,.,..,,U, nee Minority Business Enterprise GC-6.07a COFW 2013 Prevailing Wage Rates (Heavy and Highway Construction Projects) GC-6.07b COFW 2013 Prevailing Water Rages (Commercial Construction Projects) TWDB Davis Bacon Prevailing Wage Rates — Heavy Construction TWDB Davis Bacon Prevailing Wage Rates — Building Construction TWDB DB-0154 Monthly Davis -Bacon Wage Rate Certificate of Compliance TWDB DB-0156 Guidance — Davis Bacon Wage Rate Requirements for SRF Projects TWDB ED-101 Site Certificate TWDB ED-103 Contractor's Act of Assurance (Construction Contract) TWDB ED-104 Contractor's Act of Assurance Resolution TWDB WRD-255 Bidder's Certifications - EEO TWDB 0459 Form Vendor Compliance with Reciprocity on Non -Resident Bidder TWDB 0551 Guidance - Supplemental Contract Conditions for CWSRF Non -Equivalency TWDB 0100 Guidance — Clean Water State Revolving Fund Loan Program (CWSRF) TWDB 1106 Guidance - AIS Guidance for Clean Water and Drinking Water SRF Projects TWDB I I06-A Form - Monthly American Iron and Steel Certificate TWDB I I06-B Form — AIS De Minimis Log GR-01 60 00 CFW Water Standard Product List SC-4.02.1 Subsurface and Physical Conditions —Geotechnical Data Report SC-4.02.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions — Subsurface Utility Engineering 1 8 G 4; 0412 SC-4.06.1 Lead Inspection Report SC-4.06.2 Asbestos Inspection Report END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 OF y *, AMY R. ROBINSON go Amy Robinson, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 0/2024 Jeffrey Van Pelt, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 Specification Sections Division 01, Division 02, 03 34 13, 3110 00, 3123 16, 31 25 00, Division 32, Division 33 except 33 05 10 Specification Sections 3105 15, 3109 00, 3120 00, 3123 19, 3150 00, 33 05 10 Page 1 of 6 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 Specification Sections Divisions 04, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10 Charlotte Throop, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 F� AMANDA M. SMAYDA.i v y Specification Sections 13026 _ Divisions 03 and 05, 43 4163 O Amanda Smayda, PE JQ Infrastructure, LLC TBPE Firm Registration No. F-7986 Page 2 of 6 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 = 4tE OF•? F�jx �► 1 i *? :* i SAGAR H. KHOLE .............. ........ ■...... ►, 106105 r .......• Sagar Khole, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 !qE 0F 1F�1 ............... r..rir► • CHAD M. SIMMONS ■ �........ r.►•■•.•►••.� •• ■ j'P 9116310 1 �p , 6/20/2024 Chad Simmons, PE Freese & Nichols, Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-2144 Specification Sections 40 05 06, 40 05 07, 40 05 19, 40 05 31, 40 05 51, 40 05 53, 40 05 57, 40 05 59.17, 40 05 59.23, 40 05 61.43, 40 05 62, 40 05 63, 40 05 65.16, 40 05 65.33, 40 05 67.36, 40 05 71.13, 40 05 78.21, 40 05 82, 40 41 13.13, 40 42 13, 43 23 57, 46 05 53, 46 24 23, 46 41 21.31, 46 43 13.11, 46 43 21, 46 43 24, 46 6120.13 Specification Sections 4122 13.13, 43 2150, 43 23 35 Page 3 of 6 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 oFir�w % (ilBwiOfa� r1A1�1Y�41 Gibson Mammen, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 lit f................... ......... I J Y50N VARGHESE••• 134792 {R,frS Joyson i arg ese,iPE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 Specification Sections Divisions 22 and 23 Specification Sections Division 26, 40 05 93.23 Page 4 of 6 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 DgiWIV sig neu ay Kemmn Khan Inlo Kamran Kh k43@,c kh _ ika 3[dl�dm5milh Ctlm � is 17 A8A N1 KAMRAN ALI KHAN • � ...:......115801•• ' i FS.CENSO"* � *0 S�•Aw ONAL EN4" 6/20/2024 Kamran Khan, PE CDM Smith Inc. TBPE Firm Registration No. F-3043 Specification Sections 40 6100, 40 61 21.20, 40 6126, 40 67 17, 40 67 33 40 68 63, 40 70 00, 40 70 OOA, 40 71 13, 40 7166 40 7179, 40 72 23, 40 72 76, 40 73 13, 40 73 36 40 73 63, 40 78 56 Page 5 of 6 VILLAGE CREEK WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY PRIMARY CLARIFIER IMPROVEMENTS CITY PROJECT NO. 103295 Specification Seals June 2024 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Page 6 of 6 2305 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 4 SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on alternating -current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 4 B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe -duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Motors Used with Reduced -Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 4 B. Severe -Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. 2.6 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR (ECM) A. Provide pumps so they are specified or scheduled with ECM. 1. Synchronous, constant torque, ECM with permanent magnet rotor. Rotor magnets to be time -stable, nontoxic ceramic magnets (Sr -Fe). 2. Driven by a frequency converter with an integrated power factor correction filter. Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable. 3. Each motor with an integrated variable -frequency drive, tested as one unit by manufacturer. 4. Motor speed adjustable over full range from 0 rpm to maximum scheduled speed. 5. Variable motor speed to be controlled by a 0- to 10 V-dc or 4- to 20-mA input. 6. Integrated motor protection verified by UL to protect the pump against over- /undervoltage, overtemperature of motor and/or electronics, overcurrent, locked rotor, and dry run (no-load condition). PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 23 05 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 13 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 4 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 2305 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC DUCTING Page 1 of 4 SECTION 23 05 16 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC DUCTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber expansion joints. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe and Pressure -Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC DUCTING Page 2 of 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, building structure and temperatures. B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. p�►• M1►mN�1:11:To:M0:4VNI ►6111610211►MIl.`! A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Holz. 2. Belco. 3. Proco. 4. Daniel Company. 5. Mercer. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Furnish expansion joints in ductwork: 1. Where required for expansion, contraction and movement as indicated on the Drawings. 2. In duct runs as flexible connectors. C. Expansion Joints: 1. Integral flange molded arch type units. 2. Material: EPDM rubber. Resistant to UV and H2S. 3. Reinforcement: Strong synthetic asbestos -free fabric suitable for corrosive service. 4. Vibration Reduction Design: a. Expansion or contraction flexible connections working length or "live" length allows up to 1 inch of movement as designed by the manufacturer. 5. End Connections: Match duct connection flanges. 6. Outdoor service temperature ranges: -10 degrees F to 125 degrees F at 1 PSIG. D. Flanges: 1. Material: Type 316 SS or FRP. 2. Hardware: Type 316 SS. 3. Pre -punched to match adjacent duct or equipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC DUCTING Page 3 of 4 E. Construct flexible connections and vibration isolators such that the cross -sectional area of the connection is equal to or greater than 90 percent of the cross -sectional area of the adjacent duct. F. Where flexible connections are used as expansion joints, follow the manufacturer's pre - compression recommendations. When the temperature at installation differs from the temperature in the pre -compression recommendation, adjust for actual conditions. G. 12" Face to Face Performance: 1. Axial Compression: 4 inch. 2. Axial Extension: 2-inch. 3. Lateral Deflection: 2-1/2-inch. H. 6" Face to Face Performance: 1. Axial Compression: 2-1/4-inch. 2. Axial Extension: 1-1/4-inch. 3. Lateral Deflection: 1-1/4-inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. END OF SECTION 23 05 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2305 16 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC DUCTING Page 4 of 4 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 11 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Equipment supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Section 23 05 16 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. 3. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 11 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural -Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous -thread rod, nuts, and washer made of steel. See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 4. Paint Coating: See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made from structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 11 a. ABB, Electrification Business. b. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. C. Flex -Strut Inc. d. G-Strut. e. Haydon Corporation. f. MIRO Industries Inc. g. Rooftop Support Systems; Eberl Iron Works, Inc. h. Unistrut; Atkore International. Wesanco, Inc. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00) 2. Description: Shop- or field -fabricated, pipe -support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted channel with inturned lips. See Area Classification and Material Schedule in Drawings. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous -thread rod, nuts, and washer. See Area Classification and Material Schedule in Drawings. PA•� VNIVI0Zia 91=.1VY910NOV A. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Illinois Tool Works, Inc. C. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00 B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cooper B-line: brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 11 b. Empire Industries, Inc. C. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Or approved eaual (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00) 2. Indoor Applications: Zinc -coated or stainless -steel. 3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel. 2.6 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field -fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion -resistant components to support roof -mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Single base unit with integral -rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Base: Single, vulcanized rubber, molded polypropylene, or polycarbonate. 3. Hardware: See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings . 4. Accessories: Protection pads. C. Low -Profile, Single Base, Single -Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Single base with vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane protection. 2. Base: Single, vulcanized rubber, molded polypropylene, or polycarbonate. 3. Vertical Members: Two, 1/2-inch rods. See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 4. Horizontal Member: Adjustable horizontal pipe support channels. See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 5. Pipe Supports: Strut clamps. 6. Hardware: See Materials Schedule in Drawings. 7. Accessories: Protection pads. 8. Height: As needed per drawings. D. High -Profile, Single Base, Single -Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Single base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2. Base: Single vulcanized rubber or molded polypropylene. 3. Vertical Members: Two, 1/2-inch rods. See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 4. Horizontal Member: One, adjustable height pipe support slotted channel or plate. See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. 5. Pipe Supports: Roller. 6. Hardware: See Area Classification and Materials Schedule in Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 11 7. Accessories: Protection pads, 1/2-inch continuous -thread stainless -steel rod. 8. Height: As needed per drawings. E. Curb -Mounted -Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field -fabricated pipe supports made from structural - steel shapes, continuous -thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field -fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon - steel shapes. 2.8 MATERIALS A. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire -rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field -fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 11 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field -assembled strut systems. D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder -actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb -Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb -Mounted -Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for curbs. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded -structural -steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. M. Insulated Piping: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 7 of 11 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight - distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium -silicate -insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 8 of 11 B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/Dl.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous -thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. D. Use thermal -hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. E. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 9 of 11 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off - center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or Two -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel - pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon -steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel -pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon -steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion -type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel -pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single -Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 10 of 11 F. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. G. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top -Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I -beams. 9. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I - beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I - beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable -Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 11 of 11 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel -Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. J. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint -Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1- 1/4 inches. 3. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable -Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable -Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load -adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. C. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical -type supports and one trapeze member. K. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. L. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Use powder -actuated fasteners or mechanical -expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw► W11LS1u1F."IWA A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Duct labels. 4. Warning tags. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. F. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: Mill Finish. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 6. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self -tapping screws. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-I I -inch bond paper, tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules). Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Actioncraft Products, Inc., a division of Industrial Test Eq_ui_pment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Carlton Industries, LP. 4. Champion America. 5. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 6. Emedco. 7. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 8. LEM Products Inc. 9. Marking Services Inc. 10. Pipemarker.com, Brimar Industries, Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products, a Bradv Corporation companv. 12. Or approved equal (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 C. Self -Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. 2.3 DUCT LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Carlton Industries, LP. 3. Champion America. 4. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 5. Emedco. 6. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 7. LEM Products Inc. 8. Marking Services Inc. 9. Pipemarker.com, Brimar Industries, Inc. 10. Seton Identification Products, a Brady Corporation companv. 11. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Self -Adhesive Duct Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent -adhesive backing. C. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. D. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. F. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets. G. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. H. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 1. Flow -Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2.4 WARNING TAGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bradv Corporation. 2. Champion America. 3. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 4. Emedco. 5. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 6. LEM Products Inc. 7. Marking Services Inc. 8. Pivemarker.com, Brimar Industries, Inc. 9. Seton Identification Products, a Bradv Corporation companv. 10. Or approved equal (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident -prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as 'DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety -yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule per ASME A13.1 1. Foul Air Condensate Drain Piping: Black letters on a safety -orange background. 3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Yellow label with black text: For hot-air supply ducts. 2. Green label with white text: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed -air ducts. B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.6 WARNING -TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 53 END OF SECTION 23 05 53 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 1 of 15 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant -volume air systems. 2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment: a. Makeup Air Unit. b. Motors. C. Fans d. Heat -transfer coils. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment. 4. Duct leakage tests. 5. Control system verification. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. BAS: Building automation systems. C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 2 of 15 F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. G. TDH: Total dynamic head. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 2. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. flr�1►1TO7uIN$to] ►IIMots] I U100II.3V A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article. E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article. F. Certified TAB reports. G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 3 of 15 B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAEJES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire -stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system -effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 4 of 15 performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality -control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Perform system -readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: Airside: a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. C. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed. e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable -frequency controllers' startup is complete, and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed. i. Windows and doors are installed. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 5 of 15 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct -airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling -unit components. K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 6 of 15 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside -air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor -air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any outlets to obtain total airflow. C. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air -handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system -effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air -handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air -handling -unit performance. 5. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full -cooling, full - heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re -measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re -measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 7 of 15 D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re -measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re -measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re -measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan -performance data. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal -protection -element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size. B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation. 3.7 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer. B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances. C. Report deficiencies observed. 3.8 CONTROLS VERIFICATION A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following: 1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations. 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended. 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 8 of 15 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure. B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the operation of the condensate -drain trap. 4. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 5. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. Fans are clean. 2. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 3. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. D. Adjust existing odor control fans by replacing sheaves, belts and pulley sizes to achieve indicated airflow performance. Refer to Appendix in this Section for existing fan and scrubber submittal and O&M data. E. Refer to sheet H-3 for rebalancing of existing systems scope. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 9 of 15 1. Supply and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Odor Control System Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent. 4. Odor Control Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.11 PROGRESS REPORTING A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.12 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Engineer's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 10 of 15 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 14. Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 4. Balancing stations. 5. Position of balancing devices. E. Air -Handling -Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make and frame type and size. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 11 of 15 b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfin. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg. f. Cooling -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg. g. Heating -coil static -pressure differential in inches wg. h. Outdoor airflow in cfm. i. Return airflow in cfm. j. Outdoor -air damper position. k. Return -air damper position. F. Gas- Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner -control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. 1. Motor full -load amperage and service factor. in. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfin. b. Entering -air temperature in deg F. C. Leaving -air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static -pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low -fire fuel input in Btu/h. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 12 of 15 i. High -fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High -temperature -limit setting in deg F. 1. Operating set point in Btu/h. in. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full -load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center -to -center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfin. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. H. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air -handling -unit number. b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 13 of 15 g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. I. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. C. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.13 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner's representative . B. Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows: 1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment. 3. If the second verification also fails, Engineer may contact AABC Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 14 of 15 B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions. PART 4 - APPENDIX A. Original Odor B Scrubber Submittal. B. Original Odor B High Speed Fan Curve. C. Original Odor B Fan Purchase Order. 3 ' D. Original Motor Nameplate Data for Typical SB 62-65 Fan. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 05 93 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 15 of 15 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 318-0205 SE-7.1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submit for approval manufacturers literature, specifications, engineering and performance data, and mounting details including dimensions, size, and materials for the following: 1. Scrubber, exhaust stack, packing, nozzles, support plates, mist eliminator, materials of construction. 2. Scrubber blower: Include AMCA certified blower curves showing efficiency, CFM, outlet velocity, static pressure, brake and motor horsepower, and decibel level ratings, materials of construction. 3. Blower inlet box, static pressure drop data, materials of construction. 4. Plenum box with engineering design calculations and details. 5. Flexible connections. 6. Chemical storage tank layout, dimensions, fittings, connections, and accessories for each tank location. 7. Recirculation- and chemical feed pumps. Include certified curves showing overall pump efficiencies, flow rate, head, brake and motor horsepower; speed, and shut-off head. . 8. All motors. 9. Chemical storage tank, heat tracing, and insulation systems. 10. pH transmitter and sensing element. 11. Liquid level indicators and level detection system. 12. All required gages and monitoring devices. 13. Odor control system control panels. 14. Wiring diagram of control panels. 15. Valves and appurtenances. 16. Other materials and equipment requested by ENGINEER. 17. Operating instructions, trouble shooting guide, and a complete parts list for the operation and maintenance manual. B. Operation and maintenance data: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish six copies of a hard cover bound operation and maintenance manual prepared by manufacturers of all items of equipment furnished under this specification two weeks prior to start-up. The manual shall include maintenance instructions, copies of approved shop and installation drawings for all equipment, and manufacturer's recommended lubricant and spare parts lists. C.- Materials testing data: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish results of materials tests performed as specified in accordance with referenced standard for approval by the ENGINEER prior to manufacture of fiberglass reinforced plastic items. D. Operator training schedule, agenda, and resume of trainer(s). E. Maintenance Training Schedule, agenda and resume of trainers. F. Resume of manufacturer's representative described in paragraph 7.1.2.B: Representative must be fully satisfactory to City. SE-7-3 M SE-7.1.4 PERFORMANCE TESTS UI: 318-0205 General: The CONTRACTOR, with the assistance of the manufacturer, shall conduct performance tests on the scrubber system. The performance tests shall demonstrate that the exhaust air from the scrubber has an average odor concentration of no more than 100 Odor Units, that hydrogen sulfide removal efficiency of the scrubber system is greater than 99 percent, and pressure drop of the scrubber is less than 5 inches H2O when the system is operated at design condition as described herein. Test procedure: A minimum of two performance tests shall be conducted. The first test shall be done at time as when all anticipated odorous air streams are present in the scrubber inlet. If this cannot be done the CONTRACTOR may 'spike',the scrubber air with H25 at the design loading rate. The time of the tests and detailed test procedure shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER prior to the testing period. The second test shall be scheduled 30 days after the satisfactory test results of the first test. If the second test fails, the media is to be changed and tested 30 days later. At minimum, the test procedure shall consist of the following elements. Tests will be repeated until two tests prove satisfactory. 1. The scrubber system shall be operated before, during, and after testing at design conditions. Design conditions are defined as follows: Air flow at scrubber inlet: 46,000 cfm minimum Scrubber inlet air temperature: 50 F, minimum 110 F, maximum Recirculated scrubbant flow rate: 460 gpm, maximum Recirculated scrubbant concentration: caustic soda: 5 percent maximum Scrubber sump overflow rate: 20 gpm, maximum 2. During testing, chemical feed, scrubber overflow, recirculation, and scrubber airflow rates shall be held constant. Changes in scrubber system operating conditions shall not be permitted. All fine-tuning of operating conditions shall be performed prior to testing. 3. Design operating conditions shall be maintained for a minimum of six hours. During this time, all pertinent operating parameters shall be monitored and recorded and sufficient sampling and analysis shall be conducted to demonstrate that flow rates, temperatures, and solution concentrations are at design conditions. 4. Hydrogen sulfide concentration in the scrubber inlet and the scrubber outlet shall be measured. Scrubber pressure drop from air inlet to exhaust shall be determined. Samples of scrubber exhaust shall be collected for odor panel testing. A minimum of two samples shall be collected at evenly spaced intervals over the period while the scrubber system is operating at design conditions. The .samples shall be collected and stored so as to ensure that contamination, SE-7-4 318-0205 dilution, adsorption effects, and sample deterioration are minimized. A maximum of 24 hours shall elapse between scrubber exhaust sampling and odor panel tests. 5. Odor panel tests shall be conducted on the scrubber exhaust samples. The tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Designation: D1391 (1978) Standard Method for Measurement of Odor in Atmospheres (Dilution Method). Alternatively, the Dynamic Dilution Triangle Olfactometer (IIT Research Institute) method may be employed. The odor concentration in Odor Units shall be determined for each sample. 6. The demister section shall be tested for moist.ure removal and shall meet the specified limit. If the specified moisture removal is not obtained, the polypropylene material shall be replaced with new material and retested until satisfactory results are obtained. Additionally the amount of caustic soda (NaOH) emitted shall be tested. Air samples shall be retained by the CONTRACTOR to be gathered at an interval of 1 m.onth for the first year after acceptance. -An independent certified laboratory shall gather the sample and test the sample using a regent to measure the number of pounds of NaOH. Written certified reports shall be provided. C. Results: A description of the performance tests and the results of the odor panel tests shall be submitted to the OWNER/ ENGINEER. The average odor concentration (average of at least 2 tests) of the exhaust of the scrubber system shall not exceed 100 Odor Units. The hydrogen sulfide removal efficiency shall be greater than 99 percent. The scrubber pressure drop shall be less than 5 inches H2O. Should the scrubber system performance not meet any of the above requirements, that system shall have failed the performance test. The CONTRACTOR shall make any additions or modifications to the scrubber system as may be necessary at no additional cost to the OWNER and the performance test for that system shall be repeated in its entirety. SE-7.1.5 SCRUBBER AND EXHAUST STACK A. General: The odor control scrubber systems shall treat odorous air from the primary clarifier weir area covers. The odorous air is anticipated to contain up to 100 ppm of hydrogen sulfide as,well as other inorganic and organic malodorous compounds associated with sewage and.wastewater processes. The odor control scrubber systems shall be capable of treating 46,000 cfm (summer) and 23,000 cfm (winter) of odorous air. Malodorous air shall be removed in the main packed bed by contact with combined recirculated and fresh make-up scrubbant solution. Caustic soda solutions have been selected as the make up scrubbant solutions. SE-7-5 r 318-0205 B. General: The scrubbers shall be of the vertical, counter flow, packed bed type and shall consist of exhaust stack, flanged exhaust outlet on top, demister section, spray chamber, main packed bed section, and scrubbant collection sump. C. Housing: The scrubber housing and exhaust stack shall be of laminate fiberglass reinforced vinyl ester -hand lay up or filament wound construction, which shall be fire retardant and be resistant to sunlight, corrosive fumes, and suitable for use with acidic or basic scrubbing solution. The laminates shall consist of a total corrosion barrier and a structural partim. The composition specified for the inner surface and interior surface is intended to achieve optimum chemical resistance. Material shall be reinforced with 70 percent vinylester resin similar to Atlac 711, DeraKane 510-A or Hetron 992 containing not less than 1 percent UV-9 plus 0.3 percent paraffin UV inhibitor and approximately 30 percent commercial grade glass fiber containing a coupling agent and 5 percent antimony trioxide or other suitable material as a fire retardant. The resin rich inner liner shall be reinforced with a single Nexus synthetic veil. The minimum inner liner thickness shall be 10 mils. The total corrosion barrier shall be a minimum of 100 mils and be applied by either the hand laid up, chopper gun or filament wound techniques. Chopper gun is only permitted if an automated process is used. Manual operation of the chopper gun s-hall not- be permitted. The glass content shall be 25% plus or minus 5% by weight. The structural layer shall be sufficient thickness to meet the minimum thickness requirements specified. The glass reinforcements shall be in accordance with the appropriate standards of construction. Structural layer shall be fabricated using either the hand laid up, filament wound technique or approved chopper gun technique. The exterior shall be reinforced using a single "A" glass veil with a layer of surfacing veil followed by a clear resin rich coating similar to the inner surface. Topcoat shall be parafinated to insure vessel "cure" is not air inhibited. After curing, top coat shall be sand blasted to provide a surface suitable for paint adhesion. All vessels shall be designed using a safety factor of 10 to 1 for pressure and 5 to 1 for vacuum. All design calculations must be sealed and signed by. a registrated professional engineer in the State of Texas. Design calculations must be submitted for record purposes. The vessels shall have bottom knuckle reinforcement and be designed for full hydrostatic head load. Each scrubber shall be furnished with an exhaust discharge stack and a sample line with a valve (3-1/2 feet above grade) to allow the measurement of the H 2 S level of the scrubber exhaust. Exterior surfaces shall have a factory applied epoxy enamel finish. All FRP construction shall be in accordance with the United States Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards, Voluntary Produce Standard PS-15-69 "Custom Contact Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical SE-7-6 tl 318-0205 Resistant Process Equipment" and ASTM D 4097 where applicable. All parts shall be amply proportioned for all stresses and ' conditions including 100 mph wind loading that may occur during continuous operation and for any additional stresses that may occur during fabrication or erection. �. D. Bed packing: The material used for the packed beds shall be filamentous toroidal helix shaped type packing of corrosion resistant polypropylene or other suitable material, of non -nesting type, suitable for use with acidic and basic scrubbing solutions. Packing material shall have 2 inch maximum size measured along the shortest dimension and a minimum surface area of 38 square feet per cubic foot of packing. Pressure drop per foot of depth of packing at 500 fpm shall not exceed 0.3 inches of water column. Supports shall be provided to assure structural integrity of the packing material. Support sections shall be removable through access doors. E. Demister section: The demister section shall be of polypropylene wire mesh material with top and bottom grids made of polypropylene. Wire mesh shall have minimum density of 4.0 lb/cu ft and surface area of 125.0 sq ft/cu ft. The demister section shall be capable of removing greater than 99.7 percent of all droplets 10 microns in diameter and larger. The demister section shall be constructed in sections with each section being able to pass through the top flange or the access hatch of the scrubber. F. Spray chamber: The spray chamber shall contain corkscrew type spray nozzles constructed of Teflon. All spray header piping and supports shall be -of corrosion resistant materials. Spray nozzle headers shall be adequately supported. Spray nozzle headers shall be flanged to the housing wall with the opening being large enough to allow the header to be withdrawn through the flanged opening. Spray nozzles shall be of appropriate numbers, sizes, and locations to provide even distribution of scrubbing solutions over the exposed packing surfaces at design scrubbant flow rates. The spray nozzles shall receive 150 gpm of recirculated scrubbant solution at a maximum inlet pressure of 15 psig. Nozzles shall be attached to the spray header with tee fittings. Tapping into the spray header is not acceptable. G. Access hatches: Access hatches shall be provided near the top and bottom of the main packed bed section and the top of the demister section to allow easy inspection, cleaning, and maintenance of the packing and demisting material. All access ONhatches shall be in easily accessible locations and coordinated with all ductwork and piping. All access hatches shall be designed to withstand all expected stresses including local wind loading and shall be corrosion resistant to acidic and basic scrubbant solutions. Access hatches shall be outfitted with removable, corrosion resistant panels, Type 316 stainless steel hardware, and EPDM gaskets. Acrylic panels are not suitable. 0 I SE-7-7 318-0205 H. Scrubbant collection sump: Each scrubber shall be provided with a Scrubbant collection sump integral with the scrubber housing, which shall provide a minimum of two feet of scrubbant depth or a 3-minute detention time, between the bottom of the air inlet connection and the scrubber housing bottom. An overflow connection shall be provided in the sump which shall prevent scrubbant level from rising above the bottom of the air .inlet under any anticipated liquid load conditions. Provide an internally sloped bottom for scrubber sump maintenance. Use epoxy resin suitable for hypochlorite and caustic service for sloped bottom construction. Minimum slope of bottom equals 1:24 toward sump drain. I. Exhaust stack: An exhaust stack shal'1 be provided on the scrubber exhaust. The stack shall be 5 feet in height and shall have a cone shaped outlet which causes the exhaust air velocity to be 4000 fpm at the design air flow. J. Scrubber basic design data: Depth of main bed tower packing shall be 10 feet-0 inch minimum. Tower diameter shall be 5 feet-O inch minimum, tower height 20 feet-0 inch maximum (excluding stack height), and stack height 5 feet-0 inches. K. Clearances: All equipment furnished under this section shall be suitable for installation as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for determining the necessary clearances and headroom required to move all equipment to its final location. L. Scrubber manufacturer: Provide scrubbers manufactured by one of the following: 1. The Ceilcote Company. 2. Chemco Engineering Company 3. Or equal. M. Packing manufacturer: .Provide packing material manufactured by one of the following: I. The Ceilcote Company; Type K Telleretes. 2. The Jaeger Company; TriPaks. 3. Or equal. SE-7.1.6 CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Connections: All necessary connections for piping, ladders, level indicators, the exhaust stacks, and ductwork shall be provided. All connections shall be flanged and gusseted with bolt holes (ANSI dimensions). Suitable gaskets shall be provided. At minimum, connections shall be provided for scrubber sump drain, scrubber sump overflow, recirculating scrubbant suction, scrubber sump chemical and make-up water addition, liquid level indicator, recirculating scrubbant feed (to main packed bed nozzle header), stack air sample, scrubber air intake sample, and scrubber air intake. Scrubber air intake shall be rectangular or circular. The connection openings shall WN 'a 1-1 SE-7-8 318-0205 be appropriately sized for the anticipated flows and service conditions. Minimum nozzle projection is to be six inches.for all gas and liquid handling nozzles. All connections shall be properly protected from damage during shipment from the factory to the site and during storage at site prior to the installation. All nuts, bolts, and washers utilized shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The connection openings shall be appropriately sized for the anticipated flows and service conditions and as shown in the schedule. All pipe connections shall be of the same material as the vessel and be gusset reinforced with strength requirements of 1500 foot-pounds of bending and 2000 foot-pounds of torque. Tank wall shall. be reinforced around all outlets. The drain connections shall be threaded. connections at the low point of the vessel. B. Scrubber' connection sizes and types shall be as specified below. Orientations shall be as shown on Drawing and/or on approved shop drawings. Connection (#) Size Type Air Inlet (1) 2411x108" Flanged Liquid Level Indicator (2) 3/4" Dia. Flanged Access Hatches (5) 18"x24" Flanged Chemical Addition and Make-up Water (1) 1" Dia. Flanged Recirc. Pump Suction and Spray Header (2) 3" Dia. Flanged Drain (1) 3" Dia. Threaded Overflow (1) 3" Dia: Flanged Sampling (2) 3/4" D'ia. Flanged. C. Supports: The housing shall be designed for full bottom support and shall be provided with a minimum'of 2 lifting lugs and a minimum of 4 hold down lugs.. All supports, lifting lugs, and hold down lugs shall be designed to account for all anticipated loads and shall comply with local code requirements. The scrubber housing and base shall be designed with ample supports so that the whole assembly including stack shall be self-supporting in any operating condition and shall be unaffected in prevailing wind velocities up to 100 miles per hour or as required by the local code, whichever value is greater. The whole assembly shall be suitable for outdoor installation and for year round weather conditions for the, City of Fort Worth, Texas. Structural computations shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. ISE-7-9 R 1 1 D. The scrubber manufacturer shall provide factory mounted pipe supports for recirculation piping and air sample line tubing. SE-7.1.7 SCRUBBER BLOWER AND APPURTENANCES A. General: Fiberglass reinforced plastic scrubber blower complete with motor, adjustable V-belt drive, guard, vibration isolators, weather cover, and coatings suitable for outdoor installation shall be provided of sufficient capacity for the duty required. The scrubber blower shall operate continuously, drawing odorous air from process areas and exhausting through the scrubber. Provide a 2-indh drop between bottom of blower and bottom of scrubber inlet to prevent scrubbant. from entering blower. Blower and motor shall meet OSHA noise standards for employee protection and shall produce no more than 4 db(A) noise level at all the plant property lines. Noise suppression enclosures which must be removed for maintenance or inspection will not be al 1 owed . B. Type: Class II construction single width, single inlet, backward curved impeller, centrifugal blower with fixed. discharge. Blower shall be tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE 51-75 and AMCA 210-74 Test Code, and be guaranteed by manufacturer to deliver rated performance. C. Housing: Corrosion resistant solid fiberglass reinforced vinylester with construction classification suitable for pressure range. The blower frame to blower housing connections shall be bolted with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and EPDM gaskets for airtight connections. Reinforced with Dow "Derakane 510-A," "Hetron 992" resin or approved equal. D. Blower wheel: Fiberglass reinforced polyester or equally corrosion resistant material. Steel hub encapsulated within impeller provides connection to drive shaft. E. Blower shaft: Shaft shall be of Type 316 stainless steel designed to operate below first critical speed. Shaft and impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Teflon mechanical seal between shaft and housing. F. Shaft bearing: Heavy duty, grease lubricated, sealed, self -aligning, frictionless ball bearings, B-10 minimum life rating. G. Blower impeller and driving pulley shall be secured to shaft with keys and set screws. H. Blower housing shall have flanged discharge and inlet drilled connections and companion flanges for inlet connections (ANSI dimensions). I. Appurtenances: Blower shall be supplied with inlet and outlet flexible connections, inlet box, and all required transitions and ductwork between the blower exhaust and the scrubber inlet. Transitions and ducts shall be FRP, of similar construction to the scrubber and blower housings. The transitions shall be designed with adequate slope to prevent liquid from flowing from the scrubber to the blower housing. SE-7-10 J. K. L. M. N. 0. P. Q. R. S. T. JP V. 318-0205 Capacity of the blower and appurtenances are shown in Schedule 7-1. Mounting: Shall be Arrangement 9, bottom horizontal discharge, clockwise or counterclockwise rotation suitable to specific location. Access doors: Stud mounted access doors with gaskets. Type 316 stainless steel studs shall be imbedded and encapsulated in FRP housing. Drains: Drains shall be provided at low point of scroll, 1-inch pipe coupling welded to housing with threaded corrosion resistant plug. Drive: V-belts and adjustable sheave pulleys shall be cast steel, sized for 1.2 service factor. Belt guard: Solid FRP construction with tachometer hole, OSHA approved. Vibration isolator for blower shall be a spring mounted inertia base and shall be selected to suit conditions and specifications. Metal blower parts coatings: Prepare metal surfaces as per Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-SP 5-63 white metal blast cleaning. Baked epoxy phenolic, "cold set" epoxy -phenolic amine cured, or vinylester brush or spray coats as per manufacturer's specifications. Weather cover shall protect shaft, bearings, motor, and drive. All portions of the blower wheel and housing shall be coated with graphite. The blower housing shall be grounded. Product and manufacturers: Provide blowers as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Ceilcoat Company, Model CMHB-30, Class II or equal. 2. New York Blower Company. 3. Or approved Blower inlet box: Engineered FRP inlet box for 90 degree turn into scrubber blower, where required. 1. Product and manufacturer: Provide blower inlet box as manufactured by one of the following: a. New York Blower Company. b. Ceilcote Company. c. - Or equal. 2. Construction: Fiberglass reinforced vinylester or equally corrosion resistant material. 3. Hardware: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 4. Flange: ANSI drilling to match blower inlet. 5. Inlet box shall be furnished by blower manufacturer. 6. Static pressure drop factors shall also be supplied. Plenum Box: Provide an engineered plenum for mounting inlet boxes. Plenum shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced vinylester or equally resistant material for the conditions of service. Include a pressure tight, 24-inch flanged manway, vacuum relief, and provisions for drainage. SE-7-11 318-0205 A minimum of three 54-inch, square low leakage, vacuum relief dampers are to be provided. Design to relieve vacuum in a stepped fashion with the following individual initial settings: -11" wg, -15" wg, -19" wg. All dampers shall have relief adjustment settings ranges of -9" to 23" wg by use of a constant force Series 300 stainless steel spring. Dampers shall be by American Warming and Ventilating Model BD-70 (custom modified), or approved equal., with Type 316 stainless steel blades, frames, axles, and other parts exposed to air stream. All other parts shall be Series 300 stainless steel suitable for outdo.or exposure. Equip damper blades with dual durometer elastometer seals and jambs with EPT sponge seals. All seals shall be suitable for use in wet hydrogen sulfide atmosphere. Provide a detachable fiberglass reinforced plastic weatherhood mounted to plenum to protect damper from driven rain, equip inlet with Type 316 stainless steel bird screen. Provide a drainage sump system as generally shown on the Drawings to drain accumulated condensate from plenum. Provide plenum with a sloped floor to ensure full drainage to sump. SE-7.1.8 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Furnish fabric reinforced elastomer flexible duct connections for vibration elimination on inlet and exhaust of scrubber blower as specified in Section 9. SE-7.1.9 RECIRCULATION PUMPS A. General: A chemical solution recirculation pump complete with motor, coupling, guard, and base shall b.e provided of sufficient capacity for the duty. required. --The recirculation pump shall provide continuous recirculation of scrubbing liquid from the scrubber sump to the main packed bed spray nozzle header. B. Type: The recirculation pumps shall be horizontal, end suction, centrifugal type designed in accordance with ANSI specification B73.1. The pumps shall be equipped with flanged suction and discharge ports (ANSI dimensions). C. Construction materials: All wetted parts shall be glass -reinforced vinylester. Shaft shall be stainless steel. Bearings shall be oil lubricated, ANSI B73.1. Casing 0-ring shall be Viton A. Clean water flushed. Provide needle valve and pressure gage on stuffing box outlet. Pipe flush water to drain. D. Capacity: The scrubber manufacturer shall be responsible for verifying the total dynamic head required for each scrubber installation (See Schedule 7-1 for capacity). E. Product and manufacturer: Provide a pump manufactured by Fybroc Division, Metpro Corporation, Ingersoll Rand, Type GRP, or approved equal. Seals shall be John Crane 8-1-T double or SE-7-12 318-0205 Durametallic RXO double. Seal face material shall be silicon carbide vs. silicon carbide. Rotating metal parts shall be 316 stainless steel. All elastomers for seals to be EPR/EPT, Duraflow or Kalrez. Arrange seals for potable water flushing. SE-7.1.10 MOTORS A. The following description applies to both Scrubber Blower and Recirculation Pump Motors. 1. Totally enclosed blower cooled, solid shaft, ball bearing, energy efficient type with Class F insulation.. 2. Motor shall be in accordance with all current applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, AFBMA, NEC, and ANSI. 3. Motor shall be normal starting torque, normal slip, squirrel cage induction type. 4. Motor. shall be capable of carrying full load current continuously without injurious temperature rise in an ambient temperature of 50 C. 5. Motor shall be provided with a service factor of 1.15. 6. Motor shall be of sufficient size so that there will be no overload on the motor above rated nameplate horsepower under any condition of operation from shut-off to zero head, unless otherwise specifically permitted in this specification. 7, Motor thrust bearings shall be adequate to carry continuous thrust loads under all conditions of blower operation. 8. Locked rotor currents shall be as specified in NEMA standards. 9. Lubrication may be grease or oil.type. 10. Provide internal motor protection (Thyristors, etc.) four motorts 50-hp and larger. Provide monitors and mount in motor J-boxes. 11. All motor frames shall have integral strip type heaters operating on 120 volts, single phase power supply. B. Product and manufacturer: Motors shall be high efficiency design as manufactured by: Westinghouse Electric Corporation, . Type TEE II, Reliance Electric, Type XE, General Electric Energy Saver, or approved equal. C. Motor starters: Refer to electrical specifications in Section 12. D. Spare motors: Provide one spare motor for each size under 50 hp. Provide one spare motor for each size over 50 hp which is suitably packaged and crated for warehouse storage. SE-7.1.11 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM A. General: Chemical feed systems for storing and transferring potassium permanagnate solution, 15 percent solution of sodium hypochlorite or 20 percent solution .of caustic soda shall be provided. See Section SE-7.1.1.17 for control description. . 91 5E-7-13 318-0205 B. Major Units: Chemical storage tanks with heater systems, level detection and indication system with loading area control panel, chemical metering pumps, and all related appurtenances. SE-7.1.12 STORAGE TANKS A. Storage tanks construction and materials: The storage tank shall be of fiberglass reinforced vinylester. Construction and material.s shall be similar to scrubbers. The tanks associated with the chemical feed systems shall be vertical and cylindrical in shape with flat bottom and dished head and shall be designed to contain potassium permanaganate or sodium hydroxide having a specific gravity of approximately 1.53, 50 percent concentration, and a weight of approximately 12.8 pounds per gallon or sodium hypoch.lorite at 15 percent. Material shall be reinforced with premium vinylester resin similar to DeraKane 510-A or Hetron 992 containing not less than 1 percent UV-9 lus 0.3 percent paraffin UV inhibitor. Interior surfaces the surfaces exposed to sodium hypochlorite environment) shall be a resin -rich double Nexus synthetic veil made of 2 (10 to 20 mils thick) layers. In addition, Nexus non -glass interior surface shall be used. Tank material shall be resistant to chemical reagents referenced in Section SE-7.1.1. Tanks shall be suitable for outdoor service at ambient temperature from 3 F to 110 F. Additionally, tanks shall be suitable to withstand temperature rise and heat release from the dilution of 50 percent NaOH concentration to 20 percent NaOH concentration with water. As a minimum, tanks shall be designed for a temperature of 140°F. The tank shall be suitable for 100 mph wind load when empty, 24 inch snow load and two 250. pound concentrated top loads. B. Storage tank, accessories 1. FRP lifting lugs. 2. FRP hold down lugs. 3. An unsealed 24-inch ID hinged access manway, with lifting handle. 4. Connections: Refer to drawings for specific sizes and locations. All outlets shall be flanged step faced with smooth surface. Flange drill'ing shall conform to ANSI B16.5, Class 125. All outlets shall be gusset reinforced with strength requirements of 1,500 foot-pounds of bending and 2,000 foot-pounds of torque. Tank wall shall be reinforced around all outlets. Allow for insulation. The fill and air mix for each tank shall have a drop pipe supported from the interior of the tank extending to a point 9 inches from the tank bottom. All nozzles shall be constructed of CPVC. 5. Ladders and cages as specified. SE-7-14 318-0205 6. Ground flange: Supply 316 stainless steel grounding flange in tank with ground wire connector outside of tank for level probe. 7. Refer to Section 7.1.16 for FRP tolerances. C. Storage tank, certification. label: A stainless steel nameplate mounted-5 feet-O inch above the bottom of the tank at a point accessible to view at the front of the tank shall be provided and show the following: 1. Corrosion resistant liner resin material, exterior resin, and date manufactured. 2. Type of interior surface reinforcement. 3. Chemical to be stored including concentration, specific gravity, maximum temperature, and tank capacity. 4. Tank number. D. The storage tank shall be factory painted by the manufacturer. (See SE-6.1.10). E. Test of storage tank 1. The tank shall be tested by filling with water to overflow prior to being. placed in service. The tank shall remain full for 48.hours and there shall be no leaks, however small. Any leak shall be repaired by a manufacturer's factory -trained serviceman with reinforcing and resin to match the tank and the repaired surface shal"1 be equal in strength and corrosion resistance to the original tank material. Test air mix system while tanks are full of water. 2. All materials, labor, and equipment for the above test and retest shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. This will not, however, relieve the CONTRACTOR from repairing leaks that may appear when the tanks are filled with the required scrubbing chemical. F. Tank manufacturer: Provide tank manufactured by Bel co Manufacturing Co., Ceilcote, Owens Corning,'or approved equal. SE-7.1.13 STORAGE TANK LADDERS AND CAGES A. Ladders and cages: Provide ladder with safety cage for each tank. Safety cage is required for each ladder. FRP 1 adders , walk-thrus, and cages comply with OSHA pp. 1910.27 entitled "Fixed Ladders," and shall be able to withstand a 1,200 pound vertical concentrated load at midspan of a rung. Ladders shall utilize channel side rails and 1 3/8-inch minimum diameter flat safety tread rungs both of special high -modulus fiberglass composition. Rung to side rail connections shall utilize a keyed, pinned, and bonded joint for positive prevention of rung rotation and pull out. The ladder shall be entirely non-metallic, with the exception of spliced and mounting fasteners which shall be 316 stainless steel. Standoff clips shall be provided at every 6 feet (or increment) of ladder height. In lieu of the safety cage, fabricators may supply ladders with' the SAF-T-Climb fall prevention system by Siebe Norton, Inc. SE-7-15 318-0205 B. Material of construction for ladders and cages shall be pultruded structural fiberglass shapes utilizing a synthetic surfacing veil for chemical and ultraviolet resistance, and special high -modulus pultrusion process for strength. Minimum glass content shall be 60 percent, comprising both longitudinal strands and continuous strand mat so aligned as to prevent splitting due to laminar shear. The FRP shapes. shall possess Class I fire retardance, with an ASTM E-84 flame -spread rating of 25 maximum. Color shall be safety yellow. Fiberglass pultruded parts shall have in the following properties: Ultimate Tensile Strengh: 30,000 psi Ultimate Compressive Strength: J0,000 psi Modulus of Elasticity: 3.0 X 10 Barcol Hardness: 50 C. Fabrication shall not proceed until approval of shop drawings. Ladders and cages shall be supplied completely assembled, ready for installation. All cut edges and holes shall be sealed with compatible resin material. Each unit must be tagged with the manufacturer's drawings and part number for ease of field installation. Ladders and cages shall be shipped from the manufacturer's plant in fully enclosed crates to prevent damage in shipment. .D. Acceptable manufacturer: IMCO Reinforced Plastics, Inc., or approved equal. SE-7.1.14 STORAGE TANKS HEATER SYSTEMS A. Heat Trace System: 1. Scope: An electric heater system shall be provided for each chemical storage tank(2). The system shall be cable type capable of maintaining a thermostatically controlled set temperature of 60°F for NaOH and 40°F for NaOC1 in the stored fluid when ambient temperature drops to 0°F. 2. Related Documents: Refer to Section SE-8.9, Heat Trace Systems, for applicable sections pertaining to Codes and Regulations and Quality Assurance, Submittals Accessories and Installation. 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with minimum requirements, provide heat trace sytsems as manufactured by Thermon Manufacturing Company or approved equal. 4. Heat Trace Cable: a. Cable shall be Type FP-MC-BS-OJ or approved equal. b. Type: Flat flexible constant watt, parallel circuiting construction heating cable with an integral third wire element -for continuity monitoring. The cable, along with insulation, overjacketing, and all components shall provide a complete functional system. 5E-7-16 318-0205 c. Construction: The heater cable assembly shall consist of two (2) parallel AWG 12, nickel -plated copper bus wires, a Nichrome wire heating element and a third wire element for continuity monitoring. A semi -conductive PTC polymer is extruded over and between these parallel conductors, forming an electrically conductive web. A single insulating jacket is then extruded over the heating element' core. The heater assembly shall be covered with stainless steel braid. An additional covering of insulated jacket shall cover the braid to aid in protection from corroding the metallic braid. d. The heater cables must be ca-pable of being cut to desired length to suit conditions at installation. The cable must form a continuous heating circuit. The heater cables shall be capable of maintaining maximum recommended temperatures, and withstand continuous exposure temperatures, as outlined below, without permananent damage to the matrix core. Maximum maintenance temperature: +150°F Maximum continuous exposure temperature: +400°F Minimum installation temperature: -60OF e. Voltage 480 volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz. 5. Thermostat: Thermostat shall be double pole, single -throw type, rated for 30 amps at 250 volts, mounted in thermostat control unit enclosure which shall be stainless steel NEMA 4X. Thermostat shall have adjustable range of 35°F to 95°F with a 1/4" x 6" capillary in flexible stainless steel armor. Capillary, bulb, and armor shall have PVC coating. 6. Hi -limit temperature switch: Temperature switch shall de -energize heating coil upon rise in ' temperature of fluid above 50OF (adjustable). Temperature switch shall be adjustable, set point between 0°F and 75°F, automatic reset, single pole, single throw, normally closed. Capillary sensing bulb and enclosure shall be similar to thermostat specified in this section. 7. Panel: Provide a stainless steel, NEMA 4X, enclosure containing: a. Necessary 20 amp, 480-volt, load circuit breakers in NEMA 1 enclosures, control transformers, etc. b. Thermon "MCCP" alarm panel for continuity monitoring of cables. Alarm panel shall have the necessary alarm circuits with provisions for four spare circuits complete with alarm indicat6r lights and engraved nameplates for each circuit. 8. Accessories: Refer to applicable section of Section SE-8.9. SE-7-17 318-0205 9. Installation: Refer to applicable section to Section SE-8.9. B. Insulation: 1. Scope: Provide insulation for each chemical storage tank (2) as indicated. 2. Submittals: a. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data for approval. b. Samples: Submit sample insulation for approval. 3. Insulation Material: a. Thickness: 2 inches minimum. b. Materials: Foamglas (curved se ments as required as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning). c. Protective coating: 100 mil thick fiberglass laminate (with gel coat) or other suitable material resistant to caustic soda, sodium hypochlorite and potassium permanganate. SE-7.1.15 LEVEL DETECTING AND INDICATION SYSTEM (LE/LIT) A. Level detecting system for each storage tank shall be as specified in Section SE-11. B. Loading area control panel 1. The electronic unit, level indicating meter, and electronic trip relay shall be installed in a NEMA 4X enclosure. 2. The electronic unit circuitry shall be of solid state construction. Signal output of the unit shall be an isolated 4-20 madc. The electronic circuitry shall be suitable for operation on 120 volt, single phase power. . 3. The level indicating meter shall be capable of receiving a 4-20 madc signal .proportional to tank 1 evel . The meter scale shall be not less than 4-1/2-inches long and shall be graduated from 0 to 24 feet. C. Manufacturer: See Section 11.4 for manufacturer. SE-7.1.16 Storaqe Tank and Scrubber Inspections The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all items of equipment found to have the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, dry cracks, burned areas, dry spots, foreign matter, or entrapped air at the laminate surfaces which do not satisfy the tolerances specified in the following table: SE-7-18 318-0205 ALLOWABLE FRP PRODUCT TOLERANCES Defect Inside surface Outside surface Blisters None Maximum dimensions: 1/4"dia. x 1/8" high Maximum density: 1/SF Minimum separation: 2„ Chips None Maximum dimension of break: 1/8"dia.x 1/32" deep Maximum density: 3/SF Crazing None Maximum length: 1/2" Maximum density: 5/SF Maximum separation: 211 Cracks None None Exposed glass None None Scratches None Maximum length: 4" Maximum depth: 0.010" Burned areas None None Surface porosity None None Foreign matter None Max. 1/8"dia. Sharp None None discontinuity Pitting Maximum dimension: 1/8" diameter x Maximum dimensions: 1/32" depth 1/8" x 1/16" depth Maximum density: 10/SF Maximum density: 10/SF Dry spots None 2 sq in./sq ft SE-7-19 318-0205 ALLOWABLE FRP PRODUCT TOLERANCES Defect Inside surface Outside surface Entrapped air None at surface within laminate Maximum size and Maximum size: 1/16" diameter density: Maximum Density: 10/SF 1/8" diameter and 4/sq ft or 1/16" diameter and 10/sq ft Sags and None Maximum depth: depressions 1/16" Maximum area/ sq ft SE-7.1.17 CHEMICAL FEED CONTROLS A. A complete. control system shall be furnished for the chemical feed system. The control system shall consist of pH sensing element and transmitter, and microprocessor analyzer. B. The chemical feed controls shall operate as follows: The pH transmitter shall energize the chemical transfer pumps when pH level reaches low set point and de -energize the caustic metering pumps when pH level reaches high set point. (See SE-11.4.5.) C. pH transmitter and sensing element 1. The pH transmitter and sensing element shall be designed for sodium hypochlorite, potassium permanganate, or. sodium hydroxide service. The sensing element and pre -amplifier mounting shall be of the flow -through type, and shall include reference and measuring electrode, an automatic temperature compensating element and a solid state pre -amplifier, plus cable of type and quantity necessary to make the connections to the transmitter. The mounting assembly shall provide for ease of access to the electrode for cleaning and, when needed, their replacement. 2. Replacement of electrodes shall be possible without the use of tools. The range of the sensor shall be 9-14 pH. 3. The transmitter shall be 120 volt AC powered and be of the same manufacture as the sensor and pre -amplifier. The unit shall be furnished in a NEMA 4X enclosure and mounted on a stainless steel support frame near each scrubber. The output of the unit shall be isolated 4-20 madc and have an SE-7-20 �h 318-0205 integral meter of 4 inches minimum diameter (or LED or LCD display). Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.2 pH units, sensitivity 0.05 pH units, and stability 0.1 pH units per year. Temperature compensation . shall be automatic and compatible with the sensor. temperature compensator element in th.e 4. Manufacturer: The pH controls shall be manufactured by Leeds and Northrup, Model 7083 (microprocessor anlayzer) and Model 7758 (electrode and transmitter) or approved equal. SE-7.1.18 SCRUBBANT FEED PUMPS A. Metering pumps: Pumps shall be of the positive displacement pulsating piston/diaphragm type, constructed of a material fully suitable to handle sodium hypochlorite, potassium permanganate, and sodium hydroxide. Pumps shall be suitable for operation on 480 volts, 3-phase, 60-Hertz power. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed and not less than 1/3 horsepower. Pump capacity.shall be as indicated in Schedule 7-1. Each pump shall have a manual stroke posi.tioner for adjustment of the stroke length. The positioner shall be capable of varying the pump feed rate over a minimum range of 10 to 100 percent of maximum feed rate. B. Include with each pump a pulsation dampener, a pressure relief valve, a back pressure regulating valve, a calibrating cylinder graduated in 0.02-gallon increments, and other items required for a complete system. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Wallace & Tiernan; 2. Pulsafeeder; 3. Or approved equal. SE-7.1.19 SUMP LEVEL INDICATOR AND LIMIT SWITCH (LI/LG/L'SL) A. A level indicator shall be provided for each scrubber and shall be suitable for side of vessel mounting and designed for chemicals used in scrubber including sodium hypochlorite and caustic soda service. Fitted' limit switch for low level pump B. shut-off shall be provided. Mount 9 inches above bottom of sump. Type:' The float, containing a magnet, follows the liquid level in the float chamber. Level of the float shall be magnetically transmitted to the limit switch which has been set. at a predetermined set point. C. Required features: 1. Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 mm of measured value. 2. Operations pressure: 36-inches water. 3. Temperature: -20 C to 120 C. Factory insulate and heat trace. 4. Mounting position: Vertical. SE-7-21 318-0205 5. End construction: Flanged. Bottom drain plug. Two flanged isolation ball valves shall be provided. 6. Limit switch: Mercury wetted power switch. Contacts 3A/120 VAC. Attached by clamp. 7. Material of construction: Process wetted parts shall be type 316 stainless steel with PTFE lining. Float shall be hard glass. 8. Automatic reset. 9. Factory insulated float chamber with perspex window. 10. Conduit mounting kit. 11. Factory heat trace equipment. D. Manufacturer: Krohner Type BM-26/NR/PTFE/TR with MS-21 limit switch, or approved equal. SE-7.1.20 MANOMETER A. General: A differential -type manometer shall be furnished and installed to measure the air pressure at the inlet to the scrubber. The manometer shall be constructed of material suitable for use in contact with gaseous scrubber and at the outlet flange of the scrubber environment as indicated in the operating conditions. B. Required -features 1. Direct reading, 12-0-12 inches of water, "U" column instrument with no hidden wells or packing glands. 2. Constructed of shatter proof, clear plastic tubing with leak -proof glued joints. Well assembly precisely machined from solid acrylic plastic. 3. Heavy plastic white scales with hot stamped black figures. Heavy, heat treated aluminum back plate. 4. Liquid shall be red gage oil, sp gr. 0.826. 5. Two 1/8-inch pipe thread openings. 6. 35-linear feet of Tygon plastic tubing. C. Installation 1. Install with all 316 stainless steel hardware as per manufacturers instructions. Mount on scrubber. D. Manufacturer: Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Model 1223-24D, Type C connections, or approved equal. SE-7.1.21 AIR MIX, BLOWERS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide rotary positive displacement blowers to provide air to mix solution in chemical tanks. B. Major components to include, but not limited to the following: 1. Blower. 2. Base frame. 3. Electric motor. (See SE-7.1.10 for requirements). 4. Matched belts and sheaves with belt guard. 5. Intake filter and silencer/discharge silencer. 6. Acoustical enclosure. SE-7-22 1 318-0205 7. Accessories as described elsewhere in this section. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Flow: 115 scfm per unit. 2. Differential Pressure: 15 psi. 3. Speed: 2800 rpm. 4. Horsepower: 10-hp motor, minimum. D. Operating Conditions: 1. Blowers are located on the chemical storage pad 2. Outside air is drawn into blower. 3. Design blowers for minimum 10°F temperature rise ambient outside air conditions or as required by blower heat generation. 4. Ambient outside air conditions: a. Temperature: 100°F. b. Relative humidity: 95 percent. c. Elevation: Approximately 500 feet above mean sea E. Blower Design and Construction Requirements: 1. Casing: a. Material: Gray cast iron. b. Piping connections: Flanged. 2. Impeller and Shaft: a. Construct from a common ductile iron casting. b. Impeller: 1) Dynamically balanced two -lobe type. 2) Match for close operating tolerances. above actual level . 3) Operate without rubbing, liquid seals or lubrication, positively timed. c. Gears: 1) Helical type. 2) Hardened, precision ground steel. 3) Use tapered gear shafts to accommodate a press -on securing of the gear and to facilitate removal. d. Lubrication: 1) Bearings: Splash lubricated. 2) Seals: Provide piston -ring -type labryinth seals to totally seal between rotor chamber and all bearing and housing oil sumps. e. Cooling: Convection. 3. Drive Unit: a. Use sheaves and matched V-belts to provide required blower speed. b. Manufacturer to determine size and number of sheaves and belts. c. Provide personnel protection guard over V-belts in compliance with OSHA requirements. 4. Base Frame: a. Construct of welded structural steel. b. Design to support each blower, motor and all accessories as completely assembly. SE-7-23 318-0205 c. Provide four -corner antivibration mountings designed for mounting on concrete slab. 5. Acoustical Enclosure: a. Provide acoustical enclosure to totally cover each blower assembly. b. Louver to move inlet air across blower housing for cooling purposes. c. Provide insulation on interior surfaces of the hood sufficient to achieve noise reduction levels specified elsewhere in section. d. Equip louvers with exterior rain shields and coarse screen closures to protect from airborne debris. e. Construct enclosure of minimum gauge galvanized sheet metal. f. Equip enclosure with one or more removable panels. 6. Manufacturer: 1) Roots Model RAI4, Size 42 blower, 2 Or equal. 7. Accessories: a. Silencers and Filter: 1) Provide a combination dry pleated paper type intake filter and silencer mounted on blower intake flange. 2) Provide a discharge silencer mounted on the blower discharge flange and supported from the base frame. 3) Size of silencers and filters to be selected by manufacturer, compatible with equipment provided. 4) Inlet Filter and Silencer Manufacturer: a) Solberg VI, b) Or equal. 5) Inlet and Discharge Silencer Manufacturer: a) Universal URB 1-1/2", b) Or equal. b. Valves: 1) Check Valve: Mount on outlet end of discharge silencer. a) Technocheck 1-1/2", b) Or equal. 2) Pressure relief valve spring type set at 15 psig: a) Adjustable relief pressure. b) Mount ahead of or attached to inlet end of discharge silencer. c) Function: To protect motor against overload from excessively high pressure. c. Manifold Piping: 1) Provide a rubber sleeve following the check valve to furnish a clamping connection with manifold piping. 2) Manifold piping and valves to be provided to chemical storage tanks. Provide type 316 stainless steel air piping as referenced in Section 8. SE-7-24 �J 318-0205 3) Provide a manual blowoff valve and silencer allow varying of air supply volume to chemical tanks. F. Manufacturer: McKenzie Equipment Company, Model 4-788-91. SE-7.1.22 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CHEMICAL UNLOADING PANEL A. General: Provide an instrument panel and chemical unloading panel for the control and monitoring of the chemical storage system, scrubbant feed pumps, air mix blowers, scrubbers, scrubbant recirculation pumps, and associated systems. Provide indication of alarm conditions via alarm logic relays and transmit to the existing RTU. Instrument panel and chemical unloading panel shall be constructed in accordance with Section SE-11.3. Control and monitoring system shall be in accordance with the Drawings and other -sections of the specifications and as required to comprise a complete and operating system. i Reference is made but not limited to the process and -- instrumentation diagrams and to the electrical drawings. B. Functional and Operation Descriptions: In addition to the requirements of SE-7.1.3, submittals, submitted. for approval written function and operational descriptions, in outline format, for scrubber systems (including auxiliary systems). SE-7.1.23 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS A. Furnish all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair, and adjust the equipment and supply one year's supply of all recommended lubricants. B. The scrubber spare parts shall include: �. 1. Enough demister material for one scrubber. 2. Thermostat for storage tank heaters. 3. Storage tank level sensor with electronic unit. 4. One complete ph control system. 5. Scrubber sump level indicator and limit switch. 6. Two sets of gaskets for all gasketed covers and connections. 7. Two sets of spray nozzles. 8. One set of internal bolts and fasteners for wetted services. 9. Ten percent extra scrubber packing. 10. One set of spare bolts for each blower. 11. One set of replacement bearings for each blower. 12. One replacement Teflon mechanical seal for each blower. 13. Other spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturers. 14. 50 linear feet - Grade 1162 neoprene gasket material, 12" x 1/2" thick. 15. 20 linear feet - 3" x.1/4" aluminum plate. 16. 20 linear feet - 3" x 2" x 1/4" aluminum angle. SE-7-25 318-0205 C. Spare parts and tools shall be properly packed, labeled, and stored where directed by the ENGINEER. D. Furnish list of solvents for cleaning dirt, grease and oil from surfaces of non-metal parts. SE-7.1.24 WIRING A. All wiring and conduit between power sources, the odor control panel, and the loading area control panel, and all wiring and conduit between the control panels, equipment and operated devices required for the odor control system shall be, unless specified in this section, furnished by others. SE-7.1.25 PAINTING A. All blowers frames, pumps, motors, piping, and baseplates shall be painted with an epoxy finish equivalent to that specified below. B. Pumps, motors, drives, frames, baseplates, appurtenances, etc., shall, receive a coat of the manufacturer's standard finish paint system prior to shipment and be additionally field painted as described. C. Scrubber transitions shall be factory painted in accordance with paint system specified in section SE-6.1.10 below. D. Prepare all surfaces to be painted with sandpaper, sand blasting, or solvent cleaning as required. E. All piping, equipment such as, scrubber, pumps, blower, materials specified above including FRP surfaces shall be painted in accordance with SE-6.1.10. F. Machined, polished and non-ferrous surfaces shall be coated with corrosion prevention compound. SE-7.1.26 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY A. Deliver all equipment specified to the job site in suitable packing and free of damage or defects. B. Use proper procedures for offloading, storage, and maintenance of equipment. SE-7.1.27 START-UP ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING A. Lubricate bearings if required prior to starting scrubber blower and pumps. B. Check for -proper shaft rotation. C. Adjust scrubber blower and pumps for proper alignment and flow. D. Check for proper belt tension. E. Conduct performance tests as described. F. Leave entire system in working order. SE-7-26 318-0205 SE-7.1.28 OPERATION SERVICES A. In addition to the manufacturer's standard guarantee, the CONTRACTOR shall include the services of the manufacturer's factory trained servicemen to supervise or perform the following services: 1. Monitor and advise the general contractor in installation of the complete odor control system. 2. Initial start-up of the odor control system. 3. Placing system into full operation. 4. Final performance testing and adjusting of all components. 5. Instructing the OWNER's treatment plant operators in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the systems and equipment. The manufacturer's instruction services shall be for a maximum of three working days exclusive of travel, and for such additional times as may be required for the performance tests. All required time shall be.included in the bid price. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the per diem charges,of the ..service representative if additional service is required due to improper installation or if he fails to have proper ro forces on hand during a scheduled service call. P P 9 6. An inspection once every three months for the first twelve months after the OWNER'S acceptance to assure that proper operation, greatest efficiency and lowest operation expenses are. being realized. An inspection report shall be submitted to the OWNER within 30 days following each inspection. 7. Certifying all performance tests and assist the OWNER in obtaining all required system approvals and operating permits from all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 8. Provide written certification from• an independent test laboratory that the installation is in accordance with y performance requirements. 318-0205 SCHEDULE 7-1 TABLE OF DESIGN PARAMETERS AND EQUIPMENT BY LOCATION Parameter equipment Value Number: 4 Scrubber Unit: 62, 63, 64, 65 Odor Source: H 2 S Ventilation: Summer (cfm) 46,000 Winter (cfm) 23,000 Design H2S Conc: Summer (ppm) 50 Winter (ppm) 20 Maximum (ppm) 100 Scrubber Blowers: Number 4 Blower Speed (rpm) 820/410 System Static Pressure (inch H20) 5-10 Scrubber Pressure Drop (inch H2O at 46,000 cfm) 5 Blower Motor (hp) 100 Blower Motor Speed (rpm) (high/low) 1,750/875 Recirculation Pumps: Number 6 Flow (gpm) 460 TDH (ft) 65 Motor (hp) 25 Speed (rpm) 1;750 Scrubbant NaOH Chemical Storage: Location Outside Tanks (No.) 2 Tanks (gal) 20,235 Delivered Conc. (90) 50 Stored Conc. (%) 20 Feed Conc. (%) 5 Tank Height (ea) 24'-0" Tank Diameter (ea) 12'-0" SE-7-28 318-0205 SCHEDULE 7-1 TABLE OF DESIGN PARAMETERS AND EQUIPMENT BY LOCATION Parameter equipment Value Scrubbant Feed Pumps: Number 5 Feed Rate (gph) at back pressure settting of 50 psig 16.8 Demister for extraction percent of droplets 10 micron diameter or larger 99.7 Maximum Demister emission lb/hour of caustic with the 'recirculation solution's pH of 11 .072 Air Mixer Blowers Number 2 Capacity (cfm) 115 Discharge Pressure (psi) 15 Motor (minimum hp) 10 Notes: (1) Scrubber blowers shall be Class II. (2) Blower and recirculation pumps shall be 480/3/60 electrical power. Blower motors are two -speed. (3) Scrubbant feed pumps shall be 120/1/60 electrical power. END OF SECTION SE-7-29 The PERFORMANCE CURVE - n h NewYork 8 l over Compeny CUSTOMER' 5 NO N602@ I TO DETERMINE PERFORMANCE CUSTOMER QUALL INDUSTRIES AT ANOTHER RPM MULTIPLY: TAGGING #T8271 1--CFM x K SIZE 60 TYPEFUME EXHAUSTER -MP 2-5P x K2 46000 CFM AT !0 "SP AT 70 F. 3-BHP x K3 WHERE K 15 NEW RPM DIVIDED AT 851 RPM AT 104.6 BHP BY RPM SHOWN AT RIGHT. FILE NO. E-6509R ORTE June 28, 1989 Effects of Inlet Box included. 16 ; �- 160 LLJ ! j Q 14 � I ! j 140 w CE + - rj- -120 Ld �- - -- --- - --` ,- -_ z w 6 60 //zj CC j --! i 14 i_— 40 2 ■ I J I J J 20 i 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 60000 CFM _----------- -- tY0',Y YOfk ti10wer FILE }i0. E06SON 150 DETROIT Custo-ar Qrd4r t N60201 Sp 001001 Offico Rvftri-nco # 100"188.03 Cato - 11/29/89 Arau�rr" s •4 Curves - 4 oi"nt Mpznoafs -4 e� - Sa Fd to - 295066 DUkLL � OII�ISICIra Ship to �,'�L� "�` C' r_ 700 S !$: MILLr.'� {r�i��i ovi!s1fol 4fa0550 N1 4 867 700 Ship Via • Freight Terris , CCX Collect _ - FG6 Ship Palnt TVITEM -I �T8271 � 01Y 2 576C��+xx- ;ac.0-R'3 2 Ct1.Em S ZE 60 FRP I�LtI=--f)(HALISTER, FRP-MCEL, FC-OILgl fR€SSURE, /�R 1 33340:00 .: 6APACITIES cFm SP RPM W-F DEG MESS' - 'AL T � .. STO, .46000 10 861 106 70 2 125 W 25PD 18OO/900 RP}l,-:3-60.460 V. , TEFC VA:L , , Fes„"�Z '444 T :00 _ �- t.4Q i. �3x - -- l .11Ih'Q�}aG t/A.4I+�LE tOw7Ql1E Ht)t _ � MOTOR N,* !'10l.RdTING 8Y 00STO . _� - OTY - 2 6957VBD Z' A07 V-SEL.T ArVE- F'Eti OI #2S.48 • 1779.0) 3SSS.00 1.00000 3 SS.OQ QT�' 2•. 5760RAC + *!G`0 INLET '�.� - t 348.00 696.00 40808 FLA. q . ii 4 Ir1LET/OUTLET FLNa- DRILLIN3, 1 8.00592.00 74t808 a � T&Lni fl6 . �.�� ���_�=.,I,�;:;.��� JIC�L�r�iLirC - �'= •.,� � Y �M1' .yJ. ����'�4JJ- J -QTr 2 5ib 3arr t.. _ 2 ADO TO, FURNISH ,A I •110�M t PT FRP URAIN WITH PLUS P ai SFI'S #2555 -1 , 150.00 300.00 40808 t • 2 IN`SKMON PORT 360.00 z 5 7620.00 .40808 � -2_ INLET SOX, 90 DEG WITH GRA.PHiIWRE&OTIGN 36Sa.0 2732�' 5. 00oo W .PO qWTATIC GRW.C� 0IM BY RrI'81 TE lFPREGNV IQN r'? 972.00 1544.00 .40803 . I GT'BELT DA90 �1788.p0 23576.U0,]k40808 9t.c�aa�U; OTY, 2 5760(-DG ` 2 GT SKVT 'AN0 BE&RINrj OJIN30 466.00 932.00 LMOS 4TY - 2 t7b r .2 VilfMY BASE --QITH SPRIPA3 TYPE, EFf)XY V,w%tU_L COATED �-2598.00 Si96.00 .�10$0 'cC�L�f,tTlNt.�0) CRUEfi TOTr,t ';� ReTarK%-� VISEO TOSEWJC%E BASSES /���) RELEASE. SEE P.H. MATHI5 1,BCPUT Ih�.FT �t�i�r2D ��`fI� !��''+'� `�a1m''gl. # _ ,lull) � New York Blower FILE M. ::ems -'; testa-,�r Ordar N*0201 001001 R forcncv 1 MgS8-03 Ost4 11/29/69 -------- l--------- ---- 23 B - OLVIL L 61V I S I ON �\ ------_---- - 01Y 2. Sa I35E- 2 G0,1T L C a Til_MA 5 Ti9 L�55 7 2, �!�_, �I2�c3.t�C Sy52.ix]"�-,d:`w,`o` E8t?x tT _ - QTY ... 2 . �.i ],T 2 P S_EN Y C t`F:�TTfA_. F'lt,r �� �� MOO 11'aS.00 r16Sru3.co 33-0.00 M2 �mItiG Y1Etl-��.iTB271------------------------------•....-----•----------- •--- - - - - -- .----TY-:----�-------'5760.. 2 CCU# 1i, $,I2f -60 FRP F�1E�:l�.'.L►S)FR.' FRP VF_EL, I� DILNI PRESS r-;E, �uSR 1 3 VO-00) 66660.00 !?0 C. PhC TIES CFM, 5#' RPM 8f DEG 11 N-S &T U, IrSTO. 10 E61 106 70 7.TiVTOR �.1D MOLNTI 8Y Cl1ST[VLV R` QTY - 2 8951k12 3�0=64 - .00-1.- 2, h0] V- 1-T DRIVE PER DI 02S�48 1729.0ei �3558.00 1 ,00 0 2 FLh' E0 DUET 3 348.00 2 696.00.•S�� Now 4 -IET/MnF_T FN ORTLLP� 3 a48.00 532.00 •5 Kl L 2 TERf ,n3b , 3 &k T�_'"Ac6'Ss s,_ i` FCC - :� : }U 2 AWN RMSIi Al-IfO>l NPT FRP CIRAIN WITH f't1-A3 F'ER Sf'�i i26`S.1 1S+D-00 2 300.00 57 1 t� 2� Y IkSfi£ UOr1 FORT _ 3SO.0 ' 2 720.00 57 s 0TY-­ 2 5760R8K 2.1MET BOX, 270 DEG. WITH GRl',f'�4 I�:�104ATIC�ta 3#;£4.G3 7324:CyQ 3: 7320.00 .-2 STATIC C�244" OD43 BY G�Z�.PHITE PPREGMTICKl QTY - 72.O0 57 15"d�l.00 Q� a MAX 2 ERR. ! GT KLT GtVRf7 - '�' 1788.00 3575.44F . i fix? Ito. 2 GT SK'FT ts: SeMirri UM.Ro _ - . 932.00 � tr11 , . - 2 UNITARY SAM - VITH SPRM3 TYPE' ¢ � -. 46s.b4 R 2598.00 2 57b0 519e.00 4NO8 5, ;2 1 • w52-;o---.qows 2 MTAIR it 1601U.00, l4119 f New York tiloti'!FY'� Fit.£ W. E065M d c4"'}�-r �JstC��r Ordor 1� F.St�241 001001 yF ieF�rcr�cQ 100488.03 DatQ - 11/29/69 "'---•---_ -- --- f:--------------- ---- -------------- 249058 OCTALL DIVISI 4 s = .Your nyYb Representat ivo k s WJLTL* VX:COI �r ATE4 at (313)$5L-6420. ThDnX yal for ytur order. OIY 1 1.0 Lv ir co A 0 a3XR TOM- v. i E (.?g r4�r]�ri r 3 To , rr i tor l as - Pie ' ].) NrvYork B10wer FIi E W. En65W k IROII o�ar � Off ica fiofsrprico f ' D�#o 41171SO , Si Id to"- 2SSt'4 - m' , ,��fr�t►550 MI I-W67 VILLMSE CRE" V,JTP,.C�{� ` FACILITY 4W UILKN'tNE3 ` r ri 1t�3TE�€- T?(..7f4t2 Op >htPLPia D,�Y _ FPO t t Nrrss f t FOB S h r • i t V - r i _ Q1 yy 3 $456133 3...�LLOt R� FC1RO 0011C�V- 11-8.23'3 S;i.'LE;C !IY �fY 3i}.i1�� WB Pl1 88-528L + 41 ,QR1Cel ,L- FILE fbc,%3-R EMED 1 }1u7b9 _ 3 GALLONS R{CfO4RD fit Ml ht_ 1t-0 261 EFQkY 1ziIVhTIO 3 .OD W-0) 1. } ' 30.O0 N)s P/H 8 52", Y6ur nYb Raprk0Mat#ve • s f3,1q_� US Talk- f�'t�AT90 +,"� • at (3)3f651 ••6�1Z0., ,Th�mx you for y"r older. 4 ' �' - . •- .� , . � .. - • ti • •�+� ' _ C lam+ .` � ' . t - • d �- a s y Y • OKc�E n Tel M0.O+1 x - �Re•xarks'}Ili . �a r - THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. A3 23 05 93 Appendix D - Original Nameplate Data for Typical SB 62-65 Fans C7 .� `o _ 78 0I '� '4M}_�.} THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 1 of 14 SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. I1EA �]711► ENIWleI A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field -applied if any). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 2 of 14 B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties, and flanges for each type of insulation. 3. Detail application of field -applied jackets. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed index of 150 or less. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 3 of 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in 'Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871. D. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory -applied FSK jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation, Inc. e. Owens Corning. f. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. C. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. D. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.3 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 4 of 14 B. Vapor -Retarder Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. C. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. C. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation. g. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. C. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 5 of 14 e. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 2.5 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Jacket: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. RPR Products, Inc. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 2.7 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 6 of 14 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. B. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor -retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Sekisui Voltek, LLC. f. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. RPR Products, Inc. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0. 13 5 -inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 7 of 14 a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding. 5) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor -Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc -coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor -discharge welding, 0. 13 5-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon -steel washer. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) CL WARD & Family Inc. 3) Gemco. 4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 5) Nelson Stud Welding. 6) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that can hold insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 8 of 14 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated -Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that can hold insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 3) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding. 5) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 6. Nonmetal Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 3) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 9 of 14 C. Staples: Outward -clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft -annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire Products. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. RPR Products, Inc. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 10 of 14 C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 11 of 14 N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION A. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 12 of 14 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward -clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor - barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor - barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 13 of 14 3.7 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 14 of 14 6. Vibration -control devices. 7. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 8. Exposed ductwork located in the area it serves. 9. Return air ductwork located in return air ceiling spaces above the area it serves, except where the return ductwork is installed in ceiling spaces with a roof above. 3.10 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Exposed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3.11 OUTDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.040 inch thick. END OF SECTION 23 07 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 1 of 14 SECTION 23 07 19 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 2 of 14 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed Flame -spread index of 75 or less, and smoke -developed A. Comply with requirements in 'Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 3 of 14 a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. C. ROCKWOOL. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00) 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory -applied ASJ-SSL. 3. 850 deg F. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. C. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor -Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below -ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 4. Color: White. C. Vapor -Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below -ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 3. Color: White. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 4 of 14 D. Vapor -Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below - ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 3. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above -ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White. A. Adhesive shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Fire-resistant, water -based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 degrees F. b. Color: White or gray. C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 3. Color: Aluminum. D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 3. Color: White. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 5 of 14 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED FABRIC -REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Glass -Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings. B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe. pxx�a1210 a_I99a1910409110soki A. Woven Glass -Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.. palfI a121aa_I99a19171LS41C491111.`! A. Field -applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Jacket: 1. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A240/A240M. a. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick polysurlyn. C. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick polysurlyn. d. Factory -Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long -radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory -fabricated fitting covers are not available. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 6 of 14 2.11 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor -retarder tape matching factory -applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. 2.12 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. 2. Wide with wing seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 7 of 14 C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward -clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward -clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below -ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 8 of 14 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. P. For above -ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration -control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. fcJEA ��99021WI7NIMOM A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 9 of 14 D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire -resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing - box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 10 of 14 without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below -ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor -barrier mastic for below -ambient services and a breather mastic for above -ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric -reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well -shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field -applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 11 of 14 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor -barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on above -ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward -clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets on below -ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor -barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.8 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 12 of 14 B. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Engineer, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.11 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Odor Control Condensate Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral -Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 3.12 OUTDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field -applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B. Piping, Exposed: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 13 of 14 Stainless Steel, Type 304 , Stucco Embossed:: 0.020 inch thick. 3.13 UNDERGROUND, FIELD -APPLIED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct -buried piping applications, install underground direct -buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION 23 07 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Page 14 of 14 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 1 of 12 SECTION 23 09 23.12 - CONTROL DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section includes the following types of control dampers and actuators for DDC systems: 1. Rectangular control dampers. 2. General control -damper actuator requirements. 3. Electric and electronic actuators. 4. FRP Control Dampers B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 2. Section 23 31 16 "Non -Metal Ducts" 3. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct -digital control. B. RMS: Root -mean -square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle. C. FRP: Fiber reinforced plastic. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 2 of 12 2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity. 3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets. 4. Installation instructions, including factors affecting performance. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Include diagrams for air and process signal tubing. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, and equipment. 2. Size and location of wall access panels for control dampers and actuators installed behind walls. 3. Size and location of ceiling access panels for control dampers and actuators installed above inaccessible ceilings. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For control dampers to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label products to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code where required by authorities having jurisdiction. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 3 of 12 C. Ground Fault: Products shall not fail due to ground fault condition when suitably grounded. D. Backup Power Source: Systems and equipment served by a backup power source shall have associated control damper actuators served from a backup power source. E. Environmental Conditions: Provide electric control -damper actuators, with protective enclosures satisfying the following minimum requirements unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Electric control -damper actuators not available with integral enclosures, complying with requirements indicated, shall be housed in protective secondary enclosures. a. Hazardous Locations: Explosion -proof rating for condition. F. Selection Criteria: 1. Dampers shall have stable operation throughout full range of operation, from design to minimum airflow over varying pressures and temperatures encountered. 2. Select modulating dampers for a pressure drop of 2 percent of fan total static pressure unless otherwise indicated. 3. Two -position dampers shall be full size of duct or equipment connection unless otherwise indicated. 4. Control -damper, pneumatic -control signal shall not exceed 200 feet. For longer distances, provide an electric/electronic control signal to the damper and an electric solenoid valve or electro-pneumatic transducer at the damper to convert the control signal to pneumatic. 2.2 RECTANGULAR CONTROL DAMPERS A. General Requirements: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel blade configuration for two -position control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other applications, use opposed blade configuration. 2. Factory assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper assembly of size required by the application. 3. Damper actuator shall be factory installed by damper manufacturer as integral part of damper assembly. Coordinate actuator location and mounting requirements with damper manufacturer. B. Rectangular Dampers with Aluminum Airfoil Blades: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Warming and Ventilating; a Mestek Architectural Group company. b. Arrow United Industries. C. Cesco Products; a division of MESTEK, Inc. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. McGill AirFlow LLC. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 4 of 12 £ Nailor Industries Inc. g. Pottorff. h. Ruskin Company. i. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Performance: a. Leakage: AMCA 511, Class 1A. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. against f- inch wg differential static pressure. b. Pressure Drop: 0.05-inch wg at 1500 fpm across a 24-by-24-inch damper when tested according to AMCA 500-D, figure 5.3. C. Velocity: Up to 6000 fpm. d. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 185 degrees F. e. Pressure Rating: Damper close -off pressure equal to fan shutoff pressure with a maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length. f. Damper shall have AMCA seal for both air leakage and air performance. 3. Construction: a. Frame: 1) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 extruded -aluminum profiles, 0.07 inch thick. 2) Hat -shaped channel with integral flange(s). Mating face shall be a minimum of 1 inch. 3) Width not less than 5 inches. b. Blades: 1) Hollow, airfoil, extruded aluminum. 2) Parallel or opposed blade configuration as required by application. 3) Material: ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063 T5 aluminum, 0.07 inch thick. 4) Width not to exceed 6 inches. 5) Length as required by close -off pressure, not to exceed 48 inches. C. Seals: 1) Blades: Replaceable, mechanically attached extruded silicone, vinyl, or plastic composite. 2) Jambs: Stainless steel, compression type. d. Axles: 0.5-inch- diameter stainless steel, compression type. e. Bearings: 1) Molded synthetic or stainless -steel sleeve mounted in frame. 2) Where blade axles are installed in vertical position, provide thrust bearings. f. Linkage: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 5 of 12 1) Concealed in frame. 2) Constructed of aluminum and stainless steel. 3) Hardware: Stainless steel. g. Transition: 1) For round and flat oval duct applications, provide damper assembly with integral transitions to mate to adjoining field connection. 2) Factory mount damper in a sleeve with a close transition to mate to field connection. 3) Damper size and sleeve shall be connection size plus 2 inches. 4) Sleeve length shall be not less than 12 inches for dampers without jackshafts and shall be not less than 16 inches for dampers with jackshafts. 5) Sleeve material shall match adjacent duct. h. Additional Corrosion Protection for Corrosive Environments: 1) Provide anodized fmish for aluminum surfaces in contact with airstream. Anodized finish shall be a minimum of 0.0007 inch thick. 2) Axles, damper linkage, and hardware shall be constructed of Type 316L stainless steel. 2.3 GENERAL CONTROL -DAMPER ACTUATORS REQUIREMENTS A. Actuators shall operate related damper(s) with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action and proper speed of response at velocity and pressure conditions to which the damper is subjected. B. Actuators shall produce sufficient power and torque to close off against the maximum system pressures encountered. Actuators shall be sized to close off against the fan shutoff pressure as a minimum requirement. C. The total damper area operated by an actuator shall not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's maximum area rating. D. Provide one actuator for each damper assembly where possible. Multiple actuators required to drive a single damper assembly shall operate in unison. E. Avoid the use of excessively oversized actuators which could overdrive and cause linkage failure when the damper blade has reached either its full open or closed position. F. Use jackshafts and shaft couplings in lieu of blade -to -blade linkages when driving axially aligned damper sections. G. Provide mounting hardware and linkages for connecting actuator to damper. H. Select actuators to fail in desired position in the event of a power failure. I. Actuator Fail Positions: See Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 6 of 12 2.4 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS A. Type: Motor operated, with or without gears, electric and electronic. B. Voltage: 1. See Drawings. 2. Actuator shall deliver torque required for continuous uniform movement of controlled device from limit to limit when operated at rated voltage. 3. Actuator shall function properly within a range of 85 to 120 percent of nameplate voltage. C. Construction: 1. Less Than 100 W: Fiber or reinforced nylon gears with steel shaft, copper alloy or nylon bearings, and pressed steel enclosures. 2. 100 up to 400 W: Gears ground steel, oil immersed, shaft -hardened steel running in bronze, copper alloy, or ball bearings. Operator and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof cast-iron, cast -steel, or cast -aluminum housing. 3. Greater Than 400 W: Totally enclosed reversible induction motors with auxiliary hand crank and permanently lubricated bearings. D. Field Adjustment: 1. Spring return actuators shall be easily switchable from fail open to fail closed in the field without replacement. 2. Provide gear -type actuators with an external manual adjustment mechanism to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. E. Two -Position Actuators: Single direction, spring return or reversing type. F. Modulating Actuators: 1. Capable of stopping at all points across full range, and starting in either direction from any point in range. 2. Control Input Signal: a. Three Point, Tristate, or Floating Point: Clockwise and counter -clockwise inputs. One input drives actuator to open position, and other input drives actuator to close position. No signal of either input remains in last position. b. Proportional: Actuator drives proportional to input signal and modulates throughout its angle of rotation. Suitable for zero- to 10- V do and 4- to 20-mA signals. C. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM): Actuator drives to a specified position according to a pulse duration (length) of signal from a dry -contact closure, triac sink or source controller. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 7 of 12 d. Programmable Multi -Function: 1) Control input, position feedback, and running time shall be factory or field programmable. 2) Diagnostic feedback of hunting or oscillation, mechanical overload, mechanical travel, and mechanical load limit. 3) Service data, including at a minimum, number of hours powered and number of hours in motion. G. Position Feedback: 1. Where indicated, equip two -position actuators with limits switches or other positive means of a position indication signal for remote monitoring of open and close position. 2. Where indicated, equip modulating actuators with a position feedback through current or voltage signal for remote monitoring. 3. Provide a position indicator and graduated scale on each actuator indicating open and closed travel limits. H. Fail -Safe: 1. Where indicated, provide actuator to fail to an end position. 2. Internal spring return mechanism to drive controlled device to an end position (open or close) on loss of power. 3. Batteries, capacitors, and other non -mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are acceptable only where uniquely indicated. I. Integral Overload Protection: 1. Provide against overload throughout the entire operating range in both directions. 2. Electronic overload, digital rotation sensing circuitry, mechanical end switches, or magnetic clutches are acceptable methods of protection. Damper Attachment: 1. Unless otherwise required for damper interface, provide actuator designed to be directly coupled to damper shaft without need for connecting linkages. 2. Attach actuator to damper drive shaft in a way that ensures maximum transfer of power and torque without slippage. 3. Bolt and set screw method of attachment is acceptable only if provided with at least two points of attachment. K. Temperature and Humidity: 1. Temperature: Suitable for operating temperature range encountered by application with minimum operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 120 degrees F. 2. Humidity: Suitable for humidity range encountered by application; minimum operating range shall be from 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non -condensing. L. Enclosure: 1. NEMA Type 4X. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 8 of 12 2. Provide actuator enclosure with a heater and controller where required by application. M. Stroke Time: 1. Operate damper from fully closed to fully open within 60 seconds. 2. Operate damper from fully open to fully closed within 60 seconds. 3. Move damper to failed position within 30 seconds. 4. Select operating speed to be compatible with equipment and system operation. 5. Actuators operating in smoke control systems comply with governing code and NFPA requirements. N. Sound: 1. Spring Return: 62 dBA. 2. Non -Spring Return: 45 dBA. PA•� a1:�91ZefA_RXY7a11►1TOZ4191009WVdltl[KK$)\NIR6 M' 217.I A. Provide factory fabricated dampers conforming to AMCA 500D. B. Provide FRP dampers manufactured from the same materials and resin as the duct. Dampers shall be subjected to at least the same ratings as the ductwork. Refer to Section 233116. C. Materials and Construction: 1. Butterfly type. 2. Damper Frame: One piece construction with a 100 mil (min.) resin -rich interior corrosion barrier. 3. Self-supporting construction with no deflection or deformation while free-standing. 4. Structural Layup: a. Alternate layers of chopped strand mat and woven roving conforming to ASME/ANSI RTP-1 and NBS PS 15-60. b. Glass -resin composition: Minimum 35% glass and 65% resin, respectively. 5. End Connections: Flanged. 6. Flange Integral to Web Lay -Up: 1/4" thick with flange OD and ID to match the mating flange. 7. Blades: a. Two-piece, molded, including blade stiffeners. 8. Axle: Solid, Type 316 SS. 9. Bearings: Molded PTFE with 10% carbon and graphite fill, embedded into the damper body. 10. O-Rings: Viton. 11. Metallic Parts Embedded in Fiberglass: Metallic parts may not be in contact with the air stream. 12. Chainwheel Operator: Provide a chainwheel for dampers located greater than 5ft above the finished floor. Chainwheel to extend to 4 ft above the finished floor. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 9 of 12 D. Provide the following type of dampers for these services: 1. Balancing: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1) Daniel Company. 2) ECS 3) Swartout. 4) Belco. 5) MK Plastics. 2. AMCA label. 3. Accessories: a. Manual locking quadrant with FRP or Type 316 stainless steel lever. E. Manual Operators: 1. Dampers 16 inches and larger: Provide gear operators with epoxy coating. 2. Dampers 14 inches and smaller: Provide hand quadrant actuators fabricated of Type 316 SS with a 5-stage locking quadrant indicator. 3. Provide a chain wheel if the operator is 7'-0" or more above the finished grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for dampers and instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide products required to satisfy most stringent requirements indicated. B. Properly support dampers and actuators, tubing, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway. C. Provide ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 10 of 12 could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition. D. Seal penetrations made in fire -rated and acoustically rated assemblies. E. Fastening Hardware: 1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, or other tools that will cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for assembling and tightening nuts. 2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches. 3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly. F. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition. G. Corrosive Environments: 1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they will be subjected. 2. Use Type 316 stainless -steel tubing and fittings when in contact with a corrosive environment. 3.3 ELECTRIC POWER A. Provide electrical power to products requiring electrical connections. B. Provide circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 16 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers." C. Provide power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." D. Provide raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Install smooth transitions, not exceeding 30 degrees, to dampers smaller than adjacent duct. Install transitions as close to damper as possible but at distance to avoid interference and impact to performance. Consult manufacturer for recommended clearance. B. Clearance: 1. Locate dampers for easy access and provide separate support of dampers that cannot be handled by service personnel without hoisting mechanism. 2. Install dampers with at least 24 inches of clear space on sides of dampers requiring service access. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 11 of 12 C. Service Access: 1. Dampers and actuators shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. 2. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of damper to allow service personnel to hand clean any portion of damper, linkage, and actuator. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." D. Install dampers straight and true, level in all planes, and square in all dimensions. Install supplementary structural steel reinforcement for large multiple -section dampers if factory support alone cannot handle loading. E. Attach actuator(s) to damper drive shaft. F. For duct -mounted and equipment -mounted dampers installed outside of equipment, install a visible and accessible indication of damper position from outside. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Connect electrical devices and components to electrical grounding system. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install engraved phenolic nameplate with damper identification on damper and on face of ceiling where damper is concealed above ceiling. 3.7 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES A. Control -Damper Checkout: 1. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. 2. Check dampers for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material, and support. 4. Verify that control dampers are installed correctly for flow direction. 5. Verify that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 6. Verify that damper frame attachment is properly secured and sealed. 7. Verify that damper actuator and linkage attachment are secure. 8. Verify that actuator wiring is complete, enclosed, and connected to correct power source. 9. Verify that damper blade travel is unobstructed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.12 CONTROL DAMPERS Page 12 of 12 3.8 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING: A. Stroke and adjust control dampers following manufacturer's recommended procedure, from 100 percent open to 100 percent closed back to 100 percent open. B. Stroke control dampers with pilot positioners. Adjust damper and positioner following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so damper is 100 percent closed, 50 percent closed, and 100 percent open at proper air pressure. C. Check and document open and close cycle times for applications with a cycle time of less than 30 seconds. D. For control dampers equipped with positive position indication, check feedback signal at multiple positions to confirm proper position indication. END OF SECTION 23 09 23.12 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 09 23.14 - FLOW INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section Includes: 1. Airflow switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts". 2. Section 23 34 23 "HVAC Power Ventilators". 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3 standards. B. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted pairs. C. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. D. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Operating characteristics; electrical characteristics; and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 2 of 6 power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity. 3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets. 4. Installation instructions, including factors affecting performance. 5. Product certificates. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Include diagrams for air and process signal tubing. 5. Number -coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable, and tubing ends. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate. B. Product Test Reports: For each product. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For instruments to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FLOW INSTRUMENTS A. Air sensors and transmitters shall have an extended range of 10 percent above Project design flow and 10 percent below minimum Project flow to signal abnormal flow conditions and to provide flexibility for changes in operation. B. Source Limitations: For flow instruments, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 3 of 6 2.3 AIRFLOW SWITCHES A. Thermal Dispersion Switch: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thermatel TD1/TD2 or comparable product by one of the following: a. Fluid Components International. b. Magnetrol. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Housing: Painted aluminum. 3. NEMA Rating: See Areas Classification and Material Schedule. 4. Probe and Airstream Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Probe Length: Approximately one-half of the duct width. 6. Power: 120 VAC. 7. Contacts: Two SPDT. 8. Flow Accuracy: +/- 2%. 9. Field adjustable set point. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Examine roughing -in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Furnish and install products required to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated. B. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction. C. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 4 of 6 D. Install ceiling, floor, roof, and wall openings and sleeves required by installation. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, or cutting, check location first for concealed products that could potentially be damaged. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition. E. Install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition. 3.3 ELECTRIC POWER A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections. B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 16 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers." C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3.4 INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Mounting Location: 1. Rough -in: Outline instrument -mounting locations before setting instruments and routing cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location. 2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid flow associated with individual air - handling units and connected ductwork and piping near air -handlings units co -located in air -handling unit system control panel, to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection and service. 3. Install airflow switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user -occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings. 4. Mount switches and transmitters not required to be mounted within system control panels on walls, floor -supported freestanding pipe stands, or floor -supported structural support frames. Use manufacturer mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely support and brace products to prevent vibration and movement. B. Mounting Height: 1. Mount instruments in user -occupied space to match mounting height of light switches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with codes and accessibility requirements. 2. Mount switches and transmitters, located in mechanical equipment rooms and other similar space not subject to code, state, and federal accessibility requirements, within a range of 42 to 72 inches above the adjacent floor, grade, or service catwalk or platform. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 5 of 6 a. Make every effort to mount at 60 inches. C. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air -moving equipment to comply with duct static - pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets. 3.5 FLOW INSTRUMENTS INSTALLATION A. Airflow Sensors: 1. Install sensors in straight sections of duct with manufacturer -recommended straight duct upstream and downstream of sensor. 2. Installed sensors shall be accessible for visual inspection and service. Install access door(s) in duct or equipment located upstream of sensor, to allow service personnel to hand clean sensors. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces. B. Wash and shine glazing. C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine. 3.8 CHECKOUT PROCEDURES A. Description: 1. Check out installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instruments for proper installation with respect to direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, or other applicable considerations that will impact performance. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper isolation, fittings, slope, dirt legs, drains, material, and support. B. Flow Instrument Checkout: 1. Verify that sensors are installed correctly with respect to flow direction. 2. Verify that sensor attachment is properly secured and sealed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.14 FLOW INSTRUMENTS Page 6 of 6 3. Verify that processing tubing attachment is secure and isolation valves have been provided. 4. Inspect instrument tag against approved submittal. 5. Verify that recommended upstream and downstream distances have been maintained. 3.9 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING A. Description: 1. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation. 2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment. 3. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy. 4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment. 6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent. 7. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer. 8. If after -calibration -indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out -of -tolerance instruments. 9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements, and to supplement requirements indicated. B. Digital Signals: 1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire. 2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact. C. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance and operations personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instrumentation and control devices. END OF SECTION 23 09 23.14 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 1 of 12 SECTION 23 09 23.27 - TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air temperature sensors. 2. Air temperature switches. 3. Air temperature RTD transmitters. 4. Room temperature thermostat. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 74 23.16 "Packaged, Indirect -Fired, Outdoor, Heating -only Makeup -Air units. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) Protocol: The global standard for sending and receiving digital information across analog wires between smart devices and control or monitoring systems through bidirectional communication that provides data access between intelligent field instruments and host systems. A host can be any software application from a technician's hand-held device or laptop to a plant's process control, asset management, safety, or other system using any control platform. B. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 2 of 12 2. Operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories indicating process operating range, accuracy over range, control signal over range, default control signal with loss of power, calibration data specific to each unique application, electrical power requirements, and limitations of ambient operating environment, including temperature and humidity. 3. Product description with complete technical data, performance curves, and product specification sheets. 4. Installation operation and maintenance instructions, including factors affecting performance. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Include number -coded identification system for unique identification of wiring, cable, and tubing ends. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plan drawings and corresponding product installation details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Product installation location shown in relationship to room, duct, pipe, and equipment. 2. Wall -mounted instruments located in finished space showing relationship to light switches, fire -alarm devices, and other installed devices. 3. Sizes and locations of wall access panels for instruments installed behind walls. 4. Sizes and locations of ceiling access panels for instruments installed in inaccessible ceilings. B. Product Certificates: For each product requiring a certificate. C. Product Test Reports: For each product. D. Field quality -control reports. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Conditions: CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 3 of 12 1. Instruments shall operate without performance degradation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified and encountered for installed location. a. If instrument alone cannot meet requirement, install instrument in a protective enclosure that is isolated and protected from conditions impacting performance. i►a1 KllM:-IMCIS1991:7:rrI1:IML4zi►k1619iy A. Temperature Sensor: 1. Manufacturers: Distech controls. 2. UL Listed. 3. Temperature Rating/Sensing Range: -4 F to 221 F. 4. Ambient Humidity: 0 to 95% Non -Condensing. 5. Material: ABS-UL94-5VB. 6. Probe Dimension: 1/4 inch. 7. Accuracy: Plus or Minus 0.36 F. 8. Probe Material: 304 Stainless Steel. 9. Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X. B. Thermal Resistors (Thermistors): Common Requirements: 1. 10,000 ohms at 25 deg C and a temperature coefficient of 23.5 ohms/ohm/deg C. 2. Two -wire, PTFE-insulated, 22-gage stranded copper leads. 3. Performance Characteristics: a. Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F. b. Interchangeable Accuracy: At 77 deg F within 0.5 deg F. C. Repeatability: Within 0.5 deg F. d. Drift: Within 0.5 deg F over 10 years. e. Self -Heating: Negligible. 4. Transmitter optional, contingent on compliance with end -to -end control accuracy. C. Thermistor Averaging Air Temperature Sensors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Minco. b. Or approved equal (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F. 3. Multiple sensors to provide average temperature across entire length of sensor. 4. Rigid probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless -steel sheath. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 4 of 12 5. Flexible probe of aluminum, brass, copper, or stainless -steel sheath and formable to a 4- inch radius. 6. Length: As required by application to cover entire cross section of air tunnel. 7. Enclosure: Junction box with removable cover; NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor applications and Type 4 for outdoor applications. 8. Gasket for attachment to duct or equipment to seal penetration airtight. 9. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Thermistor Outdoor Air Temperature Sensors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Minco. b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 275 deg F. 3. Probe: Single -point sensor with a stainless -steel sheath. 4. Solar Shield: Stainless steel. 5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4 or 4X junction box or combination conduit and outlet box with removable cover and gasket. 6. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size. E. Thermistor Space Air Temperature Sensors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Minco. b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 212 deg F. 3. Sensor assembly shall include a temperature sensing element mounted under a flush, brushed -aluminum cover. 4. Provide a mounting plate that is compatible with the surface shape that it is mounted to and electrical box used. 5. Concealed wiring connection. 2.3 AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCHES A. Thermostat and Switch for High Temperature Control in Duct Applications: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 5 of 12 b. Or Equal. 2. Source Limitations: Obtain temperature -measuring sensors and transmitters and airflow from single manufacturer. 3. Description: a. Two -position control. b. Field -adjustable set point. C. Manual reset. d. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Performance: a. Temperature Range: 100 to 160 deg F. b. Temperature Differential: 5 deg F. C. Ambient Temperature: Zero to 260 deg F. d. Voltage: 120-V ac. e. Current: 16 FLA. f. Switch Type: SPDT snap switch. 5. Construction: a. Sensing Element: Helical bimetal. b. Enclosure: Metal, NEMA 250, Type 1. C. Electrical Connections: Screw terminals. d. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch trade size. 2.4 AIR TEMPERATURE RTD TRANSMITTERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DWYER Series TTE. B. Conduit Connection: 1/2-inch. C. Accuracy: Transmitter +/- 0.1% FS; Probe +/- 0.33% FS. D. Temperature Range: User selectable (-30 to 250 deg F). E. Output Signal: 4-20mA (2-wire loop powered). F. Temperature Range: User selectable (-30 to 250 deg F). G. Enclosure: Explosion -Proof. H. Detection Element: Type 316 SS. I. Power: 10-35 VDC. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 6 of 12 2.5 ROOM TEMPERATURE THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chromalox. 2. Honeywell. 3. Johnson Controls, 4. Peco. 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Line Voltage Thermostat for Indoor, Damp, Corrosive Rooms: 1. UL Listed. 2. Heavy duty style. 3. Setpoint: Adjustable. 4. Temperature Element: Exposed, stainless steel. 5. Type: SPDT. 6. Contact Rating: 16 Amps at 120 Volts. 7. Enclosure: NEMA 4X. 8. External setpoint adjustment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections before installation. C. Examine roughing -in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT APPLICATIONS A. Air Temperature Sensors: 1. Duct: Thermistor. 2. Outdoor: Thermistor. 3. Space: Thermistor. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 7 of 12 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction. B. Properly support instruments, tubing, piping, wiring, and conduit to comply with requirements indicated. Brace all products to prevent lateral movement and sway. C. Fastening Hardware: 1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that cause injury to or mar surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening nuts. 2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches. 3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts, and screws with graphite and oil before assembly. D. Install products in locations that are accessible and that permit calibration and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks. Where ladders are required for Owner's access, confirm unrestricted ladder placement is possible under occupied condition. E. Corrosive Environments: 1. Use products that are suitable for environment to which they are subjected. 2. If possible, avoid or limit use of materials in corrosive environments. 3. When conduit is in contact with a corrosive environment, use Type 316 stainless -steel conduit and fittings or conduit and fittings that are coated with a corrosive -resistant coating that is suitable for environment. 4. Where instruments are located in a corrosive environment and are not corrosive resistant from manufacturer, field install products in a NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosure constructed of Type 316L stainless steel. 3.4 ELECTRIC POWER A. Furnish and install electrical power to products requiring electrical connections. B. Furnish and install circuit breakers. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 16 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers." C. Furnish and install power wiring. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." D. Furnish and install raceways. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3.5 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATIONS A. Mounting Location: 1. Roughing In: CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 8 of 12 a. Outline instrument mounting locations before setting instruments and routing cable, wiring, tubing, and conduit to final location. b. Provide independent inspection to confirm that proposed mounting locations comply with requirements indicated and approved submittals. 1) Indicate dimensioned locations with mounting height for all surface - mounted products on Shop Drawings. 2) Do not begin installation without submittal approval of mounting location. Complete installation rough -in only after confirmation by independent inspection is complete and approval of location is documented for review by Owner and Engineer on request. 2. Install switches and transmitters for air and liquid temperature associated with individual air -handling units and associated connected ductwork and piping near air -handling units co -located in air -handling unit system control panel to provide service personnel a single and convenient location for inspection and service. 3. Install liquid and steam temperature switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user -occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings. 4. Install air temperature switches and transmitters for indoor applications in mechanical equipment rooms. Do not locate in user -occupied space unless indicated specifically on Drawings. 5. Mount switches and transmitters on walls, floor -supported freestanding pipe stands, or floor -supported structural support frames. Use manufacturer's mounting brackets to accommodate field mounting. Securely support and brace products to prevent vibration and movement. B. Special Mounting Requirements: 1. Protect products installed outdoors from solar radiation, building and wind effect with stand-offs and shields constructed of Type 316 stainless. 2. Temperature instruments having performance impacted by temperature of mounting substrate shall be isolated with an insulating barrier located between instrument and substrate to eliminate effect. Where instruments requiring insulation are located in finished space, conceal insulating barrier in a cover matching the instrument cover. C. Mounting Height: 1. Mount temperature instruments in user -occupied space to match mounting height of light switches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Mounting height shall comply with codes and accessibility requirements. 2. Mount switches and transmitters located in mechanical equipment rooms and other similar space not subject to code or state and Federal accessibility requirements within a range of 42 to 72 inches above the adjacent floor, grade, or service catwalk or platform. a. Make every effort to mount at 60 inches. D. Seal penetrations to ductwork, plenums, and air -moving equipment to comply with duct static - pressure class and leakage and seal classes indicated using neoprene gaskets or grommets. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 9 of 12 E. Space Temperature Sensor Installation: 1. Conceal assembly in an electrical box of sufficient size to house sensor and transmitter, if provided. 2. Install electrical box with a faceplate to match sensor cover if sensor cover does not completely cover electrical box. 3. In finished areas, recess electrical box within wall. 4. In unfinished areas, electrical box may be surface mounted if electrical light switches are surface mounted. Use a cast -aluminum electric box for surface -mounted installations. 5. Align electrical box with other electrical devices such as visual alarms and light switches located in the vicinity to provide a neat and well -thought-out arrangement. Where possible, align in both horizontal and vertical axis. F. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Installation: 1. Mount sensor in a discrete location facing north. 2. Protect installed sensor from solar radiation and other influences that could impact performance. 3. If required to have a transmitter, mount transmitter remote from sensor in an accessible and serviceable location indoors. G. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor Installation: 1. Install averaging -type air temperature sensor for temperature sensors located within air - handling units, similar equipment, and large ducts with air tunnel cross -sectional area of 20 sq. ft. and larger. 2. Install sensor length to maintain coverage over entire cross -sectional area. Install multiple sensors where required to maintain the minimum coverage. 3. Fasten and support sensor with manufacturer -furnished clips to keep sensor taut throughout entire length. 4. If required to have transmitter, mount transmitter in an accessible and serviceable location. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Each piece of wire, cable, and tubing shall have the same designation at each end for operators to determine continuity at points of connection. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces. B. Wash and shine glazing. C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clean shine. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 10 of 12 3.8 CHECK-OUT PROCEDURES A. Check installed products before continuity tests, leak tests, and calibration. B. Check temperature instruments for proper location and accessibility. C. Verify sensing element type and proper material. D. Verify location and length. E. Verify that wiring is correct and secure. 3.9 ADJUSTMENT, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING A. Description: 1. Calibrate each instrument installed that is not factory calibrated and provided with calibration documentation. 2. Provide a written description of proposed field procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures before calibration and adjustment. 3. For each analog instrument, make a three-point test of calibration for both linearity and accuracy. 4. Equipment and procedures used for calibration shall meet instrument manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Provide diagnostic and test equipment for calibration and adjustment. 6. Field instruments and equipment used to test and calibrate installed instruments shall have accuracy at least twice the instrument accuracy being calibrated. For example, an installed instrument with an accuracy of 1 percent shall be checked by an instrument with an accuracy of 0.5 percent. 7. Calibrate each instrument according to instrument instruction manual supplied by manufacturer. 8. If after calibration indicated performance cannot be achieved, replace out -of -tolerance instruments. 9. Comply with field-testing requirements and procedures indicated by ASHRAE Guideline 11, "Field Testing of HVAC Control Components," in the absence of specific requirements and to supplement requirements indicated. B. Analog Signals: 1. Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent. 2. Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent. 3. Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating span using a precision -resistance source. C. Digital Signals: 1. Check digital signals using a jumper wire. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 11 of 12 2. Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact. D. Sensors: Check sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values. E. Switches: Calibrate switches to make or break contact at set points indicated. F. Transmitters: 1. Check and calibrate transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of Project design values. 2. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at zero, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision -resistance source. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections 1. Perform according to manufacturer's written instruction. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other -than -normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance and operations personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain temperature instruments. END OF SECTION 23 09 23.27 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 09 23.27 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS Page 12 of 12 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Plastic pipe and fittings. 2. Joining materials. 3. Transition fittings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pipe. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining materials. 4. Bypass chemical feeder. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Other building services, including light fixture and sprinkler layouts. 3. Structural members. 4. Architectural layout showing smoke and firewalls, floors and full height walls/partitions. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality -control reports. E. Welding inspection certificates CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure -Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure -seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure -seal pipe couplings and fittings. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping, gaskets, and covering shall comply with ASTM 25/50, Flame Spread/Smoke Developed testing. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. 1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket -type pipe fittings,.; ASTM D2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. A. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Solvent Cements for PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: Subiect to compliance with reauirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Charlotte Pipe. 2. Endura; a brand ofIPEX. 3. IPS Corporation. 4. NDS Inc. 5. Plastic Oddities. 6. Sioux Chief Manufacturinz Companv. Inc. 7. Zurn Industries, LLC. B. Size: Same as connected branch. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 3 of 6 C. Bodv: PVC. D. Closure Hue: PVC. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Condensate -Drain Piping: Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent -welded joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install air vents, consisting of a tee, 3/4-inch ball valve, short threaded nipple with cap or an automatic vent at all system high points. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 4 of 6 N. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. O. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. P. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Route piping and install unions and shutoff valves to allow equipment removal without disturbing piping. R. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. S. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides. T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping. U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Non -pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 5 of 6 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or another source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following before operating the system: I . Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure -reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. 3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. INSTALLATION 1. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping according to the following unless otherwise indicated. 2. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. Additional instructions may be required for special applications. Show locations of specialties in plans, details, and schematics on Drawings. B. CONNECTIONS 1. Comply with requirements in other portions of this Section. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties. 2. Install piping adiacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. PROTECTION CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 2321 13 HYDRONIC PIPING Page 6 of 6 1. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clozzinz with dirt or debris and to prevent dama;;e from traffic or construction work. 2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 23 21 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 23 21 16 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" for hydronic piping.. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include construction details and material descriptions for hydronic piping specialties. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated - orifice balancing valves and automatic flow -control valves. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 4 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. B. Safety Valves and Pressure Vessels: Shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Plastic Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Endura. a brand of IPEX. b. IPS Comoration. C. NDS Inc. d. Plastic Oddities. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Com_nanv_ . Inc. f. Zurn Industries, LLC. g. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Body: PVC. 4. Closure Plug: PVC. 5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 3 of 4 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 23 21 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2321 16 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 4 of 4 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single -wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 23 31 16 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous -glass ducts, thermoset fiber -reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct - mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (State of California). 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Ductwork and fittings. 2. Adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 2 of 10 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop -fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static -pressure classes. 4. Elevation of bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of all duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Sheet metal thicknesses. 8. Reinforcement details and spacing. 9. Seam and joint construction and sealing. 10. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 11. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 12. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 13. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 3 of 10 B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. C. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. 2.2 SINGLE -WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static -pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static - pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. 2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T- 24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory -fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct - support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static -pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct -support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one -side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Aluminum. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 4 of 10 D. Tie Rods: Aluminum, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 8-inch- minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static -Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920. 1. General: Single -component, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class:25. 5. Use: O. D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Drawings for materials of construction. B. Design the hangers based on 10 foot spacing or the spacing that is indicated on the drawings. C. Hanger Rods: All -thread rods, nuts, and washers. D. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." E. Steel Cables for Aluminum Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Stainless -steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic -locking and clamping device. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 5 of 10 G. Duct Attachments: Stainless -steel screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air -handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings. B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints. D. Install factory- or shop -fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. J. Install duct -mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings. K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. L. Elbows: Use long -radius elbows wherever they fit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 6 of 10 1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER A. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction. B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather. Provide necessary supporting structures. 3.4 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static -pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: 1. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 7 of 10 C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum interval of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. b. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2- Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct -mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off to reduce or prevent additional leakage. 5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static -pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 8 of 10 7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR. C. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static -pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 9 of 10 5. Return -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash -down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA -registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. 41L! RlIF_�irR19 A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Refer to Drawings for duct design criteria. B. Elbow Configuration: Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio or as indicated on Drawings. b. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." END OF SECTION 23 31 13 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 2331 13 METAL DUCTS Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 3116 - NONMETAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoset FRP ducts and fittings. 2. Hangers and supports. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Dampers. 5. Expansion joints. 6. Delegated design. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 2. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for nonmetal ducts. 3. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" for single- and double -wall, rectangular and round ducts. 4. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct -mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the design of duct support loads with the equipment manufacturers. B. Coordinate the design of the duct connections with the equipment manufacturers. C. Coordinate the location of the duct joints and flanges to accommodate the construction sequencing requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 2 of 10 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Thermoset FRP duct materials. 2. Hangers and supports. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Dampers and operators. 5. Expansion joints. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating sizes, pressure classes, fixed and sliding supports, and expansion joints. 3. Elevation of bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, taps for instrumentation, flexible connectors, guides, anchors, and access doors. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS 1. Duct thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Design Calculations: a. Calculations, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for designing the duct. B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section and coordinated with all building trades. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 3 of 10 B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of Project location. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." E. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.9 STANDARDS OF CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. All ductwork construction and installation details shown on the Drawings and specified here in are based on acceptable methods of construction and installation and are intended to define the quality of construction and installation to be furnished. Alternate details may be submitted for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Furnish, fabricate, and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork including fittings, custom bends, transition pieces, accessories, dampers, and any incidental work or components required. Provide odor control foul air ductwork systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. In general, provide substantially airtight FRP ductwork for any passageway used for conveying air, gas, or materials. Included are fittings, transitions, bracing, fasteners, sealers, and accessories such as access doors, turning vanes, and manual air balancing dampers. Provide ductwork of size and material as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. All duct sizes indicated on the Drawings are clear, inside dimensions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 4 of 10 C. Submit for approval any change in duct sizes, offsets, transitions, and fittings that is required to accommodate job condition. D. All ductwork, piping, and equipment shown on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale. Consult figured dimensions and detailed drawings of the furnished equipment for the actual dimensions and details. The sizes of ductwork and piping are shown, but the Drawings do not show every offset, fitting, hanger, or support that may be required. The Drawings do not show structural difficulties that may be encountered during construction. Furnish all necessary parts to make a complete working system ready for use without extra charge. Coordinate the system installation and routing with the work of all trades. E. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design ducts. Duct Design: a. Comply with SMACNA "Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Standards" and with specified performance and design criteria for duct construction, including duct thickness, seam and joint construction, and reinforcements. b. Duct thickness to be calculated based on duct support spacing indicated on drawings. F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2.2 THERMOSET FRP DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ECS. 2. Daniel Company. 3. Belco Manufacturing. 4. Diamond Fiberglass. 5. Midwestern Fabrication. 6. Spunstrand. 7. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Duct and Fittings: Thermoset FRP Resin: a. Utilize corrosion resistant, fire retardant, vinyl ester resin. Utilize resin that does not require additives, such as antimony, which would detract from the visual inspection or deplete the corrosion resistance. Provide a resin that yields a translucent laminate. b. The following materials are expected to be in the air stream or surrounding areas. Provide resins suitable for all of the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 5 of 10 1) Hydrogen Sulfide, 350 ppm. 2) Organic sulfur compounds, 1 ppm. 3) Volatile organic compounds, Ippm. 2. Round Duct: ASTM D3982, Type I, Grade 2, Class E, filament -wound duct, minimum wall thickness as follows, with tapered bell and spigot ends for adhesive joints, or plain ends with couplings. a. Duct Thickness: 1) Based on 10:1 safety factor for pressure service and 5:1 safety factor for vacuum service. 2) Minimum round duct wall thickness: a) 0 to 23 inch diameter: 0.225 inches. b) 24 to 30 inch diameter: 0.275 inches. c) 32 to 42 inch diameter: 0.375 inches. d) 44 to 60 inch diameter: 0.525 inches 3. Corrosion Barrier: a. 20 mil chemical -resistant interior liner. b. 80 mil interior layer of 1.5 oz/sf mat. 4. Structural Layer: Type E filament winding glass or alternating layers of chopped strand mat and woven roving. 5. Exterior Surface: a. Material: Isophthalic Resin -rich gel coat with filler composed of calcium carbonate, pigment, paraffin wax and ultraviolet inhibitor. b. Color: White. 6. Joints: Butt -wrapped, bell and spigot, or flanged. 7. Round Fittings: Compression or spray-up/contact, molded of same material, pressure class, and joining method as duct. C. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate joints, seams, transitions, reinforcement, elbows, branch connections, and access doors and panels according to SMACNA's "Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual," "Chapter 7", "Requirements." 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. 3. Fabricate 45-degree round elbows with a minimum of two mitered joints and three segments. 4. Fabricate round elbows with a 1.5 radius -to -diameter ratio unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. 5. All reducers to be eccentric flat bottom unless indicated otherwise on plans. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 6 of 10 D. Flanged Connections: 1. FRP flanges with bolt hole pattern per ASTM D3982. 2. Minimum Flange Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Gasket Material: EPDM or Neoprene. 5. Gasket Thickness: 1/8 inch. E. FRP Transition Pieces: 1. Provide transition pieces as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Construction: a. Thickness of transition pieces shall be designed using a safety factor of 10:1 for pressure and 5:1 for vacuum service. b. Custom flanges shall be provided as required to connect to fans, coils, dampers, and ductwork. Coordinate flange sizes to match approved equipment dimensions. 3. Pressure classification: Design transition pieces so that they are free from buckling, pulsing, warpage, and sagging at the design pressures. F. Drains: As shown on Drawings. 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Fabricators/Manufacturers: Subiect to compliance with the reouirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Maverick Applied Science, Inc. 2. RPS Composites 3. Piping Technologv & Products, Inc. 4. Power Composites, LLC. B. Duct support locations, separation, and details are indicated on the Drawings. C. Refer to the Area Classification Table for the materials of construction. D. Horizontal Duct Saddles: 180-degree saddle on the bottom half of the duct with integral stiffeners and baseplate and 180-degree bands on the top half of the duct. Include elastomeric liner between the saddle and the duct. Include banding on top of the duct. Refer to drawings for shoe dimensions. E. Vertical Duct Riser Support: 360-degree band with integral brackets or tabs to the adjacent surface. Include elastomeric liner between the band and the duct. F. Provide 4 inch (min.) wide bands, straps, and saddles with the supports to distribute the load to the duct. G. Horizontal Duct Anchor/Fixed Support: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 7 of 10 1. Application: restricting movement of duct at support location. 2. 360-degree band with integral baseplate that is suitable for welding to the structural steel support. 3. Include elastomeric liner between the band and the duct. H. Slide Plates for Horizontal Duct Sliding Supports: 1. Application: Slide plates for providing support and allowing movement in mechanical systems between pipe supports and structural steel members. 2. Materials: a. Stainless Steel Backing Plate: 1) Material: ASTMA240, Grade 304 stainless steel. 2) Thickness: As per support details. 3) Surface Finish: Smooth, free from defects or imperfections. b. PTFE, 25% Glass Filled Composite: 1) Material: Composed of virgin PTFE resin tested per ASTM D4894 or D4895 and reinforcing agents including milled Blass fibers per ASTM D4745. 2) Thickness: Asper support details. 3) Bonding: The PTFE, 25% glass filled composite shall be securely bonded to the stainless -steel backing plate using a tested evoxv in a controlled time, temperature, and pressure process. 4) Uniformity: The composite laver shall have uniform thickness and coverage over the entire surface of the backing plate. 3. Phvsical and Mechanical Properties: a. Coefficient of Friction: 1) The slide plates shall exhibit a low coefficient of friction, providing smooth and controlled sliding motion between the mating surfaces. 2) Coefficient of Friction vs. Load. The average coefficient of friction shall be less than 0.1 under a compressive load of 2000 psi. b. Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. C. Temperature Range: The slide plates shall be capable of operating within a temperature range of -65°F to 250°F (-54°C to 121 °C) without compromising performance or structural inteerity. d. Manufacture slide plates to the specified dimensions as indicated in the Drawines as well as anv required mountine holes or features 2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Refer to Section 050533 "Anchor Systems." B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, _provide products by one of the following or equal: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 8 of 10 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Refer to spec section 230923.12 "Controls Dampers." 2.6 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Refer to spec section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping." PART 3 - EXECUTION KA� bills] 8le s1r.3aW 4616321 A. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. C. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. D. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. E. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. F. Where ducts pass through fire -rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. G. Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. H. Install thermoset FRP ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's "Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual." 3.2 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3.3 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 9 of 10 3.4 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class as indicated below: 1. Pressure Class: Positive 10-inch w.g. 2. Pressure Class: Negative 10-inch w.g. B. Design ducts and thermal expansion system for ambient temperature of minimum of 0 and a maximum of 120 degrees F. END OF SECTION 23 31 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2331 16 NONMETAL DUCTS Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Smoke Detectors. 3. Flange connectors. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct -mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Duct accessory hardware. 8. Duct roof curbs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts". 2. Section 23 31 16 "Nonmetal Ducts". 3. Section 23 09 23.12 "Control Dampers". 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 8 b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control -damper installations. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Nailor Industries Inc. C. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.; Metal Industries, Inc. d. Pottorff. e. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. f. Tamco. g. United Enertech Corp. h. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 3. Frames: Hat -shaped, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 4. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Opposed -blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Blades: Aluminum. 5. Blade Axles: Stainless steel or aluminum. 6. Bearings: a. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 8 7. Accessories: a. 2-inch insulation standoff with manual locking quadrant. 2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Refer to Section 23 09 23.12 "Control Dampers." 2.3 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS FOR UNCLASSIFIED AIR A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Air Products and Controls RT-3000. B. Type: UL or CSA listed, photoelectric. C. Housing: Refer to Materials of Construction Schedule. D. Sampling Tube Material: Match duct material. E. Operating Voltage: 115 VAC, 24 VAC, or 24 VDC. F. Relay Contacts: Alarm condition, trouble condition, and equipment shutdown. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 3. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 4. Elgen Manufacturing. 5. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: Add -on or roll -formed, factory -fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Match duct material. D. Gauge and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 8 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aero-Dyne Sound Control Co. 2. CL WARD & Family Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 6. Elgen Manufacturing. 7. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. 8. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil -shaped extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. 2. Material: Match duct material. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin -bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.6 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aire Technologies, Inc.; DMI Companies. 2. Arrow United Industries; Mestek, Inc. 3. CL WARD & Family Inc. 4. Cesco Products; MESTEK, Inc. 5. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 6. Duro Dyne Inc. 7. Elgen Manufacturing. 8. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 9. McGill AirFlow LLC. 10. Ruskin; Air Distribution Technologies, Inc.; Johnson Controls, Inc. 11. United Enertech Corp. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 5 of 8 12. Ventfabrics, Inc. 13. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. 14. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Duct -Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Aluminum sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. C. Latches: Cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Aluminum, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc; a DMI company. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. DynAir; a Carlisle Company. 5. Elgen Manufacturing. 6. Ventfabrics, Inc. 7. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, LLC. 8. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. High -Corrosive -Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical -resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 6 of 8 2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct - insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease 2.9 DUCT ROOF CURBS A. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Aluminum; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and ductwork. B. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange 17_171IBM *1140010meI 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream or downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor -air intakes and mixed -air plenums. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 7 of 8 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated. G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. H. Access Door Sizes: 1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. I. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. K. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 34 16 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Backward -inclined centrifugal fans, including airfoil and curved blade fans. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fans. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties, and accessories. 3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 4. Certified fan sound -power ratings. 5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor basis, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 2 of 8 C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in normal operation, emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals with replacement parts listing. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One set for each belt -driven unit. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of Centrifugal HVAC Fans that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. 2. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 3. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 4. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 5. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 6. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 3 of 8 B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Refer to "Fan Schedule" in Drawings. 2.2 BACKWARD -INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck. 2. Aerovent. 3. Central Blower Company. 4. Chicago Blower Company. 5. Cincinnati Fan. 6. COMEFRI. 7. Greenheck. 8. Hartzell Fan Company. 9. Loren Cook Company. 10. New York Blower Company. 11. Northern Blower, Inc. 12. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Factory -fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. Deliver fans as factory -assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 2. Factory -installed and -wired disconnect switch. C. Housings: 1. Housing Material: Aluminum. 2. Housing Coating: High Performance Polyester Urethane. 3. Formed panels to make curved -scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 4. Panel Bracing: Coated steel angle member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 5. Access Door: Bolted and gasketed. 6. Aluminum spun inlet cone with flange. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 7. Outlet flange. 8. Aluminum scroll. 9. Discharge Arrangement: Fan discharge positions. Provide minimize connected duct turns D. Wheels: CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 4 of 8 scroll housing is field rotatable to any of seven or eight fan with discharge positioned in proper direction to 1. Wheel Configuration: SWSI construction with a precision -spun curved inlet flange and a backplate fastened to shaft with setscrews. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and non -overloading. 2. Wheel and Blade Material: Aluminum. 3. Wheel and Blade Coating: High Performance Polyester Urethane. 4. Aluminum hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. 5. Backward -Inclined Curved Blades: a. Curved design. b. Heavy backplate. C. Single -thickness blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate. E. Shafts: 1. Shaft Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 3. Turned, ground, and polished hot -rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. 4. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. F. Bearings: Grease -Lubricated Shaft Bearings, Ball or Roller: a. Self -aligning, pillow -block -type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing. b. Ball -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L(10) at 120,000 hours. C. Roller -Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L(10) at 50,000 hours. d. Extended Lubrication Lines: Extend lines to accessible location. G. Belt Drives: 1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.15. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch pulleys for use with motors larger than 5 hp. 5. Belts: Oil resistant, non -sparking, and non -static; matched sets for multiple belt drives. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 5 of 8 6. Belt Guards: Comply with OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146 inch thick, 3/4-inch diamond -mesh wire screen, welded to aluminum angle frame or equivalent, coated to match fan. Secure to fan or fan supports without short-circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. H. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. I. Accessories: I. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Vibration Isolation: Restrained spring -type isolators. 3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. 4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 5. Inlet Screens: Birdscreen of same material as weatherhood. 6. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft. 7. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single -width fans. 8. Weatherhood: High Performance Polyester Urethane coated. Material to match interconnecting ductwork.. 9. 18" Stainless steel, rail -type support. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." B. Where variable -frequency drives are indicated or scheduled, provide fan motor compatible with variable -frequency drive. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311 and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to AMCA 300. D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 6 of 8 E. Operating Limits: Classify fans according to AMCA 99. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install floor- or roof -mounted centrifugal fans on cast -in -place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 2. Support duct -mounted and other hanging centrifugal fans directly from the building structure, using suitable hanging systems as specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Support Rail, Field Built -Up: Install support rail on roof structure, level and secure, according to "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," detail "Equipment Support Curb," number "SPF-9" (page 1409) and detail "Equipment Support Curb," number "SPF-9S" (page 1410). Install and secure centrifugal fans on support rail and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure units to rail support with anchor bolts. F. Fan Support, Pre -fabricated, 18" Stainless steel, rail -type support provided by fan manufacturer. G. Unit Support: Install centrifugal fans as indicated in Drawings. H. Vibration Isolation: Install flexible duct connectors or fan inlet and outlet. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors. H. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. I. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 7 of 8 3.2 DUCTWORK AND PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance. C. Install piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain with pipe sizes matching the drain connection. 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field -mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring according to Section 260523 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space. 4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS Page 8 of 8 5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 6. Adjust belt tension. 7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 10. See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's operations and maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. END OF SECTION 23 34 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Centrifugal ventilators - roof upblast and sidewall. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fans. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 4. Certified fan sound -power ratings. 5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 8. Prefabricated roof curbs. 9. Fan speed controllers. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 2 of 6 C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section and coordinated with all building trades. B. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt -driven unit. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of HVAC Power Ventilators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Refer to fan schedule in Drawings. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF UPBLAST AND SIDEWALL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 3 of 6 1. Greenheck. 2. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing. 3. Aerovent. 4. Central Blower Company. 5. Chicago Blower Company. 6. Cincinnati Fan. 7. COMEFRI. 8. Hartzell Fan Company. 9. Loren Cook Company. 10. New York Blower Company. 11. Northern Blower, Inc. 12. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Configuration: Centrifugal roof upblast and sidewall ventilator. C. Housing: Removable spun -aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. Upblast Units: Provide spun -aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. E. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and stainless steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings; minimum ABMA9, L(10) of 100,000 hours. 4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. 6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. F. Accessories: 1. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, stainless steel wire. 2. 3. Mounting Pedestal: Aluminum with removable access panel. 4. Wall Mount Adapter: Aluminum wall mount bracket where indicated in plans. Attach wall -mounted fan to wall. 5. Fasteners: Type 316 Stainless steel. G. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: 18" Aluminum; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 4 of 6 1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Coat roof curbs to match fan coating. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to AMCA 300. D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51. E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install power ventilators on cast -in -place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in - Place Concrete." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 5 of 6 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC." C. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc -plated hardware. See Section 07 72 00 'Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 91E,1�09ffl ".1 6 04161 1►1� 14WIMNO A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field -mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring according to Section 26 05 23 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 6 of 6 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space. 4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 6. Adjust belt tension. 7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 10. Disable automatic temperature -control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. 12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. END OF SECTION 23 34 23 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2337 13.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 23 37 13.23 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section Includes: 1. Adjustable blade face registers. 2. Fixed face registers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories". 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REGISTERS A. Adjustable Blade Face Register: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2337 13.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Page 2 of 4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Air Distribution, Anemostat, Inc., Mestek, Inc. C. Carnes Company. d. Davus Register & Grille Inc. e. Hart & Cooley_ , LLC. f. Kees, Inc. g. Krueizer-HVAC, brand of Johnson Controls International We, Global Products. h. METALAIRE, Inc. i. Nailor Industries Inc. j. Price Industries Limited. k. Titus, brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. 1. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International We, Global Products. in. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Mill Finish. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 5. Core Construction: Integral. 6. Rear -Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 7. Frame: 1-1 /4 inches wide. 8. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 10. Accessories: a. Front -blade gang operator. B. Fixed Face Register: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Air Distribution; Anemostat, Inc.; Mestek, Inc. C. Carnes Company. d. Davus Register & Grille Inc. e. Hart & Cooley_ . LLC. f. Kees, Inc. g. Krueger-HVAC; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. h. Nailor Industries Inc. i. Price Industries Limited. j. Shoemaker Mfs. Co. k. Titus. brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. 1. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson Controls International plc, Global Products. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 END OF SECTION 23 37 13.23 2337 13.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Page 3 of 4 M. Or approved equal (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Mill Finish. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart. 5. Face Arrangement: Perforated core. 6. Core Construction: Integral. 7. Frame: 1-1 /4 inches wide. 8. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb. B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location. C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13.23 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2337 13.23 REGISTERS AND GRILLES Page 4 of 4 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 1 of 14 SECTION 23 74 23.16 - PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP - AIR UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes outdoor, indirect, gas -fired, heating -only, makeup air units, including the following components: 1. Casings. 2. Outdoor -air intake hood. 3. Roof curbs. 4. Fans, drives, and motors. 5. Air filtration. 6. Indirect, gas -fired burners. 7. Unit control panel. 8. Controls. 9. Accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3. Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural -Gas Piping." 4. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." 5. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." 6. Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 7. Section 26 05 23 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 8. Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each outdoor, indirect, gas -fired, heating -only, makeup air unit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 2 of 14 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Include unit dimensions and weight. 4. Fans: a. Include certified fan -performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Include certified fan -sound power ratings. C. Include fan construction and accessories. d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories. 5. Include filters with performance characteristics. 6. Include direct, gas -fired burners with performance characteristics. 7. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: For each outdoor, indirect, gas -fired heating and ventilating unit. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting or attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas -fired heating and ventilating units, as well as procedures and diagrams. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 5. For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria. a. Detail mounting and securing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof system. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. C. Startup service reports. D. Field quality -control reports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 3 of 14 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect, gas -fired, makeup air units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set(s) for each unit. 2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door. 3. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each unit. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect -fired heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Entire Unit: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than two year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of units and components. C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air -Conditioning." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 4 of 14 2.2 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS A. Refer to Equipment Schedule in Drawings. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Engineered Air. 2. Ventrol. 3. Buffalo Air Handling. 4. Temtrol. 5. Innovent. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.4 UNIT CASINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: 1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets, factory sealed with water-resistant sealant. 3. Makeup Air Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized -steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs. B. Configuration: Horizontal unit with horizontal discharge for roof -mounting installation. C. Double -Wall Construction: 1. Outside Casing Wall: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, minimum 18 gauge. 2. Inside Casing Wall: a. Inside Casing, Burner Section: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, solid. b. Inside Casing, All Other Sections: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, solid. 3. Floor Plate: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, minimum 18 gauge thick. 4. Casing Insulation: a. Materials: Glass -fiber blanket or board insulation, Type I or Type 11 ASTM C 1071. b. Insulation Thickness: 2 inches. 5. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through -casing metal in casing walls, floors, or roof of unit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 5 of 14 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. Panels and Doors: 1. Panels: a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, with same materials and insulation thickness as casing. b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift -out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against airflow. C. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. d. Size: Large enough to allow unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of unit's internal components. 2. Doors: a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness as casing. b. Hinges: A minimum of two ball -bearing hinges or stainless -steel piano hinge and two wedge -lever -type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against airflow. Provide safety latch retainers on doors so that doors do not open uncontrollably. C. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. d. Size: Large enough to allow unobstructed access for inspection and maintenance of unit's internal components. 3. Locations and Applications: a. Fan Section: Doors and inspection and access panels. b. Access Section: Doors. C. Gas -Fired Burner Section: Inspection and access panels. d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels. e. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters. f. Mixing Section: Doors. E. Locations: Each section accessed with door. 2.5 OUTDOOR -AIR INTAKE HOOD A. Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver. B. Materials: Match cabinet. C. Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. Configuration: Designed to inhibit wind -driven rain and snow from entering unit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 6 of 14 2.6 ROOF CURBS A. Materials: Stainless steel with watertight gaskets and factory -installed 1-1/2 inch wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or Type II Fiberglass. b. Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Stainless steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. C. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air -stream surface coated with a temperature -resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. B. Curb Height: 18 inches. 2.7 FANS, DRIVES, AND MOTORS A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum -rated fan speed and motor horsepower. B. Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized steel; mounted on stainless -steel shaft. Epoxy coated fan and frame.. 1. Shafts: With field -adjustable alignment. 2. Shaft Bearings: Heavy-duty, self -aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings with an L50 rated life of 250,000 hours according to ABMA 9. 3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced -steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun -metal inlet bell. 4. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation. Factory -mount fans with manufacturer's standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. 5. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing. 6. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide, attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch- thick, stainless -steel sheet. a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 7 of 14 C. Drives: Factory -mounted V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.25 service factor based on fan motor. 1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the factory. 2. Belts: Oil resistant, non -sparking and non -static; in matched sets for multiple -belt drives. 3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146-inch- thick, 3/4-inch diamond - mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated. D. Motors: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Motor Sizes: Maximum sizes as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 3. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 4. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. 5. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1. 6. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 2.8 AIR FILTRATION A. Panel Filters: 1. Description: Pleated factory -fabricated, self -supported, disposable air filters with holding frames. 2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. 3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial coating. 4. Filter -Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on outlet side. B. Side -Access Filter Mounting Frames: Particulate Air Filter Frames: Match inner casing and outer casing material, and insulation thickness. Stainless steel track. a. Sealing: Incorporate positive -sealing device to ensure seal between gasketed material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 8 of 14 2.9 INDIRECT -FIRED GAS BURNER A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47 and with NFPA 54. B. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. C. Burners: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 1. Rated Minimum Turndown Ratio: 15 to 1. 2. Fuel: Natural gas. 3. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 4. Gas Control Valve: Modulating. 5. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, electronic -modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. D. Venting, Gravity: Gravity vented. E. Venting, Power: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve. F. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel. G. Heat -Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel. H. Safety Controls: 1. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards and FM Global. 2. Vent Flow Verification: Differential pressure switch to verify open vent. 3. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 4. Purge -period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low -limit control. 5. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow before energizing pilot. 6. Automatic -Reset, High -Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas valve if high -limit temperature is exceeded. 7. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after three tries. Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on. 8. Control Transformer: 24 V ac. 2.10 UNIT CONTROL PANEL A. Factory -wired, fuse -protected control transformer, connection for power supply and field -wired unit to remote control panel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 9 of 14 B. Control Panel: Surface -mounted remote panel, with engraved plastic cover and the following lights and switches: 1. Hand -off -auto switch. 2. Heat -vent -off switch. 3. Supply -fan operation indicating light. 4. Heating operation indicating light. 5. Dirty -filter indicating light operated by unit -mounted differential pressure switch. 6. Safety -lockout indicating light. 7. Low temperature alarm light. 8. Enclosure: Refer to Area Classification Schedule in Drawings for NEMA 250 enclosure type. f►�f�K�]►1111 Z�711 A. Control Devices: 1. Remote Rest Temp Thermostat: Adjustable room thermostat with temperature readout. NEMA rating of temperature sensor must comply with area classification and materials schedule in general sheets. 2. Supply Air Temperature Sensor: Duct -mounted temperature sensor. NEMA rating of temperature sensor must comply with area classification and materials schedule in general sheets. 3. Static -Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. B. Fan Control, Interlocked: Fan to start automatically with MAU. C. Fan Control, Timer: Timer starts and stops indirect -fired heating and ventilating unit and exhaust fan(s). D. Outdoor -Air Damper Control, 100 Percent Outdoor -Air Units: Outdoor -air damper shall open when supply fan starts, and close when fan stops. E. Temperature Control: 1. Operates gas valve to maintain discharge -air temperature with factory -mounted sensor in blower outlet with room temperature override to maintain space temperature with wall mounting, field wired thermostat. 2. Burner Control, Modulating: 20 to 100 percent modulation of the firing rate. 10 to 100 percent with dual burner units. F. Low Air Supply Temp Alarm contacts. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner compartment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 10 of 14 B. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss. C. Stainless steel hail guards, painted to match casing. 2.13 MATERIALS A. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel: 1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation. C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner -casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes, fan wheels, and other components. D. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Install units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories." Secure units to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs with actual equipment. B. Install gas -fired units in accordance with NFPA 54. C. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect, gas - fired heating and ventilating units. [c�[c� � I � 1►[KK�]r•hI��1[�]►f A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 11 of 14 1. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23 1123 "Facility Natural -Gas Piping." Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and union, and with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. Make final connections of gas piping to unit with corrugated, stainless -steel tubing flexible connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26 equipment connections. B. Drain: Comply with requirements in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for traps and accessories on piping connections to condensate drain pans under condensing heat exchangers. C. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for service and maintenance. 3.4 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS A. Duct Connections: Connect supply ducts to indirect -fired heating and ventilating units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors. 3.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.6 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field -mounted control devices. B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 12 of 14 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber. 2. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. 3. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 4. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. 5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 7. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 8. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 9. Verify that filters are installed. 10. Purge gas line. 11. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators. 12. Verify that outdoor- and return -air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain minimum outdoor -air setting. 13. Verify bearing lubrication. 14. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 15. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. I . Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 2. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 3. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust burner for peak efficiency: a. Measure gas pressure at manifold. b. Measure combustion -air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. C. Measure supply -air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. d. Measure flue -gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue -gas analysis. Measure and record flue -gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. Calibrate thermostats. 6. Adjust and inspect high -temperature limits. 7. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers. 8. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 9. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 13 of 14 10. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 11. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 12. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. High -limit heat. b. Alarms. 13. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension. 14. Verify drain -pan performance. 15. Verify outdoor -air damper operation. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air -handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other -than -normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.9 CLEANING A. After completing system installation testing, adjusting, and balancing and after completing startup service: 1. Clean air -handling units internally to remove foreign material, construction dirt and dust. 2. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings. 3. Install new, clean filters. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 23 74 23.16 PACKAGED, INDIRECT -FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING -ONLY MAKEUP -AIR UNITS Page 14 of 14 3.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units. END OF SECTION 23 74 23.16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 05 13 - MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium - voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems. B. Section applies to temporary and permanent feeders used on the project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables. B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories. B. Work plan for each medium voltage system interruption. Include as a minimum: 1. Description of work to be accomplished. 2. Identification of circuits and facilities areas affected. 3. Using the project one line power diagrams, indicate state of affected switches and circuit breakers and locations for temporary safety grounds. 4. Estimated shutdown duration. C. Switching and testing plans for hot phase and rotation checks. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Indicate location of each cable, splice, and termination. B. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 2 of 10 C. Design Data: Cable pulling calculations, including conduit size and fill percentage, pulling tensions, cable sidewall pressure, jam probability, voltage drop, and ground wire sizing for each cable. D. Source quality -control reports. Provide cable manufacturer's certified test report for each cable reel. E. Field quality -control reports. F. Manufacturer's cable warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium -voltage cable. Cable splicer must have at least 80 hours of formal training and a minimum of 10 years' experience. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height. B. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the cable. C. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Store unjacketed armored cable indoors. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. D. Seal cable ends with heat shrinkable end caps. Do not remove end caps until cables are ready to be terminated. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Warrant the cables against failures for a period of 20 years from the date of installation and remove and replace failed cables at manufacturer's expense during this warranty period. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 3 of 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 CABLES A. Description: Medium -voltage cable suitable for use in wet or dry locations, indoors or outdoors exposed to sunlight, in any raceway or underground duct, or directly buried. Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger may be installed in cable tray. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. General Cable, Prvsmian Group North America. 2. Kerite Power Cable, Marmon Holdings, Inc., Berkshire Hathaway_ Inc. 3. Okonite Comvanv (The) 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). C. Cable Type: Type MV 105, UL listed, single conductor. D. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene -propylene rubber. 1. Voltage Rating: 15 kV, as indicated on Drawings. 2. Insulation: a. Rating: 133 percent insulation level. b. BIL / Thickness: 1) 220 mils for 15 kV. E. Operating Voltage: as indicated on Drawings. F. Conductor: Copper. G. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8, ICEA S-93-639/ANSI/NEMA WC 74, and ICEA S-97-682. H. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 4 of 10 I. Shielding: Copper tape 5 mil minimum, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield. Overall Cable Jacket: Moisture, heat, abrasion, UV, and ozone resistant PVC jacket installed over the metallic shield. K. Identification: Printing on outer jacket of cable to include manufacturer's name, voltage class, insulation type, insulation thickness, conductor size, UL listing, and manufactured date. 2.3 CONNECTORS A. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for connections between aluminum to copper conductors. B. Copper -Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped, tin-plated connectors, closed end construction to prevent moisture migration, and meet UL 486 requirements. Provide two -hole lugs with NEMA spacing for conductors 250 kcmil and larger. 2.4 SOLID TERMINATIONS A. Shielded -Cable Terminations: Comply IEEE 48, Class 1 requirements. Insulation class equivalent to that of cable. Current rating equal to or greater than the cable ampacity. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations. Include rain skirt for outdoor locations. Cable compartment of outdoor metal clad switchgear are considered as outdoor locations. TE Connectivity (TE) Raychem heat shrink HVT-Z Series. 2.5 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single -pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead -front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture. B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead -front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables. C. Load -Break Cable Terminators: Elbow -type units with 200 A load make/break and continuous - current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. D. Dead -Break Cable Terminators: Elbow -type unit with 600 A continuous -current rating; designed for de -energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled. E. Dead -Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket -mounted groups of dead -front stationary terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four -terminal units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between terminals and CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 5 of 10 complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainless steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware. 1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic -shielding, water -sealing cap with drain wire. 2. Portable Feed -Through Accessory: Two -terminal, dead -front junction arranged for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. 3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed -through accessory units, protective caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case. 4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead -front terminal for removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated isolation of energized cable -elbow terminator. F. Test -Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current -trip ratings and arranged for installation in test points of load -break separable connectors, and complete with self -resetting indicators capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool. G. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault -indicator test tool, and carrying case. 2.6 SPLICE KITS A. Description: For connecting medium voltage cables; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application. 1. TE Connectivity (TE) Raychem heat shrink HVS Series. B. Standard: Comply with IEEE 404. C. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, materials, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions. 2.7 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING BRAID A. Conducting Metal Braid: Woven from 240 strands of 30 AWG tinned copper wires, capable of carrying fault current comparable to 6 AWG copper wire. 2.8 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TAPES A. Description: Electrical grade, insulating tape rated for medium voltage application. B. Ethylene/propylene rubber -based, 30 mil splicing tape, rated for 130 degree C operation. Minimum 3/4 inch wide. C. Silicone rubber -based, 12 mil self -fusing tape, rated for 130 degree C operation. Minimum 1- 1/2 inches wide. D. Insulating -putty, 125 mil elastic filler tape. Minimum 1-1/2 inches wide. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 6 of 10 2.9 ARC -PROOFING MATERIALS A. Description: Fire retardant, providing arc flash protection and limit damage to other cables that are in proximity. B. Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10 mil thick, corrosion -protective, moisture -resistant, PVC pipe -wrapping tape. C. Arc -Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch thick, and compatible with cable jacket. 3M Scoth Fire -Retardant Electric Arc Proofing Tape 77 White or equal. D. Glass -Cloth Tape: Pressure -sensitive adhesive type, 1 inch wide. 3M Scoth Tape 77 Series of equal. 2.10 PULLING COMPOUNDS A. Pulling compound shall be nontoxic, nonflammable, noncombustible and noncorrosive. Material shall be UL listed and compatible with cable insulation and jacket. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect cables according to AEIC CS8 or ICEA S-97-682 before shipping. B. Upon completion of factory tests, seal cable against entrance of water. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Determine cutting lengths, reel arrangements and total lengths of cable required and furnish to cable manufacturer. B. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, store cable reels at 70 degrees F for at least 24 hours before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cables according to IEEE 576. B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a rubber duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to 72 inches on the pull rope. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 7 of 10 1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction. 2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the duct to extract loose debris from the duct. C. Pull Conductors: Use a dynamometer and constant velocity power pulling. Velocity should not be less than 15-ft/min or more than 50-ft/min. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 1. Use manufacturer approved pulling compound and lubricants. 2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave cable grips, that do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable. Do not use steel fish tapes or steel pulling cables in PVC conduit runs. 3. Use pull -in guides, cable feeders, and draw -in protectors as required to protect cables during installation. 4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape. 5. Pull cables from direction that requires the least tension. 6. Feed cables into raceway with zero tension and without cable crossover at raceway entrance. 7. Install heat shrinkable end caps on cable if cable cannot be terminated immediately after installation. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag. G. Route circuits within manholes to place different circuits on opposite sides of manholes where possible. H. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling. I. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits. K. Install separable insulated -connector as indicated on Drawings. L. Arc Proofing: Arc proof medium -voltage cables in manholes, cable trays, cable vaults, pull boxes, switchgear, and other areas where multiple circuits are present and are not protected by individual conduits or barriers. Use arc -proofing materials in accordance with manufacturer's CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 8 of 10 instructions. In addition to arc -proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows: 1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10 mil pipe -wrapping tape. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc -proofing tape in one half -lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc -proofing tape with two layers of 1 inch wide half -lapped, adhesive, glass -cloth tape at each end of the arc -proof tape. M. Seal around cables passing through fire -rated elements according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." N. Bond shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connector to the ground system. Maintain shield continuity and connectors to metal connection hardware at all connection points. O. Identify cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination, pull point, and junction box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification. Complete marking and termination prior to energization. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduling any testing. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. A. Inspect and test cable installation in accordance with NETA Standard ATS for new cables or NETA Standard MTS for existing cables. Include the following: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Shield continuity test. 3. Insulation resistance test. 4. Dielectric withstand test using Very Low Frequency (VLF). B. When cables are spliced, perform shield continuity and insulation resistance test, prior to splicing, on each individual cable section and again on the entire length after the splice complete. Perform dielectric withstand, hot phasing, and rotation tests on the completed section. C. Include the following on all cable test reports: 1. Cable identification / designation / type. 2. Cable length / termination types at each end. 3. Test conditions (tester name, environmental conditions, date of test), test results, and recommendations. D. Medium -voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 9 of 10 3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING — HOT PHASING AND ROTATION CHECKS A. Correct phasing (A, B, C landed on terminals 1, 2, 3) and rotation (clock -wise) of existing and new medium voltage systems is the Contractor's responsibility. As the project progresses in phases, phasing and rotation checks are required whenever medium voltage cables are moved, spliced, re -landed, or newly installed. Electricians performing these energized activities must be qualified for this type of hazardous activity. B. Hot phase check: 1. Medium Voltage Switchgears. 2. Transformers. C. Submit to Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduling any hot phase and rotation checks, the hot phasing and rotation plan. D. Responsibilities: 1. Switching Existing Equipment: Owner. 2. Switching Modified or New Equipment: Contractor. 3. Absence of Voltage Testing, Safety Grounding, Lockout / Tagout: Contractor. E. Perform all hot phasing and rotation checks in the presence of Engineer. F. In the event of improper phasing or rotation, shut down the appropriate circuit and correct the problem. END OF SECTION 26 05 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 13 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE CABLES Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire. 2. Tray cable, Type TC. 3. Connectors and splices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 13 "Medium -Voltage Cables" for single -conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 601 to 35 000 V. 2. Section 26 05 23 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable -frequency controller. Used interchangeably with VFD. B. VFD: Variable frequency drive. See VFC. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's cut sheet for each type of product used on project. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 2 of 6 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn tinned -copper current -carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." C. Conductors: Tinned Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. D. Stranding: Refer to CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS Article in PART 3. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. F. Manufacturer: South Wire, Encore Wire, Service Wire Co, Advanced Digital Cables INC, or equal 2.2 Type TRAY CABLE, TYPE TC A. Description: A factory assembly of insulated current -carrying conductors with or without an equipment grounding conductor in a nonmetallic jacket. B. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1277. 3. Comply with ICEA S-73-532/NEMA WC 57 for Type TC cables used for control, thermocouple extension, and instrumentation. 4. Comply with ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC 70 for Type TC cables used for power distribution. 5. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 3 of 6 C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed tinned copper and with ASTM B8 for stranded conductors. D. Ground Conductor: Insulated. E. Conductor Insulation: Type XHHW-2, complying with UL 44. F. Shield: None. 2.3 TRAY CABLE, TYPE TC-ER FOR VFC APPLICATIONS A. Type TC-ER: Shielded, stranded, tinned copper cable with three symmetrical ground conductors, XLPE insulation, PVC outer jacket, designed for use as output cable to motor from VFCs. 2.4 2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section. C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Tin-plated copper. 2. Type: a. One hole with long barrels for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG. b. Two holes with long barrels for 250 kcmil and larger. C. Locking spade for No. 10 AWG and smaller. 3. Termination: Compression for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Connectors: 1. Solderless pressure type (wirenuts) for No. 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Pre -filled with silicone -based sealant for exterior, wet, or corrosive locations. 3. Split bolt type for No. 8 AWG and larger splices. E. Motor Terminations: Mechanical compression ring type, secured with bolt, nut and spring washer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 4 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS A. Wires and Cables: Tinned Copper; stranded, except for lighting and receptacle wiring which may be solid. Minimum size for power circuits: No. 12 AWG. B. Nominal 480/277VAC Power Circuits: Single conductors in raceway. Type XHHW-2. C. Nominal 240/208/120V Power Circuits: Single conductors in raceway. Type XHHW-2. D. Cables and Conductors in Cable Trays: Type TC. E. Direct Burial Outdoor Lighting Circuits: Type RHW-2. F. Grounding Conductors: Refer to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems". G. Control and Fire Alarm Circuits: Refer to Section 260523 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables". H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless - steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. I. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER with shield. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Use of steel fish tapes and/or steel pulling cables in PVC conduit or raceways that terminate into energized enclosures is prohibited. F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 5 of 6 G. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." H. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 26 05 36 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Do not splice service or feeder cables without prior written approval of Engineer. C. Wiring at Outlets: 1. Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inch of slack. 2. Form solid wire into loop to fit around device terminal screw. Do not overlap wire. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE -SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. and "Tests and Inspections: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2605 19 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 6 of 6 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance, and feeder conductors, and 480V power circuit conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single -line diagram. b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following: 1) A low -resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey. C. Inspect compression -applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation -resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 1000 V(dc) for 600 V rated cable for a one -minute duration. Minimum wire insulation resistance: 100 Megohms. g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors. B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Control -circuit conductors. 2. Instrumentation cable. 3. Industrial Ethernet cable. 4. Termination products. I&c KTOJ Ito] ►V181:�u1001F.3 W A. Product Data: Manufacturer's cut sheet for each type of product used on project. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less. C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non -Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 2 of 8 D. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non -Riser Applications and Non -Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685. E. RoHS compliant. 2.2 CONTROL -CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Individual Conductors: Stranded tinned corner, Tvne XHHW-2, comDlvin2 with UL 44 in raceway. B. Multi -Conductor Control Cable: NEC tvne TC, stranded tinned corner, TvDe XHHW-2, insulated color -coded conductors including ground wire, overall PVC iacket. Rated for cable tray or direct burial use and sunlight resistant. Number of conductors as indicated on Drawings. C. Minimum Size: No. 14 AWG for 120V circuits, No. 16 AWG for circuits 50V and less. 2.3 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Belden. 2. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Single or Multiple Paired Cable: NEC Type ITC (Instrumentation Tray Cable), UL Type TC for 4-20mA process instrumentation signals and use under NEC Article 727. 1. One or Multi -pair, twisted, shielded, No. 16 AWG, stranded, tinned -copper conductors. 2. Voltage Rating: 600V. 3. Insulation: XLP. 4. Shield: 100 percent aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire. Pairs individually shielded. 5. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer's identification. 6. Standards: UL 1277 Type TC, UL 1581. 7. Single pair cable maximum overall diameter: 0.297-inches. C. Triad (three conductor) Cable: NEC Type ITC (Instrumentation Tray Cable), UL Type TC for instrumentation signals and use under NEC Article 727. 1. Three -conductor, twisted, shielded, No. 16 AWG, stranded, tinned -copper conductors. 2. Voltage Rating: 600V. 3. Insulation: XLP. 4. Shield: 100 percent aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire. Pairs individually shielded. 5. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer's identification. 6. Standards: UL 1277 Type TC, UL 1581. 7. Triad Cable Maximum overall diameter: 0.311-inches. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 3 of 8 2.4 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Rockwell Automation 1585-C8HB-S. B. Description: Four -pair, balanced -twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 5e cable at frequencies up to 100 MHz Ethernet/IP compliant. C. Conductors: 100-ohm, 22 AWG solid copper. D. Shielding/Screening: Overall foil shield. E. Cable Rating: 600V. F. Jacket: PVC. G. Standards: UL, UL PLTC, UL AWM 2570 80C 600V, TIA 568B. PA.� 021"My 11►kN116121.1 A. Termination connectors for instrumentation and control conductors: 1. Tin plated copper. 2. Vinyl insulated. 3. Flanged spade / locking fork with upturned leg ends. 4. Crimp / compression installation. B. Termination connector for industrial Ethernet cable: match conductor count, RJ45 type, intended for shielded cable. Rockwell Automation Bulletin 1585J or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Test cables on receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for conduits as supplemented or modified in this Section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 4 of 8 B. Comply with requirements in Section 260533.23 "Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. C. Comply with requirements in Section 260533.16 'Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet Boxes: No smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2. Outlet Boxes for Cables: No smaller than 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the finished wall surface. 3. Flexible metal conduit is not allowed. D. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull -box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long -radius elbows if possible. F. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96 inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap -free corners and joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for installation requirements and as supplemented or modified in this Section. B. Instrumentation and Ethernet cables may not be spliced and are to be continuous from terminal to terminal. C. Install instrumentation and Ethernet cabling in separate raceway from control or power wiring. D. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. E. Separation from EMI Sources: Separation between open instrumentation cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment as follows: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 5 of 8 a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. C. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. F. General Requirements for Telecommunications Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." 3. Terminate all conductors; cable cannot contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross -connect and patch panels. 4. Cables: may not be spliced and is to be continuous from terminal to terminal. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. 5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install network cabling and control wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages. 6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold -Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions. 11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles. 12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. 13. Provide strain relief. 14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. Do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations. 15. Grounding: Ground wire must be copper. Comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance. G. Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 6 of 8 3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified with a tag for future use. 3.5 GROUNDING A. For data communication wiring, comply with TIA-607-B and with BICSI TDMM, 'Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter. B. For control -voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. For instrumentation wiring, ground shield at one end only as recommended by instrument manufacturer and in accordance with Owner's standard. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA- 606-13; label printers comply with UL 969, for label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks. C. Identify each wire on each end and at each terminal with a number -coded identification tag. Each wire shall have a unique tag. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. and "Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third -party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color -coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test cabling for direct -current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination, but not after cross -connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in its "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in its "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 7 of 8 B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. C. End -to -end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26 05 23 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 23 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CONTROL -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 8 of 8 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding and bonding conductors. 2. Grounding and bonding materials and hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Grounding and Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor, 600V with insulation type matching the circuit phase conductors called for in Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables", green color. B. ASTM - Bare Tinned Copper Grounding and Bonding Conductor: 1. Referenced Standards: Complying with one or more of the following: a. Soft or Annealed tinned Copper Wire: ASTM B3. b. Concentric -Lay Stranded tinned Copper Conductor: ASTM B8. C. Tin -Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire: ASTM B33. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 8 2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING MATERIALS AND HARDWARE A. Performance Criteria: 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. 2. Listing Criteria: a. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467. b. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467. B. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, 3/4-inch by 10-feet, sectionalized as required by Drawings. C. Grounding Conduit Hubs: Malleable iron type. D. Water Pipe Ground Clamps: Cast bronze saddle type. E. Exothermic -welding Kits: CADWELD process or equal. a. Manufacturer kits to include molds and powder recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. b. Welds used indoors in occupied buildings or confined space to be low emission type, CADWELD EXOLON or equal. F. Ground Rod Test Wells: As detailed on the Drawings. G. Ground Enhancement Material (GEM): Low -resistance, non -corrosive, carbon dust -based material that improves grounding effectiveness. Contains cement, which hardens when set to provide a permanent, maintenance -free, low -resistant grounding system that never leaches or washes away. Suitable for installation in trenches or backflling around ground rods. Resistivity of no more than 20 ohm -cm in cured state. ERICO Part No. GEM25A or equal. H. Bus Bars: Rectangular bar of annealed copper. As detailed on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 8 C. Bonding Conductor: 4 AWG or 6 AWG, stranded conductor. D. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inch wide and 1/16 inch thick. E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned -copper conductor, size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade. 2. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct -bank installation. 3.2 SELECTION OF CONNECTORS A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards: 1. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. 2. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements. C. Special Techniques: 1. Grounding Electrode Conductors: a. Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. b. Where conductors pass through floor slabs, walls, etc., install in conduit or sleeve. C. When conductors need to be installed in conduit for mechanical protection, use non-ferrous conduit to avoid a choke effect for fault currents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 8 2. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. a. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. b. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. C. Make aluminum -to -steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps. d. Make aluminum -to -galvanized -steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. e. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. f. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1) Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate adjacent parts. 2) Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3) Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations; if disconnect -type connection is required, use bolted clamp. g. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1) Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use bolted clamp connector or bolt lug -type connector to pipe flange by using one of lug bolts of flange. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2) Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with bolted connector. 3) Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. h. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. i. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install as indicated on Drawings. 1) Locate attachment points not subject to mechanical damage, but accessible for inspection. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 8 2) Use exothermic weld process for wire sizes 1/0 AWG and larger. When wire size is smaller than 1/0 AWG, weld a pigtail of 1/0 AWG to structural steel then mechanically connect the two wires. 3. Electrodes: a. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1) Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2) Use exothermic welds for below -grade connections. 3) Drive rods vertically and do not allow them to be deformed or driven at an angle. Where driving is difficult or rock is encountered, use purpose - designed drilling equipment, install rod into drilled hole and backfill around rod using ground enhancement material (GEM) mixed with water to form a slurry in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Ring Electrode: Install grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column or other indicated item, extending around perimeter of building, area, or item indicated. 1) Bury ring electrode not less than 30 inches from building's foundation. 2) Lay underground conductors slack, and where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. Concrete -Encased Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Grounding Separately Derived Systems: a. Transformers: Bond neutral and ground with a bonding jumper at the equipment in accordance with NEC 250.102. Connect to the grounding electrode system via the electrode grounding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250.66 or as indicated on the Drawings. b. Generators and UPS: When indicated on the Drawings as a separately derived system, bond neutral and ground with a bonding jumper at the equipment in accordance with NEC 250.102. Connect to the grounding electrode system via the electrode grounding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250.66 or a indicated on the Drawings. C. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at generator location. Electrode must be connected to equipment grounding conductor and to frame of generator. 5. Grounding Underground Distribution System Components: a. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. 6. Grounding and Bonding of Raceways, Cable Trays, Boxes, and Enclosures: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 8 a. Terminate metallic conduit into pressed steel boxes using double locknuts (same metal type as conduit) and insulated grounding bushings. b. Terminate metallic conduit into metallic gasketed enclosures using Meyers grounding type conduit hubs. C. Use insulated throat grounding bushings with lay -in type lugs to terminate metallic conduits containing equipment grounding conductors into sheet steel boxes. d. Bond metallic electrical system components such as cable trays, supports, brackets, braces, boxes, etc. to the raceway system if they are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system or are subject to vibration and loosening. e. Provide a bonding jumper across hinged metal panels or doors when electrical components in excess of 24 volts are mounted on the moveable panel. f. Provide a grounding bushing at the end of metallic conduits that terminate in free air. g. Provide 12 AWG insulated green wire bonding jumper for metal outlet boxes that contain receptacles. Connect wire from receptacle ground terminal to box using grounding screw. 7. Equipment Grounding: a. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. b. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. C. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat - tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method in accordance with IEEE Std 81. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7 of 8 C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. B. Nonconforming Work: 1. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 2. Remove and replace defective components and retest. C. Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 1. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 Q (ohms). b. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity over 500 kVA: 5 Q (ohms). 3.5 PROTECTION A. After installation, protect grounding and bonding cables and equipment from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 26 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 8 of 8 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Support, anchorage, and attachment components. 2. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies. 3. Delegated design. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: channel support systems, conduit support hardware, and accessories. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems. 1. Hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Slotted support systems. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. C. Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. For hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1. Include design calculations and details of hangers. 2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 4 B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of Project location. 1.6 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIRMENTS. A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified structural professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements", to design hanger and support system. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics for Nonmetallic Channel Systems and Accessories: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self -extinguishing according to ASTM D635. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Channel: 1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 2. Channel Material: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy. 3. Fittings and Accessories Material: 5052-H32 aluminum alloy. B. Stainless Steel Channel: 1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory -fabricated components for field assembly. 2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Stainless steel, Type 316. C. Accessories: Conduit clamps, straps, hangers, rods, backplates, anchors, nuts, washers, etc. to correspond with channel material as listed in the SELECTION Article. Use of galvanized steel components is only allowed with galvanized steel channel. D. Threaded Rod: 3/8-inch diameter, minimum. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 4 E. Expansion Anchors: 3/8-inch minimum diameter. Equal to "Kwik Bolt", manufactured by McCullock Industries; "Wej it" manufactured by Wej it Expansion Products; or "Kwik-Bolt II" manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF CHANNEL A. Refer to Area Classification and Material Schedule on the Drawing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the following standards as applicable for selection and installation of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA NEIS 101: Standard for Installing Steel Conduits. 2. NECA NEIS 102: Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduits. 3. NECA NEIS 105: Standard for Installing Metal Cable Tray Systems. 4. NECA NEIS 111: Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways. B. Attach support systems only to structural components. Use concrete expansion anchors for attachment to concrete surfaces. C. Provide a minimum of 1/2-inch clearance between wall and equipment when installing surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc. D. Space conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, at no more than 8-foot intervals, and as required to obtain rigid construction. E. Remove burrs and grind smooth sharp edges from channel support ends. Fit ends with plastic end caps. 3.3 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000 psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 4 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field -painted surfaces. a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 05 33.13 - CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81L31u1&'%A11 A. Section Includes: Conduits and fittings. B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section: 1. Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for conduit identification labels. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 33.16 "Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems" for conduit bodies, outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes. 2. Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel support systems and miscellaneous mounting components. 3. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for underground construction requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conduit: A structure containing one or more duct raceways. B. Duct Raceway: A single enclosed raceway for conductors or cable. C. Duct Bank: An arrangement of conduit providing one or more continuous duct raceways between two points. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's cut sheet for each type of product used on project. Note some conduit types listed may not be used on the project. Refer to the Conduit Selection Table in PART 3. B. Conduit Layouts: For Division 26, 27, and 28 conduits installed underground and concealed within buildings and structures. Show equipment, boxes, hndholes, manholes, routing, materials, and sizing. Provide layouts at an appropriate scale for clarity. Submission of separate drawings for power, lighting and control for one area is acceptable. Provide schedule for easy cross check. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 10 C. Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIRMENTS. A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 17_\711fG ' : 6I11811 161 2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 TYPE ERMC-A DUCT RACEWAYS, ELBOWS, COUPLINGS, AND NIPPLES A. Description: Rigid aluminum 6063 alloy conduit, elbows, couplings, and nipples per NEC Article 344. B. Listing Criteria: UL DYWV - Rigid Nonferrous Metallic Conduit, including UL 6A. C. Long radius elbows as indicated in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems". D. PVC Coated Type: 40 mil PVC on exterior and 2 mil urethane on interior. (ERMC-A-PVC). 2.3 TYPE ERMC-S DUCT RACEWAYS, ELBOWS, COUPLINGS, AND NIPPLES A. Description: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, elbows, couplings, and nipples, with a hot -dipped galvanized finish inside and out and per NEC Article 344. B. Listing Criteria: 1. UL DYIX — Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit, including UL 6. 2. UL DYJC — Rigid Ferrous Metal Conduit with Polyvinyl Chloride Coating, including UL 6. C. Long radius elbows as indicated in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems". D. PVC Coated Type: 40 mil PVC on exterior and 2 mil urethane on interior. (ERMC-S-PVC). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 10 2.4 TYPE FMC DUCT RACEWAYS A. Description: Flexible metal conduit per NEC Article 348. B. Listing Criteria: UL DXUZ - Flexible Metal Conduit, including UL 1. C. Material: Hot -dipped galvanize steel (FMC-S). 2.5 TYPE FMT DUCT RACEWAYS A. Description: Flexible metal tubing composed of hot -dipped galvanized steel strips shaped into interlocking convolutions per NEC Article 360. B. Listing Criteria: UL ILJW - Flexible Metallic Tubing, including UL 1652. A. Description: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit, Type UA, per NEC Article 350. B. Listing Criteria: UL DXHR — Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit, including UL 360. C. Material: Steel (LFMC-S). D. Manufacturer: Sealtite®, Type UA, as manufactured by Anaconda, continuously interlocked flexible steel conduit with sunlight and chemical resistant PVC jacket. 2.7 TYPE LFNC-B DUCT RACEWAYS A. Description: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit, Type B, suitable for outdoor use and corrosive areas, per NEC Article 356. B. Listing Criteria: UL DXOQ — Liquid -tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit, including UL 1660. C. Manufacturer: Carflex® as manufactured by Carlon, or equal. 2.8 TYPE PVC DUCT RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Description: Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit, sunlight resistant, rated for use with 90 degree C conductors in exposed and direct or concrete encased applications, per NEC Article 352. B. Listing Criteria: UL DZYR — Rigid Nonmetallic PVC Conduit, including UL 651. C. Type: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. D. Manufacturer: Cantex INC, Heritage Plastics, Atkore-Heritage Plastic, Prime Conduit INC, or equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 10 E. 2.9 FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT AND TUBING A. General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 1. ERMC-A: Use cast aluminum fittings. 2. ERMC-S: Use cast malleable iron fittings. B. Listing Criteria as Applicable: 1. UL 514B — Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 2. UL 1203 — Standard for Explosion -Proof and Dust -Ignition -Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 3. UL DWTT — Conduit Fittings. 4. UL FKAV — Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings. 5. UL ILNR — Flexible Metallic Tubing Fittings. 6. UL DXAS — Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit Assemblies. C. Refer to Section 260533.16 "Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems" for conduit bodies such as LB's, T's, and C's. D. Metal Fittings: 1. RMC Fittings: Threaded type. Threadless fittings and split couplings are not permitted. 2. FMC Fittings: Malleable iron, zinc plated, insulated throat. 3. Fittings for PVC Coated Conduit: Minimum 40 mil thick PVC coating, with overlapping sleeves of one pipe diameter in length to protect threaded joints. 4. LFMC Fittings: Three-piece screw in type, malleable iron. 5. Expansion Fittings: Include flexible external bonding jumper. 6. FMT Bushings: Insulated. 7. Grounding and Bonding Hubs, Bushings, and Hardware: a. Grounding Hub: Meyers type. b. Locknuts: Cast steel or aluminum. C. Bushings: Insulated throat with lay -in type lugs. E. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. PVC Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3 and match conduit material. 2. LFNC Fittings: Dust -tight, liquid -tight, chemical resistant thermoplastic/nylon construction with tapered thread hub and neoprene O-ring gasket. Push -on fittings are prohibited. F. Specialty Fittings: 1. Explosionproof Sealing Fitting: Crouse -Hinds EYS or equal. 2. Explosionproof Flexible Coupling: Crouse -Hinds ECGJH or equal. 3. Deflection/Expansion Fitting: OZ-Gedney Type DX or equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 10 4. Expansion Coupling: Crouse -Hinds Type XJG with bonding jumper or equal. 5. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Refer to Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling". 2.10 ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE CORROSION -RESISTANT COMPOUNDS FOR THREADED CONDUIT. A. Description: Cold galvanizing compound, 95 percent zinc rich paint. B. Listing Criteria: UL CCN FOIZ; including UL Subject 2419. 2.11 SOLVENT CEMENTS A. Description: Solvent cement to join Type PVC duct raceways and fittings. B. Listing Criteria: UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Refer to Appendix Table 260533.13-1 for conduit application requirements. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following as applicable: 1. Relevant Article of NFPA 70. 2. NECA NEIS 101 — Standard for Installing Steel Conduits. 3. NECA NEIS 102 — Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit. 4. NECA NEIS I I I — Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways. 5. NEMA FB 2.10 — Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Non - Flexible Metallic Conduit or Tubing. 6. NEMA FB 2.20 — Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use with Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable. 7. NEMA FB 2.40 — Installation Guidelines for Expansion and Expansion/Deflection Fittings. C. Special Installation Techniques: 1. General Requirements for Installation of Duct Raceways: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 10 a. Complete duct raceway installation before starting conductor installation. b. Underground Installations: Refer to additional requirements in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems". C. Provide stub -ups through floors with coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Plug coupling until conduit is extended above floor to final destination or a minimum of 2 feet above finished floor. d. Coordinate stub -up locations with approved shop drawings for equipment to position stub -up directly below appropriate section of motor control center, switchboard, or switchgear. e. Provide a 4-inch thick concrete housekeeping pad at slab and grade penetrations. Provide a 45 degree, 3/4 inch chamfer at exposed edges. f. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends in conduit run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. g. Maximum continuous conduit run: 300 feet. Reduce distance by 75 feet for each 90-degree elbow. h. Make bends in duct raceway using large -radius preformed ells except for parallel bends. Field bending must be in accordance with NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Provide only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. i. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. j. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. k. Drainage: Arrange conduit system to allow liquids such as water, condensation, etc. to drain away from equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, plug conduits using conduit seals. 1. Hazardous Areas: Install duct sealing fittings at accessible locations in accordance with NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed duct raceways, install fitting in flush steel box with blank cover plate having finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install duct sealing fittings in accordance with NFPA 70. In. Moisture Control: Install devices to seal duct raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal interior of duct raceways using "Duxseal" or seal fitting at the following points: 1) Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2) Where an underground service duct raceway enters a building or structure. 3) Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4) Conduit extending into pressurized duct raceway and equipment. 5) Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6) Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. n. Do not install duct raceways or electrical items on "explosion -relief' walls or rotating equipment. o. Do not install conduits within 2 inches of the bottom side of a metal deck roof. p. Keep duct raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal duct raceway runs above water and steam piping. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7 of 10 q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits trade size 2 and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Ream inside of conduit to remove burrs. r. Install pull wires in empty duct raceways. Provide polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at both ends of pull wire. Cap underground duct raceways designated as spare above grade alongside duct raceways in use. Use threaded cap. S. Install duct raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures without hubs with locknuts on both sides of enclosure wall. Install locknuts hand tight, plus one -quarter turn more. t. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to trade size 1-1/4 and insulated throat metal bushings on trade size 1-1/2 and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Install Meyers grounding type hubs when conduits terminate at NEMA 3R, 4, and 4X gasketed enclosures. 2. Do not install aluminum duct raceways or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 3. Protect metallic finish conduit installed in contact with concrete or below grade with two coats of bitumastic paint, heat shrink tubing, or approved equivalent. Provide protection from 12 inches below bottom of concrete to not less than 6 inches above surface of concrete. 4. Rigid Metal Conduit (Type ERMC): a. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound that maintains electrical conductivity to threads of duct raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's published instructions. b. The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, use a three-piece union. 5. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit (Type ERMC-A-PVC and ERMC-S-PVC): a. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for clamping, cutting, threading, bending, and assembly. b. Provide PVC -coated sealing locknut for exposed male threads transitioning into female NPT threads that do not have sealing sleeves, including transitions from PVC couplings/female adapters to PVC -coated ERMC elbows in direct -burial applications. PVC -coated sealing locknuts must not be used in place of conduit hub. PVC -coated sealing locknut must cover exposed threads on PVC -coated ERMC duct raceway. C. Coat field -cut threads on PVC -coated duct raceway with manufacturer -approved corrosion -preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. 6. Flexible Conduit Connections (Types FMC, LFMC, and LFNC): a. Provide a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi - recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. b. Include adequate slack to allow for thermal expansion and mechanical vibration. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 8 of 10 Orient outdoor flexible connections to provide drip loop to avoid accumulation of water at equipment connection points. 7. Non -Metallic Conduit (Type PVC): a. Do not install Type PVC conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 122 degrees F. Conductor ratings must be limited to 75 degrees C except where installed in a trench outside buildings with concrete encasement, where 90 degrees C conductors are permitted. b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for solvent welding and fittings. 8. Duct Raceways Embedded in Slabs: a. Comply with spacing requirements as noted on Structural Drawings. b. Arrange duct raceways to cross building expansion joints with expansion fittings at right angles to the joint. C. Arrange duct raceways to ensure that each is surrounded by minimum of 1 inch of concrete without voids. 9. Stub -ups at Slabs: Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. 10. Duct Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: a. Provide insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than 4 AWG. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. 11. Duct Fittings: Use only fittings listed for use with each type of tubing or conduit and in accordance with specific fittings listed under PART 2. a. ERMC-A-PVC and ERMC-S-PVC: Patch and seal joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Provide sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 12. Expansion -Joint Fittings: Install where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction and wherever conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 13. Duct Raceways Penetrating Rooms or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: Seal duct raceway openings on both sides of rooms or walls with acoustically rated putty. 14. Identification: Install identification tags at conduits in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems". D. Interfaces with Other Work: 1. Coordinate installation with other trades in advance of installation. 2. Restore walls, floor, and roof to original condition such as watertight, fire rating, smooth and/or painted finish after duct raceway penetration. 3. Coordinate with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduit hangers and supports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 9 of 10 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 APPENDICES A. Table 260533.13-1: Conduit Selection Guidelines: Raceway Type Table 260533.13-1 Conduit Selection Guidelines Location / Application ERMC-A Indoor and outdoor applications, except where other types are listed. Exposed, non -corrosive areas. Concealed, non -corrosive areas. Under slabs in slab on grade construction / stub -ups. When installed underground or in contact with concrete, paint with two coats of bitumastic paint or use ERMC-A-PVC. LFMC Flexible connections used in conjunction with ERMC types. LFNC-B Flexible connections used in designated corrosive areas. Limited to 2-inch trade size. PVC-40 Concrete encased duct banks. Embedded in concrete slabs or structures. Underground elbows are to be ERMC type. PVC-80 Direct buried. Areas designated as corrosive. Protection of grounding electrode conductors. Protection of lightning conductors. Underground elbows are to be ERMC type. END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 33.16 - BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit bodies. 2. Metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers. 3. Nonmetallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers. 4. Junction boxes and pull boxes. 5. Cover plates for device boxes. 6. Hoods for outlet boxes. B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section: 1. See Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for electrical equipment labels. C. Related Requirements: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on the project. B. Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIRMENTS. A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Regulatory Requirements: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. B. Listing Criteria as Applicable: 1. UL 514A — Metallic Outlet Boxes. 2. UL 514B — Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 3. UL 514C — Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush -Device Boxes, and Covers. 4. UL 514D — Cover Plates for Flush -Mounted Wiring Devices. 5. UL BGUZ — Junction and Pull Boxes. 6. UL QCIT — Metallic Outlet Boxes. 7. UL QCMZ — Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes. 2.2 CONDUIT BODIES A. Description: Means for providing access to interior of conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at junction or terminal point. B. Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. Refer to Section 260533.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" for conduit types and fittings used on the project. C. Use mogul type (with rollers) for metal conduit bodies sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger by Appleton Electric. 2.3 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Outlet and Device Box Description: Box having pry out openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides of the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover. Outlet boxes do not include provisions to mount devices. Device boxes include provisions to mount a device to the box. B. Extension Ring Description: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both. C. Pressed Steel Boxes: Hot dipped galvanized with hot -dipped galvanized tile rings. For use when recessed in walls or indoors exposed in non -process ceiling areas. 1. Lighting outlet boxes: 4-11/16-inch square, 2 1/8 inch deep, minimum. 2. Device boxes with electronics device (i.e., smart switch or receptacle, occupancy sensor, dimmer, etc.): Largest size for number of gangs required. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 6 D. Cast Boxes: Type FD (deep) only. Type FS not permitted. Copper free aluminum. PVC coated when used with PVC coated conduits. Gasketed cover when used outdoors. Stainless steel screws for covers. E. Explosionproof Type Box for Class 1, Division 1 Areas: Copper free aluminum. PVC coated when used with PVC coated conduits. Internal ground screw and O-ring. Pry notches on cover for bar or wrench. 2.4 NONMETALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. Outlet and Device Box Description: Box having pry out openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides of the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover. Outlet boxes do not include provisions to mount devices. Device boxes include provisions to mount a device to the box. B. Only allowed in conjunction with PVC schedule 80 exposed conduit installations. C. Type FD (deep) box only. Type FS (shallow) box not allowed. 2.5 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES A. Description: Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable. B. NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Material: Sheet steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts. 2. Construction: Flanged box, galvanized with continuous weld seams that are ground smooth. 3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, fastened with quick connect door clamp. C. NEMA 4X Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 14 gauge, without knockouts. 2. Construction: Flanged box, continuous weld seams that are ground smooth. 3. Cover: Gasketed, hinged, fastened with quick connect door clamp. D. NEMA 4X Chemical Area Junction and Pull Boxes: When Drawings classify the area as CORROSIVE, ultraviolet resistant fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) with stainless steel hardware and gasketed covers. E. NEMA 6/6P Junction and Pull Boxes: When Drawings call out for NEMA 6 (temporary submersion at limited depth) or NEMA 6P (prolonged submersion at limited depth), die cast aluminum or nonmetallic, coordinated with conduit material. F. NEMA 7/4 Junction and Pull Boxes: When Drawings classify the area for Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous area, cast aluminum, cover gasket to meet NEMA 4 requirements, stainless steel hinged cover, stainless steel bolts. Crouse -Hinds Type EJB or equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 6 2.6 COVER PLATES FOR DEVICES BOXES A. Single Source: Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer of wiring device. Refer to Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for requirements. B. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Flush Mounted Devices in Indoor Administrative Spaces: Includes offices, conference rooms, break rooms, restrooms, and control rooms. Smooth, high impact thermoplastic or nylon. Color to match wiring device. 3. Material for Flush Mounted Devices in Indoor Industrial Spaces: Includes electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, janitor closets, and indoor process areas. Type 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel. 4. Material for Surface Mounted Devices: Match box material. 2.7 HOODS FOR OUTLET BOXES A. Description: Hood to mount to box for to create weatherproof while in use condition. B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates (Hoods) for Switches and Receptacles: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, in -use weather -resistance, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of boxes and enclosures. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements. B. Conduit Bodies: Match associated conduit type. C. Outlet boxes recessed in walls or indoors exposed in non -process ceiling areas: Pressed steel. D. Exposed Outlet and Device Boxes: Cast metal except where PVC-80 is used. Use PVC coated cast metal when conduit is PVC coated. Use non-metallic when PVC-80 is used. E. Junction and Pull Boxes: Suitable for the location and conform to the NEMA enclosure ratings and material descriptions included on Drawings. Where no size is indicated, size in accordance with NEC Article 314. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 6 B. Special Installation Techniques: 1. Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. 2. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. 3. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box, whether installed indoors or outdoors. 4. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. 5. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. 6. Support boxes in recessed ceilings independent of ceiling tiles and ceiling grid. 7. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for purpose. 8. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 9. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 10. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 11. Do not install aluminum boxes, enclosures, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 12. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path. 13. Boxes and Enclosures in Areas or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: a. Seal openings and knockouts in back and sides of boxes and enclosures with acoustically rated putty. b. Provide gaskets for wallplates and covers. 14. Identification: Install labels and nameplates in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems". 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove construction dust and debris from boxes before installing wallplates, covers, and hoods. 3.4 PROTECTION A. After installation, protect boxes from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 33.16 This page intentionally left blank. BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 6 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Manholes, hndholes, and duct accessories. B. Products Installed, but Not Furnished, under This Section: 1. Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" for conduits. 2. Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for underground -line warning tape. C. Related Requirements: 1. Division 03 for concrete and reinforcing steel. 2. Division 31 for groundwater control, trenching, excavation and backfilling including gravel and sand bedding, and surface restoration. 3. Division 33 for additional requirements associated with manholes and utilities. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: A single raceway or multiple raceways, installed singly or as components of a duct bank. B. Duct Bank: Two or more ducts installed in parallel, direct buried or with additional casing materials such as concrete. C. Handhole: An underground chamber containing electrical cables, sized such that personnel are not required to enter in order to access the cables. D. Manhole: An underground chamber containing electrical cables and equipment, sized to provide access with working space clearances. E. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 10 1. Include duct -bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components. 2. Include accessories for manholes and handholes. 3. Include underground -line warning tape. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Handholes or Manholes: a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and accessories. b. Include duct entry provisions showing locations and duct sizes. C. Include frame, cover, entry extensions if applicable, and grounding details. d. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling -in and lifting irons, and sumps. 2. Underground Conduit Layouts: In accordance with Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems". C. Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Buoyancy calculations for manholes. Calculations must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B. Field quality control reports. 1.6 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIRMENTS. A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Comply with Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" for conduits and fittings. 2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Duct Spacers: Factory -fabricated, rigid, PVC interlocking spacers; sized for type and size of duct with which used and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting duct during concreting or backfilling. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 10 B. Underground -Line Warning Tape: In accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Description: Factory -fabricated, reinforced -concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open -bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover must form top of enclosure and must have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box. 1. Load Rating: Class H-20. 2. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC", unless otherwise indicated. 3. Comply with details shown on Drawings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Oldcastle Infrastructure. C. Comply with ASTM C858 "Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures" for design and manufacturing process. D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic -butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground -water level at grade. 2.4 PRECAST MANHOLES A. Description: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. 1. Load Rating: Class H-20. 2. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC", unless otherwise indicated. 3. Comply with details shown on Drawings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Oldcastle Infrastructure Inc. C. Comply with ASTM C858 for design and manufacturing process. D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic -butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground -water level at grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 10 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of duct, duct bank, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in field. Notify Engineer if there is conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain. B. Coordinate elevations of duct and duct -bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of duct and duct banks, as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct and duct bank will drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer. C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed and protect vegetation to remain in accordance with Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication in accordance with Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing." 3.2 SELECTION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Direct Buried Duct: Type PVC-80 rigid non-metallic conduit, with RMC long radius sweep elbows. B. Concrete Encased Duct: Type PVC-40 rigid non-metallic conduit, with RMC long radius sweep elbows. C. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) type in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" with two coats of bitumastic paint or PVC coated where: 1. Direct buried conduit enters buildings, structures, and vaults (except manholes and handholes) with not less than a 10-foot length of conduit. 2. Direct buried conduits run below floor slabs in slab -on -grade construction. 3. Stub -ups outdoors or through concrete slabs. 3.3 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 3120 00 "Earthwork," but do not use heavy- duty, hydraulic -operated, compaction equipment. B. Restoration: Restore area immediately after backfilling is completed or after construction vehicle traffic in immediate area is complete. C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 10 D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 32 93 00 "Plants." E. Cut and patch existing pavement in path of underground duct, duct bank, and underground structures. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS AND DUCT BANKS A. Reference Standards: 1. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NEMA TCB 2 for installation of underground ducts and duct banks. 2. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements. B. General Requirements: 1. Comply with installation requirements for conduits in Section 26 05 33.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" and as supplemented herein. 2. Ductbank routing and manhole / handhole locations indicated on Drawings are diagrammatically depicted. Coordinate with other utilities, yard piping, yard structures and field conditions to determine required paths and depths at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Where conditions do not allow neat and consistent duct bank cross sections in accordance with Drawings due to existing underground conflicts, provide Engineer with proposed solution for approval that complies with minimum NEC installation cover requirements. For example, where the Drawings indicate direct buried PVC conduits are to be installed at a certain depth below finished grade, a concrete cap or concrete encasement may be permitted to achieve an equivalent protection. Do not deviate from Drawing details without Engineer approval. 4. Reinforce ductbanks as indicated on Drawings. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Separate underground copper signal conduits (instrumentation and telecommunication) from power conduits by a minimum of 12 inches unless noted otherwise. Keep crossing of these conduits to a minimum; cross at 90-degree angles. 6. Plug conduit ends during and after installation to prevent water, mud, and debris from entering conduit. 7. After duct installation is complete and before any cables are pulled, remove obstructions using appropriately sized mandrel for conduits 2 inch and larger. Swab clean interior of all sized conduits. Refer to CLEANING Article. C. Special Techniques: Where indicated on Drawings, install duct, spacers, and accessories into duct -bank configuration shown. Duct installation requirements in this Section also apply to duct bank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 10 2. Slope: Pitch duct minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope duct from high point between two manholes to drain in both directions. 3. Curves and Bends: Use long radius elbows, sweeps, and offsets for 3 inch and larger conduits. 4. Joints: Use solvent -cemented joints in nonmetallic duct and fittings and make watertight in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent duct do not lie in same plane. 5. Terminations at Manholes: Use end bells for PVC conduit and insulated throat grounding bushings with lay -in type lugs for RMC. 6. Building Wall Penetrations: Make transition from underground duct to RMC at least 10 feet outside building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from building and without forming trap in line. Use fittings manufactured for transition to RMC type installed. Install RMC penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 7. Underground -Line Warning Tape: Bury underground line specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" above concrete -encased duct and direct buried duct banks as shown on detail Drawings. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct -bank width over nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally across width of ducts. 8. Ground ducts and duct banks in accordance with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Concrete -Encased Ducts and Duct Bank Special Techniques: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 3120 00 "Earthwork" for pipes 6 inches or less in nominal diameter. 2. Depth: Install so top of duct envelope is as shown on detail Drawing. 3. Support duct on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. 4. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to duct to prevent floating during concreting. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at other, allowing for expansion and contraction of duct as its temperature changes during and after pour. Use expansion fittings installed in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions or use other specific measures to prevent expansion -contraction damage. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7 of 10 b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in vertical plane and install 3/4 inch reinforcing -rod dowels extending minimum of 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 7. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between duct and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow around duct and rise up in middle, uniformly filling open spaces. Do not use power -driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct -installation application. 8. Concrete Color: Red. Dye color added to concrete during batching; or dye mixed with water and applied to top of ductbank with a sprayer while concrete is wet (prior to curing); or raked into the exposed top layer of concrete. E. Direct -Buried Duct and Duct Bank Special Techniques: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct. Comply with requirements in Section 3120 00 "Earthwork" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inch in nominal diameter. 2. Depth: Install top of duct as shown on detail Drawing. 3. Support ducts on duct spacers coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. 4. Spacer Installation: Place spacers close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of duct, with not less than five spacers per 20 feet of duct. Place spacers within 24 inches of duct ends. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Secure spacers to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during backfill. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. After installing first tier of duct, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over duct and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 3120 00 'Earthwork" for installation of backfill materials. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A. Reference Standards: 1. Precast Concrete Handholes: Comply with ASTM C891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Consult Engineer for resolution of conflicting requirements. B. Special Techniques: Precast Concrete Handholes and Manholes: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 8 of 10 a. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting duct to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. b. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on level bed of crushed stone or gravel graded from 1 inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Field -cut openings for conduits in accordance with enclosure manufacturer's published instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 2. Elevations: a. Manhole Roof. Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. b. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade. C. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, d. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. e. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure. 3. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated. 4. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof, sized to match cover size. a. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder. b. Install chimney, constructed of cast-iron collars and rings, and cast-iron frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture -tight joints and waterproof grouting for frame and chimney. 5. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in Section 07 13 53 "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing". After duct has been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections, and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days. 6. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. 7. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes. 8. Field -Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in field. Use minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion. 9. Ground manholes, handholes, and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 9 of 10 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Nonconforming Work: 1. Underground ducts, raceways, and structures will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 2. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. C. Field Quality -Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING A. Pull leather -washer -type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of duct until duct cleaner indicates that duct is clear of dirt and debris. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump, and building interiors affected by Work. 1. Sweep floor, removing dirt and debris. 2. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION 26 05 43 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 43 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 10 of 10 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round sleeves. 2. Rectangular sleeves. 3. Conduit sealing bushings. 4. Sleeve -seal systems. 5. Sleeve -seal fittings. 6. Grout. 7. Pourable sealants. 8. Foam sealants. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND SLEEVES A. Steel Wall Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends and integral waterstop. B. Cast -Iron Wall Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral double waterstop. OZ-Gedney type WSK Thru Wall Floor Seal or equal for new installations with poured concrete. C. PVC Pipe Sleeves: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 2 of 6 1. General Characteristics: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. PVC Molded Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. PE or PP Molded Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: Removable, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Round, Galvanized -Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: Galvanized -steel sheet; thickness not less than 0.0239 inch; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw -fastening the sleeve to the board. 2.2 RECTANGULAR SLEEVES A. Rectangular, Galvanized -Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. General Characteristics: a. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. b. Minimum Metal Thickness: 1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness is to be 0.052 inch. 2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter not less than 50 inches or with one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness is to be 0.138 inch. 2.3 CONDUIT SEALING BUSHINGS A. General Characteristics: Malleable iron collar, one piece neoprene sealing ring, stainless steel hardware, designed for field assembly, to prevent passage of fluids and gases as conduits pass through walls and function as a sleeve -seal system. Rated for Class 1, Division 2 locations. OZ- Gedney CSB Series or CSM Series, or equal, depending upon application. 2.4 SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS A. General Characteristics: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable or between raceway and cable. B. Options: 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 3 of 6 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.5 SLEEVE -SEAL FITTINGS A. General Characteristics: Manufactured plastic, sleeve -type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit must have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.6 GROUT A. General Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non -fire -rated walls or floors. 1. Standard: ASTM C1107/CI107M, Grade B, post -hardening and volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.7 POURABLE SEALANTS A. Performance Criteria: 1. : Single -component, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. a. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2.8 FOAM SEALANTS A. Performance Criteria: 1. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. Foam expansion cannot damage cables or crack penetrated structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES FOR NON -FIRE -RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above -Grade, Non -Fire -Rated, Concrete and Masonry -Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non -Fire -Rated Walls and Floors: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 4 of 6 a. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall or floor so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. b. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless sleeve -seal system is to be installed or seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core -drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non -Fire -Rated Gypsum Board Wall Assemblies: Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for wall assemblies. C. Roof -Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot -type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. D. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve -seal systems. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. E. Underground, Exterior -Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve -seal system. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RECTANGULAR SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS A. Install sleeves in existing walls without compromising structural integrity of walls. Do not cut structural elements without reinforcing the wall to maintain the designed weight bearing and wall stiffness. B. Install conduits and cable with no crossings within the sleeve. C. Fill opening around conduits and cables with expanding foam without leaving voids. D. Provide metal sheet covering at both wall surfaces and finish to match surrounding surfaces. Metal sheet must be same material as sleeve. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 5 of 6 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT SEALING BUSHINGS A. Install where a sleeve -seal system or seal -fitting installation is required in an NEC Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVE -SEAL SYSTEMS A. Install sleeve -seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on -grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.5 SLEEVE -SEAL -FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve -seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve -seal fittings. END OF SECTION 26 05 44 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W11LTHu/'19A1A A. Section Includes: Identification products along with color and legend requirements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 73 "Power System Studies" for arc flash study labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Note that not all products listed may be utilized on this project. B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME At3.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 for color identification of hazards; 29 CFR 1910.145 for danger, caution, warning, and safety instruction signs and tags; and the following where applicable: 1. Fire -protection and fire -alarm equipment must be finished, painted, or suitably marked safety red. 2. Ceiling -mounted hangers, supports, cable trays, and raceways must be finished, painted, or suitably marked safety yellow where less than 7.7 feet above finished floor. C. Signs, labels, and tags required for personnel safety must comply with the following standards: 1. Safety Colors: NEMA Z535.1. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 8 2. Facility Safety Signs: NEMA Z535.2. 3. Safety Symbols: NEMA Z535.3. 4. Product Safety Signs and Labels: NEMA Z535.4. 5. Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes for Temporary Hazards: NEMA Z535.5. D. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, must comply with UL 969. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Color -Coding for Phase- and Voltage -Level Identification, 1000 V or Less: Use colors listed for conductors. 1. Color must be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than 8 AWG. 2. Colors for 208Y/120 V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. C. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. 3. Colors for 240/120 V Circuits (Single Phase): a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. C. Neutral: White. 4. Colors for 240A/120 V Circuits (Three Phase, Four Wire, High Leg, Center Tap): a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Orange (high leg). C. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. 5. Colors for 480Y/277 V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. C. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. 6. Colors for DC Circuits: a. Positive: Red. b. Negative: Black. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 8 7. Color for Equipment Grounding Conductors: Green. B. Color -Coding for Phase- and Voltage -Level Identification, Over 1000 V: Use double colors listed for conductors. 1. Colors for 5 kV Rated Circuits: a. Phase A: Black/Red. b. Phase B: Red/Red. C. Phase C: Blue/Red. 2. Colors for 15 kV Rated Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown/Red. b. Phase B: Orange/Red. C. Phase C: Yellow/Red. 3. Color for Equipment Grounding Conductor (600V rated): Green. C. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on orange background. D. Warning labels and nameplates/signs must include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER — ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." E. Equipment Identification and Source Nameplate: 1. Color: Black letters on a white field. 2. Material: See NAMEPLATES Article. 3. Equipment furnished under Divisions 26, 27, 28 and equipment control panels furnished under other Divisions must include equipment identification nameplates. Equipment includes, but is not limited to switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, separately mounted motor controllers, transfer switches, control panels, and named enclosures or cabinets. Nameplate to match designation indicated on Drawings. 4. Power source must be identified at all applicable equipment. Nameplate may be separate from identification nameplate or information may be contained on one nameplate. For example, a local disconnect switch for a pump motor could have one nameplate reading "EFFLUENT PUMP NO. 4" for the identification nameplate and a second nameplate reading "FED FROM MCC-2". Or a two-line nameplate combining the information for both identification and source. F. Device Identification Labels: 1. Color: Black letters on a white field.. 2. Material: Self-adhesive type, machine generated, 1/4-inch high letters. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 8 3. Devices to be labeled with panel and branch circuit number include receptacles, wall switches, lighting fixtures, photocells, emergency lights, exit lights, instruments, etc. For example, a light switch powered from panelboard LP-2 and branch circuit 4 would have the label "LP-2/4" or "LP-2/CKT 4". 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Material: 1. Engraved, engraved plastic (lamicoid). 2. Minimum size: Not less than 1/16 inch thick by 3/4 inch high by 2-1/2 inches wide. 3. Lettering: Upper case, 3/16-inch-high minimum. 2.4 LABELS, BANDS, TUBES, AND SLEEVES A. Self -Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Machine -printed, 3 mil thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure -sensitive adhesive. Printed text is black, permanent, and waterproof. Self -Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical -resistant; self -laminating, protective shield over legend. Labels sized such that clear shield overlaps entire printed legend. B. Self -Adhesive Labels: Polyester or Vinyl, thermal, transfer -printed, 3 mil thick, multicolor, weather- and UV -resistant, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. C. Heat -Shrink Preprinted Tubes (Sleeve Type): Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine - printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at maximum of 200 degrees F. Comply with UL 224. Printed text is black, permanent, and waterproof. 2.5 TAPES A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. B. Self -Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mil thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. C. Underground -Line Warning Tape: Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape must be permanent and may not be damaged by burial operations. C. Tape material and ink must be chemically inert and not be subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 8 2. Color and Printing: a. Comply with APWA Uniform Color Code using NEMA Z535.1 safety colors. b. Inscriptions for Red Tapes: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW". C. Inscriptions for Orange Tapes: "CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW". 3. Detectable Tape: a. Detectable three -layer laminate, consisting of printed pigmented polyolefin film, solid aluminum -foil core, and clear protective film that allows inspection of continuity of conductive core; bright colored, continuous -printed on one side with inscription of utility, compounded for direct -burial service. b. Width: 6 inches. C. Overall Thickness: 5 mil. d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. 2.6 TAGS A. Metal Tags: Embossed, Type 316 stainless steel, 0.01 inch thick, punched for use with tie fastener. Secure with 0.048-inch diameter stainless steel band fastened with compression wire clamps B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyester or Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color -coded for phase and voltage level, with factory screened permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener. 2.7 CABLE TIES A. UV -Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self -extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 degrees F in accordance with ASTM D638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 degrees F. 4. Color: Black. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Nameplates/Signs: Self -tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. 3.2 SELECTION OF IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 1000 V or Less: For conductors at termination points and in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape if conductor is not factory colored to identify phase, neutral, and ground conductors. Use self- adhesive labels to identify circuit. B. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 1000 V: For conductors at termination points and in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl tape to identify phase conductors. Use nameplate or nonmetallic tag secured with cable ties to indicate phase and indicate circuit designation. C. Control -Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. D. Control -Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat -shrink preprinted tubes or self-adhesive labels with conductor designation. E. Spare Conductors or Cables: Attach nonmetallic tags or self-adhesive labels to conductors and list source. F. SCADA Systems, Communication Systems, Fire Alarm Systems or Other Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: For identification at terminations, provide heat -shrink preprinted tubes or self-adhesive labels with conductor designation. G. Conduit Identification: For designated identification as indicated on Drawings provide metal tags. H. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes, 24 inches by 24 inches and Larger: For voltage identification provide nameplates using 1-inch-high minimum letters, white letters on red background. I. Equipment Identification: For identification and source information provide nameplate(s) per COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS Article. Device Identification: For source and circuit information provide self-adhesive label per COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS Article. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7 of 8 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install identification product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. D. Verify identity of item before installing identification products. E. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. F. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. G. Apply wire markers so entire designation is clearly visible. H. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 250573 "Power System Studies". I. Identify the system voltage (e.g., 208/120 VOLTS, 480 VOLTS, 4160 VOLTS) at the covers of large pull boxes or junction boxes. Install field device (instruments, receptacles, switches, etc.) labels. K. Install equipment nameplates. Nameplate fastening requirements: 1. NEMA I and 12 Enclosures: Screw mounted using stainless steel screws. 2. Other Enclosure Types: Bonded using epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two-sided foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. L. Panelboard and Transformer Panel Assembly Identification: 1. Provide equipment identification nameplates as previously described. 2. Label branch circuit phase and neutral wires with associated pole number using self- adhesive labels or type written sleeve type labels. 3. Install typed as built circuit directory listing with unique load identification. M. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 18 inch overall. 2. Install underground -line warning tape for direct -buried cables and cables in raceways. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 8 of 8 N. Install Tags. Fastening Requirements: 1. Secure metal tags using stainless -steel ties. 2. Secure nonmetallic tags with UV -stabilized cable ties. END OF SECTION 260553 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 1 of 12 SECTION 26 05 73 - POWER SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section includes a computer -based study for: 1. Short circuit report. 2. Protective device coordination report. 3. Motor starting report. 4. Arc flash report. 5. Harmonic analysis report. B. Study encompasses the power distribution system of the City of Fort Worth Village Creek Water Reclamation Facility. Facility is located at 4500 Wilma Ln, Arlington, TX. C. Study includes the upstream utility and existing Switchgear EDS breaker(s) SFA1 and SFB1 to the new equipment this contract.. Obtain the latest study available from the Owner and update the file to include all new equipment. Equipment included, but not limited to: 1. Substations and distribution. 2. Medium Voltage Pad -mounted Switchgear, Low voltage Switchgear, and panelboards. 3. Transformers. 4. Motor control centers. 5. Variable frequency controllers. 6. Disconnect switches. 7. 480V control panels. D. Obtain all data necessary to perform the study. Data included, but not limited to: 1. Up to date one -line diagrams. 2. Equipment data. 3. Cable sizes and lengths. 4. Existing protective device settings. 5. Electric utility information: available fault current, protective device equipment information and settings, X/R ratios, transformer impedances and ratings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 2 of 12 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boundary, Arc Flash: When an arc flash hazard exists, an approach limit from an arc source at which the incident energy equals 1.2 cal/cm2 (5 J/cm2). B. Boundary, Limited Approach: An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which a shock hazard exists. C. Boundary, Restricted Approach: An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which there is an increased likelihood of electric shock, due to electrical arc -over combined with inadvertent movement. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. Existing to remain items shall remain functional throughout the construction period. E. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA. F. One -Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein. G. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies. H. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. I. Preliminary Short Circuit Report: Report that includes the maximum available utility fault current, proposed equipment, and existing equipment to determine if new equipment may be released for manufacturing and existing equipment is adequate for the calculated short circuit levels. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal condition or current flow exists and then removes the affected portion of the circuit from the system. K. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. L. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. M. Single -Line Diagram: See "One -Line Diagram." N. Supplier: The person, firm or corporation identified as such to provide the power system study and means the Supplier or its authorized agent. See also Power Systems Analysis Specialist. O. VFD: Variable frequency drive. Interchangeable with variable frequency controller. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 3 of 12 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Supplier qualifications per Quality Assurance paragraph. Submit prior to starting study. Include the following: 1. Brief description of each qualifying study. 2. Name of owner of installation on which study was performed with address, telephone number, and contact person. 3. Date of study. 4. Any other information indicating the firm's experiences and ability to perform the work and business status. B. Preliminary Power System Study Report. Report must be approved prior to release for manufacture of major electrical equipment including but not limited to switchgear, switchboards, distribution panels, and motor control centers. Fault data from the utility must be included and not assumed or submittal will be rejected. C. Final Power System Study Report. Report must be approved prior to energization of new major electrical equipment. Revise study as required for changes during construction. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: 1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer. 2. For Power System Analysis Specialist. 3. For Field Adjusting Agency. B. If requested, Product Certificates: For power system study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399, IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Final power system study updated with any changes made after equipment start-up. B. Digital computer files with full read-write access of the complete power system model and library. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Study using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis. B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 4 of 12 C. Manual calculations are unacceptable. D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: 1. Design computer program to perform short-circuit studies or have a function, component, or add -on module designed to perform short-circuit studies. 2. Develop computer program under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification. 3. Complies with IEEE 399, IEEE 141, IEEE 242, IEEE 519, IEEE 1015, and IEEE 1584 as applicable to the project scope. E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed in the state where Project is located and has regularly engaged in this electrical engineering study specialty for minimum of five years and has performed at least three projects of similar complexity to this project within the last three years. Perform all elements of the study under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer. Specialist shall be of the manufacturers of the equipment under evaluation. F. Power System Study Certification: Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: 1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work. 2. A member company of NETA. 3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 POWER SYSTEM STUDY MEETINGS A. Supplier's professional engineer responsible for the study to attend a meeting with the Engineer and Owner at the Owner's facility up to and including three times. B. Purpose of the three meetings: 1. Initial meeting discusses the study's scope and the Owner's operational and maintenance requirements prior to the preliminary study submittal. 2. Second meeting discusses the preliminary study and its recommendations. Based on this meeting, the Owner may request modifications to the studies' recommended protective settings to reduce the arc flash hazard or meet other operational objectives. 3. Third and final meeting presents the final study and its recommendations. C. Provide a minimum of three-week notice to the Owner and Engineer in advance of all projected meeting dates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 5 of 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS A. Acceptable Software: 1. SKM System Analysis, Inc.: Power*Tools. 2. No equal. 2.2 POWER SYSTEM STUDY REPORT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Except for one -line diagrams, standard 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch pages, with total pages numbered. B. Electronic PDF format copy with electronic bookmarks for each section. C. Signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. D. Organized in the following order: 1. Executive Summary. 2. Short Circuit Analysis. 3. Short Circuit Computer Printout. 4. Protective Device Coordination. 5. Motor Starting. 6. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. 7. Harmonic Analysis. 8. Utility Data. 9. Modeled One Line Diagrams. E. Information on one -line diagrams, legible when printed at 11-inch x 17-inch. Show the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA), impedance, and voltage ratings. 4. Motor designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor -control center, and panelboard designations and ratings. 6. Derating factors and environmental conditions. 7. Any revisions to electrical equipment required by the study. F. Identifiers between the one -line diagram, short circuit study, coordination study, and arc flash study to be the same. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 6 of 12 2.3 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY A. Include summary of distribution system, major assumptions, adequacy of equipment to safely clear or close on any fault, identify problem areas and recommendations for resolving problem areas. 2.4 SHORT CIRCUIT A. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551 (new 3002 series). B. Include normal powered configuration, and alternate modes of operation (i.e. bus ties closed). C. Include minimum and maximum possible fault conditions. Address three-phase bolted as well as ground fault conditions. D. Consider the fault contribution of all motors operating during the maximum demand condition of the motors. E. Calculate short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties at each medium voltage switchgear bus, low voltage switchgear bus, switchboard, motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelboard and other significant locations throughout the systems. Include the X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, KVA and symmetrical fault -current in the short circuit tabulations. Provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas. Include in tabulations fault impedance, X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit KVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault -currents. F. Include representation of the site power system, the base quantities selected, impedance source data, calculation methods and tabulations, one -line diagrams, conclusions and recommendations. G. Identify available fault current at each bus and evaluate system elements including but not limited to equipment, protective devices, and cables. H. Base current transformers' ratio and burden calculations on a 10 percent maximum ratio error per IEEE C57.13. Identify current transformers that will not allow the protective devices to operate within acceptable IEEE error margins and recommend corrective action. I. List momentary, interrupting, and/or withstand rating of all key elements of the distribution system along with the maximum available fault current in tabular form and clearly indicate the adequacy of the element with PASS / FAIL designation. Short Circuit Computer Printout: 1. Calculations shall be in sufficient detail for easy review. 2. Back up calculations shall become part of the final report. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 7 of 12 2.5 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION A. Comply with IEEE 242 (new 3004 series). B. Utilize results from the short circuit study and balance the competing objectives of protection and continuity of service for the system specified, considering the basic factors of sensitivity, selectivity and speed. Include all system protective devices in the coordination analysis, not just overcurrent protective devices. This includes, but is not limited to, under and over voltage protective relays, frequency relays, differential relays and reverse power relays. C. Show graphic indication of coordination between protective devices in the form of full color time -current coordination (TCC) plots with each protective device curve in a unique color for easy review. D. Provide separate TCC plots for each mode of operation. Provide separate TCC plots for "normal" and "stand by" operation. Show maximum fault values in each case. Both power sources shown on one plot is unacceptable. E. Provide separate TCC for phase over -current and ground fault. F. Show no more than six devices on one TCC. Of these six curves, two (the largest upstream device and the smallest downstream device) shall repeat curves shown on other coordination plots to provide cross-reference. Designate each TCC with a unique identifier and include each TCC identifier and descriptive title in the study's table of contents. G. Include in each TCC the following as applicable: 1. TCC name and description. 2. One -line diagram. 3. Identifiers on one -line diagram and curves. 4. Significant motor starting characteristics. 5. Appropriate NEC protection points. 6. Appropriate ANSI/IEEE protection points. 7. Magnetizing inrush points of transformers. 8. Transformer damage curves. 9. Complete operating bands for low voltage circuit breaker trip devices and fuses. 10. Relay coil taps, time -dial settings and pickup settings. 11. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. 12. Power cable withstand curves. H. Terminate device characteristic curve on TCC at a point reflecting the maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which that device is exposed, based on the short circuit study. I. Select each primary protective device for a delta-to-wye-connected transformer so the characteristic or operating band is within the transformer parameters; where feasible, include a parameter equivalent to 58 percent of the ANSI C37.91 withstand curve to afford protection for secondary line -to -ground faults. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 8 of 12 J. Separate low voltage power circuit breakers from each other and the associated primary protective device, by a 16 percent current margin for coordination and protection in the event of line -to -line faults. K. Separate protective relays by a 0-3-second time margin for the maximum 3 phase fault conditions to assure proper selectivity. L. Optimize settings for breakers and relays to provide the most effective protection practicable for all modes and power sources. M. Include at least all devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center and/or power distribution panelboard. Include all adjustable setting ground fault protective devices. N. Provide tabulations of recommended settings for all protective devices. Where devices are existing, highlight any changes from the existing setting to the proposed recommended setting. O. Provide all information required to program/set multifunction solid state relays. 2.6 ARC FLASH HAZARD A. Comply with IEEE 1584, NFPA 70, and NFPA 70E as applicable. B. Utilize short circuit and protective device coordination results to provide arc flash hazard analysis. Perform calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584 or NFPA 70E with the method identified within the report. C. Calculate the incident energy levels at each faulted bus for each mode of operation and for both maximum and minimum fault currents. D. Include calculations at line side and load side of main breakers, where applicable. E. Provide tabular report for all modes and conditions and include "worst case" summary. Use the "worst case" to generate the arc flash labels. Include: 1. Fault location. 2. Arcing fault magnitude. 3. Protective device clearing time. 4. Duration of the arc. 5. Arc flash boundary. 6. Working distance. 7. Incident energy. 8. Electrode configuration. F. Highlight any available incident energy over 40 cal/cm2 and provide recommendations to mitigate the hazard. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 9 of 12 G. Arc Flash Labels: 1. Machine printed, 4-inches x 4-inches (nominal), thermal transfer, high adhesion polyester. 2. Provide UV resistant laminate for outdoor labels. H. Arc Flash Label Information: 1. Equipment name. 2. Identifier LINE or LOAD where equipment has potential different energy levels. 3. Arc flash hazard information: arc flash boundary and incident energy in cal/cm2. 4. Shock hazard information: limited approach and restricted approach boundaries. 5. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) requirements. 6. Study Supplier, project number, and date. I. Provide arc flash label sample with preliminary report. J. Do not be print the labels until equipment is energized and protective devices set according to the approved final protective device coordination study. 2.7 HARMONIC ANALYSIS A. Comply with IEEE 519 and IEEE 3002.8. B. Provide a harmonic analysis for all major harmonic producing equipment to determine the harmonic currents and voltages of the electrical distribution system. Include utility and alternate power sources, if applicable. C. Provide a harmonic current and voltage profile for the complete electrical distribution system. At a minimum, the voltage profile shall include voltage values at the utility service point, and at each switchgear/switchboard and motor control center bus. D. Provide calculations for all operating modes and the following conditions: 1. One profile for all duty equipment running with variable frequency controllers at full speed. 2. One profile for all duty equipment running with variable frequency controllers at 60% speed. E. Include in the analysis: 1. Explanation of analysis method. 2. Explanation of analysis and recommendations to meet the specified limits. 3. Calculations and/or computer printouts. 4. Harmonic current and voltage profiles up to the fiftieth harmonic. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 10 of 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the study. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one -line diagram. Call any discrepancies to Engineer's attention. 2. For equipment included as Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For equipment that is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. Qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be as defined by NFPA 70E. B. Gather and tabulate the required input data to support the power system study. C. Field data gathering for existing systems shall be under direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. D. Data included, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product data for overcurrent protective devices and existing settings. 2. Power sources and ties. 3. For switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers, ampacity and SCCR in amperes RMS symmetrical. 4. For transformers, kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and impedance. 6. For circuit breakers, trip units, and fuses, manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. For busways, manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material. 8. For motors, horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 9. Conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, shield parameters for VFD cable, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 10. For relays, manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings. 11. Derating factors. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do all testing and adjustment prior to the energization of new equipment. B. Test existing adjustable protective devices in accordance with NETA MTS. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 11 of 12 C. Test new adjustable protective devices in accordance with NETA ATS. D. Adjust existing and new protective devices according to approved coordination study. E. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. F. After successful testing and adjustment, install calibration sticker with Field Adjusting Agency name, employee initials, and date of calibration at each relay or protective device. G. After energization, minor adjustments to settings may be required to commission the equipment. H. Submit field report and list any changes made during field adjustment or commissioning for update for record submittal of study. I. For adjustable breakers, install sticker listing final adjusted settings, i.e. LTPU, LTD, STPU, STD, INST, GFPU, and GFD. 3.3 ARC FLASH LABELING A. After the field adjustment of relays and protective devices, apply arc flash study labels. B. Apply arc flash labels on the front covers of the following equipment: 1. Medium voltage switches. 2. Switchgear, switchboards, and panelboards. 3. Motor control centers. 4. Variable frequency controllers. 5. Disconnect switches. 6. 480V control panels. 7. C. Apply arc -flash labels at each section for large equipment such as switchgear and motor control centers. D. Install LINE and LOAD arc -flash labels as applicable. E. Remove any previous arc flash study labels as applicable and install new labels under the direction of the Power System Analysis Specialist. END OF SECTION 26 05 73 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES Page 12 of 12 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 1 of 14 SECTION 26 12 19 - PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• II1LTJ1LTA/:1ZOVA A. Section includes pad -mounted, liquid -filled, medium -voltage distribution transformers, with primary and secondary bushings within or without air -terminal enclosures. l�c� 7�1�M1►111Y[�]►F.y A. BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level. B. Bushing: An insulating structure including a central conductor, or providing a central passage for a conductor, with provision for mounting on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for the purpose of insulating the conductor from the barrier and conducting current from one side of the barrier to the other. C. Bushing Elbow: An insulated device used to connect insulated conductors to separable insulated connectors on dead -front, pad -mounted transformers and to provide a fully insulated connection. This is also called an "elbow connector." D. Bushing Insert: That component of a separable insulated connector that is inserted into a bushing well to complete a dead -front, load break or nonload break, separable insulated connector (bushing). E. Bushing Well: A component of a separable insulated connector, either permanently welded or clamped to an enclosure wall or barrier, having a cavity that receives a replaceable component (bushing insert) to complete the separable insulated connector (bushing). F. Elbow Connector: See "bushing elbow" above. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 2 of 14 B. Shop Drawings: For pad -mounted, liquid -filled, medium -voltage transformers. 1. Include plans and elevations showing major components and features. a. Include a plan view and cross section of equipment base, showing clearances, required workspace, and locations of penetrations for grounding and conduits. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include single -line diagram. 4. Include list of materials. 5. Include nameplate data. 6. Manufacturer's published time -current curves of the transformer high -voltage fuses, with transformer damage curve, inrush curve, and thru fault current indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Utilities site plan, drawn to scale, showing heavy equipment or truck access paths for maintenance and replacement. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For transformer assembly, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity, and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Product Certificates: For transformers, signed by product manufacturer. E. Source quality -control reports. F. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following extra materials, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents: 1. Three replacement power fuses or refills. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 3 of 14 2. One refinishing kit for field touch-up of paint. 3. One 15-gallon drum of insulating oil. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 17_171om9Zs]1800V 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with IEEE C2. C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.00. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: The transformers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. l . The term "withstand" means "the transformer will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the transformer will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 3. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 4. Component Response Modification Factor: 6.0. B. Windings Material: Copper. C. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution Class; metal-oxide-varistor type, fully shielded, separable -elbow type, suitable for plugging into the inserts provided in the high - voltage section of the transformer. Connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any disconnecting device. D. Winding Connections: The connection of windings and terminal markings shall comply with IEEE C57.12.70. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 4 of 14 E. Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. F. Insulation: Transformer kVA rating shall be as follows: The average winding temperature rise above a 30 deg C ambient temperature shall not exceed 65 deg C and 80 deg C hottest -spot temperature rise at rated kVA when tested according to IEEE C57.12.90, using combination of connections and taps that give the highest average winding temperature rise. G. Tap Changer: External handle, for de -energized operation. H. Tank: Sealed, with welded -on cover. I. Enclosure Integrity: Comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for pad -mounted enclosures that contain energized electrical equipment in excess of 600 V that may be exposed to the public. Mounting: An integral skid mounting frame, suitable to allow skidding or rolling of transformer in any direction, and with provision for anchoring frame to pad. K. Insulating Liquids: 1. Mineral Oil: ASTM D 3487, Type II, and tested for compliance with ASTM D It 7. 2. Less -Flammable Liquids: a. Edible -Seed -Oil -Based Dielectric: Listed and labeled by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic, having passed the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development G.L.203 with zero mortality, and shall be certified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency as biodegradable, meeting Environmental Technology Verification requirements. b. Biodegradable and Nontoxic Dielectric: Listed and labeled by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to ASTM D 92. L. Sound level shall comply with NEMA TR 1 requirements. M. Corrosion Protection: Transformer coating system shall be factory applied, complying with requirements of IEEE C57.12.28, in manufacturer's standard color green. 2.3 THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturers: Subiect to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering_ Products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. ABB, Power Grids Division. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Prolec GE, A Xi2nux and General Electric Company Joint Venture. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 5 of 14 4. Or approved equal (anv manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with IEEE C57.12.26. C. Compartment Construction: 1. Single -Compartment Construction: Clamshell style, with provision for padlocking, hinged cover, and single -point latching. 2. Double -Compartment Construction: Individual compartments for high- and low -voltage sections, formed by steel isolating barriers that extend full height and depth of compartments, with hinged, lift-off doors and three-point latching, with a stop in the open position and provision for padlocking. D. Primary Fusing: Designed and rated to provide thermal protection of transformer by sensing overcurrent and high liquid temperature. I . 150-kV BIL current -limiting fuses, conforming to requirements of IEEE C37.47. 2. Interrupting Rating: 50,000 rms A symmetrical at system voltage. 3. Fuse Assembly: Bayonet -type, liquid -immersed, expulsion fuses in series with liquid - immersed, partial -range, current -limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature to provide thermal protection to the transformer. 4. Provide bayonet fuse assembly with an oil retention valve and an external drip shield inside the housing to eliminate or minimize oil spills. Valve shall close when fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield is installed. 5. Provide a conspicuously displayed warning adjacent to bayonet fuse(s), cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless transformer has been de -energized and tank pressure has been released. E. High -Voltage Section: Dead -front design. 1. To connect primary cable, use separable insulated connectors; coordinated with and complying with requirements of Section 26 05 13 "Medium -Voltage Cables." Bushings shall be one-piece units, with ampere and BIL ratings the same as connectors. 2. Bushing inserts and feed -through inserts: a. Conform to the requirements of IEEE 386. b. Rated at 200 A, with voltage class matching connectors. Provide a parking stand near each bushing well. Equip parking stands with insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized load -break elbow connectors on parking stands. C. Provide insulated protective caps for insulating and sealing out moisture from unused bushing inserts and insulated standoff bushings. 3. Bushing wells configured for loop -feed application. 4. Access to liquid -immersed fuses. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 6 of 14 5. Dead -front surge arresters. 6. Tap -changer operator. 7. Load -Break Switch: a. Radial -feed, liquid -immersed type with voltage class and BIL matching that of separable connectors, with a continuous current rating and load -break rating of 200 amperes, and a make -and -latch rating of 12 kA rms symmetrical. 8. Ground pad. F. Low -Voltage Section: Bushings with spade terminals drilled for terminating the number of conductors indicated on the Drawings, and the lugs that comply with requirements of Section 26 05 19 "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." G. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Rating (kVA): As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Voltage Ratings: V - As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Connection: a. Primary: Delta. b. Secondary: Grounded wye. 4. Taps: Two 2.5 percent, full -capacity taps above and two 2.5 percent, full capacity taps below rated primary voltage. 5. Transformer BIL (kV): a. Primary: Comply with IEEE C57.12.26 requirements. b. Secondary:30kV. 6. Minimum Tested Impedance (Percent at 85 deg C): 4.03. 7. K-factor: complying with UL 1562. 8. Comply with FM Global Class No. 3990. 9. Comply with UL listing requirements for combination classification and listing for transformer and less -flammable insulating liquid. H. Transformer Accessories: 1. Drain and filter connection. 2. Filling and top filter press connections. 3. Pressure -vacuum gauge. 4. Dial -type analog thermometer with alarm contacts. 5. Magnetic liquid level indicator with high and low alarm contacts. 6. Automatically resetting pressure -relief device. Device flow shall be as recommended by manufacturer. With alarm contacts and a manual bleeder. 7. Stainless -steel ground connection pads. 8. Machine -engraved nameplate, made of anodized aluminum or stainless steel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 7 of 14 9. Furnish two distribution class lightning arresters mounted in the high voltage primary compartment for surge protection. SCHEDULE 1 - 2.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Transformers shall be suitable for operation under service conditions specified as usual service conditions in IEEE C57.12.00, except for the following: 1. Altitudes above 3300 feet. 2. Cooling air temperature exceeds limits. 3. Excessive load current harmonic factor. 4. Operation above rated voltage or below rated frequency. 5. Exposure to explosive environments. 6. Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust. 7. Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray, and dripping water. 8. Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting. 9. Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures. 10. Unusual transportation or storage conditions. 11. Unusual grounding resistance conditions. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. High -Voltage Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of high - voltage compartment door(s). Sign legend shall be "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2-inch-high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. 2. Arc Flash Warning Label: Provide self-adhesive warning signs on outside of high -voltage compartment door(s), warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate personal protective equipment required. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certificate that the transformer design tests comply with IEEE C57.12.90. Perform the following factory -certified routine tests on each transformer for this Project: a. Resistance. b. Turns ratio, polarity, and phase relation. C. Transformer no-load losses and excitation current at 100 percent of ratings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 8 of 14 d. Transformer impedance voltage and load loss. e. Operation of all devices. f. Lightning impulse. g. Low frequency. h. Leak. i. Transformer no-load losses and excitation current at 110 percent of ratings. j. Insulation power factor. k. Applied potential, except that this test is not required for single-phase transformers or for three-phase Y-Y-connected transformers. 1. Induced potential. in. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated voltage connection and at tap extreme connections. n. Ratios on rated voltage connection and at tap extreme connections. o. Polarity and phase relation on rated voltage connection. p. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated voltage connection. q. Exciting current at rated voltage on rated voltage connection. r. Impedance. 17_171IBM *114Wells 0meI 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine pad -mounted, liquid -filled, medium -voltage transformers upon delivery. 1. Upon delivery of transformers and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for any damage that may have occurred during shipment or storage. 2. Verify that tie rods and chains are undamaged and tight, and that all blocking and bracing is tight. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit, and that readings from transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Verify that there is no indication of external damage and no dents or scratches in doors and sill, tank walls, radiators and fins, or termination provisions. 4. Verify that there is no evidence of insulating -liquid leakage on transformer surfaces, at weld seams, on high- or low -voltage bushing parts, and at transformer base. 5. Verify that there is positive pressure or vacuum on tank. Check pressure gauge; it is required to read other than zero. 6. Compare transformers and accessories received with bill of materials to verify that shipment is complete. Verify that transformers and accessories conform with manufacturer's quotation and shop drawings. If shipment is incomplete or does not comply with Project requirements, notify manufacturer in writing immediately. 7. Verify presence of polychlorinated biphenyl content labeling. 8. Unload transformers carefully, observing all packing label warnings and handling instructions. 9. Open termination compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or foreign material, and water or moisture. B. Handling: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 9 of 14 1. Handle transformers carefully, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, to avoid damage to enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, tank, and internal components. Do not subject transformers to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling. 2. Protect transformer termination compartments against entrance of dust, rain, and snow. 3. Transport transformers upright, to avoid internal stresses on core and coil mounting assembly and to prevent trapping air in windings. Do not tilt or tip transformers. 4. Verify that transformer weights are within rated capacity of handling equipment. 5. Use only manufacturer -recommended points for lifting, jacking, and pulling. Use all lifting lugs when lifting transformers. 6. Use jacks only at corners of tank base plate. 7. Use nylon straps of same length to balance and distribute weight when handling transformers with a crane. 8. Use spreaders or a lifting beam to obtain a vertical lift and to protect transformer from straps bearing against enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15 degrees from vertical. 9. Exercise care not to damage tank base structure when handling transformer using skids or rollers. Use skids to distribute stresses over tank base when using rollers under large transformers. C. Storage: 1. Store transformers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Transformers may be stored outdoors. If possible, store transformers at final installation locations on concrete pads. If dry concrete surfaces are unavailable, use pallets of adequate strength to protect transformers from direct contact with ground. Ensure transformer is level. 3. Ensure that transformer storage location is clean and protected from severe conditions. Protect transformers from dirt, water, contamination, and physical damage. Do not store transformers in presence of corrosive or explosive gases. Protect transformers from weather when stored for more than three months. 4. Store transformers with compartment doors closed. 5. Regularly inspect transformers while in storage and maintain documentation of storage conditions, noting any discrepancies or adverse conditions. Verify that an effective pressure seal is maintained using pressure gauges. Visually check for insulating -liquid leaks and rust spots. D. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for pad -mounted, liquid - filled, medium -voltage transformers and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. E. Examine roughing -in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit -entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders will cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. F. Examine concrete bases for suitable conditions for transformer installation. G. Pre -Installation Checks: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 10 of 14 1. Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement. 2. Remove a sample of insulating liquid according to ASTM D 923. Insulating -liquid values shall comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.4. Sample shall be tested for the following: a. Dielectric Breakdown Voltage: ASTM D 877 or ASTM D 1816. b. Acid Neutralization Number: ASTM D 974. C. Specific Gravity: ASTM D 1298. d. Interfacial Tension: ASTM D 971. e. Color: ASTM D 1500. f. Visual Condition: ASTM D 1524. g. Water in Insulating Liquids: Comply with ASTM D 1533. h. Power Factor or Dissipation Factor: ASTM D 924. H. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at transformer location. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers on cast -in -place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Transformer shall be installed level and plumb and shall tilt less than 1.5 degrees while energized. C. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" and Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and IEEE C2. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. For counterpoise, use tinned bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG, buried not less than 30 inches below grade interconnecting the grounding electrodes. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to transformer enclosure and then to grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors, sized as shown. Keep lead lengths as short as practicable, with no kinks or sharp bends. 2. Fence and equipment connections shall not be smaller than No. 4 AWG. Ground fence at each gate post and corner post and at intervals not exceeding 10 ft.. Bond each gate section to fence post using 1/8 by 1 inch tinned flexible braided copper strap and clamps. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 11 of 14 3. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. 4. Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding terminal on transformer enclosure. 5. Complete transformer tank grounding and lightning arrester connections prior to making any other electrical connections. B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. Maintain air clearances between energized live parts and between live parts and ground for exposed connections in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2. Bundle associated phase, neutral, and equipment grounding conductors together within transformer enclosure. Arrange conductors such that there is not excessive strain that could cause loose connections. Allow adequate slack for expansion and contraction of conductors. C. Terminate medium -voltage cables in incoming section of transformers according to Section 26 05 13 "Medium -Voltage Cables." 3.4 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with installation requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install warning signs as required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.269. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. General Field -Testing Requirements: a. Comply with provisions of NFPA 70B Ch. "Testing and Test Methods." b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. After installing transformer but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at the transformer is tested at specified value or less. d. After installing transformer and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. e. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 12 of 14 1) Verify equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents. 2) Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two methods: a) Use a low -resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque -wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt -torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. f. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. g. Prepare test and inspection reports. Record as -left set points of all adjustable devices. 2. Medium -Voltage Surge Arrester Field Tests: a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 2) Verify arresters are clean. 3) Verify that ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode. b. Electrical Test: 1) Perform an insulation -resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal -to - ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Replace units that fail to comply with recommended minimum insulation resistance listed in that table. 2) Perform a watts -loss test. Evaluate watts -loss values by comparison with similar units and test equipment manufacturer's published data. Liquid -Filled Transformer Field Tests: a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1) Test dew point of tank gases if applicable. 2) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 3) Verify bushings are clean. 4) Verify that alarm, control, and trip settings on temperature and level indicators are set and operate within manufacturer's recommended settings. 5) Verify that liquid level in tanks is within manufacturer's published tolerances. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 13 of 14 6) Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer. 7) Verify presence of transformer surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified. 8) Verify that as -left tap connections are as specified. b. Electrical Tests: 1) Perform insulation -resistance tests winding -to -winding and each winding - to -ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index; the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0. 2) Perform power -factor or dissipation -factor tests on all windings according to test equipment manufacturer's published data. Maximum winding insulation power-factor/dissipation-factor values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.3. 3) Measure core insulation resistance at 500-V do if the core is insulated and the core ground strap is removable. Core insulation -resistance values shall not be less than 1 megohm at 500-V dc. 4) Perform a power -factor or dissipation -factor tip -up test on windings greater than 2.5 W. 5) Perform turns -ratio tests at tap positions. Turns -ratio test results shall not deviate by more than one-half percent from either adjacent coils or calculated ratio. If test fails, replace transformer. 6) Perform an excitation -current test on each phase. The typical excitation - current test data pattern for a three-legged core transformer is two similar current readings and one lower current reading. Investigate and correct if test shows a different pattern. 7) Measure resistance of each winding at each tap connection, and record temperature -corrected winding -resistance values in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 8) Perform an applied -voltage test on high- and low -voltage windings -to - ground. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, Sections 10.2 and 10.9. This test is not required for single-phase transformers and for three-phase Y-Y- connected transformers. 9) Verify correct secondary voltage, phase -to -phase and phase -to -neutral, after energization and prior to loading. 10) Remove a sample of insulating liquid according to ASTM D 923, and perform dissolved -gas analysis according to IEEE C57.104 or ASTM D 3612. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 12 19 END OF SECTION 26 12 19 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS PAD -MOUNTED, LIQUID -FILLED, MEDIUM -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 14 of 14 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 1 of 19 SECTION 26 13 29 - MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Switchgear consisting of a gas -tight tank containing SF6 gas, load -interrupter switches and resettable fault interrupters with visible open gaps and integral visible grounds, and a microprocessor -based overcurrent control. 2. Load -interrupter switch terminals equipped with bushings rated 200 amperes continuous. 3. Fault -interrupter terminals, equipped with bushing wells rated 200 amperes continuous. 4. Bushings rated 200 amperes continuous to provide for elbow connection. 5. Manual operating mechanisms and viewing windows, located on the opposite side of the tank from the bushings and bushing wells, so that operating personnel shall not be required to perform any routine operations in close proximity to high -voltage elbows and cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level. B. Bushing: An insulating structure including a central conductor, or providing a central passage for a conductor, with provision for mounting on a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for insulating the conductor from the barrier and conducting current from one side of the barrier to the other. C. Bushing Elbow: An insulated device used to connect insulated conductors to separable insulated connectors on dead -front, pad -mounted switchgear and to provide a fully insulated connection. Also called an "elbow connector." D. Bushing Insert: That component of a separable insulated connector that is inserted into a bushing well to complete a dead -front, load break or non -load break, separable insulated connector (bushing). E. Bushing Well: A component of a separable insulated connector, either permanently welded or clamped to an enclosure wall or barrier, having a cavity that receives a replaceable component (bushing insert) to complete the separable insulated connector (bushing). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 2 of 19 F. Fault Interrupter: A self-controlled mechanical switching device capable of making, carrying, and automatically interrupting an alternating current. It includes an assembly of control elements to detect overcurrents and control the fault interrupter. A fault interrupter always consists of a switching device, a control unit, and sensors for current and/or voltage sensing. G. Hotstick: An insulated stick, usually made of fiberglass, that is used to work energized overhead conductors and operate electrical equipment that is overhead, underground, and compartmentalized. H. NETA ATS: InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Acceptance Testing Specification. I. SCADA: Supervisory control and data acquisition. J. Way: A three-phase or single-phase circuit connection to the bus that may contain combinations of switches and protective devices or may be a solid bus. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 2. Time -current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices. B. Shop Drawings: For pad -mounted switchgear. 1. Include a tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. 2. Include dimensioned plans and elevations, showing dimensions, shipping sections, and weights of each assembled section. Elevations shall show major components and features, and they will mimic bus diagram. 3. Include a plan view and cross section of equipment base showing clearances, manufacturer's recommended workspace, and locations of penetrations for grounding and conduits. Show location of anchor bolts and leveling channels. 4. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each field connection. 5. Include list of materials. 6. Locate accessory and spare equipment storage. 7. Include single -line diagram. 8. Include control power wiring diagrams. 9. Include battery, charger, and transfer switch ratings. 10. Include copy of nameplate. 11. Switchgear Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Continuous current. C. Short-circuit rating. d. BIL. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 3 of 19 12. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 13. Relay settings. 14. Interface data with monitoring or control network. 15. Wiring Diagrams: For each switchgear assembly, include the following: a. Power, signal, and control wiring. b. Three -line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits, showing device terminal numbers and internal diagrams. C. Schematic control diagrams. d. Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment. e. Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices including SCADA remote terminal unit. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of switchgear, conduit entries, and grounding equipment locations. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for pad -mounted switchgear, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Product Certificates: For pad -mounted switchgear. 1. Applicable portions of IEEE C57.12.28, covering enclosure integrity for pad -mounted equipment. 2. Switch ratings as listed in IEEE C37.74. 3. Interrupter ratings as listed in IEEE C37.71, C37.74, C37.73. 4. Coating system compliance with the IEEE standard listed in "Enclosure" Article. E. Source quality -control reports. F. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 4 of 19 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. b. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. C. Record as -left set points of adjustable devices. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Furnish a manufacturer's extended written warranty for a period of not less than 3 years. Submit warranty during the shop drawing phase. Approval of the shop drawings will be contingent on the receipt of the guarantee. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, replaced at no expense to the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. S&C Electric Comnanv. 2. Cooper. 3. G&W. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufactured Unit: Pad -mounted switchgear, designed for application as shown on the Contract Drawings in an underground distribution system. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 5 of 19 C. Comply with IEEE C2. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: The switchgear shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the switchgear will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the switchgear will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 3. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 4. Component Response Modification Factor: 6.0. B. Service Conditions: 1. Provide switchgear suitable for outdoor operation in a wastewater facility environment. 2.4 RATINGS A. Ratings for Integrated Pad -Mounted Gear, per ANSI Standard: 1 2. 3 General: a. kV, Max. 15.5 b. Impulse Level (BIL), kV 95 C. Frequency, Hz 60 d. Short Circuit Rating, kA RMS Sym. 25 e. Main Bus, Continuous Amps. 600 £ Number of Ways 3 (Three) Three Pole Load Interrupter Switches: a. Continuous Amperes b. Load Dropping Amps. C. kV, Max. d. Basic Impulse Level (KV) e. Short Circuit Interrupting rating, Sym (kA) f. Continuous and Load Break, Amps g. Fault -Close Current, Sym (kA) 3 times duty cycle 10 times duty cycle h. Momentary and One Second Current Sym (kA) Three Pole Vacuum Fault Interrupters: a. Continuous Current (A) CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS 200A Same as continuous. 15.5 95 25 Same as switch continuous rating 25 16 25 200 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 b. Load Dropping current. C. kV, Max. d. Impulse level (BIL) e. Symmetrical interrupting rating (kA) f. Fault Closing Current, Sym. (kA) (10 times duty cycle) g. Fault Interrupting, Sym (kA) (10 times duty cycle) 2.5 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 6 of 19 Same as continuous current 15.5 95 25 041 25 A. Type 304 stainless steel, single welded, sized as shown on the Drawings, and manufactured to ANSI C37.74 and C57.12.28 standards. Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 120-mph wind. B. Switch Tank Enclosures: Mounted independent of the switch tank allowing removal for ease of cable installation or future replacement, if required. Provide doors for enclosures with tamper - resistant incorporating hinged access doors with penta-head locking bolts and provisions for padlocking. Provide lifting provisions and paint S&C olive green (Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5) finish. Modify depth of enclosure to allow for installation of surge arrestors and conductors, as shown on the Drawings. C. Switch Tanks (SF6): Type 304 stainless steel; single welded, sized for the switch arrangement as shown on the Drawings, and manufactured to ANSI C37.74 and C57.12.28 standards. Construction shall be dead front. Ship switches filled with S176 gas conforming to ASTM D- 2472. Provide switch tanks with manual operating mechanisms and viewing windows. D. Provide nameplates for each device as indicated in drawings. Provide nameplates of engraved stainless steel, attached with stainless steel screws. Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. E. Corrosion Protection: Enclosure coating system shall be factory applied, meeting the requirements of IEEE C57.12.28, in manufacturer's standard color green. 2.6 SWITCHGEAR CONSTRUCTION A. Dead -front, front and rear access switchgear. B. Each disconnect switch in switched ways shall be in a sealed, single welded, dielectric filled stainless -steel tank, sized for the switch arrangement as shown on the Drawings, and manufactured to ANSI C37.74 and C57.12.28 standards. Provide switches that are factory filled with SF6 gas conforming to ASTM D2472. Each tank shall contain the following: a. Provide enclosure with pressure gauge and self-sealing fill valve. b. Welded stainless steel tank with stainless steel fasteners. C. Lifting provisions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 7 of 19 d. Door lifting handle. e. Internal ground bus. f. Dead break bushings for each cable, as shown on the Drawings. g. Parking stand for each cable with insulated parking bushing and cap. 2. Stainless steel 3-line diagram and corrosion -resistant nameplates. C. Construct switchgear assembly with switched ways that have front -accessible terminations for cables entering from below and with manual operating provisions. D. High -Voltage Bus: 1. Bus and interconnections shall consist of copper bus bar, sized as shown on the Drawings. 2. Bus and interconnection shall withstand the stresses associated with short circuit currents up through the maximum rating of the pad -mounted switchgear. E. Viewing Windows: For each switch and vacuum interrupter, located adjacent to manual operating devices, and positioned to show switch contact position. F. Grounding: Provision to make grounding cable and wire connections at each way. 1. A ground -connection pad shall be provided in each compartment of the pad -mounted gear. 2. The ground -connection pad shall be constructed of 3/8-inch-thick steel, which shall be nickel plated and welded to the enclosure, and shall have a short circuit rating equal to that of the integrated assembly. 3. Ground -connection pads shall be coated with a uniform coating of an oxide inhibitor and sealant prior to shipment. 4. Switchgear units shall have Two -Hole Ground Pad, one per way, located below bushings or bushing wells. 2.7 LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCHES A. Switch Configuration: Front access design, as indicated on the one -line diagram. B. Switch Contacts and Cable Entrances: Contained in a single welded, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel tank as specified above. C. Three -Phase, Group Operated Load Interrupter Switches: Manually operated. 1. Equip each switching way with an internally -mounted, spring -assisted operating mechanism capable of providing quick -make, quick -break operation in either switching direction. Provide mechanisms capable of delivering sufficient torque and with latches for each position to assure load interrupting, fault closing, and momentary ratings. Provide switch positions that are clearly identified, pad lockable, and adaptable to key lock schemes. 2. Operating Mechanism: Actuated from outside the switch tank with an operating handle. Provide operating of stainless steel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 8 of 19 3. Provide each switch with an integral ground position that is readily visible through the viewing window. 4. Operating Mechanisms: Equipped with an operation selector to prevent inadvertent operation from the closed position directly to the grounded position, or from the grounded position directly to the closed position. The operation selector shall require physical movement to the proper position to permit the next operation. 5. Operating Shafts: Padlockable in any position to prevent operation. 6. The operation selector shall be padlockable to prevent operation to the grounded position. 7. Switch Contacts: Plated, high -conductivity copper alloy with arcing tips of copper/tungsten alloy. Design contacts such that arcing does not occur in the area of main current interchange and contact pressure will increase with increasing current flow. Provide contact travel with sufficient open contact separation to assure efficient arc extinction and withstand field DC testing levels and maintain BIL levels. 2.8 FAULT INTERRUPTER SWITCHES A. Design Ratings and Standards: 1. Fault Interrupter: Non-reclosing, manual reset device incorporating vacuum bottles. Design, test, and build per applicable sections of ANSI C37.74. Provide vacuum interrupter assembly rated as specified in this Section. 2. Vacuum Interrupter: Provide a load interrupter switch, as specified herein, connected in series and operated via the same handle. 3. Fault Interrupter: Include associated load -break switch, a single integrated design so that operation between the closed and open positions or the open and grounded positions is accomplished with a single movement. B. Operating Mechanisms: 1. Load -Interrupter Switches and Fault Interrupters: Operated by means of a quick -make, quick -break mechanism. 2. Manual Handle: Charge the operating mechanism for closing, opening, and grounding of the switches and fault interrupters. 3. Single, Integrated Operating Mechanism: Fully operate each fault interrupter or load interrupter switch in a continuous movement, so that additional operations are not required to establish open or grounded positions. 4. Operating Mechanisms: Equipped with an operation selector to prevent inadvertent operation from the closed position directly to the grounded position, or from the grounded position directly to the closed position. Provide operation selector requiring physical movement to the proper position to permit the next operation. 5. Operating Shafts: Padlockable in any position to prevent operation. 6. Operation Selector: Padlockable to prevent operation to the grounded position. 7. Operating Mechanism: Switch position clearly visible from normal operating position. 8. Key Interlocks: Arranged to prevent opening or closing of interlocked switches, except in a specified sequence. Include mountings and hardware for future installation of key interlocks. C. Controls: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 9 of 19 1. Switch Status LEDs: "Open" and "closed" lights. Show status of disconnect switch using its auxiliary contact. 2. Provide electronic assembly to sense load and fault current on each phase of the load tap circuits. Power electronic control from current transformers mounted inside the S176 insulated switch tank. Require no external power source for over -current protection. 3. Electronic Control: Monitor current on individual phases of tap circuits using input from current transformers. Temperature range: -40°C to +70°C. 4. Control Settings: Field programmable by using a personal computer or dip switches. Connectable to personal computer via a data port to the control. a. Data Port: Accessible from the exterior of the enclosure. Neither external power nor energization of the switchgear shall be required to set or alter control settings. b. Trip Characteristics (TCC curves): Field selectable. C. Maximum Power Up Time (ready to trip when closing on a circuit): Ten percent of trip time or %2 cycle, whichever is greater. d. Trip Selection: Selectable with the load taps energized. 5. Event Records: Capable for being easily extractable from the control using a personal computer connected to the data port. Event Log: Capture the last 64 events recorded by the overcurrent control. 6. Locate devices to not require shutdown of switchgear to access or service. D. Overcurrent and Control: Field -adjustable microprocessor -based overcurrent control in each phase at indicated locations to initiate fault interruption. 1. Device Functions: 51/50, 51N/50N, 51G/50G according to IEEE C37.2. 2. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection. a. Conductors across Hinges and for Interconnections between Shipping Units: Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller. b. Conductors: Sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required. 2.9 BUSHINGS A. Separable Insulated Connectors: Used to connect primary cable. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 13 "Medium -Voltage Cables." 1. Bushings: One-piece, 600 A, BIL ratings the same as the connectors. Comply with IEEE 386. 2. Supply a standoff bracket or parking stand for each bushing, mounted horizontally adjacent to each bushing. 2.10 SURGE ARRESTERS A. Distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type, fully shielded, separable elbow type, suitable for plugging into the inserts. Comply with IEEE C62.11 and IEEE 386. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 10 of 19 2.11 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels and signs. 1. High -Voltage Warning Label: Self-adhesive labels on the outside of the high -voltage compartment door(s). Legend shall be "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of minimum 2-inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. 2. Arc -Flash Warning Label: Self-adhesive labels on the outside of the high -voltage compartment door(s), warning of potential electrical arc -flash hazards and appropriate personal protective equipment required. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Comply with requirements in IEEE C37.60 and IEEE C37.74 for testing procedures. 1. Circuit Resistance Test: Verify that switchgear contacts have been properly aligned and current transfer points have been properly assembled. 2. Power -frequency dry withstand voltage test. 3. Dielectric withstand test; one -minute dry power -frequency. 4. Calibrate overcurrent devices for conformance to published time -current characteristic curves. 5. Sealed Tank Leak Test: a. Comply with IEC 62271-1 for test procedure for switchgear using SF6. b. The test procedure for vacuum switchgear shall be as follows: 1) Each vacuum tube shall be identified by its serial number. Its vacuum pressure level shall be tested by the manufacturer of the vacuum interrupter. Document the test results. 2) After assembly of the switchgear way, test the vacuum pressure level of the vacuum tubes by the routine dielectric test across the open contacts. The test voltage shall be stated by the manufacturer. The dielectric test shall be carried out after the mechanical routine test. 6. Operating tests shall verify the following: a. Switch position indicators and contacts are in the correct position for both the open and closed positions. b. Insulating medium quantity indicator (if provided) is functioning properly. C. Circuit configuration is shown correctly. d. Mechanical interlocks are in place and operative. e. Position and polarity of current transformers meets requirements. £ Control, secondary wiring, and accessory devices are connected correctly. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 11 of 19 g. Devices and relays actually operate as intended. Circuits for which operation is not feasible shall be checked for continuity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Upon delivery of switchgear and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage. 1. Examine tie rods and chains to verify they are undamaged and tight and that blocking and bracing are tight. 2. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit and that readings from transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Examine switchgear for external damage, including dents or scratches in doors and sill, and termination provisions. 4. Compare switchgear and accessories received with the bill of materials to verify that the shipment is complete. Verify that switchgear and accessories conform to the manufacturer's quotation and Shop Drawings. If the shipment is not complete or does not comply with project requirements, notify the manufacturer in writing immediately. 5. Unload switchgear, observing packing label warnings and handling instructions. 6. Open compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or foreign material, and water or moisture. B. Handling: 1. Handle switchgear, according to manufacturer's recommendations; avoid damage to the enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, and internal components. Do not subject switchgear to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling. 2. Transport switchgear upright to avoid internal stresses on equipment mounting assemblies. Do not tilt or tip switchgear. 3. Use spreaders or a lifting beam to obtain a vertical lift and to protect switchgear from straps bearing against the enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15 degrees from vertical. 4. Do not damage structure when handling switchgear. C. Storage: 1. Switchgear may be stored outdoors. If possible, store switchgear at final installation locations on concrete pads. If dry concrete surfaces are not available, use pallets of adequate strength to protect switchgear from direct contact with the ground. Ensure switchgear is level. 2. Protect switchgear from physical damage. Do not store switchgear in the presence of corrosive or explosive gases. 3. Store switchgear with compartment doors closed. D. Examine roughing -in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 12 of 19 2. Entries are within conduit -entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. E. Pre -Installation Checks: Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement. F. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at switchgear location. G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install switchgear on cast -in -place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in - Place Concrete." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Install level and plumb, tilting less than 1.5 degrees when energized. D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70. E. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and IEEE C2. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. For counterpoise, use tinned bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG, buried not less than 30 inches below grade interconnecting the grounding electrodes. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to the switchgear enclosure and then to the grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors, sized as shown. Keep lead lengths as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends. 2. Fence and equipment connections shall not be smaller than No. 4 AWG. Ground fence at each gate post and corner post and at intervals not exceeding 10 ft.. Bond each gate section to the fence post using tinned flexible braided copper strap and clamps. 3. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 13 of 19 4. Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding terminal on the switchgear enclosure. 5. Complete the switchgear grounding and surge protector connections prior to making any other electrical connections. B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 1. Maintain air clearances between energized live parts and between live parts and ground for exposed connections in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2. Bundle associated phase, neutral, and equipment grounding conductors together within the switchgear enclosure. Arrange conductors such that there is not excessive strain on the connections that could cause loose connections. Allow adequate slack for expansion and contraction of conductors. C. Terminate medium -voltage cables in incoming section of switchgear according to Section 26 05 13 "Medium -Voltage Cables." A. Comply with the installation requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install warning signs as required to comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. C. General Field -Testing Requirements: 1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" chapter. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. After installing switchgear but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at the switchgear is tested at the specified value or less. 4. After installing switchgear and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. D. Medium -Voltage Switchgear Field Tests: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to Drawings. b. Inspect bolted electrical connections using calibrated torque -wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt- CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 14 of 19 torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems. 1) Attempt closure on locked -open devices. Attempt to open locked -closed devices. 2) Make key exchange with devices operated in off -normal positions. d. Inspect control power transformers. 1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit breaker ratings match Drawings. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Inspect bolted electrical connections using a low -resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Perform do voltage insulation -resistance tests on each bus section, phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground, for one minute. If the temperature of the bus is other than plus or minus 20 deg C, adjust the resulting resistance as provided in NETA ATS, Table 100.11. 1) Insulation -resistance values of bus insulation shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Investigate and correct values of insulation resistance less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2) Do not proceed to the dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation - resistance levels are raised above minimum values. Perform a dielectric withstand voltage test on each bus section, each phase -to - ground with phases not under test grounded, according to manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer has no recommendation for this test, it shall be conducted according to NETA ATS, Table 100.2. Apply the test voltage for one minute. 1) If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test. d. Perform insulation -resistance tests o Applied potential shall be 500 V do 600 V-rated cable. Test duration shall CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS n control wiring with respect to ground. for 300 V-rated cable and 1000 V do for be one minute. For units with solid-state VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 15 of 19 components or control devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation. 1) Minimum insulation -resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than two megohms. e. Voltage Transformers: 1) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Verify correct potential at all devices. 2) Verify secondary voltages by energizing the primary winding with system voltage. £ Perform current -injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of switchgear. 1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum current of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit. 2) Perform current tests by primary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit. g. Perform system function tests according to "System Function Tests" Article. h. Verify operation of space heaters. i. Perform phasing checks on double -ended or dual -source switchgear to ensure correct bus phasing from each source. E. Medium -Voltage Vacuum Interrupter Field Tests: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. C. Verify that maintenance devices such as special tools and gages specified by the manufacturer are available for servicing and operating the breaker. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Perform mechanical operation tests on operating mechanism according to manufacturer's published data. f. Measure critical distances on operating mechanism as recommended by the manufacturer. Critical distances of the operating mechanism shall be according to manufacturer's published data. g. Verify cell fit and element alignment. h. Verify racking mechanism operation. i. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current -carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. j. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current -carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. k. Perform time -travel analysis. Travel and velocity values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 16 of 19 1. Record as -found and as -left operation counter reading. Operation counter shall advance one digit per close -open cycle. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform insulation -resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase -to -phase and phase -to ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Insulation -resistance values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Investigate and correct values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer's recommendations. Dielectric -withstand -voltage tests shall not proceed until insulation -resistance levels are raised above minimum values. b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. Microhm or do millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range according to manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data is not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. C. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils according to manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the trip and close coils shall comply with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.20. d. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features, such as electrical close and trip operation, trip -free operation, and anti -pump function. Auxiliary features shall operate according to manufacturer's published data. e. Trip circuit breaker by operation of each protective device. Reset trip logs and indicators. f. Perform power -factor or dissipation -factor tests on each pole with the breaker open and each phase with the breaker closed. Power -factor or dissipation -factor values shall comply with manufacturer's published data. g. Perform vacuum bottle integrity (dielectric -withstand -voltage) test across each vacuum bottle, with the contacts in the "open" position according to manufacturer's published data. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the vacuum bottle integrity test, the specimen is considered to have passed the test. h. Perform a dielectric -withstand -voltage test according to manufacturer's published data. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric -withstand -voltage test, the specimen is considered to have passed the test. F. Microprocessor -Based Protective Relay Field Tests: Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Record model number, style number, serial number, firmware revision, software revision, and rated control voltage. b. Verify operation of light -emitting diodes, display, and targets. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 17 of 19 C. Record passwords for each access level. d. Clean the front panel and remove foreign material from the case. e. Check tightness of connections. f. Verify that the frame is grounded according to manufacturer's instructions. g. Download settings from the relay. Print a copy of the settings for the report and compare the settings to those specified in the coordination study. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform insulation -resistance tests from each circuit to the grounded frame according to manufacturer's published data. b. Apply voltage or current to analog inputs, and verify correct registration of the relay meter functions. C. Functional Operation: Check functional operation of each element used in the protection scheme. d. Control Verification: 1) Functional Tests: a) Check operation of all active digital inputs. b) Check output contacts or silicone -controlled rectifiers, preferably by operating the controlled device, such as circuit breaker, auxiliary relay, or alarm. c) Check internal logic functions used in protection scheme. d) Upon completion of testing, reset min/max recorders, communications statistics, fault counters, sequence -of -events recorder, and event records. 2) In -Service Monitoring: After the equipment is initially energized, measure magnitude and phase angle of inputs and verify expected values. G. Ground Resistance Test: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Verify ground system complies with the Contract Documents and NFPA 70 "Grounding and Bonding" Article. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of corrosion. C. Inspect bolted electrical connections using a calibrated torque -wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt - torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Inspect anchorage. 2. Electrical Tests: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 18 of 19 a. Perform fall -of -potential or alternative test according to IEEE 81 on the main grounding electrode or system. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be no more than 5 ohms. b. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and derived neutral points. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohms. Compare equipment nameplate data with Contract Documents. C. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using a low -resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. e. Inspect anchorage. H. Switchgear will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. I. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action devices. Perform system function tests after "Field Quality Control" tests have been completed and all components have passed specified tests. 1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for evaluating performance of integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements and manufacturer's published data. 2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function. 3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices. 3.7 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE A. Infrared Inspection: Perform the survey during periods of maximum possible loading. Remove all necessary covers prior to the inspection. 1. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform infrared inspection of the electrical power connections of the switchgear. 2. Instrument: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 deg C at 30 deg C. 3. Record of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies the testing technician and equipment used, and lists the results as follows: a. Description of equipment to be tested. b. Discrepancies. C. Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area. d. Probable cause of temperature difference. e. Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and equipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 13 29 MEDIUM -VOLTAGE, PAD -MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR Page 19 of 19 f. Identify load conditions at time of inspection. g. Provide photographs and thermograms of the deficient area. 4. Act on inspection results according to the recommendations of NETA ATS, Table 100.18. Correct possible and probable deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations permit. Retest until deficiencies are corrected. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. END OF SECTION 26 13 29 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 26 22 13 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section includes the following types of low voltage dry -type transformers: 1. Distribution type. 2. Transformer panel assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer. 2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of field connections. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field -quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 22 13 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 2 of 6 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: On receipt, inspect for and note shipping damage to packaging and transformer. 1. If manufacturer packaging is removed for inspection, and transformer will be stored after inspection, re -package transformer using original or new packaging materials that provide protection equivalent to manufacturer's packaging. B. Storage: Store in warm, dry, and temperature -stable location in original shipping packaging. C. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions within enclosure of ventilated -type units, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. D. Handling: Follow manufacturer's instructions for lifting and transporting transformers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton. 2. GE by ABB. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D by Schneider Electric. 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of transformer from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended location and application. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with the following standards: 1. NEMA ST 20, Dry -Type Transformers for General Applications. 2. UL 1561, Standard for Safety Dry -Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 22 13 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 3 of 6 3. US Department of Energy Efficiency Standards for Low Voltage Distribution Transformers. B. General Description: 1. Dry type, two winding. Configuration, kVA, and voltage shown on Drawings. 2. Windings: Copper, unless noted otherwise herein. 3. Temperature Rise: 115 degrees C, unless noted otherwise herein. C. Taps for transformers 15 kVA and larger: Full capacity, two 2.5 percent above and four 2.5 percent below. D. Grounding: Provide ground -bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure. E. Enclosures: 1. Indoor: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 2, ventilated. Standard enclosure type. 2. Outdoor and indicated as NEMA 3R on drawings: Indoor unit converted to Type 3R with manufacturer's weather shielding accessory. 3. Outdoor and indicated as NEMA 4X on drawings: TENV, stainless steel enclosure. All stainless -steel hardware. Manufacturer's standard windings and temperature rise. F. Special Options: Electrostatic shielding, K-Rated, harmonic -mitigating, or low sound level rating, where noted on Drawings. G. Accessories: 1. Vibration isolators for transformers rated 112.5 kVA and higher. 2. Wall or ceiling brackets for wall or ceiling mount, where noted on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for transformers. B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's published instructions. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. D. Verify the grounding electrode system is present and complies with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems". Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 22 13 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 4 of 6 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 "Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction" and NECA 409 "Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry -Type Transformers". B. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Install mounting brackets, concrete pads, hangers, and other supports prior to setting transformers in place. D. Install transformers level and plumb. Install vibration isolators between transformer enclosure and supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Anchor floor mounted transformer to concrete base. Remove shipping braces and adjust internal mounting bolts and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install flexible conduits to minimize vibration transmission. G. Ground this separately derived system in accordance with Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems". Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding terminal mounted inside the transformer enclosure. Do not allow grounding terminal bar to block ventilation openings. H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. I. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems". 1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source with nameplates. 2. Color code wiring. 3. Identify branch circuit phase and neutral wires by circuit number at TPA. 4. Provide as built type panel directory at TPA. J. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 26 05 73 "Power System Studies". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform checkout and testing activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NETA ATS, and as specified herein. Correct deficiencies, make adjustments, and retest until requirements are met. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 22 13 LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 5 of 6 4. Verify resilient mounts are free and shipping brackets are removed. 5. Verify unit is clean. 6. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following: a. A low -resistance ohmmeter. b. Calibrated torque wrench. C. Thermographic survey. 7. Verify as -left tap connections are as specified. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform insulation -resistance tests for winding -to -winding and winding -to -ground. 2. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase -to -phase and phase -to -neutral, after energization and prior to loading. D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections. 1. Use an infrared -scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. 2. Perform follow-up infrared scan of transformers, at 11 months after Substantial Completion. 3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tap settings when directed by Engineer. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around equipment. Vacuum clean interior. END OF SECTION 26 22 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 22 13 This page intentionally left blank. LOW -VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS Page 6 of 6 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Power panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Circuit breakers. 5. Accessories and special construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project. 1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated. 2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings. 3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 6. Include evidence of listing, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, for SPD as installed in panelboard. 7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 2 of 8 10. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Include Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of coordination curves. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For testing agency. Field quality -control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. B. Warranty documentation. 17_1 ta WAS9 Z6]1814J1161 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton. 2. GE by ABB. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D by Schneider Electric. 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain new panelboards from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain retrofit disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices from existing panelboard manufacturer or subsequent responsible manufacturer, to maintain overall UL listing of panelboard. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing agency recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 3 of 8 B. Comply with the following standards as applicable: 1. NEMA PB 1, Panelboards. 2. UL 50, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations. 3. UL 50E, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations. 4. UL 67, Standard for Panelboards, CCN QEUY. 5. UL 489, Standard for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures. 6. UL 1449, Surge Protective Devices. C. Ratings: 1. Ratings are indicated on the Drawings. 2. Series rated panelboards are prohibited. Circuit breakers must be fully rated for the short circuit rating listed for the panelboard. D. Construction: 1. NEMA1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. See ACCESSORIES AND SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Article for enclosures other than NEMA 1. 2. Copper equipment grounding bar, separate and distinct from neutral bar. 3. Conductor Lugs: a. Mechanical type. b. Size suitable for indicated conductor sizes. C. Neutral (when present) and ground lug quantity equal to each pole in panelboard. 4. Where Drawings indicate space for future circuit breaker, equip panelboard with bus bars, blank covers, and mounting hardware so only the future breaker need be provided. E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearance between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. A. Manufacturer's power distribution panelboard using molded -case bolt -on circuit breakers, where available. Drawing designation using "PP" or "DP". B. Doors: Hinged cover or door -in -door trim when available. Secure door with flush keyed lock and catch, except doors over 36 inches in height to use a vault -type latch with tumbler lock and 3-point catch. All locks keyed alike. C. Bus: Tin-plated copper. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturer's lighting and appliance panelboard using molded -case bolt -on circuit breakers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 4 of 8 B. Doors: Door -in -door construction with concealed hinges; secured with flush keyed lock and catch, except doors over 48 inches in height to use a vault -type latch with tumbler lock and 3- point catch. All locks keyed alike. C. Bus: Tin-plated copper. 2.5 LOAD CENTERS A. Manufacturer's load center using molded -case plug -on circuit breakers. B. Load center type construction when indicated on Drawings. C. Doors: Concealed hinges secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. C► #Hffwwu0.1Ili Zl_3C421 T. A. Molded case, manufactured by panelboard manufacturer. B. Plug-in or bolt -on as listed in associated panelboard Article. C. Configuration, frame size, trip, and special features such as GFCI (Class A trip, 4-6 mA) or GFI (Class B trip, 30 mA) as shown on Drawings. D. Provide breaker lugs to accommodate wire sizes shown on Drawings. E. Multi -pole breakers to have common trip. Do not convert single pole breakers to multi -pole using handle ties, use multi -pole breaker. F. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: 1. Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads. 2. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. 3. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. G. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: 1. RMS sensing. 2. Field -replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. 3. Adjustable trip functions as indicated on Drawings. 2.7 ACCESSORIES AND SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION A. Accessories such as breaker lockout devices or key interlocks are indicated on the Drawings. B. Integral Surge Protective Device: 1. By panelboard manufacturer, factory installed. 2. Type 2. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 5 of 8 3. SCCR: Equal to SCCR of panelboard where installed. 4. Performance: Comply with Section 26 43 13 "Surge Protection for Low -Voltage Electrical Power Circuits". C. Electronic Grade: 1. Integral SPD. 2. Neutrals: 200 percent rated. D. NEMA 3R or 12 Enclosure: 1. Material: galvanized steel. E. NEMA 4X Enclosure: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. When available, 3-point latch door. 17_,1 71Iam*114i[oil]10M01 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturer's published instructions, comply with the following: 1. ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1 — General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 2. NECA NEIS 407 — Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards. C. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 6 of 8 Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind panelboard. 2. Mount back box plumb and level, and surface or flush mount as indicated on Drawings. 3. Mount surface -mounted panelboards to supports to allow a minimum of 1/2 inch air space between the box and the mounting surface. 4. Mount flush -mounted panelboards with front cover uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. 5. Mount top of trim 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. E. Install circuit breakers not already factory installed. Rearrange circuit breakers to correspond to panel schedules shown on Drawings. F. Tighten bolted connections and wiring connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install filler plates in unused spaces. H. Plug abandoned or unused entry holes. I. Do not leave cut off wires at breakers, neutral bar terminal, or ground bar terminal. J. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems". 1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source nameplates. 2. Identify pole numbers. 3. Color code wiring. 4. Identify branch circuit phase and neutral wires by circuit number. 5. Provide as built typed panelboard directory. K. Adjust circuit breakers with adjustable trips in accordance with the final approved submittal of Section 26 05 73 "Power System Studies". L. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 26 05 73 "Power System Studies". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform checkout and testing activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA 407, and as specified herein. Correct deficiencies, make adjustments, and retest until requirements are met. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 7 of 8 4. Verify unit is clean. 5. Verify breakers operate smoothly. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform insulation resistance test on buswork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Verify correct voltage and phasing at each panelboard. 3. Verify load currents are balanced across the three phases. D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of panelboard connections for new or modified panelboards. 1. Use an infrared -scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. 2. Perform follow-up infrared scan of panelboards, at 11 months after Substantial Completion. 3. Prepare a certified report identifying panelboard checked and describing results of scanning. Include a notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around equipment. Vacuum clean interior. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 1 of 18 SECTION 26 24 19 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less, with combination controllers and having the following factory -installed components: 1. Feeder -tap units. 2. Measurement and control. 3. Auxiliary devices. 4. Panelboards. 5. Transformers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. MCC: Motor -control center. C. MCCB: Molded -case circuit breaker. D. MCP: Motor -circuit protector. E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. F. PID: Control action; proportional plus integral plus derivative. G. PT: Potential transformer. H. SPD: Surge protective device. 1. SCR: Silicon -controlled rectifier. J. VFC: Variable -frequency controller. K. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 2 of 18 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for MCCs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories for each cell of the MCC. B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. 1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory -installed devices. C. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure and each unit. £ Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. 3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Standard Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. B. Production Drawings: For each MCC, as defined in UL 845. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 3 of 18 E. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for MCCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. F. Product Certificates: For each MCC. G. Source quality -control reports. H. Field quality -control reports. I. Load -Current and Overload Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full -load currents. J. Load -Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. K. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 2. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field -assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays. 5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced - voltage, solid-state controllers. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 7. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 4 of 18 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended use. D. UL Compliance: MCCs shall comply with UL 845 and shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths. B. Handle MCCs according to the following: 1. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers." 2. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts." C. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside MCCs; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per vertical section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 5 of 18 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace MCC and SPD that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton. 2. Square D by Schneider Electric. 3. Allen-Bradley by Rockwell Automation. 4. GE by ABB. 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate and label MCCs to comply with NEMA ICS 18. B. Ambient Environment Ratings: 1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F 3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet, or 3300 feet if MCC includes solid-state devices. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 6 of 18 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 3. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5. 4. Component Response Modification Factor: 6.0. 2.4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER ENCLOSURES A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, 1 Type IA. B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory -applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust -inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. 2.5 ASSEMBLY A. Structure: 1. Units up to and including Size 3 shall have drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical -section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. 2. Units in Type B and Type C MCCs shall have pull -apart terminal strips for external control connections. 3. Pull Boxes: a. Include provisions for ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as the MCC. b. Set the box back from front to clear circuit -breaker removal mechanism. C. Covers: Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. d. Insulated bottom of fire -resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into MCC. e. Cable Supports: Arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including supports for future cables. f. When equipped with barriers, supply with access to check bus bolt tightness. B. Compartments: Modular; individual lift-off doors with concealed hinges and quick -captive screw fasteners. 1. Interlock compartment door to require that the disconnecting means is "off' before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a concealed release device. 2. Compartment construction shall allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC. 3. The same -size compartments shall be interchangeable to allow rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. C. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Included and aligned with the structure of the MCC. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 7 of 18 D. Owner's Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting -type terminal blocks. Include PTs having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks. E. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same -size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. F. Wiring Spaces: Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place. G. Provisions for Future: 1. Compartments marked "future" shall be bused, wired and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, and ready for insertion of drawout units. 2. Compartments marked "spare" shall include provisions for connection to the vertical bus. H. Integrated Short -Circuit Rating: 1. Short -Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 65 kA. 2. Short -Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65 kA. I. Control Power: 1. 120-V ac, supplied centrally from a CPT. 2. 120-V ac; obtained from CPT integral with controller; with primary and secondary fuses. The CPT shall be of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA. Factory -Installed Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Use flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. Wiring Class: NEMA ICS 18, Class 11, Type B, for starters larger than Size 3 Type B-D, for starters Size 3 and smaller. 2. Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Use flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. K. Bus: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 8 of 18 1. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions. 2. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. 3. Phase- and Neutral -Bus Material: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity or tin-plated alloy, with mechanical connectors for outgoing conductors. 4. Ground Bus: Hard -drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure connector for ground conductors, minimum size 1/4-by-2 inches. Equip with mechanical connectors for outgoing conductors. 5. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus. 6. Bus -Bar Insulation: Factory -applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray -applied insulation. Insulation temperature rating shall not be less than 105 deg C. 2.6 MAIN DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE(S) A. MCCB (to 2500 A): Fixed mounted, manually operated air -circuit breaker. Comply with UL 489. 1. MCCB shall have quick -make, quick -break, over -center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free, its position shall be shown by the position of the handle, and manual push -to -trip push button. 2. Solid-state monitoring and tripping system to show system status monitoring, adjustable time -current protection, and shunt trip. a. Interchangeable current sensors and timing circuits for adjustable time -current protection settings and status signals. b. Trip -setting dials or interchangeable plugs to establish the continuous trip of the circuit breaker. Plugs shall not be interchangeable between frames, and the breaker may not be closed without the plug. With neutral ground -fault sensor. C. Time -current adjustments to achieve protective -device coordination as follows: 1) Adjustable long-time delay. 2) Adjustable short -time setting and delay to shape the time -current curve. 3) Adjustable instantaneous setting. 4) Individually adjustable ground -fault setting and time delay. d. Built-in connector to test the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground -fault functions of the breaker. Provide one test set for testing the installed circuit breakers 225-A frame and higher. e. Built-in digital ammeter display, showing load current and tripping cause. Switch operator power shall be from control power specified in "Assembly" Article. B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the incoming feeder, complying with UL 1449, SPD Type 2. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 9 of 18 1. Minimum Surge current ratings: 100" per mode, 200 " per phase. 2.7 MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS A. Controller Units: Combination controllers. B. Disconnects: 1. MCP: a. UL 489, with interrupting capacity complying with available fault currents, instantaneous -only circuit breaker with front -mounted, field -adjustable, short- circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: For three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current -limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA. 2. MCCB: a. UL 489, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal -magnetic MCCB, with inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front -mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. C. Lockable Handle: For three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. NC alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. C. Controllers: Comply with UL 508. 1. Full -Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Electrically held, full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. a. Classification: Nonreversing. D. Overload Relays: 1. Solid -State Overload Relays: a. Switch or dial selectable for motor -running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. C. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. UL 1053 Class II ground -fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting. e. Analog communication module. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 10 of 18 2. NC isolated overload alarm contact. 3. External overload reset push button. 2.8 CONTROLLER -MOUNTED AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Control -Circuit and Pilot Devices: Factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA ICS 5. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil -tight type. a. Push Buttons: Covered types; maintained contact unless otherwise indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types;; push to test. C. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B. Elapsed -Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; resettable. C. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy, with selector switches having an off position. D. Auxiliary Dry Contacts: Reversible NC/NO. E. Control Relays: 1. Time Delay: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time -delay relays. 2. Phase -Failure, Phase -Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard -wired connections and adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time -delay settings. 2.9 MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL DEVICES A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following: 1. PTs: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, tapped secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. 2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. 3. CPTs: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA. 4. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground -Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, for selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit -breaker and ground -fault protection. B. Multifunction Digital -Metering Monitor: Microprocessor -based unit suitable for three- or four - wire systems and with the following features: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 11 of 18 1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current -transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V. 3. Switch -selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum accuracy tolerances: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase -to -Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. C. Phase -to -Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three -Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three -Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from 5 to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse -totalizing demand meter. 4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi -flush mounted in instrument compartment door. C. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current -limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. D. Motor Protection Relays: 1. Programmable motor protection relays: Solid state, panel mounted, Eaton MP-3000; General Electric Multilin 239, or equal, furnished complete with potential and current transformers, zero sequence ground fault transformer and RTD input module. 2. Provide the following protective functions: a. Motor thermal overload, with thermal lockout to prevent trip reset after an overload trip. b. Ground fault protection. C. Phase current heating model to calculate motor thermal capacity during starting and running states. d. Independent running protection during acceleration. e. Phase and residual overcurrent elements. f. Unbalance/single phase. g. Load -loss (undercurrent). h. Rapid trip/mechanical jam. i. Motor locked/stall protection. 3. Over -temperature protection: provide configurable thermistor or RTD inputs, including alarm and trip settings, and associated TRIP or ALARM outputs. The following functionality shall be provided: a. PTC or NTC Thermistor input. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 12 of 18 b. Assign RTD input as "Off', "Stator" or "Bearing" type. C. Four different RTD types: 100 Ohm Platinum, 120 Ohm Nickel, 100 Ohm Nickel, 1 or 10 Ohm Copper. d. RTD sensor fail alarm. 4. User Interfaces: Include the following: a. A large 40-character LCD display, and navigation keys. b. Indicator LEDs on the front panel which shall provide a quick visual indication of status. C. Serial communication: two wire RS485 link operating at 1200 — 19200 bps. Open protocol, ModBus RTU for read/write commands shall be included in the relay instruction manual. d. Five switch inputs shall be provided for setpoint access, emergency restart, external reset, and two user programmable option switches. e. The relay shall accept AC/DC control power. f. The relay shall be capable of being set by Windows -based, easy to use, setup graphical terminal interface. 5. To make the data acquisition more efficient, the motor relay shall provide a User Definable Memory Map, which shall allow a remote computer to read up to 120 nonconsecutive data registers by using one Modbus packet. The User Definable Memory Map shall be programmed to join any memory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Map locations, so that they can be accessed by means of these consecutive locations. The User Definable area shall have two sections: a. A register index area containing 120 actual values or setpoints registers. b. A Register area containing the data located at the addresses in the Register Index. C. A simulation feature shall be included to allow testing without the need for external current inputs. E. Eddy Current Drive Controller: a. Refer to Section 262923.26 for more detail. 2.10 FEEDER TAP UNITS A. MCCBs (to 1200 A): Fixed mounted, with inverse time -current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Comply with UL 489, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. 1. Adjustable, Instantaneous -Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field -adjustable trip setting. 2. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field -adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short -time pickup levels. C. Long- and short -time time adjustments. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 13 of 18 d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response. 3. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit -breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts. 5. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 7. Zone -Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic, ground -fault, phase -fault trip unit; for interlocking ground -fault phase -fault protection function. 8. Electrical Operator: Remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. MCC Testing: Test and inspect MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18. B. VFC Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. Test each VFC while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for which the VFC is rated. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features specified. C. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. NEMA Industrial Control and Systems Standards: Comply with parts of NEMA ICS 2.3 for installation and startup of MCCs. B. Floor Mounting: Install MCCs on 4-inch nominal -thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 14 of 18 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. E. Install fuses in each fusible switch. F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses." G. Install heaters in thermal -overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full -load amperes after motors have been installed. H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal -protector monitoring relays furnished with motor -driven equipment. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. 2. Install required warning signs. 3. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 4. Label each enclosure -mounted control and pilot device. 5. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field -assigned wiring identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs. 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 23 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 15 of 18 B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic -control selection devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic -control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual -control position. 2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety -type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high -temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. B. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 16 of 18 controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Submit calibration record for device. 5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 6. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings. F. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to NETA Acceptance Testing Specification and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time -delay relays, timers, and overload relay pickup and trip ranges. B. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal -magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full -load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool -down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full -load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. D. Set field -adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced -voltage, solid-state controllers. E. Program microprocessors in VFCs for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance ttesting and prior to Substantial Completion. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 17 of 18 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor - based, reduced -voltage, solid-state controllers. END OF SECTION 26 24 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 24 19 MOTOR -CONTROL CENTERS Page 18 of 18 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 25 05 — 480V CONTROL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes industrial control panels with the following features: 1. Enclosure. 2. Main circuit breaker. 3. Motor controllers. 4. Control and monitoring devices. 5. Accessories. 6. Identification. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 22 for plumbing work 2. Division 26 for electrical work 3. Division 27 for communications wiring 4. Division 40 for process automation requirements 5. Division 46 for vendor package 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPT: Control power transformer. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. MCCB: Molded -case circuit breaker. D. MCP: Motor circuit protector. E. NEC: National Electrical Code. F. RVSS: Reduced voltage soft start. G. RVAT: Reduced voltage autotransformer start. H. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating. I. SPD: Surge protective device. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 2 of 10 UL: Underwriter's Laboratories. K. VFC: Variable frequency motor controller. See VFD. L. VFD: Variable frequency drive. Used interchangeably with the term VFC. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control panel. 1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated. 2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each control panel. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Bill of materials with part numbers, cross-referenced to plans. 3. Nameplate schedule. 4. Conduit entrance locations and mounting details. 5. Power and control schematics. 6. Certification for compliance with UL 508A. 7. Identification per NEC 409.110. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, from manufacturer. B. Startup reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following if applicable: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal -magnetic circuit breaker and motor -circuit protector trip settings. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. 5. Load -Current and Overload -Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full -load currents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 3 of 10 6. Load -Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor -running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Control fuses: Equal to 10 percent of total quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 2. Power fuses: Equal to 10 percent of total quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 3. Corrosion Inhibitor: Equal to 100 percent of total number of control panels. (One spare per panel.) 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store control panels indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect control panels from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. B. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside enclosures and install temporary electric heating, with at least 50 W per enclosure. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Environment Ratings: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 23 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet for electromagnetic and manual devices. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace control panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 4 of 10 SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for control panels clearances between control panels and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. Comply with NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. F. Comply with UL 1203 for control panels located in hazardous (classified) locations. G. Comply with NFPA 70. H. Comply with UL 508A. I. Complete and fully functional control to manually or automatically operate the control system as specified herein and in other applicable sections of these specifications. Include manufacturer's recommended safety devices to protect operators. All control devices, unless specified otherwise, mounted in the Control Panel. The control panel shall operate on a power supply of 480 volts, 3 -phase, 60 hertz unless otherwise noted. K. Control panel consists of a main circuit breaker, motor circuit protector (MCP) and motor controller for each motor, and a 120-volt control power transformer (fused on primary and secondary) along with other devices specified. Mount all control components in one common enclosure. L. Operation of motors will be manually or automatically. Stager control of multiple motors to prevent simultaneous motor starting. M. All electronic control equipment (i.e. controllers, isolators, signal boosters, transmitters, PLC's, etc.) shall be as specified in Division 40. N. Control panels containing PLC's shall contain UPS or battery ride -through for the PLC in accordance with Division 40 specifications. O. SCCR: Control panels with main breakers of 125 amps or less shall have SCCR of 35kA, unless specifically noted elsewhere. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 5 of 10 2.2 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted, dead -front cabinets rated for environmental conditions at installed location. Unless noted elsewhere, NEMA rating shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 14 gauge. B. Construction: The door shall be mounted via continuous stainless steel hinged and provided with a pad -lockable vault type 3-point latch. The enclosure shall be equipped with a door and shall incorporate a removable back panel on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to enclosure with collar studs. Door(s) shall be interlocked with main circuit breaker and provided with pad -locking provision. C. All motor branch circuit breakers, motor starters and control relays shall be of highest industrial quality, securely fastened to the removable back panels with screws and lock washers. Back panels shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any component. D. Operating handle for main circuit breaker: flange mounted. E. Outdoor enclosures shall be provided with sun shields. Install sun shields on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures subject to direct and extended sun exposure. F. Provide additional temperature control if required to meet UL temperature rating of internal components. If forced air ventilation is required, the enclosure shall be pressurized. Air filters shall be of commercially available types and sizes. G. All operating control and instruments shall be securely mounted on the exterior door. All controls and instruments shall be clearly labeled to indicate function. All exterior mounted equipment shall be NEMA 4X. H. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. Pocket shall be of sufficient size as required to hold all prints necessary to service the equipment. I. Where the project has multiple control panels, suggest including a table of SCCR requirements for the paragraph below — design engineer to perform short circuit calculations to confirm. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Main Breaker: Thermal -magnetic air circuit breaker, Schneider Electric/Square D PowerPact Type BG (125 amp frame, 65kAIC) or equal. B. MCP: Molded case motor circuit protector with adjustable magnetic trip only, Schneider Electric/Square D "Mag-Gard" or equal. C. Motor Controller: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 6 of 10 1. Full Voltage Motor Starting: Open frame, across -the -line, NEMA-rated magnetic motor starter, Schneider Electric/Square D Class 8536 or equal. Solid state overloads with Class 10/20 selectable tripping. Submersible motors shall use Class 10 trip curve. 2. Reduced voltage motor starting: RVSS. D. Overload relays shall be self -powered solid-state type and provide the following features: tamper guard over trip adjustment setting, ambient insensitive, harmonic immunity, phase loss and phase unbalance protection, manual reset, and push -to -test. E. Overload reset buttons shall be mounted on dead front door. F. Normally open and normally closed auxiliary motor overload contacts wired to terminal blocks shall be provided for each motor starter within the control panel. G. SPD: The control panel shall be provided with a surge protective device (SPD) rated for 100kA per mode for the incoming power. SPD shall be mounted within the control panel enclosure. Lead lengths shall not be longer than 12 inches from the main circuit breaker. H. Control Power Transformer: 480-120V CPT, fused on primary and secondary sides, capacity as required. 2.4 CONTROL DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Operators and Indictors: 1. Heavy duty type, full size (30.5mm), NEMA 4X or 7 as required. 2. Each motor shall include Hand -Off -Auto selector switches to permit override of automatic control and manual actuation of shutdown. B. Indicating Lights: 1. LED, full size (30.5mm), full voltage and push -to -test type. 2. Indicators shall be provided for individual motor run and an indicator for each failure condition. C. Elapsed Time Meters (ETM): 1. Six (6) digit, non -reset elapsed time meter to indicate the total running time of each motor in "hours" and "tenth of hours". Series T50 as manufactured by the ENM Company or equal. 2. Provide an ETM for each motor. D. Failure Alarm Horn and Beacon Light: 1. Alarm horn: weatherproof rated with gasket (Federal Signal Corporation, Cat. #350 or equal) for NEMA 4X applications. 2. Alarm beacon: Red lens and solid-state flasher (Ingam Products Inc. LRX-40 or equal) for NEMA 4X applications. 3. All lift station pump control panels shall include alarm horn and light for summary alarm condition. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 7 of 10 4. Silence and reset pushbuttons shall also be furnished. A common failure reset pushbutton shall be provided to reset the alarm conditions (reset shall occur only if fault condition has been cleared). E. Relays: 1. Control relays shall be 10 amp rated contacts (minimum), 11 pin with mounting base, 3PDT (minimum), with LED indicators to show relay status, relays shall be manufactured by Potter Brumfield or equal. 2. Timing relays shall be solid state, with pin (octal) and bases, relays shall be T-series as manufactured by Diversified Electronics Inc. or equal. 3. Intrinsically safe relays shall be solid state type with 5 amp output contacts, suitable for use on 120 volt, 60 hertz power supply and shall be Factory Mutual approved for devices in Class 1, Division 1 hazardous atmospheres. Intrinsically safe relays shall be Gems Solid State Safe -Pak as manufactured by Gems Sensors, Division of Transamerica Delaval, Inc. or equal. F. A duplex GFCI utility receptacle (circuit breaker protected) providing 120 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase current shall be mounted on the side of the enclosure. G. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by Divisions 40, 26 and as shown on the Drawings. H. Alternators shall be provided to sequence lead/lag motors, alternators shall be 008-120-13SP or 009-120-23AP as manufactured by Sta-con, or equal. I. A phase monitor shall be provided for the control panel, monitors shall be model SUA-440-ASA as manufactured by Diversified Electronics Inc., or equal. Corrosion Inhibitor Emitter: Inclusion of an industrial corrosion inhibitor emitter, selected by the manufacturer, to protect internal components of control panel from corrosion for up to one year. K. Breather assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. L. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings. 2.5 WIRING A. Power and control wire shall be 600 Volt class, Type MTW insulated stranded tinned copper and shall be of the sizes required for the current to be carried, but not smaller than No. 14 AWG. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. B. Wiring shall be stranded tinned copper, minimum size #14 AWG (except for shielded instrumentation cable), with 600 Volt, 90 degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 8 of 10 C. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. D. Terminal blocks shall be 600 Volt heavy duty rated, tubular clamp type. Terminal strips shall be Allen Bradley catalog #1492-CA-1 or equal. E. A tinned copper ground bar with sufficient terminals for all field and panel ground connections shall be provided. F. All signal wiring entering and exiting the control panel shall be provided with surge protection. Surge protection shall be as specified in Division 40. G. An 8-inch (minimum) clear space within the enclosure shall be provided horizontally along the entire top and bottom of the control panel. A 4-inch (minimum) clear space within the enclosure shall be provided vertically along the entire sides of the control panel. No devices, terminals, etc. shall be installed within this space, the space shall be provided for field conduit and wiring access only. 2.6 IDENTIFICATION A. All control panel wiring shall be numbered at both ends with type written heat shrinkable wire markers. B. The control diagrams and overload tables shall be laminated to the inside of the door except where door space is limited the laminated documents shall be in the print storage pocket. C. The control panel shall be provided with nameplates identifying each component, selector switches, pilot lights, etc. Nameplates shall be permanently affixed using an epoxy process (inner door nameplates shall be fastened with stainless steel screws). Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, engraved black letters with a white background. D. All control panels shall be provided with two nameplates located on the exterior door. The first nameplate shall identify the control panel name. The second nameplate shall identify the power source. E. Where applicable provide a nameplate which reads as follows "CAUTION - THIS PANEL CONTAINS A VOLTAGE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE." Letters shall be black on a high visibility yellow background. F. Each terminal at terminal blocks shall be individually labeled. G. Incoming phase conductor terminals shall be clearly identified. All wiring within the control panel shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. The following coding shall be used. System Wire Color Incoming line voltage Phase conductors Black CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 Internal control voltage Internal control voltage External source 2.7 FACTORY TESTS Ground Green Neutral (as required) Gray AC Red DC Blue All Yellow 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 9 of 10 A. Inspect and test control panel for correct operation. Test each circuit for continuity, short circuits, and ground faults. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. C. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. D. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements. E. Motor Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full -load current rating as shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for motors that are high -torque, high -efficiency, and so on. F. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.2 STARTUP SERVICE A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Verify motor running protection is appropriate for actual motors installed. C. Test control panel with all field wiring connected. Set adjustable set points and time delays for proper operation of equipment. Adjust as required. D. Perform infrared inspection of panel interior during periods of maximum possible loading. Remove all necessary covers prior to the inspection. Comply with the recommendations of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter, "Infrared Inspection" Article. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 25 05 480V CONTROL PANELS Page 10 of 10 E. Prepare test and inspection reports. F. Install a set of legible "as built" control panel drawings (1 lx17 or 8.5 x 11), in the storage pocket. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment. END OF SECTION 26 25 050 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• I11u1u1F."IWA A. Section includes receptacles, toggle switches, cover plates, and cord and plug sets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on project. Note this Section may include products not required for the project. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing - label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Comply with the following standards and UL Category Control Number (CCN) listing criteria as applicable: 1. UL 20, Standard for General -Use Snap Switches, CCN WMUZ. 2. UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, CCN RTRT. 3. UL 894, Standard for Safety Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 4. UL 943, Standard for Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters (Class A), CCN KCXS. 5. UL 1010, Standard for Safety Receptacle -Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 6 6. ANSIINEMA WD 6 for dimensional requirements for receptacles and plugs rated up to 60A and 600V. 7. NEMA WD 1 for colors. 8. Federal Specifications: a. FS W-S-896 for switches. b. FS W-C-596 for receptacles. C. Device Color: 1. White: Devices located in administrative office areas, conference rooms, break rooms, restrooms, and control rooms. 2. Gray: Devices located in electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, process areas, and outdoors. D. Wall Plate Color: For non-metallic covers, match device color. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 INDUSTRIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES, 125V, 20A A. Duplex Receptacles, 125V, 20A: 1. Manufacturers: a. Arrow -Hart (Eaton), 5362 Series. b. Hubbell, 5362 Series. C. Leviton, 5362 Series. d. Or equal. 2. Description: Heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, two -pole, three -wire, and self - grounding, NEMA 5-20R. B. Duplex Weather -Resistant Receptacles, 120V, 20A. Drawing Designation: AT. 1. Hubbell, HBL5362WR Series or equal. 2. Description: Heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, weather -resistant, two -pole, three -wire, and self -grounding, NEMA 5-20R. C. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125V, 20A. Drawing Designations GFCI. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hubbell GF5362SG Series. b. Arrow -Hart (Eaton) TWRSGF20 Series. C. Leviton GFTR2-3L Series. d. Or equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 3 of 6 2. Description: Extra heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, tamper -resistant, weather resistant, ground -fault circuit -interrupter receptacle, two -pole, three -wire, and self - grounding, NEMA 5-20R. Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons. Three LED indicators: power solid green, GF/trip solid red, ending of life flashing red. 2.3 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION DEVICES A. Hazardous (Classified) Locations Receptacles and Switches. Drawing Designation: XP. 1. Enclosure Rating: NEC Hazardous Area Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups C and D (NEMA 7) and wet locations. 2. Receptacle Description: Explosion -proof factory sealed, pin and sleeve receptacle, 20A, for use at 125 or 250V, two wire, 3 pole. Complete with cast box and matching plug. Appleton Contender CPS152 Series with matching cover and CPP plug or equivalent by Crouse -Hinds. With optional GFCI if noted on Drawing. 3. Switch Description: Explosion -proof factory sealed, control station switch, 20A, for use at 120/277V, single pole. Complete with cast box. Appleton Contender EDS Series or equivalent by Crouse -Hinds. 2.4 INDUSTRIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277V, 20A A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow -Hart (Eaton), 1220 Series. 2. Hubbell, HBL1220 Series. 3. Leviton, 1220 Series. 4. Or equal. B. Description: Extra heavy duty, industrial, specification grade, switch, 120/277V, 20A, toggle action, flush mounting, quiet type. Single pole, double pole, three-way, or four-way, as indicated on Drawings. 2.5 WALL PLATES A. Match gang configuration as indicated on Drawings. B. Obtain wall plates from same manufacturer as wiring device. C. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. D. Material for Administrative Offices, Conference Rooms, Break Rooms, Restrooms, And Control Rooms: Smooth, high impact thermoplastic or nylon. E. Material for Flush Mounted Devices In Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, And Indoor Process Areas: Type 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel. F. Material for Surface Mounted Device Plates: Same material as box. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 6 G. WP Receptacle Cover Plates: In -use weather -resistant, heavy duty die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. H. WP Switch Cover Plates: Weatherproof switch cover, listed to UL514D, non-metallic UV - resistant, operable without opening cover, lockable. Arrow -Hart (Eaton) S2983 or equal. 2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. B. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with green - insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. C. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices in accordance with NFPA 70, manufacturer's instructions, and listing for each device. B. Install switch and receptacle outlets flush with finished wall for new wall construction and where existing wall is stud and sheetrock construction. C. Drawings show the general location of devices unless dimensioned. Adjust and coordinate location to avoid piping or other obstructions. D. Use of one GFCI receptacle to protect downstream conventional receptacles is prohibited. E. Device Mounting Heights (as measured to the center of the device box): 1. Switches and Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches AFF, located on strike side of door. 2. Wall Receptacles, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: a. Process Areas and Shops: 36 inches AFF. b. Administration Office Areas: 18 inches AFF. C. Corridors and Hallways: 18 inches AFF. d. Electrical and Mechanical Rooms: 18 inches AFF. e. Restrooms: 18 inches AFF. f. Above Counters: 8 inches above countertop or at backsplash level. g. Exterior Walls: 24 inches AFG. 3. Where walls are unplastered brick or masonry, adjust mounting height above so one horizontal edge of device box lines up with a horizontal joint in the masonry. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 5 of 6 F. Device Boxes: 1. Install correct size and type box for the device(s) and location, allowing for adequate space for conductors, connectors, clamps, devices, and barriers, where required. 2. Install boxes level, plumb, and secure. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. G. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. H. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. Provide adequate length of free conductors at boxes for devices without pigtails. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the box is large enough. I. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Make equipment grounding conductor connections and splices so removal or disconnection of any wiring devices does not interrupt continuity of the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three -fourths of the way around terminal screw. Do not overlap conductors. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device -mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. Orientation and Arrangement: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. 2. Group adjacent switches under single, multi -gang wall plates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 6 of 6 K. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Label receptacles and switches with panelboard identification and circuit number in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Label receptacles that are non-GFCI type, but GFCI protected, such as from a GFCI circuit breaker, with a label "GFCI Protected". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify correct operation of GFCI receptacles using GFCI tester. B. Verify correct voltage and phasing at receptacles. 1. Use receptacle circuit tester for NEMA 5-20R receptacles. Use voltmeter for other receptacles. 2. Use phase sequence meter for three phase receptacles. C. Correct deficiencies found and reverify. D. Prepare field quality report certifying verification of correct installation. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 13 FUSES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following: a. Control circuits. b. Motor -control centers. C. Panelboards. d. Enclosed controllers. e. Enclosed switches. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current -limitation curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics. 4. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) and current -limitation curves (instantaneous peak let -through current) for each type and rating of fuse. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF format. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 13 FUSES Page 2 of 4 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current -limitation curves for fuses with current -limiting characteristics. 3. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) and current -limitation curves (instantaneous peak let -through current) for each type and rating of fuse used on the Project. Submit in electronic format suitable for use in coordination software and in PDF format. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data. [%. Mv131►11021►/121413ulr1919I.111W381:7u111wIF.111 V A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current -limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting. 4. Type CD: 600-V, 3 1 - to 60-A rating, 200 kAIC, fast acting. 5. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 13 FUSES Page 3 of 4 6. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 7. Type T: 600-V, zero- to 800-A rating, 200 kAIC, very fast acting. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Feeders: Class L, fast acting. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RKl, time delay, time delay. 3. Large Motor Branch (601-4000 A): Class L, time delay. 4. Power Electronics Circuits: Class J, high speed. 5. Other Branch Circuits: Class RKl, time delay. 6. Control Transformer Circuits: Class CC, time delay, control transformer duty. 7. Provide open -fuse indicator fuses or fuse covers with open fuse indication. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 13 FUSES Page 4 of 4 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION 26 28 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 1 of 9 SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 9 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. b. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 3 of 9 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer. B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by UL or a NRTL if approved by the Owner and/or Engineer, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 4 of 9 2.3 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Comi)anv. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Enerav Manaizement Division. 4. Square D, by Schneider Electric 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type HD, Heavy Duty: 1. Double throw. 2. six pole. 3. 600-V ac. 4. 1200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. NEMA Type 7/9: 1. Single throw. 2. Three pole. 3. 600-V ac. 4. 200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses. 6. UL 1203, NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG, rated for Class I, Division 2 locations 7. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. E. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating - 120-V ac. 6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 5 of 9 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.4 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Eaton. 2. General Electric Comnanv. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc., Enerav Manaizement Division. 4. Square D, by Schneider Electric 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type GD, General Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. NEMA Type 7/9, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, UL 1203, NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG, rated for Class I, Division 2 locations, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating - 120-V ac. 6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.5 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 6 of 9 B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be a brush finish on Type 304 stainless steel (NEMA 250 Type 4-4X 316 stainless steel or fiberglass if approved by Owner and Engineer) . C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts. NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both endwalls. D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit -breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock. E. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X 316 stainless steel, 12, or 12K shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open. F. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit to allow their use in outdoor and wet location applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven Insert number days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 7 of 9 3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4XSS. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X SS. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. 5. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. E. Install fuses in fusible devices. F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 8 of 9 C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative. D. Tests and Inspections for Switches: Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. C. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low -resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque -wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. a) Bolt -torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. i. Verify correct phase barrier installation. j. Verify lubrication of moving current -carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low -resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. C. Perform insulation -resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 9 of 9 insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse -resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low -Voltage." E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 29 23.26- EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes eddy -current variable speed drive units with controls, couplings, accessories and spare parts B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 262419 "Motor -Control Centers" for Eddy Current controller installed in motor - control centers. 2. Section 432335 "Recessed Impeller Pumps" C. Supplier and Compatibility with Driven Equipment: 1. Manufacturer of Eddy current drive to coordinate with the driven equipment characteristics. 2. Eddy current drive to be provided by driven equipment supplier. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of eddy current drive indicated. 1. Include descriptive bill of materials, literature, and catalog cut sheets of equipment and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For each eddy current drive indicated. 1. Include physical characteristics: a. Dimensions, weights, and required clearances. b. Views showing front elevations with designation of devices and internal layout of components. C. Mounting and attachment details. d. Conduit entry and size locations. e. Enclosure rating and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics: a. Voltage, Ampacity, and power. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 2 of 6 b. Fault ratings. C. Maximum heat dissipation. d. Efficiencies and power factor. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Specification Compliance: 1. Include a copy of this specification confirming compliance with each paragraph. For deviations, provide detailed commentary to explain the deviation. 2. Include completed coordination statement. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each Eddy Current Drive from manufacturer. C. Source quality -control reports. D. Field quality -control reports. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For eddy current drives to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Include the following as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field -adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. C. For each Eddy Current Drive Controller, a table listing of the "as left" drive set up parameters, timing relay settings, alarm, and trip set points. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 3 of 6 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer of Eddy Current Drives must be ISO 9001 certified or have a quality management system in place comparable to the requirements of ISO 9001. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace Eddy Current Drives that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dynamatic Drive Source International, INC. 2. Drivespec International LLC. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pumps: Complete with motor, eddy current clutches, eddy current drive controller, V-Belt, baseplate, necessary guards, and all other specified accessories and appurtenances to insure compatibility and integrity of the individual components. The pump manufacturer accepts unit responsibility for each pump assembly. B. Drive Construction: The variable speed drive to be an eddy current coupling type magnetic drive, of air-cooled open type construction. 1. Clutch: Each comprised of a rigid frame, constant speed input drum member coupled to the drive motor, and an adjustable speed out shaft suitable belt driven requirements to PUMP. 2. Drive: Each to have an integral tachometer generator mounted around the output shaft to provide a feedback signal to the drives controller. C. Sizing Criteria: Size non -overloading drives with a slip of no more than three percent, when running at maximum output speed, and when transmitting the nameplate rating of the driving motor. Provide drive capable of providing an infinitely adjustable speed range to the pump. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 4 of 6 D. Bearings: Antifriction type, grease lubricated, and sized to support the equipment or pump hydraulic thrust recommended by the equipment manufacturer. E. Speed Controller: Digital speed controller provides the DC excitation for the EC clutch coil. The feedback signal from the tachometer generator is used as a reference signal within the controller and is used as a reference signal within the controller to maintain accurate speed regulation. F. Eddy Current Drives and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. G. Controller: Provides the DC excitation for the clutch coil. The feedback signal from the tachometer generator is used as a reference signal within the controller to maintain accurate speed regulation. 1. Provide NEMA 4XSS control Panel sized no larger than 20"W x 10 "D a. Pilot devices as shown on the P&ID. b. UL listed panel C. 120VAC. ] Phase. 60Hz input Power Kevpad. d. 0-90 VDC coil voltage. e. Input disconnect switch. A. Environment: 1. Elevation: Up to 3,300 feet without derating. 2. Ambient Air Temperature: 0 to 50 degrees Celsius without derating. 3. Relative Humidity: Less than 95 percent, non -condensing. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect Eddy Current Drive according to manufacturer's standards. B. Eddy Current Drive will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive Eddy Current Drives, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, conduit entry locations, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine Eddy Current Drive before installation. Reject Eddy Current Drives that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 5 of 6 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. Level and anchor equipment. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs and shipping braces. Touch up damaged paint finishes. B. Maintain adequate clearance between power and signal wiring to avoid electro-magnetic interference on signal cables. [c�c�101WN01a(LI11300 A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify equipment by name designation and fed from source nameplates. 2. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. B. Install Arc Flash Labels in accordance with Section 250573 "Power System Studies". 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division of Responsibilities: 1. Provide installation and assist with all testing and startup activities. 2. Engage factory authorized service representative to assist in installation, inspection, testing, startup, and commissioning activities specified herein to active manufacturer's warranty. B. Perform inspection, testing, and startup activities recommended by and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NETA ATS, and as specified herein. Provide materials and labor as necessary. Correct deficiencies, make adjustments, and retest until requirements are met. Provide written report for each field testing or service visit. C. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Compare Eddy Current Drive and motor nameplate data and confirm compatibility. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 4. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections. Use calibrated torque wrench. 5. Verify unit is clean and ventilation pathways clear. D. Electrical Tests: 1. Test input circuit breaker by primary injection. 2. Test protective parameters as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Verify correct input and output voltages, currents, and phase rotations. E. Eddy Current Drives will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 29 23.26 EDDY CURRENT DRIVE CONTROLLER Page 6 of 6 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. The following items must be complete prior to startup service: 1. Driven equipment installed and ready for loading. 2. Associated SCADA system installed and programmed. B. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Field test hardwired discrete and analog connections and any digital communication signals connected to verify proper operation. Include as a minimum: a. The drive can be started and stopped remotely. b. The drive can have its speed changed remotely. C. The remote equipment can read the Eddy Current Drive discrete status information. d. The remote equipment can read the Eddy Current Drive speed feedback information. e. Each alarm and control input/output functions correctly, in manual and automatic. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to demonstrate correct operation, adjust parameters, reprogram, and maintain Eddy Current Drives to Owner. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint -free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION 262923 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 1 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 36 00 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes nonautomatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for transfer switches. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, and installed features and devices. 2. Include material lists for each switch specified. 3. Single -Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch. 4. Riser Diagram: Show interconnection wiring between transfer switches, bypass/isolation switches, annunciators, and control panels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer -authorized service representative. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transfer switches, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 2 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 2 of 8 C. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay -setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Member company of NETA. a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of transfer switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. C. Comply with NFPA 110. D. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. E. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 3 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 3 of 8 F. Tested Fault -Current Closing and Short -Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. G. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage -surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.62. Components shall meet or exceed voltage -impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, by color -code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable with printed markers at terminations. Color -coding and wire and cable markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. 2. Power -Terminal Arrangement and Field -Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips. 4. Accessible via front access. I. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. ASCO Power Technologies. 2. Eaton. 3. GE by ABB. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Manual and Electrically Operated: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternative Source." Manual handle provides quick -make, quick -break manual - switching action. Switch shall be capable of electrically or manually transferring load in either direction with either or both sources energized. Control circuit disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. C. Double -Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during switching sequence. D. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. E. Source -Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch normal- and alternative -source sensing circuits. 1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 4 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 4 of 8 2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternative Source Available." F. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Switch shall have one set of normally closed contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. G. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current between active power sources. 1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching. 3. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 4. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 5. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 6. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 7. Ground bar. 8. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment according to UL 1008. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time -delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. For each of the tests required by UL 1008, performed on representative devices, for emergency systems. Include results of test for the following conditions: a. Overvoltage. b. Undervoltage. C. Loss of supply voltage. d. Reduction of supply voltage. e. Alternative supply voltage or frequency is at minimum acceptable values. f. Temperature rise. g. Dielectric voltage -withstand; before and after short-circuit test. h. Overload. i. Contact opening. j. Endurance. k. Short circuit. 1. Short -time current capability. In. Receptacle withstand capability. n. Insulating base and supports damage. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 5 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 5 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Floor -Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. 1. Install transfer switches on cast -in -place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in - Place Concrete." 2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. 3. Provide workspace and clearances required by NFPA 70. B. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." C. Set field -adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator sets, motor controls, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within electrical enclosures. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." F. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 260523 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables." G. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling." H. Route and brace conductors according to manufacturer's written instructions. and Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Do not obscure manufacturer's markings and labels. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 6 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 6 of 8 I. Brace and support equipment according to Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." J. Final connections to equipment shall be made with liquidtight, flexible metallic conduit no more than 18 inches in length. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. After installing equipment, test for compliance with requirements according to NETA ATS. 2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. C. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current -carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. £ Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible. g. Verify tightness of all control connections. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods, or both: 1) Use of low -resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque -wrench method according to manufacturer's published data. i. Perform manual transfer operation. j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources. k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters. 1. Inspect control power transformers. 1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit -breaker ratings match Drawings. 3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts, grounding contacts, and interlocks. 3. Electrical Tests: a. Perform insulation -resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 7 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 7 of 8 b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare measured values with manufacturer's acceptable values. C. Verify settings and operation of control devices. d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers. e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation. f. Perform automatic transfer tests. g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions: 1) Normal source voltage -sensing and frequency -sensing relays. 2) Engine start sequence. 3) Time delay on transfer. 4) Alternative source voltage -sensing and frequency -sensing relays. 5) Automatic transfer operation. 6) Interlocks and limit switch function. 7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration. 8) Engine cool -down and shutdown feature. 4. Measure insulation resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with insulation - resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. C. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 5. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer switches stated in NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and retransfer from emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase -to -ground voltage for each phase of normal source. C. Verify time -delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer -switch operations. £ Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool - down and shutdown. 6. Ground -Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 263600 - 8 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 8 of 8 D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. F. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. H. Prepare test and inspection reports. I. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch I I months after date of Substantial Completion. WEA �� 391u16101y11'TV 1116101 A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment. B. Training shall include testing ground -fault protective devices and instructions to determine when the ground -fault system shall be retested. Include instructions on where ground -fault sensors are located and how to avoid negating the ground -fault protection scheme during testing and circuit modifications. C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. END OF SECTION 263600 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 5119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81L31u1&'%A11 A. LED luminaires: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light -emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy -efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES "Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 8 a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. D. Product Test Reports: For each type of luminaire, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 3 of 8 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three -step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. E. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Engineer's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 8 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." C. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F. 1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 100 percent. D. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet. 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Factory -Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4 D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. F. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule on the Contract Drawing. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 5 of 8 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Steel: 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A 568/A 568M for sheet steel. C. Stainless Steel: 1. 1. Manufacturer's standard grade. 2. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A 240/240 M. D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M. E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Engineer, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Supports: I . Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 7 of 8 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 26 09 43.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls." B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 26 09 43.23 "Relay -Based Lighting Controls." END OF SECTION 26 51 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2651 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 52 13 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation. D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support. 1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy -efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 2 of 8 a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires and signs, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires and signs shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each product and for each color and texture specified. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with factory -applied finishes. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection. F. Product Schedule: 1. For emergency lighting units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 2. For exit signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire. C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Provide seismic qualification certificate for each piece of equipment. D. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 3 of 8 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting units. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards. C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. D. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Engineer's approval of luminaires and signs in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 4 of 8 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924. C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires. E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires. F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61. G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1. H. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power -supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 5 of 8 disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F. C. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing). d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet. 4. Test Push -Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer relay. 7. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory -installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 8. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code - required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.3 METAL FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires. B. Examine roughing -in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting luminaires will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 7 of 8 B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service: 1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to conduct short -duration test. 2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one -hour discharge test. END OF SECTION 26 52 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 56 13 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw► WI1LSlu1F."IWA A. Section Includes: 1. Poles and accessories for support of luminaires. 2. Luminaire-lowering devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPA: Equivalent projected area. B. Luminaire: Complete luminaire. C. Pole: Luminaire-supporting structure, including tower used for large -area illumination. D. Standard: See "Pole." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each pole, accessory, and luminaire-supporting and -lowering device, arranged as indicated. 1. Include data on construction details, profiles, EPA, cable entrances, materials, dimensions, weight, rated design load, and ultimate strength of individual components. 2. Include finishes for lighting poles and luminaire-supporting devices. 3. Anchor bolts. 4. Manufactured pole foundations. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of poles and pole accessories. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 2 of 8 4. Foundation construction details, including material descriptions, dimensions, anchor bolts, support devices, and calculations, signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of installation. 5. Anchor bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 6. Method and procedure of pole installation. Include manufacturer's written installations. C. Samples: For each exposed lighting pole, standard, and luminaire-supporting device and for each color and texture specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements according to AASHTO LTS-6-M and that load imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer. B. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. C. Seismic Qualification Data: For accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Material Test Reports: 1. For each foundation component, by a qualified testing agency. 2. For each pole, by a qualified testing agency. E. Source quality -control reports. F. Field quality -control reports. G. Sample Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty. H. Soil test reports 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For poles and luminaire-lowering devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include pole inspection and repair procedures. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 3 of 8 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Pole repair materials. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for foundation testing. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B660. B. Store poles on decay -resistant skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below finished grade. D. Retain factory -applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. E. Retain factory -applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of pole(s) that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within a specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs from special warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Corrosion Resistance: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Foundation and pole shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 4 of 8 1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. B. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-6-M. C. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M. D. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf distributed according to AASHTO LTS-6-M. E. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M for applicable areas on the Ice Load Map. F. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied according to AASHTO LTS-6-M. 1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph. a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years. C. Velocity Conversion Factor: 1.0. G. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual EPA of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the EPA to be used in pole selection strength analysis. H. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless -steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated. I. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule.. 2.2 MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Anchor Bolts: Manufactured to ASTM F1554, Grade 55, with a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi. 1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C. B. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A, Heavy -Hex 1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C. C. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1. 1. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class C. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 5 of 8 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine poles, luminaire-mounting devices, lowering devices, and pole accessories before installation. Components that are scratched, dented, marred, wet, moisture damaged, or visibly damaged are considered defective. C. Examine roughing -in for foundation and conduit to verify actual locations of installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 POLE FOUNDATION A. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole -base flange. Structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top -plate and mounting bolts to match pole -base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." B. Pre -Cast Foundations: Factory fabricated, with structural steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M; and with top - plate and mounting bolts to match pole -base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Anchor Bolts: Install plumb using manufacturer -supplied steel template, uniformly spaced. 3.3 POLE INSTALLATION A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on pole. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 6 of 8 B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." C. Foundation -Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts and tighten top nuts to torque level according to pole manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2 -inch diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete -Paved Areas: Install poles with a minimum 6-inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of the adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel. Insert material to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab. E. Raise and set pole using web fabric slings (not chain or cable) at locations indicated by manufacturer. 3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum using insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe - wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50-percent overlap. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Ground Metal Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. B. Ground Nonmetallic Poles and Support Structures: Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 7 of 8 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Inspect poles for nicks, mars, dents, scratches, and other damage. 2. System function tests. 19121 61W916iIto]►&VISMSF91 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 13 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 56 19 — LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81L31u1&'%A11 A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology. 2. Luminaire supports. 3. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 56 13 "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and standards used to support exterior lighting equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color rendering index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of lummaire. 4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy -efficiency data. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 10 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. a. Manufacturer's Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. 6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring. 7. Photoelectric relays. 8. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment is suitable for components involved. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture indicated with factory -applied finish. D. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires. B. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Product Certificates: For each type of the following: 1. Luminaire. 2. Photoelectric relay. D. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 3 of 10 E. Source quality -control reports. F. Sample warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and photoelectric relays to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. 2. Provide a list of all photoelectric relay types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: Ten for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Glass, Acrylic, and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers' laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products and complying with applicable IES testing standards. C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type. D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three -step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires. E. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 10 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipping. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Verify existing and proposed utility structures prior to the start of work associated with luminaire installation. B. Mark locations of exterior luminaires for approval by Engineer prior to the start of luminaire installation. A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components. b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 2 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." 2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 5 of 10 B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location. E. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61. F. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1. G. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. H. Internal driver. I. Source Limitations: Obtain luminaires from single source from a single manufacturer. J. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. K. Refer to Light Fixture schedule on Contract Drawing. 2.3 FINISHES A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. C. Factory -Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax. 3. Class I, Clear -Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 4. Class I, Color -Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 6 of 10 integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 min or thicker), complying with AAMA 611. D. Factory -Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high -gloss, high -build polyurethane enamel. i►��1111u11►/117 W11819Ell 711[K630VI0]►1WIN A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 17_,1taIam*:4i[o11]10to] ►1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit connections before luminaire installation. C. Examine walls, roofs, and canopy ceilings and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. If approved by the Engineer, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is substantially complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 7 of 10 C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Fasten luminaire to structural support. E. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. F. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods. 3.4 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION: A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND -MOUNTED LUMINAIRES A. Aim as indicated on Drawings. B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3.6 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 26 05 33 'Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 8 of 10 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Illumination Tests: 1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IES testing guide(s): a. IES LM-5. b. IES LM-50. C. IES LM-52. d. IES LM-64. e. IES LM-72. 2. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. D. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaires and photocell relays. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other -than -normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 9 of 10 END OF SECTION 26 56 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 26 56 19 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 1 of 6 SECTION 31 05 15 - SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soils: Soil materials and topsoil materials. 2. Aggregates: Coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 3120 00 "Earthwork." 2. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill." 3. Section 3125 00 "Erosion and Sedimentation Control." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples - Soils: Submit in 5-gallon air -tight containers, 50 lbs. sample of each type of soil fill to testing laboratory. B. Quality Control Testing: Submit conformance testing performed by a certified independent laboratory engaged by Contractor for all fill materials. Verify maximum density, gradation, Atterberg limits, sand equivalent, and other applicable criteria at least 72 hours prior to importing or placing any fill. Perform additional conformance testing at a minimum frequency of 1 per every 2,000 cubic yards or change in material. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Materials Source: Submit name and location of imported materials suppliers. B. Source's Certificate: Certify materials meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Material Test Reports: For each on -site and borrow soil and aggregate material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D698. 3. Test Reports: Submit any test reports required by this Section to the Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish each soil material from single source throughout the Work unless an alternate source is approved by the Engineer. B. Furnish each coarse and fine aggregate material from single source throughout the Work unless an alternate source is approved by the Engineer. C. Perform Work according to City of Fort Worth standards. D. Quality Control and Quality Assurance consists of laboratory conformance testing of samples supplied from each coarse and fine aggregate source and quality control during installation. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740 for testing indicated. E. Maintain one copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. rw�a 1:1a 416)►1110to] ►K A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth -moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Common Fill: Approved on site excavated material or imported fill material that is composed of durable soil free of debris, organic matter, or other deleterious materials, with no stones larger than 6 inches in largest diameter, a maximum of 75 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, and a maximum dry density of at least 105 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) as determined by ASTM D698. Provide fill with no granite blocks, broken concrete, masonry rubble, or other similar materials and with physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling. B. Select Fill: Suitable excavated material, or natural or processed mineral soils obtained from offsite sources, that consists of very sandy clay or clayey sand and free from organic material, loam, debris, frozen soil, or other deleterious material. Select fill is to have no stones larger than 2-inch in maximum dimension and no more than 50% of material passing the No. 200 sieve. Select fill is to have a liquid limit less than 40, a plasticity index between 5 and 15, and a maximum dry density of at least 105 pcf as determined by ASTM D698. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 3 of 6 C. Structural Fill: Consist of mineral soil free of organic material, loam, debris, frozen soil or other deleterious material which may be compressible, or which cannot be properly compacted, with the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 1 %2-in 100 No. 4 20 to 70 No. 40 5 to 35 No. 200 0 to 10 Provide structural fill with a maximum liquid limit of 35 percent, maximum plasticity index of 10 percent, and a maximum dry density of at least 105 pcf as determined by ASTM D698. D. Impervious Fill: Suitable excavated material, or natural or processed mineral soils obtained from offsite sources, that has 100 percent of the material passing the 1'/2-inch sieve and at least 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Impervious fill is be classified as a CL or CH soil according to the USCS (ASTM D2488), have a liquid limit of at least 30 percent, a plasticity index between 20 and 50 and a maximum dry density of at least 105 pounds pcf as determined by ASTM D698. 2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Conforming to City of Fort Worth standard. B. Topsoil: 1. Excavated and reused material. 2. Graded. 3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds, and foreign matter. a. Screening: Single screened. PAKc N[67_NNW A. Coarse Aggregate - Crushed Stone: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; conforming to ASTM C33. 1. Coarse Aggregate Designation: No. 57. 2.4 FINE AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Fine Aggregate - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; graded according to ASTM C33; within the following limits: 1. Percent Passing per Sieve Size: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 4 of 6 a. No. 4 95 to 100. b. No. 8 80 to 100. C. No. 16 50 to 85. d. No. 30 25 to 60. e. No. 50 10 to 30. f. No. 10 2 to 10. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Soil Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D698. B. Topsoil Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform in accordance with ASTM D698. C. Coarse Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform according to ASTM D698. D. Fine Aggregate Material - Testing and Analysis: Perform according to ASTM D698. E. When tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. F. Furnish materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION fAA�W,,Cf1_\,FIN1[o]�is] Ir A. Excavate soil and topsoil from areas designated. Strip topsoil to full depth of topsoil in designated areas. B. Stockpile excavated material meeting requirements for soil materials and topsoil materials. C. Remove excess excavated materials not intended for reuse from site. D. Remove excavated materials not meeting requirements for soil materials and topsoil materials from site. 3.2 EXCAVATION - AGGREGATES A. Coordinate excavation of aggregate materials from on -site locations as specified in Section 31 20 00 `Earthwork." B. Stockpile excavated material meeting requirements for coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials. C. Remove excess excavated materials not intended for reuse from site. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 5 of 6 D. Remove excavated materials not meeting requirements for coarse aggregate materials and fine aggregate materials from site. 3.3 STOCKPILING A. Stockpile materials on site at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements. C. Separate different soil and aggregate materials with dividers or stockpile individually to prevent mixing. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination. D. Stockpile topsoil 8 feet high maximum. E. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials. 3.4 STOCKPILE CLEANUP A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water. END OF SECTION 3105 15 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3105 15 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 1 of 15 SECTION 31 09 00 - GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section includes performing pre -construction surveys and installing and monitoring geotechnical instrumentation and survey markers to measure. 1. Performance of excavation support systems. 2. Groundwater levels inside and outside excavation limits. 3. Vertical deformation of ground surface adjacent to and directly over the Work. 4. Vertical and horizontal deformation of existing utilities and structures adjacent to and over the Work. 5. Ground vibration levels at adjacent facilities due to Contractor activities, including but not limited to demolition and excavation support installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 3120 00 "Earthwork" for earthwork materials and operations. 2. Section 3123 19 "Dewatering" for dewatering and drainage. 3. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill" for those procedures. 4. Section 3150 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for temporary procedures. 5. Various Sections in Division 02 relating to different types of demolition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Crack Gauges: Transducers mounted across cracks identified on existing structures during the preconstruction survey to monitor the crack width. B. Deformation Monitoring Points (DMPs): Fixed markers placed on existing utilities and structures to measure both vertical and horizontal movement. Initial coordinate locations and vertical controls are determined by optical survey methods. C. Excavation Support Monitoring Points (ESMPs): Inscribed marking or fixed makers placed on excavation support systems to measure horizontal movement of the excavation support system. D. Groundwater Observation Wells: Screened or slotted pipe with solid riser pipe installed in a drilled hole with the annulus around the pipe backfilled with sand. Near surface groundwater levels are measured in the well. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 2 of 15 E. Seismographs: Electronic recording device with vibration transducer capable of monitoring and recording ground vibrations induced by construction activity. F. Surface Monitoring Points (SMPs): Inscribed marking or approved surveyor's nail installed to measure vertical (elevation) movement. G. Utility Monitoring Points (UMPs): Steel rod inside fully cased hole that is resting on existing utilities or underground structures to measure movement of the existing underground structure or utility. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit for the Engineer's review four weeks prior to instrument installation: 1. Installation Plan and Schedule: Full details and plan/layout of proposed instruments/points, schedule for installing and monitoring instruments/points, equipment types, installation methods, reference points, and monitoring and data reporting schedule for instruments/points, and instrumentation protection. 2. Description of methods for installing and protecting all instrumentation including but not limited to seismographs, observation wells, crack gauges, monitoring points, and reference points. 3. Groundwater observation well construction details including casing type, filter gradation, screen interval, grout mix, drilling methods, and well depths. 4. For instrumentation installed in borings, submit a detailed procedure for installation, including post -installation acceptance test, together with a sample installation record sheet that include: a. Method to be used for cleaning inside of casing or augers. b. Drill casing or auger type and size. C. Depth increments for backfilling boreholes with sand and bentonite. d. Method for overcoming buoyancy of instrumentation components during grouting. e. Method of sealing joints in pipe casing to prevent ingress of grout. B. Installations Records: Within five working days of installing each instrument, submit to the Engineer, specified as -built instrument location and its corresponding installation record sheet. 1. Include in installation record sheet, location with instrument identification numbers, established elevations, initial elevations and coordinates (baseline readings), boring log, installation, and monitoring date and time. 2. Furnish details of installed instruments showing dimensions, materials used, and as -built drawings of each instrument. 3. Submit field calibrations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 3 of 15 C. Reports and Records: Provide reports of monitoring data to the Engineer. Include following minimum information: 1. Preconstruction survey. 2. As -installed location plan, installation records, and baseline values for instrumentation. 3. Weekly records of monitoring data for instruments with plots against threshold values. 4. Weekly records of crack monitors and including photographs with readings. 5. Event reports and summary from vibration monitoring. 6. Discussion and associated action related to results exceeding threshold values. D. Submit proposed remedial measures to the Engineer of action to be taken in event that instrument Threshold Values are reached. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit names, qualifications, and experience of personnel who will install instruments, perform optical level survey and vibration monitoring, read instruments, and report data to the Engineer demonstrating compliance with "Quality Assurance" Article in this Section. B. Certificates: Submit for each seismograph or other necessary instrument that manufacturer has inspected and tested each instrument before it leaves the factory confirming that it is working correctly without defects or missing parts and current calibration records. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Instrumentation Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer registered in State in which the work is performed with at least 5 years' experience in installation of specified instrumentation and will supervise and direct technicians and be responsible for instrument installation. Be present at installation sites to direct and supervise installations, oversee instrumentation reading, and supervise geotechnical instrumentation data interpretations. B. Surveyor Qualifications: Professional Land Surveyor registered in State in which the work is performed with at least 3 years' experience in surveying of similar instruments. Establish Deformation Monitoring Points, Surface Monitoring Points, Utility Monitoring Points, and Excavation Support Monitoring Points and take baseline readings. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide instruments and components from an approved manufacturer currently engaged in manufacturing specified geotechnical instrumentation hardware. D. Preconstruction Survey Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer registered in State in which the work is performed with at least 5 years' experience in structural evaluations and condition surveys. E. Technicians Qualifications: 1. Minimum 3 years' experience for personnel responsible for optical level surveys, instrument readings, and report data. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 4 of 15 2. Trained in use of seismograph along with reporting results of analyzing and reporting frequency content of seismograph record. 3. Experienced in installation and reading of specified geotechnical instrumentation and equipment. F. Factory Calibration: Conduct factory calibration on instruments prior to shipment with certification submitted to indicate that test equipment used for this purpose is calibrated and maintained in accordance with test equipment manufacturer's calibration requirements and that, where applicable, calibrations are traceable to U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology. Include a calibration curve with data points clearly indicated and a tabulation of data. Mark each instrument with a unique identification number. G. Perform instrument installations in presence of the Engineer or Owner's representative. H. Be responsible for installation, maintenance, and monitoring of geotechnical instrumentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Requirements: 1. Install geotechnical instrumentation to monitor ground conditions, ground response, and facilities to achieve specified project requirements and prevent damage to facilities potentially affected. 2. Install instrumentation in accordance with approved Instrumentation Schedule. 3. Engineer's monitoring of installed instruments does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete project within the requirements specified herein taking necessary additional measurements. B. Pre -Construction Survey: Prior to start of demolition, excavation work, installation of excavation support and dewatering work, engage the services of an independent licensed professional engineer, to conduct a pre -construction survey of existing structures and conditions within 100 feet of the anticipated demolition, excavation work, installation of excavation support, and dewatering work. a. Coordinate activities, issue notices, obtain clearances and provide photographic and secretarial assistance necessary to accomplish the survey. b. Give notice in writing, to property owners and representatives of local authorities required to be present at such survey. Notify in writing the dates on which surveys are planned so that representatives are present during the examination. Provide copies of notices to Owner and the Engineer. 2. Record observations of the existing conditions for residences, buildings, levees and other structures, which are affected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 5 of 15 a. Provide the survey consisting of a description of interior and exterior conditions. Locate cracks, damage or other defects existing and include information to make it possible to determine the effect, if any, of the construction operations on the defect. Where significant cracks or damage exists, or for defects too complicated to describe in words, photographs shall be taken and made part of the record. b. Records of each property examined must be signed by the representatives present and, if practicable, by property owners, whether or not they are present at the examinations. 3. Record of the pre -construction survey shall consist of written documentation, video and photographs of the conditions identified. At the completion of the survey, submit copies of the documentation to Owner. 4. Upon completion of all excavation work, installation of excavation support and dewatering work, complete a similar examination of properties and structures where complaints of damage have been received or damage claims have been filed. Give notice to interested parties so that they may be present during the final examinations. Records of the final examination shall be signed and distributed as the original pre -construction survey. 5. Retain records in Contractor's file for at least 3 years after completion of the Contract. In the event of damage claims, prepare a report on the particular structures as requested by the Engineer from those notes and photographs and submitted to Owner. Repair damage attributed to Contractor's activity promptly and completely to property owners' satisfaction to restore the conditions of the property to that existing prior to work. C. Secure required permits prior to the installation or removal of observation wells. D. Provide and facilitate safe access to the instruments at all times. Engineer may perform additional monitoring in a manner that will minimize unnecessary work delays. Allow and facilitate instrument monitoring as required by the Engineer. No claim for lost production time due to this activity will be allowed. E. Maintain instrumentation. Report damaged or non-functional instrumentation to the Engineer within 24 hours. Replace damaged instruments within 24 hours. F. Availability of Data: 1. Instrumentation readings shall be collected by the Contractor's Geotechnical Instrumentation Monitoring Firm. Contractor may take their own supplementary readings in addition to those specified. 2. Monitoring data is the property of Owner and is not to be disclosed or published to third parties without Owner's written permission. 3. Contractor is expected to make their own interpretations for their own purposes without additional compensation. 4. Coordinate with the Engineer to verify consistency of collected data. 2.2 INSTRUMENTATION - GENERAL A. Instruments and materials, including readout units, installation tools, materials, and miscellaneous instrumentation components. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 6 of 15 B. Provide surface protection for instruments flush with surface in paved or other ground surface areas at the time that work is completed. C. Minimum Quantity of Instruments: While quantities in following Paragraph are considered minimums, obtain data from instrumentation in quantity to monitor construction, performance, and safety aspects of the Work. D. Following subparagraphs identify instrument type, minimum number to be provided, and approximate installed depth from bottom of excavation: Instrument Tvne: 1. Observation Wells: 2. Seismographs: 3. Surface Monitoring Points: 4. Deformation Monitoring Points: 5. Utility Monitoring Points: 6. Excavation Support Monitoring Points 7. Crack Gauges Number: Depth: 20 feet N/A N/A N/A N/A As Needed N/A (as required to monitor existing cracks) 8 2 40 25 5 E. Locate instruments and obtain approval from the Engineer. 2.3 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATION WELLS A. Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe, 1 inch minimum inside diameter. B. Maximum Screen Size: 0.020 inch, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. Use observation wells to monitor groundwater levels outside excavations. 2.4 MONITORING POINTS A. Surface Monitoring Points (SMPs): 1. Use to monitor vertical deformation at or near ground surface, clearly identifying points with permanent easily readable letters and numbers as approved by the Engineer. 2. Paved Areas: 2 inches long masonry nail, manufactured from hardened zinc —plated steel and driven into an asphalt covered surface. Identify each nail individually with an identification tag or surface marking. 3. Non -Paved Areas: 3 feet long, 3/4-inch diameter steel rod driven into ground or set in concrete such that no more than 3 inches of rod is exposed above ground surface. Round top of rod and punch -mark it at its center. Identify each rod with a surface marking. 4. Utility Manholes: Observable cross mark or welded bead on top horizontal surface of manhole rim. Clean surface within 3 inches of point and mark it using fluorescent spray paint adjacent to point to permit easy identification of exact location. B. Deformation Monitoring Points (DMPs): CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 7 of 15 1. Use to monitor vertical and horizontal movement of adjacent utilities and structures with following approved by the Engineer. 2. Materials: Nails, screws, reinforcing bars, bolts, and similar materials with well-defined measurement points. 3. Firmly attach and protect from damage and vandalism. Remove or cover points protruding more than 1/4 inch with a protective box or cap. 4. Clearly identify with permanent easily readable letters and numbers. C. Utility Monitoring Points (UMPs): Use to monitor vertical and horizontal deformation of selected utilities and underground structures. Include following at a minimum: a. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, 3-1/2 inch extra strong steel sleeve and 1 inch extra strong steel riser, threaded and coupled. b. PVC Centralizers: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe, sized to provide a tight fit on riser pipe, and spring -formed to a larger diameter to provide a loose fit in sleeve pipe. 2. Install to top of utility or underground structure by vacuum excavation method. Set monitoring rod with centralizers on top of the utility or underground structure and extending to within 1 foot of ground surface. 3. Install with a flush mount roadbox casing at grade, clearly identified by surface marking. D. Excavation Support Monitoring Points (ESMPs): 1. Use as fixed markers on vertical elements of excavation support system and to monitor horizontal deformation of excavation support system designed by Contractor. 2. Clearly identified points with permanent easily readable letters and numbers as approved by the Engineer. 3. Clean surface within 3 inches of each point and clearly identify using fluorescent spray paint adjacent to point. E. Non -Shrink Cement Grout: Suitable for intended application. 2.5 SEISMOGRAPHS A. Portable for monitoring ground vibrations velocities resulting from construction activities, calibrated within the previous six months, and having following characteristics: 1. Measure three mutually perpendicular components of particle velocity in directions vertical, radial, and perpendicular to vibration source. 2. Measure and display maximum peak particle velocity continuously during vibration - generating activities. 3. Have a low frequency omnidirectional transducer for measuring air blast overpressure with a flat frequency response within the limits of 2 Hertz to 200 Hertz with a tolerance equal to or better than plus or minus 10 percent. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 8 of 15 4. Seismic Range: 0.01 inch to 4 inchesper second with an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent of measured peak particle velocity or better at frequencies between 10 Hertz and 100 Hertz, and with a resolution of 0.01 inch per second or less. 5. Acoustic Range: 110 dB to 140 dB (referenced to 20 micro -Pascals) with an accuracy and resolution of plus or minus 1 dB. 6. Frequency Response (plus or minus 3 dB: 2 Hertz to200 Hertz. 7. Two Power Sources: Internal rechargeable battery and charger capable of supplying power to monitor vibrations continuously for up to 24 hours at 115 volts AC. 8. Self -triggering wave form capture mode that provides plot of wave forms, peak particle velocities, peak overpressure, and frequencies of peaks. 9. Continuous monitoring mode capable of recording single -component peak particle velocities and frequency of peaks with an interval of 1 minute or less. B. Provide for full-time use on the project during vibration causing construction activities. 2.6 CRACK MONITORS A. Crack Gauges: 1. Threaded Anchors: Include ball joints which can be grouted to each side of crack in any orientation. 2. Transducer: Range of at least 1 inch and an accuracy of less than 0.1 percent and a non - linearity of no more than 0.5 percent. 3. Gauge: Capable of operating in temperatures ranging from minus 68 degrees F 176 degrees FProvide a solid steel cover over each gauge which does not touch or otherwise interfere with gage operation. B. Basis -of -Design Manufacturer - Crack Gauges: Provide Model 4420 as manufactured by Geokon, Inc., or equal for monitoring width of existing cracks and joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with the Engineer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Conditions: Locate vaults, structures, conduits and underground utilities in areas where wells are to be drilled and installed. Conduct utility clearance and contact utility companies prior to any drilling. Modify instrument locations, as approved by the Engineer, to avoid interference with existing vaults, structures, conduits and utilities. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 9 of 15 2. Repair damage to existing facilities resulting from instrument installations without additional compensation. B. Prior to commencing installation of demolition, excavation support, excavation, and dewatering work, furnish instrumentation and related components that are to be installed during construction and conduct pre -construction surveys. C. Protect from damage and maintain instruments. Repair or replace damaged instruments. D. Drilling from Ground Surface: Obtain necessary permits for each instrument and conform to permit requirements during drilling and installation. E. Implement remedial measures based on interpretations of monitoring data program. 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform a pre -construction survey prior to any dewatering, excavation or installation of excavation support. B. Install instruments at the Engineer approved locations in accordance with approved installation procedures. Engineer may modify instrument locations depending on field conditions and monitoring objectives. Install instrumentation in accordance with approved installation schedule. Install instruments and obtain baseline data before construction starts. C. Allow the Engineer access to instrument locations and assistance required in obtaining monitoring data. D. Clearly mark and label instruments and protected to avoid being obstructed or otherwise damaged by construction operations or general public. Immediately following installation, survey location and top of instruments to provide horizontal and vertical coordinates. 1. Resurvey if the Engineer questions instrument locations. E. Assign a unique identification number to each instrument and each point that is clearly marked in a non -destructible manner. F. Initial Reading: Immediately following instrument installation take two sets of initial readings in the Engineer's presence to provide baseline readings and to demonstrate adequacy of completed installation. 3.4 MONITORING POINTS A. Monitoring Points: Include but not be limited to SMPs, DMPs, UMPs and ESMPs. Monitor these control points using surveying methods. Modify locations to meet site constraints with the Engineer's approval. B. SMPs, DMPs and UMPs: Install as described below near excavations and open trench locations. Additional SMPs, DMPs, and UMPs may be required by the Engineer. C. Additional SMPs: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 10 of 15 1. Install in pavement or ground surface within20 feet along each side of trench excavations that is over 15 feet deep or that is within 50 feet of structures. Install at spacing not exceeding 50 feet. 2. Install on rim of utility manhole covers located within 50 feet of trenchless crossings or within 30 feet of open excavations. 3. Install along the protected -side of the levee along the toe and along the levee crest, at a spacing of not more than 50 feet. D. DMPs: 1. Install on exterior walls of buildings or structures located within 30 feet of open excavations. Preferred installations are on supporting walls or columns. Avoid installation in brick, unless no other option exists. 2. As a minimum, install on exterior wall corners of buildings, structures, or property boundary walls at not more than 50 feet spacing. Install additional DMPs to monitor building movement at other locations when determined by the Engineer. 3. Install DMPs in cooperation with property Owners so that installations are inconspicuous and acceptable to them. Existing features of building foundations that are permanent and can be repeatedly surveyed may be substituted for DMPs, if approved by the Engineer. E. UMPs: Install on existing utility over 36 inch in diameter and located within 15 feet from excavation. Locate at a spacing of not more than 50 feet. F. ESMPs: 1. Install on excavation support systems other than trench box along support walls at spacing not more than 25 feet. 2. Install prior to excavation within exaction support system. 3. Read results at least daily during associated excavation and twice a week until backfill is completed. G. SMPs, UMPs, and DMPs: 1. Obtain two sets of measurements for each monitoring point to establish baseline data within three days of installation. Make at least 24 hours apart, but not more than 48 hours. 2. Check monitoring points with initial surveyed elevations differing by more than 0.08 inch for secure installation and resurvey. 3. Read monitoring points prior to installing excavation support, beginning demolition, excavation, operation of groundwater control system, or start of installation of excavation support at the site. 4. Read daily during demolition, excavation, dewatering, filling and backfilling, and excavation support installation located within 50 feet of the work, then at least twice a week until excavation, dewatering, and backfill has been completed. H. Crack Gauges: 1. Install on exterior walls of buildings or structures with existing cracks located within 30 feet of open excavations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 11 of 15 2. Install DMPs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in cooperation with property Owners so that installations are inconspicuous and acceptable to them. 3.5 VIBRATION MONITORING A. Take seismograph readings during demolition and excavation support installation or other activities causing ground vibrations within 50 feet of existing structures to document that peak particle velocities do not exceed specified limit criteria. B. Install seismographs near existing structures when vibratory or impact hammers are used for the installation of excavation support within 50 feet of existing structures, and as directed by the Engineer. 3.6 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATION WELLS A. Install at least 8 monitoring wells at project -specific locations including around the excavation perimeter and within the excavation, as appropriate. B. Existing wells may be used if appropriate and approved by the Engineer. Existing wells will be required to be flushed to confirm they are in satisfactory condition. C. Set screened interval of each well to monitor groundwater levels. D. Drill 4 inch minimum diameter holes for observation wells of required size and depth and case with temporary casing. Do not use bentonite drilling mud in drilling holes for observation wells. E. Flush cased holes with clean water through an approved bit. Flush until discharge water is free of soil particles. F. Construct observation well with 25 feet of slotted PVC well screen, filter sand, bentonite seal, couplings, a pipe cap, and a locking cover. 1. Place two feet of filter sand in bottom of drilled hole. Then place well screen and surround it with filter sand, as temporary casing is carefully withdrawn. 2. Insert solid PVC casing and cap and fill annular space with bentonite pellets then non - shrink cement grout. 3. Protect observation wells at ground surface by providing a roadway box or outer protective casing with lockable top and padlock. Design surface protection to prevent damage by vandalism or construction operations and to prevent surface water from infiltrating. a. Provide two keys for each padlock to the Engineer for access to each well. b. Develop observation wells to provide a reliable indication of groundwater levels. Re -developed wells if well clogging is observed, in event of apparent erroneous readings, or as directed by the Engineer. C. Submit observation well installation logs, top of casing elevation, and well locations to the Engineer within 24 hours of completion of well installation. G. Observation Well Maintenance: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 [JVA H. I. GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 12 of 15 1. Maintain each observation well until adjacent structures, box culverts, and pipelines are completed and backfilled. Clean out or replace any observation well which ceases to be operable before adjacent work is completed. 2. Maintain observation wells and repair or replace them without additional compensation, whether or not observation wells are damaged by Contractor's operations or by third parties. Monitoring and Reporting of Observation Well Data: 1. Begin daily monitoring of groundwater levels in work areas prior to initial operation of drainage and dewatering system. Continue daily monitoring in areas where groundwater control is in operation until time that adjacent structures, box culverts, and pipelines are completed and backfilled and until time that groundwater control systems are turned off. 2. Be responsible for processing and reporting observation well data to the Engineer daily. Submit data to the Engineer on a form that includes following information. a. Observation well number. b. Depth to groundwater. C. Top of casing elevation. d. Groundwater level elevation. e. Date and time of reading. f. River, lake or tide level, adjacent tank level that may impact readings. Following construction, abandon new and existing observation wells as directed by the Engineer. 1. Abandon observation wells by removing materials within original borehole, including casing, filter, and grout seal in accordance with applicable permits. 2. Using approved tremie methods, completely fill hole and voids with non -shrink cement grout prior to removal of drill casing, such that formation materials do not move into hole prior to grouting. 3. Restore ground surface to its original condition. 4. Abandon wells within paved areas by removing vaults and well caps to pavement subgrade. Remove wells with as discussed above and repair or patch pavement with same surface type. INSTRUMENT PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A. Protect instruments from damage. Replace damaged or destroyed instruments within 72 hours of damage, without additional compensation. If necessary, suspend work in areas being monitored by damaged instrument and take remedial action. B. Maintain instruments by draining water and flushing debris from under protective covers and keeping covers locked and sealed at all times. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 13 of 15 3.8 MONITORING A. Collect, tabulate, plot, and interpret survey monitoring data and provide the Engineer with tabulated and plotted data. Report status of demolition, excavation, bracing, groundwater levels, and backfilling at time of data collection with each report. B. Monitoring frequency may be modified as directed and approved by the Engineer. C. Submit data from readings of monitoring points to the Engineer within 24 hours of reading. Communicate verbally with the Engineer immediately after visual observations or data collection if excessive movements or other anomalies are indicated. D. For seismograph data, submit a summary report with event summary of peak particle velocity and frequency. Submit a strip chart indicating time and magnitude of maximum single - component peak particle velocity measured during each 5-minute interval of monitoring period. List a summary of vibration producing activities for that week along with specific events causing anomalous readings. E. Make visual observations of ground conditions and building conditions in site vicinity and communicate immediately with the Engineer if signs of ground or building movements are observed. F. Engineer may take independent instrumentation measurements. Cooperate with the Engineer during instrumentation monitoring by providing access to instrumentation locations in a timely manner and by providing and maintaining safe means of access to instrumentation locations for data collection. Data acquired by the Engineer will be made available to Contractor in a timely manner. G. Contractor may make their own interpretations of monitoring data for their own purposes. Do not publish or disclose data or interpretations to other parties without advance written permission of Owner. H. For data collected from an instrument that has been installed to replace a damaged instrument, use formal initial reading as an initial reading for replacement instrument so that data are continuously plotted, without an offset at time of damage. Note time of damage and replacement on plot. 3.9 INTERPRETATION AND RESPONSE VALUES A. Make interpretations of data resulting from monitoring programs. B. Threshold and Limiting Values for Instruments: Instrument Threshold Value Seismographs: 1.0 in/sec over 40 Hz 0.75 in/sec at 30 to 40 Hz 0.50 in/sec at 20 to 30 Hz 0.25 in/sec under 20 Hz Limitina Value 2.0 in/sec over 40 Hz 1.5 in/sec at 30 to 40 Hz 1.0 in/sec at 20 to 30 Hz 0.5 in/sec under 20 Hz CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 14 of 15 2. Surface Monitoring Points 0.5 inch 1.0 inch 3. Deformation Monitoring Points 0.25 inch 0.5 inch 4. Utility Monitoring Points 0.25 inch 0.5 inch 5. Excavation Monitoring Points 1.0 inch 2.0 inches 6. Observations Wells 5 feet below bottom of excavation C. Values are subject to adjustment by the Engineer as indicated by prevailing conditions or project circumstances. Crack Gauge criteria will be established based upon existing conditions identified during preconstruction survey. D. If a Threshold Value is reached: 1. Engineer and Contractor will meet to discuss remedial measures. 2. Increase instrument monitoring frequency as directed by the Engineer. 3. Install and monitor additional instruments as directed by the Engineer. 4. Implement remedial measures in event Threshold Value is reached, so Limiting Value is not reached. E. Take necessary steps so Limiting Value is not exceeded. Engineer may direct Contractor to suspend activities in affected area with exception of those actions necessary to avoid exceeding Limiting Value. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Survey Measurements: Initial location of each instrumentation elements consisting of determining elevation and horizontal positions with respect to the Engineer approved benchmarks. B. Monitoring Points (SMPs, DMPs, UMPs and ESMPs): 1. Instrumentation Elevations: Determine to accuracy of plus/minus 0.01 foot. Horizontal Position of Surface Monitoring Points: Determine to accuracy of plus/minus 0.01 foot. Horizontal Position of Deformation Monitoring Points and Excavation Support Monitoring Points: Determine to accuracy of plus/minus 0.01 foot. C. If actual field conditions prohibit installation at location and specified elevations, obtain prior acceptance from the Engineer for new instrument location and elevations. 3.11 DISPOSITION OF INSTRUMENTS A. Monitoring Points and Crack Gauges: Remove monitoring points and crack gauges during cleanup and restoration work, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Observation Wells and Utility Monitoring Points: When required by the Engineer, abandon and remove protective housings and caps in accordance with required permits. Restore surfaces affected by installation of instruments to their original condition prior to completion of work. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 09 00 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING Page 15 of 15 1. Leave in place any casings located within plan limits of new or existing structures or pipelines or within zone below 1H:1V planes extending downward and out from edges of foundation elements, from downward vertical footprint of pipe, or where removal would otherwise result in ground movements causing adverse settlement to adjacent ground surface, utilities or structures. 2. Where casings are pulled, fill holes with grout. Where left in place, fill casings with non - shrink cement grout and cut off a minimum of 3 feet below finished ground level or 1 foot below foundation level so as not to interfere with finished structures or pipelines. 3. Following backfilling, remove precast boxes or vaults and reconstruct pavement in paved areas. Restore surface to conditions existing prior to instrument installation. C. Seismographs: Remove units following completion of demolition, installation of excavation support and excavation. END OF SECTION 3109 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 1 of 17 SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. General: Earthwork includes clearing and stripping, procurement of on -site and imported fill material, excavating, placing, and compacting fill and backfill, structural excavating and backfilling, transportation and storage of excess earthwork materials; disposal of unsuitable, waste, and surplus materials; restoration of excavation and trench surfaces; and subsidiary work necessary to complete the grading of developed areas to conform with required lines, grades, and slopes. B. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to; excavation for structures, tanks, foundations, manholes, vaults, electrical manholes, conduits, cables, raceways and ducts, pipes, paving; embankments; grading; and related work such as sheeting, bracing and dewatering. C. Provide services of a licensed Professional Engineer to prepare temporary excavation support system, dewatering system designs, and submittals. D. Provide temporary excavation support systems, including sheeting, shoring, and bracing, to ensure the safety of personnel and protect adjacent structures, piping, and other materials in accordance with Federal, State and local laws, regulations, and requirements. Temporary excavation support systems are specified in Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection." E. Provide temporary dewatering, surface water control systems, and operate to dewater and maintain excavations in a dry condition. Control drainage into excavations and remove seepage water and rainwater. Dewatering and surface water control are specified in Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering." F. Examine site and review available geotechnical data prior to submitting a proposal, taking into consideration project conditions that may affect the work. Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for variations of subsurface conditions at locations other than places shown and at the time investigations were made. G. Do not initiate extra work without written notification to Owner and Engineer and receiving Owner's written approval in response. H. Protect existing structures and utilities that remain. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 2 of 17 I. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site preparation work, including stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 2. 310515 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork" for fill materials. 3. Section 31 09 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring" to measure earthwork activities. 4. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill" for stated work. 5. Section 3123 19 "Dewatering" for controlling surface and groundwater and disposing of water during construction. 6. Section 03 34 13 "Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)" for controlled low - strength cementitious materials. 7. Section 3125 00 "Erosion and Sedimentation Controls" for temporary stated work. 8. Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations. 9. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for rigid paving systems that include sidewalks, driveways, curbs, and gutters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. C. Coverage: Pass of compaction equipment over the complete surface area of exposed lift or subgrade to receive compaction. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Additional Excavation: Excavation as directed by Engineer to correct Contractor's work not in compliance with Contract Documents, which will be performed without additional compensation. 3. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 4. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be provided without additional compensation. E. Finished Grade: Required final grade elevation indicated on Drawings. Spot elevations take precedent over proposed contours. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 3 of 17 F. In -the -Dry: An excavation subgrade where groundwater level: has been lowered to at least 5 feet below lowest level of excavation; is stable with no ponded water, mud, or muck; is able to support construction equipment without rutting or disturbance; and is suitable for placement and compaction of fill material, pipe, or concrete foundations. G. Objectionable Material: Includes topsoil, organic matter, contaminated soil, construction debris, perishable materials, snow, ice, frozen earth, and rocks or lumps of cemented soils over 6 inches in maximum dimension. H. Optimum Moisture Content: Moisture content (percent by dry weight) corresponding to maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM Test Method D698. I. Overexcavation: Removal of unsuitable soil or objectionable material at or below the normal grade of excavation or subgrade as indicated on Drawings. Percent Compaction: Required in -place dry density of the material, expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density of the same material, as determined in the laboratory by ASTM Test Method D698. K. Structures: Buildings, wet wells, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, manholes and vaults, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. L. Subgrade: Required surface of subsoil, borrow fill, or compacted fill that is immediately beneath site improvements, especially dimensioned fill, paving, or other surfacing material. M. Unsuitable Soil: Includes fill materials, organic soils, weak native soils, or clays with a plasticity index of greater than 50, and any materials that cannot be properly placed and compacted as specified. N. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings. O. Zone of Influence: A line extending at least 2 feet beyond foundation or pipeline edge, then outward and downward at a slope of 1 horizontal to 1 vertical. Do no excavation below foundation of existing structures or pipeline. P. Professional Engineer: Registered Professional Engineer meeting project qualifications and who is hired by Contractor. Q. The Engineer: The Engineer or designated representative hired by Owner. Approval given by The Engineer shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for performing the work in accordance with Contract Document requirements. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct pre -excavation conference at Project site. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 4 of 17 1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. C. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant -protection zones. d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. e. Field quality control. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate various submittal types required by this Section with requirements of dewatering, support of excavation, and geotechnical instrumentation submittals specified in other Sections. B. Slope Stability Evaluation: Submit a temporary excavation slope stability evaluation in accordance with OSHA for temporary slopes over 20 feet in height or where existing or proposed facilities or property limits are located at the top of the slope and within a distance from the top of the slope equal to the slope height. 1. Prepare evaluation by a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State where the work occurs. Include anticipated construction sequence, surcharge loads, etc. in the evaluation. C. Site Characterization Data: Submit following information regarding off -site source and material: 1. Site location. 2. Present and past usage of the source site and material. 3. Previously existing reports associated with an assessment of source site relating to presence of oil or other hazardous materials. 4. Location within the site from which the material will be obtained. D. Samples: Submit a representative sample weighing approximately 50 pounds of each fill material, filter sand, and crushed stone contained in sealed 5 gallon containers, at least 30 calendar days prior to date of anticipated use of each material. E. Submit laboratory test results for fill materials that include maximum density, gradation, Atterberg limits, sand equivalent, and other applicable criteria, at least 72 hours prior to importing or placing fill. F. Prepare excavation support system designs by a licensed Professional Engineer, registered in State in which the work is located and having a minimum of 5 years of professional experience in design and construction of excavation support systems. 1. Submit an original and three copies of licensed Professional Engineer's certification, on PE form specified in Section 01 33 00, stating excavation support systems designs have been prepared by Professional Engineer who is responsible for their execution. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 5 of 17 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Construction and Operations Plan: Submit proposed methods of construction, including earthwork operations, excavation limits, slopes, fill material moisture conditioning and handling, compaction equipment, excavation support systems designs, backfilling and filling and compaction, and material sources. 1. Include additional submittal requirements related to schedule, work sequence, and on -site and off -site storage when necessary based on project conditions. 2. Submit excavation support system plan as prepared by registered Professional Engineer complying with requirements stated in previous Article. B. Submit copies of field daily reports by soil technician at the end of each workday that earthwork and grading operations occur. C. Upon completion of earthwork and grading operations, submit an as -graded map showing density test numbers and locations, a table of density test results and depths, and a certification of compliance by geotechnical engineer in charge. D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency to conduct geotechnical observation, testing and documentation. include qualifications of firm, resumes of soil technicians assigned to the project, and licensed geotechnical engineer in charge. 1. Firm Qualifications: Meet ASTM D3740. 2. Soil Technicians: Have minimum three years demonstrated experience in earthwork and grading operations and satisfy certification requirements of agency having local jurisdiction. a. The Engineer reserves right to request substitution of soil technicians assigned to field work. Do not substitute assigned soil technicians without prior approval of The Engineer. E. Pre -excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Excavation, trenching, sheeting, bracing, and similar work shall comply with requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards, 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P and State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Where conflict between OSHA, State and local regulations exists, apply most stringent requirements. B. At least three working days prior to starting any excavation, notify the appropriate regional notification center for underground utilities and underground utility owners who are not members of notification center. To obtain area specific information for project site, refer to www.call 81 Lcom. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 6 of 17 C. Quality Control Testing for Off -site Borrow Materials: 1. Chemical testing will not be required where site characterization of off -site borrow sources indicates that soils are acceptable for use. If site characterization data or materials are suspected of being contaminated, perform chemical testing as directed by The Engineer with no additional compensation. 2. Chemical Test Data: Test each material source requiring testing by a person experienced in sample collection who is a registered Professional Engineer or geologist or certified groundwater or environmental professional registered in the State of Texas. Submit samples of each proposed material to a chemical analytical laboratory, certified by the governing agency, for following analyses: a. Volatile Organic Compounds: EPA 8240 plus Hazardous Substance List (HSL) Parameters. b. Acid and Base Neutral Extractable Organic Compounds: EPA 8270. C. Pesticides and PCBs: EPA 8080. d. Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons: Infrared Method, EPA 9071/418.1. e. Thirteen Priority Pollutant Metals: EPA 7000 Series. f. Total Cyanide: EPA 9012. Obtain and test off -site borrow samples in accordance with criteria established by The Engineer. Submit results for review and approval prior to use on site. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Be responsible for construction layout and reference staking necessary for proper control and satisfactory completion of structures, cutting, filling, grading, drainage, fencing, embankment improvements, curbing, and other appurtenances. B. Perform construction layout and staking by a Professional Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in State of Texas where project occurs, experienced and skilled in construction layout and staking requirements. C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earthwork operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earthwork indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by The Engineer. E. Utility Locator Service: Notify "One Call" for area where Project is located before beginning earthwork operations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 7 of 17 F. Do not commence earthwork operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation -control measures specified in Section 31 25 00 "Erosion and Sediment Control" are in place. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Fill materials designated for use in this Section are specified in Section 31 05 15 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork." B. On -Site Fill Material: Earth and rock material obtained at project site during excavation, following clearing and stripping, from which any Unsuitable Soil or Objectionable Material has been removed. C. General: Provide imported fill materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, tanks utilities, sidewalks, pavements, fencing, landscaping, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1. If necessary, remove and restore or replace curbing, driveway aprons, and fencing after performing backfilling work. 2. Replace existing facilities damaged by construction with new material fully equal to existing without additional compensation. B. Prior to and During Earthwork Operations: 1. Provide, monitor, and maintain geotechnical instrumentation regarding settlement; coordinate with Section 3109 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring." 2. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls; coordinate with Section 31 25 00 "Erosion and Sedimentation Controls." 3. Provide, monitor, and maintain excavation support; coordinate with Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection." a. Use excavation support system for excavations within the zone of influence for existing structures or utilities. b. Do not permit excavations below base level of adjacent foundations or retaining walls, unless excavation design and bracing includes an analysis of structure's stability supported by the foundation. When necessary due to project conditions, incorporate required bracing and foundation underpinning. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 8 of 17 4. Provide, monitor, and maintain dewatering and drainage systems; coordinate with Section 3123 19 "Dewatering." C. Test Pits: 1. Perform exploratory excavation work, test pits, for purpose of verifying the location of underground utilities and structures and to check for unknown utilities and structures, prior to commencing excavation work. 2. Backfill and compact test pits as soon as desired information has been obtained. Stabilize backfilled surfaces in accordance with approved erosion and sedimentation control plans. D. Clearing and Stripping. Initially clear and strip ground surfaces beneath planned structures and in areas requiring excavation or filling of organic material and debris. Do not use those materials as On -Site Fill Material; or reused as topsoil in landscape areas. 1. Stripping Depth Variance: From about 6 inches to 12 inches. E. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. F. Saw cut existing pavement with a saw, wheel, or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating. 3.2 DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE A. Provide dewatering and drainage in accordance with Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering." This Article supplements those requirements. B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff and groundwater seepage away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. As the site is located in a low area, the Project area is subject to flooding, including by overflow of Owner process facilities (manholes, clarifiers, etc.). Provide adequate protection including but not limited to cofferdams, pop-up flood barriers, impermeable walls, etc. for surface/flood waters from outside the Project limits to avoid entry into the work area. The depth and elevation of the protection is indicated on the Drawings. D. Prior to excavation, verify groundwater will be at required level indicated on approved dewatering and drainage submittal. E. Accomplish dewatering by methods that preserve undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Dewater in a manner to prevent boiling, detrimental under -seepage, or disturbance at excavation base. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 9 of 17 3.3 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION A. Provide excavation support in accordance with Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support." This Article supplements those requirements. B. Install excavation support in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings prior to beginning excavation work. Maintain excavation supports that are required to remain in place, if applicable, as indicated on Drawings or as required by approved Shop Drawings. C. Owner or The Engineer may direct that certain excavation supports remain in place or be cut off at any specific elevation. Supports directed by Owner or The Engineer to be left in place and not so designated on Contract Documents will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. D. The right of Owner or The Engineer to direct that certain excavation supports remain in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on Owner or The Engineer to give such direction, nor shall failure to give such direction relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient excavation supports to prevent any movement of the ground or damage to adjacent structures. E. Construct temporary excavation slopes in accordance with the requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards and approved Shop Drawings. F. Where allowed, carefully remove excavation supports in a manner without endangering the Work or other adjacent structures, utilities, or property. Immediately fill voids left or caused by withdrawal of supports with sand and compact. 3.4 EXCAVATION A. Include material of every description and of whatever substance encountered as an unclassified excavation. B. General: Excavate on -site soils using standard earthmoving equipment. Excavation in dense soil or rock may require special equipment. Do not plough, scrape, or dig earth with machinery so near to finished subgrade to result in excavation of or disturbance of below grade material. C. Make excavations to grades indicated on Drawings and in widths sufficient for laying of pipe, construction of the structure, installing bracing, excavation supports, dewatering and drainage facilities, and working clearances. D. Perform excavation in -the -dry and accomplished by methods which preserve the natural undisturbed condition of subgrade soils. E. Moisture Sensitive Soils: Use a smooth -edge bucket to excavate last one foot of depth when excavation is to end in such soils. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 10 of 17 F. If excavation bottom is removed below the limits shown on Drawings, specified, or directed by The Engineer, refill with material satisfactory to The Engineer without additional compensation. G. When excavation has reached prescribed depths, notify The Engineer who will observe the conditions. If materials and conditions are not satisfactory, The Engineer will issue instructions for corrective procedures. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether the work has been accomplished satisfactorily. H. Subgrade soils that have become soft, loose, quick, or otherwise unsatisfactory due to inadequate excavation, dewatering, or other construction methods in the opinion of The Engineer, remove existing soil and replaced with material acceptable to The Engineer at Contractor's expense. I. Exposed subgrades in large open areas for foundations shall be proof rolled with at least two overlapping coverages of a vibratory drum roller with a minimum static drum weight of 10 ton. Conduct proof -rolling in presence of The Engineer. The Engineer will waive this requirement, if in its opinion the subgrade will be rendered unsuitable by such proof -rolling. Confined Areas: Proof -roll with hand operated vibratory equipment that is approved by The Engineer. Perform overexcavation at The Engineer's request to remove unsuitable soil, objectionable material, or other materials as determined by The Engineer and to such depth and width as directed. Replace with suitable material as directed by The Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. K. Perform excavation for pipelines beneath structures and excavation for footings with excavating equipment operating from the subgrade for the structure, while in -the -dry and in a manner preserving the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. L. When excavations have reached the required subgrade, including any allowances for working mats or base materials and prior to their placement, notify soils testing laboratory to verify suitability of existing subgrade soils for anticipated foundation and structural loadings. 1. If existing subgrade soils are determined to be unsuitable, follow direction provided by The Engineer regarding removal and replacement with suitable materials. 2. Notify The Engineer if the revised work scope would modify Contractor's cost and thereby entitle a change to the Contract Sum. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. M. Replace overexcavation beyond the limits and depths required by Contract Documents using material satisfactory to The Engineer without additional compensation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 11 of 17 3.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Notify Engineer and independent testing agency when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. Maintain excavated subgrade in -the -dry condition. C. Prior to fill placement, remove objectionable material which includes, but not be limited to, pavement, topsoil, organic matter, contaminated soil, construction debris, perishable materials, snow, ice, frozen earth, and rocks or lumps of cemented soils over 6 inches in maximum dimension. D. For subgrades consisting of granular soils, proof roll the final subgrade using at least four coverages of a vibrator plate compactor. E. Where existing subgrade contains a significant amount of clay or cohesive soils, over -excavate sufficiently below the bottom of structure for placement of a lean concrete working mat. Remove loose or soft material from the subgrade immediately prior to placing lean concrete working mat. Place the working mat within 24 hours of achieving the planned subgrade excavation. F. Remove and replace soft subgrades or unusable material with material satisfactory to the Engineer. G. During wet or freezing weather, or in areas where exposed subgrade consists of moisture - sensitive soils, take measures to protect foundation excavations once they have been approved by The Engineer. Protective measures include, but are not limited to, placing insulation blankets, placing a layer of fill, pea gravel, crushed rock, or lean concrete on the exposed subgrade, or covering the exposed subgrade with a plastic tent. 1. If additional overexcavation is required due to the subgrade not being protected against wet or freezing weather, perform additional work without additional compensation. H. Notify The Engineer and independent testing agency to observe conditions following subgrade preparation and prior to fill placement. If existing subgrade soils are determined to be unsuitable, follow direction provided by The Engineer regarding removal and replacement with suitable materials. 1. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Protect from precipitation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 12 of 17 Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.7 FILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION PROCEDURES A. Fill and Backfill: Place materials in lifts to suit specified compaction requirements to required lines and grades, making allowances for settlement and placement of cover materials, such as topsoil or sod. Correct soft spots or uncompacted areas. B. Do not place or compact fill and backfill when materials are too wet to properly compact. In -place Soil Moisture Content: Maximum of three percentage points above optimum moisture content of soil, as determined by laboratory test of moisture -density relation appropriate to specified level of compaction. C. Embankment Fill: Construct to required lines and grades, making allowances for settlement and placement of cover materials, such as topsoil and sod. Correct soft spots or uncompacted areas. D. Fill material shall be free of snow, ice, frost, and frozen earth. Do not place fill materials on frozen surfaces or surfaces covered by snow, ice, or frost. E. Complete structure water -tightness tests and installation of dampproofing or waterproofing systems prior to placing various types of fill or backfill around structures. F. If subgrade slopes more than 10 percent, step subgrade to produce a stable, horizontal surface for placement of fill materials. Scarify existing subgrade slope to a depth of at least 6 inches. Extend all steps or benching into subgrade slopes a minimum of 12 inches horizontally. G. Compact filled slopes by overfill and trim back to plan grade to expose a firm, smooth surface free of loose material. H. Do not allow fill lifts to contain stones with a dimension larger than 2/3 the specified loose measure lift thickness. I. Perform compaction in open areas using compaction equipment by any of the following methods: 1. Fully loaded ten -wheel trucks or front-end loaders. 2. Tractor dozers weighing minimum of 30,000 pounds. 3. Heavy vibratory rollers. Confined Compaction: Perform compaction in confined areas, including areas within a 45- degree angle extending upward and outward from the base of a wall, and in areas where the use of large equipment is impractical, using hand -operated vibratory equipment or mechanical tampers. Do not exceed lift thickness of 6 inches, measured before compaction, when using hand operated equipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 13 of 17 K. Moisture condition on -site fill material prior to placement, unless Contractor demonstrates to The Engineer in -place moisture conditioning methods can achieve the required moisture content. L. Conduct compaction of each specified lift of fill materials by a minimum of four complete coverages with acceptable compaction equipment to a specified density as a percentage of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, unless otherwise specified. M. Use structural fill required beneath foundations or slabs on grade, except sidewalks, unless shown or otherwise specified. Place and compact structural fill in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 8 inches, measured before compaction. N. Use select fill as backfill material placed within 10 feet of all structures, unless shown or otherwise specified. Uniformly place and compact select fill around the structure in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 8 inches, measured before compaction. O. Use common fill in areas beyond those designated for structural fill or select fill, unless shown or otherwise specified. Place in even lifts having a maximum thickness of 12 inches, measured before compaction. P. Place impervious fill in controlled, even lifts having a maximum thickness (measured before compaction) of 6 inches. 1. Permeability: Compact to attain a reading of less than 1 x 10-7 cm/sec. 2. Moisture Content: Compact to optimum moisture content of minus 1 percent to plus 4 percent. 3.8 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Perform in -place testing of compacted fill lifts to measure in -place density and water content according to ASTM D698. B. Beneath Foundations and Slabs -on -Grade, except sidewalks: Compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of fill, if applicable to: 1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 98 percent for ASTM D698. 2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 2 percent. C. Area Around Structures (not under paving): Within 10 feet unless shown or otherwise specified, compact each fill or backfill layer to: Maximum Dry Density: a. For backfill depths between 0 and percent for ASTM D698. b. For backfill depths greater than 1 percent for ASTM D698. 15 feet below finished grade: Minimum of 95 feet below finished grade: Minimum of 98 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 14 of 17 2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 2 percent. D. Embankments, Lawn, or Unimproved Areas: Does not include embankments under roadways and earth dam structures. Compact each fill or backfill layer to: 1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 95 percent for ASTM D698. 2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 1 percent to plus 4 percent. E. Sidewalks: Compact each fill layer to: 1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 95 percent for ASTM D698. 2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent. F. Roads, Paved Areas, and Roadway Embankments: Compact each layer of fill or backfill to: 1. Maximum Dry Density: Minimum of 98 percent for ASTM D698. 2. Moisture Content: At or near its optimum moisture content of optimum moisture content to plus 2 percent. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE, WASTE, AND SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Unsuitable soil, objectionable material, waste, and surplus excavated material shall be removed and disposed of off -site. Materials may be temporarily stockpiled in an area within the limits of construction that does not disrupt construction activities, create any nuisances or safety hazards, or otherwise restricts access to work site. 3.10 GRADING A. Perform grading to lines and grades shown on Drawings. Remove objectionable materials encountered within the limits indicated and disposed of off -site. Completely and continuously drained and dewatered subgrades throughout the grading process. Install temporary drains and drainage ditches to intercept or divert surface water that may affect the execution or condition of grading work. B. If it is not possible at the time of grading to place material in its proper section of the Work, stockpile it in approved areas for later use. No additional compensation will be made for stockpiling or double handling of excavated materials. C. In cut areas, remove loose or protruding rocks in slopes to line or finished grade of the slope. Uniformly dress, cut, and fill slopes to slope cross-section and alignment shown on Drawings, unless otherwise directed by The Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 15 of 17 3.11 RIPRAP AND SLOPE STABILIZATION A. Prior to installation of riprap, install erosion control blankets on slopes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Properly prepare area to be covered before the blanket is applied. 2. When the blanket is unrolled, place netting on top with fibers in contact with the soil over the entire area. 3. Butt blankets snugly at ends and sides, placing blankets a minimum of three rows, each four -foot wide, for a total width of 12 feet. 4. Staple blankets together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Secure blankets by driving staple vertically into the ground, spaced approximately 6 feet apart, on each side and one row in the center, alternately spaced between each side. 6. Do not overlap adjoining blankets. Utilize a common row of staples to attach to ground. B. Place riprap in conjunction with embankment construction with only sufficient lag in construction of riprap protection necessary to allow for proper construction of the portion of embankment protected and to prevent mixture of embankment and riprap material. 1. Place and grade No. 67 stone (ASTM C33) to a depth of 6 inches to obtain a continuous uninterrupted bed of required thickness within the required limits. 2. Compact by a minimum one coverage by a crawler -type tractor with a total weight, including blade and equipment, of not less than 30,000 pounds. C. Hand -place riprap on compacted stone; do not dump materials. Lay stones so maximum dimension is perpendicular to the bed. Place stones so weight of each stone is carried by underlying material and not by adjacent stones. Place large stones at the bottom of slope. Fill spaces between stones with spalls of suitable size to construct a solid, stable slope, free from large voids and defects, and to protect embankments against erosion. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and observe materials as described in this Article. Cooperate by allowing free access to work for selection of test materials and observations. B. General Testing Requirements: 1. At Structures: Prior to placement of bedding material, concrete work mats, backfill or structural concrete, coordinate with Soils Testing Laboratory to verify suitability of existing subgrade soil. 2. Backfill and Fill: Prior to and during the placement of backfill and fill coordinate with Soils Testing Laboratory to perform in -place soil density tests to verify that backfill and fill material has been placed and compacted in accordance with specified compaction requirements. a. Provide minimum 48 hours' notice prior to placement of backfill and fill. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 16 of 17 3. Subgrade: Do not cover with fill without observation, testing, and approval by Soils Testing Laboratory. a. Earthwork activities performed without properly scheduled inspection are subject to removal and replacement or additional testing as directed by The Engineer without additional compensation. Coordinate with the independent soils testing laboratory, engaged by Owner to test materials and demonstrate conformance with project requirements. Test reports and material certifications will be delivered to the Owner's representative before proceeding with work. C. If field test results are not in conformance with project requirements, costs involved in correcting deficiencies in compacted materials to satisfaction of The Engineer without additional compensation. D. Earthwork activities performed without properly scheduled inspection are subject to removal and replacement or additional testing as directed by The Engineer without additional compensation. E. Testing methods shall comply with latest ASTM or equivalent AASHTO Standards applicable during bidding. F. During placement of bedding, backfill, and fill, coordinate with the independent soils testing agency to perform in -place soil density testing to confirm that fill material has been compacted in accordance with project requirements. The Engineer or Owner's representative may designate areas to be tested. Notify Owner's representative at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled compaction testing. In place soil density tests on backfill and fill material shall be as required by authorities having jurisdiction, but in no instance, shall be less than those listed: 1. Structures and Embankments: At least one density and moisture content test for each 2,000 square feet of surface area for each lift of fill at embankment, structure, and manhole locations. 2. Trench Excavations: At least one nuclear density and one moisture content test at a maximum of 50 feet intervals for each lift of fill placed or as directed by The Engineer. 3. The Engineer may designate supplemental areas to be tested at additional compensation. G. Materials which have been previously tested may be subjected to further testing from time to time and may be rejected, if it is determined that results do not conform to project requirements. Immediately remove rejected materials when directed by The Engineer, notwithstanding results of previous testing. H. The Engineer or Owner may conduct additional soil testing. Cooperate fully in allowing additional test to be made, including free access to the work. I. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740 for testing indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 20 00 EARTHWORK Page 17 of 17 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by The Engineer; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION 3120 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION SECTION 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 6 Excavate areas as shown on the Drawings or as directed. Removal of materials encountered to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the Drawings and removal from site. Excavations may include construction of a. Roadways b. Drainage Channels c. Site Excavation d. Excavation for Structures e. Or any other operation involving the excavation of on -site materials. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 3.4.G.2 4. Modified 3.4.H.2 5. Modified 3.4.H.3 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3.Seetien-34 22 72 4.Seetion 3124 ti0— Pnitm ilnnants 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid _price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard pipins bid item. a. Exeava4ien by Plan Quantity Measufemen r�Measciiemea.. by the eubie yar-d in its final position using the average end area methed. Limits of meastffemen4 afe shown on the Dmwiags-. 2) —when measlfedbythe eubi . • ar- in itsfinal Ppeson, the vu t�am. in tho Mpoml, iml Conditions. n dditi a t measufements o, oaSJ nmde4 f quantiti h b. Paymen a -ad measiffed as provided tinder- "MeastffemepA" will be paid for- at4e. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION Page 2 of 6 f "UnelassifiedrExcc'Wt'ttiePlan""Demolition of L„,.w ctr ettlres aa&or- C-enerete"". '�dditional eoffivensationwill be allowed for- r-eek Lc faetar-s,, as these are the GE)PAraetff S a1"Vf o`` aSikt j' T�ieo Nd ohall ink »_ Exeavation 5) Rewerl ift,—, , o e ated .naWxial is raek etits J H%Uling 7) Disposal of exeess material not used elsewhere t­ J E-,Urifieatie -9)—Jup aa. 1,XLNxrC1 2Rk l+ieas re ne rt—this 1tom, a\a11 bo the eubi y -a ; its final ^abated uaitg tk:e aver -a e end oAr- site ,..ethe,1 a) The City ill per-lomi a refiranoa enee the Site has been ele -ed b) The rwill per-fefm a-K\m) �Oci e) The C-ontraeter- will be paid for- ^ibisrdageof Exsav-ated mal�ial ealeulated as the differ-enee between the two su-rvey-S-. d) ?iorl.,W. r��LKL'se Swod or. ectirnated gram ql~ kit-y meastifemeffts ealettlated by the E b. Pay*ient 1) The work per-f ...v e a -a .materials fi ff ishe 7 ; , a-fl e ..ltl: th;2 item and measufed wqwo-44ed tmder- "Meastffefneat" will be paid for- at the unit e. The pr-iee bid z�Lim 1) Em 3) Drying 5) Rewofl;4ng orTeplaoingthe ever- exeavated xxtee. l in mal mitts ) Hauling 7) Disposal of emeess material not used elsewhere on 8) Searifieation 9) Clean up 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] A. Definitions 1. Unclassified Excavation - Without regard to materials, all excavations shall be considered unclassified and shall include all materials excavated. Any reference to Rock or other materials on the Drawings or in the specifications is solely for the City and the Contractor's information and is not to be taken as a classification of the excavation. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION Page 3 of 6 1.4 ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor will provide the City with a Disposal Letter in accordance to Division 01. 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Excavation Safety 1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for making all excavations in a safe manner. 2. All excavation and related sheeting and bracing shall comply with the requirements of OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR part 1926 and state requirements. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage 1. Within Existing Rights -of -Way (ROW) a. Soil may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary construction easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents. b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 3125 00. d. When the Work is performed in active traffic areas, store materials only in areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. e. In non -paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in landscaped areas. 2. Designated Storage Areas a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of spoils within the ROW, easement or temporary construction easement, then secure and maintain an adequate storage location. b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on private property. c. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 3125 00. d. Do not block drainage ways. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions 1. Any data which has been or may be provided on subsurface conditions is not intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soils. It is expressly understood that neither the City nor the Engineer will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. 2. Data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION Page 4 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Materials 1. Unacceptable Fill Material a. In -situ soils classified as NIL, MH, PT, OL or OH in accordance with ASTM D2487 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 CONSTRUCTION A. Accept ownership of unsuitable or excess material and dispose of material off -site accordance with local, state, and federal regulations at locations. B. Excavations shall be performed in the dry, and kept free from water, snow and ice during construction with the exception of water that is applied for dust control. C. Separate Unacceptable Fill Material from other materials, remove from the Site and properly dispose according to disposal plan. D. Maintain drainage in the excavated area to avoid damage to the roadway sections and proposed or existing structures. E. Correct any damage to the subgrade caused by weather, at no additional cost to the City. F. Shape slopes to avoid loosening material below or outside the proposed grades. Remove and dispose of slides as directed. G. Rock Cuts 1. Excavate to finish grades. 2. In the event of over excavation due to contractor error below the lines and grades established in the Drawings, use approved embankment material compacted in accordance with Seel o 3124 nn plans and specifications to replace the over excavated at no additional cost to City. H. Earth Cuts 1. Excavate to finish subgrade. 2. In the event of over excavation due to contractor error below the lines and grades established in the Drawings, use approved embankment material compacted in accordance with See fi ,.. 3124 nn plans and specifications to replace the over excavated at no additional cost to City. 3. Manipulate and compact subgrade in accordance with Section 3124 00 3120 00. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION Page 5 of 6 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subgrade Tolerances 1. Excavate to within 0.1 foot in all directions. 2. In areas of over excavation, Contractor provides fill material approved by the City at no expense to the City. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 16 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 1 of 10 SECTION 31 23 19 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes delegated design of temporary construction dewatering and surface water control and incorporates the design, equipment, materials, installation, operation, protection, monitoring and removal of dewatering and drainage system. Provide dewatering system sufficient to lower groundwater and collect surface water, regardless of groundwater level or rainfall at any time during the work. B. Obtain and pay for permits required for dewatering and drainage systems. Implement measurements to comply with dewatering and discharge permits requirements. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 3109 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring" for monitoring. 2. Section 3120 00 "Earthwork" for excavating, backfilling. 3. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill" for trenching, backfilling, and compaction. 4. Section 31 25 00 "Erosion and Sedimentation Controls" for controlling surface -water runoff and ponding. 5. Section 3150 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for support of excavations. 6. Division 32 "Site Improvements" for various Sections relating to civil and landscape related work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. In -the -Dry: An excavation subgrade where all of the following are met: 1. Groundwater level has been lowered to at least 5 feet below lowest excavation level. 2. Subgrade is stable with no ponded water, mud, or muck. 3. Subgrade is able to support construction equipment without rutting or disturbance. 4. Subgrade is suitable for placement and compaction of fill material, pipe, or concrete foundations. B. Contractor's Engineered Design: Design prepared on behalf of Contractor by a registered Professional Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 2 of 10 C. Professional Engineer: Registered Professional Engineer meeting project qualifications and who is hired by Contractor. D. The Engineer: Engineer hired by Owner. 1. Approvals given by The Engineer shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for performing the work in accordance with Contract Document requirements. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to perform the work, make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion - control measures, excavation support systems, and temporary controls and protections. 3. Review geotechnical report. 4. Review proposed site clearing and excavations. 5. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions. 6. Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system. 7. Review sampling and testing requirements for discharge. 8. Review pretreatment requirements prior to discharge, discharge location(s), and flow rate requirements. 1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Design Plan: Submit written dewatering and drainage system design plan, prepared by a qualified Professional Engineer, that includes: 1. Description of proposed dewatering system and installation methods to be used for system elements and observation wells. 2. Description of equipment, drilling methods, holes sizes, filter sand placement techniques, sealing materials, development techniques, number and location of dewatering points and observations wells. 3. Dewatering system design calculations demonstrating that the proposed system meets all requirements herein and elsewhere. 4. Sequence of well and well -point placement coordinated with support of excavation system installation and control procedures to be adopted, if dewatering problems arise. 5. Identification of anticipated area influenced by dewatering system and address impacts to adjacent existing and proposed structures. a. Include detailed plans for pre -construction surveys of existing structures in vicinity of dewatering system, settlement monitoring of existing structures during construction, and provisions to address settlement of existing structures resulting from dewatering activities. 6. Coordinate dewatering and drainage submittals with excavation and support of excavation submittals. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 3 of 10 B. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by a qualified Professional Engineer. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers, headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water. 3. Include pump capacity and anticipated discharge rate. 4. Include layouts of piezometers and flow -measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system. 5. Show areas and depths of excavation to be dewatered and adjacent structures or facilities within the anticipated area influence. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Professional Engineer. B. Field quality -control reports. C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins. D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped wells and well points and other abandoned -in -place dewatering equipment. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in installation of dewatering systems and dewatering work and having a minimum of 5 years' experience. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State where project is located; having a minimum of 5 years' experience in design and construction of dewatering and drainage systems; and having completed not less than 5 successful dewatering and drainage projects of equal type, size, and complexity to that required for the work. C. Land Surveyor Qualifications: Land Surveyor licensed in State of Project. D. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for the following: 1. Drilling and abandoning of wells used for dewatering systems. 2. Water discharge and disposal from dewatering operations. E. Obtain permit from EPA under National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), for storm water discharge from construction sites. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 4 of 10 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Project -Site Information: Geotechnical data has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering according to the performance requirements. 2. Groundwater levels may vary during the work and should not be assumed to be accurately represented by groundwater level readings reported in the geotechnical data. 3. The geotechnical data is included elsewhere in Project Manual. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or Professional Engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of surface and ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed in -the -dry in accordance with the requirements herein and elsewhere. 1. Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by the Contractor's Design Engineer. Design must account for potential increases in groundwater pressures in subsurface soils (e.g. sand layers) due to flood conditions outside of the levees surrounding the plant. 2. Design, construct, monitor and maintain temporary cofferdams or other means of protecting the site excavation from surface water flood events due to overflow of Owner process facilities. a. Minimum elevation of cofferdam to be as indicated on Drawings. This elevation does not include provisions for wave action. 3. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure required groundwater lowering, erosion control, stability of excavations, excavation support, and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures, including the permanent levee system. 4. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 5. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 6. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction. B. Primary Purpose of Work: Preserve natural undisturbed condition of subgrade soils in areas of proposed excavations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 5 of 10 1. Prior to excavation, lower groundwater to at least 5 feet below lowest excavation subgrade elevation. 2. Additional groundwater lowering may be necessary beyond the 5 feet requirement, depending on construction methods, equipment used, and prevailing groundwater and soil conditions. Lower groundwater as necessary to complete construction in accordance with Contract Documents without additional compensation. C. Design deep wells, well points and sumps, and other groundwater control system components to prevent loss of fines from surrounding soils. Use sand filters with dewatering installations, unless screens are properly sized by Contractor's design engineer to prevent passage of fines from surrounding soils. D. Maintain standby pumping systems and sources of standby power at various sites. E. Design dewatering system to prevent damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, levees, and facilities from dewatering operations. Be responsible for damage to properties, levees, buildings or structures, sewers and other utility installations, pavements, and work that may result from dewatering or surface water control operations. F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris -disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Pipe for Observation Wells: ASTM D1785, PVC Schedule 40 in minimum interior diameter of 1 inch and machine slotted having a maximum slot size of 0.020 inch. Coordinate with Section 3109 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring." B. Equipment: Piping, pumping, and other equipment and materials to provide control of surface water and groundwater in excavations. C. Grout: Mixture of portland cement and bentonite clay or sand suitable for sealing abandoned wells and piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Control surface water and groundwater such that: 1. Excavation to final grade is made in -the -dry. 2. Natural undisturbed conditions of subgrade soils are maintained. 3. Softening, instability, or disturbance due to presence or seepage of water does not occur. 4. Construction and backfilling proceeds in -the -dry. 5. Floatation of completed portions of work shall be prohibited. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 6 of 10 B. Methods of groundwater control may include but are not limited to perimeter trenches and sump pumping, perimeter groundwater cutoff, well points, ejectors, deep wells, or any combination. C. Where groundwater levels are above proposed bottom of excavation level, provide a pumped dewatering system for pre -drainage of soils prior to excavation and for maintaining lowered groundwater level until construction has been completed such that structure, pipeline, or fill will not be floated or otherwise damaged. D. Vary type of system, spacing of dewatering units, and other details of the work depending on soil and water conditions at each location. E. Do work in a manner to protect adjacent structures and utilities without causing loss of ground or disturbance to pipe bearing soils or soils supporting overlying or adjacent structures. F. Install, monitor, and report data from observation wells. Evaluate collected data relative to groundwater control system performance and modify systems necessary to dewater site. G. Locate groundwater control system components where they will not interfere with construction activities adjacent to the work area or interfere with installation and monitoring of geotechnical instrumentation including observation wells. Do not make excavations for sumps or drainage ditches within or below 1H:1V slopes extending downward and out from edges of existing or proposed foundation elements or from downward vertical footprint of pipe without approval by the Engineer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, levees, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water. D. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Section 3125 00 "Erosion and Sediment Control," during dewatering operations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 7 of 10 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface -water controls. 1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. 2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating below ground -water level. C. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow -control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide standby equipment on -site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. 3.4 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Construct surface water control measures, including dikes, ditches, sumps and other methods to prevent flow of surface water into excavations and to allow construction to proceed without delay. Surface flows may also consist of untreated wastewater from the Owner's process facilities and must be prevented from entering the Project work area and excavations. 1. Minimum elevation of stormwater protection to be as indicated on Drawings (not including wave action). B. Grade excavation to divert surface water and seepage water within excavation areas into sumps and dewatering wells. 3.5 EXCAVATION DEWATERING A. Provide and maintain equipment and facilities to promptly remove and properly dispose of water entering excavations. Maintain excavations in -the -dry. B. Excavation dewatering shall maintain the subgrade in a natural undisturbed condition and be in operation until the fill, structure or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural elevations. C. Do not place pipe, masonry, and concrete in water or submerge within 24 hours after being installed. Prevent water from flow over new masonry or concrete within four days after placement. D. Prevent water from rising to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. Prevent pipe flotation by promptly placing backfill. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 8 of 10 E. Conduct dewatering to preserve natural undisturbed condition of subgrade soils at bottom of excavation. F. If trench subgrade or excavation bottom becomes disturbed due to inadequate dewatering or drainage, excavate below normal grade as directed by the Engineer and refill with material as approved by the Engineer without additional compensation. G. It is expected that initial dewatering plan may be modified to suit variable soil and water conditions encountered. Dewater and excavate in a manner without causing loss of ground or disturbance to pipe bearing soil or soil that supports overlying or adjacent structures or instability of excavation conditions. H. If methods do not properly dewater excavation, install additional groundwater observation wells as directed by the Engineer. Do not place pipe or structure until readings obtained from observation wells indicate that groundwater has been lowered to specified minimum of below bottom of final excavation. I. Surround dewatering units with suitable filter sand with no fines being removed by pumping. Pump continuously from dewatering system until pipe or structure is adequately backfilled. Provide stand-by pumps. Collect water entering excavations from precipitation or surface runoff in shallow ditches around excavation perimeter, drained to a sump, and pump from excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. K. Dispose of drainage to an approved area on the Owner's property. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner or indicated on the Drawings, dispose of groundwater to the Primary Clarifier Distribution Box. In the event untreated wastewater or Owner process water enters the Project work area, dispose of this water as directed by the Owner. Under no circumstances should untreated wastewater be pumped onto open ground. 3.6 WELL -POINT SYSTEMS A. Where necessary, install a vacuum well -point system around excavation for dewatering purposes. Surround each well -point and riser pipe by a sand or gravel filter. Use sand of gradation that after initial development of well -points, quantity and size of soil particles discharged shall be negligible. Provide well -point systems capable of operating continuously under highest possible vacuum. Include sufficient valves and gauges to accurately monitor and control the system. Develop and redevelop well -points to provide reliable performance throughout the duration of the work. B. Install well point systems in the Engineer's presence according with approved submittal. 3.7 DEEP WELLS A. Where necessary, install a deep well system around an excavation to dewater or depressurize it. Surround each well with a sand or gravel filter having adequate gradation so quantity and size of soil particles discharged are negligible. Install sufficient number of wells to lower or CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 9 of 10 depressurize groundwater level allowing excavation to proceed in -the -dry. Develop and redevelop wells as necessary to provide reliable performance throughout the duration of the work. B. Install deep wells in the Engineer's presence according with approved submittal. 3.8 OBSERVATION WELLS A. Install observation wells as required under this Section and in accordance with the approved submittal to monitor groundwater levels beneath and around excavated areas until adjacent structures and pipelines are completed and backfilled. B. Observation Well Locations and Depths: 1. Install a minimum of 8 wells around the proposed excavations requiring dewatering. Locate in critical areas with respect to groundwater control to monitor performance of dewatering systems as determined by Delegated Design. 2. Install observation wells to: a. Minimum depth of 20 feet below deepest level of excavation, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. b. Depth necessary to indicate that groundwater control system designed under Delegated Design is performing as intended. 3. Provide additional observation wells required by the Engineer if deemed necessary to monitor performance of groundwater control system without additional compensation. 4. Locations and depths are subject to approval by the Engineer. C. Protect observation wells at ground surface by providing a lockable box or outer protective casing with lockable top and padlock. Design surface protection to prevent damage by vandalism, construction operations, and surface water infiltration. 1. Provide two copies of padlock keys at each well for the Engineer's access. 2. Develop observation wells to provide a reliable indication of groundwater levels. Re- developed wells: if well clogging is observed; in event of apparent erroneous readings; or as directed by the Engineer. 3. Submittal observation well installation logs, top of casing elevation, and well locations to the Engineer within 24 hours of completing well installation. D. Observation Well Maintenance: 1. Maintain each observation well until adjacent structures and pipelines are completed and backfilled. Clean out or replace any observation well which ceases to be operable before adjacent work is completed. 2. Repair or replace wells without additional compensation, whether damage is caused by Contractor's operations or third parties. E. Monitoring and Reporting of Observation Well Data: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3123 19 DEWATERING Page 10 of 10 1. Begin daily monitoring of groundwater levels in work areas prior to initial operation of drainage and dewatering system. Continue daily monitoring in areas where groundwater control is in operation until time that adjacent structures and pipelines are completed and backfilled or until time that groundwater control systems are turned off. 2. Be responsible for processing and reporting observation well data to the Engineer on a weekly basis. Provide data to the Engineer on a form that includes following information: observation well number, depth to groundwater, total depth of well, top of casing elevation, groundwater level elevation, and date and time of reading. F. Keep groundwater level at a minimum of 5 feet below lowest subgrade level for a given excavation. Deeper drawdown below excavations may be required by Contractor's dewatering Engineer. M�� 7a1ST[6]1l_Iwe) MV61.1 l9luky A. At completion of excavation and backfilling work and when approved by the Engineer, remove from site various pipe, deep wells, well -points, pumps, generators, observation wells, flood control systems (e.g. cofferdams), other equipment, and accessories used for groundwater and surface water control systems. 1. Removed materials and equipment become property of Contractor. B. Restore areas disturbed by installation and removal of groundwater control systems and observation wells to their original condition. C. Leave in place deep wells casings, well -points, and observation wells located: 1. Within plan limits of structures or pipelines. 2. Within zone below 1H:1V planes extending downward and out from edges of foundation elements or from downward vertical footprint of pipe. 3. Where removal would result in ground movements causing adverse settlement to adjacent ground surface, utilities, or existing structures. D. Fill pulled casings holes with grout. Where left in place, fill casings with cement grout and cut off a minimum of 3 feet below finished ground level or 1 foot below foundation level to prevent interference with finished structures or pipelines. E. When directed by the Engineer, leave observation wells in place for continued monitoring. Cut casings flush with final ground level when directed and provide protective lockable boxes with locking devices. Provide protective boxes suitable for traffic and other conditions to which observation wells will be exposed. END OF SECTION 3123 19 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SECTION 3125 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 9 1. Implementation of the project's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and installation, maintenance, removal of erosion and sediment controls devices, and establishment of final stabilization. B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. fie. Added 1.1.D. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.5. 4. Modified 1.6. 5. Modified 2.2. 6. Modified 3.11. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements D.Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sumlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section _ - - - 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B.LNan -? wxe "A'`v9--mmi ant ?) Tkio b. . b. Pay-mei3� Rem are stibsidiafy to the struetufe of items being bid and no otherr eompensation will be allowed-. En-l. W ter �, .. Dro„ontior. P a . - 1 awe a. "—! be by lump b. P-aymeiic 1) Thewor-kper-fofmed d flic trzater- is f,,.. ishea : or-d -nee with this item shag be -paid -for ar,,Ihv� `n `Y van, privj b d �-ATRP azra!—. a. 'R� poaae-bid ix CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-2 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 2 of 9 2) i.v ..l e.v. ev.4..4: ev ) Permittinfees 1) Irridl.Wian 6) Removal 7) Obtaining and/or eomplying with Ge�:Alor- fill permits, if required- 8) Finsall Meabiliza6en 1.3 REFERENCES A.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM Standard: a. ASTM D3786, Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method b. ASTM D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles c. ASTM D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile d. ASTM D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products 3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 4. TxDOT Departmental Material Specifications (DMS) a. DMS-6230 "Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric" 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] A St,,,-m W.,4e« PoIk4;e., Preye..tio Plan (C'WPPP) B. T-GEO Netiee of intent (NO!) for- Stefm Water- Disehar-�-,es Assoeiated with Genstf-defieft D. T-G O Net; ee of Tormin tia nNOT) f{ - Ste....v,., 7Wate,. Disehar-ees A sseeiatea , ,i !`onst.-..etio A etiyiO. , .�,.le« 4lw TPDEE gbY19:111. Pixv it 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) B. TCEO Notice of Intent (NOI) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activitv under the TPDES General Permit C. Construction Site Notice CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 3 of 9 D. TCEO Notice of Termination (NOT) for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under the TPDES General Permit E. Notice of Change (if applicable) 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Rock Filter Dams 1. Aggregate a. Furnish aggregate with hardness, durability, cleanliness and resistance to crumbling, flaking and eroding acceptable to the Engineer. b. Provide the following: 1) Types 1, 2 and 4 Rock Filter Dams a) Use 3-to-6 inch aggregate. 2) Type 3 Rock Filter Dams a) Use 4-to-8 inch aggregate. 2. Wire a. Provide minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire for the steel wire mesh and tie wires for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams b. Type 4 dams require: 1) Double -twisted, hexagonal weave with a nominal mesh opening of 2'/2 inches x 3 1/4 inches 2) Minimum 0.0866-inch steel wire for netting 3) Minimum 0.1063-inch steel wire for selvages and corners 4) Minimum 0.0866-inch for binding or tie wire B. Geotextile Fabric 1. Place the aggregate over geotextile fabric meeting the following criteria: a. Tensile Strength of 250 pounds, per ASTM D4632 b. Puncture Strength of 135 pounds, per ASTM D4833 c. Mullen Burst Rate of 420 psi, per ASTM D3786 d. Apparent Opening Size of No. 20 (max), per ASTM D4751 C. Stabilized Construction Entrances 1. Provide materials that meet the details shown on the Drawings and this Section. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 4 of 9 a. Provide crushed aggregate for long and short-term construction exits. b. Furnish aggregates that are clean, hard, durable and free from adherent coatings such as salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials and organic and injurious matter. c. Use 3-to-5-inch coarse aggregate with a minimum thickness of 12 inches. d. The aggregate shall be placed over a geotextile fabric meeting the following criteria: 1) Tensile Strength of 300 pounds, per ASTM D4632 2) Puncture Strength of 120 pounds, per ASTM D4833 3) Mullen Burst Rate of 600 psi, per ASTM D3786 4) Apparent Opening Size of No. 40 (max), per ASTM D4751 D.Embankment for Erosion Control 1. Provide rock, loam, clay, topsoil or other earth materials that will form a stable embankment to meet the intended use. E.Sandbags 1. Provide sandbag material of polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide woven fabric with a minimum unit weight of 4 ounces per square yard, a Mullen burst - strength exceeding 300 psi, and an ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. 2. Use natural coarse sand or manufactured sand meeting the gradation given in Table 1 to fill sandbags. 3. Filled sandbags must be 24 to 30 inches long, 16 to 18 inches wide, and 6 to 8 inches thick. Table 1 Sand Gradation Sieve # 4 100 200 F. Temporary Sediment Control Fence Maximum Retained (% by Weight) 3 percent 80 percent 95 percent 1. Provide a net -reinforced fence using woven geo-textile fabric. 2. Logos visible to the traveling public will not be allowed. a. Fabric 1) Provide fabric materials in accordance with DMS-6230, "Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric." b. Posts 1) Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts with a minimum length of 48 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2) Soft wood posts must be at least 3 inches in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 inch. 3) Hardwood posts must have a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch. 4) T- or L-shaped steel posts must have a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot. c. Net Reinforcement 1) Provide net reinforcement of at least 12-1/2 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh, with a maximum opening size of 2 x 4 inch, at least 24 inches wide, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. d. Staples 1) Provide staples with a crown at least 3/4 inch wide and legs 1/2 inch long. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 5 of 9 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 1. Develop and implement the project's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000 requirements. Prevent water pollution from storm water runoff by using and maintaining appropriate structural and nonstructural BMPs to reduce pollutants discharges to the MS4 from the construction site. B. Control Measures 1. Implement control measures in the area to be disturbed before beginning construction, or as directed. Limit the disturbance to the area shown on the Drawings or as directed. 2. Control site waste such as discarded building materials, concrete truck washout water, chemicals, litter and sanitary waste at the construction site. 3. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor cannot control soil erosion and sedimentation resulting from construction operations, the Engineer will limit the disturbed area to that which the Contractor is able to control. 4. Immediately correct ineffective control measures. Implement additional controls as directed. Remove excavated material within the time requirements specified in the applicable storm water permit. 5. Upon acceptance of vegetative cover by the City, remove and dispose of all temporary control measures, temporary embankments, bridges, matting, falsework, piling, debris, or other obstructions placed during construction that are not a part of the finished work, or as directed. C.Do not locate disposal areas, stockpiles, or haul roads in any wetland, water body, or streambed. D.Do not install temporary construction crossings in or across any water body without the prior approval of the appropriate resource agency and the Engineer. E. Provide protected storage area for paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers at an approved location. Keep paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers off bare ground and provide shelter for stored chemicals. F. Installation and Maintenance 1. Perform work in accordance with the TPDES Construction General Permit TXR150000. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-6 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 6 of 9 2. When approved, sediments may be disposed of within embankments, or in areas where the material will not contribute to further siltation and when appropriate stabilization is provided. 3. Dispose of removed material in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. 4. Remove devices upon approval or when directed. a. Upon removal, finish -grade and dress the area. b. Stabilize disturbed areas in accordance with the permit, and as shown on the Drawings or directed. 5. The Contractor retains ownership of stockpiled material and must remove it from the project when new installations or replacements are no longer required. G.Rock Filter Dams for Erosion Control 1. Remove trees, brush, stumps, and other objectionable material that may interfere with the construction of rock filter dams. 2. Place sandbags as a foundation when required or at the Contractor's option. 3. For Types 1, 2, 3, and 5, place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes specified, without undue voids. 4. For Types 2 and 3, place the aggregate on the mesh and then fold the mesh at the upstream side over the aggregate and secure it to itself on the downstream side with wire ties, or hog rings, or as directed. 5. Place rock filter dams perpendicular to the flow of the stream or channel unless otherwise directed. 6. Construct filter dams according to the following criteria, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings: a. Type 1 (Non -reinforced) 1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam. 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 b. Type 2 (Reinforced) 1) Height - At least 18 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam. 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 c. Type 3 (Reinforced) 1) Height - At least 36 inches measured vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam. 2) Top Width - At least 2 feet 3) Slopes - At most 2:1 d. Type 4 (Sack Gabions) 1) Unfold sack gabions and smooth out kinks and bends. 2) For vertical filling, connect the sides by lacing in a single loop —double loop pattern on 4- to 5-inches spacing. At 1 end, pull the end lacing rod until tight, wrap around the end, and twist 4 times. At the filling end, fill with stone, pull the rod tight, cut the wire with approximately 6 inches remaining, and twist wires 4 times. 3) For horizontal filling, place sack flat in a filling trough, fill with stone, and connect sides and secure ends as described above. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 7 of 9 4) Lift and place without damaging the gabion. 5) Shape sack gabions to existing contours. e. Type 5 1) Provide rock filter dams as shown on the Drawings. H.Construction Entrances 1. When tracking conditions exist, prevent traffic from crossing or exiting the construction site or moving directly onto a public roadway, alley, sidewalk, parking area, or other right of way areas other than at the location of construction entrances. 2. Place the exit over a foundation course, if necessary. a. Grade the foundation course or compacted subgrade to direct runoff from the construction exits to a sediment trap as shown on the Drawings or as directed. 3. At drive approaches, make sure the construction entrance is the full width of the drive and meets the length shown on the Drawings. a. The width shall be at least 14 feet for 1-way and 24 feet for 2-way traffic for all other points of ingress or egress or as directed by the Engineer. I. Earthwork for Erosion Control 1. Perform excavation and embankment operations to minimize erosion and to remove collected sediments from other erosion control devices. a. Excavation and Embankment for Erosion Control Measures 1) Place earth dikes, swales or combinations of both along the low crown of daily lift placement, or as directed, to prevent runoff spillover. 2) Place swales and dikes at other locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed to prevent runoff spillover or to divert runoff. 3) Construct cuts with the low end blocked with undisturbed earth to prevent erosion of hillsides. 4) Construct sediment traps at drainage structures in conjunction with other erosion control measures as shown on the Drawings or as directed. 5) Where required, create a sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures for drainage locations that serve an area with 10 or more disturbed acres at 1 time, not including offsite areas. b. Excavation of Sediment and Debris 1) Remove sediment and debris when accumulation affects the performance of the devices, after a rain, and when directed. 2) Remove sediment from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 50%. J. Sandbags for Erosion Control Construct a berm or dam of sandbags that will intercept sediment -laden storm water runoff from disturbed areas, create a retention pond, detain sediment and release water in sheet flow. 2. Fill each bag with sand so that at least the top 6 inches of the bag is unfilled to allow for proper tying of the open end. 3. Place the sandbags with their tied ends in the same direction. 4. Offset subsequent rows of sandbags 1/2 the length of the preceding row. 5. Place a single layer of sandbags downstream as a secondary debris trap. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-8 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 8 of 9 6. Place additional sandbags as necessary or as directed for supplementary support to berms or dams of sandbags or earth. K.Temporary Sediment -Control Fence 1. Provide temporary sediment -control fence near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment from sheet flow. 2. Incorporate the fence into erosion -control measures used to control sediment in areas of higher flow. Install the fence as shown on the Drawings, as specified in this Section, or as directed by the Engineer or City representative. a. Post Installation 1) Embed posts at least 18 inches deep, or adequately anchor, if in rock, with a spacing of 6 to 8 feet and install on a slight angle toward the run-off source. b. Fabric Anchoring 1) Dig trenches along the uphill side of the fence to anchor 6 to 8 inches of fabric. 2) Provide a minimum trench cross-section of 6 x 6 inches. 3) Place the fabric against the side of the trench and align approximately 2 inches of fabric along the bottom in the upstream direction. 4) Backfill the trench, then hand -tamp. c. Fabric and Net Reinforcement Attachment 1) Unless otherwise shown under the Drawings, attach the reinforcement to wooden posts with staples, or to steel posts with T-clips, in at least 4 places equally spaced. 2) Sewn vertical pockets may be used to attach reinforcement to end posts. 3) Fasten the fabric to the top strand of reinforcement by hog rings or cord every 15 inches or less. d. Fabric and Net Splices 1) Locate splices at a fence post with a minimum lap of 6 inches attached in at least 6 places equally spaced, unless otherwise shown under the Drawings. a) Do not locate splices in concentrated flow areas. 2) Requirements for installation of used temporary sediment -control fence include the following: a) Fabric with minimal or no visible signs of biodegradation (weak fibers) b) Fabric without excessive patching (more than 1 patch every 15 to 20 feet) c) Posts without bends d) Backing without holes 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING A.Waste Management CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 312500-9 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Page 9 of 9 1. Remove sediment, debris and litter as needed. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A.Erosion control measures remain in place and are maintained until all soil disturbing activities at the project site have been completed. B. Establish a uniform vegetative cover with a density of 70 percent on all unpaved areas, on areas not covered by permanent structures, or in areas where permanent erosion control measures (i.e., riprap, gabions, or geotextiles) have been employed. C.Once vegetative cover is achieved, the contractor shall remove all temporary control measures before final project acceptance. It is the contractor's responsibility to remove all temporary control measures, unless transfer of maintenance and subsequent removal is transferred to another entity in writing. D.Upon achievement of final stabilization, submit NOT to TCEQ, and provide a copy of the NOT to the City of Fort Worth's Environmental Quality Division, if required. E. Complete and submit a Final Grading Certificate to Development Services, if required. 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE A.Install and maintain the integrity of temporary erosion and sedimentation control devices to accumulate silt and debris until earthwork construction and permanent erosion control features are in place or the disturbed area has been adequately stabilized as determined by the Engineer. B.If a device ceases to function as intended, repair or replace the device or portions thereof as necessary. C.Perform inspections of the construction site as prescribed in the Construction General Permit TXR150000. D.Records of inspections and modifications based on the results of inspections must be maintained and available in accordance with the permit. 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 1 of 10 SECTION 31 50 00 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary excavation and trench support and protection systems. 2. Delegated design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 32 33 "Preconstruction Video" for recording preexisting conditions and excavation support and protection system progress. 2. Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" for testing and laboratory services. 3. Section 31 09 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring" for monitoring equipment. 4. Section 3120 00 "Earthwork" for excavating and backfilling. 5. Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction and dewatering excavations. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review geotechnical data. 2. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions. 3. Review coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Review proposed excavations. 5. Review proposed equipment. 6. Review monitoring of excavation support and protection system. 7. Review coordination with waterproofing. 8. Review abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, meeting the minimum performance requirements in Part 2 of this Section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 2 of 10 1. Include overall system plan, indicating clearances, dimensions, material properties, member sizes, locations, spacing and member penetrations depths, and locations of various types of lateral supports. 2. Show details, layout, arrangement, equipment requirements, and method of construction of proposed excavation support system. 3. Indicate existing and proposed utilities, structures or other obstructions. 4. Show wall elevations and locations of bracing. 5. Show overall installation sequence and removal of bracing. Indicate work levels to be performed before bracing is installed or removed. 6. Method of preloading bracing, if required, including preload for each member, and method of locking -off the preload. Submit detailed drawings of connections, jacking supports, and method of shimming. Include procedures for resolving difficulties arising from misalignment of members exposed during excavation and criteria for implementing those procedures. [%.� 791R UN,%013 70[eM►&1181:7uI10IF.1110 A. Design Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data prepared, signed, and sealed by professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Include: 1. Loads on Excavation Support System: For all stages of excavation, bracing removal, and concrete placement, including material and equipment loads on adjacent ground during construction. 2. Design of Wall and Bracing Members: Include details for all construction stages. a. Account for water pressures associated with flood conditions and surcharge loads due to levee and other adjacent features/structures. b. Do not penetrate the clay stratum for shoring system members within 100 feet of the landside levee toe unless penetrations will be backfilled or sealed with grout or lean concrete. 3. Theoretical Deflections: Excavation support system and deformation of structures, pipelines, and other improvements located within areas influencing excavations. B. Action Plan: Submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance, a plan of action to be implemented in the event any deformation threshold value is reached as specified in Section 3109 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring." Identify positive measures to further limit wall movement, including but not limited to trenching for struts and wales, placement of granular earth berms against the wall, installation of additional struts, or combinations thereof. Include description and details of mitigating measures, work schedule, location and availability of materials, and structural details for connections to wall and support elements. 2. Be prepared to work 24 hours per day to implement such measures. 3. Perform remedial work and mitigating measures at no additional cost to Owner. C. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 3 of 10 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality control measures to ensure that performance of excavation support system complies with project requirements. B. Submit welder qualifications and weld procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. D. Maintain at least one copy of design at job site during excavation that includes a plan indicating sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to be used in protective system. Identity registered Contractor's design engineer who stamped the design. E. Do not proceed with excavation support or protection activities until submittals have been approved by the Engineer. F. Submit inspection documentation: 1. On -site inspections of excavation support system as the systems are constructed. 2. Review of quality control measures and performance data. 3. Certification that excavation support system is constructed per applicable design following completion of each support system and following Contractor modifications during construction. 4. Bi-weekly observation reports confirming excavation protection systems remain in conformance with the approved shoring design. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience compatible to indicated Work, and who employs labor and supervisory personnel similarly experienced in Work of this Section. B. Contractor's Design Engineer: Registered Professional Engineer in State where the work is located with at least 5 years' professional experience in design and construction of support of excavation systems and having completed a minimum of 5 successful excavation support projects of equal type, size, and complexity to specified work. C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by inadequate performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction, including OSHA requirements. E. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned -in -place support and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 4 of 10 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Contact utility companies and other responsible authorities to locate and mark underground utilities. 2. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission. B. Project -Site Information: Geotechnical data has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent soil borings and tests, conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements. 2. The geotechnical data is included elsewhere in Project Manual. C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to perform the delegated design. B. Provide delegated design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction loads within specified movement criteria (Section 31 09 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring"). 1. Contractor -Designed Excavation Support and Protection System: Include comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means, in accordance with Section 3123 19 "Dewatering". 3. Install excavation support and protection systems to minimize horizontal and vertical movements without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 4. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is prevented. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 5 of 10 C. Do not permit excavations below the level of the base of adjacent existing foundations or retaining walls, unless excavation design and bracing includes an analysis of stability of structure supported by foundation and if necessary, incorporates required bracing or underpinning of foundation. D. For support systems in which bracing is installed between opposite sides of the excavation, design excavation support of both sides to be nearly the same as feasible. E. Do not penetrate the clay stratum for shoring system members within 100 feet of the landside levee toe unless penetrations will be backfilled or sealed with grout or lean concrete. F. Where necessary to resist point loads, fill pipe piles used as soldier piles with concrete. Do not consider concrete strength in design of pipe pile for bending stress. G. Design, install, operate, and maintain ground water control system to control ground water inflows, prevent piping or loss of ground, and maintain stability of the excavation. Refer to the requirements of Section 3123 19 "Dewatering." H. Design review and field monitoring activities by Owner or the Engineer does not relieve Contractor of its work responsibilities. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. B. Provide materials for excavation support systems, as required for Delegated Design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that instrumentation required under Section 31 09 00 "Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring" is installed and initialized prior to start of work required by this Section. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Obtain permits from local authority having jurisdiction prior to initiating excavation work. B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, levees, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 6 of 10 C. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Install fencing, gates, lights, and signs around excavations and staging areas to provide for public safety. D. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded. 3.3 GENERAL A. Install excavation support systems in accordance with the shop drawings and applicable permits. B. Fill voids between excavation support system and earth with materials acceptable to the Engineer, including grout or lean concrete within 100 feet of the landside levee toe. C. If unstable material is encountered during excavation, take immediate measures to contain it in place and prevent ground displacement. D. If settlement or deflections of supports indicate that support system requires modification to prevent excessive movements, redesign and resubmit revised shop drawings and calculations to the Engineer without additional compensation. E. Maintain sufficient quantity of material on site for protection of work and for use in case of accident or emergency. A. Use portable trench boxes or sliding trench shields only for worker protection. B. Additional excavation, backfilling, and surface restoration required as result of trench box use shall be provided without additional compensation. C. Design, construct, and maintain trench boxes or shields to meet acceptable engineering and industry standards. D. Install shields in a manner to restrict lateral or other hazardous movement of the shield in the event of sudden lateral loads. E. Maintain a written copy of trench box manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and limitations at job site during excavation work. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 7 of 10 3.5 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. 1. Install in predrilled holes, unless otherwise approved by The Engineer. 2. Soldier Piles in Predrilled Holes: a. Provide casing or other methods of support to prevent caving of holes and loss of ground. b. Backfill with concrete (unless otherwise approved by The Engineer) from elevation of bottom excavation to pile tip elevation. Backfill remainder of predrilled hole with lean concrete, sand or other approved material. Do not penetrate the clay stratum for shoring system members within 100 feet of the landside levee toe unless penetrations will be backfilled or sealed with grout or lean concrete. C. Predrilled hole of sufficient diameter allowing for proper alignment and backfilling of pile. Advance driven soldier piles without aid of a water jet. B. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. C. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. 1. Install lagging so ground loss does not occur between adjacent or below lowest board. As excavation proceeds, do not exceed maximum height of 4 feet for unlagged face of excavation. 2. Do not exceed unlagged face of 2 feet, if water seeps or flows from excavation face or excavation face becomes unstable. D. As installation progresses, pack voids between excavation face and lagging with materials such as hay, burlap, or geotextile filter fabric to allow drainage of ground water without loss of ground. E. Install wales at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles. 3.6 STEEL SHEET PILING A. Thoroughly clean and inspect sheet piles for defects and proper interlock dimensions prior to installation. Provide a tool for checking interlock dimensions. B. Before starting excavation, drive one-piece sheet piling lengths in plumb position and tightly interlock vertical edges for its entire length to form a continuous barrier. Form a continuous diaphragm throughout length of each run of wall, bearing tightly against original ground. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 8 of 10 1. Exercise care in driving so interlocking members can be extracted without damaging adjacent structures or utilities. 2. Use driving, cutting, and splicing methods conforming to approved Shop Drawings. 3. Use templates or other temporary alignment facilities to maintain piling line. C. Accurately place piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 5 feet. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. D. Install each sheet pile having sufficient clearance in interlocks to slide under its own weight into interlock of previously placed sheet pile. E. Do not excavate in advance of steel sheet piling installation. F. Where obstructions are anticipated, pre -excavate or pre -drill along sheet pile wall alignment without additional compensation. Do not extend pre -excavation and pre -drilling below lowest excavation level or into bearing soils for existing or future structures. G. Remove obstructions encountered before the specified embedment for piles. Where obstructions cannot be removed, re-evaluate sheet pile system by Contractor's design Engineer show reduced embedment and additional toe stability measures to be implemented for sheet pile wall realignment. Submit proposed design measures to the Engineer for review. H. Withdraw damaged or provide faulty aligned pilings with new piling, driven properly in its place without additional compensation. I. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. 3.7 LINER PANELS A. Install liner plates as soon as excavation has progressed sufficiently to install next complete circumferential ring of liner plates. Complete ring of liner plates prior to continuing excavation. Do not install more than one ring of liner plates at any time. B. Stagger plates in vertical direction to facilitate shaft strength and leakage resistance. C. Grout liner plates in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 3.8 INTERNAL BRACING A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. Install internal bracing if required to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 9 of 10 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. B. Provide internal bracing to carry maximum design load without distortion or buckling. C. Include web stiffeners, plates, or angles required to prevent rotation, crippling, or buckling of connections and points of bearing between structural steel members. Allow for eccentricities caused by field fabrication and assembly. D. Install and maintain bracing support members in tight contact with each other and with the surface being supported. Do not use wood shims. E. Coordinate excavation work with installation of bracing. Extend excavation no more than 2 feet below any brace level prior to installation of the bracing. F. Use procedures that produce uniform loading of bracing member without eccentricities, overstressing, or distortion of system members. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Survey -Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during installation of excavation support and protection systems, excavation progress, and for as long as excavation remains open. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. B. Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable. C. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of excavation support and protection systems. 3.10 REMOVAL A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 3120 00 'Earthwork." B. Repair or replace, as approved by Engineer, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. Do not remove vertical support members that were installed within zone of influence of new or existing structures. Cut off support members installed within this zone at 5 feet below finished grade and abandon in place. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 31 50 00 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION Page 10 of 10 C. Do not remove internal bracing or transfer loads to permanent structure without prior acceptance of the Engineer. D. Begin removal at excavation bottom and progress upward. Slowly release members noting indication of possible failure of remaining members or possible cave-in of excavation sides. E. Progress backfilling together with removal of support systems from excavations. F. Remove all portions of excavation support, unless otherwise indicated by approved Shop Drawings. 1. Zone of Influence Definition: Zone extending down and away from outer edge of the structure at 1 horizontal to 1 vertical. G. Do not leave wood as part of abandoned portion of the work. H. When removing excavation support system, do not disturb or damage adjacent buildings, structures, waterproofing material, or utilities. Fill voids immediately with lean concrete or as directed by the Engineer. I. Immediately remove excavation support system material from site. END OF SECTION 3150 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 320117-1 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 1 of 6 SECTION 32 0117 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Flexible pavement repair to include, but not limited to: a. Utility cuts (water, sanitary sewer, drainage, franchise utilities, etc.) b. Warranty work c. Repairs of damage caused by Contractor. d. Any permanent asphalt pavement repair needed during the course of construction. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification None. —Modified 1.2. Modified 2.2.B. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 34 16 — Concrete Base Material for Trench Repair 4. Section 32 12 16 — Asphalt Paving 5. Section 32 13 13 — Concrete Paving 6. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. Asphalt Pave coat P_cpai: a. Measurement 4+- fef: this item will be by the linear- feet of AsphaI4 Pavement tho D.—,✓tings-. b. Pay—mea4 1) The work per-feftned d rmti, .�lz f.,... ishe,l in mear-danee ...ith thiz ti--m pr-iee bid p o or linear- feet of d in 1) Pr-epai-7iag final suffaees 2) Fumiahirg, loading, , rl,,adin g ster-ing, 1.,,,,ling d 1mrx—Ilirg all ryWar—ials ineluding ftei& and royalty 3) T -r-af e eentrel fef: all testing aggregate, and additiv-e work needed for- eoffeetive aetion CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3201 17 - 2 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 2 of 6 6) baMbjo — ek eeat 2 Asphalt It Pavement Repair air for T 4 l;t), Se - Aee T,-o,-.c a.baxec ont 1) Measurement for this item will be by the linear foot-of,"halt Pa im-n nle Repair eentered on the proposed Sewer serviee line measiffed from the faee f ..,,«t-, t the limit f the Asphalt t Prwefnen„ Repair- fo t1.1 mw.s sewer- line. bPayment and mA-.v-jr: 2E1 under--""Measurem "cm t'� will be paid for at the unit priee bid priee per linear feet- "Uplhalt Pa:elfei}t RoNiA Ewe" installed for: a) Var-ious t�Tes of t4ilities ThQ priee bid olmll irx,�ude-.- 1) Pfepafing final suffaees 2) Fur uk�xi ,'.eadkigs uw^!oadiag, stg haukkig and handling4.1 KWerials 3) Tfaffie eentrel for all test41g q) Asphalt, gg egaI ' „ 1 .,dd tiw atniGl 1 . edc needed fef eeffeetive aeti,... 6) Trial batekes J L'�.rlso ., l„ 1 o o .,to fiat tP opai: a. ixoarc7n 2w ')ieasore e rt€or-this item will be by the square ar- fe: aapbalt-paveffwfft rer,ckrbc;on4fwy lir t-�fthe definedwidth f n zplx--,lt iemeat Repair - by b. Pay -meat 1) The work per-feEmed d rmtni ulz Affaished ; aeear-danee •• ith thiz kem and measured rri. "Meastffefnent" will be paid for- at the unit pr-ie0 bid per- squam ,-.1 f Asphalt Pavement D Wd.-,Bz,yo ,,l b Width. e. Tnepriee bid z�L ilgeltide: 1greparing fifia4 suf€aees 2) Furxching, 19ading, unloud rz,-� zt b Zl .t4rials ineluding ftei& and royalty �TTr-a€ne eentiolfbr,�l � oi.ng 4) Asphalt,, aggregate, a -ad additive 5l nrial /.Dn`' work needed for- , eeti.,e aeti «. J 'YzKV. batn'ias 7) rao? 1 0-0at 1) MeaswefftefA-fb thic ftam will be by the s o ar- for- s Ff e ro {deoo rx-,t,-,n, l,,,le base repair-) for-: a) s thieknesses b. Pay-met}t CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 320117-3 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 3 of 6 1) The woFk per-fofinec and fnat€ii-al th—aishecc'lrin aeeE) d *ee- Ait%1 tl1 z Tta-M and measured provided under "Mcasurremefft" will beck �'lcicrfor at the unit pr-iee bid pefs"afe yafd of Ertm : e. The p e bid zimP ixe 1) Preparing final surfaees 2) Fu13ni--,& gs 19.,,1ing .,..loading, sto -ing ha-ul n and 1nnd1ing4.? ,x,-.,atertals 3) T, e eomrol for all testing 4)Asphalt, ggreg Io „ 1 additive E) Teal batches 7) Taek ,eat J lkm oval and,IoF sweeping e*eesi-mateiiui 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. H.M.A.C. — Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Permitting 1. Obtain Street Use Permit to make utility cuts in the street from the Transportation and Public Works Department in conformance with current ordinances. 2. The Transportation and Public Works Department will inspect the paving repair after construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Asphalt Pavement Mix Design: submit for approval: see Section 32 12 16. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Place mixture when the roadway surface temperature is 45 degrees F or higher and rising unless otherwise approved. 1.13 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. Backfill CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3201 17 - 4 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 4 of 6 1. See Section 33 05 10. B. Base Material 1. r, ner-e•1e Base Material f rr,.o,,e eNiE &je Section 03 34 16. Flexible Base Courses see Section 32 1123 Lime Treated Base Courses see Section 32 1129 3. Concrete Base: See Section 32 13 13. C. Asphalt Paving: see Section 32 12 16. 1. H.M.A.C. paving: Type D. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation 1. Mark pavement cut for repairs for approval by the City. 2. Contractor and City meet prior to saw cutting to confirm limits of repairs. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Equipment a. Use machine intended for cutting pavement. b. Milling machines may be used as long as straight edge is maintained. 2. Repairs: In true and straight lines to dimensions shown on the Drawings. 3. Utility Cuts a. In a true and straight line on both sides of the trench b. Minimum of 12 inches outside the trench walls c. If the existing flexible pavement is 2 feet or less between the lip of the existing gutter and the edge of the trench repair, remove the existing paving to such gutter. 4. Limit dust and residues from sawing from entering the atmosphere or drainage facilities. B. Removal 1. Use care to prevent fracturing existing pavement structure adjacent to the repair area. C. Base 1. Install replacement base material as specified in Drawings. D. Asphalt Paving 1. H.M.A.0 placement: in accordance with Section 32 12 16 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 320117-5 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 5 of 6 2. Type D surface mix 3. Depth: as specified in Drawings 4. Place surface mix in lifts not to exceed 3 inches. 5. Last or top lift shall not be less than 2 inches thick. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] DATE NAME 12/20/2012 D. Johnson END OF SECTION Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE 1.2.A — Modified Items to be included in price bid; Added blue text for clarification of repair width on utility trench repair; Added a bid item for utility service trench repair. CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 320117-6 PERMANENT ASPHALT PAVING REPAIR Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALL LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321123-1 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES SECTION 32 1123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 8 1. Foundation course for surface course or for other base course composed of flexible base constructed in one or more courses in conformity with the typical section. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification i . Neft-- Modified 1.2. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid Drice in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. Measure�le�t a. Measufement fiaf this item will be by the sqtiafe yafd of Fle*ible Base Getffse xvr- �Vaii•vas 1) Depths 2) Types 3) n ffi dations 2. Payment a. The work per-feEmed d 1 i 'ra f„mishe d ; eF chap,. ..,ith t'niz Itam and me-asufed as provided tmder- "M2av-,mx.v:9" -rail bzi pda f f at the unit pfiee bid per- s"af:e yaf:d of Flexible Base Gaufse. pzioe bid ah,-�l inalude-i- d ao wotlia,, f subgfa de- 'c. Furnizhingaf material �. Lt�xling 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. RAP - Recycled Asphalt Pavement. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321123-2 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 2 of 8 a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT): a. Tex- 104-E, Determining Liquid Limits of Soils b. Tex- 106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils c. Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils d. Tex- 110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils e. Tex- 116-E, Ball Mill Method for Determining the Disintegration of Flexible Base Material f. Tex-117-E, Triaxial Compression for Disturbed Soils and Base Materials g. Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate h. Tex-413-A, Determining Deleterious Material in Mineral Aggregate 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications. 2. Obtain materials from approved sources. 3. Notify City of changes to material sources. 4. The City may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction throughout the duration of the project to assure specification compliance. B. Aggregate 1. Furnish aggregate of the type and grade shown on the Drawings and conforming to the requirements of Table 1. 2. Each source must meet Table 1 requirements for liquid limit, plastiCity index, and wet ball mill for the grade specified. 3. Do not use additives such as but not limited to lime, cement, or fly ash to modify aggregates to meet the requirements of Table 1, unless shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1123 -3 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 3 of 8 Table l Material Requirements Property Test Method Grade 1 Grade 2 Master gradation sieve size (% retained) 2-1/2 in. — 0 1-3/4 in. 0 0-10 7/8 in Tex-110-E 10-35 — 3/8 in. 30-50 — No. 4 45-65 45-75 No. 40 70-85 60-85 Liquid limit, % max.' Tex-104-E 35 40 PlasfiCity index, max.' Tex-106-E 10 12 Wet ball mill, % max .2 40 45 Wet ball mill, % max. Tex- 116-E increase passing the 20 20 No. 40 sieve Classification' 1.0 1.1-2.3 Min. compressive strength', psi Tex- 117-E lateral pressure 0 psi 45 35 lateral pressure 15 psi 175 175 1. Determine plastic index in accordance with Tex-107-E (linear shrinkage) when liquid limit is unattainable as defined in Tex-104-E. 2. When a soundness value is required by the Drawings, test material in accordance with Tex-411-A. 3. Meet both the classification and the minimum compressive strength, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. Material Tolerances a. The City may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent gradation tests has an individual sieve outside the specified limits of the gradation. b. When target grading is required by the Drawings, no single failing test may exceed the master grading by more than 5 percentage points on sieves No. 4 and larger or 3 percentage points on sieves smaller than No. 4. c. The City may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent plasticity index tests is outside the specified limit. No single failing test may exceed the allowable limit by more than 2 points. 5. Material Types a. Do not use fillers or binders unless approved. b. Furnish the type specified on the Drawings in accordance with the following: 1) Type A a) Crushed stone produced and graded from oversize quarried aggregate that originates from a single, naturally occurring source. b) Do not use gravel or multiple sources. 2) Type B a) Only for use as base material for temporary pavement repairs. b) Do not exceed 20 percent RAP by weight unless shown on Drawings. 3) Type D a) Type A material or crushed concrete. b) Crushed concrete containing gravel will be considered Type D material. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321123-4 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 4 of 8 c) The City may require separate dedicated stockpiles in order to verify compliance. d) Crushed concrete must meet the following requirements: (1) Table 1 for the grade specified. (2) Recycled materials must be free from reinforcing steel and other objectionable material and have at most 1.5 percent deleterious material when tested in accordance with TEX-413-A. C. Water 1. Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. General 1. Shape the subgrade or existing base to conform to the typical sections shown on the Drawings or as directed. 2. When new base is required to be mixed with existing base: a. Deliver, place, and spread the new flexible base in the required amount. b. Manipulate and thoroughly mix the new base with existing material to provide a uniform mixture to the specified depth before shaping. B. Subgrade Compaction Proof roll the roadbed before pulverizing or scarifying in accordance with the following: a. Proof Rolling 1) City Project Representative must be on -site during proof rolling operations. 2) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that rut or pump. a) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single -axle water truck with a 1500 gallon capacity. 3) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass). 4) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width. 5) If an unstable or non -uniform area is found, correct the area. b. Correct 1) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch 2) Areas that are unstable or non -uniform 2. Installation of base material cannot proceed until compacted subgrade approved by the City. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Construct each layer uniformly, free of loose or segregated areas, and with the required density and moisture content. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1123 -5 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 5 of 8 2. Provide a smooth surface that conforms to the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the Drawings or as directed. 3. Haul approved flexible base in clean, covered trucks. B. Equipment 1. General a. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 2. Rollers a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed. b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the specified requirements. c. Alternate Equipment. 1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved, operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results. 2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified equipment if the desired results are not achieved. d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and quality requirements of the Contract are not met. C. Placing 1. Spread and shape flexible base into a uniform layer by approved means the same day as delivered unless otherwise approved. 2. Place material such that it is mixed to minimize segregation. 3. Construct layers to the thickness shown on the Drawings, while maintaining the shape of the course. 4. Where subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches in thickness, construct in 2 or more courses of equal thickness. 5. Minimum lift depth: 3 inches 6. Control dust by sprinkling. 7. Correct or replace segregated areas as directed. 8. Place successive base courses and finish courses using the same construction methods required for the first course. D. Compaction General a. Compact using density control unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. b. Multiple lifts are permitted when shown on the Drawings or approved. c. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed. When necessary, sprinkle the material to the extent necessary to provide not less than the required density. d. Compact the full depth of the subbase or base to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 2. Rolling a. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller unit. b. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321123-6 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 6 of 8 c. Offset alternate trips of the roller. d. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 mph as directed. e. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. £ Continue work until specification requirements are met. g. Proof roll the compacted flexible base in accordance with the following: 1) Proof Rolling a) City Project Representative must be on -site during proof rolling operations. b) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that rut or pump. (1) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single -axle water truck with a 1500 gallon capacity. c) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass). d) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width. e) If an unstable or non -uniform area is found, correct the area. 2) Correct a) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch. b) Areas that are unstable or non -uniform. 3. Tolerances a. Maintain the shape of the course by blading. b. Completed surface shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the Drawings to the established lines and grades. c. For subgrade beneath paving surfaces, correct any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross section in length greater than 16 feet measured longitudinally by loosening, adding or removing material. Reshape and recompact by sprinkling and rolling. d. Correct all fractures, settlement or segregation immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as required. Reshape and recompact by sprinkling and rolling. e. Should the subbase or base course, due to any reason, lose the required stability, density and finish before the surfacing is complete, it shall be recompacted at the sole expense of the Contractor. 4. Density Control a. Minimum Density: 95 percent compaction as determined by ASTM D698. b. Moisture content: minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. E. Finishing 1. After completing compaction, clip, skin, or tight -blade the surface with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately 1/4 inch. 2. Remove loosened material and dispose of it at an approved location. 3. Seal the clipped surface immediately by rolling with an appropriate size pneumatic tire roller until a smooth surface is attained. 4. Add small increments of water as needed during rolling. 5. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades as shown on the Drawings or as directed. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321123-7 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 7 of 8 6. In areas where surfacing is to be placed, correct grade deviations greater than 1/4 inch in 16 feet measured longitudinally or greater than 1/4 inch over the entire width of the cross-section. 7. Correct by loosening, adding, or removing material. 8. Reshape and recompact in accordance with 3A.C. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Density Test 1. City to measure density of flexible base course. a. Notify City Project Representative when flexible base ready for density testing. b. Spacing directed by City (1 per block minimum). c. City Project Representative determines location of density testing. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] DATE NAME END OF SECTION Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 321123-8 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSES Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-1 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES SECTION 32 1129 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 9 1. Treating subgrade, subbase and base courses by the pulverization, addition of lime, mixing and compacting the mix material to the required density. 2. Item applies to the natural ground, embankment, existing pavement; base or subbase courses placed and shall conform to the typical section, lines and grades shown on the Drawings. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Pone -Modified 1.2. Modified 2.2.E. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Seei.,on 3123 23 4. Section 32 1123 - Flexible Base Courses 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. 1)Measufemeat ferthis 14ovm1wl1 bzi ✓y th.Q Viz. (di-7y ei gl) fHy -ate Lime used to prepare sluffy at the job site. b. Paymen 1) '-% wofk per-fefmed and materials fumished in aeeoFda-nee with this item a -ad eastir-eEl asprovided underwill be Paid f .,t the unit pr-iee bid per- ton of Hydr-ated Lime. poi e b i d ah,-� l i r.Q lu 4&.- 1) Fumy-Ahixg the mmer-ial 2) All fteight kwolve 2.Commefolal L;Ana S! a. >` e n 1) Measurement fo th , TtaaffraVl l b o ✓y the w✓glkt; ac saleulated minirmim p aum-f m1tiplied by the weigh4 of the sitm:y in tons deli�vefed. b. -Paymei�t �!Tilsre5 er.�s�ye4!*r_�: ce!f e!*Esr_s�lE'f rs:�ee�!e�i!r.�: ee!�e�: ee!rsse�tes!es. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-2 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES e. The pr-iee bid shall ixeltide: 1) Fumm;dhing the material 2) All eightim,elPea �Sll unloading, ster-in . and handling 3—Qa�llixse a. loaf,"omo rt b-- Page 2 of 9 Almzury fie ix qu.,zf-y4o,-n dlalbe ffleastifed by the to (,1,.,.weight) of the Quieklime used to p,-zparo the b.Payment 1) The wok per-fefIed and ma4eria1s fumished in aeeer ee Vi ith thio Itnr: and mava:e red tmder- 4easufement" &K cc V-,.d for- at the r:t bid per- t Quieklime. o. ThQ pri8e bid ohnll irxaud&- T) FuwtiakKig the m 2)--A44--�vigkVix:elve 3) All ,,r anloadiiig, stela' , 1. T irm 'T roatn-.\zI3t AZaa�®l r�oa�+ nor tK.io Rl,c by the " o " .a f ",,,.f e area as wrt"l�liah- by the cc the ngaaxd *.a Woos fne e +fit: b. Pay*ie 1) The , ef4E pe -f ffne.l .,n.7 .v,.,to,-ials f„m is e.7 : aeear-danee „i*. t1xz item and l " e t" will b .l .,t the t �-aS}1-r e��r�aicTircm `v`r'nrve�z�icrzvr-cz�cric-cynic pr-iee bid per- square yar-d of Lime Treatment applied for-.! a) Var-iotts depths d z�1; im ale: 1) Preparing the f:ealbed 2)-Leescxmr» y/al m,ixbarc and the mixingwa4er 3) Mixin , ohaVns, 3pyinlding, eomp et:ag-, fm Dhing, vxing and m. intzinimg 01 xxxxpal.t.-i d 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Hydrated Lime: dry powdered material consisting of calcium hydroxide. 2. Commercial Lime Slurry: liquid mixture of hydrated lime solids and water delivered to a project in slurry form. 3. Quicklime: dry material consisting of calcium oxide furnished in either of two grades: a. Grade DS - grade of "pebble" quicklime suitable for use in the preparation of slurry for wet placing. b. Grade S - finely graded quicklime for use only in the preparation of slurry for wet placing. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-3 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 3 of 9 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) b. D6938, Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil -Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT): a. Tex- 101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-140-E, Measuring Thickness of Pavement Layer c. Tex-600-J, Sampling and Testing of Hydrated Lime, Quicklime and Commercial Lime Slurry 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTLAS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Truck Delivered Lime 1. Each truck ticket shall bear the weight of lime measured on certified scales. 2. Submit delivery tickets, certified by supplier, that include weight with each bulk delivery of lime to the site. 1.11 SITE CONDITIONS A. Start lime application only when the air temperature is at least 35°F and rising or is at least 40°F. Measure temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat. B. Suspend application when the City determines that weather conditions are unsuitable. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications. 2. Notify the City of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources. 3. Obtain verification from the City that the specification requirements are met before using the sources. 4. The City may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction. B. Lime 1. Hydrated Lime a. pumpable suspension of solids in water CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-4 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 4 of 9 b. solids portion of the mixture when considered as a basis of "solids content," shall consist of principally hydrated lime of a quality and fineness sufficient to meet the chemical and physical requirements. 2. Dry Lime: Do not use unless approved by City. 3. Quicklime a. Use quicklime only when specified by the City. b. dry material consisting of essentially calcium oxide. c. Furnished in either of two grades: 1) Grade DS 2) Grade S 4. Furnish lime that meets the following requirements a. Chemical Requirements Total "active" lime content, percent by weight Unhydrated lime content, percent by weight CaO "Free Water" content, percent by weight water Table 2 Lime Chemical Requirements Hydrated Commercial Lime Quicklime Lime Slurry 90.0 Min 87.0 Min 5.0 Max 5.0 Max b. Physical Requirements Table 3 Lime Physical Requirements Hydrated Commercial Lime Lime Slurry Wet Sieve Requirement, As percentage by Weight Residue: 87.0 Min Quicklime Retained on No. 6 sieve 0.2 Max 0.2 Max 8.0 Max' Retained on No. 30 sieve 4.0 Max 4.0 Max Dry Sieve Requirement, As percentage by Weight Residue: Retained on a 1-in sieve 0.0 Retained on a 3/4 —in sieve 10.0 Max Retained on a No. 100 Grade Ds — 80 Min sieve Grade S — no limits Retained on a No. 6 sieve 0.2 Max 0.2 Max 8.0 Max' 1 The amount total "active" lime content, as CaO, in the material retained on tae No. 6 sieve must not exceed 2.0% by weight of the original quicklime. c. Slurry Grades Table 4 Lime Slurry Grades Minimum Dry Solids Contents by Percentage of the Slurry CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-5 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 5 of 9 Grade 1 31 Grade 2 35 Grade 3 46 C. Flexible Base Courses: Furnish base material that meets the requirements of Section 32 1123, for the type and grade shown on the Drawings, before the addition of lime. D. Water: Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable material. E. Beffewiwee Seetion P1 23 23. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] URM973717'%001►I A. Shape the subgrade or existing base to conform to the typical sections shown on the Drawings or as directed. kK1=1► 3 II1 q I/r 1 [0eI A. General 1. Produce a completed course of treated material containing: a. uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas. b. uniform density and moisture content. c. well bound for full depth. d. with smooth surface and suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. Maximum layer depth of lime treatment in single layer: 8 inches. 3. For treated subgrade exceeding 8 inches deep, pulverize, apply lime, mix, compact and finish in equal layers not exceeding 5 inches deep. B. Equipment 1. General: Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 2. Rollers a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed. b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the specified requirements. c. Alternate Equipment 1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved, operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results. 2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified equipment if the desired results are not achieved. d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and quality requirements of the Contract are not met. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-6 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 6 of 9 3. Storage Facility a. Store quicklime and dry hydrated lime in closed, weatherproof containers. 4. Slurry Equipment a. Use slurry tanks equipped with agitation devices to slurry hydrated lime or quicklime on the project or other approved location. b. The City may approve other slurrying methods. c. Provide a pump for agitating the slurry when the distributor truck is not equipped with an agitator. 5. Pulverization Equipment a. Provide pulverization equipment that: 1) Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut 2) Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times, and uniformly mixes the materials C. Pulverization 1. Pulverize or scarify existing material after shaping so that 100 percent passes a 2 1/2 inch sieve. 2. If the material cannot be uniformly processed to the required depth in a single pass, excavate and windrow the material to expose a secondary grade to achieve processing to depth as shown in the Drawings. D. Application of Lime 1. Uniformly apply lime as shown on the Drawings or as directed. 2. Add lime at the percentage specified in Drawings. 3. Apply lime only on an area where mixing can be completed during the same working day. 4. Minimize dust and scattering of lime by wind. Do not apply lime when wind conditions, in the opinion of the City, cause blowing lime to become dangerous to traffic or objectionable to adjacent property owners. 5. Slurry Placement a. Hydrated Lime 1) Mix Lime with water and apply slurry 2) Apply Type B, commercial lime slurry, with a lime percentage not less applicable for grade used 3) Distribute lime at the rate shown on the Drawings 4) Make successive passes over a measured surface of roadway until the proper moisture and lime content have been achieved. b. Quicklime 1) Spread the residue for the Quicklime slurrying procedure uniformly over the length of the roadway. 2) Residue is primarily inert material with little stabilizing value; however, may contain a small amount of Quicklime particles that slake slowly. A concentration of these particles could cause the compacted stabilized material to swell during slaking. E. Mixing 1. Begin mixing within 6 hours of application of lime. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-7 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 7 of 9 2. Hydrated lime exposed to the open air for 6 hours or more between application and mixing, or that experiences excessive loss due to washing or blowing, will not be accepted for payment. 3. Thoroughly mix the material and lime using approved equipment. 4. Mix until a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods and lumps. 5. Do not mix greater than 1 inch deeper than the stabilization depth specified. 6. Materials containing plastic clay or other materials that are not readily mixed with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and sealed with a pneumatic roller. 7. Allow the mixture to cure for 72 hours or as directed by City. 8. When pebble grade quicklime is used, allow the mixture to cure for 2 to 4 days. 9. Sprinkle the treated materials during the mixing and curing operation to achieve adequate hydration and proper moisture content. 10. After curing, resume mixing until a homogeneous, friable mixture is obtained. 11. After mixing, City will sample the mixture at roadway moisture and test in accordance with Tex- 101-E, Part III, to determine compliance with the gradation requirements in Table 5. Table 5 Gradation Requirements (Minimum % Passing) Sieve Size Base 1-3/4 in. 100 3/4 in. 85 No.4 60 F. Compaction 1. General a. Begin compaction immediately after final mixing. b. Aerate and sprinkle as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. c. Multiple lifts are permitted when shown on the Drawings or approved. d. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed. 2. Rolling a. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width of the roller unit. b. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. c. Offset alternate trips of the roller. d. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH or as directed. e. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 1) Continue work until specification requirements are met. 2) Rework in accordance with Maintenance item of this Section. f. Proof roll the lime treated base course in accordance with the following: 1) Proof Rolling a) City Project Representative must be on -site during proof rolling operations. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-8 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 8 of 9 b) Use equipment that will apply sufficient load to identify soft spots that rut or pump. (1) Acceptable equipment includes fully loaded single -axle water truck with a 1500 gallon capacity. c) Make at least 2 passes with the proof roller (down and back = 1 pass). d) Offset each trip by at most 1 tire width. e) If an unstable or non -uniform area is found, correct the area. 2) Correct a) Soft spots that rut or pump greater than 3/4 inch. b) Areas that are unstable or non -uniform. 3. Density Control a. Compact until the entire depth of the mixture has achieved a uniform density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. b. Moisture content: minus 2 to plus 4 optimum. G. Maintenance 1. Maintain the completed soil lime base in good condition, satisfactory to the City as to grade, crown and cross section until the overlaying or next course is constructed. 2. Keep surface of the compacted course moist until covered by other base or pavement. 3. Reworking a Section a. When a section is reworked within 72 hours after completion of compaction, rework the section to provide the required density. b. When a section is reworked more than 72 hours after completion of compaction, add additional lime at 25 percent of the percentage specified. c. Reworking includes loosening, adding material or removing unacceptable material if necessary, mixing as directed, compacting, and finishing. H. Finishing 1. After completing compaction of the final course, clip, skin, or tight -blade the surface of the lime -treated material with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately 1/4 inch. 2. Remove loosened material and dispose of at an approved location. 3. Roll the clipped surface immediately with a pneumatic tire roller until a smooth surface is attained. 4. Add small amounts of water as needed during rolling. 5. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades shown on the Drawings or as directed. I. Curing 1. Cure for the minimum number of days shown in Table 6 and by finished pavement type: a. Concrete pavement 1) Sprinkle with water 2) Maintain moisture during curing 3) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing except as required for sprinkling. b. Asphalt Pavement 1) Apply an asphalt material at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallon per square yard. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321129-9 LIME TREATED BASE COURSES Page 9 of 9 2) Do not allow equipment on the finished course during curing. Table 6 Minimum Curing Requirements Before Placing Subsequent Courses' Untreated Material Curing (Days) PI<_35 2 PI > 35 5 1. Subject to the approval of the City. Proof rolling may be required as an indicator of adequate curing. 2. Begin paving operations or add courses within 14 calendar days of final compaction. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Density Test 1. City Project Representative must be on site during density testing 2. City to measure density of lime treated base course in accordance with ASTM D6938. 3. Spacing directed by City (1 per block minimum). 4. City Project Representative determines density testing locations. B. Depth Test 1. In -place depth will be evaluated for each 500-foot roadway section 2. Determine in accordance with Tex- 140-E in hand excavated holes. 3. For each 500-foot section, 3 phenolphthalein tests will be performed. 4. City Project Representative determines depth testing locations. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] DATE NAME END OF SECTION Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 321216-1 ASPHALT PAVING Pagel of 25 1. Constructing a pavement layer composed of a compacted, dense -graded mixture of aggregate and asphalt binder for surface or base courses B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. P_,�on,,�;-Modified 1.2. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 32 01 17 - Permanent Asphalt Paving Repair IRM97[yW.111►177\'/UIDIe1r9 ZITI10110:1]W A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. Asphalt Paveme a7:��xr�i2n�i2t a-.-n Shall bo Ivi, a) Thieknesses b) Types b. P-aymei}t 1) Thewer4per-feEmed d rmtni.�L fi ff ishe l ; efdanee ••°ith tl z item a -ad measured aspf:ovided t i de will be paid f at the , it obid « bid zlx-.\klimes 1) Slx�mg and fine gr-adifig the plaeemet# area- 2) Fumy-Ahixg leading, unloading, stof:; ,b, haling and Sling d1=�* is ineluding freight and royalty 4) Asphalt, aggregate, and additive STMatork b and work needed fee: , eetiye aetio 6) Triml t tehes 7) "cm. ova) ar d or sweeping eyrCes matefig 2. 14.T�zC. T21anniVzom a. T e .ft 1) >` e ent for- this lteiR 0ball be by the ton of eemposite Hot Mix Asphalt feqiiir-ed for- H.M.A.C. TrL\njitieir. b. Payfnelft CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-2 ASPHALT PAVING Page 2 of 25 The work per-fefmed and materials ftimishod in aocar- da-nee with t is item and measured as provided under"Me&Surezir „+" will be paid for- at the unit e. The price bid ", 1 ink 1) £"1iaping and fine grading the ,-,.,,,abe 2) Fum�chin^ loading, unloading, storing, lbwlixg a -ad handling all materials ineltiding freight and royalty 3) Traffic control for all testing 4) Asphalt, aggregate ,,a additive J 'Y�al bata1No 7) Tack coat 3. Asphalt Base Course a. 1-XmXrCr 2Rk 4A1aar., oW for th�o Ii b2 by the squafe yafd of Asphalt Base c,,.ufse completed and . pte ; ;ts fi»1 pwitionfer: a) Various b) V -iot s types b.Payment 1) Tlv. ,,wed ark mate -ials f;,.., ishea ; accordance with this and m^\—v-ar. " will be paid for- at the tinit price bid per- sEraar-e yar-d of Asphalt Base Coufse. o. ThQ pri8e bid ohall irxaude-.- ?) Sk-a-ping and fine gr-ading the roadbed 2) Fur dk6mg, ?oadiigs I.&loadiafig haukka ? aterials including freight and r-oya4ty 3) Traffic eentro4bndl Laing J --" mq bathes 7) Tack coat 8) Removal and/or- sweeping excess inaterial 1) Measuremeatfef: this 14ommlml1 bo by the ton of 14 M. A .G. completed a* accepted in roktierr. b. Paymen 1) -,YME per-fofmed a -ad ma4er-ials ftimished in accordance with this item a d fro- ded � " r nt» 11 be p t and �reasttrex}� t- the pfiee bid per- ton of HACA-& e. The price bid cIV 1 in k 2) BuNmiakim , leading, tinleading, storing hauling and handling all mater-iahi including fr-eiglit a -ad royalty 3) Tft ffie eontro'er all testing Asphalt, > atc��a1G�.�«r d work needed for- , eetive action ) TrV. bates 7) Tack coat CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-3 ASPHALT PAVING Page 3 of 25 5. u M n r Speed Gush e a. T e n 1) Measurement for this Izu- s ohall bcv-:Tea h HSpeed Cushion installed. b. Paymen line work per -formed and materials fumished in aEee ee vi ith thin Itom. and mcmv-ired as provided tinder- " =easure t" &k' ce V-'.1 f ,..,, the , r:� priee bid per- eaeh14.M.A.G. Speed Cushion irzMd- lod- and aeeepted in its final position . Vice bid ohall inaltidei 1) F,,I�mrxxg and fine gr-ading the roadbed 2) FuITi dl11in^ loading, unloading, storing 1,,,,,ling and handling all materials Asphalt,ineluding freight and royalty 1 additive tatliali and—,,.,-v needed for , e etive a etio 6) Taal batches 8) Removal m&er- sweepiteFial "RIKIJ-01y04�BI.cyOky A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 1. RAP (reclaimed asphalt pavement) 2. SAC (surface aggregate classification) 3. BRSQC (Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog) 4. AQMP (Aggregate Quality Monitoring Program) 5. H.M.A.C. (Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete) 6. WMA (Warm Mix Asphalt) B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (MIST) a. Handbook 44 - 2007 Edition: Specifications, Tolerances, and Other Technical Requirements for Weighing and Measuring Devices 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM D6084 - 06 Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous Materials by Ductilometer 4. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials a. MP2 Standard Specification for Superpave Volumetric Mix Design b. PP28 Standard Practice for Superpave Volumetric Design for Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) c. T 201, Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens) d. T 202 Standard Method of Test for Viscosity of Asphalts by Vacuum Capillary Viscometer CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-4 ASPHALT PAVING Page 4 of 25 e. T 316 Standard Method of Test for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt Binder Using Rotational Viscometer f. TP 1-93 Test Method for Determining the Flexural Creep Stiffness of Asphalt Binder Using the Bending Beam Rheometer (BBR) Texas Department of Transportation a. Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog (BRSQC) b. TEX 100-E, Surveying and Sampling Soils for Highways c. Tex 106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils d. Tex 107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils e. Tex 200-F, Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates f. Tex 203-F, Sand Equivalent Test g. Tex-204-F, Design of Bituminous Mixtures h. Tex-207-F, Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures i. Tex 217-17, Determining Deleterious Material and Decantation Test for Coarse Aggregates j. Tex-226-F, Indirect Tensile Strength Test k. Tex-227-F, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures 1. Tex-243-F, Tack Coat Adhesion m. Tex-244-F, Thermal profile of Hot Mix Asphalt n. Tex 280-F, Determination of Flat and Elongated Particles o. Tex 406-A, Material Finer Than 75 µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates) p. Tex 408-A, Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete q. Tex 410-A, Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate using the Los Angeles Machine r. Tex 411-A, Soundness of Aggregate by Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium s. Tex 460-A, Determining Crushed Face Particle Count t. Tex 461-A, Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Micro-Deval Abrasion u. Sulfate v. Tex-530-C, Effect of Water on Bituminous Paving Mixtures w. Tex-540-C, Measurement of Polymer Separation on Heating in Modified Asphalt Systems x. Tex-541-C, Rolling Thin Film Oven Test for Asphalt Binders y. Tex-920-K, Verifying the Accuracy of Drum Mix Plant Belt Scales z. Tex-921-K, Verifying the Accuracy of Hot Mix Plant Asphalt Meters aa. Tex 923-K, Verifying the Accuracy of Liquid Additive Metering Systems 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Asphalt Paving Mix Design: Submit for approval. See 2.2.13.1. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-5 ASPHALT PAVING Page 5 of 25 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions 1. Place mixture when the roadway surface temperature is equal to or higher than the temperatures listed in Table 1. Table 1 Minimi m Pavement Surface Temperatures Minimum Pavement Surface Temperatures in Degrees Fahrenheit Originally Specified High Subsurface Layers or Surface Layers Placed in Temperature Binder Night Paving Operations Daylight Operations Grade PG64 or lower 45 50 PG 70 551 60' PG 76 or higher 601 60' 'Contractors may pave at temperatures 10°F lower than the values shown in Table 1 when utilizing a paving process including WMA or equipment that eliminates thermal segregation. In such cases, the contractor must use either a hand held thermal camera or a hand held infrared thermometer operated in accordance with Tex-244-17 to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the City that the uncompacted mat has no more than 10' F of thermal segregation. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, place mixtures only when weather conditions and moisture conditions of the roadway surface are suitable in the opinion of the City. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications. 2. Notify the City of all material sources. 3. Notify the City before changing any material source or formulation. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-6 ASPHALT PAVING Page 6 of 25 4. When the Contractor makes a source or formulation change, the City will verify that the requirements of this specification are met and may require a new laboratory mixture design, trial batch, or both. 5. The City may sample and test project materials at any time during the project to verify compliance. 6. The depth of the compacted lift should be at least 2 times the nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Aggregate 1. General a. Furnish aggregates from sources that conform to the requirements shown in Table 1, and as specified in this Section, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. b. Provide aggregate stockpiles that meet the definition in this Section for either coarse aggregate or fine aggregate. c. When reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) is allowed by Drawing note, provide RAP stockpiles in accordance with this Section. d. Aggregate from RAP is not required to meet Table 2 requirements unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. e. Supply mechanically crushed gravel or stone aggregates that meet the definitions in Tex 100 E. f. Samples must be from materials produced for the project. g. The City will establish the surface aggregate classification (SAC) and perform Los Angeles abrasion, magnesium sulfate soundness, and Micro-Deval tests. h. Perform all other aggregate quality tests listed in Table 2. i. Document all test results on the mixture design report. j. The City may perform tests on independent or split samples to verify Contractor test results. k. Stockpile aggregates for each source and type separately and designate for the City. 1. Determine aggregate gradations for mixture design and production testing based on the washed sieve analysis given in Tex 200 F, Part II. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-7 ASPHALT PAVING Page 7 of 25 Table 2 Aggregate Quality Requirements Property I Test Method Requirement Coarse Aggregate SAC AQMP As shown on Drawings Deleterious material, percent, max Tex-217-F, Part I 1.5 Decantation, percent, max Tex-217-F, Part II 1.5 Micro-Deval abrasion, percent, max Tex-461-A Note 1 Los Angeles abrasion, percent, max Tex-410-A 40 Magnesium sulfate soundness, 5 cycles, percent, max Tex-411-A 302 Coarse aggregate angularity, 2 crushed faces, Tex 460-A, Part I 3 85 percent, min Flat and elongated particles (&, 5: 1, percent, max Tex-280-F 10 Fine Aggregate Linear shrinkage, percent, max I Tex- 107-E 3 Combined Aggre ate Sand equivalent, percent, min Tex-203-F 45 1. Not used for acceptance purposes. Used by the City as an indicator of the need for further investigation. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Only applies to crushed gravel. m. Coarse Aggregate 1) Coarse aggregate stockpiles must have no more than 20 percent material passing the No. 8 sieve. 2) Maximum aggregate size should not be over half of the proposed lift depth to prevent particle on particle contact issues. 3) Provide aggregates from sources listed in the BRSQC. 4) Provide aggregate from unlisted sources only when tested by the City and/or approved before use. 5) Allow 30 calendar days for the City to sample, test, and report results for unlisted sources. 6) Class B aggregate meeting all other requirements in Table 2 may be blended with a Class A aggregate in order to meet requirements for Class A materials. 7) When blending Class A and B aggregates to meet a Class A requirement, ensure that at least 50 percent by weight of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve comes from the Class A aggregate source. 8) Blend by volume if the bulk specific gravities of the Class A and B aggregates differ by more than 0.300. 9) When blending, do not use Class C or D aggregates. 10) For blending purposes, coarse aggregate from RAP will be considered as Class B aggregate. 11) Provide coarse aggregate with at least the minimum SAC shown on the Drawings. 12) SAC requirements apply only to aggregates used on the surface of travel lanes, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. n. RAP is salvaged, milled, pulverized, broken, or crushed asphalt pavement. 1) No RAP permitted for TYPE D H.M.A.C. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-8 ASPHALT PAVING Page 8 of 25 2) Use no more than 20 percent RAP on TYPE B H.M.A.C. unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3) Crush or break RAP so that 100 percent of the particles pass the 2 inch sieve. 4) RAP from either Contractor or City, including RAP generated during the project, is permitted only when shown on the Drawings. 5) City -owned RAP, if allowed for use, will be available at the location shown on the Drawings. 6) When RAP is used, determine asphalt content and gradation for mixture design purposes. 7) Perform other tests on RAP when shown on the Drawings. 8) When RAP is allowed by plan note, use no more than 30 percent RAP in Type A or B mixtures unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 9) Do not use RAP contaminated with dirt or other objectionable materials. 10) Do not use the RAP if the decantation value exceeds 5 percent and the plasticity index is greater than 8. 11) Test the stockpiled RAP for decantation in accordance with the laboratory method given in Tex-406-A, Part I. 12) Determine the plasticity index using Tex- 106-E if the decantation value exceeds 5 percent. 13) The decantation and plasticity index requirements do not apply to RAP samples with asphalt removed by extraction. 14) Do not intermingle Contractor -owned RAP stockpiles with City -owned RAP stockpiles. 15) Remove unused Contractor -owned RAP material from the project site upon completion of the project. 16) Return unused City -owned RAP to the designated stockpile location. Fine Aggregate 1) Fine aggregates consist of manufactured sands, screenings, and field sands. 2) Fine aggregate stockpiles must meet the gradation requirements in Table 3. 3) Supply fine aggregates that are free from organic impurities. 4) The City may test the fine aggregate in accordance with Tex-408-A to verify the material is free from organic impurities. 5) At most 15 percent of the total aggregate may be field sand or other uncrushed fine aggregate. 6) With the exception of field sand, use fine aggregate from coarse aggregate sources that meet the requirements shown in Table 2, unless otherwise approved. 7) If 10 percent or more of the stockpile is retained on the No. 4 sieve, test the stockpile and verify that it meets the requirements in Table 1 for coarse aggregate angularity (Tex-460-A) and flat and elongated particles (Tex-280-F). CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-9 ASPHALT PAVING Page 9 of 25 Table 3 Gradation Requirements for Fine A percent Passing by Weight or Sieve Size Volume 3/8" 100 #8 70-100 #200 0-30 2. Mineral Filler a. Mineral filler consists of finely divided mineral matter such as agricultural lime, crusher fines, hydrated lime, cement, or fly ash. b. Mineral filler is allowed unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. c. Do not use more than 2 percent hydrated lime or cement, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. The Drawings may require or disallow specific mineral fillers. When used, provide mineral filler that: 1) Is sufficiently dry, free -flowing, and free from clumps and foreign matter; 2) Does not exceed 3 percent linear shrinkage when tested in accordance with Tex- 107-E; and meets the gradation requirements in Table 4. Table 4 Gradation Requirements for Mineral Filler percent Passing by Weight or Sieve Size Volume #8 100 #200 55-100 3. Baghouse Fines a. Fines collected by the baghouse or other dust -collecting equipment may be reintroduced into the mixing drum 4. Asphalt Binder a. Furnish the type and grade of performance -graded (PG) asphalt binder specified as follows: 1) Performance -Graded Binders (PG Binders) a) Must be smooth and homogeneous b) Show no separation when tested in accordance with Tex-540-C c) Meet Table 5 requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 Property and Test Method Average 7-day max pavement design temperature, °C' Min pavement design temperature, °C' Flash point, T 48, Min, °C Viscosity, T 316:2, 3 Max, 3.0 Paxs, test temperature, °C Dynamic shear, T 315:4 G*/sin(d), Min, 1.00 kPa Test temperature @ 10 rad/sec., °C Elastic recovery, D 6084, 50°F, percent Min Mass loss, Tex-541-C, Max, percent Dynamic shear, T 315: G*/sin(d), Min, 2.20 kPa Test temperature @ 10 rad/sec., °C 32 12 16 - 10 ASPHALT PAVING Page 10 of 25 Table 5 Performance -Graded Binders Performance Grade PG 58 PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 PG 82 -22 I -28 I -34 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 -16 I -22 I -28 <58 <64 <70 <76 <82 > I > I > > I > I > I > > I > I > I > > I > > I > > I > I > 22 28 34 16 22 28 34 16 22 28 34 16 22 I 28 34 16 22 28 ORIGINAL BINDER 58 64 230 135 70 76 82 — 30 - I - 1 30 1 50 - 1 30 1 50 1 60 30 1 50 1 60 1 70 50 1 60 1 70 ROLLING THIN-FILM OVEN (Tex-541-C) 1 58 64 70 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 76 82 321216-11 ASPHALT PAVING Page 11 of 25 Table 5 (continued) Performance -Graded Binders Performance Grade PG 58 PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 PG 82 Property and Test Method -22 I -28 I -34 1 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 1 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 1 -16 I -22 I -28 I -34 1 -16 I -22 I -28 PRESSURE AGING VESSEL (PAV) RESIDUE (R 28) PAV aging temperature, °C 100 Dynamic shear, T 315: 25 22 19 28 25 22 19 28 25 22 19 28 25 22 19 28 25 22 G*/sin(d), Max, 5000 kPa Test temperature @ 10 rad/sec., °C Creep stiffness, T 313:5,6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 S, max, 300 MPa, m-value, min, 0.300 Test temperature (, 60 sec., °C Direct tension, T 314:6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 -24 -6 -12 -18 Failure strain, min, 1.0 percent Test temperature @ 1.0 mm/min., °C 1. Pavement temperatures are estimated from air temperatures using an algorithm contained in a Department -supplied computer program, may be provided by the Department, or by following the procedures outlined in AASHTO MP 2 and PP 28. 2. This requirement may be waived at the Department's discretion if the supplier warrants that the asphalt binder can be adequately pumped, mixed, and compacted at temperatures that meet all applicable safety, environmental, and constructability requirements. At test temperatures where the binder is a Newtonian fluid, any suitable standard means of viscosity measurement may be used, including capillary (T 201 or T 202) or rotational viscometry (T 316). 3. Viscosity at 135°C is an indicator of mixing and compaction temperatures that can be expected in the lab and field. High values may indicate high mixing and compaction temperatures. Additionally, significant variation can occur from batch to batch. Contractors should be aware that variation could significantly impact their mixing and compaction operations. Contractors are therefore responsible for addressing any constructability issues that may arise. 4. For quality control of unmodified asphalt binder production, measurement of the viscosity of the original asphalt binder may be substituted for dynamic shear measurements of G*/sin(d) at test temperatures where the asphalt is a Newtonian fluid. Any suitable standard means of viscosity measurement may be used, including capillary (T 201 or T 202) or rotational viscometry (T 316). 5. Silicone beam molds, as described in AASHTO TP 1-93, are acceptable for use. 6. If creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, direct tension test is not required. If creep stiffness is between 300 and 600 MPa, the direct tension failure strain requirement can be used instead of the creep stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be satisfied in both cases. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 12 ASPHALT PAVING Page 12 of 25 b. Separation testing is not required if: 1) A modifier is introduced separately at the mix plant either by injection in the asphalt line or mixer, 2) The binder is blended on site in continuously agitated tanks, or binder acceptance is based on field samples taken from an in -line sampling port at the hot mix plant after the addition of modifiers. 5. Tack Coat a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved, furnish CSS-lH, SS-lH, or a PG binder with a minimum high -temperature grade of PG 58 for tack coat binder in accordance with Section 2.2.A.5. 6. Additives a. General 1) When shown on the Drawings, use the type and rate of additive specified. 2) Other additives that facilitate mixing or improve the quality of the mixture may be allowed when approved. b. Liquid Antistripping Agent 1) Furnish and incorporate all required asphalt antistripping agents in asphalt concrete paving mixtures and asphalt -stabilized base mixtures to meet moisture resistance testing requirements. 2) Provide a liquid antistripping agent that is uniform and shows no evidence of crystallization, settling, or separation. 3) Ensure that all liquid antistripping agents arrive in: a) Properly labeled and unopened containers, as shipped from the manufacturer, or b) Sealed tank trucks with an invoice to show contents and quantities c) Provide product information to the City including: (1) Material safety data sheet (2) Specific gravity of the agent at the manufacturer's recommended addition temperature, (3) Manufacturer's recommended dosage range, and (4) Handling and storage instructions 4) Addition of lime or a liquid antistripping agent at the Mix Plant, incorporate into the binder as follows: a) Handle in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b) Add at the manufacturer's recommended addition temperature. c) Add into the asphalt line by means of an in -line -metering device. c. Liquid Asphalt Additive Meters 1) Provide a means to check the accuracy of meter output for asphalt primer, fluxing material, and liquid additives. 2) Furnish a meter that reads in increments of 0.1 gal. or less. 3) Verify accuracy of the meter in accordance with Tex-923-K. 4) Ensure the accuracy of the meter within 5.0 percent. 7. Mixes a. Design Requirements 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, use the typical weight design example given in Tex-204-F, Part I, to design a mixture meeting the requirements listed in Tables 2 through 8. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-13 ASPHALT PAVING Page 13 of 25 2) Furnish the City with representative samples of all materials used in the mixture design. 3) The City will verify the mixture design. 4) If the design cannot be verified by the City, furnish another mixture design. Table 6 Master Gradation Bands ( percent Passing by Weight or Volume) and Volumetric Properties Sieve B C D Size Fine Coarse Fine Base Surface Surface 1-1/2" — — — 1" 98.0-100.0 — — 3/4" 84.0-98.0 95.0-100.0 — 1/2" — — 98.0-100.0 3/8" 60.0-80.0 70.0-85.0 85.0-100.0 #4 40.0-60.0 43.0-63.0 50.0-70.0 #8 29.0-43.0 32.0-44.0 35.0-46.0 #30 13.0-28.0 14.0-28.0 15.0-29.0 #50 6.0-20.0 7.0-21.0 7.0-20.0 #200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 Design VMA', percent Minimum — 13.0 1 14.0 15.0 Plant -Produced VMA, percent Minimum — 12.0 13.0 14.0 1. Voids in Mineral Aggregates. Table 7 Laboratory Mixture Design Properties Property Test Requirement Method Target laboratory -molded density, percent Tex-207-17 96.01 Tensile strength (dry), psi (molded to 93 Tex-226-17 85-2002 percent f 1 percent density) Boil test' Tex-530-C — 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. May exceed 200 psi when approved and may be waived when approved. 3. Used to establish baseline for comparison to production results. May be waived when approved. 8. Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) a. WMA is defined as additives or processes that allow a reduction in the temperature at which asphalt mixtures are produced and placed. b. WMA is allowed for use at the Contractor's option unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. c. Produce an asphalt mixture within the temperature range of 215 degrees F and 275 degrees F. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 14 ASPHALT PAVING Page 14 of 25 d. When WMA is not required by Drawings, produce an asphalt mixture within the temperature range of 215 degrees F and 275 degrees F. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Hauling Operations 1. Before use, clean all truck beds to ensure mixture is not contaminated. 2. When a release agent is necessary to coat truck beds, use a release agent approved by the City. 3. Petroleum based products, such as diesel fuel, should not be used. 4. If wind, rain, temperature or haul distance impacts cooling, insulate truck beds or cover the truck bed with tarpaulin. 5. If haul time in project is to be greater than 30 minutes, insulate truck beds or cover the truck bed with tarpaulin. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Equipment 1. General a. Provide required or necessary equipment to produce, haul, place, compact, and core asphalt concrete pavement. b. Ensure weighing and measuring equipment complies with specification. c. Synchronize equipment to produce a mixture meeting the required proportions. 2. Production Equipment a. Provide: 1) Drum -mix type, weigh -batch, or modified weigh -batch mixing plants that ensure a uniform, continuous production 2) Automatic proportioning and measuring devices with interlock cut-off circuits that stop operations if the control system malfunctions 3) Visible readouts indicating the weight or volume of asphalt and aggregate proportions 4) Safe and accurate means to take required samples by inspection forces 5) Permanent means to check the output of metering devices and to perform calibration and weight checks 6) Additive -feed systems to ensure a uniform, continuous material flow in the desired proportion 3. Weighing and Measuring Equipment a. General 1) Provide weighing and measuring equipment for materials measured or proportioned by weight or volume. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-15 ASPHALT PAVING Page 15 of 25 2) Provide certified scales, scale installations, and measuring equipment meeting the requirements of NIST Handbook 44, except that the required accuracy must be 0.4 percent of the material being weighed or measured. 3) Furnish leak -free weighing containers large enough to hold a complete batch of the material being measured. b. Truck Scales 1) Furnish platform truck scales capable of weighing the entire truck or truck — trailer combination in a single draft. c. Aggregate Batching Scales 1) Equip scales used for weighing aggregate with a quick adjustment at zero that provides for any change in tare. 2) Provide a visual means that indicates the required weight for each aggregate. d. Suspended Hopper 1) Provide a means for the addition or the removal of small amounts of material to adjust the quantity to the exact weight per batch. 2) Ensure the scale equipment is level. e. Belt Scales 1) Use belt scales for proportioning aggregate that are accurate to within 1.0 percent based on the average of 3 test runs, where no individual test run exceeds 2.0 percent when checked in accordance with Tex-920-K. f. Asphalt Material Meter 1) Provide an asphalt material meter with an automatic digital display of the volume or weight of asphalt material. 2) Verify the accuracy of the meter in accordance with Tex-921-K. 3) When using the asphalt meter for payment purposes, ensure the accuracy of the meter is within 0.4 percent. 4) When used to measure component materials only and not for payment, ensure the accuracy of the meter is within 1.0 percent. g. Liquid Asphalt Additive Meters 1) Provide a means to check the accuracy of meter output for asphalt primer, fluxing material, and liquid additives. 2) Furnish a meter that reads in increments of 0.1 gallon or less. 3) Verify accuracy of the meter in accordance with Tex-923-K. 4) Ensure the accuracy of the meter within 5.0 percent. 4. Drum -Mix Plants. Provide a mixing plant that complies with the requirements below. a. Aggregate Feed System 1) Provide: a) A minimum of 1 cold aggregate bin for each stockpile of individual materials used to produce the mix b) Bins designed to prevent overflow of material c) Scalping screens or other approved methods to remove any oversized material, roots, or other objectionable materials d) A feed system to ensure a uniform, continuous material flow in the desired proportion to the dryer e) An integrated means for moisture compensation f) Belt scales, weigh box, or other approved devices to measure the weight of the combined aggregate CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-16 ASPHALT PAVING Page 16 of 25 g) Cold aggregate bin flow indicators that automatically signal interrupted material flow b. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Feed System 1) Provide a separate system to weigh and feed RAP into the hot mix plant. c. Mineral Filler Feed System 1) Provide a closed system for mineral filler that maintains a constant supply with minimal loss of material through the exhaust system. 2) Interlock the measuring device into the automatic plant controls to automatically adjust the supply of mineral filler to plant production and provide a consistent percentage to the mixture. d. Heating, Drying, and Mixing Systems 1) Provide: a) A dryer or mixing system to agitate the aggregate during heating b) A heating system that controls the temperature during production to prevent aggregate and asphalt binder damage c) A heating system that completely burns fuel and leaves no residue d) A recording thermometer that continuously measures and records the mixture discharge temperature e) Dust collection system to collect excess dust escaping from the drum. e. Asphalt Binder Equipment 1) Supply equipment to heat binder to the required temperature. 2) Equip the heating apparatus with a continuously recording thermometer located at the highest temperature point. 3) Produce a 24-hour chart of the recorded temperature. 4) Place a device with automatic temperature compensation that accurately meters the binder in the line leading to the mixer. 5) Furnish a sampling port on the line between the storage tank and mixer. Supply an additional sampling port between any additive blending device and mixer. f. Mixture Storage and Discharge 1) Provide a surge -storage system to minimize interruptions during operations unless otherwise approved. 2) Furnish a gob hopper or other device to minimize segregation in the bin. 3) Provide an automated system that weighs the mixture upon discharge and produces a ticket showing: a) Date b) Project identification number c) Plant identification d) Mix identification e) Vehicle identification f) Total weight of the load g) Tare weight of the vehicle h) Weight of mixture in each load i) Load number or sequential ticket number for the day g. Truck Scales 1) Provide standard platform scales at an approved location. 5. Weigh -Batch Plants. Provide a mixing plant that complies with Section 2.2.B.4 "Drum -Mix Plants," except as required below: a. Screening and Proportioning CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-17 ASPHALT PAVING Page 17 of 25 1) Provide enough hot bins to separate the aggregate and to control proportioning of the mixture type specified. a) Supply bins that discard excessive and oversized material through overflow chutes. b) Provide safe access for inspectors to obtain samples from the hot bins. b. Aggregate Weigh Box and Batching Scales 1) Provide a weigh box and batching scales to hold and weigh a complete batch of aggregate. 2) Provide an automatic proportioning system with low bin indicators that automatically stop when material level in any bin is not sufficient to complete the batch. c. Asphalt Binder Measuring System 1) Provide bucket and scales of sufficient capacity to hold and weigh binder for 1 batch. d. Mixer 1) Equipment mixers with an adjustable automatic timer that controls the dry and wet mixing period and locks the discharge doors for the required mixing period 2) Furnish a pug mill with a mixing chamber large enough to prevent spillage. 6. Modified Weigh -Batch Plants. Provide a mixing plant that complies with Section 2.2.B.5. "Weigh -Batch Plants," except as specifically described below. a. Aggregate Feeds 1) Aggregate control is required at the cold feeds. Hot bin screens are not required. b. Surge Bins 1) Provide 1 or more bins large enough to produce 1 complete batch of mixture. c. Hauling Equipment 1) Provide trucks with enclosed sides to prevent asphalt mixture loss. 2) Cover each load of mixture with waterproof tarpaulins. 3) Before use, clean all truck beds to ensure the mixture is not contaminated. 4) When necessary, coat the inside truck beds with an approved release agent from the City. d. Placement and Compaction Equipment 1) Provide equipment that does not damage underlying pavement. 2) Comply with laws and regulations concerning overweight vehicles. 3) When permitted, other equipment that will consistently produce satisfactory results may be used. 7. Asphalt Paver a. General 1) Furnish a paver that will produce a finished surface that meets longitudinal and transverse profile, typical section, and placement requirements. 2) Ensure the paver does not support the weight of any portion of hauling equipment other than the connection. 3) Provide loading equipment that does not transmit vibrations or other motions to the paver that adversely affect the finished pavement quality. 4) Equip the paver with an automatic, dual, longitudinal -grade control system and an automatic, transverse -grade control system. b. Tractor Unit CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-18 ASPHALT PAVING Page 18 of 25 1) Supply a tractor unit that can push or propel vehicles, dumping directly into the finishing machine to obtain the desired lines and grades to eliminate any hand finishing. 2) Equip the unit with a hitch sufficient to maintain contact between the hauling equipment's rear wheels and the finishing machine's pusher rollers while mixture is unloaded. c. Screed 1) Provide a heated compacting screed that will produce a finished surface that meets longitudinal and transverse profile, typical section, and placement requirements. 2) Screed extensions must provide the same compacting action and heating as the main unit unless otherwise approved. d. Grade Reference 1) Provide a grade reference with enough support that the maximum deflection does not exceed 1/16 inch between supports. 2) Ensure that the longitudinal controls can operate from any longitudinal grade reference including a string line, ski, mobile string line, or matching shoes. 3) Furnish paver skis or mobile string line at least 40 feet long unless otherwise approved. 8. Material Transfer Devices a. Provide the specified type of device when shown on the Drawings. b. Ensure the devices provide a continuous, uniform mixture flow to the asphalt paver. c. When used, provide windrow pick-up equipment constructed to pick up substantially all roadway mixture placed in the windrow. 9. Remixing Equipment a. When required, provide equipment that includes a pug mill, variable pitch augers, or variable diameter augers operating under a storage unit with a minimum capacity of 8 tons. 10. Motor Grader a. When allowed, provide a self-propelled grader with a blade length of at least 12 feet and a wheelbase of at least 16 feet. 11. Handheld Infrared Thermometer a. Provide a handheld infrared thermometer meeting the requirements of Tex-244-F. 12. Rollers a. The Contractor may use any type of roller to meet the production rates and quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed. b. When specific types of equipment are required, use equipment that meets the specified requirements. c. Alternate Equipment 1) Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved, operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results. 2) Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified equipment if the desired results are not achieved. d. City may require Contractor to substitute equipment if production rate and quality requirements of the Contract are not met. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321216-19 ASPHALT PAVING Page 19 of 25 13. Straightedges and Templates. Furnish 10-foot straightedges and other templates as required or approved. 14. Distributor vehicles a. Furnish vehicle that can achieve a uniform tack coat placement. b. The nozzle patterns, spray bar height and distribution pressure must work together to produce uniform application. c. The vehicle should be set to provide a "double lap" or "triple lap" coverage. d. Nozzle spray patterns should be identical to one another along the distributor spray bar. e. Spray bar height should remain constant. f. Pressure within the distributor must be capable of forcing the tack coat material out of spray nozzles at a constant rate. 15. Coring Equipment a. When coring is required, provide equipment suitable to obtain a pavement specimen meeting the dimensions for testing. B. Construction 1. Design, produce, store, transport, place, and compact the specified paving mixture in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide the mix design. 3. The City will perform quality assurance (QA) testing. 4. Provide quality control (QC) testing as needed to meet the requirements of this Section. C. Production Operations 1. General a. The City may suspend production for noncompliance with this Section. b. Take corrective action and obtain approval to proceed after any production suspension for noncompliance. 2. Operational Tolerances a. Stop production if testing indicates tolerances are exceeded on any of the following: 1) 3 consecutive tests on any individual sieve 2) 4 consecutive tests on any of the sieves 3) 2 consecutive tests on asphalt content b. Begin production only when test results or other information indicate, to the satisfaction of the City, that the next mixture produced will be within Table 9 tolerances. 3. Storage and Heating of Materials a. Do not heat the asphalt binder above the temperatures specified in Section 2.2.A. or outside the manufacturer's recommended values. b. On a daily basis, provide the City with the records of asphalt binder and hot - mix asphalt discharge temperatures in accordance with Table 10. c. Unless otherwise approved, do not store mixture for a period long enough to affect the quality of the mixture, nor in any case longer than 12 hours. 4. Mixing and Discharge of Materials a. Notify the City of the target discharge temperature and produce the mixture within 25 degrees F of the target. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 20 ASPHALT PAVING Page 20 of 25 b. Monitor the temperature of the material in the truck before shipping to ensure that it does not exceed 350 degrees F. The City will not pay for or allow placement of any mixture produced at more than 350 degrees F. c. Control the mixing time and temperature so that substantially all moisture is removed from the mixture before discharging from the plant. D. Placement Operations 1. Place the mixture to meet the typical section requirements and produce a smooth, finished surface or base course with a uniform appearance and texture. 2. Offset longitudinal joints of successive courses of hot mix by at least 6 inches. 3. Place mixture so longitudinal joints on the surface course coincide with lane lines, or as directed. Ensure that all finished surfaces will drain properly. 4. When End Dump Trucks are used, ensure the bed does not contact the paver when raised. 5. Placement can be performed by hand in situations where the paver cannot place it adequately due to space restrictions. 6. Hand -placing should be minimized to prevent aggregate segregation and surface texture issues. 7. All hand placement shall be checked with a straightedge or template before rolling to ensure uniformity. 8. Place mixture within the compacted lift thickness shown in Table 9, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or otherwise directed. Table 9 Compacted Lift Thickness and Required Core Height Compacted Lift Thickness Mixture Type Minimum Maximum (in.) (in.) B 2.00 3.00 C 2.00 2.50 D 1.50 2.00 9. Tack Coat a. Clean the surface before placing the tack coat. Unless otherwise approved, apply tack coat uniformly at the rate directed by the City. b. The City will set the rate between 0.04 and 0.10 gallons of residual asphalt per square yard of surface area. c. Apply a thin, uniform tack coat to all contact surfaces of curbs, structures, and all joints. d. Prevent splattering of tack coat when placed adjacent to curb, gutter, metal beam guard fence and structures. e. Roll the tack coat with a pneumatic -tire roller when directed. f. The City may use Tex-243-F to verify that the tack coat has adequate adhesive properties. g. The City may suspend paving operations until there is adequate adhesion. h. The tack coat should be placed with enough time to break or set before applying hot mix asphalt layers. i. Traffic should not be allowed on tack coats. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 L F 32 12 16 - 21 ASPHALT PAVING Page 21 of 25 j. When a tacked road surface must be opened to traffic, they should be covered with sand to provide friction and prevent pick-up. k. A typical rate for applying a sand cover is 4 to 81bs/square yard. 10. General placement requirements a. Material should be delivered to maintain a relatively constant head of material in front of the screed. b. The hopper should never be allowed to empty during paving. c. Dumping wings between trucks not allowed. Dispose of at end of days production. Lay -Down Operation 1. Minimum Mixture Placement Temperatures. Use Table 10 for minimum mixture placement temperatures. 2. Windrow Operations. When hot mix is placed in windrows, operate windrow pickup equipment so that substantially all the mixture deposited on the roadbed is picked up and loaded into the paver. Table 10 Suggested Minimum Mixture Placement Temperature High -Temperature Binder Grade PG 64 or lower PG 70 PG 76 PG 82 or higher Compaction Minimum Placement Temperature (Before Entering Paver) 260OF 270OF 280OF 290OF 1. Use air void control unless ordinary compaction control is specified on the Drawings. 2. Avoid displacement of the mixture. If displacement occurs, correct to the satisfaction of the City. 3. Ensure pavement is fully compacted before allowing rollers to stand on the pavement. 4. Unless otherwise directed, use only water or an approved release agent on rollers, tamps, and other compaction equipment. 5. Keep diesel, gasoline, oil, grease, and other foreign matter off the mixture. 6. Unless otherwise directed, operate vibratory rollers in static mode when not compacting, when changing directions, or when the plan depth of the pavement mat is less than 1-1/2 inches. 7. Use tamps to thoroughly compact the edges of the pavement along curbs, headers, and similar structures and in locations that will not allow thorough compaction with the rollers. 8. The City may require rolling with a trench roller on widened areas, in trenches, and in other limited areas. 9. Allow the compacted pavement to cool to 160 degrees F or lower before opening to traffic unless otherwise directed. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 22 ASPHALT PAVING Page 22 of 25 10. When directed, sprinkle the finished mat with water or limewater to expedite opening the roadway to traffic. 11. Air Void Control a. General 1) Compact dense -graded hot -mix asphalt to contain from 5 percent to 9 percent in -place air voids. 2) Do not increase the asphalt content of the mixture to reduce pavement air voids. b. Rollers 1) Furnish the type, size, and number of rollers required for compaction, as approved. 2) Use a pneumatic -tire roller to seal the surface, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3) Use additional rollers as required to remove any roller marks. c. Air Void Determination 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, obtain 2 roadway specimens at each location selected by the City for in -place air void determination. 2) The City will measure air voids in accordance with Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F. 3) Before drying to a constant weight, cores may be predried using a Corelok or similar vacuum device to remove excess moisture. 4) The City will use the average air void content of the 2 cores to calculate the in -place air voids at the selected location. d. Air Voids Out of Range 1) If the in -place air void content in the compacted mixture is below 5 percent or greater than 9 percent, change the production and placement operations to bring the in -place air void content within requirements. e. Test Section 1) Construct a test section of 1 lane -width and at most 0.2 miles in length to demonstrate that compaction to between 5 percent and 9 percent in -place air voids can be obtained. 2) Continue this procedure until a test section with 5 percent to 9 percent in - place air voids can be produced. 3) The City will allow only 2 test sections per day. 4) When a test section producing satisfactory in -place air void content is placed, resume full production. 12. Ordinary Compaction Control a. Furnish the type, size, and number of rollers required for compaction, as approved. Furnish at least 1 medium pneumatic -tire roller (minimum 12-ton weight). b. Use the control strip method given in Tex-207-F, Part IV, to establish rolling patterns that achieve maximum compaction. c. Follow the selected rolling pattern unless changes that affect compaction occur in the mixture or placement conditions. d. When such changes occur, establish a new rolling pattern. e. Compact the pavement to meet the requirements of the Drawings and specifications. f. When rolling with the 3-wheel, tandem or vibratory rollers, start by first rolling the joint with the adjacent pavement and then continue by rolling longitudinally at the sides. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 23 ASPHALT PAVING Page 23 of 25 g. Proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1 ft., unless otherwise directed. h. Make alternate trips of the roller slightly different in length. i. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side unless otherwise directed. G. Irregularities 1. Identify and correct irregularities including, but not limited to segregation, rutting, raveling, flushing, fat spots, mat slippage, irregular color, irregular texture, roller marks, tears, gouges, streaks, uncoated aggregate particles, or broken aggregate particles. 2. The City may also identify irregularities, and in such cases, the City shall promptly notify the Contractor. 3. If the City determines that the irregularity will adversely affect pavement performance, the City may require the Contractor to remove and replace (at the Contractor's expense) areas of the pavement that contain the irregularities and areas where the mixture does not bond to the existing pavement. 4. If irregularities are detected, the City may require the Contractor to immediately suspend operations or may allow the Contractor to continue operations for no more than 1 day while the Contractor is taking appropriate corrective action. 5. The City may suspend production or placement operations until the problem is corrected. 6. At the expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the City, remove and replace any mixture that does not bond to the existing pavement or that has other surface irregularities identified above. 3.5 REPAIR A. See Section 32 01 17. 3.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Production Testing 1. Perform production tests to verify asphalt paving meets the performance standard required in the Drawings and specifications. 2. City to measure density of asphalt paving with nuclear gauge. 3. City to core asphalt paving from the normal thickness of section once acceptable density achieved. City identifies location of cores. a. Minimum core diameter: 4 inches b. Minimum spacing: 200 feet c. Minimum of 1 core every block d. Alternate lanes between core 4. City to use cores to determine pavement thickness and calculate theoretical density. a. City to perform theoretical density test a minimum of I per day per street. B. Density Test 1. The average measured density of asphalt paving must meet specified density. 2. Average of measurements per street not meeting the minimum specified strength shall be subject to the money penalties or removal and replacement at the Contractor's expense as show in Table 11. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 24 ASPHALT PAVING Page 24 of 25 Table 11 Density Payment Schedule Percent Rice Percent of Contract Price Allowed 89 and lower remove and replace at the entire cost and expense of Contractor as directed by City. 90 75-percent 91-93 100-percent 94 90-percent 95 75-percent Over 95 remove and replace at the entire cost and expense of Contractor as directed by City. 3. The amount of penalty shall be deducted from payment due to Contractor. 4. These requirements are in addition to the requirements of Article 1.2. C. Pavement Thickness Test l . City measure each core thickness by averaging at least 3 measurements. 2. The number of tests and location shall be at the discretion of the City, unless otherwise specified in the special provisions or on the Drawings. 3. In the event a deficiency in the thickness of pavement is revealed during production testing, subsequent tests necessary to isolate the deficiency shall be at the Contractor's expense. 4. The cost for additional coring test shall be at the same rate charged by commercial laboratories. 5. Where the average thickness of pavement in the area found to be deficient, payment shall be made at an adjusted price as specified in Table 12. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 16 - 25 ASPHALT PAVING Page 25 of 25 Table 12 Thickness Deficiency Penalties Deficiency in Thickness Proportional Part Determined by Cores Of Contract Price Greater Than 0 percent - Not More than 10 percent 90 percent Greater Than 10 percent - Not More than 15 percent 80 percent remove and replace at Greater Than 15 percent the entire cost and expense of Contractor as directed by City. 6. If, in the judgment of the City, the area of such deficiency warrants removal, the area shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor's entire expense, with asphalt paving of the thickness shown on the Drawings. 7. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement of a thickness exceeding that required by the Drawings. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A — Modified items to be included in price bid CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 321273-1 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS SECTION 32 12 73 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 5 1. Sealing transverse and longitudinal cracks no larger than 1-1/2 inches in asphalt paving B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Non,,�;-Modified 1.2. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving IRM97141W:V177\'/UIDIe189ZITI1D110:1]W A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. 1:xaxw, m2i2t a. nao.,sufe ent far- this ltors a ll b; oalant pllaaod. a. T�- weEk per-f&med a -ad materials ftimished in aeeer-danee with this item and 2. Paymen4 will be paid for- a4 the unit. bid per- ga4lea of Asphalt Gr-aek Seal—an-t-. d z;1rQ!1 in ude: 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. D6690-07, Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. b. D5329-09, Standard Test Methods for Sealants and Fillers, Hot -Applied, for Joints and Cracks in Asphaltic and Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. c. D2196-05, Method A, Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties of Non -Newtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield type) Viscometer. d. D217 - 02, Standard Test Methods for Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease. 3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials a. T 48, Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup. b. T 49, Standard Method of Test for Penetration of Bituminous Materials. c. T 51, Ductility of Bituminous Materials. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 73 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS Page 2 of 5 d. T 53, Point of Bitumen (Ring -and -Ball Apparatus). e. T 59, Standard Method of Test for Emulsified Asphalt. 4. Texas Department of Transportation a. Item 300: "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions". b. Tex-543-C, Evaporative Recovery of Residue for Emulsified Crack Sealant. c. Tex-544-C, Rubber Content for Rubber -Asphalt Crack Sealant. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports 1. Prior to installation, CONTRACTOR shall furnish the City certification by an independent testing laboratory that the crack sealant from each lot of sealant to be used, meets the requirements of this Section. 2. The manufacturer of the crack sealant shall have a minimum two-year demonstrated, documented successful field performance with asphalt and concrete pavement crack sealant systems. Verifiable documentation shall be submitted to the City. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions 1. Place mixture according to manufacturer specifications. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, place mixtures only when weather conditions and moisture conditions of the roadway surface are suitable in the opinion of the City. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT A. Materials 1. Use materials approved by the City. 2. Furnish materials unless otherwise shown on the Drawings in accordance with ASTM D 6690-07 and ASTM D 5329-09 and Tables 1 and 2. a. Polymer modified asphalt -emulsion crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 1. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1273 -3 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS Page 3 of 5 Table 1 Polymer -Modified Asphalt Emulsion Crack Sealer Property Test Min Max Procedure Rotational viscosity, 77 degrees F, cP D 2196, Method A 10,000 25,000 Sieve test, percent T 59 — 0.1 Storage stability, 1 day, percent T 59 — 1 Evaporation Tex-543-C Residue by evaporation, percent 65 by wt. Tests on residue from evaporation: Penetration, 77 degrees F, 100 g, T 49 35 75 5 sec. Softening point, degrees F T 53 140 — Ductility, 39.2 degrees F, T 51 100 — 5 cm/min., cm b. Rubber -asphalt crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 2. Table 2 Rubber -Asphalt Crack Sealer Property Test Class A Class B Procedure Min Max Min Max CRM content, Grade A or B, percent Tex-544-C 22 26 — — by wt. CRM content, Grade B, percent by Tex-544-C 13 17 wt. Virgin rubber content', percent by — — 2 wt. Flash Pointe, COC, degrees F T48 400 — 400 — Penetration 3, 77 degrees F, 150 g, 5 sec. T 49 30 50 30 50 Penetration', 32 degrees F, 200 g, 60 sec. T 49 12 — 12 — Softening point, °F T 53 — — 170 — Bond4 D5329 — Pass 1. Provide certification that the min. percent virgin rubber was added. 2. Before passing the test flame over the cup, agitate the sealing compound with a 3/8- to 1/2-inch (9.5- to 12.7-mm) wide, square -end metal spatula in a manner so as to bring the material on the bottom of the cup to the surface, i.e., turn the material over. Start at one side of the thermometer, move around to the other, and then return to the starting point using 8 to 10 rapid circular strokes. Accomplish agitation in 3 to 4 sec. Pass the test flame over the cup immediately after stirring is completed. 3. Exception to T 49: Substitute the cone specified in ASTM D 217 for the penetration needle. 4. No crack in the crack sealing materials or break in the bond between the sealer and the mortar blocks over 1/4 in. deep for any specimen after completion of the test. B. Equipment 1. Provide all necessary equipment and keep equipment in a satisfactory working condition. 2. The minimum requirements for construction equipment shall be as follows: CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 12 73 - 4 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS Page 4 of 5 a. Double-boiler/agitator-type kettle. Used to heat and install the hot -applied crack sealant. b. Hose. Transfer the sealant from the kettle to the crack by means of a direct - connected pressure -type extruding device (hose) with a nozzle that will insert in the crack. 1) The equipment should allow recirculation into the inner kettle when sealing is not performed. c. Thermometers. Thermometers should be positioned on the equipment to ensure application temperatures are being met. d. Handtools. Due to the nature of cracks, handtools are required to insert the sealant material in cracks that are deeper than 3/4 inch. 1) These tools should not twist, cut, or damage the sealant material. e. Air compressor. Consists of an air compressor, hoses, and a venturi-type nozzle with an opening not exceed 1/4 inch. 1) The air compressor should be equipped with traps that will keep the compressed air free of oil and moisture. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation 1. Singular cracks will be thoroughly cleaned of all debris and foreign material with an industrial air compressor. 2. The pavement shall be free of moisture. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Exercise caution to prevent additional damage to the pavement surface. B. Crack Sealant 1. The crack should be sealed from the bottom to the top to minimize bubbling due to entrapped air. 2. The sealant should be recessed approximately 1/8 to 1/4 inch below the pavement surface to prevent tracking. 3. A squeegee may be used to remove excess sealant from the pavement surface when a crack is overfilled. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1273 -5 ASPHALT PAVING CRACK SEALANTS Page 5 of 5 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] DATE NAME END OF SECTION Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 32 13 13 -1 CONCRETE PAVING Pagel of 22 A.Section includes: 1. Finished pavement constructed of Portland cement concrete including monolithically poured curb on the prepared subgrade or other base course. B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None Modified 1.1.C. 2. Added 1.1.D. 3. Modified 1.2. 4. Modified 1.6. 5. Modified 1.9. 6. Modified 2.2. 7. Modified 2.4.A.2.a.8. 8. Modified 3.4.C. 9. Modified 3.4.H. 10. Removed 3.5.A. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Sootion 13-23-01-29---Co�o Nvirrg Rapaif Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 4. 03 30 00 — Cast -in -place Concrete D.Related Documents 1. Drawings and General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid Drice in the ProDOSal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. Mari,, -eme a. r Merit e offs fb Al Uom del So J�, the square ., .a f,.a letea and f iz back f,.,,rb, ,des 2) Th;eknesses 2. Paymefft CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -2 CONCRETE PAVING Page 2 of 22 a. The work po.f ,.....oa and materials fiff is od in aocar- anee with this item will be paid fee ^4 the unit priee bid p square yard F!'',,,,erete Pavement. 3.. The Nd ohall inaltidei a. Vnaping, a fine grading the pi ^ e et# afe h. Fur€g��hirr� a� Fupnidk�xig 19ading and tmle dixgs ctogixg kaul;xg and handling all eEfflefete edients ineluding all freight and royalty 4velved— `'fib, pkvin , finishing, o. F'umiohinb and4li&t7allinbgall ra' f. Funn��hing-all materials aa plaeing longitudinal,,, a .,,traetio ; r s ineluding all stool dowels, do .,ol oap3 and4oad trano��,1an nits tv .oar . o and devi s 4o; p�=n^ t.,,i�d vaffordngtkesteel bad-leed-tl�uwncni iov;.,�n unit^,� fi1LV tmtar-ial in the proper- position; � r eeating-ste--.,' bam where required by the D- b. Eoali gJoi to h. Menelithieallypatir-ed i. Gleamip 1.3 REFERENCES A.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615/A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement b. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field c. C33, Concrete Aggregates d. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens e. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete f. C94/C94M, Standard Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete g. C150, Portland Cement h. C595, Portland -Limestone Cement i. C156, Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete j. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete k. C260, Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 1. C309, Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, Type 2 in. C494, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Types "A", "D", "F" and "G" n. C618, Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete o. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete p. C1064, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic - Cement Concrete q. C1602, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -3 CONCRETE PAVING Page 3 of 22 r. D698, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbUft3) 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 305.1-14 Specification for Hot Weather Concreting b. ACI 306.1-90, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting c. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design: submit for approval. See Item 2A.A. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicatiniz compliance with AIS requirements for all aDDlicable metal _products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Weather Conditions 1. Place concrete when concrete temperature is between 40°F and 95°F when measured in accordance with ASTM C 1064 at point of placement. 2. Hot Weather Concreting a. Concrete paving operations shall be approved by the City project manager or designee when the concrete temperature exceeds 95°F. b. Concrete shall not be placed when concrete temperature is above 100°F under any circumstances. 3. Cold Weather Concreting a. No concrete shall be placed when ambient temp in shade and away from artificial heat is below 40°F and falling. Concrete may be placed when ambient temp is above 35°F and rising. Unless the City project manager or designee approves paving to continue, suspend concreting operations if a descending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat falls below 40°F. Do not resume concreting operations until an ascending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat reaches 35°F and rising. Contractor should take all the precautions necessary to prevent freezing of concrete. Frozen concrete must be removed and replaced. 4. It is to be distinctly understood that the contractor is responsible for the quality and strength of the concrete placed under any weather conditions. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 4 CONCRETE PAVING Page 4 of 22 B. Time: Place concrete after sunrise and no later than shall permit the finishing of the pavement in natural light, or as directed by the City. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] A.Cementitious Material: ASTM C150, ASTM C595 Type IL II Cement. B.Aggregates: ASTM C33, Class Desip-nation 4S. C. Water: ASTM C 1602. D.Admixtures: When admixtures are used, conform to the appropriate specification: 1. Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C260. 2. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete: ASTM C494, Types "A", "D", "F" and "G." 3. Fly Ash a. Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete: ASTM C618 Class F, except as follows: 1) The loss on ignition shall be a maximum of four percent. 2) The maximum percent of sulfur trioxide (S03) shall be 4.0. b. Fly ash may be substituted at one pound per pound of cement up to 20 2-5% of the specified cement content when such batch design is approved by the Engineer. For Mass Concrete sections reauirin.2 Thermal Control, fly ash content shall be determined by the Thermal Control Plan engineer but in no case shall exceed 40% by weight replacement of cement. E. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A615. F. Steel Wire Reinforcement: Not used for concrete pavement. G.Dowels and Tie Bars 1. Dowel and tie bars: ASTM A615. 2. Dowel Caps a. Provide and install dowel caps with enough range of movement to allow complete closure of the expansion joint. b. Caps for dowel bars shall be of the length shown on the Drawings and shall have an internal diameter sufficient to permit the cap to freely slip over the bar. c. In no case shall the internal diameter exceed the bar diameter by more 1/8 inch, and one end of the cap shall be tightly closed. 3. Epoxy for Dowel and Tie Bars: ASTM C881. a. See following table for approved producers of epoxies and adhesives. Pre -Qualified Producers of Epoxies and Adhesives Product Name Concresive 1420 HTE-50 BASF Hilti Producer CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 T 308 + P E 1000+ C-6 Epcon G-5 Pro-Poxy-300 Fast Tube Shep-Poxy TxIII Ultrabond 1300 Tubes Ultrabone 2300 N.S. A-22-2300 Slow Set Dynapoxy EP-430 EDOT ET22 SET 22 SpecPoxy 3000FS Powers Fasteners Powers Fasteners Ramset-Redhead Ramset-Redhead Unitex CMC Construction Services Adhesives Technology Adhesives Technology Pecora Corp. Simpson Strong Tie Simpson Strong Tie Simpson Strong Tie SpecChem 32 13 13 -5 CONCRETE PAVING Page 5 of 22 b. Epoxy Use, Storage and Handling 1) Package components in airtight containers and protect from light and moisture. 2) Include detailed instructions for the application of the material and all safety information and warnings regarding contact with the components. 3) Epoxy label requirements a) Resin or hardener components b) Brand name c) Name of manufacturer d) Lot or batch number e) Temperature range for storage f) Date of manufacture g) Expiration date h) Quantity contained. 4) Store epoxy and adhesive components at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. 5) Do not use damaged or previously opened containers and any material that shows evidence of crystallization, lumps skinning, extreme thickening, or settling of pigments that cannot be readily dispersed with normal agitation. 6) Follow sound environmental practices when disposing of epoxy and adhesive wastes. 7) Dispose of all empty containers separately. 8) Dispose of epoxy by completely emptying and mixing the epoxy before disposal. H.Reinforcement Bar Chairs 1. Reinforcement bar chairs or supports shall be of adequate strength to support the reinforcement bars and shall not bend or break under the weight of the reinforcement bars or Contractor's personnel walking on the reinforcing bars. 2. Bar chairs may be made of metal (free of rust), precast mortar or concrete blocks or plastic. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -6 CONCRETE PAVING Page 6 of 22 3. For approval of plastic chairs, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5-percent solution of sodium hydroxide for 120-hours. 4. Bar chairs may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. I. Joint Filler 1. Joint filler is the material placed in concrete pavement and concrete structures to allow for the expansion and contraction of the concrete. 2. Wood Boards: Used as joint filler for concrete paving. a. Boards for expansion joint filler shall be of the required size, shape and type indicated on the Drawings or required in the specifications. 1) Boards shall be of selected stock of redwood or cypress. The boards shall be sound heartwood and shall be free from sapwood, knots, clustered birdseyes, checks and splits. 2) Joint filler, boards, shall be smooth, flat and straight throughout, and shall be sufficiently rigid to permit ease of installation. 3) Boards shall be furnished in lengths equal to the width between longitudinal joints and may be furnished in strips or scored sheet of the required shape. 3. Dimensions. The thickness of the expansion joint filler shall be shown on the Drawings; the width shall be not less than that shown on the Drawings, providing for the top seal space. 4. Rejection. Expansion joint filler may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. J. Joint Sealants. 1. Provide Joint Sealants in accordance with Section 32 13 73. K.Curing Materials Membrane -Forming Compounds. a. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 2, white pigmented compound and be of such nature that it shall not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete. b. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous uniform moisture -impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. c. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface at the specified rate of coverage, dry to touch in 1 hour and dry through in not more than 4 hours under normal conditions suitable for concrete operations. d. It shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciably sagging. e. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. f. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. g. The compound shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's original containers only, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -7 CONCRETE PAVING Page 7 of 22 h. When tested in accordance with ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete, the liquid membrane -forming compound shall restrict the loss of water present in the test specimen at the time of application of the curing compound to not more than 0.01-oz.-per-2 inches of surface. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Mix Design Concrete Mix Design and Control a. The City has a pre -approved list of concrete mix designs. The pre -approved list can be found on the City website under Project Resources Folder. These mix designs meet the requirements of applicable City specifications, and the Contractor may use mix designs from the list without the need for review and approval. The contractor shall notify the City in writing which mix in the pre - approved list the contractor uses for a project. b. For a mix design not included in the pre -approved list, the Contractor shall submit a design of the concrete mix it proposes to use and a full description of the source of supply of each material component at least 10 calendar days prior to the start of concrete paving operations. c. The design of the concrete mix shall produce a quality concrete complying with these specifications and shall include the following information: 1) Design Requirements and Design Summary 2) Material source 3) Dry weight of cement/cubic yard and type 4) Dry weight of fly ash/cubic yard and type, if used 5) Saturated surface dry weight of fine and coarse aggregates/cubic yard 6) Design water/cubic yard 7) Quantities, type, and name of admixtures with manufacturer's data sheets 8) Current strength tests or strength tests in accordance with ACI 318 9) Current Sieve Analysis and -200 Decantation of fine and coarse aggregates and date of tests 10) Fineness modulus of fine aggregate 11) Specific Gravity and Absorption Values of fine and coarse aggregates 12) L.A. Abrasion of coarse aggregates d. Once mix design approved by City, maintain intent of mix design and maximum water to cement ratio. e. No concrete may be placed on the job site until the mix design has been approved by the City. Quality of Concrete a. Consistency 1) In general, the consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that: a) Mortar shall cling to the coarse aggregate b) Aggregate shall not segregate in concrete when it is transported to the place of deposit. c) Concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, shall flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edges of the pile shall stand and not flow. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -8 CONCRETE PAVING Page 8 of 22 d) Concrete and mortar shall show no free water when removed from the mixer. e) Concrete shall slide and not flow into place when transported in metal chutes at an angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal. f) Surface of the finished concrete shall be free from a surface film or laitance. 2) When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by hand sprayer only and be held to a minimum amount. 3) The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities and be of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogeneous mass. 4) Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. 5) If the strength or consistency required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the minimum cement specified or without exceeding the maximum water/cement ratio, the Contractor may use, or the City may require, an approved cement dispersing agent (water reducer); or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates, or aggregates with different characteristics, or the Contractor may use additional cement in order to produce the required results. 6) The additional cement may be permitted as a temporary measure, until aggregates are changed, and designs checked with the different aggregates or cement dispersing agent. 7) The Contractor is solely responsible for the quality of the concrete produced. 8) The City reserves the right to independently verify the quality of the concrete through inspection of the batch plant, testing of the various materials used in the concrete and by casting and testing concrete cylinders or beams on the concrete incorporated in the pavement. b. Standard Class 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard class for pavement and related concrete for streets and alleys is shown in the following table: Standard Classes of Pavement and Related Concrete 28 Day Course Minimum Min. Aggregat Class of Cementitiou Compressi Max. e General Usage Concrete s ve w/cm Maximu (Informational Only) 1 (Lb. /CY) Strength2 Ratio in (Psi) Size (Inch) Sidewalks and ADA A 470 3,000 0.58 1-1/2 ramps, driveways, curb & gutter, median pavement Inlets, manholes, junction boxes, CIP 470 3.000 0.50 1-1/2 encasement, blocking, collars, light pole foundations CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -9 CONCRETE PAVING Page 9 of 22 C 517 3,600 0.45 1-1/2 Headwalls, wingwalls, culverts, drilled shafts P 517 3,600 0.45 1-1/2 Machine placed Paving H 564 4,500 0.45 1-1/2 Hand Placed Paving HES 564 4,500 0.45 1-1/2 HES Paving Bridge slabs, top slabs of S 564 4,000 0.45 1-1/2 direct traffic culverts, approach slabs 1. All exposed horizontal concrete shall have a minimum of 3% entrained -air. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength Required. a) Concrete Sidewalks and Curb & Gutter: Class A b) Cast -In -Place Concrete Structures: Class CIP and Class C c) Machine -Laid concrete: Class P d) Hand -Laid concrete: Class H e) Structural Concrete: Class S f) High Early Strength Concrete: Class HES (1) When shown on the Drawings or allowed, provide Class HES concrete for very early opening of pavements area or leave outs to traffic. (2) Design class HES to meet the requirements of class specified for concrete pavement and a minimum compressive strength of 2,600 psi in 24 hours, unless other early strength and time requirements are shown on the Drawings allowed. C. Slump 1) Slump requirements for pavement and related concrete shall be as specified in the following table: Concrete Pavement and Related Concrete Slump Requirements Add classes of Concrete Recommended Design Acceptable Concrete Use and Placement Placement Slump, Slump, (Inch) (Inch) Slip-Form/Form-Riding Paving 1-1/2 1-3 Hand Formed Paving 4 3-5 Headwalls, wingwalls, culverts, inlets, manholes, junction boxes, encasement, blocking, collars, light pole foundations, 4 3-5 slabs, sidewalk, curb and gutter, concrete valley gutter and other miscellaneous concrete Drilled shafts 61i2 51i2-71i2 2) No concrete shall be permitted with slump in excess of the maximums shown. 3) Any concrete mix failing to meet the above consistency requirements, although meeting the slump requirements, shall be considered unsatisfactory, and the mix shall be changed to correct such unsatisfactory conditions. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 -10 CONCRETE PAVING Page 10 of 22 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A.Equipment 1. All equipment necessary for the construction of this item shall be on the project. 2. The equipment shall include spreading devices (augers), internal vibration, tamping, and surface floating necessary to finish the freshly placed concrete in such a manner as to provide a dense and homogeneous pavement. 3. Machine -Laid Concrete Pavement a. Fixed -Form Paver. Fixed form paving equipment shall be provided with forms that are uniformly supported on a sufficiently firm subbase to prevent sagging under the weight of machine. b. Slip -Form Paver 1) Slip -form paving equipment shall be provided with traveling side forms of sufficient dimensions, shape and strength so as to support the concrete laterally for a sufficient length of time during placement. 2) City may reject use of Slip -Form Paver if paver requires over -digging and impacts trees, mailboxes or other improvements. 4. Hand -Laid Concrete Pavement a. Machines that do not incorporate these features, such as roller screeds or vibrating screeds, shall be considered tools to be used in hand -laid concrete construction, as slumps, spreading methods, vibration, and other procedures are more common to hand methods than to machine methods. 5. City may reject equipment and stop operation if equipment does not meet requirements. B. Concrete Mixing and Delivery 1. Transit Batching: shall not be used — onsite mixing not permitted. 2. Ready Mixed Concrete a. The concrete shall be produced in an approved method conforming to the requirements of this specification and ASTM C94/C94M. b. City shall have access to ready mix plant to obtain material samples. c. When ready -mix concrete is used, sample concrete per ASTM C172 Alternate Procedure 2: 1) As the mixer is being emptied, individual samples shall be taken after the discharge of approximately 10 percent and 90 percent of the load. 2) The method of sampling shall provide that the samples are representative of widely separated portions, but not from the very ends of the batch. d. The mixing of each batch, after all materials are in the drum, shall continue until it produces a thoroughly mixed concrete of uniform mass as determined by established mixer performance ratings and inspection, or appropriate uniformity tests as described in ASTM C94. e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -11 CONCRETE PAVING Page 11 of 22 £ Retempering or remixing shall not be permitted. 3. Delivery a. Deliver concrete at an interval not exceeding 30 minutes or as determined by City to prevent cold joint. 4. Delivery Tickets a. For all operations, the manufacturer of the concrete shall, before unloading, furnish to the purchaser with each batch of concrete at the site a delivery ticket on which is printed, stamped, or written, the following information to determine that the concrete was proportioned in accordance with the approved mix design: 1) Name of concrete supplier 2) Serial number of ticket. 3) Date 4) Truck number 5) Name of purchaser 6) Specific designation of job (name and location) 7) Specific class, design identification and designation of the concrete in conformance with that employed in job specifications. 8) Amount of concrete in cubic yards 9) Time loaded or of first mixing of cement and aggregates. 10) Water added by receiver of concrete. 11) Type and amount of admixtures C.Subgrade 1. When manipulation or treatment of subgrade is required on the Drawings, the work shall be performed in proper sequence with the preparation of the subgrade for pavement. 2. The roadbed shall be excavated and shaped in conformity with the typical sections and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the City. 3. All holes, ruts and depressions shall be filled and compacted with suitable material and, if required, the subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted and reshaped. 4. Irregularities of more than 1/2 inch., as shown by straightedge or template, shall be corrected. 5. The s4gr-adc-Ahall 1!e tmifefmly eempaeted to at least 95 per-eei4 of tho nuy.imum Proofroll subgrade under direction of the materials testing a2encv. Then compact upper 8-inches at -2% to +2% of optimum to 98% ASTM D698. If a rain event occurs prior to placement and compaction of the flex base, aerate subgrade, re -compact and re -test. 6. M Mist e , r+or+ shall bo within rl�inuo I r. 7. The prepared subgrade shall be wetted down sufficiently in advance of placing the pavement to ensure its being in a firm and moist condition. 8. Sufficient subgrade shall be prepared in advance to ensure satisfactory prosecution of the work. 9. The Contractor shall notify the City at least 24 hours in advance of its intention to place concrete pavement. 10. After the specified moisture and density are achieved, the Contractor shall maintain the subgrade moisture and density in accordance with this Section. 11. In the event that rain or other conditions may have adversely affected the condition of the subgrade or base, additional tests may be required as directed by the City. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 12 CONCRETE PAVING Page 12 of 22 D.Placing and Removing Forms Placing Forms a. Forms for machine -laid concrete 1) The side forms shall be metal, of approved cross section and bracing, of a height no less than the prescribed edge thickness of the concrete section, and a minimum of 10 feet in length for each individual form. 2) Forms shall be of ample strength and staked with adequate number of pins capable of resisting the pressure of concrete placed against them and the thrust and the vibration of the construction equipment operating upon them without appreciable springing, settling or deflection. 3) The forms shall be free from warps, bends or kinks and shall show no variation from the true plane for face or top. 4) Forms shall be jointed neatly and tightly and set with exactness to the established grade and alignment. 5) Forms shall be set to line and grade at least 200 feet, where practicable, in advance of the paving operations. 6) In no case shall the base width be less than 8 inches for a form 8 inches or more in height. 7) Forms must be in firm contact with the subgrade throughout their length and base width. 8) If the subgrade becomes unstable, forms shall be reset, using heavy stakes or other additional supports may be necessary to provide the required stability. b. Forms for hand -laid concrete 1) Forms shall extend the full depth of concrete and be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in thickness or equivalent when wooden forms are used or be of a gauge that shall provide equivalent rigidity and strength when metal forms are used. 2) For curves with a radius of less than 250 feet, acceptable flexible metal or wood forms shall be used. 3) All forms showing a deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a straight line shall be rejected. 2. Settling. When forms settle over 1/8 inch under finishing operations, paving operations shall be stopped the forms reset to line and grade and the pavement then brought to the required section and thickness. 3. Cleaning. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use. 4. Removal. a. Forms shall remain in place until the concrete has taken its final set. b. Avoid damage to the edge of the pavement when removing forms. c. Repair damage resulting from form removal and honeycombed areas with a mortar mix within 24 hours after form removal unless otherwise approved. d. Clean joint face and repair honeycombed or damaged areas within 24 hours after a bulkhead for a transverse construction joint has been removed unless otherwise approved. e. When forms are removed before 72 hours after concrete placement, promptly apply membrane curing compound to the edge of the concrete pavement. E. Placing Reinforcing Steel, Tie, and Dowel Bars 1. General CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -13 CONCRETE PAVING Page 13 of 22 a. When reinforcing steel tie bars, dowels, etc., are required they shall be placed as shown on the Drawings. b. All reinforcing steel shall be clean, free from rust in the form of loose or objectionable scale, and of the type, size and dimensions shown on the Drawings. c. Reinforcing bars shall be securely wired together at the alternate intersections and all splices and shall be securely wired at each intersection dowel and load - transmission unit intersected. d. All bars shall be installed in their required position as shown on the Drawings. e. The storing of reinforcing or structural steel on completed roadway slabs generally shall be avoided and, where permitted, such storage shall be limited to quantities and distribution that shall not induce excessive stresses. 2. Splices a. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping and tying ends. b. Comply with ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars where not specified on the Drawings. 3. Installation of Reinforcing Steel a. All reinforcing bars and bar mats shall be installed in the slab at the required depth below the finished surface and supported by and securely attached to bar chairs installed on prescribed longitudinal and transverse centers as shown by sectional and detailed drawings on the Drawings. b. Chairs Assembly. The chair assembly shall be similar and equal to that shown on the Drawings and shall be approved by the City prior to extensive fabrication. c. After the reinforcing steel is securely installed above the subgrade as specified in Drawings and as herein prescribed, no loading shall be imposed upon the bar mats or individual bars before or during the placing or finishing of the concrete. 4. Installation of Dowel Bars a. Install through the predrilled joint filler and rigidly support in true horizontal and vertical positions by an assembly of bar chairs and dowel baskets. b. Dowel Baskets 1) The dowels shall be held in position exactly parallel to surface and centerline of the slab, by a dowel basket that is left in the pavement. 2) The dowel basket shall hold each dowel in exactly the correct position so firmly that the dowel's position cannot be altered by concreting operations. c. Dowel Caps 1) Install cap to allow the bar to move not less than 1-1/4 inch in either direction. Grease bar before adding cap to prevent bonding with the concrete. 5. Tie Bar and Dowel Placement a. Place at mid -depth of the pavement slab, parallel to the surface. b. Place as shown on the Drawings. 6. Epoxy for Tie and Dowel Bar Installation 1) Epoxy bars as shown on the Drawings. 2) Use only drilling operations that do not damage the surrounding structures. 3) Blow out drilled holes with compressed air. 4) Completely fill the drilled hole with approved epoxy before inserting the tie bar into the hole. 5) Install epoxy grout and bar at least 6 inches embedded into concrete. F.Joints 1. Joints shall be placed where shown on the Drawings or where directed by the City. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 14 CONCRETE PAVING Page 14 of 22 2. The plane of all joints shall make a right angle with the surface of the pavement. 3. No joints shall have an error in alignment of more than 1/2 inch at any point. 4. Joint Dimensions a. The width of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings, creating the joint sealant reservoir. b. The depth of the joint shall be shown on the Drawings. c. Dimensions of the sealant reservoir shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. After curing, the joint sealant shall be 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch below the pavement surface at the center of the joint. 5. Transverse Expansion Joints a. Expansion joints shall be installed perpendicularly to the surface and to the centerline of the pavement at the locations shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. Expansion joints shall continue to the farthest outside edge of paving and adjacent slabs, and should extend through monolithic or attached curbs so that there is no restriction to the movement of the joint at any point. b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. c. Dowel bars, shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing. d. Support dowel bars with dowel baskets. e. Dowels shall not restrict the free opening and closing of the expansion join and shall not make planes of weaknesses in the pavement. f. Greased Dowels for Expansion Joints. 1) Coat dowels with a thin film of grease or other approved de -bonding material. 2) Provide dowel caps on the lubricated end of each dowel bar. g. Proximity to Existing Structures. When the pavement is adjacent to or around existing structures, expansions joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. 6. Transverse Contraction Joints a. Contraction or dummy joints shall be installed at the locations and at the intervals shown on the Drawings. b. Joints shall be of the design width, and spacing shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City. c. Dowel bars, shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings, or as approved by the City, and shall be installed at the specified spacing. d. Saw joints in a single cut to the width and depth the plans show. Begin sawing as soon as the concrete hardens sufficiently to prevent excessive raveling along the saw cut and finish before conditions induce uncontrolled cracking. e. The joints shall be constructed by sawing to a 1/4 - inch width and to a depth of 1/4 of the actual pavement thickness, or deeper if so indicated on the Drawings. f. Complete sawing as soon as possible in hot weather conditions and within a maximum of 24 hours after saw cutting begins under cool weather conditions. g. If sharp edge joints are being obtained, the sawing process shall be sped up to the point where some raveling is observed. h. Damage by blade action to the slab surface and to the concrete immediately adjacent to the joint shall be minimized. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -15 CONCRETE PAVING Page 15 of 22 i. Any portion of the curing membrane which has been disturbed by sawing operations shall be restored by spraying the areas with additional curing compound. 7. Transverse Construction Joints a. Construction joints formed at the close of each day's work or when the placing of concrete has been interrupted for 30-minutes or longer shall be constructed by use of metal or wooden bulkheads cut true to the section of the finished pavement and cleaned. b. Wooden bulkheads shall be constructed using material of a thickness not less than nominal 2" lumber. c. Longitudinal bars shall be held securely in place in a plane perpendicular to the surface and at right angles to the centerline of the pavement. d. Edges shall be rounded to 1/4-inch radius. e. Any surplus concrete on the subgrade shall be removed upon the resumption of the work. 8. Longitudinal Construction Joints a. Longitudinal construction joints shall be of the type shown on the Drawings. 9. Joint Filler a. Joint filler shall be as specified in 2.2.I of the size and shape shown on the Drawings. b. Redwood Board joints shall be used for all pavement joints except for expansion joints that are coincident with a butt joint against existing pavements. c. Boards with less than 25-percent of moisture at the time of installation shall be thoroughly wetted on the job. d. Green lumber of much higher moisture content is desirable and acceptable. e. The joint filler shall be appropriately drilled to admit the dowel bars when required. f. The bottom edge of the filler shall extend to or slightly below the bottom of the slab. The top edge shall be held not less than 1/2 inch below the finished surface of the pavement in order to allow the finishing operations to be continuous. g. The joint filler may be composed of more than one length of board in the length of joint, but no board of a length less than 6 foot may be used unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. h. After the removal of the side forms, the ends of the joints at the edges of the slab shall be carefully opened for the entire depth of the slab. 10. Joint Sealing. Routine pavement joints shall be filled consistent with paving details and as specified in Section 32 13 73. Materials shall generally be handled and applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations as specified in Section 32 1373. G.Placing Concrete 1. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, the finished pavement shall be constructed monolithically and constructed by machined laid method unless impractical. The City will make determination of what is practical. The maximum length of concrete lane that can be placed by hand pouring is 50 linear feet. 2. The concrete shall be rapidly deposited on the subgrade in successive batches and shall be distributed to the required depth and for the entire width of the pavement by approved methods. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -16 CONCRETE PAVING Page 16 of 22 3. Any concrete not placed as herein prescribed within the time limits in the following table will be rejected. Time begins when the water is added to the mixer. Temperature — Time Requirements Concrete Temperature (at point of placement) All temperatures Above 907 Above 757 thru 90°F 75°F and Below 1 Normal dosage of retarder. Max Time — minutes (no retarding agent) Non -Agitated Concrete 45 Agitated Concrete 45 Max Time — minutes (with retarding agent)' 45 75 90 120 4. Rakes shall not be used in handling concrete. 5. At the end of the day, or in case of unavoidable interruption or delay of more than 30 minutes or longer to prevent cold joints, a transverse construction joint shall be placed in accordance with 3.41.7 of this Section. 6. Honeycombing a. Special care shall be taken in placing and vibrating the concrete against the forms and at all joints and assemblies so as to prevent honeycombing Concrete shall be uniformly consolidated throughout its width and depth, free from honey combed areas, and has a consistent void -free closed surface. b. Excessive voids and honeycombing in the edge of the pavement, revealed by the removal of the side forms, may be cause for rejection of the section of slab in which the defect occurs. H.Finishing Machine a. Tolerance Limits 1) While the concrete is still workable, it shall be tested for irregularities with a 10-foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline of the pavement so as to bridge depressions and to touch all high spots. 2) Ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the pavement shall at no place exceed 1/16 inch -per -foot from the nearest point of contact. 3) In no case shall the maximum ordinate to a 10-foot straightedge be greater than 1/8 inch. 4) Any surface not within the tolerance limits shall be reworked and refinished. b. Edging 1) The edges of slabs and all joints requiring edging shall be carefully tooled with an edger of the radius required by the Drawings at the time the concrete begins to take its "set" and becomes non -workable. 2) All such work shall be left smooth and true to lines. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -17 CONCRETE PAVING Page 17 of 22 2. Hand a. Hand finishing permitted only in intersections and areas inaccessible to a finishing machine. b. When the hand method of striking off and consolidating is permitted, the concrete, as soon as placed, shall be approximately leveled and then struck off with screed bar to such elevation above grade that, when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at the grade elevation shown on the Drawings. c. The strai2htedae and ioint finishing shall be as prescribed herein. I. Curing 1. The curing of concrete pavement shall be thorough and continuous throughout the entire curing period. 2. Failure to provide proper curing as herein prescribed shall be considered as sufficient cause for immediate suspension of the paving operations. 3. The curing method as herein specified does not preclude the use of any of the other commonly used methods of curing, and the City may approve another method of curing if so requested by the Contractor. 4. If any selected method of curing does not afford the desired results, the City shall have the right to order that another method of curing be instituted. 5. After removal of the side forms, the sides of the slab shall receive a like coating before earth is banked against them. 6. The solution shall be applied, under pressure with a spray nozzle, in such a manner as to cover the entire surfaces thoroughly and completely with a uniform film. 7. The rate of application shall be such as to ensure complete coverage and shall not exceed 20-square-yards-per-gallon of curing compound. 8. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a continuous and flexible membrane, free from cracks or pinholes, and shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the curing period. 9. If for any reason the seal is broken during the curing period, it shall be immediately repaired with additional sealing solution. 10. When tested in accordance with ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Loss (from a mortar specimen) Through Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete, the curing compound shall provide a film which shall have retained within the test specimen a percentage of the moisture present in the specimen when the curing compound was applied according to the following. 11. Contractor shall maintain and properly repair damage to curing materials on exposed surfaces of concrete pavement continuously for a least 72 hours. J. Monolithic Curbs 1. Concrete for monolithic curb shall be the same as for the pavement and shall be placed within 20 minutes of the placement of the slab concrete. 2. After the concrete has been struck off and sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked to achieve an acceptable surface finish. 3. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on the Drawings. 4. All exposed surfaces of curb shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321313 -18 CONCRETE PAVING Page 18 of 22 K.Pavement Leaveouts 1. Pavement leaveouts as necessary to maintain and provide for local traffic shall be provided at location indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the City. 2. The extent and location of each leaveout required and a suitable crossover connection to provide for traffic movements shall be determined in the field by the City. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] A.LLgair of eener-ete pavement , .-ete shall be , istent with the D .,,.: inns ,-ad . speeified i Seet on 32 nl 29 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A.Concrete Placement 1. Place concrete using a fully automated paving machine. Hand paving is only permitted in areas such as intersections where use of paving machine is not practical. a. All concrete pavement not placed by hand shall be placed using a fully automated paving machine as approved by the City. b. Screeds are considered hand placement paving method. B. Testing of Materials 1. Samples of all materials for testing shall be provided by the contractor at no expense to the City, unless otherwise specified in the special provisions or in the Drawings. 2. In the event the initial sampling and testing does not comply with the specifications, all subsequent testing of the material in order to determine if the material is acceptable shall be at the Contractor's expense at the same rate charged by the commercial laboratories. 3. All testing shall be in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards and concrete testing technician must be ACI certified or equivalent. C.Pavement Thickness Test 1. Pavement thickness test shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory approved by the City every 100 feet or fraction thereof in accordance with TxDOT Designation: Tex-423-A, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Test locations shall be at the discretion of the City. 2. In the event a deficiency in the thickness of pavement is revealed during normal testing operations, core samples shall be taken at the contractor's expense to verify deficiency of more than 0.2 in. from plan thickness and to isolate the deficient area. 3. Where the average thickness of pavement in the area found to be deficient in thickness by more than 0.20 inch, but not more than 0.50-inch, payment shall be made at an adjusted price as specified in the following table. Deficiency in Thickness Determined by Cores Inches Proportional Part Of Contract Price Allowed CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 321313 -19 CONCRETE PAVING Page 19 of 22 0.00 — 0.20 100 percent 0.21 — 0.30 80 percent 0.31 — 0.40 70 percent 0.41 — 0.50 60 percent 4. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.50 inch but not more than 0.75 inch or 1/10 of the thickness specified on the Drawings, whichever is greater, shall be evaluated by the City. 5. If, in the judgment of the City the area of such deficiency should not be removed and replaced, there shall be no payment for the area retained. 6. If, in the judgment of the City, the area of such deficiency warrants removal, the area shall be removed and replaced, at the Contractor's entire expense, with concrete of the thickness shown on the Drawings. 7. Any area of pavement found deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inch or more than 1/10 of the plan thickness, whichever is greater, shall be removed and replaced with concrete of the thickness shown on the Drawings at the Contractor's sole expense. 8. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement of a thickness exceeding that required by the Drawings. D.Pavement Strength Test 1. During the progress of the work the commercial testing laboratory casts test cylinders for conforming to ASTM C31, to maintain a check on the compressive strengths of the concrete being placed. 2. Test cylinders shall be taken from a representative portion of concrete being placed for every 150-cubic yards of concrete pavement placed, but in no case shall fewer than 1 set of cylinders be taken per day of placement. After the cylinders have been cast, they shall remain on the job site and then transported, moist cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. 3. In each set, one of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 days (3 days for HES concrete), two cylinders shall be tested at 28 days (three cylinders for 4" by 8" cylinders), and the remaining cylinder shall be retained for testing at 56 days, if necessary. Concrete must attain its design strength within 56 days. The 4" by 8" cylinders are acceptable only when the nominal maximum aggregate size of the mix is less than 1-1/4 inch. 4. If the average 28-day test results indicate deficient strength, the Contractor may, at its option and expense, core the pavement in question and have the cores tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM C42 and ACI 318 protocol. The average of all cores must meet 100 percent of the minimum specified strength, with no individual core resulting in less than 90 percent of design strength, in order to override the results of the cylinder tests. 5. In the event cylinders and/or cores do not meet minimum specified strength, additional cores may be taken to identify the limits of deficient concrete pavement at the expense of the Contractor. 6. Cylinders and/or cores must meet minimum specified strength. Pavement not meeting the minimum specified strength shall be subject to the money penalties or removal and placement at the Contractor's expense as shown in the following table. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 20 CONCRETE PAVING Page 20 of 22 Percent Deficient Percent of Contract Price Allowed Greater Than 0 percent - Not More Than 10 percent 90-percent Greater Than 10 percent -Not More Than 15 percent 80-percent Greater Than 15 percent 0-percent or removed and replaced at the entire cost and expense of Contractor as directed by City 7. Deficiency shall be determined on a panel by panel basis. 8. The amount of penalty shall be deducted from payment due to Contractor 9. No additional payment over the contract unit price shall be made for any pavement with a strength exceeding that required by the Drawings and/or specifications. E. Cracked Concrete Acceptance Policy 1. If cracks exist in concrete pavement upon completion of the project, the Project Inspector shall decide as to the need for action to address the cracking as to its cause and recommended remedial work. 2. If the recommended remedial work is routing and sealing of the cracks to protect the subgrade, the Inspector shall make the determination as to whether to rout and seal the cracks at the time of final inspection and acceptance or at any time prior to the end of the project maintenance period. The Contractor shall perform the routing and sealing work as directed by the Project Inspector, at no cost to the City, regardless of the cause of the cracking. 3. If remedial work beyond routing and sealing is determined to be necessary, the Inspector and the Contractor shall meet to determine the cause of the cracking. a. If agreement is reached that the cracking is due to deficient materials or workmanship, the Contractor shall perform the remedial work at no cost to the City. Remedial work in this case shall be limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with new material and workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract. b. If the Inspector and the Contractor agree that the cause of the cracking is not deficient materials or workmanship, the City may request the Contractor to provide an estimate of the cost of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work to address the cause of the cracking, and the Contractor will perform that work at the agreed -upon price if the City elects to do so. 4. If the Inspector and the Contractor cannot agree on the cause of the cracking, the City may hire an independent geotechnical engineer, acceptable to the Contractor, to perform testing and analysis to determine the cause of the cracking. The contractor shall pay 50 percent of the costs of the independent testing. Contractor shall provide one half of the estimated costs of the independent testing to be held by the City. 5. If the independent geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is the Contractor's deficient material or workmanship, the remedial work will be performed at the Contractor's entire expense and the Contractor will also reimburse the City for the City's portion of cost of the geotechnical investigation. Remedial work in this case shall be limited to removing and replacing the deficient work with new material and workmanship that meets the requirements of the contract. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 21 CONCRETE PAVING Page 21 of 22 6. If the geotechnical engineer determines that the primary cause of the cracking is not the Contractor's deficient material or workmanship, the City will return the held funds to the Contractor. The Contractor, on request, will provide the City an estimate of the costs of the necessary remedial work and/or additional work and will perform the work at the agreed -upon price as directed by the City. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] A.No concrete washout, mix, slurry, cuts, mud or solids etc., may enter the storm water system including curb lines. Equipment washout allowed only in areas shown on drawings and test materials or slag must be removed from site prior to final acceptance. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 13 13 - 22 CONCRETE PAVING Page 22 of 22 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 32 13 20 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Concrete sidewalks 2. Driveways 3. Barrier free ramps B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Ne*eAdded I.I.D. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.6. 4. Modified 1.9. 5. Modified 2.2. 6. Modified 3.3.A. 7. Modified 3A.A. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 02 41 19-3 - Selective Site Demolition 4. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving 5. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants D.Drawin2s and eeneral provisions of the Contract, including General and Su_u_ulementar_v Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, al)Dly to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. A� for- aW.1 be by the squaf e feet of cand aeee to r rer-ete S-ideyulk in ito `' position for- a) Thieknesses b) Types b. Payme ;ith. thio item and 2aSuica-csliv=za under- Mccrcf2m2ntr"= will be -paid for- at� Giit priee bid per- square feet of Goner-ete Sidewalk. d ahall in 1) Fizzix.—ing and preparing the subgfade CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 2 of 6 3) Thiekeroa edge , nde z pmll limitz, if "ufaa ' Gary at Back of Sidewalk (6 to 12 insdlli M. x) a. T ro ,mot A��lUal�r Foc tUs item shall be by the linear- foot f eompleted a l aeeepted Goffefete-C/dk attN. > aek f Side W k within the 6 to 12 ineh „a. height at baek of walk in its final pesitiwi. been 1) The work per-f;,,.me and ,....,to -ials f;h-ais od ix ucvgr-danee with this item and measuredprovided underMeasurement" will o� �a�z«the unit priee bid per linear- foot of Concrete Curb at the Back of Sidewalk. 1) Exea-v., no and wring th:rval'gFade 2) Fumiohing-&Rd-phwi*g all rr�Ita��a�, im-�udiag -ete and rerfer-ei steel 1) Fumiohing, plaeiag, a*d eempaeting i ackfill 3Eonx olso Drki-.-eway a. >` a nt AZaa�®� oaa+ for tK. a R,-e by the s e feet of y)leted-a-nd aeeepted Ganer-ete -Driveway in its final position fe a) Thieknesses b) Types 2) Dirrz�-&i area of the , „b radii and will exte d *.o the limits see fie i the Drawings. n) r,,..t. l ;.` will b,-- i:w,.ktde i the drivewa-y fne stffe,..ent b. Payfaen l) . oFk per-fefmed and materials f;,.-. ishe,l ; ,1a-nee with this lte and meastffed w rrl i " " will be paid for- at the unit pr-iee bid per- square feet of Goner-ete Dr-i o. '% pi fah-1 ir.,aludc- 2) Furiahrng4laei —all rmlkorilra 3) Temp ' a2plvlt t-mmition .,t width shov m on pJ -&o (typically n : hes ..he the pavement .,,1;.,ee t to the driveway will be impr-eved. Types b. Paymen 1) ThewodE Per-fefmed and matef:i-als fumished in aecer-dafleewith this lteffl- and measuFed as reed er- "Moaamix,"'jnt" «ill be pa,.a for- t the „r:t prieebidper- �'i "Jar�ioo Il��rl�" ire: Thep ebda .link 2) Furnicking a -ad p! oing-all=mrno CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-3 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 3 of 6 4` -banding aa deteet.,b o -r,;,araing curf ee as shev"% o the nv,,...:� .� 5) Adjaeent flares side eurb if a1;r)-jaJr,a Ilk=901WN90104Oki A.Abbreviations and Acronyms TAS — Texas Accessibility Standards 2. TDLR — Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation B.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. D545, Test Methods for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Construction (Non -extruding and Resilient Types) b. D698, Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbUft3) 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Mix Design: sSubmit for approval. Section 32 13 13. B. Product Data: sSubmit product data and sample for pre -cast detectable warning for barrier free ramp. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in com_liance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED1 A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Weather Conditions: Placement of concrete shall be as specified in Section 32 13 13. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-4 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 4 of 6 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 160.a I&f 9.to] 11Kei Ki 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A.Forms: wood or metal straight, free from warp and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. B.Concrete: see Section 32 13 13. 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard class for concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps is shown in the following table: Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete Class of Minimum 28 Day Min. Maximum Course Concrete' Cementitious, Compressive Water/ Aggregate Lb./CY Strength Cementitious Maximum psi Ratio Size, inch A 470 3000 0.58 1-1/2 C.Reinforcement: See Section 32 13 13. 1. Sidewalk, driveway and barrier free ramp reinforcing steel shall be #3 deformed bars at 18 inches on -center -both -ways at the center plane of all slabs, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications. D.Joint Filler 1. Wood Filler: See Section 32 13 13. 2. Pre -Molded Asphalt Board Filler a. Use only in areas where not practical for wood boards. b. Pre -molded asphalt board filler: ASTM D545. c. Install the required size and uniform thickness and as specified in Drawings. d. Include 2 liners of 0.016 asphalt impregnated kraft paper filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. E. Expansion Joint Sealant: see Section 32 13 73 where Expansion Joints are shown on the Drawings and Civil Detail Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-5 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 5 of 6 1. Excavation: Fliziwiutzaa required fef the eenstmetion of sidewalks, driveways a -ad zo rarxp shall be Excavate to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings or as established by the City. 2. Fine Grading a The Gent aeter- shall do all neeess fy Perform filling, leveling and fine grading required to bring the subgrade to the exact grades specified and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. b. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. c. mover -excavation; shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the City. B.Demolition / Removal 1. Sidewalk, Driveway and/ or Barrier Free Ramp Removal: see Section 02 41 13. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.General 1. Concrete sidewalks shall h o ainissuss thickness: Minimum of 4 inches. 2. Sidewalks constructed in driveway approach sections_ a':�11 lxi:e-a-minimum thickness equal to that of driveway approach or as called for by Drawings and specifications within the limits of the driveway approach. 3. Driveways shall have a minimum thickness of 6 inches. Standard cross -slopes for walks shall be 2 percent max in accordance with current TAS/TDLR guidelines. The construction of the driveway approach shall include the variable height radius curb or a pan driveway approach in accordance with the Drawings. 4. All pedestrian facilities shall comply with provisions of TAS including location, slope, width, shapes, texture and coloring. Pedestrian facilities installed by the Contractor and not meeting TAS must be removed and replaced to meet TAS (no separate pay). B.Forms: Forms shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. C.Reinforcement: see Section 32 13 13. D.Concrete Placement: see Section 32 13 13. E. Finishing 1. Concrete sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be finished to a true, even surface. 2. Trowel and then brush transversely to obtain a smooth uniform brush finish. 3. Provide exposed aggregate finish for driveways and sidewalks if specified. 4. Edge joints and sides shall with suitable tools. F.Joints 1. Expansion joints for sidewalks, driveways and barrier free ramps shall be formed using redwood. 2. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals ten times the width of the sidewalk. 3. Expansion joints shall also be placed at all intersections, sidewalks with concrete driveways, curbs, formations, other sidewalks and other adjacent old concrete work. Similar material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding into or through sidewalks or driveways. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 321320-6 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS AND BARRIER FREE RAMPS Page 6 of 6 4. All expansion joints shall be 1/2 inch in thickness. 5. Edges of all construction and expansion joints and outer edges of all sidewalks shall be finished to approximately a 1/2 inch radius with a suitable finishing tool. 6. Sidewalks shall be marked at intervals equal to the width of the walk with a marking tool. Saw cutting of joints to the required depth may be desirable on wider sidewalks and is acceptable if approved by the City 7. When sidewalk is against the curb, expansion joints shall be spaced to match those in the curb, possibly in addition to the required spacing above. G.Barrier Free Ramp 1. Furnish and install red color detectable warning surface included in Standard Product List, or approved equal. 2. Detectable warning surface shall be a minimum of 24-inch in depth in the direction of pedestrian travel, and extend to the limit of the width of the curb ramp (exclusive of flares), the landing or the blended transition. 3. Locate detectable warning surface so that the edge nearest the curb line is at the extension of the back of the curb. 4. Detectable warning surface may be curved along the corner radius. 5. Install detectable warning surface according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specification for silicone joint sealing for concrete pavement and curbs. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Added L LD. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Added 1.9. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving D. Related Documents 1. Drawinas and Reneral provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. 13. Me-asure�e�lt a. raeasu, eme t for- this 141-IM olwl bz 17y tkse KA&s N r foot of eifA Sealant , rio�o a and aeeepted n4 he o i fi d is tiv Dmwisgs '.ko bo c pra, r 2. Pay -meat a. The work per-fofmed d 1m 'rz f,,., ishea in aeeor-danee ...ith thtiz Ita13} are subsidiary to the var-ious items bid and no other- eompensation will be allowed, ..loss speeifieally speeified o D -.,., ings 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 6 a. D5893, Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports 1. Prior to installation, furnish certification by an independent testing laboratory that the silicone joint sealant meets the requirements of this Section. 2. Submit verifiable documentation that the manufacturer of the silicone joint sealant has a minimum 2-year demonstrated, documented successful field performance with concrete pavement silicone joint sealant systems. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED1 A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Onlv the manufacturers as listed on the Citv_ 's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. b. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Anv product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealant when the air and pavement temperature is less than 35 degrees F. B. Concrete surface must be clean, dry and frost free. C. Do not place sealant in an expansion -type joint if surface temperature is below 35 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 of 6 2.2 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT A. Materials 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893. 2. Joint Filler, Backer Rod and Breaker Tape a. The joint filler sop shall be of a closed cell expanded polyethylene foam backer rod and polyethylene bond breaker tape of sufficient size to provide a tight seal. b. The back rod and breaker tape shall be installed in the saw -cut joint to prevent the joint sealant from flowing to the bottom of the joint. c. The backer rod and breaker tape shall be compatible with the silicone joint sealant and no bond or reaction shall occur between them. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. The silicone sealant shall be cold applied. 2. Allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 7 days to ensure it has sufficient strength prior to sealing joints. 3. Perform joint reservoir saw cutting, cleaning, bond breaker installation, and joint sealant placement in a continuous sequence of operations. 4. See Drawings for the various joint details with their respective dimensions. B. Equipment I . Provide all necessary equipment and keep equipment in a satisfactory working condition. 2. Equipment shall be inspected by the City prior to the beginning of the work. 3. The minimum requirements for construction equipment shall be as follows: a. Concrete Saw. The sawing equipment shall be adequate in size and power to complete the joint sawing to the required dimensions. b. Air Compressors. The delivered compressed air shall have a pressure in excess of 90 psi and shall be suitable for the removal of all free water and oil from the compressed air. c. Extrusion Pump. The output shall be capable of supplying a sufficient volume of sealant to the joint. d. Injection Tool. This mechanical device shall apply the sealant uniformly into the joint. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 of 6 e. Sandblaster. The design shall be for commercial use with air compressors as specified in this Section. f. Backer Rod Roller and Tooling Instrument. These devices shall be clean and free of contamination. They shall be compatible with the joint depth and width requirements. C. Sawing Joints: see Section 32 13 13. D. Cleaning joints 1. Dry saw in 1 direction with reverse cutting blade then sand blast. 2. Use compressed air to remove the resulting dust from the joint. 3. Sandblast joints after complete drying. a. Attach nozzle to a mechanical aiming device so that the sand blast will be directed at an angle of 45 degrees and at a distance of 1 to 2 inches from the face of the joint. b. Sandblast both joint faces sandblasted in separate, 1 directional passes. c. When sandblasting is complete, blow-out using compressed air. d. The blow tube shall fit into the joints. 4. Check the blown joint for residual dust or other contamination. a. If any dust or contamination is found, repeat sandblasting and blowing until the joint is cleaned. b. Do not use solvents to remove stains and contamination. 5. Place the bond breaker and sealant in the joint immediately upon cleaning. 6. Bond Breaker Rod and Tape: install in the cleaned joint prior to the application of the joint sealant. 7. Do not leave open, cleaned joints unsealed overnight. E. Joint Sealant 1. Apply the joint sealant upon placement of the bond breaker rod and tape, using the mechanical injection tool. 2. Do not seal joints unless they are clean and dry. 3. Remove and discard excess sealant left on the pavement surface. a. Do not excess use to seal the joints. 4. The pavement surface shall present a clean final condition as determined by City. 5. Do not allow traffic on the fresh sealant until it becomes tack -free. F. Approval of Joints 1. The City may request a representative of the sealant manufacturer to be present at the job site at the beginning of the final cleaning and sealing of joints. a. The representative shall demonstrate to the Contractor and the City the acceptable method for sealant installation. b. The representative shall approve the clean, dry joints before the sealing operation commences. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 5 of 6 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 -1 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 32 16 13 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete Curbs and Gutters 2. Concrete Valley Gutters B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Nefit—Added L I.D. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.6. 4. Modified 1.9. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 02 41 193 - Selective Site Demolition 4. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving 5. Section 32 13 73 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 6. Section '3244-2? Base Gaufs s D.Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. B. Concrete CuA,-anA Gutte 4+- Measwr-e1�3e14t C; th�z it*r.smhxtl bi by the lire,,f feet o fC rer-ete Gt -b n GtMeF. b. payfflen ;ith thio item and measwed asprovided under- "Meastfefnen+'r'—Tv it v��pc •i�cc for- A the unit mid por limar ° eufb height. o. "-' pnse bid a':ul l it dui CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 - 2 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 2 of 8 o va'ogiade-, eetment d'.1roo under rb Q. ,.,,,+c ark 13" behind i aek f,.urb a 1) Fum�ching-and-plaei*S all matcriala, im lu , reinforcing stool and expansion ,v..,teria 5) Te -.or-ai-..asphalt transition .,t width sL.,,..,., Cam, y)Ax2 (t..,.ie ll., n ipx4we when the pavement .,,i;.,ee t to the curb .P. gutter will bo 2Eomx�z Valley a. T ro „t 1) Measurement for this be by the square ., -a f C ret:ete Valley Gutter, b. payfflen 1) Tlv:,,,,, mod and mate,.;.,1s fttmished ; aeeor-danee with t is ito,Y, aid movareas prose lel• "N4eastiremer4" will be maid forrua4 the=cirri prlee bid por zquare . ,, .a fGonerete Valley &44e. , pleto a d in pl ao9-fee a) 3,1afiousst+eett-ypes o. ThQ priae bid ahall irx.Zu4&- 1) Required vxeovati-an, 2) Preparing the subgrne g-plaeementof ate FunxzlNmg mi oirrg zl m t , , r-einfer-eing steel, and e*pa-asioa material 1) Tamparaff aophalt t... s do .,t width s,.xim os plan the pa-vefnepA adjaeent to the valley gtAter- will be improved. 1) Mo,, ent for- this rtu'nn h. by the lineaf feet of Goner-ete Laydo G,,,.i. w-he„ eFossing on st eft ...,,-1 4ag o. paidnglet� Darbpar -itcm io nct to be used when er-essing driveways or- alleys-. b. Pay-meot and measured w Trrovi "N4easufefnent" will be paid for- at the tmit pr-iee bid por linoar ° d in tJr-a-by „b height. d 5haO in ude: 1) >rme v do and p eyaring-the eemen4 treated base „n or ou:,b &. guttex xid 12" behind baekf 2) Required exe-avation a aekfill behind the our-b, 3��Wul and diop9sal f all a a4e ,.....to..;, l �) Fumiohirg and ..1.,ei all materials, ineluding foundation o 0 F ,-, iag stool and expansion. e -ia 5) Temperafy asphalt trcxwition &. --,'mho-vn on pkmo 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 - 3 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 3 of 8 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED A. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT US ill A.American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Weather Conditions: See Section 32 13 13. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A.Forms: See Section 32 13 13. B. Concrete: 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or detailed specifications, the standard class for concrete curb & gutter and valley gutter is shown in the following table: Standard Classes of Pavement Concrete Item Class of Minimum 28 Day Min. Maximum Course Concrete Cementitious, Compressive Water/ Aggregate Lb./CY Strength Cementitious Maximum psi Ratio Size, inch Curb & A 470 3,000 0.58 1-1/2 Gutter Valley H 564 4,500 0.45 1-1/2 Gutter C.Reinforcement: See Section 32 13 13. D.Joint Filler 1. Wood Filler: see Section 32 13 13. 2. Pre -Molded Asphalt Board Filler a. Use only in areas where not practical for wood boards. b. Pre -molded asphalt board filler: ASTM D545. c. Install the required size and uniform thickness and as specified in the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 - 4 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 4 of 8 d. Include two liners of 0.016 asphalt impregnated kraft paper filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. E. Expansion Joint Sealant: See Section 32 13 73. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A.Demolition / Removal: See Section 02 41 13. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.Forms 1. Extend forms the full depth of concrete. 2. W od forms: minimum of 1-1/2 inches in thickness 3. Metal Forms: a gauge that shall provide equivalent rigidity and strength. 4. Use acceptable wood or metal forms for curves with a radius of less than 250 feet. 5. All forms showing a deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a straight line shall be rejected. B.Reinforcing Steel 1. Place all necessary reinforcement for City approval prior to depositing concrete. 2. All steel must be free from paint and oil and all loose scale, rust, dirt and other foreign substances. 3. Remove foreign substances from steel before placing. 4. W re all bars at their intersections and at all laps or splices. 5. Lap all bar splices a minimum of 20 diameters of the bar or 12 inches, whichever is greater. C. Concrete Placement 1. Deposit concrete to maintain a horizontal surface. 2. W rk concrete into all spaces and around any reinforcement to form a dense mass free from voids. 3. W rk coarse aggregate away from contact with the forms. 4. Hand -Laid Concrete — Curb and gutter a. Shape and compact subgrade to the lines, grades and cross section shown on the Drawings. b. Lightly sprinkle subgrade material immediately before concrete placement. c. Deposit concrete into forms. d. Shape the concrete to the required curb and gutter design and provide a brush finish. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 -5 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 5 of 8 5. Machine -Laid Concrete — Curb and Gutter a. Hand -tamp and sprinkle subgrade material before concrete placement. b. Provide clean surfaces for concrete placement. c. Place the concrete to correct line and grade with approved self-propelled equipment. d. Brush finish surfaces immediately after extrusion or slipforming. 6. Hand -Laid Concrete — Concrete Valley Gutter: See Section 32 13 13. 7. Expansion joints a. Place expansion joints in the curb and gutter at 200-foot intervals and at intersection returns and other rigid structures. b. Place tooled joints at 15-foot intervals or matching abutting sidewalk joints and pavement joints to a depth of 1-1/2 inches. c. Place expansion joints at all intersections with concrete driveways, structures, valley gutters, and existing curb and gutters. d. Make expansion joints no less than 1/2 inch in thickness, extending the full depth of the concrete. e. Make expansion joints perpendicular and at right angles to the face of the curb. f. Neatly trim any expansion material extending above the surface of the finished work. g. Make expansion joints in the curb and gutter coincide with existing concrete expansion joints. h. Longitudinal dowels across the expansion joints in the curb and gutter are required. i. Install 3 - 1/2" round, smooth bars, 24 inches in length, for dowels at each expansion joint. j. Coat 1/2 of the dowel with a bond breaker and terminate with a dowel cap that provides a minimum of 1-inch free expansion. k. Support dowels by an approved method. D.Curing: see Section 32 13 13. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Inspections 1. Steel reinforcement placement 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. B. Concrete Tests: Perform testing of fresh concrete sample obtained according to ASTM C172 with the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain 1 fresh concrete sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cubic yards, but less than 150 cubic yards, plus 1 set for each additional 150 cubic yard or fraction thereof. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13-6 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 6 of 8 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; 1 test at point of placement for each concrete sample, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; 1 test for each sample, but not less than 1 test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test for each concrete sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31. a. Cast and laboratory cure 3 cylinders for each fresh concrete sample. 1) Do not transport field cast cylinders until they have cured for a minimum of 24 hours. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39; a. Test 1 cylinder at 7 days. b. Test 2 cylinders at 28 days. 7. Upload test results into Buzzsaw within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete tester and inspector, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 8. Additional Tests: Additional tests of concrete shall be made when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other City specification requirements have not been met. The Lab Services division may conduct or request tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other methods as directed by the Project Manager. a. When the strength level of the concrete for any portion of the structure, as indicated by cylinder tests, falls below the specified requirements, provide improved curing conditions and/or adjustments to the mix design as required to obtain the required strength. If the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders falls so low as to be deemed unacceptable, follow the core test procedure set forth in ACI 301, Chapter 17. Locations of core tests shall be approved by the Project Engineer. Core sampling and testing shall be at Contractors expense. b. If the results of the core tests indicate that the strength of the structure is inadequate, any replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered by the Project Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the City. 9. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 10. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 - 7 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] Page 7 of 8 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] III\I IZI] 0&1 010M I IQeI CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 32 16 13 -8 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS AND VALLEY GUTTERS Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-1 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 32 92 14 NON-NATIVE SEEDING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing and installing grass seed as shown on Drawings, or as directed. B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 4. None. Modified 1.2. Modified 2.2.A. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. seclion 31 1 4. Secl;,o 1 32 91 19 Tapsoil Plaeemeat and Finishing of m •i 5. Seoor,,n 32 ✓I 23 IlMig-tion (if used) 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Measurement and Davment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect bid item. &.MeastI Lx� - �1t md Payment 1 Seeding a. >` e en 1)Measuremeat for -this I4xvmlh,.11 bo by the ^ o " -a of Seed spread, eompletin pl ac2 f .. uaif ...,, . e etmi e ,over -age. b. payfflen 1) '_% wofk peFfofmed and materials ftimished in aeeor-danee with this item -ad measiwed as providedtider "N4_-j .U.mxn x-it" will be paid for- at the , flit pr-iee bid per- square yar-d of Seed plaeed for- var-ious installation methods. bid zixoRlim deser-ibed ; e tian 3.3 Pirorar Lion 2) Funickingmd 3Tger-fefm soil testing, if r-eq ifemeR4 is included on eonstmetion drawings, as 4) FvNmiaking and c 1r, ig ato>< Vu y &n, 4+ydnu1v mulzhingg if g ffietho 5) Fertilizer, if required by to be detefmined by soil test iNo, W dkeeted by Gity 7) Water4ng (uRtil aatzJ��?s} J Diop o oat of m*uo Erxite -ials off s 4e , " dire to by City 9) Weed Removal (ui#il established) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-2 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 2 of 8 �.oginning f ..,z, five (ns) days f of 3r- when blade height it 4" or- greater-, whiehever eomes first. t t) Mowing , e4x,", i be steed 9f ten ( 0) a Viewing a= AZ:u�ir31�1a�1t 1) Measurement for this Itons. -- call por eae , ti,o.,,.,,a tt o n. inirnmrx 8€two (2) mew ells ; , hided ; 00 edingp approved .-ad dire .toa by the City, bPcrD�'p'men 1) The work per -formed and materials fumisned in aceo ceith thin Ito r: and measured as provided under '%4easttremNt aid fef: at the twit pr-iee bid per- eaeh. 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certifications, Samples and Documentation 1. As requested by the City, certificates and/or labels and samples of seed, fertilizer, compost, soil amendments and/or other materials, including a certificate from the vendor indicating seed is free from weeds. a. Seeds 1) Vendors' certification that seeds meet Texas State seed law including: a) Testing and labeling for pure live seed (PLS) b) Name and type of seed 2) All seed shall be tested in a laboratory with certified results presented to the City in writing, prior to planting. 3) All seed to be of the previous season's crop and the date on the container shall be within twelve (12) months of the seeding date. 2. All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this work shall be subject to verification by the City. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Developer/contractor who plants material is responsible for the supervision of his crew, the site, and the maintenance of the material until the project is accepted by the City. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Seed 1. Shall be Bermuda and/or Elbon Rye seed unless otherwise specified. 2. Each species of seed shall be supplied in a separate, labeled container for acceptance by the City. B.Fertilizer, as determined by soil testing report provided to Contractor or as directed by City CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-3 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 3 of 8 1. Provide unopened bags labeled with the analysis. 2. Conform to Texas fertilizer law, Texas Agriculture Code Chapter 63. 3. Provide to City application rate for which fertilizer will be applied. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS A.Grading of site and installation of topsoil must be approved by City prior to application of seed. 1.12 WARRANTY A.Seed to be replaced if coverage does not exceed 70 percent within forty-five (45) days from germination. B. Warranty Period: until job acceptance or through maintenance period, whichever is longer duration of time. C. Warrant seed against defects in product, installation and workmanship. Exceptions include a. Vandalism caused by persons other than contractor or subcontractors of this project b. Improper watering or maintenance by persons other than contractor or subcontractors of this project c. Damage caused by vehicles or equipment other than contractor or subcontractors of this project. 17R R w� 9 z131114M 0 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.Materials Seed a. General 1) Plant all seed at rates based on pure live seed (PLS) a) Pure Live Seed (PLS) determined using the formula: (1) Percent Pure Live Seed = Percent Purity x [(Percent Germination + Percent Firm or Hard Seed) + 100] 2) Availability of Seed a) Substitution of individual seed types due to lack of availability may be done through the submittal process for review and approval by City. b) Notify the City prior to bidding of difficulties locating certain species. 3) Weed seed a) Not exceed one percent by weight of the total of pure live seed (PLS) and other material in the mixture b) Seed not allowed: (1) Johnson grass (2) Nutgrass (3) Millet 4) Harvest seed within twelve (12) months prior to planting b. Non-native Grass Seed 1) Plant between March 21 and October 31 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-4 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 4 of 8 Lbs. Common Name Botanical Name Purity Germination PLS/Acre (percent) (percent) 75 Bermuda (hulled) Cynodon dactylon 95 90 2) Plant between November 1 and March 20 Lbs. Common Name Botanical Name Purity Germination PLS/Acre (percent) (percent) 25 Bermuda (unhulled) Cynodon dactylon 85 90 c. Temporary Erosion Control Seed - Consist of the sowing of cool season plant seeds. Plant mix below must be included with Bermuda between November 1 through March 1. Common Name Botanical Name Lbs./Acre Lbs./Acre broadcast drilled seed method method Elbon Rye Secale cereale 100-120 80-100 2. Hydromulch a. For use with conventional mechanical or hydraulic planting of seed. b. Wood cellulose fiber produced from virgin wood or recycled paper -by-products (waste products from paper mills or recycled newspaper). c. No growth or germination inhibiting factors. d. No more than ten percent moisture, air dry weight basis. e. Additives: binder in powder form. f. Form a strong moisture retaining mat. 3. Fertilizer to be installed only as directed by City or as indicated in construction documents a. Determined by soil testing report b. Acceptable condition for distribution per manufacturer's instructions c. Applied uniformly over the seeded area. Do not fertilize inside the dripline of trees, or Tree Protection Area. 5. Water: clean and free of industrial wastes or other substances harmful to the germination of the seed or to the growth of the vegetation. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Soil Retention Blanket 1. Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket made from natural fibers including coconut, straw, or wood fiber. 2. As specified for sloped areas or as directed, not for general use. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-5 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 5 of 8 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A.City may examine site grading to ensure grading conforms to approved drawings, prior to installation of seed. 1. City will notify Contractor if grading is to be inspected prior to seed installation. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: clear surface of all material including the following and dispose of off -site or as directed by City: 1. Stumps, stones, and other objects larger than 1-inch. Roots, brush, wire, stakes, etc. 3. Any objects that may interfere with seeding or maintenance. B. Scarify Subgrade 1. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 2-inches before depositing the required topsoil. 2. Compacted or heavily vegetated areas may be tilled 3-inches deep with City approval a. For tilled areas, use a heavy-duty disc or a chisel -type breaking plow, chisels set not more than 10-inches apart. b. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage, then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of tillage may be up to 3-inches. c. Areas sloped greater than 3: 1: run a tractor parallel to slope to provide less seed/water run-off 3. Areas near trees: Do not till within dripline of tree. Do not disturb the Tree Protection Area, or canopy dripline. C. Cleaning 1. Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, and rock 1-inch and greater, and weeds. D.Fine Grading: 1. After scarifying or tilling and cleaning, all areas to be seeded shall have 3-inches of topsoil placed, be leveled, fine graded, and a weighted spike and harrow or float drag. The required shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps, and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed prior to inspection before seeding. 2. Areas near trees: Do not disturb the Tree Protection Area, or canopy dripline 3.4 INSTALLATION A.General 1. Seed only those areas indicated on the Drawings and areas disturbed by construction. 2. Mark each area to be seeded in the field prior to seeding for City approval. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-6 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 6 of 8 3. Provide written notice of installation and maintenance schedule to resident or business adjacent to the project B.Broadcast Seeding 1. Broadcast seed in two (2) directions at right angles to each other. 2. Harrow or rake lightly to cover seed. 3. Never cover seed with more soil than twice its diameter. C.Mechanically Seeding (Drilling): 1. Uniformly distribute seed over the areas shown on the Drawings or as directed. 2. All varieties of seed and fertilizer, as determined by soil testing report, may be distributed at the same time provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. 3. Drill seed at a depth of 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch utilizing a pasture or rangeland type drill. 4. Drill on the contour of slopes 5. After planting roll with a roller integral to the seed drill, or a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. 6. Roll slope areas on the contour. D.Hydromulching (only as approved by submittals) 1. Mixing: Seed, mulch, fertilizer and water may be mixed provided that: a. Mixture is uniformly suspended to form a homogenous slurry. b. Mixture forms a blotter -like ground cover impregnated uniformly with grass seed. c. Mixture is applied within thirty (30) minutes after placed in the equipment. 2. Placing a. Uniformly distribute in the quantity specified over the areas shown on the Drawings or as directed. E. Fertilizing, as determined by soil testing report: uniformly apply fertilizer over seeded area. 1. No fertilizer shall be applied within The Tree Protection Area, or dripline of trees. F. Watering 1. Furnish water by means of temporary metering / irrigation, water truck or by any other method necessary to achieve an acceptable stand of turf as defined in 3.13. 2. Water source shall be clean and free of industrial waste or other substances harmful to the germination of the seed or growth of the vegetation. 3. Water soil to a minimum depth of 4-inches within forty-eight (48) hours of seeding. 4. Water at least twice daily for fourteen (14) days after seeding in such a manner as to prevent washing of the slopes or dislodgement of the seed, or as directed by the City. 5. On day fifteen (15), apply an amount of water that is equal to the average amount of rainfall plus 1/2-inch per week until final acceptance by City. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-7 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 7 of 8 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Seeded Areas 1. Water and mow seeded area until completion and final acceptance of the Project or as directed by the City. 2. Maintain the seeded area until each of the following is achieved: a. Vegetation is evenly distributed b. Vegetation is free from bare areas c. Trim and maintain along edges including curbs, drives, and walkways with maximum 1-inch surface elevation change. d. Includes protection, reseeding, and maintaining grades with no settlement over 1-inch, and immediate repair of erosion damage until the project receives final acceptance. B. Acceptance 1. Turf will be accepted once fully established as follows: a. Seeded area must have minimum 70 percent uniform ground coverage without bare areas greater than six -inches square or thirty-six (36) square inches and blade height of 3-inches with two (2) mow cycles, minimum ten (10) days apart, performed by the Contractor prior to consideration of acceptance by the City. b. Grass shall be actively growing and free of disease and pests. c. Ground surface to be smooth and free of foreign material and rocks or clods I - inch diameter and greater. C. Rejection City may reject seeded area based on the following items: a. Weed populations b. Poor installation including lack of coverage c. Disease and/or pests d. Insufficient or over watering e. Poor or improper maintenance f. Soil settlement in excess of 1-inch Install erosion control blankets onto all exposed slopes to be loamed and seeded that A are steeper than 4(Horizontal) to ](Vertical) as shown on the Drawings. Erosion control blankets shall also be installed in all seeded drainage swales and ditches, and as directed by the Engineer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-8 NON-NATIVE SEEDING Page 8 of 8 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE Removed information and details regarding sod, native grasses and wildflowers. These items are addressed in 32 92 13 and new specification 32 92 15. Updated 1.2 payment measurement. Items pertaining to fertilizer throughout document updated to 5/13/2021 C Moon include soil testing. 2.2 planting dates updated to reflect typical frost dates. 3.3 Preparation updated to reflect current industry tree care standards for root zone disturbance. 3.4 Installation added descriptions to clarify watering. 3.13 Maintenance added descriptions to clarify acceptance and rejection of seeded areas including growth, mow cycle and watering. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 329214-8 NON-NATIVE SEEDING DATE NAME Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE Page 8 of 8 Removed information and details regarding sod, native grasses and wildflowers. These items are addressed in 32 92 13 and new specification 32 92 15. Updated 1.2 payment measurement. Items pertaining to fertilizer throughout document updated to 5/13/2021 C Moon include soil testing. 2.2 planting dates updated to reflect typical frost dates. 3.3 Preparation updated to reflect current industry tree care standards for root zone disturbance. 3.4 Installation added descriptions to clarify watering. 3.13 Maintenance added descriptions to clarify acceptance and rejection of seeded areas including growth, mow cycle and watering. CITY OF FORT WORTH STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 0130 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 33 01 30 - 1 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page I of 6 1. Testing for sanitary sewer pipe and manholes prior to placing in service a. Low Pressure Air Test and Deflection (Mandrel) Test 1) Excludes pipe with flow. 2) Hydrostatic Testing is not allowed. b. Vacuum Testing for sanitary sewer manholes 2. Before any newly constructed sanitary sewer pipe and manholes are placed into service it shall be cleaned and tested. 3. Pipe testing will include low pressure air test for 60-inch pipe and smaller. 4. Pipe testing will include low pressure air test of joints for 27-inch or larger pipe. 5. Pipe testing will include deflection (mandrel) test for pipe. 6. Hydrostatic testing is not allowed for manholes. See Sections 33 31 13 and 33 31 15 for nine material specific hvdrostatic reauirements. 7. Manhole testing will include vacuum test. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. NoneModified I.I.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 3A.D. 4. Modified 3.7.A. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 01 90 00 03 74 00— Modifications to Existing Concrete 4. Section 33 04 50 — Cleaning of Sewer Mains 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard oipins bid item. B. e Testing a. =easuremant 1) Thy, lie ; side-i-o,l S..1.s;,1;,,.y to the nitafy o main (pipe-) wed in ezaoc. b. PaymeIt 1) The work F ed d tlho x su: fi mizhl in item are subsidiary to the unit pr-iee bid per- linear- feet of sanitaf:y sewer- Main (pipe) complete in place, and ems' compensation will be allow�cClr CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 30 - 2 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page 2 of 6 1) Me-a}sur-ement for- testing mankOuD�cWll b a per- eaek�vak� t b.Payment 1) TheweFk peFfFmed and the materialsfumis1}ed in aeeor-danee with this 14cm, dhall'a e ur t-, i e bid p each vaeuufn test eampleted. e. Tho pvo b d "..I inolu&-�- 1) Mobilization gsJr�ar. up 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports 1. All test reports generated during testing (pass and fail) 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications 1. Mandrel Equipment a. If requested by City, provide Quality Assurance certification that the equipment used has been designed and manufactured in accordance to the required specifications. 2. Joint Testing a. Testing Service — Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform joint evaluation tests. b. Equipment — If requested by City, provide Quality Assurance certification that the equipment used has been designed and manufactured in accordance to the required specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 30 - 3 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page 3 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Low Pressure Air Test (Pipe 60 inch and smaller) 1. Clean the sewer main before testing, as outlined in Section 33 04 50. 2. Plug ends of all branches, laterals, tees, wyes, and stubs to be included in test. B. Low Pressure Joint Air Test (Pipe 27 inch or larger) 1. Clean the sewer main before testing, as outlined in Section 33 04 50. 2. Assemble individual joint tester over each joint from within the pipe. C. Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe) 1. Perform as last work item before final inspection. 2. Clean the sewer main and inspect for offset and obstruction prior to testing. 3. Materials a. Mandrel used for deflection test: 1) Use of an uncertified mandrel or a mandrel altered or modified after certification will invalidate the deflection test. 2) Mandrel requirements a) Odd number of legs with 9 legs minimum b) Effective length not less than its nominal diameter c) Fabricated of rigid and nonadjustable steel d) Fitted with pulling rings and each end e) Stamped or engraved on some segment other than a runner indicating the following: (1) Pipe material specification (2) Nominal size (3) Mandrel outside diameter (OD) f) Mandrel diameter must be 95 percent of inside diameter (ID) of pipe. g) Mandrel equipment shall be suitable for the pipe material to prevent damage to the pipe. Consult manufacturer for appropriate mandrel equipment. D. Vacuum test (Manhole) 1. Plug lifting holes and exterior joints. 2. Plug pipes and stubouts entering the manhole. 3. Secure stubouts, manhole boots, and pipe plugs to prevent movement while vacuum is drawn. 4. Plug pipes with drop connections beyond drop. 5. Place test head inside the frame at the top of the manhole. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Low pressure air test (Pipe 60" Inch and Smaller) 1. Install plug with inlet tap. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 30 - 4 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page 4 of 6 2. Connect air hose to inlet tap and a portable air control source. 3. After the stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure) start the stop watch. 4. Determine time in seconds that is required for the internal air pressure to reach 2.5 psig. Minimum permissible pressure holding time per diameter per length of pipe is computed from the following equation: T = (0.0850*D*K) Q Where: T = shortest time, seconds, allowed for air pressure to drop to 1.0 psig K = 0.000419*D*L, but not less than 1.0 D = nominal pipe diameter, inches L = length of pipe being tested (by pipe size), feet Q = 0.0015, cubic feet per minute per square foot of internal surface 5. UNI-B-6, Table 1 provides required time for given lengths of pipe for sizes 4-inch through 60-inch based on the equation above. UNI-B-6, Table 1 Minimum specified time required for a 1.0 psig pressure drop for size and length of pipe indicated for q = 0.0015 Specifica ion Tune for Length (L) Shown 'min see) 1 2 3 4 Mmnnum Pipe Length for Time for Diameter Tine Muiunum Longer 100ft 150ft 200ft 250ft 300ft 350ft 400ft 450ft ((min: (m.) Time (ft) Length (sec) 4 346 597 .380 L 3:46 146 346 146 346 346 346 146 6 5:40 398 .854 L 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 624 8 7.34 298 1.520 L 734 734 734 734 736 8.52 10:08 1124 10 926 239 2.374 L 926 926 926 9:53 11.52 13.51 15:49 17:48 12 1120 199 3.418 L 1120 11:20 1124 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 2538:00 15 14:10 159 5.342 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26.42:00 31:09:00 35:36.00 4004:00 18 17:00 133 7.692 L 17:00 19.13 25:38:00 32:03.00 3827:00 44:52:00 51:16.00 57:41:00 21 19:50 114 10.470 L 19:50 26:10:00 34:54:00 43:37:00 5221:00 61:00:00 69:48.00 7831:00 24 22:40 99 13.674 L 22.47 34:11:00 45:34:00 56:58.00 6822:00 79.46:00 91:10:00 10233:00 27 2530:00 88 17.306 L 28:51:00 43:16:00 5741:00 72:07:00 86:32:00 100.57.00 11522:00 129:48:00 30 2820:00 80 21.366 L 35:37.00 5325A0 71:13:00 89:02.00 106:5000 124:38:00 14226.00 160:15:00 33 31:10:00 72 25.852 L 43:0500 64:38:00 86:10:00 107:43:00 129:16.00 150.43:00 17221.00 193.53:00 36 34:00:00 66 30.768 L 51:17:00 76155.00 1023400 128:12:00 153:50:00 179:2900 205:0700 230:46:00 42 394800 57 41.883L 6948,00 10442,00 1393700 17430:00 20924,00 2441900 279:13:00 31407:00 48 453400 50 54.705 L 911000 1364500 1822100 227:5500 2733100 3190600 364:4200 410:17:00 54 510200 44 69.236 L 1152400 1730500 2304700 2882900 3461100 4035300 4613400 519:16:00 60 56:40:00 40 85.476 L 142:28.00 213:4100 284:55:00 356:0900 4272300 498:37:00 569:5000 64104:00 6. Stop test if no pressure loss has occurred during the first 25 percent of the calculated testing time. B. Low pressure joint air test (27 Inch or larger pipe) 1. All pipe joints, for all pipe materials, shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 1103 as follows: 2. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers having more than five years of regular production of successful joint testers. Joint tester shall be as manufactured by Cherne Industrial, Inc., of Edina, Minnesota, or approved equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 30 - 5 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page 5 of 6 3. Follow equipment manufacturer's recommendations when performing tests; only experienced technicians shall perform tests. 4. The testing equipment shall be assembled and positioned over the center of the pipe joint and the end element tubes inflated to a maximum of 25 psi. 5. Pressurize the center joint test area to 4.0 psig and allow the temperature and pressure to stabilize at the minimum of 2.5 psig for a period of 2.0 minutes prior to testing. 6. To test, adjust the pressure to 3.5 psig and measure the time required to decrease the pressure from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig. 7. The joint is acceptable if the time for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig is greater than 10 seconds. C. Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe) 1. For pipe 36 inches and smaller, the mandrel is pulled through the pipe by hand to ensure that maximum allowable deflection is not exceeded. 2. Maximum percent deflection by pipe size is as follows: Nominal Pipe Size Inches Percent Deflection Allowed 12 and smaller 5.0 15 through 30 4.0 Greater than 30 3.0 D. Vacuum test (Manhole) 1. Test manhole prior to coating with epoxy or other material. 2. Draw a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury and turn off the pump. 3. With the valve closed, read the level vacuum level after the required test time. 4. Minimum time required for vacuum drop of 1 inch of mercury is as follows: Depth of 4-foot Dia 5-foot Dia 6-foot Dia Manhole, feet Seconds Seconds Seconds 8 20 26 33 10 25 33 41 12 30 39 49 14 35 45 57 16 40 52 67 18 40 59 73 ** T=5 T=6.5 T=8 ** For manholes over 18 feet deep, add "T" seconds as shown for each respective diameter for each 2 feet of additional depth of manhole to the time shown for 18-foot depth. (Example: A 30 foot deep, 4-foot diameter. Total test time would be 70 seconds). (40+6(5)=70 seconds) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 30 - 6 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING Page 6 of 6 5. Manhole vacuum levels observed to drop greater than 1 inch of mercury will have failed the test. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Non -Conforming Work 1. Low pressure air test (Pipe 60 Inch and smaller) a. Should the air test fail, find and repair leak(s) and retest. 2. Low pressure joint air test (Pipe 27 inch or larger) a. 100 percent of all joints shall be field tested, prior to the placement of backfill over the spring line of the pipe, after the pipe has been substantially locked in to place by embedment. If the pipe does not pass the field air test, the joint will be pulled and refitted or rejected and removed from the project. After full placement of backfill and proper compaction, 100% of all joints will be tested again, as the installation progresses. At no time shall pipe installation exceed 300 feet beyond the last joint tested. b. No more than 2 percent of the total number of joints failing to meet the requirements of this test shall be field repaired by joint grout injection, or band clamps, or other method. Any joints over 2% requiring field repairs shall be rejected and removed from the project site. Rejected pipe shall be removed from the project. Installation shall be stopped until defective joints are repaired or replaced. 3. She -aid Deflection (mandrel) test (Pipe) a. Should the mandrel fail to pass, the pipe is considered overdeflected. b. Uncover overdeflected pipe. Reinstall if not damaged. c. If damaged, remove and replace. 4. Vacuum test (Manhole) a. Should the vacuum test fail, repair suspect area and retest. 1) External repairs required for leaks at pipe connection to manhole. a) Shall be in accordance with Section W 90-00-03 74 00. 2) Leaks within the manhole structure may be repaired internally or externally. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330131-1 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 0131 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and procedures for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection of sanitary sewer 2. For City Capital Improvement Projects, which include sanitary sewer rehabilitation projects, a Post -CCTV is required. Pre -CCTV for mains will be project specific and noted on the plans. 3. For new development sanitary sewer installation, a Post -CCTV is required. 4. For all City Capital Improvement Projects and new development sanitary sewer installation, a Final Manhole CCTV is required. 5. Final -CCTV will be project specific, and would include major collector, arterial, County, Railroad, and TXDOT projects that include extensive paving, structures, drainage, and grading activities. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 3.3.C. 4. Modified 3.3.D. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 03 10 — Bypow-%wp�xg-nf Erric ng E wer- Systems Temporary Flow Management Svstems 4. Section 33 04 50 — Cleaning of Sewer Mains 5. Section 0132 16 — Construction Progress Schedule 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid Drice in the Proposal Form under the resvective vard piping bid item. 1. Measuremen a. TRo. sufem o.,t 9 th.6 rip. Will be by the l;, eaf: feet of line televised for- !' GT[7 inspection per-feffned prior- to any line modification or- replacement determined CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 2 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION - SANITARY SEWER Page 2 of 10 a. The , ,,,.L -peFf Fined and nWar��l.s fumished ix avem4 nee with this hem a -a measured as provided er- "Meal ams-u It" will be paid for- at the „„it priee 1) Goatractor will not be paid for unaccepted video. 3. ho prise -bid d-mll inol awe \1ioWk-xi b. G! e. Digital file B. Der v" 1n-pOLU.3a 1. Measor-emeat a. TRo.,sufe,Y o,,t for tlli0 Re.Y, will be by the linea- foot f line televised f F CCTV dictealoo r„ ,.,.,lea o the vide log a. Tho work parfefmed and materials a,,... ishea : ,,,.,1anee with this item an me-asufed-aspr-evided under "Measufemeat'will be paidfor- at tno unit pave bid per- linear- "Post CCT-V inspection". 1 Co tfaeter- will only be paid f video that ; aeeepted in wKking by Wmer- DopaFtr".xt, 3. The pr-iee bid shall inelude.: a. Mobilization b. G! i o. D1g1:-al Q to C. Finat C-GTN7 lfispeetl(m ice.=eastifemeat a. Measurement for this item will be 1,., t%:U liTUQ: F t Fl; �o tole.,;moo l F rrT�� laspeeti r per-foFmed fell ,,,: . ro er the distance r-eco to l An a. The work peFfefmed a -ad fnater-ials fumished in aeoeManee with this item a -ad fneasured-as r-ovided under"Measurement" will bepaid-zoc W-Jhe un-it pf-ise bid pef linear- f t per OCT ' RxTiodafIlL i)--Eeatr-aetor- will only be paid for video tL,crrcis zaccepte''d in v`riting 07'Wa4ei DepaAment. 3. Tic p6Qc yd aoll in-lude- a. b. Qeaaiag o. D4itz). file 1. Measur-ement a. Tiro 0 efA for- this item will be xch mmnkale, ; „ti„f, st,-,,.,t,,,-e, televised f CCT37 Tripe do per-fefmed fell ,,.,in rcpaiA mangle eoatfag final adjestmeats to gr-ade, anWer- i- stallatien deteFmined on the video a. The work perfofmed and materials fumished in meor-danee with this item and a easur-ed az psi ,,ided uadef: "N4easufexi "will be paid for- t the , r;t pr-iee pep-eask-€or"Final llcank". CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 -3 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 3 of 10 4-�—CAltrocotc , .il only be paid far -video tkat ; aeeepted4n-�vritmg by-)V-42F 3. Tho pnw Nd d'.\-t11 ink a—TN4ob;?iLtv� b. G7 GCl1TS e- Digital file 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. City of Fort Worth Water Department a. City of Fort Worth Water Department CCTV Inspection and Defect Coding Program (CCTV Manual). City of Fort Worth Water Department CCTV Inspection Log. B. Definitions 1. Pre -CCTV — CCTV Inspection performed by Contractor on existing mains prior to any line modification or replacement. 2. Post CCTV — CCTV Inspection performed by Contractor following installation of new mains but before completion of other infrastructure (i.e. streets, sidewalks, final grading, etc.) 3. Final CCTV — CCTV Inspection performed by Contractor on mains and manholes after all construction is complete. Includes CCTV of the manholes (including grade rings, casting, etc.) after street construction, final grading, and manhole coating, if the coating is required. C. Final Manhole CCTV — CCTV Inspection performed by Contractor on manholes and/or junction structures, after all construction is complete. Includes CCTV of the manholes/ (including grade rings, casting, etc.) after street construction, final grading, and manhole coating, if the coating is required. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Sanitary Sewer Lines a. Meet with City of Fort Worth Water Department staff to confirm that the appropriate equipment, software, standard templates, defect codes and defect rankings are being used, if required. B. Schedule 1. Include Pre, Post, Final Manhole, and Final CCTV schedule as part of the Construction Progress Schedule per Section 0132 16. 2. Allow time for City review (2 weeks minimum — Notification needs to be sent out to Project Manager, City Inspector, & Field Operations). Post -CCTV can be scheduled and submitted for review after each sewer main construction has been completed. 3. If CCTV is accepted by City Project Manager, proceed with work. If rejected, coordinate with City per Part 1.4 A. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 4 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 4 of 10 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All CCTV submittals shall be submitted to the City Inspector to be uploaded to common location for review and comment by Water Operations and Inspections. Alternatively, the Inspector can provide Contractor access to upload directly to common location. Inspection and Water Operations staff shall be notified when CCTV upload is completed. C. If inspected with Infrastructure Technologies IT Pipes Software per CCTV Manual provide video data per the CCTV Manual. Provide additional copy of video in video file MP4 with H.264 code — Advanced Video Coding and compression standard. D. If inspected with other software provide video data in video file MP4 with H.264 code — Advanced Video Coding and compression standard. E. Inspection Report shall include: 1. Asset a. Date of Inspection b. City c. Project Name (Address accepted if project name does not exist) d. Main Number — as shown on drawings or GIS ID (If Available) e. Upstream Manhole Station — as shown on drawings or GIS ID (If Available) f. Downstream Manhole Station — as shown on drawings or GIS ID (If Available) g. Pipe Diameter h. Material i. Pipe Length j. Mapsco Location Number k. Date Constructed 1. Pipe Wall Thickness in. Grade percentage n. Inspector Name 2. Inspection a. Inspection Number (i.e. 1 St, 2" d,etc...) b. Crew Number c. Operator Name d. Operator Comments e. Reason for Inspection f. Equipment Number g. Camera Travel Direction is Upstream to Downstream — Deviation will require written justification, with the exception of stubouts & abandonment plugs that will always be recorded from the downstream side. h. Inspected Length (feet) i. Work Order Number (if required) j. City Project Number (if required) k. City Contract Name 1. Consultant Company Name in. Consultant Contact Name n. Consultant Contact Phone Number o. Contractor Company Name p. Contractor Contact Name CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 -5 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 5 of 10 q. Contractor Contact Phone Number F. CCTV overlay screen shall include (opening text to CCTV inspection) a. Date of inspection b. City Name c. City Project number d. Project name e. Main number f. Upstream SS Manhole (or Plug) station g. Downstream SS Manhole station h. Diameter i. Grade/Slope j. Material k. Length 1. Contractor in. Inspectors name n. Travel direction o. Date Construction 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Pre- and Post CCTV submittals 1. CCTV video results shall be submitted to City that can be uploaded to shared common location by the inspection staff, upon confirmation that the submittal is complete (partial submissions are not accepted, except in special situations that are approved by the Water Department). For pre -CCTV submittals, approval of the submittal shall be provided by the Project Manager prior to construction start when connecting to existing sewer. 2. Alternatively, the Inspector can provide Contractor access to upload directly to common location. Inspection and Water Operations staff shall be notified when CCTV upload is completed in order to confirm submittal is complete. Inspection Report (separate report file for each individual shall be submitted to Inspector or directly uploaded to shared common location. B. Additional information that may be requested by the City: 1. Listing of cleaning equipment and procedures 2. Listing of flow diversion procedures if required 3. Listing of CCTV equipment 4. Listing of backup and standby equipment 5. Listing of safety precautions and traffic control measures 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Final CCTV shall not be completed until all manholes and surface covers are set to final grade. All as built changes to plan and profile drawings (redlines), are required to be reflected on the final CCTV inspection information. Final CCTV shall not be completed until all as built corrections have been made. 1. Final -CCTV submittals a. CCTV video results shall be submitted to City that can be uploaded to shared common location by the inspection staff, upon confirmation that the submittal is complete (partial submissions are not accepted, except in special situations CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 6 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 6 of 10 that are approved by the Water Department). Alternatively, the Inspector can provide Contractor access to upload directly to common location. Inspection and Water Operations staff shall be notified when CCTV upload is completed in order to confirm submittal is complete. Sanitary sewer video file(s) in MP4 with H.264 code Advanced Video Coding and compression standard b. City Project Number displayed within text of sanitary sewer video. c. Construction Plans identifying the line segments that were videoed. Include cover sheet, 1 digital copy of the redlines (Contractor to upload into Accela or BIM 360), overall line layout sheet(s), and plan and profile sheet(s). 1) One (1) 11 "X 17" copy d. Sanitary sewer line segment from drawings match line segments on Inspection Report. Recommend some minimum guidance for standardization of line segment submittals, to include proper identification of Project: name, CPN, line identification and stations, as well as format (e.g. PDF?) and minimum annotations required to explain deviations from policies as specified in this document, or any anomalies that are considered within tolerance. e. Inspection Report (separate report file for each individual shall be submitted to Inspector or directly uploaded to shared common location. f. Allow two (2) weeks to review before requesting final inspection. After review by the City Inspector and Water Field Operations, if applicable a combined set of punch list items will be submitted to the Contractor for correction. 1.8 J. CCTV SPEADSHEET LOG IN EXCEL FORMAT MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS A. Equipment- 1. Closed Circuit Television Camera a. The television camera used shall be one specifically designed and constructed for sewer inspection. Lighting for the camera shall be suitable to allow a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. The camera shall be operative in 100 percent humidity/submerged conditions. The equipment will provide a view of the pipe ahead of the equipment and of features to the side of the equipment through turning and rotation of the lens. The camera shall be capable of tilting at right angles along the axis of the pipe while panning the camera lens through a full circle about the circumference of the pipe. The lights on the camera shall also be capable of panning 90-degrees to the axis of the pipe. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 7 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 7 of 10 b. The radial view camera must be solid state color and have remote control of the rotational lens. The camera shall be capable of viewing the complete circumference of the pipe and manhole structure, including the cone -section or corbel. The camera lens shall be an auto -iris type with remote controlled manual override. Z. Video Capture System a. The video and audio recordings of the sewer inspections shall be made using digital video equipment. A video enhancer may be used in conjunction with, but not in lieu of, the required equipment. The digital recording equipment shall capture sewer inspection on USB drive, with each sewer segment (from upstream manhole to downstream manhole) inspection recorded as an individual file in MP4 with H.264 code format. b. The system shall be capable of printing pipeline inspection reports with captured images of defects or other related significant visual information on a standard color printer. c. The system shall store digitized color picture images and be saved in digital format on a USB drive. d. The system shall be able to produce data reports to include, at a minimum, all observation points and pertinent data. All data reports shall match the defect severity codes outlined in the City's CCTV manual (electronic copy available on Water Department's website — htto://fortworthtexas.iov/water/wastewater/CCTV Manual. e. Camera footage, date & manhole numbers shall be maintained in real time and shall be displayed on the video monitor as well as the video character generators illuminated footage display at the control console. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. General 1. Prior to inspection obtain pipe and manhole asset identification numbers from the plans or City to be used during inspections. Inspections performed using identification numbers other than the line number (or existing sanitary sewer main/lateral) and station numbers from plans or from assigned numbers from the City will not be accepted. 2. CCTV Inspection shall not commence until the sewer section to be televised has been completely cleaned in conformance with Section 33 04 50. 3. CCTV Inspection shall not commence until the sewer section to be televised has been completely cleaned in conformance with Section 33 04 50. (Sewer system should be connected to existing sewer system and should be active) 4. A final CCTV Inspection of newly installed sewers (not yet in service) shall not commence until completion of the following items: a. Manhole final grade is set (after street paving, under Final CCTV, Final Manhole CCTV) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 8 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 8 of 10 b. Manhole lining is complete (after street paving, under Final CCTV, Final Manhole CCTV) c. Sewer main is cleaned. d. Sewer air test is complete. e. Vacuum test of manholes. f. Installation of all lateral services and completion of low pressure testing of all new services g. All sewer main and manhole work is complete. Once reviewed and accepted by Water Field Operations the sewer system should be connected to existing sewer system and ready for use upon final acceptance of the project. 5. Temporary Bypass Pumping (if required) shall conform to Section 33 03 10. B. General 1. Use manual winches, power winches, TV cable, and power rewinds that do not obstruct the camera view, allowing for proper evaluation. C. Pipe 1. Begin inspection immediately after cleaning of the main. 2. Move camera through the line in either direction at a moderate rate, stopping when necessary to permit proper documentation of the main's condition. 3. Do not move camera at a speed greater than 30 feet per minute. 4. During investigation stop camera at each defect along the main. a. Record the nature, location and orientation of the defect or infiltration location as specified in the CCTV Manual. 5. Service connections, Pan the Camera to get a complete overview of service connection including zooming into service connection Include location (i.e. I o'clock, etc...) coo photos 17 th 23 for examples. 6. Joint defects, Include comment on condition, signs of damage, etc... Note offset and/or separation at a joint. Includes joints where one pipe is not correctly aligned with the connecting section of pipe causing a lip that could impede flow or a section of pipe that is aligned but has pulled apart horizontally and may not connect to the other section of pipe. Fioo 1.kkot9r24thpd 29, 35, 36 €efwrnr�rl�o. 7. Notate visible pipe defects such as cracks, broken or deformed pipe, holes, offset joints, obstructions, sags or debris (show as % of pipe diameter). If debris has been found in the pipe during the post or final -CCTV inspection, additional cleaning is required, and pipe shall be re -televised. See PhOtOs 1 +hf 12 f 4ll"aMPJ 0- 8. Notate Infiltration/Inflow locations. coo-Phetos; 1-3, 20 for- examples. 9. Notate Pipe material transitions. Coa-Phetes �n r _ 1QrsgJn 10. Notate other locations that do not appear to be typical for normal pipe conditions. For example, locations could include conflicts between the replaced main with other utilities (including paving and storm sewer), causing pipe deflections, sags, etc. holding water. This could also include any damage to the main and/or services after the main has been replaced. These locations could occur between the Post -CCTV and Final -CCTV submittals. See Pheto3 31 th�r 34 f examples CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 9 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 9 of 10 11. Note locations where camera is underwater and level as a % of pipe diameter. Camera underwater — Point in which the camera lens is 100% submerged underwater and/or 50% of the pipe's diameter. Camera emerged — Point in which the camera lens has emerged from being underwater. Severity is described in ranges by linear feet. This would include pipe deflections causing a considerable increase (i.e. double or more) in the depth of flow in the pipe (to at least between 1/3 to '/2 of the pipe diameter). See attached example photos at the end of this Specification showing the depth changes in % full of pipe. See Photos 14 ♦b.r 16 f examples. 12. Provide accurate distance measurement. a. The meter device is to be accurate to the nearest 1/10 foot. 13. CCTV recording segments are to be single continuous file item. a. A single segment is defined from manhole to manhole. b. Only single segment video's will be accepted and preferably include manhole inspections (manhole to manhole). c. Individual manhole inspection will require written justification, included under the Final -CCTV bid item. 14. Pre -Installation Inspection for Sewer Mains to be rehabilitated. a. Perform Pre -CCTV inspection immediately after cleaning of the main and before rehabilitation work. 1) No cleaning equipment in the main during CCTV. 2) Water shall be present (or flowing) while recording CCTV to confirm system functionality. b. If, during inspection, the CCTV will not pass through the entire section of main due to blockage or pipe defect, set up so the inspection can be performed from the opposite manhole. c. City Project Manager (PM) shall review and may consult with Sewer Projects Reporting and Operations (SPRO) and provide comments on identified defects. Contractor shall present proposed repair method(s) for approval by the City PM, before proceeding with construction. d. Coordinate with the Engineer to discuss Drovisions for repairing or replacing the impassable location are addressed in Section 33 31 20, Section 33 31 21, Section 33 3122 and Section 33 3123. 15. Post -and Final Installation Inspection a. Prior to inserting the camera, flush and clean the main in accordance to Section 33 04 50. Water should be present/flowing during the recording operation, to demonstrate the functioning of the installed system. 16. Documentation of CCTV Inspection a. Sanitary Sewer Lines 1) Follow the CCTV Manual (CCTV standard manual supplied by City upon request) for the inspection video, data logging and reporting or Part 1.5 E of this section. D. Manhole 1. Final Manhole CCTV Inspection recording segments, will reveal condition of manhole in its entirety, including corrosion protection if applicable. Camera should pan the entire manhole while lowering to include complete view of invert. This requirement applies to new manhole installations and rehabilitated manholes after epoxy lining installed, if applicable. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 01 31 - 10 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) INSPECTION — SANITARY SEWER Page 10 of 10 2. Notate Infiltration/Inflow locations for Pre -construction CCTV recordings. 3. Post -Installation CCTV Inspection is only done after all construction is complete. E. Complete fna+Aiele installation before inspeetion beg' 3.4 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.5 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.6 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.7 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.8 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.9 CLEANING A. See Section 33 04 50. 3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.11 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.12 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.13 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-1 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 33 03 10 TEMPORARY FLOW MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bypass pumping of the existing wastewater treatment plant systems impacted by construction, including but not limited to: seinersystem, ,; oa on M ixah an a. Scum well 8-inch D1Din2. b. Plant Sewer No. 1, 39-inch sewer. c. Administration building 6-inch sanitary sewer. d. diizester suDernatant 6-inch sanitary sewer. e. Aeration basin Nos. 9-13, 21-inch Process sewer. f. BvDassin2 intermittent drain flows from Gas Buildin2s'8-inch sewer. g. Additional bv_DassinR of storm sanitary or izroundwater flows as may be required. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. Added 1.1.A.2. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Added 1.3.A.3. 4. Added 1.4. 5. Added 1.6. 6. Added 1.9. 7. Added 1.11. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lum_D Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard pivinR bid item. B. Measwexnext a. r aeasu, e ffleff�t ' thic ite.., will be by lump caw. a. Thewer-kper-fefmed d na�z��-\lo f,,... is ea ; ,,fda- ee ..,itk thio I'.'Jm -i 11 be paid for- at the lunap sum pr-iee bid for- "Byp ;r Panrfing—. d oK..11 in k a. Mobiliza4io b. PevelepmefA ef b�pwm-p,ana c. Tag CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-2 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 2 of 8 e. +o ginned s Jaee eii4fy �rrcTbb"'b b. IL-a���ing h Clean tip i. Manhole restoration , . c. +• � o 0st 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. Occupational Safety and Health Organization (OSHA). 3. Texas Water Code Section 26.121. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Schedule meeting with City to review sewer shutdown prior to replacing or rehabilitating any facilities. 2. City reserves the right to delay schedule due to weather conditions, or other unexpected emergency within the sewer system. 3. Review bypass pumping arrangement or layout in the field with City prior to beginning operations. Facilitate preliminary bypass pumping run with City staff present to affirm the operation is satisfactory to the City. 4. After replacement or rehabilitation of facilities, coordinate the reestablishment of sewer flow with City staff. 5. Provide onsite continuous monitoring during all bypass pumping operations using one of the following methods: a. Personnel on site b. Portable SCADA equipment B. Scope of Work 1. The design, installation, and operation of temporary by-pass Dumping systems shall be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall provide the services of a professional bypass company who can demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer that the company specializes in the design and operation of temporary by-Dass pumping systems. The by-Dass system shall meet the rea_uirements of all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain temporary by-Dass Dumping systems so that they are completely functional throughout the required period of service. 3. Following the reauired period of service, remove Contractor furnished materials and equipment from site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-3 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 3 of 8 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Ito; 1 ° iivh an,4larger- sewer- lines, sSubmit a detailed plan and description outlining all provisions and precautions that will be taken with regard to the handling of sewer flows. Submit the plan to the City for approval a minimum of 7 days prior to commencing work. Include the following details: 1. Schedule for installation and maintenance of the bypass pumping system 2. Staging areas for pumps 3. Pump sizes, capacity, number of each size, and power requirements. Also include number of Dump units Der system, diesel engine specifications, fuel tank ca_acity_ , fuel consumption requirements, and method of refueling. 4. Calculations for static lift, friction losses, and velocity 5. Pump curves showing operating range and system head curves. 6. Sewer plugging methods. 7. Size, length, material, joint type, and method for installation of suction and discharge piping 8. TemDorary DiDe suDDorts, anchorage, cover material and other accessories as reauired to stabilize the DiDin2 system. 9. List of recommended spare Darts to be stored on -site for emerr2encv maintenance. 10. Method of noise control for each pump and/or generator, if required 11. Standby power generator size and location 12. Suction and discharge piping plan 13. Emergency action plan identifying the measures taken in the event of a pump failure or sewer spill. Addtitionallv_ , include Vendor Dhone number and Dater number for 24-hour service. 14. Staffing plan for responding to alarm conditions identifying multiple contacts by name and phone numbers (office, mobile) 15. A contin2encv Dlan to implement in the event the replacement or rehabilitation has unexpected delays. 16. Verification of anticipated flow rates from Dlant Dersonnel. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT r�DI A. The Contractor shall emDlov the services of a vendor who can demonstrate 5 vears of recent and continuous specialization in the design, installation, operation and removal of temDorary by -bass DumDin2 systems in wastewater aDDlications. The complete system shall be furnished from a sinele vendor who shall be capable of Drovidin2 service staff, repair Darts and replacement of anv deficient system component within 4 hours of a service call, twentv-four hours Der dav, seven days Der week. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] En11111111117fy Y Y 11 [KI7►117 Y Y [I7►f.�!�_`:!_'� !c� "_! !�] A. Scum piping. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-4 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 4 of 8 1. Temporary by-Dass piping from a tie-in East of C.B. Rav and relocated as indicated on the drawings. 2. System is run intermittently dependent upon scum wells float switches. Total system flow rate during operation is estimated to be approximately_ 240 gpm (gallons Der minute). Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass Dieing system. B. Plant Sewer No. 1. 1. Temporary by-Dass piping and Dumped as shown on the drawings. 2. System is run continuously. Total system flow rate is estimated to be approximately 4-8 MGD (million gallons Der day). Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass Dumping and piping system. C. Administration building sanitary sewer. 1. Temporary by-pass piping and Dump as shown on the drawings. 2. System is run continuously. Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass Dumping and piping system. D. 6" Supernatant 1. Temporary by-pass piping and Dumping as shown on the drawings. 2. System is run intermittently by two alternating sump pumps. Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass Dumping and DiDiniz system. E. Aeration basin Nos. 9-13 Process drain. 1. Temporary by-pass piping and Dumping as shown on the drawings. 2. System is run intermittently. Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass pumping and piping system. F. Bypassing intermittent drain flows from Gas Buildings' drain. 1. Contractor shall submit for approval the connection. 2. System is run intermittently by two alternating sump pumps and is currently discharged into box H. Proposed line will connect to the 96-inch influent line. Contractor to confirm flow rates with City. 3. The Contractor is responsible for providing_ all materials, equipment and incidentals to install, operate, and maintain the bypass Dumping and piping system. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-5 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 5 of 8 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Pumping 1. Provide equipment that will convey 100 percent of wet weather peak flow conditions. 2. Provide fully automatic self -priming pumps. Foot -valves or vacuum pumps are not permitted for priming the system. 3. Pumps must be constructed to allow dry running for periods of time to account for the cyclical nature of sewer flow. 4. Provide 1 stand-by pump for each size to be maintained on site. Place backup pumps online, isolated from the primary system by valve. 5. If multiple pumps are required to meet the flow requirements, provide the necessary fittings and connections to incorporate multiple discharges. 6. Noise levels of the pumping system must follow the requirements of the City noise ordinance for gas wells. B. Piping 1. Install pipes with joints which prevent the incident of flow spillage. C. Plugs or Stop Logs 1. Plugs a. Select a plug that is made for the size and potential pressure head that will be experienced. b. Provide an additional anchor, support or bracing to secure plug when back pressure is present. c. Use accurately calibrated air pressure gauges for monitoring the inflation pressure. d. Place inflation gauge at location outside of confined space area. Keep the inflation gauge and valve a safe distance from the plugs. e. Never over inflate the plug beyond its pressure rating. 2. Stop Logs a. Use stop log devices designed for the manhole or sewer vault structure in use. b. If applicable, obtain stop logs from City that may be used on specific structures. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-6 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 6 of 8 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Locate the bypass pipelines in area to minimize disturbance to existing utilities and obtain approval of those locations from the City. B. Make preparations to comply with OSHA requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases, oxygen -deficient atmospheres and confined spaces. C. Do not begin bypass preparation and operation until City approval of the submittals requested per this Specification. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install and operate pumping and piping equipment in accordance to the submittals provided per this Specification. B. Sewer flow stoppage 1. Plugging a. Use confined space procedures and equipment during installation when necessary. b. Thoroughly clean the pipe before insertion of the plug. c. Insert the plug seal surface completely so it is fully supported by the pipe. d. Position the plug where there are not sharp edges or protrusions that may damage the plug. e. Use pressure gauges for measuring inflation pressures. f. Minimize upstream pressure head before deflating and removing. C. Sewer flow control and monitoring 1. Take sufficient precautions to ensure sewer flow operations do not cause flooding or damage to public or private property. The Contractor is responsible for any damage resulting from bypass pumping operations. 2. Begin continual monitoring of the sewer system as soon as the sewer is plugged or blocked. Be prepared to immediately start bypass pumping if needed due to surcharge conditions. 3. Sewer discharge may be into another sewer manhole or appropriate vehicle or container only. Do not discharge sewer into an open environment such as an open channel or earthen holding facility. 4. Do not construct bypass facilities where vehicular traffic may travel over the piping. a. Provide details in the suction and discharge piping plan that accommodate both the bypass facilities and traffic without disrupting either service. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-7 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 7 of 8 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field [OR] Site Tests and Inspections 1. Perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping pipe and equipment before actual operation begins. Have City staff on site during tests. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Once plugging or blocking is no longer necessary, remove in such a way that permits the sewer flow to slowly return to normal — preventing surge, surcharging and major downstream disturbance. 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330310-8 BYPASS PUMPING OF EXISTING SEWER SYSTEMS Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General 1. Before any newly constructed potable water mains will be permitted to be placed into service in the Fort Worth Water Department's Water Distribution System, clean (purge) and test, or clean, disinfect, and test until the bacteria count within the water main meets the standards established by the Fort Worth Water Department and the requirements of Chapter 290 of the Texas Administrative Code (TAC) established by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified I.I.C. 2. Added I.I.D. 3. Modified 1.2. 4. Removed 1.4. 5. Added 1.5. 6. Modified 3.10. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 01 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 01 31 — Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and SuDDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections. apply to this gertinn 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard Dipin2 bid item. 13. Tkia Item is eensideicc'-va!-�-,idraiy to the wa4er main being Cleafled and Tested-. 1. Payment are „bsidi.,.y to ,.io,,, ing disinfection, hydrostatic testing and t,acter-io ,.,.iea testing and ahsal be sub sidi fy t o exit pr�co bid per- linear- feet ,.f..•ater-pipe eampleto in pl oo, ana ne other compensation ill bo allay 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 2 of 10 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Water Works Association/American (AWWA): a. C301, Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel -Cylinder Type. b. C303, Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar -Wrapped, Steel -Cylinder Type. c. C651, Disinfecting Water Mains. d. C655, Field De -Chlorination. 1.4 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] A. Subtw +gals 1. l ag Mwn PA' t the sta# of eeff st -7ueti c,�. detailing the a%\*'lqds-a-ad sehedule, ineludiag.L a. A detailed desovifti-oxl af ,loam g p ,.o,luFes b_ Pigging e t y and oxitpo,le.. o. Fluo1. 'v�g praeeduFes d. Plarz&-and h;4fauho oalr-Ila:' . -f. Dor anal 2. D z;Ai€eotiDn Pllar. pri^r t the startt ,.feenst,ueti n subp ;t ., a;s;fif ,.tin &\i ;rig a. The methd nixing ana inti f ,a,, oing ,.Mere,,. h. rluo!��xg J. S&ffl lffg 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED A. Submittals For 24-inch and larger water mains. Drovide the following: 1. Cleaning Plan — Prior to the start of construction, submit a water main cleaning Dlan detailing the methods and schedule, including: a. A detailed description of cleaning Drocedures b. Pigging entry and exit Dorts. c. Flushing Drocedures d. Plans and hvdraulic calculations to demonstrate adequate flushing velocities. e. Control of water £ Disposal 2. Disinfection Plan — prior to the start of construction submit a disinfection plan including: a. The method mixing and introducing chlorine. b. Flushing c. De -chlorination d. Sampling CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 3 of 10 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.10 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.11 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES A. Pigs 1. Open cell polyurethane foam body 2. Densities between 2 pounds per cubic foot up to 8 pounds per cubic foot 3. May be wrapped with polyurethane spiral bands 4. Abrasives are not permitted, unless expressly approved by the City in writing for the particular application. 5. Must pass through a reduction up to 65 percent of the cross sectional area of the nominal pipe diameter 6. Pigs shall be able to traverse standard piping arrangements such as 90 degree bends, tees, crosses, wyes, and gate valves. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 4 of 10 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION [NOT USED] 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING A. General 1. All water mains shall be cleaned prior to bacteriological testing. a. Pig all 36-inch and smaller water mains. b. Pig or manually sweep 42-inch and larger mains. c. Flushing is only permitted when specially designated in the Drawings, or if pigging is not practical and approved by the City. B. Pigging Method If the method of pigging is to be used, prepare the main for the installation and removal of a pig, including: a. Furnish all equipment, material and labor to satisfactorily expose cleaning wye, remove cleaning wye covers, etc. b. Where expulsion of the pig is required through a dead -ended conduit: 1) Prevent backflow of purged water into the main after passage of the pig. 2) Install a mechanical joint to provide a riser out of the trench on 12-inch and smaller mains to prevent backwater re-entry into the main. 3) Additional excavation of the trench may be performed on mains over 12 inches, to prevent backwater re-entry into the main. 4) Flush any backflow water that inadvertently enters the main. c. Flush short dead-end pipe sections not swabbed by a pig. d. Once pigging is complete: 1) Pigging wyes shall remain in place unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Install cleaning wye, blind flanges or mechanical joint plugs. 3) Plug and place blocking at other openings. 4) Backfill CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 5 of 10 5) Complete all appurtenant work necessary to secure the system and proceed with disinfection. C. Flushing Method Prepare the main by installing blow -offs at appropriate locations, of sufficient sizes and numbers, and with adequate flushing to achieve a minimum velocity in the main of 2.5 feet per second. a. Minimum blow -off sizes for various main sizes are as follows: 1) 4-inch through 8-inch main - 3/4-inch blow -off 2) 10-inch through 12-inch main —I -inch blow -off 3) 16-inch and greater main — 2-inch blow -off b. Flushing shall be subject to the following limitations: 1) Limit the volume of water for flushing to 3 times the volume of the water main. 2) Do not unlawfully discharge chlorinated water. 3) Do not damage private property. 4) Do not create a traffic hazard. c. Once Flushing is complete: 1) Corporations stops used for flushing shall be plugged. D. Daily main cleaning 1. Wipe joints and then inspect for proper installation. 2. Sweep each joint and keep clean during construction. 3. Install a temporary plug on all exposed mains at the end of each working day or an extended period of work stoppage. E. Hydrostatic Testing All water main that is to be under pressure, shall be hydrostatically tested to meet the following criteria: a. Furnish and install corporations for proper testing of the main. 1) Furnish adequate and satisfactory equipment and supplies necessary to make such hydrostatic tests. 2) The section of line to be tested shall be gradually filled with water, carefully expelling the air and the specified pressure applied. b. The City will furnish water required for the testing at its nearest City line. c. Expel air from the pipe before applying the required test pressure. d. Test Pressure 1) Test pressures should meet the following criteria: a) Not less than 1.25 (187 psi minimum) times the stated working pressure of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test section. b) Not less than 1.5 (225 psi minimum) times the stated working pressure at the lowest elevation of the test section. e. Test Conditions 1) Must be at least 2-hour duration. 2) Add water as necessary to sustain the required test pressure. 3) Test fire hydrants to the fire hydrant valve. a) Leave the isolation valve on the fire hydrant lead line open during the hydrostatic testing. 4) Test service lines to curb stop. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 6 of 10 a) Leave the corporation stop on the service line open during the hydrostatic testing. 5) Close isolation valves for air release valves. 6) Makeup water must come from a container of fixed 55-2allon container that does not have a water source. f. Measure all water used in the pressure test through an approved meter or measure the difference in volume within a 55-gallon container. 1) Do not test against existing water distribution valves unless expressly provided for in the Drawings or approved by the City. 2) If the City denies approval to test against existing water distribution system valve, then make arrangements to plug and test the pipe at no additional cost. 2. Allowable Leakage a. No pipe installation should be accepted if the amount of makeup water is greater than that determined using the following formula: In inch -pound units, Where: L = SD 4P 148,000 L = testing allowance (make up water), gallons per hour S = length of pipe tested, ft. D = nominal diameter of pipe, in. P = average test pressure during the hydrostatic test, psi b. For any pipeline that fails to pass hydrostatic test: 1) Identify the cause. 2) Repair the leak. 3) Restore the trench and surface. 4) Retest c. All costs associated with repairing the pipeline to pass the hydrostatic test is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and included in the price per linear foot of pipe. d. If the City determines that an existing system valve is responsible for the hydrostatic test to fail, the Contractor shall make provisions to test the pipeline without the use of the system valve. e. There shall be no additional payment to the Contractor if the existing valve is unable to sustain the hydrostatic test and shall be included in the price per linear foot of pipe. F. Disinfection 1. General a. Disinfection of the main shall be accomplished by the "continuous feed" method or the "slug" method as determined by the Contractor. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 7 of 10 b. The free chlorine amounts shown are minimums. The Contractor may require higher rates. 1) Calcium hypochlorite granules shall be used as the source of chlorine. c. Continuous Feed Method 1) Apply water at a constant rate in the newly laid main. a) Use the existing distribution system or other approved source of supply. 2) At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine. a) Free chlorine concentration: 50 mg/L minimum, or as required by TCEQ, whichever is greater. b) Chlorine applications shall not cease until the entire conduit is filled with heavily chlorinated water. 3) Retain chlorinated water in the main for at least 24 hours. a) Operate valves and hydrants in the section treated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. b) Prevent the flow of chlorinated water into mains in active service. c) Residual at the end of the 24-hour period: 10 mg /L free chlorine, minimum, for the treated water in all portions of the main. 4) Flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main and dispose of in a manner and at a location accepted by the City. 5) Test the chlorine residual prior to flushing operations. a) If the chlorine residual exceeds 4 mg/L, the water shall remain in the new main until the chlorine residual is less than 4 mg/L. b) The Contractor may choose to evacuate the water into water trucks, or other approved storage facility, and treat the water with Sodium Bisulfate, or another de -chlorination chemical, or method appropriate for potable water and approved by the City until the chlorine residual is reduced to 4 mg/L or less. c) After the specified chlorine residual is obtained, the water may then be discharged into the drainage system or utilized by the Contractor. d. Slug Method 1) Water from the existing distribution system or other approved source of supply shall be made to flow at a constant rate in the newly laid main. 2) At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine. a) Free chlorine concentration: 100 mg/L minimum, or as required by TCEQ, whichever is greater. b) The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient time to develop a solid column or "slug" of chlorinated water that shall expose all interior surfaces to the "slug" for at least 3 hours. 3) Operate the fittings and valves as the chlorinated water flows past to disinfect the appurtenances. 4) Prevent the flow of chlorinated water into mains in active service. 5) Flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main and dispose of in a manner and at a location accepted by the City. 6) Upon completion, test the chlorine residual remaining in the main. a) Chlorine levels of 4 mg/1 or less should be maintained. 2. Contractor Requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 8 of 10 a. Furnish all equipment, material and labor to satisfactorily prepare the main for the disinfection method approved by the City with adequate provisions for sampling. b. Make all necessary taps into the main to accomplish chlorination of a new line, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. c. After satisfactory completion of the disinfection operation, as determined by the City, remove surplus pipe at the chlorination and sampling points, plug the remaining pipe, backfill and complete all appurtenant work necessary to secure the main. G. Dechlorination 1. General. All chlorinated water shall be de -chlorinated before discharge to the environment. Chemical amounts, as listed in ANSI/AWWA C651: "Disinfecting Water Mains", shall be used to neutralize the residual chlorine concentrations using de -chlorination procedures listed in ANSI/AWWA C655: "Field De -Chlorination". De -Chlorination shall continue until chlorine residual is non -detectable. 2. Testing. Contractor shall continuously test for the chlorine residual level immediately downstream of the de -chlorination process, during the entire discharge of the chlorinated water. Contractor shall periodically conduct chlorine residual testing and check for possible fish kills at locations where discharged water enters the existing watershed. 3. Fish Kill. If a fish kill occurs associated with the discharge of water from the distribution system or any other construction activities: a. The Contract shall immediately alter activities to prevent further fish kills. b. The Contractor shall immediately notify Water Department Field Operations Dispatch. c. The Contractor shall coordinate with City to properly notify TCEQ. d. Any fines assessed by the TCEQ (or local, state, or federal agencies) for fish kills shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. H. Bacteriological Testing (Water Sampling) 1. General a. Notify the City when the main is suitable for sampling. b. The City shall then take water samples from a suitable tap for analysis by the City's laboratory, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 1) No hose or fire hydrant shall be used in the collection of samples. 2. Water Sampling a. Complete microbiological sampling prior to connecting the new main into the existing distribution system in accordance with AWWA C651. b. Collect samples for bacteriological analysis in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulfate. c. Collect 2 consecutive sets of acceptable samples, taken at least 24 hours apart, from the new main. d. Collect at least 1 set of samples from every 1,000 linear feet of the new main (or at the next available sampling point beyond 1,000 linear feet as designated by the City), plus 1 set from the end of the line and at least 1 set from each branch. e. If trench water has entered the new main during construction or, if in the opinion of the City, excessive quantities of dirt or debris have entered the new CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 9 of 10 main, obtain bacteriological samples at intervals of approximately 200 linear feet. f. Obtain samples from water that has stood in the new main for at least 16 hours after formal flushing. 3. Repetition of Sampling a. Unsatisfactory test results require a repeat of the disinfection process and re - sampling as required above until a satisfactory sample is obtained. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 40 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF WATER MAINS Page 10 of 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 04 50 CLEANING OF PIPES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 33 04 50 - 1 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 1 of 6 A. General 1. Before any television inspection, pipes shall be cleaned to remove all debris, solids, sand, grease, grit, etc. from the sewer and manholes. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None -Added 1.1.1). 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 3.10.13 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 0131 — Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection — Sanitary Sewer 4. Section 33 0132 — Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection — Storm Drain/Storm Sewer D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SuDDlementary Conditions and Division 01 S_ecification Sections, a_p_DIV to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lum_D Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. Gleaning of Pipe 1. Measur-ement and Paymen a. T ro 1) This 7to., eensider-ed subs dia- to the a Laing elean o l awl iei�s 1) The Work peffefmedand the-, matpm�Alsfiwnished in ;40-'0-'Ar-d;444ee with this item are subsidiafy to the unit pr-iee bid per- linear- feet of pipe eemplete in place, andno other sempensatien will be ally B. Cleaning f Pipe Cendition Assessmentfor- S xm Dimon 1. M@asur-ement and Payme a. T e n 1) Th item is to bo rsaaziarad by the linear- feet when peFfaFmed ahead� on w0-jro:1":So,..t rRe—as -r-e e t for- this item will be by -the lineaf: foot of pipe eleaned--. b. Pa en CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 50 -2 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 2 of 6 item and measured under "Measurement" e unit bidper- linear- feet f r uJlJan &.afm Pipe Ahead ofGend t Assessment" for different rang—az afpipe diameters and no ,,.>,o, Eompeasa4i-_\I -nil b2 allowed. 1.3 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS 2.2 PRODUCT TYPES A. Use only the type of cleaning material which will not create hazards to health or property or affect treatment plant processes. 2.3 ACCESSORIES 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION [NOT USED] 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 50 -3 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 3 of 6 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING A. General 1. All materials, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete the cleaning of pipes and manholes must be present on the jobsite prior to isolating the manhole or line segment and beginning the cleaning process. 2. Maintain clean work and surrounding premises within the work limits seas to comply with Federal, State, and local environmental and anti -pollution laws, ordinances, codes, and regulations when cleaning and disposing of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. 3. Keep the work and surrounding premises within work limits free of accumulations of dirt, dust, waste materials, debris, and rubbish. 4. Suitable containers for storage of waste materials, debris, and rubbish shall be provided until time of disposal. a. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to secure a licensed legal dump site for the disposal of this material. b. Under no circumstances shall sewage or solids removed from the main or manhole be dumped onto streets or into ditches, catch basins, storm drains, or sanitary sewers. 5. The cleaning process shall remove all grease, sand, silts, solids, rags, debris, etc. from each sewer segment, including the manhole(s). 6. Selection of cleaning equipment and the method for cleaning shall be based on the condition of the pipes at the time work commences and will be subject to approval by the City. 7. All cleaning equipment and devices shall be operated by experienced personnel. 8. Satisfactory precautions shall be taken to protect the pipes and manholes from damage that might be inflicted by the improper use of the cleaning process or equipment. 9. Any damages done to a sewer main and/or structure by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost and to the satisfaction of the City. 10. Cleaning shall also include the manhole wall washing by high pressure water jet. 11. The Contractor may be required to demonstrate the performance capabilities of the cleaning equipment proposed for use on the project. a. If the results obtained by the proposed pipe cleaning equipment are not satisfactory, the Contractor shall use different equipment and/or attachments, as required, to meet City satisfaction. b. More than 1 type of equipment/attachments may be required at a location. 12. When hydraulic or high velocity cleaning equipment is used, a suitable sand trap, weir, dam, or suction shall be constructed in the downstream manhole in such a manner that all the solids and debris are trapped for removal. 13. Whenever hydraulically -propelled cleaning tools which depend upon water pressure to provide their cleaning force, or any tool which retard the flow of water in the pipes are used, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the water pressure created does not cause any damage or flooding to public or private property being served by the manhole section involved. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 50 -4 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 4 of 6 14. Any damage of property, as a result of flooding, shall be the liability and responsibility of the Contractor. 15. The flow of wastewater present in a sanitary sewer main shall be utilized to provide necessary fluid for hydraulic cleaning devices whenever possible. 16. When additional quantities of water from fire hydrants are necessary to avoid delay in normal working procedures, the water shall be conserved and not used unnecessarily. a. No fire hydrant shall be obstructed or used when there is a fire in the area. b. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the fire hydrant, water meter and all related charges for the set-up, including the water usage bills from respective water purveyor agency. c. All expenses shall be considered incidental to the cleaning of the existing pipes. B. Methods Hydraulic Cleaning a. Hydraulic -propelled devices which require a head of water to operate must utilize a collapsible dam. b. The dam must be easily collapsible to prevent damage to the sewer main, property, etc. c. When using hydraulically -propelled devices, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the water pressure created does not cause damage or flood public or private property. d. Do not increase the hydraulic gradient of the sanitary sewers beyond the elevation that could cause overflow of sewage into area waterways or laterals. e. The flow of wastewater present in a sanitary sewer main shall be utilized to provide necessary fluid for hydraulic cleaning devices whenever possible. 2. High -Velocity Cleaning a. Cleaning equipment that uses a high velocity water jet for removing debris shall be capable of producing a minimum volume of 50 gpm, with a pressure of 1,500 psi, for a pipe and 3,500 psi for the (manhole) structure at the pump. 1) Any variations to this pumping rate must be approved, in advance, by the City. 2) To prevent damage to older pipes and property, a pressure less than 1500 psi can be used. 3) A working pressure gauge shall be used on the discharge of all high- pressure water pumps. 4) For pipes 18 inches and larger in diameter, in addition to conventional nozzles, use a nozzle which directs the cleaning force to the bottom of the pipe. 5) Operate the equipment so that the pressurized nozzle a a+.t+„os to move �+ all always continues to move. 6) The pressurized nozzle shall be turned off or reduced anytime the hose is on hold or delayed in order to prevent damage to the line. 3. Mechanical Cleaning a. Mechanical cleaning, in addition to normal cleaning when required, shall be with approved equipment and accessories driven by power winching devices. b. Submit the equipment manufacturer's operational manual and guidelines to the City, which shall be followed strictly unless modified by the City. c. All equipment and devices shall be operated by experienced operators so that they do not damage the pipe in the process of cleaning. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 50 - 5 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 5 of 6 d. Buckets, scrapers, scooters, porcupines, kites, heavy duty brushes, and other debris -removing equipment/accessories shall be used as appropriate and necessary in the field, in conjunction with the approved power machines. e. The use of cleaning devices such as rods, metal pigs, porcupines, root saws, snakes, scooters, sewer balls, kites, and other approved equipment, in conjunction with hand winching device, and/or gas, electric rod propelled devices, shall be considered normal cleaning equipment. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 04 50 -6 CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS PIPES Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 1 of 30 SECTION 33 05 10 - UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL 1J:11.14aMCI Il 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Excavation, Embedment and Backfill for: a. Pressure Applications 1) Water Distribution or Transmission Main 2) Wastewater Force Main 3) Reclaimed Water Main b. Gravity Applications 1) Wastewater Gravity Mains 2) Storm Sewer Pipe and Culverts 3) Storm Sewer Precast Box and Culverts 2. Including: a. Excavation of all material encountered, including rock and unsuitable materials. b. Disposal of excess unsuitable material C. Site specific trench safety d. Pumping and dewatering e. Embedment f. Concrete encasement for utility lines g. Backfill h. Compaction B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified I. LC 2. Added 1.1.1) 3. Modified 1.2 4. Added.1.3.A 5. Added 1.6.A 6. Modified 2.2.A 7. Modified 3.3.A.5 8. Modified 3.4 9. Added 3.5 10. Modified 3.8 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 2 of 30 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 02 41 13 — Selective Site Demolition 4. Section 02 41 15 — Paving Removal 5. Section 02 41 14 — Utility Removal/Abandonment 6. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -place Concrete 7. Section 03 34 13 — Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) 8. Section 31 10 00 —Site Clearing 9. Section 3123 19 - Dewateriniz 10. Section 3125 00 — Erosion and Sediment Control 11. Section 33 05 26 — Utility Markers/Locators 12. Section 34 71 13 — Traffic Control D. Related Documents Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SunDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Bid Item shall be at the Lump Sum bid Drice in the Proposal Form for construction of the Primary Clarifier Improvements Proiect and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals reauired to complete the Work in its entiretv as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified, including mobilization/demobilization, construction, and cleanup. Ta-,ae E..,..,yat on, En' jd e t and Baek-fill . iate t with th3 i-xoWll tieI3--o€ an tmdefgfotmd utility or- exea-vation. ; eonsid a aubddia,-y-4o ON i:nt, lm a f the utility designatedpipeline as in tin Dive ings: 'c. Il7TA_iI# this item afe eensidefed stibsidiafy to the installation of the t4ilit-y . the t�Te f embedment and baek ill az; inaieatoa on the p!ann. Na other- bo a?lowed. 2. Imp CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 3 of 30 1) Measured by the ,.,,bie and as delivered to the site and reeorded t,., t. tek tieket p idea t the City, .b. Pa;fnet4 1) Imp\ ed €rl�shal�en 1---j paid w-hen min mats fef .. bed,,. en4 a- d b.,ekfi i other than those identified in o Drew -imp, The work pedefmed and , er-i is f;,,.Y fished in wearda-nee with Pre bid item and measured as proceed tifider "Measlireffief ' be paid for -at -the unit prieebid per cube r ^f "Ir p���d EmbedfneP,4iu. ek f4ii" delivered t the Site for: Q� Tke pr-iee bid Aral.? imolude: 1) or- emb 2nt-xxipeeified by this Speeifie4ion, 2) Laukmg to tIN -e tc 3Eonc— olo EReasementio: Ukht- a. Measufeffien i� ,..�!tsrs!r�st��rasze�.r:e!'ssst-ri 'a. Nyffw ft ?) Thy item a -ad measur-ed as pfeyidunder- "Measufement�'—`v'e'ill be pain Utility Lines" per- plan "antit�- C% Tke pr-iee bid zlx-.\kl ilssitide: 1) Fum ohi.g, Imulixg, rt.,,.;,,g and finishing , -ete , or -char,. with Seetio 03 30 nn up bo 11 '-sp Mn. ,l ho'n a p- ux . ,.,to- , rt-o plan ?lv,t oh-ll be per:ho !ur.-,p mr, rviaa Kd for- ;' ate Eontml" i�zu CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 4 of 30 a) Frabmi4&6 e) � tef eentrel system ifistall4ion d}Grotmd water eontrof system operations zed t intanarja o) D4 .,lof wa4e z f)Renoval of gt:otmdA,ater eontfolsy stem Tr-neh Sa€ety tfeaeh safety ; aeeor-danee with ncu n e atio,, s - ',a , . ...q (29—CHR Alert 19-26 F/Apa jl-. Ai 5mient l) Tk work pow t-.iiato %wished K-, Cora ree with this Iton, and nsaasrlred an "Measur-ement" will be p fef a4 the unit pr-iee bid per- linear feet of eKeavatioa to eemply wi ncu n e atio,. safety st.,,..,tafds (29 CTF Kart l 92�50 ll. . P), ir\zudiag bt4 not limited to, all zvakmtka!z, .mar and cquiMxxv . 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. General — Definitions used in this section are in accordance with Terminologies ASTM F412 and ASTM D8 and Terminology ASTM D653, unless otherwise noted. 2. Percent Compaction: Means at least the stated percentage of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. 3. Definitions for trench width, backfill, embedment, initial backfill, pipe zone, haunching bedding, springline, pipe zone and foundation are defined as shown in the following schematic: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 z w Mi n m w 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 5 of 30 \\\�\ aPAVEU AREAS'" UNPAVED AREAS f\//f\/ _'.ilk: +L.'`1c n+aF>4_.A, /X\J \ F INITIAL BACKFILL SPRINGLINE HAUNCHING BEDDING FOUNDATION J U Q M J Q Z L� z 0 w fl- OD CLEARANCE EXCAVATED TRENCH WIDTH 4. Deleterious materials — Harmful materials such as clay lumps, silts and organic material 5. Excavated Trench Depth — Distance from the surface to the bottom of the bedding or the trench foundation. 6. Final Backfill Depth a. Unpaved Areas — The depth of the final backfill measured from the top of the initial backfill to the surface. b. Paved Areas — The depth of the final backfill measured from the top of the initial backfill to bottom of permanent or temporary pavement repair. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM Standards: a. ASTM C33-08 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates b. ASTM C88-05 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 6 of 30 C. ASTM C136-01 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate d. ASTM D448-08 Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. e. ASTM C535-09 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large -Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine f. ASTM D588 — Standard Test method for Moisture -Density Relations of Soil -Cement Mixture g. ASTM D698-07 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Stand Efforts (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 600 Kn-m/M3)). h. ASTM 1556 Standard Test Methods for Density and Unit Weight of Soils in Place by Sand Cone Method. i. ASTM 2487 — 10 Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) j. ASTM 2321-09 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications k. ASTM D2922 — Standard Test Methods for Density of Soils and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 1. ASTM 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) In. ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculations of Relative Density OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration CFR 29, Part 1926-Safety Regulations for Construction, Subpart P - Excavations 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Utility Company Notification a. Notify area utility companies at least 48 hours in advance, excluding weekends and holidays, before starting excavation. b. Request the location of buried lines and cables in the vicinity of the proposed work. B. Sequencing 1. Sequence work for each section of the pipe installed to complete the embedment and backfill placement on the day the pipe foundation is complete. 2. Sequence work such that proctors are complete in accordance with ASTM D698 prior to commencement of construction activities. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 7 of 30 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide detailed drawings and explanation for ground water and surface water control, if required. 2. Trench Safety Plan in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration CFR 29, Part 1926-Safety Regulations for Construction, Subpart P - Excavations a. Submit method of excavation and trench support, where necessary, including design of sheeting and bracing with calculations signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparations. 3. Stockpiled excavation and/or backfill material. a. Provide a description of the storage of the excavated material only if the Contract Documents do not allow storage of materials in the right-of-way of the easement. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage 1. Within Existing Rights -of -Way (ROW) a. Spoil, imported embedment and backfill materials may be stored within existing ROW, easements or temporary construction easements, unless specifically disallowed in the Contract Documents. b. Do not block drainage ways, inlets or driveways. C. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 3125 00. d. Store materials only in areas barricaded as provided in the traffic control plans. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 8 of 30 e. In non -paved areas, do not store material on the root zone of any trees or in landscaped areas. 2. Designated Storage Areas a. If the Contract Documents do not allow the storage of spoils, embedment or backfill materials within the ROW, easement or temporary construction easement, then secure and maintain an adequate storage location. b. Provide an affidavit that rights have been secured to store the materials on private property. C. Provide erosion control in accordance with Section 3125 00. d. Do not block drainage ways. e. Only materials used for 1 working day will be allowed to be stored in the work zone. 3. Deliveries and haul -off - Coordinate all deliveries and haul -off. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions 1. Any data which has been or may be provided on subsurface conditions is not intended as a representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soils. It is expressly understood that neither the City nor the Engineer will be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the Contractor. 2. Data is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials B. U4ihty San' G. Cmnular and ffoo f4ewing D. Gefier-a4ly meets or c-r"­cdo the limits on det eter-i "o ouSj-e o aggreg-atc�—.eioordi CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 9 of 30 F. Gffadat a li�iZ'T)J*Lii1�ymaterial ;„durao parK,don, fee fthi elongated r T- lunips of elay-,4oarm or vagetable matter- and meets the following gradation may be used for- t4ilit-y sand effibedment�baekfill, and 3 with fallowilrrg limts whe teste , H. > io re- e L Pef:cen; Retained d. 2 K. 0 L. 1�" M. 2. Dupak- o emFihea reek of e . ed como olso 4. May be tiffwashed `. silt la-yor- unsuitable materials ?. '-Tot dxxi c 12 p c. itla sulfate .A S 8. Screened Gravel a. Pine bedding material for concrete, ductile iron and steel nines shall consist of screened gravel. Screened Gravel shall be hard, durable, rounded, or sub-ani_ular Darticles of Droner size and gradation, and shall be free of sand, loam, clay_ , excess fines, and other deleterious materials. The material shall conform to the following gradation: Grain -Size Distribution for Screened Gravel Sieve Size Percent Finer By Weight 518-inch 100 1/2-inch 40 to 100 3/8-inch 15 to 45 No_ 10 0105 ii Fine Qushed Re& CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 10 of 30 a. Duralb-11e o ,she rook �-,QA e. May be unwashe d. Fr om c�g��i fteafi4 silt,. ay of unsuitable materials. o. IIave a e enta e fwear not more than nn p ent per- ASTM C13i or C535 f. Not mono tl.. n a 12-pereeW, maxirnlm loss sodium sulfate soundness p- ASTM G t 5 , when subjeeti e eles of 10 Ballast Stone I. 9ton. dimvn-, ,n. 12. May be tmwashed 13. Fmo f.,,,,., ri foe f4 silt el y or imvaitzlJzi tea: s 14. Per-eentage of wear- not more than 4 0 pefeent per- AST-N4 15. 1`t7t thns a 12 per-ee .%axi-.\-.un lass when „lF re G 13 1 or- C53 5 t 5 , f s,,di subjeeted eles soundness per ASTM C88 16. AooWe to Baek-fill Tyr., e fi l 4-7. In eta or in. paKaseils classifiedas-CT�ef ASTM iT P:24 8 7 GC in acoordanee with L4. Froo ftom told+o ; ,,s r +o ; ls, boulder-s over- ti ; ^''ovilq sizo andga iss 44-.—Cax bo plaoea fee f.,,,,, voids Must have 20 „ the 200 -20. ent passing number sieve 21. Blended Backfill Material a. In -situ soils classified as SP, SM, GP or GM in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Blended with in -situ or imported acceptable backfill material to meet the requirements of an Acceptable Backfill Material C. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics d. Must have 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve. 22. Acceptable Backfill Material a. In -situ or imported soils classified as CL, CH, SC or GC in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Free from deleterious materials, boulders over 6 inches in size and organics C. Can be placed free from voids. d. Must have at least 20 percent passing the number 200 sieve, unless otherwise noted. 23. Unacceptable Backfill Material a. In -situ soils classified as ML, MH, PT, OL or OH in accordance with ASTM D2487 b. Includes existing fill materials, organic soils, weak native soils, or clays with a Dlasticitv index of treater than 50, and anv materials that cannot be Droperly placed and compacted as specified. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 11 of 30 24. Common Fill a. Common fill shall be approved on site excavated material or imported fill material that is composed of durable soil free of debris, organic matter, or other deleterious materials. Common fill shall not contain stones larger than 6 inches in largest diameter, a maximum of 75 percent Dassin2 the No. 200 sieve, and a maximum dry density of at least 105 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) as determined by ASTM D698. Common fill shall not contain granite blocks, broken concrete, masonry rubble, or other similar materials and shall have Dhvsical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted during filling. 25. Select Fill a. Classified as SC or CL in accordance with ASTM D2487. b. Have no more than 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. C. Liquid limit less than 2-5-40 d. Plasticity index between,95 and 2815 e. Contain stones no larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension. f. Have a maximum dry density of at least 105 pcf as determined by ASTM D (9R_ 26. Structural Fill a. Pipe bedding material for flexible pipe, including plastic and fiberglass pipe shall consist of Qranular material conforming to structural fill. Structural fill shall consist of mineral soil free of organic material, loam, debris, frozen soil or other deleterious material which may be compressible, or which cannot be Properly compacted. Structural fill should consist of materials with the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 1.5-in 100 No. 4 20 to 70 No. 40 5 to 35 No. 200 0 to 10 b. Structural fill should have a maximum liquid limit of 50 Percent, maximum Plasticity index of 10 Percent, and a maximum dry density of at least 105 Dcf as determined by ASTM D698. 27. Cement Stabilized Sand (CSS) Sand 1) Shall be clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C33 and the following requirements: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 12 of 30 a) Classified as SW, SP, or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D2487 b) Deleterious materials (1) Clay lumps, ASTM C142, less than 0.5 percent (2) Lightweight pieces, ASTM C123, less than 5.0 percent (3) Organic impurities, ASTM C40, color no darker than standard color (4) Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. b. Minimum of 4 percent cement content of Type III portland cement C. Water 1) Potable water, free of soils, acids, alkalis, organic matter or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94 d. Mix in a stationary pug mill, weigh -batch or continuous mixing plant. e. Strength 1) 50 to 150 psi compressive strength at 2 days in accordance with ASTM D1633, Method A 2) 200 to 250 psi compressive strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D1633, Method A 3) The maximum compressive strength in 7 days shall be 400 psi. Backfill that exceeds the maximum compressive strength shall be removed by the Contractor for no additional compensation. f. Random samples of delivered product will be taken in the field at point of delivery for each day of placement in the work area. Specimens will be prepared in accordance with ASTM D 1632. 28. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) a. Conform to Section 03 34 13 29. Impervious Fill a. Have 100 percent of material passing the 1.5-inch sieve. b. Have at least 50 percent 1)assinR the No. 200 sieve. C. Have a liquid limit of at least 30 percent. d. Have a plasticity index between 20 and 50. e. Have a maximum dry density of at least 85 pounds pcf as determined by ASTM D698. 30. Trench Geotextile Fabric a. Soils other- than NR ORT in m-veTdaft-v with AST-M D2 b. Needle punch, nonwoven geotextile composed of polypropylene fibers. C. Fibers shall retain their relative position. d. Inert to biological degradation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 13 of 30 e. Resist naturally occurring chemicals. f. UV Resistant g. Mirafi 140N by Tencate, or approved equal. I, Soils Classified NIL or- nu ; ,a ,, , . o ;tt ,ETT/I rJ2/4.$7 -y monofilament polypropylene woven yarn High tenaeit n-eent f 4 ti 0 + � e o 0 0 0r+o 0 0r 11. Fibers _shall retain t>,o; relative sit; , 1. Inai4 to bielegieal ,ao,.,.,,datio,, UV R-.vic%t 0, or aN aved e"al p. Filter fabric to be installed to completely separate unlike backfill materials at pipe bedding interface with native clay soils, common fill, select fill, structural fill and impervious fill. q. Structural fill at interface with native clav soils and, common fill. r. Screened gravel and fine crushed rock shall be separated from surrounding soils by use of a filter fabric. 31. Concrete Encasement a. Conform to Section 03 30 00. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. Review all known, identified or marked utilities, whether public or private, prior to excavation. 2. Locate and protect all known, identified and marked utilities or underground facilities as excavation progresses. 3. Notify all utility owners within the project limits 48 hours prior to beginning excavation. 4. The information and data shown in the Drawings with respect to utilities is approximate and based on record information or on physical appurtenances observed within the project limits. 5. Coordinate with the Owner(s) of underground facilities. 6. Immediately notify any utility owner of damages to underground facilities resulting from construction activities. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 14 of 30 7. Repair any damages resulting from the construction activities. B. Notify the City immediately of any changed condition that impacts excavation and installation of the proposed utility. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection of In -Place Conditions 1. Pavement a. Conduct activities in such a way that does not damage existing pavement that is designated to remain. 1) Where desired to move equipment not licensed for operation on public roads or across pavement, provide means to protect the pavement from all damage. b. Repair or replace any pavement damaged due to the negligence of the contractor outside the limits designated for pavement removal at no additional cost to the City. 2. Drainage a. Maintain positive drainage during construction and re-establish drainage for all swales and culverts affected by construction. 3. Trees a. When operating outside of existing ROW, stake permanent and temporary construction easements. b. Restrict all construction activities to the designated easements and ROW. C. Flag and protect all trees designated to remain in accordance with Section 31 1000. d. Conduct excavation, embedment and backfill in a manner such that there is no damage to the tree canopy. e. Prune or trim tree limbs as specifically allowed by the Drawings or as specifically allowed by the City. £ Pruning or trimming may only be accomplished with equipments specifically designed for tree pruning or trimming. g. Remove trees specifically designated to be removed in the Drawings in accordance with Section 31 10 00. 4. Above ground Structures a. Protect all above ground structures adjacent to the construction. b. Remove above ground structures designated for removal in the Drawings in accordance with Section 02 41 13. 5. Traffic CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 15 of 30 a. Maintain existing traffic. except as modified by the traffic control plan, and in accordance with Section 34 71 13. b. Do not block access to driveways or alleys for extended periods of time unless: 1) Alternative access has been provided. 2) Proper notification has been provided to the property owner or resident. 3) It is specifically allowed in the traffic control plan. C. Use traffic rated plates to maintain access until access is restored. 6. Traffic Signal — Poles, Mast Arms, Pull boxes, Detector loops. a. Notify the City's Traffic Services Division a minimum of 48 hours prior to any excavation that could impact the operations of an existing traffic signal. b. Protect all traffic signal poles, mast arms, pull boxes, traffic cabinets, conduit and detector loops. C. Immediately notify the City's Traffic Services Division if any damage occurs to any component of the traffic signal due to the contractors' activities. 7. Repair any damage to the traffic signal poles, mast arms, pull boxes, traffic cabinets, conduit and detector loops as a result of the construction activities. 8. Fences a. Protect all fences designated to remain. b. Leave fence in the equal or better condition as prior to construction. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Excavation 1. Excavate to a depth indicated on the Drawings. 2. Trench excavations are defined as unclassified. No additional payment shall be granted for rock or other in -situ materials encountered in the trench. 3. Excavate to a width sufficient for laying the pipe in accordance with the Drawings and bracing in accordance with the Excavation Safety Plan. 4. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm and free from standing water. a. Notify the City immediately if the water and/or the in -situ soils do not provide for a firm trench bottom. b. The City will determine if any changes are required in the pipe foundation or bedding. 5. Unless otherwise permitted by the Drawings or by the City, the limits of the excavation shall not advance beyond the pipe placement so that the trench may be backfilled in the same day. 6. Over Excavation CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 I:1 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 16 of 30 a. Fill over excavated areas with the specified bedding material as specified for the specific pipe to be installed. b. No additional payment will be made for over excavation or additional bedding material. 7. Unacceptable Backfill Materials a. In -situ soils classified as unacceptable backfill material shall be separated from acceptable backfill materials. b. If the unacceptable backfill material is to be blended in accordance with this Specification, then store material in a suitable location until the material is blended. C. Remove all unacceptable material from the project site that is not intended to be blended or modified. Rock — No additional compensation will be paid for rock excavation or other changed field conditions. Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing 1. Engage a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas to design a site specific excavation safety system in accordance with Federal and State requirements. 2. Excavation protection systems shall be designed according to the space limitations as indicated in the Drawings. 3. Furnish, put in place and maintain a trench safety system in accordance with the Excavation Safety Plan and required by Federal, State or local safety requirements. 4. If soil or water conditions are encountered that are not addressed by the current Excavation Safety Plan, engage a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas to modify the Excavation Safety Plan and provide a revised submittal to the City. 5. Do not allow soil, or water containing soil, to migrate through the Excavation Safety System in sufficient quantities to adversely affect the suitability of the Excavation Protection System. Movable bracing, shoring plates or trench boxes used to support the sides of the trench excavation shall not: a. Disturb the embedment located in the pipe zone or lower. b. Alter the pipe's line and grade after the Excavation Protection System is removed. C. Compromise the compaction of the embedment located below the spring line of the pipe and in the haunching. C. Water Control 1. Surface Water a. Furnish all materials and equipment and perform all incidental work required to direct surface water away from the excavation. 2. Ground Water CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 17 of 30 a. Furnish all materials and equipment to dewater ground water by a method which preserves the undisturbed state of the subgrade soils. b. Do not allow the pipe to be submerged within 24 hours after placement. C. Do not allow water to flow over concrete until it has sufficiently cured. d. Engage a Licensed Engineer in the State of Texas to prepare a Ground Water Control Plan if any of the following conditions are encountered: 1) A Ground Water Control Plan is specifically required by the Contract Documents 2) If in the sole judgment of the City, ground water is so severe that an Engineered Ground Water Control Plan is required to protect the trench or the installation of the pipe which may include: a) Ground water levels in the trench are unable to be maintained below the top of the bedding. b) A firm trench bottom cannot be maintained due to ground water. c) Ground water entering the excavation undermines the stability of the excavation. d) Ground water entering the excavation is transporting unacceptable quantities of soils through the Excavation Safety System. e. In the event that there is no bid item for a Ground Water Control and the City requires an Engineered Ground Water Control Plan due to conditions discovered at the site, the contractor will be eligible to submit a change order. £ Control of ground water shall be considered subsidiary to the excavation when: 1) No Ground Water Control Plan is specifically identified and required in the Contract Documents g. Ground Water Control Plan installation, operation and maintenance 1) Furnish all materials and equipment necessary to implement, operate and maintain the Ground Water Control Plan. 2) Once the excavation is complete, remove all ground water control equipment not called to be incorporated into the work. h. Water Disposal 1) Dispose of ground water in accordance with City policy or Ordinance. 2) Do not discharge ground water onto or across private property without written permission. 3) Permission from the City is required prior to disposal into the Sanitary Sewer. 4) Disposal shall not violate any Federal, State or local regulations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 18 of 30 D. Embedment and Pipe Placement 1. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, embedment for prestressed concrete cylinder pipe, bar wrapped cylinder concrete pipe, ductile iron pipe and reinforced concrete pipe shall be screened Gravel. 2. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, embedment for coated steel pipe, polvethvlene wrapped ductile iron pipe, and all flexible pipe, including plastic and fiberglass pipe shall be structural fill. 3. Provide pipe bedding material under all pipe for the full width of the trench. Minimum depth of bedding material below the pipe barrel shall be as shown on the Drawings or as specified. 4. Minimum depth of pipe bedding material under the pipe bell shall not be less than 6 inches under normal trench conditions and not less than 6 inches in rock excavation areas. Minimum depth of pipe bedding material below the pipe shall be as shown on the Drawings. 5. Placement: a. Place the pipe bedding or foundation stabilization material for the full width of the trench in lavers not exceeding 6 inches deep and compact each laver, until the material does not yield or move to the trade established for the pipe bedding. Where the distance to stable P-round is excessive (more than two (2) feet), the Owner reserves the right to order as an extra, in writing, such other tv_ _pes of foundation or pipe su_vorts as he shall deem necessary. b. Particular attention must be given to the area of the pipe zone from the flow line to the sorin2line of the pipe to ensure that firm support is obtained to prevent any lateral movement of the Dim during the final backfillina of the pipe zone. 6. Compaction a. Compact embedment materials with hand operated mechanical compaction devices. b. All embedment materials, which includes material placed in trench bottom for Dipe foundation, and all material within the Dipe zone shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 Dercent of maximum dry density defined by ASTM D698 for cohesive material. For coarse aureRate material, compact to a minimum of 75 Dercent of relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254, whichever is aDDlicable. 7. Water Lines less than, or equal to, 12 inches in diameter: a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Utility sand shall be generally used for embedment as indicated elsewhere. .&,r io in cuf :o pmr" the"t uoe ei=ushedioak- az ombodmefft. 1) if emshed mck �0 not speeifieally identified in the—CoiAfae -Doou -AmU, oruohad r-et\k oi'.1.1 b3 paid by the pr-e bid unit CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 19 of 30 d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. e. Provide firm, uniform bedding. f. Place pipe on the bedding in accordance with the alignment of the Drawings. g. In no case shall the top of the pipe be less than 42 inches from the surface of the proposed grade, unless specifically called for in the Drawings. h. Place embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6 inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe. i. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to 6 inches above the elevation of the valve nut. j. Form all blocking against undisturbed trench wall to the dimensions in the Drawings. k. Compact embedment and initial backfill. 1. Place marker tape on top of the initial trench backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 26. Water Lines 16-inches through 24-inches in diameter: a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Utility sand may be used for embedment when the excavated trench depth is less than 15 feet deep, as indicated elsewhere. C. Gnashed r-eek Screened gavel or structural fill shall be used for embedment for excavated trench depths 15 feet, or greater, unless shown otherwise. d. Gnashed ,.,.,ar Screened :?ravel shall be used for embedment for steel pipe. e. Provide trench geotextile fabric at any location where en screened gavel ^r fire ,...as e,a .,,,a- come into contact with utility sand or fine -gained soils. f. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. g. Provide firm, uniform bedding. h. Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. j. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown on the Drawings. k. The pipeline shall be within: 1. f3 inches of the elevation on the Drawings for 16-inch and 24-inch water lines In. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. n. Place remaining embedment including initial backfill to a minimum of 6 inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe. o. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to up to the valve nut. p. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D 698. q. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of embedment meets requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 20 of 30 Place trench geotextile fabric on top of the initial backfill. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with Section 33 05 26. 9. Water Lines 30-inches and greater in diameter a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Screened gravel or structural fill Cizushe reek shall be used for embedment, as indicated elsewhere. C. Provide trench geotextile fabric at any location where ^ram screened gravel come into contact with utility sand or fine-grained soil. d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. e. Provide firm, uniform bedding. 1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. 2)) if additieaal et-ashedoal- ii3 :aqair-ed h`li i3 rat ✓Aaeifieally identified the !',,..+,aet nB11m'Ylta, the ei-ashed reek shall be paid by the pr-e bid unit price. £ Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown on the Drawings. g. The pipeline shall be within: h. f 1 inch of the elevation on the Drawings for 30-inch and larger water lines i. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. j. For steel pipe greater than 30 inches in diameter, the initial embedment lift shall not exceed the spring line prior to compaction. k. Place remaining embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6 inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe. 1. Where gate valves are present, the initial backfill shall extend to up to the valve nut. In. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D 698. n. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of embedment meets requirements. o. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of the initial backfill. p. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with Section 33 05 26. 10. Sanitary Sewer Lines (including Gravity and Pressure) and Storm Sewer Lines a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Q=ashed Peek Screened gravel or structural fill shall be used for embedment, as indicated elsewhere. C. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. d. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no sags in the sanitary sewer pipeline. e. Provide bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and alignment of the joint. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 21 of 30 f. Provide firm, uniform bedding. 1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. 2) if idditional emshed rockk is r2quired whicZi io nc speEifieall identified in the Contraet Documents, then erushed +06l- ohall be paid by the pfe bid unit pr-iee. g. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment shown in the Drawings. h. The pipeline shall be within ±0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent with the grade shown on the Drawings. i. Place and compact embedment material to adequately support haunches in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. j. Place embedment in lifts not to exceed 6 inches loose and compact. k. Place remaining embedment including initial backfill to a minimum of 6 inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe. 1. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D 698. In. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of embedment meets requirements. n. Wrap entire pipe embedment zone in Reotextile fabric. Overlap fabric a minimum to two inches above initial backfill, and where two sections of fabric meet, so there are no Zaps in the Qeotextile fabric. o. Place marker tape on top of the trench geotextile fabric in accordance with Section 33 05 26. 11. Storm Sewer (RCP) a. The bedding and the pipe zone up to the spring line shall be of uniform material. b. Screened travel or structural fill Gt=ushe r^^' shall be used for embedment up to the spring line, as indicated elsewhere. C. The specified backfill material may be used above the spring line. d. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. e. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no sags in the storm sewer pipeline. £ Provide firm, uniform bedding. g. Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. h. if additional ionc-,t-ip2eifiea11y identified ; the r rfaet r,,.^„..�te, th . --,ruoh--d-+e0l- o.�1.1 bo raid by the pr-e bid tmit pr-iee. i. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings. j. The pipeline shall be within ±0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent with the grade, shown on the Drawings. k. Place embedment material up to the spring line. 1. Place embedment to ensure that adequate support is obtained in the haunch. In. Compact the embedment and initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D 698. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 22 of 30 n. Density test may be performed by City to verify that the compaction of embedment meets requirements. o. Place trench geotextile fabric on top of pipe and crushed rock. 12. Storm Sewer Reinforced Concrete Box a. Screened travel or structural fill Crushed t shall be used for bedding, as indicated elsewhere. b. The pipe zone and the initial backfill shall be: e Gf ashed leek, e d. Acceptable backfill material compacted to 95 percent Standard Proctor density. e. Place evenly spread compacted bedding material on a firm trench bottom. f. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no sags in the storm sewer pipeline. g. Provide firm, uniform bedding. h. Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. i K-onal crlrrinx- the Centraet Dee»elfts,-thon-Tuohed-foal- ohall ba paid by the a bid ttait pnee. j. Fill the annular space between multiple boxes with screened gravel or CLSM according to 03 34 13. k. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings. 1. The pipe shall be within f0.1 inches of the elevation, and be consistent with the grade, shown on the Drawings. In. Compact the embedment initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698. 13. Water Services (Less than 2 Inches in Diameter) a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Screened sravel or structural fill Utility sad shall be generally used for embedment, as indicated elsewhere. C. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. d. Provide firm, uniform bedding. e. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Plans. £ Compact the initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698. 14. Sanitary Sewer Services a. The entire embedment zone shall be of uniform material. b. Screened travel or structural fill rr she ,-e t_ shall be used for embedment, as indicated elsewhere. C. Place evenly spread bedding material on a firm trench bottom. d. Spread bedding so that lines and grades are maintained and that there are no sags in the sanitary sewer pipeline. e. Provide firm, uniform bedding. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 23 of 30 1) Additional bedding may be required if ground water is present in the trench. 2) if additional endshed r-aek is r-e"irediz �x + speeifieally identified i the Contact Documents, then efiashed ,.ock ohall be paid by the pr-e bid unit pr-iee. f. Place pipe on the bedding according to the alignment of the Drawings. g. Place remaining embedment, including initial backfill, to a minimum of 6 inches, but not more than 12 inches, above the pipe. h. Compact the initial backfill to 95 percent Standard Proctor ASTM D698. i. Density test may be required to verify that the compaction meets the density requirements. E. Trench Final Backfill Placement At a minimum, place backfill in such a manner that the required in -place density and moisture content is obtained, and so that there will be no damage to the surface, pavement or structures due to any trench settlement or trench movement. a. Meeting the requirement herein does not relieve the responsibility to damages associated with the Work. 2. No excavated material or excessively large rocks (largest dimension treater than 4 inches) or debris of anv sort are to be placed into the backfill. No appreciable weight of anv sort, other than backfill, shall be allowed on the pipe until it has been covered to such a depth that damage to the pipe or ioints will not occur. The top 6 inches of backfill shall be topsoil free from rock outside of paved area. 3. Method of Consolidation a. The Contractor shall provide a method of consolidation of material 12 inches or more above the pipe. Backfill material shall be compacted in lavers from 6 to 8 inches in thickness of loose fill. This material may be placed mechanically or by other means to provide at least 95% of maximum dry density at 0 to 4 percent above optimum moisture or the compaction indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere herein. Where the soil PI is less than 20, the compaction moisture content shall be within + 3% of optimum. Such material shall be tested and approved by the Engineer before continuing. b. Material not meeting required compaction shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. See Item 5 below for deep -fill requirements. C. Fill depths between 15 ft to 25 ft shall be compacted to 98% ASTM D 698. Fill depths between 25 ft to 35 ft shall be compacted to 100% ASTM D698. 4. Backfill Material a. Final backfill depth less than 15 feet (under existing or proposed pavement) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 24 of 30 1) Backfill with: a)Aceeptablebaekfill material b) Blel3ded4"Igll tn�,\l., or c) Select Structural fill backfill material d) CSS, or e) CLSM when specifically required. 2) Acceptable backfill is not allowed under existing or proposed pavement. b. Final backfill depth less than 15 feet (not under existing or proposed pavement). 1) Backfill with: a) Acceptable backfill material. b) Blended backfill material, or c) Select backfill material, CSS, or CLSM when specifically_ reauired. E Final backfill depth 15 feet or greater: pavemen4) 1) Backfill depth from 0 to 15 feet deep. a) Backfill wi&as indicated above. 2) Aceeptablzi bmhfili =t 5) Backfill depth from 15 feet and greater. a) Backfill with: (1) Select Fill (2) Structural Fill (3) CSS, or (4) CLSM when specifically required. 6) Acceptable backfill is not allowed under existing pavement. d. Nina1 'c l-f l . pest) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 25 of 30 h. Backfill for service lines: 1) Backfill for water or sewer service lines shall be the same as the requirement of the main that the service is connected to. 5. Required Compaction and Density a. Final backfill (depths less than 15 feet under existing or future pavement) 1) Compact select or structural aeo tVabv backfill ffi&t.��al, Klefide baek111 na�orkar select baekfill o a minimum of 98 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D698 at moisture content within -2 to +5 4 percent of the optimum moisture. 2) CSS or CLSM requires no compaction. b. Final backfill (depths less than 15 feet, not under existin4 or future pavement) 1) Compact acceptable backfill material, blended backfill material or select backfill to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D698 at moisture content within -2 to +4 _percent of the optimum moisture. 2) CSS or CLSM reauires no compaction. C. Final backfill (depths 15 feet and greater/under existing or future pavement) 1) Compact seleestructural backfill to a minimum of 98 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D 698 at moisture content within -2 to +-5 4 percent of the optimum moisture. 2) CSS or CLSM requires no compaction. d. Final backfill (depths 15 feet and greater/not under existing or future pavement) 1) Compact acceptable backfill material blended backfill material or select backfill to a minimum of 95 percent Standard Proctor per ASTM D 698 at moisture content within -2 to +5 percent of the optimum moisture. 6. Saturated Soils CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 26 of 30 a. If in -situ soils consistently demonstrate that they are greater than 5 percent over optimum moisture content, the soils are considered saturated. b. Flooding the trench or water jetting is strictly prohibited. C. If saturated soils are identified in the Drawings or Geotechnical Report in the Appendix, Contractor shall proceed with Work following all backfill procedures outlined in the Drawings for areas of soil saturation greater than 5 percent. d. If saturated soils are encountered during Work but not identified in Drawings or Geotechnical Report in the Appendix: 1) The Contractor shall: a) Immediately notify the City. b) Submit a Contract Claim for Extra Work associated with direction from City. 2) The City shall: a) Investigate soils and determine if Work can proceed in the identified location. b) Direct the Contractor of changed backfill procedures associated with the saturated soils that may include: (1) (2) 7. Placement of Backfill Imported backfill A site specific backfill design a. Use only compaction equipment specifically designed for compaction of a particular soil type and within the space and depth limitation experienced in the trench. b. Flooding the trench or water setting is strictly prohibited. C. Place in loose lifts not to exceed 12 inches. d. Compact to specified densities. e. Compact only on top of initial backfill, undisturbed trench or previously compacted backfill. f. Remove any loose materials due to the movement of any trench box or shoring or due to sloughing of the trench wall. g. Install appropriate tracking balls for water and sanitary sewer trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 26. Backfill Means and Methods Demonstration a. Notify the City in writing with sufficient time for the C4vy Contractor to obtain samples and perform standard proctor test in accordance with ASTM D698. b. The results of the standard proctor test must be received prior to beginning excavation. C. Upon commencing of backfill placement for the project the Contractor shall demonstrate means and methods to obtain the required densities. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 27 of 30 d. Demonstrate Means and Methods for compaction including: 1) Depth of lifts for backfill which shall not exceed 12 inches 2) Method of moisture control for excessively dry or wet backfill 3) Placement and moving trench box, if used 4) Compaction techniques in an open trench 5) Compaction techniques around structure e. Provide a testing trench box to provide access to the recently backfilled material. f. The City will provide a qualified testing lab full time during this period to randomly test density and moisture continent. 1) The testing lab will provide results as available on the job site. 9. Varying Ground Conditions a. Notify the City of varying ground conditions and the need for additional proctors. b. Request additional proctors when soil conditions change. C. The City may acquire additional proctors at its discretion. d. Significant changes in soil conditions will require an additional Means and Methods demonstration. kxbEKG]►M7N I3:1u1:�0110VIION 1I1►1321►[47_[Sm A. After nine joints are completed, the voids at the joints in the embedment shall be brought to proper trade. Where concrete is Dlaced over or alone the DiDe, it shall be Placed in such manner as not to injure the joints or displace the DiDe. B. While nlacina concrete embedment and until the concrete sets uD. each DiDe shall be ProDerly braced and held to trade to Drevent anv Dossible shifting or floating of the pipe. C. Backfillina shall be done in a careful manner and no less than 24 hours after concrete embedment, cradle, thrust block, or encasement has been placed. 3.6 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.7 RE -INSTALLATION [not used] 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections Proctors CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 28 of 30 a. The Contractor will perform Proctors in accordance with ASTM D698. b. Test results will generally be available to within 4 calendar days and distributed to: 1) Contractor 2) City Project Manager 3) City Inspector 4) Engineer C. Notify the City if the characteristic of the soil changes. d. Contractor will perform new proctors for varying soils: 1) When indicated in the Contract Documents ge te_,iffiea_ iavestiga4ion Ii4 91w Appendix. 2) If notified by the row Engineer 3) At the convenience of the City e. Trenches where different soil types are present at different depths, the proctors shall be based on the mixture of those soils. 2. Density Testing of Backfill a. Density Tests shall be in conformance with ASTM D2922. b. Provide a testing trench protection for trench depths in excess of 5 feet. C. Place, move and remove testing trench protection as necessary to facilitate all test conducted by the City. d. For final backfill depths less than 15 feet and trenches of any depth not under existing or future pavement: 1) The City will perform density testing twice per working day when backfilling operations are being conducted. 2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests of the current lift in the available trench. e. For final backfill depths 15 feet and greater deep and under existing or future pavement: 1) The City will perform density testing twice per working day when backfilling operations are being conducted. 2) The testing lab shall take a minimum of 3 density tests of the current lift in the available trench. 3) The testing lab will remain onsite sufficient time to test 2 additional lifts. f. Make the excavation available for testing. g. The Citv's testing aaencv, in agreement with the Citv's inspector, will determine the location of the test. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 29 of 30 h. The City's testing lab will provide results to Contractor, and the City's Inspector, and the Eneineer. upon completion of the testing. The Citv's Inspector will review the test reports for conformance with specifications. i. A formal report will be posted to the City's Btiz�s BIM360 site within 48 hours. j. Test reports shall include: 1) Location of test by station number 2) Time and date of test 3) Depth of testing 4) Field moisture 5) Dry density 6) Proctor identifier 7) Percent Proctor Density 3. Density of Embedment a. Storm sewer boxes that are embedded with acceptable backfill material, blended backfill material, cement modified backfill material or select material will follow the same testing procedure as backfill. b. The City may test fine crushed rock or crushed rock embedment in accordance with ASTM D2922 or ASTM 1556. B. Non -Conforming Work 1. All non -conforming work shall be removed and replaced. 3.9 SYSTEM STARTUP [Not used] 3.10 ADJUSTING [not used] 3.11 CLEANING [not used] 3.12 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [not used] 3.13 PROTECTION [not used] 3.14 MAINTENANCE [not used] 3.15 ATTACHMENTS [not used] END OF SECTION 33 05 10 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 10 UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL Page 30 of 30 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329' 33 05 13.10 - 1 COMPOSITE FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGSGRADE RINGS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 05 13.10 COMPOSITE FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Compression Molded Composite Frames and Covers used as access ports into sanitary sewer structures such as manholes and junction boxes. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification tie -Modified 1.2. 2: Modified 1.6. 3 Modified 1.9. 4- Modified 2.2.13. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid _price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. Measlffemei}t a. Thiz Tte,,. ; eensider-ed subs diaf,. to the st fu .t, .o Main ng the f..ffle ad ado 2. Paymea4 a. Tho and the materials a,,., ishea : aeeer-danee , .i thio 11i ar,---u1-Nadi1-x-y to the tmitpnee bid per- eaeh stvaetffe eempleteinpla^ o other- eemp a6om Will be allowed-. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO HS-25 — AASHTO Highway Bridge Specification: Axial Loading to meet or exceed 21,280 pounds/wheel load. b. AASHTO M306 — Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility and Related Castings CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 13.10 - 2 COMPOSITE FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGSGRADE RINGS Page 2 of 6 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the Engineer or the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. All moldings shall display: a. Approved Molder b. Molding date c. oW rding that material is non-metallic. d. Country of origin 2. Provide manufacturer's: a. Specifications b. Load tables c. Dimension diagrams d. Anchor details e. Installation instructions B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer shall certify that all moldings conform to the ASTM and AASHTO designations. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] I-.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USEDI A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Manufacturers CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 5 of 8 f. Anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G mavbe used in lieu ofXvlan to provide protection and prevent ealline E. Threaded Rods 1. Meet requirements of AWWA C207 2. Rods: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class l(AISI 304 Stainless Steel, carbide solution treated) 3. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A194, Grade 8 Nuts with AISI 304 Stainless Steel Washers a. Coat nut with Xylan in accordance with this Section. F. Push -on Gaskets 1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61. 3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of Buna-N or EPDM ,m!Qaniz. SBR, unless otherwise specified in Drawings. 4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that make them unfit for intended use. 5. Gaskets shall be the size and shape required to provide an adequate compressive force against the plain end and socket after assembly to affect a positive seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. G. Mechanical Joint Gaskets 1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61. 3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of EPDM or Buna-N, vine nize sty-Fene beta ti mbber- , unless otherwise specified in Drawings. 4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that make them unfit for intended use. H. Flange Gaskets AI. Class E Flanges a. Flange gaskets shall be ring type gaskets for pipe lamer than 12 inches in diameter, and full -face gaskets for pipe sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller. b. For general service, rubber gaskets shall be 118 inch thick. Buna-N/NBR or EPDM suitable for sewage service, and meet the requirements ofAWWA C2O7. Rated for minimum 200 degrees F temperature and 150 psi pressure. A c. Gasket dimensions shall conform to the requirements ofASME B16.21, unless specified otherwise. d. Gaskets shall be as thin as the finish and accuracv of the flange surface will permit. e. Gasket material shall be specifically recommended for the service by the gasket manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. I. Hydrocarbon Resistant Gaskets 1. Furnish Viton® (Fluorocarbon) Rubber, hydrocarbon resistant gaskets, when required. J. Flange fsel-atien Insulatins Kits CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 6 of 8 Flange Insulating Kits shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 05 06. whieh afe fvquir-ed by the ri,.,,...ings to be isolation Flangoc,�aliall oaa f ...,., to Seetio,, 33 nn 10. I. For- be! ,, od with 10 lati ,,, sleeves ror Coctwn 3_ nn 10, threading must extend to bolt head with „ gfip ensure sleeves fit ..ef4y. K. Petrolatum Tape System 1. Petrolatum Tape Primer: Denso Paste or approved equal. 2. Molding and Filler mastic: Densyl Mastic or approved equal. 3. All Purpose Petrolatum Tape: Densyl Tape or approved equal. L. Xylan Coating a. Coat nuts and bolts with a ceramic -filled, baked on fluorocarbon resin, when required. b. Coated nuts and bolts shall be prepared "near white" or "white" when coated to the coating manufacturer's recommended thickness by a certified applicator. c. Coating shall be of Xylan as manufactured by Whitford Corporation and applied by Whitford Corporation or Whitford Corporation Recommended Coater. d. Coating shall be free from holidays and defects. e. Coating thickness shall between 0.0007-inches and 0.0012-inches and shall be such that the nut turns freely on the bolt. f. Coating shall conform to the performance requirements of ASTM B 117, "Salt Spray Test" and shall include, if required, a certificate of conformance. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical Joints 1. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with ANSUAWWA Cl 11/A21.11 Appendix A, AWWA C600 and AWWA Manual M41. 2. Use Standard Xylan Coated T-bolts and Nuts. a. Stainless Steel T-bolts with Xylan Coated Stainless Steel Nuts shall only be used when specifically required in the Drawings. B. Flanged Joints 1. Install in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. 2. Use Stainless Steel Bolts and Xylan Coated Nuts. W ap all buried steel flanges for AWWA C200, C301 or C303 pipe with Petrolatum Tape System. a. If only 1 flange in a joint is steel (AWWA C200, C301, or C303), petrolatum tape wrapping will be required. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 11 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 7 of 8 b. If a joint is made between two ductile iron flanges, the joint should be polyethylene encased in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 4. Flange bolts are normally spaced evenly around the flange. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three -pass method in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads. b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically opposite pattern. c. Allow a minimum of 1 hour to pass to provide time for settlement between bolts and nuts and gasket relaxation. d. Complete the third pass by checking each bolt in a clockwise pattern. Each nut should be tightened until it will no longer turn. This step compensates for elastic interaction and brings all bolts into parity. 6. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of/z-inch from the nuts. C. Flanged Joints with fselatia Insulating Kit 1. Flange isolation Insulating Kits shall be installed in accordance with Section 33 04 10 40 05 06. 2. City will verify Isolation in accordance with Section 33 04 TO 40 05 06. D. Threaded Rod 1. Install as part of joint harness assembly in accordance with AWWA Manual M11. 2. Space rods evenly around the pipe. 3. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three -pass method in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads. b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically opposite pattern. 4. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of 1/2-inch from the nuts. W ap joint harness assembly with Petrolatum Tape System. E. Petrolatum Tape System 1. Surfaces should be free from dirt, loose rust, scale or flaking coatings. a. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3. 1) High pressure wash of 3,000 to 7,000 psi is also suitable. b. Surfaces may be damp but shall not have droplets or continuous film of water. 2. Apply a uniform, thin coat of Petrolatum Tape Primer to the entire surface by stiff brush, gloved hand or rag at normal ambient temperatures. 3. By hand application, apply Molding and Filler Mastic to a rounded configuration to fill irregular shapes and reduce sharp -edged surfaces. 4. Spirally wrap All Purpose Petrolatum Tape with a minimum overlap of 1 inch. a. For severely corrosive environments, an overlap of 55 percent is recommended. b. Press air pockets out and smooth all lap seams. 5. For additional mechanical protection, overwrap may be applied to increase impact strength and electrical resistance. AF. APPIv anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoraL-e. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 8 of 8 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 3305 13 -1 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 1 of 7 SECTION 33 05 13 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast iron frame, cover and grade rings used as access ports into water, sanitary sewer and storm drain structures such manholes, stormwater manholes with slotted grates, precast drainage inlets, or vaults. 2. Compression Molded Composite Frames and Covers used as access ports into sanitary sewer and water structures such as manholes and junction boxes. B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. Modified 1.1. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.6. 4. Modified 1.9. 5. Modified 2.2. 6. Added 2.2.7 7. Added 2.2.8. 8. Modified 2.2.B. 9. Modified 3.4. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard DiDinR bid item. B. Measurement a. Thrz It. , and grade r4ag-s-. 2. Paymen a. The work per-fofmed a -ad the materials fiffnished in aeeor-da-aee with this item ar-c-�cx'aciAiaf,, t the unit p e biper-d eaeh s,f., etu .o , plot^ ix gym- 1.3 REFERENCES A.Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -2 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 2 of 7 2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings b. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings c. ASTM C478 - Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 3. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO HS-25 — AASHTO Highway Bridge Specification: Axial Loading to meet or exceed 21,280 pounds/wheel load. b. AASHTO M306 — Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility and Related Castings 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B.All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Data 1. All castings shall be cast with: a. Approved foundry's name b. Part number c. Country of origin 2. All moldings shall display: a. Approved Molder b. Molding date c. Wording that material is non-metallic. d. Country of origin Provide manufacturers: a. Specifications b. Load tables c. Dimension diagrams d. Anchor details e. Installation instructions B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer shall certify that all castings or moldings conform to the ASTM and AASHTO designations. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where rea_uired in com_liance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USEDI A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -3 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 3 of 7 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A.Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00 unless otherwise specified on the plans. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Cast Iron Covers 1. Use castings for frames that conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B or better. 2. Use castings for covers that conform to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 or better. 3. Use clean casting capable of withstanding application of AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading with permanent deformation. 4. Covers a. Size to set flush with the frame with no larger than a 1/8-inch gap between the frame and cover. b. Provide with 2-inch wide pick slots in lieu of pick holes. c. Provide gasket in frame and cover. d. Standard Dimensions 1) Sanitary Sewer a) Provide a clear opening of 30 inches for all sanitary sewer frames and cover assemblies unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Storm Drain a) Provide a clear opening of 24 inches for all storm drain frames, inlets and cover assemblies unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. b) Provide a minimum clear opening of 30 inches for all storm sewer manholes and junction structures. Standard Labels a. Water 1) Cast lid with the word "WATER" in 2-inch letters across the lid. b. Sanitary Sewer 1) Cast lid with the word "SANITARY SEWER" in 2-inch letters across the lid. c. Storm Drain 1) Cast lid with the word "STORM DRAIN" in 2-inch letters across the lid. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -4 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 4 of 7 6. Hinge Covers a. Provide watertight gasket on all hinged covers. b. Water 1) Provide hinged covers for all water structures. c. Sanitary Sewer 1) Provide hinged covers for all manholes or structures constructed over 24- inch sewer lines and larger and for manholes where rim elevations are greater than 12 inches above the surface. 2) Provide a bolt down lock bar where shown on the Drawings. 3) Provide a bolted and aasketed water tight manhole assemblv where indicated on the drawings. a) Provide East Jordan W8240021 WO1 24" bolted and gasketed watertight L8 Manhole assembly, or approved equal. 7. Stormwater Slotted Manhole Frame and Grates a. Provide Neenah R-4370-26 Frame with Tune G Grate. b. Or approved Equal. c. Materials: 1) Frame and Grate: Cast Grav Iron Class 35B, according to ASTM A48. 2) Grate Shane: Round, Tvve G. 3) Overall ODenin2: 2.8 ft. 4) Weir Perimeter Lineal Feet: 8.6 ft. 5) Overall Diameter: 33". 6) Grate thickness: 2". 7) Grate Opening Spacing Width: 1 %2". 8) Grate Slot Width: I". Precast Stormwater Drainage Inlet Frame and Grates. a. Provide Neenah R3438A Frame with two (2) Grates. b. Or approved Equal. c. Materials: 1) Frame and Grate: Cast Grav Iron Class 35B, according to ASTM A48. 2) Grate Opening Spacing: 1 11/2" 3) Grate ODenin2 Thickness: 1 1/8" 4) Grate Slot Thickness: 1 3/4" 5) Overall Inlet Opening Leni;th: 48". 6) Overall Grating Width: 24 7/8". C. Composite Covers 1. All composite moldings shall consist of a thermosetting resin matrix blended and/or combined with reinforcing fiber rovings, short fiber filaments, or equivalent nonmetallic reinforcing structure(s). The thermosetting resin matrix shall be a polymer, vinylester, or a blend of these. The moldings shall be true to pattern in locations affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Before the moldings are removed from the molding operation, they shall be thoroughly deflashed and cleaned at the parting lines, holes, notches and all exposed edges. 2. Use clean molding capable of withstanding application of AASHTO HS-25 vehicle loading with permanent deformation. Composite frames shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.75 inches in sections exposed to traffic and potential traffic wheel impact. 3. Metal reinforcements or metal hinges molded within the composite shall not be permitted. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -5 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 5 of 7 4. All composite moldings shall have UV stabilizers (concentrations from 0.05% to 5%) added prior to shaping the product by injection molding. 5. Covers a. Composite covers shall be compression molded under high pressures (>0.5 tons/sq inch of x-y surface area) and high temperatures (>200 degrees F). Components for locking systems below the cover exposed to sewer environment shall be made of noncorrosive materials such as nonmagnetic 316 stainless steel (Austenite) or a polymer. b. Size to set flush with the frame with no larger than a 1/8 -inch gap between the frame and cover. c. Provide with 2 - inch wide pick slots in lieu of pick holes. d. Provide gasket in frame and cover. e. Standard Dimensions 1) Sanitary Sewer and Water a) Provide a clear opening of 30 inches for all sanitary sewer frames and cover assemblies unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. f. Standard Labels 1) Sanitary Sewer a) Cast lid with the word "SANITARY SEWER" in 1-1/2-inch (minimum) or 2-inch (maximum) letters across the lid. 2) Water a) Cast lid with the word "WATER" in 1-1/2-inch (minimum) or 2-inch (maximum) letters across the lid. b) g. Hinge Covers 1) Hinged covers shall be double -hinged allowing a minimal 180' full opening. 2) Provide watertight gasket on all hinged covers. 3) Sanitary Sewer a) Provide hinged covers for all manholes or structures constructed over all sewer lines. b) Provide a lock bar for bolt down manholes with hinged covers where shown on the Drawings. D.Grade Rings 1. Provide composite grade rings in sizes from 2-inch up to 8-inch. 2. Precast concrete grade rings are not permitted. Riser adjustment to surface grade may be constructed using circular Sonotube® forms. E. Joint Sealant 1. Provide a pre -formed or trowelable bitumastic sealant in an extrudable or flat tape form. 2. Provide sealant that is not dependant on a chemical action for its adhesive properties or cohesive strength. 3. Provide adhesive as recommended by manufacturer on composite covers/grade rings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -6 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 6 of 7 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A.Grade Rings 1. Place as shown in the City Standard Details. 2. Clean surfaces of dirt, sand, mud or other foreign matter before placing sealant. 3. Seal each composite grade ring with sealant specified in this Specification and as shown on the City Standard Details. B.Frame and Cover 1. Water a. For water structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance with applicable City Standard Detail. 2. Sanitary Sewer a. For sanitary sewer structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance with applicable City Standard Detail. 3. Storm Drain a. For storm drain structures install frame, cover and grade rings in accordance with applicable City Standard Detail. 4. Hinge Cover a. Provide hinge cover on elevated manholes, junction boxes, in the flood plain and where specified on the Drawings. Hinges are not required on composite manhole covers. b. Provide lock bar for bolt down manhole covers with hinge covers where shown on the Drawings. C.Joint Sealing 1. Seal frame, grade rings and structure with specified sealant. D.Concrete Collar 1. Provide concrete collar around all frame and cover assemblies constructed at grade. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 13 -7 FRAME, COVER, AND GRADE RINGS Page 7 of 7 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 05 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete vaults to be used in water utility applications. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification tie -Modified 1.1.C. Modified 1.2. 3- Modified 1.6. 4 Modified 1.9. Modified 3.4.A.3. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 4. Section 03 90 00 03 74 00— Modifications to Existing Concrete 5. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lumn Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. Measufement L\ This item ; sider-oa subs diaf., t Water- Meter- and v,,,,i� 2. Pay-MeH4 a. Tho • \-x�k Taff4med 3 nWarialsfumishod ix aocar-dance with this Rem are subsidia4=y to the tritpr-ioe bid per- eaeh "Water- Meter- And 144 " aomplate in plaee and no other- eoWer4atasa will be a4lowed. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 2 of 6 b. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures C. C858, Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures d. C891, Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. e. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) a. 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Vault 2. Connection materials 3. Pipe connections at vault walls 4. Stubs and stub plugs 5. Grade ring 6. Ladder 7. External coating material B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS reauirements for all applicable metal products where reauired in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Meet the requirements of ACI 318. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver vault or panels (units) to project site in such quantity to assure continuity of installation. B. Store units at the project site in a manner which prevents cracking, distortion, staining or other physical damage. C. Lift units by designed lifting points or supports. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 3 of 6 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Performance / Design Criteria 1. Vault a. Vault dimensions per the Drawings b. Opening per the Drawings C. Incorporate a sump into the base or floor of the vault. 1) Avoid conflicts with piping. 2) Do not locate directly under the access location if applicable. d. Place floor on a minimum 2 percent slope towards the sump. 2. Water Pipe Penetrations a. Use adjustable -linked rubber seal devices or grout, as shown in Drawings, to provide seals around pipe penetrations. 3. Vault Access a. Cover / Door 1) For non -traffic areas — non H-20 loading 30-inch x 36-inch steel single leaf door, Bilco Type J model or approved equal 2) For traffic areas — 32-inch hinged ductile iron frame and cover or as shown in manhole lid assembly in Drawings. 3) With steel door, provide an automatic hold -open arm with release handle and locking device. 4) Provide Bilco type fall protection grating under aluminum door that meets OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements or approved equal. 5) Incorporate a drain gutter with an outlet routed to the exterior of the vault lid. b. Ladder 1) Provide aluminum ladder by Heron Industries or approved equal. 2) Provide ladder to dimensions shown on Drawings. C. Materials 1. Concrete for utility construction — Conform to Section 03 30 00. 2. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 3. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C 478. 4. Reinforcing Steel — Conform to Section 03 30 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 4 of 6 5. Sewer Pipe Connections — Conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C 1628. 6. Adjustable -linked rubber seal devices a. Manufactured by Link -Seal or approved equal. 7. Interior Coating or Liner — Conform to Section 33 39 60. 8. Exterior Coating a. Coal Tar Bitumastic for below grade damp proofing. b. Dry film thickness (DFT) no less than 12 mils and no greater than 30 mils C. Solids content is 68 percent by volume f 2 percent. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Vault a. Perform installation in accordance to ASTM C891. b. Construct vault to dimensions shown on Drawings. C. Precast Sections 1) Clean bell spigot and gaskets a) Lubricate and join. 2) Minimize number of segments. d. Vault Base 1) Place vault base on 6-inch minimum base of compacted crushed rock (per Section 33 05 10) over undisturbed soils and grade level to elevation shown on the Drawings. 2. Water Pipe Penetrations a. Install adjustable -linked rubber seal devices around pipe penetrations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Modifications and pipe penetrations into vaults shall conform to Section 03-80 00 03 74 00. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 5 of 6 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3305 16 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 0517 CONCRETE COLLARS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 3305 17- 1 CONCRETE COLLARS Page 1 of 4 A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete Collars for Manholes 2. Concrete Collars for Valves 3. These kenis are intendedfor use in asphalt streets and unimproi,,ed- areas notfo use in t s.,,, hs B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None Modified 1.1.A. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Added 1.6. 4. Added 1.9. 5. Modified 2.2.A. C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 4. Section 03 80 00 — Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures 5. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid _price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. N4& role a. T ro n 1) Measurement for this Ite s chvll b2 per each. b -Payee L 1) The work peffeEme the m-atem-4-als Ifis-h-eA in woo ewwith this lt: zhWl be paid foF-at-0.-.Q uxit p&vo Sidpe o -h "Con rote Collar- f r Ma44kolc" ind1C)l 6. T-ho promo b'd Wilk' ir.-Jluk—. Fofffis �) Eir�:a�atien 1) Ran f -ein . stool (if required) C 6) Baekfi11 7) Pa en removal CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330517-2 CONCRETE COLLARS Page 2 of 4 J hViling 9) Disposal of excessmaterial 11) Clean 2) Additional p o ent around perimeter- feeftere ^olLar x :;fifer tiro adjuot sent on existing „-,.,fihalo ors Fhal l' e per eaek.. 1) The warlE pefformed d t1bo r:�at^.; is shod ir. Docar-dance with ltirs 2�1.1 bo paid f at the unit priee bid per- ae «Generete Cellar f Valve" e. The prieewillin^ 1) Co to r ii—ar -2) Dl=J ',atr6n roNr z cte 66) Bae Efill ''pavement removal 4) Loaling 11) Clean t 2) Additional pavement around perimeter- of c nerono ^ollar w rimerim adjustment en existing ma+ihele. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. b. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 47.-6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED A. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicatinf4 compliance with AIS reauirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4-.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USEDI CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330517-3 CONCRETE COLLARS Page 3 of 4 A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Materials 1. Concrete — Conform to Section 03 30 00. 2. Reinforcing Steel — Conform to Section 02�0 03 20 00. 3. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 4. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to with the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Final Rim Elevation 1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment. a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole. b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings. c. Sono Tube or approved equivalent may be used to perform the adjustment as substitute for grade rings. 2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant o clean smooth surface (when sono tube is used in lieu of grade rings, sealant is not required). 3. Remove debris, stones, and dirt to ensure a watertight seal. 4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones, or other unspecified material to obtain the final surface elevation of the manhole frame. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 330517-4 CONCRETE COLLARS Page 4 of 4 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 1 of 6 A. Section Includes: 1. Buried and surface utility markers for utility construction. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None Modified 1.1.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Added 1.1.D. 4. Modified 2.2.B 5. Modified 3.4.B. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 05 30 — Location of Existing Utilities 4. Section 33 5100 — Natural Gas Distribution D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SuDDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this ,. co*;__ - - - 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lum_D Sum bid _price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. r,r............. a ftt a. ,areas -emert for- this item will be b lure vut a. Th-e weFk peF ,.v.,o,a —an +o,; t� f,. fished is awor,a. nee with this item will be paid f ,..,+ t1� lursp vxxw psi br 3. The p e bid o�J.l in a. Furaizhing and in-Atallin em w opaeif oa by the r,,.^...ings b. A � \111xHLZv�-\, e. P., nt 4 d. �r� a mien o. IIauling f Disposal of exeess material Fu wi,plaeoment d oompas-tien-e€ e-JKfi l h. Cleaner CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 2 of 6 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Public Works Association (AWPA): a. Uniform Color Code. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Buried Marker 2. Surface Marker 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. 3. Provide new Utility Markers/Locators from a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Utility Markers/Locators. B. Materials 1. Buried Markers (Detectable Warning Tape) a. Provide detectable warning tape as follows: 1) 5.0 mil overall thickness CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 3 of 6 2) Width — 3 inch minimum 3) Weight — 27.5 pounds per inch per 1,000 square feet 4) Letterin2 height — 1.5 inch 5) Triple Layer with: a) Minimum thickness 0.35 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a protective inert plastic jacket. (1) 100 percent virgin low density polyethylene (2) Impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and solvents within soil (3) Aluminum foil visible to both sides 6) Locatable by conductive and inductive methods 7) Printing encased to avoid ink rub -off. 8) Color and Legends a) Potable water lines (1) Color — Blue (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Potable Water Line Below (repeated every 24 inches) b) Sludae/Scum lines (1) Color — Brown (in accordance with 30 TAC Chapter 217.329) (2) Leaend — Caution Pressurized Wastewater (repeated every 24 inches c) Reclaimed water lines (1) Color — Purple (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Reclaimed Water Line Below (repeated every 24 inches) d) Sewer Lines (1) Color — Green (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Sewer Line Below (repeated every 24 inches) e) Natural Gas Lines (1) Color — Yellow (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Gas Line Below (repeated every 24 inches) 2. Buried Markers (Tracer Wire) 1) Provide tracer wire for all PVC and HDPE a) Conductor: Maenetically detectable. b) Wire: 10-AWG THWN insulated copper. Surface Markers a. Provide as follows: 1) 4-inch diameter, 6-feet minimum length, polyethylene posts, or equal 2) White posts with colored, ultraviolet resistant domes as follows: a) Water Lines (1) Color — Blue (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Potable Water Line Below b) Reclaimed water lines. (1) Color — Purple (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Reclaimed Water Line Below c) Sewer lines (1) Color — Green (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) (2) Legend — Caution Sewer Line Below d) Natural Gas Lines (1) Color — Yellow (in accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 4 of 6 (2) Leeend — Caution Gas Line Below (reheated every 24 inches) 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Buried Markers (Detectable Warning Tape) 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations below natural ground surface and directly above the utility for which it is marking. a. Allow 18 inches minimum between utility and marker. b. Bury to a depth of 3 feet or as close to the grade as is practical for optimum protection and detectability. B. Buried Markers (Tracer wire) Install as recommended by manufacturer. a. Provide continuous wire, buried 6-inches below trade or 6-inches above vioin2. b. If multiple pines occur in common trench, locate wire above centerline of trench. c. Place trace wire in the correct orientation, and anchor as necessary to Drevent dislocation during placement of backfill. Compaction ea_uiD_ ment shall not directly contact the trace wire. d. Coordinate with trench work as specified in 3120 00 "Earthwork". C. Surface Markers 1. Bury a minimum of 2 feet deep, with a minimum of 4 feet above ground. 2. The warning sign for all surface markers shall be 21 inches (not including post cap). 3. Where possible, place surface markers near fixed objects. 4. Place Surface Markers at the following locations: a. Buried Features 1) Place directly above a buried feature. b. Above -Ground Features 1) Place a maximum of 2 feet away from an above -ground feature. c. Water lines 16-inches and larger 1) Each right-of-way line (or end of casing pipe) for: a) Highway crossings b) Railroad crossings 2) Utility crossings such as: a) High pressure or large diameter gas lines b) Fiber optic lines c) Underground electric transmission lines d) Or other locations shown on the Drawings, or directed by the City CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 5 of 6 d. Surface markers not required for 12-inch and smaller water lines. e. For sanitary sewer lines: 1) In undeveloped areas, place marker maximum of 2 feet away from an above -ground feature such as a manhole or combination air valve vault. 3.5 PLACE AT 500-FOOT INTERVALS ALONG THE PIPELINE. 3.6 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.7 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.8 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.9 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.10 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.12 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.13 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.14 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.15 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 26 UTILITY MARKERS/LOCATORS Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 30 LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SECTION 33 05 30 LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Page 1 of 4 1. Locating and verifying the location and elevation of the existing underground utilities that may conflict with a facility proposed for construction by use of a. Exploratory Excavation b. Vacuum Excavation B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Added 1.1.13. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Added 3 A.E. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SunDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, aDDly to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard i)iDina bid item. 1) The ver4 PeFfefmed and tar��l.s fumished ix aooc., aree with this item and measured ar pco ,4ded under- "Measur-ement" will be paid fA4: At 41,0 11444 pr-iee bid pj"=h Utilities" speei s-Tke-pfieo ✓d d.mll ink 1) G, ade swwey 2) Pavement removal 1) TJtilib;�esa�iel� Hmling 5) 'DivpA-A1 f&*-eos- rr,ater-i 1 ?) and ja etio , f embedment ent 8) plaoing and eompaction f•1.aekt;11 o) Clean up CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 30 LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES Page 2 of 4 1)MeasuremenA-fa. tJ..:i3 T� dhal be pe o.,e o tief -po -f f ffied as identified in the Dr-awings, E)r- as Elir-eeted-. b. -Paymen1) The work performed and materials fumished in aeeer-da-nee with this item a -ad measured -as pr-evided under Measuremen*will be aid faF � the unit price bid por eaek "Vactmm Fxcavation" speeifred. e. Tho p»j Lid algal ir�au -2) Lla r sefvffleval 3}� Lx,uurn E 1) TJtilib,-Lee-ati(m 14,mling ?) FurnF hin , plaeing and eempaefien of embedment 4) llkx dhirg, p�aaiagand oompaion of>,.,ek ll n) r®up 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Exploratory Excavation: Previously called "D-Hole" within the City, a method used to locate existing underground utility as shown on the plans through the use of standard excavation equipment. 2. Vacuum Excavation: Method used to locate existing underground utility as shown on the plans through the use of geophysical prospecting equipment such as vacuum excavation. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) a. ASCE Publication CFASCE 38 (Standard Guideline for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data) 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Coordinate with City Inspector at least 48 hours prior to commencing on site for Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities. 2. Coordinate location of all other existing utilities within vicinity of excavation prior to commencing Exploratory Excavation. 3. Coordinate staking of Exploratory Excavations with City at least 1 week prior to commencement. B. Sequencing CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 30 LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES Page 3 of 4 1. Exploratory Excavations shall be conducted prior to the construction of the entire project. C. Scheduling 1. For critical utility locations, the City may choose to be present during excavation. 2. Alter schedule for Exploratory Excavation of Existing Utilities to accommodate City personnel. 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Report of Utility Location 1. Horizontal location of utility as surveyed. 2. Vertical elevation of utility as surveyed. a. Top of utility b. Spring line of utility c. Existing ground 3. Material type, diameter and description of the condition of existing utility 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. Verify location of existing utilities in accordance with the General Requirements, the General Notes and the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with City Survey, if applicable. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Exploratory Excavation 1. Verify location of existing utility at location denoted on the Drawings, or as directed by the City. a. Expose utility to spring line, as necessary. b. Excavate and Backfill Trench for the Exploratory Excavation in accordance with Section 33 05 10. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 30 LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES Page 4 of 4 B. Vacuum Excavation 1. Verify location of existing utility at location denoted on the Drawings, or as directed by the City. 2. Designate the horizontal position of the existing underground utilities that are to be located using geophysical prospecting equipment. a. Acquire record documentation from and coordinate with utility companies, as necessary to locate utility. 3. Perform excavation in general accordance with the recommended practices and procedures described in ASCE Publication CFASCE 38. C. Upon completion of the utility locating, submit a report of the findings. D. If location of utility is in conflict with the Drawings, notify the City Project Manager for appropriate design modifications. E. Place utilitv markers or locators in accordance with Section 33 05 26. F. Place embedment and backfill in accordance with Section 33 05 10. G. Once necessary data is obtained, immediately restore surface to existing conditions to: 1. Obtain a safe and proper driving surface, if applicable 2. Ensure the safety of the general public. 3. The satisfaction of the City. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 1 of 14 Y����►[c�C���!Ic��L�].c�J:��l��c :_�•�����,�.u»���re�:��XY��:��l�l��l PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete gravity and low-pressure pipe and associated appurtenances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete material requirements. 2. Section 31 05 15 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork" for soil backfill from above pipe to finish grade and aggregate for basin backfill. 3. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill for excavation, backfilling, compacting, and fill. 4. Section 33 01 31 "Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection — Sanitary Sewer" for television inspection of pipeline and associated preparatory work. 5. Section 3 305 26 "Utility Markers" for pipe markers. 1.3 UNIT PRICE A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective yard piping bid item. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Meeting to include the Project Manager, City Inspector, and the Contractor. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and details of reinforcement, joint, method of manufacture and installation of pipe, gasket, specials and fittings, the name of the pipe manufacturer and a schedule of pipe lengths (including the length of individual pipes by diameter) for the entire job. A1. Submit shop drawings detailing the design of the concrete piping system, including: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 2 of 14 a. Product cut sheets, including pressure ratings and class of Pipe, bolts, nuts, gaskets, and appurtenances. b. Lav drawings of all Pipe, organized by continuous pipe segments. C. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions, including snap ring product data. d. For flanges or mechanical ioints, submit anti -seize Product technical data sheet. B. Provide Aggregate Documentation: 1. Fine and coarse aggregates to be used in manufacture of the concrete pipe comply with the requirements of ASTM C33. 2. Documentation less than 6 months old. 3. Indicate source of aggregates and date of analysis. 4. Submit similar documentation to the Engineer at least yearly while pipe is being manufactured for this project. C. Prior to each shipment of pipe, submit certified test reports that the pipe was manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM Standards specified herein. D. Submit compressive strength tests to the Engineer. AE. Temporary and Permanent Bulkheads: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate lavout and details of reinforcement, ioint, method of manufacture and installation of pipe, gasket, specials and fittings, the name of the bulkhead manufacturer, and a schedule of materials and installation for the entire iob. a. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to design the temporary and permanent bulkheads as indicated on the Drawings. b. Submit shop drawings detailing the design of the temporary and permanent plug systems, including: 1) Product cut sheets, including material types. Pressure rating, leakage rate. and service life. 2) Installation and demolition instructions, including length of exposed pipe required for plug. and length ofnine to be removed. 3) Manufacturer's recommendation for existing Pipe restraint and support, temporary and permanent bracing, and temporary and permanent backfill. 4) If field welding is required, provide list of eauinment and certifications of workers to perform operation (if required). 5) For flanges or mechanical ioints, submit anti -seize Product technical data sheet. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pipe alignment and invert elevations, valves, and fittings. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 3 of 14 C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work according to the State of Texas Department of Transportation, and the City of Fort Worth Public Works standards. B. Perform acceptance tests in accordance with ASTM C76. C. Inspection of pipe will be made by Engineer or other representatives of Owner after delivery. Pipe is subject to rejection for failure to meet any of the requirements specified herein, even though pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall immediately be removed from the job. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Store materials according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for Concrete pipe and associated appurtenances. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 4 of 14 VAN:71its9tTelIII,Ift161 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. 1. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. 2.2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Conform to ASTM C 76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe, 1. Class and Wall designation shown on the Drawings. 2. Pipe interior: smooth, even, free from roughness, projections, indentations, offsets, or irregularities of any kind. 3. Concrete mass shall be dense and uniform. 4. Minimum reinforcement and wall thickness for sizes not tabulated in ASTM C76 shall be designed by the manufacturer in accordance with Section 7.2 of ASTM C76. B. Cement: Non -air -entraining Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement, Type II. Use of admixtures is subject to Engineer approval. C. Aggregate: 1. Fine: Washed inert sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33, except for gradation. Maximum loss of 8 percent when subjected to 5 cycles of the soundness test using magnesium sulfate. 2. Coarse: Well -graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33/C 33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate, except for gradation. Maximum loss of 8 percent when subjected to 5 cycles of the soundness test using magnesium sulfate. 3. Document to Engineer that aggregates to be used in manufacture of reinforced concrete pipe meet these requirements. D. Concrete: 1. 28-day compressive strength equal to or greater than design strength of concrete as indicated by cores cut from the pipe or from representative test cylinders taken from the same batch shall be equal to or greater than the design strength of the concrete. 2. Mass — Dense and uniform. 3. Reinforcement: a. Circular for all concrete pipes. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 5 of 14 b. Quadrant steel is not acceptable. C. Reinforcement installed in both bell and spigot. At least one circumferential reinforcement wire in both bell and spigot areas. d. Reinforcement in bell and spigot adequate to prevent damage to concrete during shipping, handling and after installation. E. Special Coating (Mortar Rings) 1. Pipe to be installed in casing shall have 2 built-up mortar rings, each approximately 2 feet long and slightly higher than the pipe bell, to prevent the pipe from being supported by the pipe bell. Testing: a. 3-edge bearing test in accordance with ASTM C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets, to verify strength and water tightness. b. Perform sewer and manhole testing according to Section 33 0130. C. Both 3-edge bearing test per ASTM C497, Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile, and pressure test to be performed on one pipe per three - hundred feet of pipes manufactured, or fraction thereof for each design or shape, size, class, or D-load produced within 30 calendar days. The Owner reserves the right to witness the testing. F. Pipe may be rejected for any of the following reasons: 1. Exposure of any wires, positioning spacers or chairs used to hold the reinforcement in place. 2. Exposure of steel reinforcement in any surface of the pipe, except for the ends of the longitudinals, stirrups or spacers specifically permitted by Section 8.2 of ASTM C76. 3. Cores taken show that transverse reinforcing steel exceeds 1/4 inch out of specified position after the pipe is molded. 4. Shattering or flaking of concrete at a crack. 5. Voids on the interior and exterior surfaces of the pipe exceed 1/4 inch depth (with the exception of minor bug holes). Consult Engineer to determine if properly and soundly pointed repairs with mortar or other approved material may be considered. 6. Unauthorized application of any wash coat of cement or grout. Pipe dressing procedures are subject to approval of the Engineer. 7. Deficiency greater than 1/4 inch from the specified wall thickness of pipe 30 inches or smaller in internal diameter. 8. Hollow spot greater than 30 inches in length or wider than 3 times the specified wall thickness (identified by tapping the internal surface of the pipe). Repair of such defective areas not exceeding these limitations may be made as specified. 9. Defects that indicate imperfect molding of concrete; or any surface defect indicating honeycomb or open texture (rock pockets): a. Greater in size than area equal to a square 2-1/2 times the wall thickness, or b. Deeper than two times the maximum graded aggregate size. 10. Local deficient cement resulting in loosely bonded concrete: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 6 of 14 a. Area is greater than 30 inches in length, or b. Wider than 3 times the specified wall thickness. C. Repair of such defects not exceeding these limits may be made as specified. 11. Any of the following: a. Crack — width 0.005 to 0.01 inch throughout continuous length of 36 inches or more. b. Crack — width 0 to 0.03 inch or more throughout a continuous length of 12 inches or more. C. Crack greater than 0.005 inch extending through the wall of the pipe and having a length exceeding wall thickness. d. Crack showing two visible lines of separation for a continuous length of 24 inches or more, or an interrupted length of 3 feet or more, inside or outside. e. Cracks anywhere greater than 0.03 inch in width. G. Clearly mark pipe as required by ASTM C76. The markings may be at either end of the pipe for the convenience of the manufacturer, but for any one size shall always be at the same end of each pipe length. H. Ship pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM C76, stamped or stenciled on the inside before it is shipped. Do not ship pipe until compressive strength of concrete has attained 70 percent of the design strength and not before 7 days after manufacture and/or repair, whichever is the longer. J. Laying Length: 1. Minimum laying length 8 feet, except for closure and other special pieces as approved by the Engineer. 2. Have available at the site sufficient pipe of various lengths to affect closure at manholes or structures that cannot be located to accommodate standard lengths. 3. Short lengths of pipe made for closure, etc., may be used in the pipeline at the end of construction if properly spaced. 4. Maximum length of incoming and outgoing concrete pipe at each structure 4 feet, except where joint is cast flush with exterior wall of structure or where otherwise noted on Drawings. 5. Maximum laying length 16 feet Installation of 16 feet lengths will depend upon ability to: handle such lengths of pipe in sheeted trenches; comply with trench width requirements; maintain the integrity of the sheeting; avoid disturbance to adjacent ground. If Engineer determines the use of 16 feet lengths is impractical, shorter lengths are required. K. Each length of pipe will be checked against the length noted on shop drawings. Pipe more than 1-1/2 inch longer than that shown on the shop drawings will be rejected. Variations in length of the same pipe not to exceed ASTM C76 requirements. L. Engineer shall have the right to cut cores from such pieces of the finished pipe as he/she selects for inspection and for such tests as he/she may wish to apply. Holes left by the removal of cores shall be filled in an approved manner by and at the expense of the manufacturer. Core drilling shall be CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 7 of 14 carried out by the pipe manufacturer at his/her expense. The number of cores shall not exceed the requirements of ASTM C76. M. The pipe will be carefully examined for compliance with the ASTM C76 standard, and shop drawings by the manufacturer prior to shipment. All pipes shall be inspected for general appearance, dimension, "scratch -strength," blisters, cracks, roughness, soundness, etc. All pipes will be checked for soundness by being tapped and scratched at least once on every 50 square inches of pipe surface. The surface shall be dense and close -textured. Cores also shall serve as a basis for rejection of pipe, particularly if lamination or poor bond of reinforcement is apparent. N. The manufacturer shall use measuring devices to assure joint assembly is within tolerances of ASTM C76 and as specified herein. If, during construction, the pipes cannot be satisfactorily joined, the manufacturer shall pre join the pipe at the plant. O. All pipe which has been damaged after delivery will be rejected. Remove and replace any damaged pipe laid in the trench. P. Repair: Pits, blisters, rough spots and other imperfections may be repaired, subject to the approval of the Engineer, after demonstration by the manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result. 2. Repairs shall be carefully inspected before final approval. 3. Non -shrink cement mortar: a. Minimum compressive strength 7 day — 6000 psi and 28-day 7000 psi, when tested in 3-inch cylinders stored in standard manner. 4. Epoxy mortar may be utilized for repairs subject to the approval of the Engineer. Q. Y Saddles: 1. Supply a length of concrete pipe with three holes of proper diameter cut at the quarter points for required Y-saddles. 2. Cut holes halfway through the pipe by the manufacturer while the concrete is still "green" leaving the reinforcement intact. 3. Reserve pipes for use with Y-saddles only and cut remaining concrete and reinforcement in the field only from the hole to be used. R. Curved Pipe: 1. Fabricate curved sections by beveling one or both ends up to 5 degrees to produce required curvature radius. 2. Do not use joint deflection to produce required curvature radius. 3. Cast reinforced concrete bends to required curvature radius or fabricate by cutting pipe at the required angle and rejoining sections. 4. Bends may be smooth or mitered providing: a. Mitered angles do not exceed 22-1/2 degrees. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 8 of 14 b. Bends have a radius length equal to or greater than the pipe diameter. S. The ends of the pipe shall be made true to form and dimension and the bell shall be made by casting against steel forms. The manufacturer shall inspect all pipe joint surfaces for out -of -roundness and pipe ends for squareness. 2.3 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE PIPE A. Joints: IC C 1. Bell and spigot type joint. Conforming to ASTM C 361 or ASTM C 443. 2. Make provisions to use: a. Round rubber O-Ring gasket in recess in spigot end of the pipe, or b. Profile gasket in a single step joint. Gaskets: 1. Conform to ASTM C 361 or ASTM C 443 except as otherwise specified herein. 2. Testing: a. Gasket specimens shall be heated in a dry oven to 150 deg F for 6-hour duration and specimens shall be tested by immersion; one each as follows: 1) 2-hour immersion in petroleum ether. 2) 72-hour immersion in saturated Hydrogen Sulfide solution. 3) 72-hour immersion in 1 percent NaOH solution. 4) 72-hour immersion in standard soap solution (80 percent alcohol). 5) 72-hour immersion in 10 percent NaCl solution. b. Gasket specimens shall show no detrimental change in color, texture, or feeling upon completion of the above tests. C. Tensile test of approximately 100 psi before and after immersion and heating tests shall show an elongation of at least 25 percent. d. Upon release from tensile tests, each specimen shall return to its original length. e. Provide test data and affidavits showing compliance with these requirements. Tests conducted within six months of the start of manufacture of the pipe. Joint and Gaskets 1. Provide facilities for testing the effectiveness of the joints against leakage and one such test may be required for each 600 feet of pipe for each type of joint manufactured. 2. Test internal or external pressure against the joint of at least 13 psi for a period of ten minutes in accordance with ASTM C443 without showing any leakage by the gasket or displacement of it. 3. Installed joint shall be capable of withstanding a groundwater pressure of 13 psi without exceeding the allowable leakage specified for the pipe testing. 4. For direct connection of Plain end RCP to FRP see specification 33 31 13. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 9 of 14 A5. Provide Tvpe 316 Stainless Steel bolts, nuts, and washers for corrosive environment. Provide anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. D. Snap Rings 1. For mechanically restrained joint system, snap rings shall be manufactured by Hanson, or approved equal. E. Joint Wrappers 2. Joint wrappers shall be manufactured by Mar -Mac Manufacturing Company, or approved equal. 3. For pipe within casing, Flex Protex joint filler, or approved equal, maybe used for pipes that can be welded from the interior. F. Flexible Joint Couplings 1. Flexible Joint Couplings shall be Dresser Style 38, Smith -Blair Style 411 or approved equal. G. Steel Coupling Adapters 1. For direct transition connection of Plain end RCP to RCP. a. Manufacturers: 1) Smith -Blair 413. 2) Or approved equal. b. Description: 1) Complies with AWWA C219 Standards. 2) Flanges: AISI C1020 steel. 3) Followers: Carbon Steel C1020 per ASTM A576 4) Sleeve: Expanded sleeve, Carbon Steel per ASTM A283C 5) Anchor Loop a) Carbon Steel, per ASTM A36. 6) Gasket: EPDM or Buna-N. 7) Bolts: Per specification 33 1105 . H. Concrete Pipe Plugs and Bulkheads 1. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to design the permanent and temporary bulkheads of the concrete pipes. Further information for the locations of the bulkheads and plugs can be found on the Construction Sequencing Drawings, "C-S" Sheets. Plug design parameters have been outlined in the Civil Standard Details in the Drawings, "C-Z" Sheets. a. Mechanically restrained bulkheads or Night caps 1) Use Thompson Pipe Group Night Caps or approved equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 10 of 14 2) Follow the manufacturer's recommendation regarding additional pipe restraints, additional bracing, or required. 3) Restrain at all joints. Thrust blocks cannot be used. 4) Upon successful installation and testing, encase the closure in a concrete collar. b. Follower Ring or Field Welded Closures 1) Use Thompson Pipe Group Follower Ring Closure or approved equal. 2) Pipe section must be a spigot end. If necessary, a double spigot adapter can be used. 3) Use closures with restrained joints. Thrust blocks cannot be used. 4) Upon successful installation and testing, encase the closure in a concrete collar. Manufacturer shall furnish information and be on hand during the installation of the first five joints installed under this Contract. J. Restrained Joints 1. Thrust at bends, tees or other fittings shall be resisted by restrained joints or snap rings. a. Thrust at bends adjacent to casing shall be restrained by welding joints through the casing and a sufficient distance each side of the casing. b. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for pipe in casing unless the annular space in the casing is filled with grout. c. The distance for thrust restraint shown on the Drawings is the minimum restraint and does not relieve the manufacturer from calculating the restraint needs as specified herein. a) In no case shall the restrained distance be less than indicated on the Drawings. 2. Restrained joints shall be used a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug or other fitting to resist thrust which develops at the design pressure of the pipe. a. The distance for thrust restraint shown on the Drawings is the minimum restraint and does not relieve the manufacturer from calculating the restraint needs as specified herein. 1) In no case shall the restrained distance be less than indicated on the Drawings. b. Restrained joints shall consist of welded joints or snap rings. c. In areas where restrained joints are used for thrust restraint, the pipe shall have adequate cylinder thickness to transmit the thrust forces. 3. Thrust restraint design a. The length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust forces shall be verified by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M9 and the following: 1) The Weight of Earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe. a) Soil Density = 130 pounds per cubic foot (maximum value to be used for unsaturated soil). b. Thrust collars will only be permitted for temporary plugs. 1) Thrust collars may not be used for any other application, unless approved in writing by the Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 11 of 14 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify pipe is acceptable per Part 1 Article "Delivery, Storage, and Handling" prior to installation. R�► ' : � ' :17:r11[�1►1 A. Adjacent Surfaces: Protect adjacent surfaces by ensuring installation procedures will not damage existing pipes, buildings, or pavement outside of the scope of the Work. B. Seal superficial cracks. Repairs shall be conducted according to the repair section. C. Cleaning: Clean surfaces according to specification 330450 "Cleaning of Pipes". D. Apply sealer. Repairs shall be conducted according to the repair section. E. Apply anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoral?e. 3.3 PARTIAL DEMOLITION OF EXISTING CONCRETE PIPE A. Remove pipe at the nearest tongue -and -groove or bell and spigot connection of two pipe sections. Provide a clean surface for joining of new and existing pipes. B. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparing pipe surfaces for the installation of temporary plugs and steel couplings. C. Remove concrete encasement with arch sewer pipe. Repair cracks at remaining sections caused by demolition. Remove enough encasement to properly install new sections of piping and provide a clean surface for joining new and existing pipes. Encasement the new arch pipe sections to match existing. D. Provide any additional pipe support needed to support existing pipes during excavation. Existing Reinforced Concrete pipe will remain active as long as possible for stormwater removal. 3.4 LAYING CONCRETE PIPE A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe or fittings and the joint surfaces. Do not drop pipe or fittings. Examine pipe or fittings before laying. No piece is to be installed which is defective. B. Placement: 1. Place screened gravel bedding in the trench starting at indicated normal grade of the bottom of the trench, firmly bed pipe in this gravel to conform accurately to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 12 of 14 2. Blocking under pipe is not permitted. 3. Utilize Jacks or come-alongs to force the pipes home. A submittal is required for review by the Engineer for use of other methods, including motor driven equipment. 4. Provide a depression in the supporting gravel at joints to prevent contamination of rubber gaskets. Before pipe is lowered into trench, clean spigot and bell free from dirt. 5. Lubricate gasket and bell with a vegetable lubricant not soluble in water, as furnished by the pipe manufacturer and harmless to the rubber gasket. 6. Align pipe in the trench to avoid any contact with the side of the trench, fouling the gasket. 7. As soon as the spigot is centered in the bell of the previously laid pipe, it shall be engaged by approved methods. 8. After gasket is compressed, but before pipe is brought home, check each gasket for proper position around full circumference of joint. Provide steel inserts to prevent pipe from going home until the feeler gauge verifies final position of gasket. 9. Once pipe is in place, backfill and compact for at least one-half the length of pipe before the come along is released. If any motion at joints is detected, place a greater amount of backfill before pressure is released. 10. When pipe laying is not in progress, including lunchtime, close open ends of pipe by a watertight plug or other approved means. C. Plug holes not used for the saddle service with non -shrink cement mortar. D. Regulate equipment and construction operations so loading of pipe does not exceed loads for which pipe is designed and manufactured. E. Promptly repair or replace pipe damaged during construction operations. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation and Maximum Offset as indicated in American Concrete Institute (ACI) 117- 10. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner or Owner's representative will inspect for compliance prior to acceptance of closeout submittal. B. Owner or Owner's representative will test for deficiencies prior to placing pipe in service. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean pipes according to specification 33 04 50 "Cleaning of Pipes". 3.8 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL 1000ZI]ayx6JIYIs] ►W19111161M 1 CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 13 of 14 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 33 05 93.25_SFL This page intentionally left blank. CONCRETE GRAVITY AND LOW-PRESSURE PIPE Page 14 of 14 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 1105 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 33 11 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 1 of 8 A. Section Includes: 1. All nuts, bolts and gaskets associated with pressurized water utility lines including: a. T-Bolts and Nuts b. Flange Bolts and Nuts c. Threaded Rods d. Push -on Gaskets e. Mechanical Joint Gaskets f. Flange Gaskets g. Flange Isolation Kits h. Petrolatum Tape Systems B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1 . None. 2. Modified I.1.C.3. 3. Added I.1.C.4. 4. Added LI.C.5. 5. Added 1.1.D. 6. Modified 1.2. 7. Modified 1.3.A.7. 8. Modified 1.6. 9. Modified 1.9. 10. Modified 2.2.0 11. Modified 2.2.1) 12. Modified 2.2.F 13. Modified 2.2.G. 14. Modified 2.2.H. 15. Modified 2.2.J 16. Modified 3.4.0 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Seetion 33 04 10 joifft Bending and Electrica IaOiatian Section 33 11 11 — Ductile Iron Fittings. 4. Section 33 05 03 — General Pipe Requirements — Buried. 5. Division 40 — Exposed/Above Grade Process Piping D. Related Documents CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 2 of 8 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Su_n_Dlementar_v Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections. aDDly to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective yard DiDin2 bid item. 4 1mz,,a m*t fo; tK.is item shall be by lump sum. b. Pa-ymea 1) The work per -formed and the materials furnished in aeeor-danee with this item shall be -pai 1 f f at rt,r lump'vam pTi�- al.? "L;dfeeef-bal R- Lj'ant Gaskets". a.1:x6—%XrC 2nk 1) Thy Ito,.,ss :.. ♦bliss Seel on o eensider-ed subs ,]:ary to the item l.o:,-,.. installed. b. Paymen 1) The work per-fefmed .,n.7 materials fiffnis e.7 : aeear-danee ..lVth K,43 item are s4sidiafy to unit pri for tiv. I*. n bang installed and fie other- caomVomoati�: v,iRL all 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. PCC-1-2012 Guidelines for Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint Assembly. 4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless -Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. b. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. c. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Carbon Structural Steel d. B 117, Salt Spray Testing e. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service — Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). c. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances. d. M11, Steel Pipe. e. M41, Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. 6. Fastener Quality Act (FQA) a. Public Law 106-34 (P.L. 106-34) 7. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 3 of 8 b. 372, Drinking Water Svstem Components — Lead Content 8. Society for Protective Coating (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standards (SP): a. SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning b. SP3, Power Tool Cleaning 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. flr'1W.T011I113el.Y11:3uIMWlF.1111 Y/Ieiall];7u/:11Y[130.1IN111:3UI101F.1ski A. Product Data 1. Bolts and nuts for mechanical and or flange joints 2. Gaskets / l ' 3. Anti -seize technical data. B. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all fasteners, excluding T-Bolts, shall conform to the Fastener Quality Act (FQA) (P.L. 106-34). 2. Furnish an affidavit certifying that the Xylan Coating is manufactured by Whitford Corporation, or a Whitford Corporation certified Applicator. C. Certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if specified. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory for materials ori2inatin2 outside of the United States. D. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicatiniz compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Fastener manufacturing operations (bolts, nuts, gaskets and coatings) shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. b. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. B. Preconstruction Testing 1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random fittings for destructive testing by an independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification. a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States. b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be grounds for rejecting the entire order. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 4 of 8 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. All fasteners, excluding T-Bolts, shall conform to the Fastener Quality Act (FQA) (P.L. 106-34). All fasteners shall meet the marking requirements set forth by this Act. C. T-Bolts and Nuts 3 1. kandard n-Coated T- bell and AWt 2. Stainless Steel T-bolt with Xvlan Coated Stainless Steel Nut a. Stainless Steel T-bolt and Nut in accordance with AISI-304 316. b. Coat nut with Xvlan in accordance with this Section. D. Flange Bolts and Nuts 1. Stainless Steel Bolt and Xvlan Coated Nut Complv with ASME B16.1 Class 125 a. Assemblv bolts: souam headed earbon s AISI 316 machine bolts with hexagon nuts per ANSI B18.2. Threads conform to ANSI BL1. Bolt length: 118" to 518" protrusion from nut after torquing, b. Meet requirements ofAWWA C207 c. Bolts: ASTMA193, Grade B8. Class I (AISI3fl4 316 Stainless steel, carbide solution treated) d. Nuts and Washers: ASTMA194. Grade 8 Nuts with AISI340*316 Stainless steel Washers. 1) Coat nut with Xvlan in accordance with this Section. e. Bolts, nuts, and washers for flanged ioints shall be for corrosive service and buried conditions. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 5 of 8 f. Anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G mavbe used in lieu ofXvlan to provide protection and prevent ealline E. Threaded Rods 1. Meet requirements of AWWA C207 2. Rods: ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class l(AISI 304 Stainless Steel, carbide solution treated) 3. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A194, Grade 8 Nuts with AISI 304 Stainless Steel Washers a. Coat nut with Xylan in accordance with this Section. F. Push -on Gaskets 1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61. 3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of Buna-N or EPDM ,v!Qaniz. S-BR, unless otherwise specified in Drawings. 4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that make them unfit for intended use. 5. Gaskets shall be the size and shape required to provide an adequate compressive force against the plain end and socket after assembly to affect a positive seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. G. Mechanical Joint Gaskets 1. Conforming to the physical and marking requirements specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. All gaskets shall meet or exceed the latest revisions NSF 61. 3. Rubber gaskets shall be made of EPDM or Buna-N, vine ffize sty-Fene btAa ti mbber- , unless otherwise specified in Drawings. 4. Gaskets shall be free from porous areas, foreign material and other defects that make them unfit for intended use. H. Flange Gaskets AI. Class E Flanges a. Flange gaskets shall be ring type gaskets for pipe lamer than 12 inches in diameter, and full -face gaskets for pipe sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller. b. For general service, rubber gaskets shall be 118 inch thick. Buna-N/NBR or EPDM suitable for sewage service, and meet the requirements ofAWWA C207. Rated for minimum 200 degrees F temperature and 150 psi pressure. L Gasket dimensions shall conform to the requirements ofASME B16.21, unless specified otherwise. J. Gaskets shall be as thin as the finish and accuracv of the flange surface will permit. K. Gasket material shall be specifically recommended for the service by the gasket manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. L. Hydrocarbon Resistant Gaskets 1. Furnish Viton® (Fluorocarbon) Rubber, hydrocarbon resistant gaskets, when required. M. Flange 1selatieInsulating Kits CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 6 of 8 Flange Insulatiniz Kits shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 05 06. whieh are ,-oa by the Pfa-..iags to be isolation Flangoc,�aliall o a f ...v, to Seetio,, 33 nn 10. 1. For- be! ,, od with 10 lati ,,, sleeves ror Coc on 3_ nn 10, thfe.., ing must extend to bolt head with „gr-ip ensure sleeves fit ..ef4y. N. Petrolatum Tape System 1. Petrolatum Tape Primer: Denso Paste or approved equal. 2. Molding and Filler mastic: Densyl Mastic or approved equal. 3. All Purpose Petrolatum Tape: Densyl Tape or approved equal. O. Xylan Coating a. Coat nuts and bolts with a ceramic -filled, baked on fluorocarbon resin, when required. b. Coated nuts and bolts shall be prepared "near white" or "white" when coated to the coating manufacturer's recommended thickness by a certified applicator. c. Coating shall be of Xylan as manufactured by Whitford Corporation and applied by Whitford Corporation or Whitford Corporation Recommended Coater. d. Coating shall be free from holidays and defects. e. Coating thickness shall between 0.0007-inches and 0.0012-inches and shall be such that the nut turns freely on the bolt. f. Coating shall conform to the performance requirements of ASTM B 117, "Salt Spray Test" and shall include, if required, a certificate of conformance. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical Joints 1. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with ANSUAWWA Cl 11/A21.11 Appendix A, AWWA C600 and AWWA Manual M41. 2. Use Standard Xylan Coated T-bolts and Nuts. a. Stainless Steel T-bolts with Xylan Coated Stainless Steel Nuts shall only be used when specifically required in the Drawings. B. Flanged Joints 1. Install in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. 2. Use Stainless Steel Bolts and Xylan Coated Nuts. W ap all buried steel flanges for AWWA C200, C301 or C303 pipe with Petrolatum Tape System. a. If only 1 flange in a joint is steel (AWWA C200, C301, or C303), petrolatum tape wrapping will be required. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 7 of 8 b. If a joint is made between two ductile iron flanges, the joint should be polyethylene encased in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 4. Flange bolts are normally spaced evenly around the flange. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three -pass method in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads. b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically opposite pattern. c. Allow a minimum of 1 hour to pass to provide time for settlement between bolts and nuts and gasket relaxation. d. Complete the third pass by checking each bolt in a clockwise pattern. Each nut should be tightened until it will no longer turn. This step compensates for elastic interaction and brings all bolts into parity. 6. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of/z-inch from the nuts. C. Flanged Joints with fselatia Insulating Kit 1. Flange isolation Insulating Kits shall be installed in accordance with Section 33 04 10 40 05 06. 2. City will verify Isolation in accordance with Section 33 04 TO 40 05 06. D. Threaded Rod 1. Install as part of joint harness assembly in accordance with AWWA Manual M11. 2. Space rods evenly around the pipe. 3. During assembly, tighten nuts gradually and equally using a three -pass method in accordance with ASME PCC-1-2012. a. For the first pass, tighten the nuts to 50 percent at diametrically opposite sides to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all bolts carry equal loads. b. For the second pass, tighten the nuts to 100 percent again in a diametrically opposite pattern. 4. The threads of the bolts should protrude a minimum of 1/2-inch from the nuts. W ap joint harness assembly with Petrolatum Tape System. E. Petrolatum Tape System 1. Surfaces should be free from dirt, loose rust, scale or flaking coatings. a. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3. 1) High pressure wash of 3,000 to 7,000 psi is also suitable. b. Surfaces may be damp but shall not have droplets or continuous film of water. 2. Apply a uniform, thin coat of Petrolatum Tape Primer to the entire surface by stiff brush, gloved hand or rag at normal ambient temperatures. 3. By hand application, apply Molding and Filler Mastic to a rounded configuration to fill irregular shapes and reduce sharp -edged surfaces. 4. Spirally wrap All Purpose Petrolatum Tape with a minimum overlap of 1 inch. a. For severely corrosive environments, an overlap of 55 percent is recommended. b. Press air pockets out and smooth all lap seams. 5. For additional mechanical protection, overwrap may be applied to increase impact strength and electrical resistance. AF. APPIv anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoraue. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 It 05 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS Page 8 of 8 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 SECTION 33 1110 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 33 11 10 - 1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 1 of 14 1. Ductile Iron Pipe 3-inch through 64-inch for potable water, wastewater and reuse applications B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.6. 4. Modified 1.9. 5. Modified 2.2. 6. Modified 3.4. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 33 0131 - Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection n. Section33 nn 10 r9i3tr Bviaii�aad-Elee#ical IS6 ut i9$ 5. Section 33 04 40 - Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 6. Section 33 05 10 - Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 7. seet o 05 2-Wtallati.^ fC.,ffier Pipe i G soixg or Tun&&-, 8. Section 33 1105 - Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 9. Section 33 11 11 - Ductile Iron Fittings 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. B. Duotil3 Iron Pre the—fitti,ng, ma\Ahale ar arpmrtonxmac- b. 1) meter- all f,... ishea ; aeeer-danee with this item a -ad measiffed as provided tinder- '%1eastffemei4" will be paid for- at4e. priee bid per- or "DIP" irf +m led for-: a) Var-iouss4zes baek44. 4wo lr«rgs CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 2 of 14 d) Various Depths,- or- miseCitr'1=neous3Off�y e)-Nan�ouo ruts 4—yan�ouo uses e. The p e bid z1u1.1. ixe 1) ar:d4fiAalLlxg Dustile ken Pipe with ; r s . eeiAe by Flo Drawings. 2"1c6,lzatiqn 3`,- Polyethylene eueasefflelft 1) 1rning 5) Pa-vemen reel 7) Hauling 8) Disposal of exeess material. 9) Fumi:,hinA pkawmznt-and r effibe,lme 4-0) FuI ak�xig� pkx-vmeft ,-ad , etio,. ,.r1.,,,,1,r;11 11) Tr-eneh water steps. 12) Thyuot feet aint ;f -equ -oa i G nt.aet r,,,,.,,,,.o��� 13) Bolt✓.axd zm:-s 1 n) Gaskets 1 5) Clean 1 6) 18) Tooting 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Gland or Follower Gland a. Non -restrained, mechanical joint fitting 2. Retainer Gland a. Mechanically restrained mechanical joint fitting B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless -Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications b. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both c. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel. d. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 3 of 14 e. A674, Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids. f. 13117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. g. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. b. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. c. M41, Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. 6. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. CI04/A21.4, Cement —Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. b. C 105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. c. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. CI15/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. e. C 150/A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. £ C151/A21.51, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. g. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances 7. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. 8. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Interior lining a. If it is other than cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C 104/A21.4, including: 1) Material 2) Application recommendations 3) Field touch-up procedures 2. Thrust Restraint a. Retainer glands, thrust harnesses or any other means. 3. Gaskets a. If hydrocarbon or other special gaskets are required. B. Shop Drawings — Furnish for Ductile Iron Pipe used in the water distribution system or for a wastewater force main for 24-inch and greater diameters, including: CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 4 of 14 1. Wall thickness design calculations sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas including: a. Working pressure b. Surge pressure c. Deflection 2. Provide thrust restraint calculations for all fittings and valves, sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas, to verify the restraint lengths shown in the Drawings. Lay schedule/drawing for 24-inch and greater diameters, sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas including: a. Pipe class b. Joints type c. Fittings d. Stationing e. Transitions f. Joint deflection g. Restraint tvve C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS reauirements for all applicable metal products where rea_uired in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. D. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Ductile Iron Pipe meets the provisions of this Section, each run of pipe furnished has met Specifications, all inspections have been made, and that all tests have been performed in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. 2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B 117. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Manufacturers a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. 1) Change orders, specials, and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. b. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, lining, and coatings) shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. c. Ductile Iron Pipe 1) Manufactured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 a) Perform quality control tests and maintain results as outlined within standard to assure compliance. 2) Subject each pipe to a hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi for duration of at least 10 seconds. B. Preconstruction Testing 1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random lengths of pipe for testing by an independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 5 of 14 a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States. b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be grounds for rejecting the entire order. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA M41. 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. General Unless noted otherwise, all buried ductile iron piDim shall conform to the following: a. Restrained flexible push joint pipe, similar and equal to Flex -Rine joint pipe as manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe, TR FLEX or HDSS as manufactured by US pipe. 1) COnforminR to ASTM A 746 for push -on joints. 2) Joints shall meet or exceed the pressure rating of the pipe and shall provide a minimum 5-de2ree deflection angle Der AWWA C600. C. Pipe 1. Pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11, AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.15, and AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. 2. All pipe shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. 3. Pipe shall have a lay length of 18 feet or 20 feet except for special fittings or closure pieces and necessary to comply with the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 6 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 6 of 14 D. As a minimum the following pressures classes apply. The Drawings may specify a higher pressure class or the pressure and deflection design criteria may also require a higher pressure class, but in no case should they be less than the following: Diameter Min Pressure Class (inches) (psi) 3 through 12 350 14 through 20 250 24 200 30 through 64 150 Pipe markings shall meet the minimum requirements of AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: a. "DI" or "Ductile" shall be clearly labeled on each pipe. b. Weight, pressure class and nominal thickness of each pipe c. Year and country pipe were cast. d. Manufacturer's mark 2. Pressure and Deflection Design a. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class specified in the Drawings. b. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.50, AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51, and AWWA M41 for trench construction, using the following parameters: 1) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pcf 2) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20 3) Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings 4) Bedding Conditions = Type 4 5) Working Pressure (PW) = 150 psi 6) Surge Allowance (PS) = 100 psi 3. Design Internal Pressure (Pi) = PW + Ps or 2:1 safety factor of the actual working pressure plus the actual surge pressure, whichever is greater. a. Test Pressure = 1) No less than 1.25 minimum times the stated working pressure (187 psi minimum) of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test section. 2) No less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure (225 psi minimum) at the lowest elevation of the test section. b. Maximum Calculated Deflection (DX) = 3 percent c. Restrained Joint Safety Factor (Sf) = 15 percent d. Trench depths shall be verified after existing utilities are located. 1) Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. 2) In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. 4. Provisions for Thrust a. Thrust at bends, tees, plugs or other fittings shall be mechanically restrained joints when required by the Drawings, corrosion resistant joints. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 7 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 7 of 14 b. In addition to the mechanical joint restraint required for all bends and fittings, horizontal and vertical bends shall be restrained by conerete thmst bleek ng a*d by mechanical joint restraint along the length of the pipe, as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, unless shown otherwise in the design drawings. Inclusion in the plans of dimensions for joint restraint lengths along the pipe, or - dimensions o t1xujt MoOking,--shall be interpreted to mean the exclusion of the other method of restraint, unless both methods are specifically required in the plans. c. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for the restrained length of pipe within the casing. d. Restrained joints, when required, shall be used for a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug, valve or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust, the following shall apply: 1) Valves shall be calculated as dead ends. 2) Design pressure shall be greater than the working pressure of the pipe or the internal pressure (Pi) whichever is greater. 3) Restrained joints shall consist of approved mechanical restrained or push - on restrained joints as listed in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 0160 00. e. The Pipe Manufacturer shall verify the length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust in accordance with the Drawings, AWWA M41, and the following: 1) The weight of earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe, for unsaturated soil conditions. 2) Soil density = 130 pcf (maximum value to be used), for unsaturated soil conditions 3) If indicated on the Drawings and the Geotechnical Borings that ground water is expected, account for reduced soil density. 5. Joints a. General — Comply with AWWA/ANSI CI I I/A21.11. b. Push -On Joints c. Mechanical Joints d. Push -On Restrained Joints 1) Restraining Push -on joints by means of a special gasket. a) Only those products that are listed in Section 0160 00 b) The working pressure rating of the restrained gasket must exceed the test pressure of the pipe line to be installed. c) Approved for use of restraining Ductile Iron Pipe in casing with a carrier pipe of 4-inches to 12-inches. d) Otherwise only approved if specially listed on the Drawings. 2) Push -on Restrained Joint bell and spigot. a) Only those products list in the standard products list will be allowed for the size listed in the standard products list per Section 0160 00. b) Pressure rating shall exceed the working and test pressure of the pipe line. e. Flanged Joints — AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125 f. Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B16.1, Class 125. g. Field fabricated flanges are prohibited. 6. Gaskets CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 8 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 8 of 14 a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 1105. 7. Isolation Flanges a. Flanges required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform to Section 33 04-10 33 11 11. Bolts and Nuts a. Mechanical Joints 1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. b. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115. a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 9. Flange Coatings a. Connections to Steel Flanges 1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum Tape System in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 10. Ductile Iron Pipe Exterior Coatings a. All ductile iron shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil thick, on the pipe exterior, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 11. Polyethylene Encasement a. All buried Ductile Iron Pipe shall be polyethylene encased. b. Only manufacturers listed in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 01 60 00 will be considered acceptable. c. Use only virgin polyethylene material. d. Encasement for buried pipe shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD) polyethylene conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 or 4 mil high density cross -laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 and ASTM A674. e. Marking: At a minimum of every 2 feet along its length, the mark the polyethylene film with the following information: 1) Manufacturer's name or trademark 2) Year of manufacturer 3) AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 4) Minimum film thickness and material type 5) Applicable range of nominal diameter sizes 6) Warning — Corrosion Protection — Repair Any Damage f. Special Markings/Colors 1) Reclaimed Water, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "RECLAIMED WATER", b) Provide purple polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach purple reclaimed water marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. 2) Wastewater, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "WASTEWATER"; b) Provide green polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach green sanitary sewer marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. g. Minimum widths Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Sizes for Push -On Joint Pipe CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 9 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 9 of 14 Nominal Pipe Diameter Min. Width — Flat Tube Min. Width — Sheet (inches) (inches) (inches) 3 14 28 4 14 28 6 16 32 8 20 40 10 24 48 12 27 54 14 30 60 16 34 68 18 37 74 20 41 82 24 54 108 30 67 134 36 81 162 42 81 162 48 95 190 54 108 216 60 108 216 64 121 242 12. Ductile Iron Pipe Interior Lining a. Cement Mortar Lining 1) Ductile Iron Pipe for potable water shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.04 and be acceptable according to NSF 61. b. Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy Linings 1) Ductile Iron Pipe for use in wastewater applications shall be lined with a Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy lining as designated in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 0160 00. 2) Apply lining at a minimum of 40 mils DFT. 3) Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using a Joint Compound as supplied by the manufacturer. a) Apply the joint compound by brush to ensure coverage. b) Care should betaken that the joint compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. c) Coat the gasket seat and spigot ends after the application of the lining. 4) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5) Check thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge in accordance with the method outlined in SSPC PA 2. 6) Test the interior lining of all pipe barrels for pinholes with a non- destructive 2,500-volt test. a) Repair any defects prior to shipment. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10-10 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 10 of 14 7) Mark each fitting with the date of application of the lining system along with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records maintained by the applicator of his work. 8) For all Ductile Iron Pipe in wastewater service where the pipe has been cut, coat the exposed surface with the touch-up material as recommended by the manufacturer. a) The touch-up material and the lining shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in AWWA C600, AWWA M41 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. See Section 33 11 11 for installation requirements for Ductile Iron Fittings. 3. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 4. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 5. Embed Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 6. For- inst ll Rio f e .. ief ripe `= ithin jadr4, 0eo Seel o 33 05 24 B. Pipe Handling 1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site. 2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. a. Inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe prior to lowering into the trench. b. Do not handle the pipe in such a way that will damage the interior lining. c. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the surface of the pipe for handling the pipe. 3. At the close of each operating day: a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash — during and after the laying operation. b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. Joint Making 1. Mechanical Joints a. Bolt the follower ring into compression against the gasket with the bolts tightened down evenly then cross torqued in accordance with AWWA C600. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 11 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 11 of 14 b. Overstressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be permitted. 2. Push -on Joints a. Install Push -on joints as defined in AWWA/ANSI CI I I/A21.11. b. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter. c. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer. d. Apply a thin film of non -toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell. e. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinish the field cut and scarf to conform to AWWA C600. Flanged Joints a. Use erection bolts and drift pins to make flanged connections. 1) Do not use undue force or restraint on the ends of the fittings. 2) Apply even and uniform pressure to the gasket. b. The fitting must be free to move in any direction while bolting. 1) Install flange bolts with all bolt heads faced in one direction. 4. Joint Deflection a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions or to meet the lines and grades and shown in the Drawings. b. The deflection of each joint must be in accordance with AWWA C600 Table 3. c. The maximum deflection allowed is 50 percent of that indicated in AWWA C600. d. The manufacturer's recommendation may be used with the approval of the Engineer. D. Polyethylene Encasement Installation 1. Preparation a. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. 1) Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene. b. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect a snug, but not tight encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. 1) Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces such as bell -spigot interfaces, bolted joints or fittings and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. 2) Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape and hold. c. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. 2. Tubular Type (Method A) a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section and bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends. c. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. d. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 12 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 12 of 14 e. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube, pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of the new length of pipe and wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. f. Secure overlap in place. g. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of next pipe in same manner. 3. Tubular Type (Method B) a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section. b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. c. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends. d. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of proceeding pipe section, bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise. e. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure. 4. Sheet Type a. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than piece section. b. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching it until it clears the pipe ends. c. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. d. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. e. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. f. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. g. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. 5. Pipe -Shaped Appurtenances a. Cover bends, reducers, offsets and other pipe -shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe and fittings. 6. Odd -Shaped Appurtenances a. When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and other odd -shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length polyethylene tube by passing sheet under appurtenances and bringing it up around body. b. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice and taping down. c. Tape polyethylene securely in place at the valve stem and at any other penetrations. 7. Repairs a. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around fitting to cover damaged area and secured in place. 8. Openings in Encasement CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 13 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 13 of 14 a. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blow -offs, air valves and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. b. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene with tape. c. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above. 9. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: a. Where polyethylene -wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. b. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape. c. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from Cast or Ductile Iron Pipe. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Patching 1. Excessive field -patching is not permitted of lining or coating. 2. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12 inches. 3. In general, there shall not be more than 1 patch on either the lining or the coating of any 1 joint of pipe. 4. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe: a. Make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints. b. Do not install patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the City. 5. Promptly remove rejected pipe from the site. 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Potable Water Mains 1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing and bacteriological testing of water mains a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water main as specified in Section 33 04 40. B. Wastewater Lines 1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection a. Provide a Post -CCTV Inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 10 - 14 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Page 14 of 14 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] 111\I ZI] wy BEN I IQ I CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 1111 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS PART1- GENERAL Ilfi M1111U Mu E:�'A'1 33 11 11 -1 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 1 of 14 A. Section Includes: 1. Ductile Iron Fittings 3-inch through 64-inch for potable water, wastewater, and other liquids for use with Ductile Iron Pipe and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. 2. All mechanical joint fittings shall be mechanically restrained using restrained wedge type retainer glands. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Ne -Added 1.1.A.2 2. Modified 1.1.C. 3. Added L I .D. 4. Modified 1.2. 5. Modified 1.6. 6. Modified 1.9. 7. Added 2.2.13. 8. Removed 3A.D. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 4. Seetien 33 04 10 joint Bending a -ad Eleeb-7ioal. Iodate 5. Section 33 04 40 — Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 6. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 7. Section 33 1105 — Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SuDDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, aDDly to this 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard 1)iDin2 bid item. a. > 1) Ehall be per-nUrn ��1�rr�J�� 2) Fittings weights -are -the stim of the-NuriUa times o miultir)ied-by the weight per- fitting as listed in A-)Xq"4kNS1 G 15 342 1. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 - 2 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 2 of 14 ■ .MEMANLYNIARMWA ■ b. 1) The per -formed a ateri-als fumished inz.EEo eeith thin Itc r. and measuredprovided a "Measurement" be paid for at the unit pr? e bid pef ton of "Ptiet:1 ctef Fitiiiigwith Restfaint". c. The pr4eo Nd ohm'; ina 1) Fumiohin�d installin - Du tiv box fix'. FT46* ✓ao ;,pz�xfied by the Drags. ?) Dining mom nnn e4 5) -& 6) Hauling J Fumidk�xig axd � t l';1� 0? �, wit, ama rots 9) VL-s.mn1vaxd c 4-0) Fumiohing, plae0. ent and , etio fb.,ekfil1 1 1) 'r c It 'u 13) Gleaffi g 1) Disasfeetien 15) Testing 1) Shall be to f fiRirgo cuwi .!srsN'et��.��.�r�.ri.�i��c�rrrr>I A. ■ A. . .VAMWA DOMINION ■ .N . . NIPP ■ r n-WILVT�. . b. -Payment 1) Thewef4E peffefmed and mat€r-i-als fumished in aecer-danee ,;ins item pfiee bid pef ton of "Dectilo Irm Eaawor Fit ing-s"_ c. The pr4ee bid "� .1 ink ?) Rmiakdng Id inofealhN Dustile ken Wa4er- Fittings as speeified by CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -3 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 3 of 14 �) T1mLlg J Disyooa' 9fexeess +o,.W 4) Fumn; ling-a*d irrnallirzg baits, nuts and restraints 4-0) FuI �'iKxigs y)easeme t .-ad , tion f embedment 11) FuI -_,&�xigs y)ea,.ome fft .-ad , tion fb.,,.kfil 1) Di-,ixfeefie1� 15) Testing 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Gland or Follower Gland a. Non -restrained, mechanical joint fitting 2. Retainer Gland a. Mechanically restrained mechanical joint fitting, consisting of multiple gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 110/A21.10. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless -Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High -Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications b. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both c. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel. d. A674, Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids. e. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. b. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. c. M41, Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. 5. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C104/A21.4, Cement —Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. b. C 105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. c. C110/A21.10, Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -4 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 4 of 14 d. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. e. C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. f. C151/A21.51, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. g. C153/A21.53, Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service. 6. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. 7. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Ductile Iron Fittings a. Pressure class b. Interior lining c. Joint types 2. Polyethylene encasement and tape a. Planned method of installation b. Whether the film is linear low density or high -density cross -linked polyethylene c. The thickness of the film provided. 3. The interior lining, if it is other than cement mortar lining, in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4 a. Material b. Application recommendations c. Field touch-up procedures 4. Thrust Restraint a. Retainer glands b. Thrust harnesses c. Any other means 5. Gaskets a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 11 05. L--,!at,,oFIa ages, a. F.10rgoc re,,,,; .oa by die 3awfirrga to be isolation r~ lang2E1'v1.1 jafifoFm to Seetion 33 0 i n 7. Blind Flanges a. At outlets not indicated to be otherwise plugged, connected to valves, or to other pines, Drovide blind flanges with bolts, nuts, washers, and Baskets. 1) Provide bolts, nuts, washers, and Baskets in accordance with 33 1105. 8. Bolts and Nuts a. Mechanical Joints CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 - 5 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 5 of 14 1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. b. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115. a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. 9. Flange Coatings a. Connections to Steel Flanges 1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum Tape System in accordance with Section 33 1105. B. Certificates 1. The manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all Ductile Iron Fittings meet the provisions of this Section and meet the requirements of AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53. 2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B 117. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the reauirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Fittings manufacturing operations (fittings, lining, and coatings) shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. b. Ductile Iron Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53. 1) Perform quality control tests and maintain the results as outlined in these standards to assure compliance. B. Preconstruction Testing The City may, at its own cost, subject random fittings for destructive testing by an independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification. a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States. b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be grounds for rejecting the entire order. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) reauirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Store and handle in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA M41. 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 6600. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -6 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 6 of 14 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Ductile Iron Fittings 1. Ductile Iron Fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10, AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53. 2. All fittings for potable water service shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. 3. Ductile Iron Fittings, at a minimum, shall meet or exceed the pressures classes of the pipe which the fitting is connected, unless specifically indicated in the Drawings. 4. Fittings Markings a. Meet the minimum requirements of AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. b. Minimum markings shall include: 1) "DI" or "Ductile" cast or metal stamped on each fitting. 2) Applicable AWWA/ANSI standard for that the fitting. 3) Pressure rating 4) Number of degrees for all bends 5) Nominal diameter of the openings 6) Year and country fitting was cast. 7) Manufacturer's mark C. 5. Joints a. Mechanical Joints -Retainer Glands-Aith nwol xxs 1) Comply with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 and applicable parts of ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. 2) The retainer gland shall have the following working pressure ratings based on size and type of pipe: a) Ductile Iron Pipe (1) 3-inch — 16-inch, 350 psi (2) 18-inch — 48-inch, 250 psi b) PVC C900 and C905 (1) 3-inch— 12-inch, 305psi (2) 14-inch — 16-inch, 235psi (3) 18-inch — 20-inch, 200psi (4) 24-inch — 30 —inch 165psi CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -7 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 7 of 14 c) Ratings are for water pressure and must include a minimum safety factor of 2 to 1 in all sizes. 3) Retainer glands shall have specific designs for Ductile Iron and PVC and it should be easy to differentiate between the 2. 4) Gland body, wedges and wedge actuating components shall be cast from grade 65-45-12 ductile iron material in accordance with ASTM A536. 5) Mechanical joint restraint shall require conventional tools and installation procedures per AWWA C600, while retaining full mechanical joint deflection during assembly as well as allowing joint deflection after assembly. 6) Proper actuation of the gripping wedges shall be ensured with torque limiting twist off nuts. 7) A minimum of 6 wedges shall be required for 8-inch diameter PVC pipe. b. Push -On, Restrained Joints 1) Restraining Push -on joints by means of a special gasket. a) Only those products that are listed in 0160 00. b) The working pressure rating of the restrained gasket must exceed the test pressure of the pipeline to be installed. c) Approved for use of restraining Ductile Iron Pipe in casing with a carrier pipe of 4-inches to 12-inches. d) Otherwise only approved if specially listed on the drawings. 2) Push -on Restrained Joint bell and spigot. a) Only those products list in the standard products list will be allowed for the size listed in the standard products list per Section 0160 00 b) Pressure rating shall exceed the working and test pressure of the pipeline. c. Flanged Joints 1) AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125 2) Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B 16.1, Class 125. 3) Field fabricated flanges are prohibited. d. Blind Flames 1) At outlets not indicated to be otherwise pluued, connected to valves or to other pines, provide blind flanges with bolts, nuts, washers, and Baskets according to Section 33 1105. 6. Gaskets a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 1105. 7. isolation Flanges a. FlangUG re,, ir-ea by the drawings to be isolation onto seet o 33 nn i n 8. Bolts and Nuts a. Mechanical Joints 1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. b. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115. a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05. 9. Flange Coatings a. Connections to Steel Flanges CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -8 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 8 of 14 1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum Tape System in accordance with Section 33 1105. 10. Ductile Iron Fitting Exterior Coatings a. All Ductile Iron Fittings shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil thick, on the exterior, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 11. Polyethylene Encasement a. All buried Ductile Iron Fittings shall be polyethylene encased. b. Only manufacturers listed in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 01 60 00 will be considered acceptable. c. Use only virgin polyethylene material. d. Encasement for buried fittings shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD) polyethylene conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 or 4 mil high density cross -laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to conforming to AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 and ASTM A674. e. Marking: At a minimum of every 2 feet along its length, the mark the polyethylene film with the following information: 1) Manufacturer's name or trademark 2) Year of manufacturer 3) AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 4) Minimum film thickness and material type 5) Applicable range of nominal diameter sizes 6) Warning — Corrosion Protection — Repair Any Damage f. Special Markings/Colors 1) Reclaimed Water, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "RECLAIMED WATER", b) Provide purple polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach purple reclaimed water marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. 2) Wastewater, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "WASTEWATER"; b) Provide green polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach green sanitary sewer marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. g. Minimum widths Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Sizes for Push -On Joint Fittings Nominal Fittings Diameter Min. Width — Flat Tube Min. Width — Sheet (inches) (inches) (inches) 3 14 28 4 14 28 6 16 32 8 20 40 10 24 48 12 27 54 14 30 60 16 34 68 18 37 74 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 - 9 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 9 of 14 20 41 82 24 54 108 30 67 134 36 81 162 42 81 162 48 95 190 54 108 216 60 108 216 64 121 242 12. Ductile Iron Fittings Interior Lining a. Cement Mortar Lining 1) Ductile Iron Fittings for potable water shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C1O4/A21.4 and be acceptable according to NSF 61. b. Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy Linings 1) Ductile Iron Fittings for use in wastewater applications shall be lined with a Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy lining as designated in the Standard Products List as shown in Section 0160 00. 2) Apply lining at a minimum of 40 mils DFT. 3) Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using a Joint Compound as supplied by the manufacturer. a) Apply the joint compound by brush to ensure coverage. b) Care should betaken that the joint compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. c) Coat the gasket seat and spigot ends after the application of the lining. 4) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5) Check thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge in accordance with the method outlined in SSPC PA 2. 6) Test the interior lining of all fittings for pinholes with a non-destructive 2,500 volt test. a) Repair any defects prior to shipment. 7) Mark each fitting with the date of application of the lining system along with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records maintained by the applicator of his work. 8) For all Ductile Iron Fittings in wastewater service where the fitting has been cut, coat the exposed surface with the touch-up material as recommended by the manufacturer. a) The touch-up material and the lining shall be of the same manufacturer. 13. Flexible Expansion Joints a. Flexible expansion ioints shall be double ball and manufactured of ductile iron and shall provide the deflection needed to protect piping systems. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -10 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 10 of 14 b. Each flexible expansion joint shall consist of an expansion joint desi�yzlled and cast as an integral Dart of a ball and socket tvpe flexible joint, having a minimum per ball deflection of: 200, 2-inch to 12-inch; 15°, 14-inch to 36-inch; 12°, 48-inch and 4 inches minimum expansion. Additional expansion sleeves shall be added or removed at the factory or in the field. Provide mechanical joint and flanie end connections as required. c. All internal surfaces (wetted Darts) shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxv conformini; to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213. Sealing gaskets shall be constructed of EPDM. d. Exterior surfaces shall be coated with a minimum of 6 mils of fusion bonded epoxv conformini; to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C116/A21.16. e. Provide polvethvlene sleeves, meeting ANSI/AWWA CI05/A21.5, for direct buried applications. 14. Other ductile iron couplings for pipe connections a. For connection of ductile iron or cast iron pipe to HDPE see specification 3331 15. b. For HDPE to HDPE connections see specification 33 31 15. C. For direct connection of Plain end RCP to FRP see specification 33 31 13. d. For direct transition connection of Plain end RCP to RCP see specification 33 05 93.25. e. For RCP flexible _joint couplings, see specification 33 05 93.25. f. For all transition couplings from different pipe materials to FRP pipe see specification 33 31 13. g. For PVC iravity sanitary sewer pipe connections, coupling_ s, and restraint, see specification 33 3120. h. For PVC pressure pipe mechanical joint fittings, see specification 33 11 12. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in AWWA C600, AWWA M41, and in accordance with the fittings manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lay fittings to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10. 4. Embed Ductile Iron Fittings in accordance with 33 05 10. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -11 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 11 of 14 B. Joint Making 1. Mechanical Joints with required mechanical restraint. a. All mechanical joints require mechanical restraint. b. Bolt the retainer gland into compression against the gasket, with the bolts tightened down evenly then cross torqued in accordance with AWWA C600. c. Overstressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be permitted. 2. Push -on Joints (restrained) a. All push -on joints shall be restrained push -on type. b. Install Push -on joints as defined in AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. c. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter. d. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer. e. Apply a thin film of non -toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell. f. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinished the field cut and scarf to conform to AWWA M-41. Flanged Joints a. Use erection bolts and drift pins to make flanged connections. 1) Do not use undue force or restraint on the ends of the fittings. 2) Apply even and uniform pressure to the gasket. b. The fitting must be free to move in any direction while bolting. 1) Install flange bolts with all bolt heads faced in 1 direction. 4. Joint Deflection a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions or to meet the lines and grades and shown in the Drawings. b. The deflection of each joint must be in accordance with AWWA C600 Table 3. c. The maximum deflection allowed is 50 percent of that indicated in AWWA C600. d. The manufacturer's recommendation may be used with the approval of the Engineer. C. Polyethylene Encasement Installation 1. Preparation a. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on fittings surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. 1) Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between fittings and polyethylene. b. Fit polyethylene film to contour of fittings to affect a snug, but not tight encase with minimum space between polyethylene and fittings. 1) Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces such as bell -spigot interfaces, bolted joints or fittings, and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. 2) Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape and hold. c. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. 2. Tubular Type (Method A) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 - 12 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 12 of 14 a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than fittings section. b. Slip tube around fittings, centering it to provide 1 foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section and bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise until it clears fittings ends. c. Lower fittings into trench with preceding section of pipe. d. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube. e. After assembling fittings make overlap of polyethylene tube, pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of the fitting and wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. f. Secure overlap in place. g. Take up slack width at top of fitting to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of fitting, securing fold at quarter points. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of next fitting in same manner. 3. Tubular Type (Method B) a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than fitting section. b. Slip tube around fitting, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare fitting at each end. c. Take up slack width at top of fitting to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of fitting, securing fold at quarter points„,- secure ends. d. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of proceeding pipe section, bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise. e. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure. 4. Sheet Type a. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than piece section. b. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each fitting, bunching it until it clears the fitting ends. c. Wrap polyethylene around fitting so that it circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of fitting. d. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. e. Lower wrapped fitting into trench with preceding section of pipe. f. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. g. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of fittings in same manner. 5. Pipe -Shaped Appurtenances a. Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe -shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe and fittings. 6. Odd -Shaped Appurtenances a. When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses and other odd -shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length polyethylene tube by passing sheet under appurtenances and bringing it up around body. b. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice and taping down. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 - 13 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 13 of 14 c. Tape polyethylene securely in place at the valve stem and at any other penetrations. 7. Repairs a. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around fitting to cover damaged area, and secure in place. 8. Openings in Encasement a. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blow -offs, air valves and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. b. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene with tape. c. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above. 9. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Fittings a. Where polyethylene -wrapped fitting joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. b. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape. c. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or Ductile Iron Fittings. tees,1. install eenerete bleeking in aeeer-danee with Seetion 03 30 00 for- all bends, er-esses and plugs in the oliro2; �_- in4iea4ed in tk-i nornnI *,.3 the +hfust 3.. T or ng azo., for- eaeh ,leek shall be at least . gr-em as that indioated n the Digs -and ahall b , ineluding water lxaxnmar-, whieh may develop. 1. Each Wzock aha).1 rest on a fir iffidisttffbed f „ma. io tx tromp kottem.. 5. if the Gei4faeter- eneeun4er-s soil that appears to be differ-et4 than that whieh was notify the Eagi oor t the installation of the bloekiag 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Patching 1. Excessive field -patching is not permitted of lining or coating. 2. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12 inches. 3. In general, there shall not be more than 1 patch on either the lining or the coating of any fitting. 4. Wherever necessary to patch the fitting: a. Make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints. b. Do not install patched fitting until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the City. c. Promptly remove rejected fittings from the site. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 11 11 -14 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS Page 14 of 14 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Potable Water Mains 1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing and bacteriological testing of water mains a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water main as specified in Section 33 04 40. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 BURIED YARD VALVES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 33 12 00 - BURIED PLUG VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Buried plug valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099679 "Atmospheric Protection and Plant Service Areas Coatings" for painting exposed valves. 2. Section 310515 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork" for subsoil and aggregate for backfill. 3. Section 330510 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill" for trenching for buried pipe installation. 4. Section 331225 "Connection to Existing Water Mains" for disinfection of domestic water piping beyond backflow preventer valve vault. 5. Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" 1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective yard piping bid item. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submittals requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including: a. Dimensions. b. Size. C. Materials of construction. 2. Weight. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 BURIED YARD VALVES Page 2 of 8 3. Protective coatings. 4. Actuator weight. 5. Calculations for actuator torque where applicable. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed denoted AWWA Standards. B. Manufacturer Instructions: Installation instructions for backflow preventer assemblies, valves, and accessories. C. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. D. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work according to the Citv of Fort Worth Depart of Public Works standards. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: 1. Valves 16-inch and larger shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each project. a. Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. 2. For valves less than 16-inch, valves of each size shall be the product of 1 manufacturer, unless approved by the City. a. Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. / y '� 3. Valves shall meet or exceed AWWA C517. �—� 4. Plug Valves shall be new. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 33 1200 118J R I a ox%\ 17 01V1.1 FlU Page 3 of 8 5. Plug Valve Manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years of successful experience manufacturing Valves of similar service and size, and indicated or demonstrate an experience record that is satisfactory to the Engineer and City. This experience record will be thoroughly investigated by the Engineer, and acceptance will be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and City. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Protect all parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. 3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or extremes in temperature. 6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. III= WXk'sII►IKK6]►Ii0116 14 A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 01. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Manufacturers: AA1. Dezurik, Pratt, Kennedy Valve, Valmadc, Crispin, M&H, Or approved equal. 2. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 1181.7 I a ox%\ 17 01V1.1 FlU Page 4 of 8 a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 3. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. 4. Description: a. Regulatory Requirements. b. Valves shall be new and meet or exceed AWWA C517 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. B. Description: 1. Regulatory Requirements: a. Valves shall be new and meet or exceed AWWA C517 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. C. Provide buried valves with counter -clockwise opening operation. D. Provide valves of the size indicated on the Drawings or as noted and, as far as possible, identical equipment of the same type and from one manufacturer. E. Provide valves with the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard to which they are manufactured in cast, raised letters on some appropriate part of the body. F. Unless otherwise noted, provide valves with a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or of the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher, and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. G. Provide valves with the same nominal diameter as the pipe or fittings they are connected to. Except as otherwise noted, provide joints as mechanical joints, with joint restraint where the adjacent piping is required to be restrained. H. Construct valves for buried service. I. Cast the word "OPEN' and an arrow indicating direction to open on each valve body or operator. Provide 2-inch square operating nut for all valves. K. Fabricate extension stems from solid steel. Do not use stems smaller in diameter than the valve stem. Equip stem with wrench nut. Ensure all stem connections are pinned. L. While AWWA standards allow integral and non -integral thrust collar and stem designs, thrust collars and stems shall be integrally cast (not pinned on) and shall feature copper alloy valve stems. M. Use valves with mechanical joint ends compliant with AWWA C111 unless otherwise noted. N. Exterior Hardware on Valves: Type 304 stainless steel. AO. Require gearing for plug valves 6-inch and larger to limit rim -null to 40 nounds force. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 1181.7 I a ox%\ 17 01V1.1 FlU Page 5 of 8 P. Valve Interior and Exterior Surfaces: 1. Fusion bonded epoxy coated, minimum 5 mils, meeting AWWA C550 requirements. 2.2 VALVE BOXES AA. All buried plug valves shall be provided with extension shafts, operating nuts, and valve boxes as 1 follows: 1. Extension Shafts: Type 304 stainless steel and the operating nut shall be 2-inch square. Shafts shall be designed to provide a factor of safety of not less than four. Operating nuts shall be pinned to the shafts. 2. Top of the Operating Nut: Located two-inch below the rim of the valve box. 3. Valve Boxes: Manufactured by Clow; Mueller; or approved equal. a. Heavy -pattern cast iron, three-piece, telescoping type box with dome base suitable for installation on the buried valves. b. Inside Diameter: At least 4-1/2-inch. C. Barrel Length: Adapted to the depth of cover, with a lap of at least 6-inch when in the most extended position. d. Covers: Cast iron with integrally -cast direction -to- open arrow, and the word "WATER" integrally cast. e. Material: Aluminum or plastic are not acceptable. f. Provide a means of lateral support for the valve extension shafts in the top portion of the valve box. 4. Upper Section of Each Box: Have a top flange of sufficient bearing area to prevent settling. 5. Bottom of Lower Section: Enclose the stuffing box and operating nut of the valve and shall be oval. 6. Position -Indicating Device: Provide for each gate and butterfly valve. Mount over the shaft and visually show the position of the valve at all times. a. Material: Non -corrosive, nonmagnetic requiring no lubrication. b. Valve Box Adapters and Cover: Furnished and arranged for use. 7. Approved Operating Key or Wrench: Furnish. 8. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel. B. Plug Valve: 1. Suitable for buried service, and by DeZurik Water Controls of Sartell, Minnesota; M&H A,A Valve; Henry Pratt Company, A Mueller Brand; Crispin Valve.; and Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Corporation of Elmhurst, Illinois; Kennedv Valve Companv. a division of Mc Wane. Inc. 2. Conform to the minimum requirements of AWWA C517, in addition to the requirements specified herein. 3. Non -lubricated, full port, eccentric type. 4. Valve Body: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 118J R I a ox%\ 17 01V1.1 FlU Page 6 of 8 a. Valve Body: Ductile iron per ASTM A536 b. Flanged Ends: Furnish in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C 115/A21.15. c. Mechanical Joints: Furnish with outlets which conform to AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. d. Buried valves: Provide with polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5. 1) Polyethylene Encasement: Furnish in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 5. Valves: Rated for a minimum working pressure of 175 psig for 3-inch through 12-inch and 150 psig for 14-inch through 72-inch valves. All valves shall be manually operated. 6. Manual Operators: a. Operator Force Requirements: Not to exceed 40 pounds under any operating condition, including valve seating and unseating conditions. Provide additional mechanical advantage through gear reduction or increased lever arm length, as appropriate. b. Operators: Self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. c. Position Indicators: Provided on all quarter -turn and non -rising stem valves. d. Worm Gearbox Type Operators: Factory lubricated and shall consist of a high strength alloy steel input worm gear mated to an output spur gear or yoke nut driven output yoke, as applicable. 1) Spur Gears: Alloy bronze or ductile iron construction. 2) Yoke Nuts: Ductile iron construction with stainless -steel yoke nut bearings and alloy steel yokes. 3) Worm Gearboxes: Include adjustable stops of either the traveling nut or stud screw variety, as applicable. Worm gearboxes shall include gasketed access covers and shaft seals designed to provide weathertight or submersible duty service, as required, and include a mechanically driven valve position indicator. All trim and fastening hardware shall be of stainless -steel construction. 7. Plug Valves for Whatever Service: Capable of passing "pigging" cleaning equipment (using a Girard or similar cleaning pig of full nominal pipeline diameter) in either direction and manufacturer shall so certify that this may be done without the use of special equipment. 8. Valves: Balanced plugs with a resilient facing of Nitrile (Buna-N) solidly bonded thereto to assure bubble -tight shutoff low torque requirements. Resilient seals shall be suitable for 1 abrasive fluids 9. Seats: Welded -in overlay of 90 percent pure nickel on all surfaces contacting the plug face. 10. Valves: Furnished with bolted bonnets and self-adjusting chevron -type packing. Packing shall be replaceable without disassembling the valve or removing the bonnet from the valve. 11. Corrosion -Resistant, Permanently -Lubricated Bearings: Provide at both ends of the valve Ashafts. 12. Coatings and linings: Plug valves shall be coated internally and externally with Fusion Bonded Epoxv coating 2.3 VALVE VAULTS A. Description: Refer to Section 330516 for information regarding Concrete Water Vaults. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 BURIED YARD VALVES Page 7 of 8 PAEA ' glelfl A. Description: As specified in Sections 331110 "Ductile Iron Pipe", and 333113 "FRP for Gravity Sanitary Sewers". 17:1;71IBM *:41141820me 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. B. Verify that piping connections, sizes, locations, and inverts are as indicated on Drawings. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Buried Valves and Valve Boxes: 1. Buried valves shall be cleaned and manually operated before installation. Buried valves and valve boxes shall be set with the stem vertically aligned in the center of the valve box. Valves shall be set on a firm foundation and supported by tamping pipe bedding material under the sides of the valve. The valve box shall be supported during backfilling and maintained in vertical alignment with the top flush with finish grade. The valve box shall be set so as not to transmit traffic loads to the valve. 2. Before backfilling, all exposed portions of all bolts shall be coated with two coats of bituminous paint. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspections according to Section 331225 "Connection to Existing Water Mains". 3.5 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning and inspections according to Section 330450 "Cleaning of Pipes". END OF SECTION 33 12 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1200 118J R I a ox%\ 17 01V1.1 WlU Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 12 20 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valves 4-inch through 48-inch for use with potable and sewer water mains for buried applications. a. 24-inch and larger valves may require an integral bypass B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified I. LA 2. Added I. LD 3. Modified 1.2. 4. Modified 1.6. 5. Modified 1.9. 6. Modified 2.2.C.4 7. Modified 2.2.C.5 8. Modified 2.2.C.7 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 1105 — Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 4. Section 33 11 10 —Ductile Iron Pipe D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. A. Gate Valve a. >` e r+ 1)Me-asuremea4 fe =this okal b 2 per- eaeh. been shall be paid f .,t the , .,:t/Vr.v0 1/.,a per- o.,e "G e V lyo" i i72)1 a) Var-ious i e. Thhe r6wNid imiqude­ CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 2 of 10 1) Fuvmidk�mg axd installing Gate Valves with eanneetions , eeified in the Drawings 2) Valve box 3) Extension 4) Ex -mdeco for- valves in va-ults- ind'i and larger gatevalves) 6) Petfok-Wum tzr.- for- eenneetions to steel flanges 7) 7 ineh r o �rJ and larger- gatevalves) 8) isolation kits when installed with flanged eennee e;is 9) Polyethylene 0 ors 12) Hauling 1]Jispooal 9fexeessfnat F 1 1) Fu dk�mg, pk�xvnwmt axd sampaetion of embedme 15) Fumiohin�l.,eement and , etio,, f>,.,ekf ll 4-9) Toning 2. Ce4 in Gate Valve a1,XmXrCI212I2t 4+- TA.4-p-A-Simr-p-me-4-4 for- this item shall be per- eael�, b. Pay*iefft 1) Thy: ,,,,-v perf—med and the materials f,.-. ishea : aeeefdanee with this item shall be paid for- at the unit pr-iee bid per- eaeh "Gat in Gate Valvu" irzzkz�lad for-� o. "-� pzia —D inoludo-i- 1) Fumichingmd incallins Gate Vyes with , eaiom-a\—�bpe,.;f; e Drawings Z)ystem dewatefing 4) Valve box 5) Extension ) Extensionsfor- valves in vaults 7) Valve . „lt a d c ame .,(for- 16 ineh and larger- gate valves) 8) Petfolatum tape for- eonneetions to steel flanges I F valing 4-6) Dupooal afexeess v. Hater-: 4-7) _l4; 19) Glean CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 3 of 10 1.3 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 1. NRS — Non Rising Stem 2. OS&Y — Outside Screw and Yoke B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125, and 250). 4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel. c. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. d. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. e. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. f. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C509, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. b. C515, Reduced -Wall, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. c. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. d. C900, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 IN through 12 IN, for Water Transmission and Distribution. 7. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C 105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. b. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. c. C 115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 8. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 4 of 10 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve noting the pressure rating and coating system supplied, including: a. Dimensions, weights, material list, and detailed drawings b. Joint type c. Maximum torque recommended by the manufacturer for the valve size 2. Polyethylene encasement and tape a. Whether the film is linear low density or high density cross linked polyethylene b. The thickness of the film provided 3. Thrust Restraint, if required by contract Documents a. Retainer glands b. Thrust harnesses c. Any other means 4. Instructions for field repair of fusion bonded epoxy coating 5. Gaskets B. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valves meet the provisions of this Section, each valve meets Specifications, all inspections have been made and that all tests have been performed in accordance with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. 2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B 117. 3. Furnish affidavit that Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer has five years experience manufacturing Resilient Seated Gate Valves of similar service and size with experience record. 4. Furnish affidavit that Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer owns or controls any foreign factory/foundry that supplies valve casings and can certify that the Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve manufacturer is in control of quality control at the foreign factory/foundry. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Manufacturers a. Valves 16-inch and larger shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each project. 1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. b. For valves less than 16-inch, valves of each size shall be the product of 1 manufacturer, unless approved by the City. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 5 of 10 1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. c. Valves shall meet or exceed AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. d. For valves equipped with a bypass, the bypass valve must be of the same manufacturer as the main valve. e. Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall be new. f. Resilient Seated Gate Valve Manufacturer shall not have less than 5 years of successful experience manufacturing of Resilient Seated Gate Valves of similar service and size, and indicated or demonstrate an experience record that is satisfactory to the Engineer and City. This experience record will be thoroughly investigated by the Engineer, and acceptance will be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and City. g. Casings for Resilient Seated Gate Valve, such as valve body, wedge, and bypass; that are not manufactured within the United States of America, shall be manufactured by factories/foundries that are owned or controlled (partial ownership) such that the Resilient Seated Gate Valve Manufacturer can control and guarantee quality at the foreign factory/foundry. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Protect all parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. 3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or extremes in temperature. 6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 6 of 10 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Description 1. Regulatory Requirements a. Valves shall be new and meet or exceed AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. b. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the requirements of NSF 61. C. Materials 1. Valve Body a. Valve body: ductile iron per ASTM A536 b. Flanged ends: Furnish in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15. c. Mechanical Joints: Furnish with outlets which conform to AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. d. Valve interior and exterior surfaces: fusion bonded epoxy coated, minimum 5 mils, meeting AWWA C550 requirements e. Buried valves: Provide with polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5. 1) Polyethylene encasement: Furnish in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 2. Wedge (Gate) a. Resilient wedge: rated at 250 psig cold water working pressure b. The wedge (gate) for all valve sizes shall be I piece, fully encapsulated with a permanently bonded EPDM rubber. 3. Bypass a. For gate valves using a double roller, track and scrapper system, an integrally cast bypass on the body of the valve is required. 1) Orient the bypass on the same side of the gate valve as the spur gear to allow operation of both valves from the manhole opening. 2) The bypass shall be a minimum 4-inch in size. 4. Gate Valve Bolts and Nuts a. Bonnet, Stuffing Box and Gear Box - Tsw head b It md la r xut: Pte4 n 307 r_, a Zine Plate n ST-M B633 cr2 kx nc. n buried se ee in inel- thr-eueh 12 ineh .,aloes) of as specified in 2.2.C.4.b. b. Hex head bolt and hex nut: AISI 316 stainless steel for buried service (all sizes) 5. Bolts and Nuts CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 7 of 10 a. Mechanical Joints a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 11 05. b. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115 or AWWA C207 depending on pipe material. 2) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. 3) Flanged insulating, kits shall be provided when connecting to buried steel or concrete pressure pipe. Kits shall conform to Section 40 05 06. 6. Joints a. Valves: flanged, or mechanical joint or any combination of these as specified on the Drawings or in the project Specifications 1) Flanged joints: AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B16.1, Class 125 a) Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B 16.1, Class 125. b) Field fabricated flanges are prohibited. 2) Steel or concrete pressure pipe a) Use flange joints unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 3) Ductile Iron or PVC pressure pipe a) Use mechanical joints with mechanically restrained retainer glands unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 7. Operating Nuts a. Supply for buried service valves b. 1-15/16-inch square at the top, 2-inch at the base, and 1-3/4-inch high c. Cast an arrow showing the direction of opening with the word "OPEN" on the operating nut base. d. To open, the operating nut shall be turned to the RIGHT (CLOCKWISE), direction. Nut shall be painted red per AWWA specifications. Non -potable water lines such as the RW line shall be turned to the LEFT (COUNTER- CLOCKWISE) to open. e. Connect the operating nut to the shaft with a shear pin that prevents the nut from transferring torque to that shaft or the gear box that exceeds the manufacturer's recommended torque. �um�d'i':��.a,.,t,00i operators foF ,, ,, buried so,,,i�oo or who„ shown ;,, �tio Drawings. 8. Gearing a. Gate valves that are 24 inch and larger: Equip with a spur gear. b. Bevel gears for horizontally mounted valves are not allowed. c. The spur gear shall be designed and supplied by the manufacturer of the valve as an integral part of the gate valve. 9. Gaskets a. Provide gaskets in accordance with Section 33 1105. A2 10. Extension Stems. Shafts, and Counlines: Tvpe 304 Stainless Steel. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. All gate valves shall have the following accessories provided as part of the gate valve installation: CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 8 of 10 1. A keyed solid extension stem of sufficient length to bring the operating nut up to within 1 foot of the surface of the ground, when the operating nut on the gate valve is 3 feet or more beneath the surface of the ground. Extension Stems are: a. Not required on City stock orders b. Not to be bolted or attached to the valve -operating nut c. To be of cold rolled steel with a cross -sectional area of 1 square inch, fitting loosely enough to allow deflection 2. Furnish joint components such as gaskets, glands, lubricant, bolts, and nuts in sufficient quantity for assembly of each joint. 3. Cast Iron Valve Boxes: provide for buried service gate valves, cast iron valve boxes and covers a. Each valve box for 4-inch through 12-inch valves shall be 2-piece, 5 1/4-inch shafts, screw type, consisting of a top section and a bottom section. b. Valve boxes shall be as listed in the City of Fort Worth Standard Products List in attached in Section 0160 00. c. Valve box covers shall be so designed that they can be easily removed to provide access to valve operating nut. d. Valve box covers must be designed to stay in position and resist damage under AASHTO HS 20 traffic loads. e. Each cover shall be casted with the word "WATER" or "RECLAIMED" in raised letters on the upper surface. f. Cast iron valve boxes and covers shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B. 1) Valve box covers shall be round for potable water applications and square for reclaimed water applications. g. Box extension material shall be AWWA C900 PVC or ductile iron. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. All valves shall be installed in vertical position when utilized in normal pipeline installation. 2. Valves shall be placed at line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Polyethylene encasement installation shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 10. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 9 of 10 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections 1. Before acceptance of the installed valve, the City Field Operations Staff shall have the opportunity to operate the valve. 2. The City shall be given the opportunity to inspect all buried flanges before they are covered. 3. The Operator will be assessing the ease of access to the operating nut within the valve box and ease of operating the valve from a fully closed to fully opened position. 4. If access and operation of the valve meet the City's criteria, then the valve will be accepted as installed. B. Non -Conforming Work 1. If access and operation of the valve or its appurtenances does not meet the City's criteria, the Contractor will remedy the situation until it meets the City's criteria, at the Contractor's expense. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTIONT CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1220 RESILIENT SEATED (WEDGE) GATE VALVE Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF South Flow Lift Station CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 100075-2 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 33 12 25 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Connection to existing water mains to include, but not limited to: a. Cutting in a tee for a branch connection b. Extending from an existing water main c. Installing a tapping sleeve and valve B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Added 1.1.D. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1 A.A. 4. Modified 1.4.13. 5. Modified 1.6. 6. Modified 1.9. 7. Modified 1.12. 8. Added 2.2.1) C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 04 40 — Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 4. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 5. Section 33 05 30 — Location of Existing Utilities 6. Section 33 1105 — Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 7. Section 33 11 10 —Ductile Iron Pipe D. Related Documents 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SuDDlementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. 1. Connection to an exisdpg unproocuriza' Fort W,.gt, Water- Distribution Syst ., Main t 4 does not require the Gil 4 e)ku part afthe , ,. er- system out of se . 4ee a. rao „� ,) This item ; eensider-ed subs;diaF , t the w- tom- lD�pa baing installed. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 2 of 8 b. Payment 1) The waFk peffei:me�dhe t€ -4ale, 4unished in aeeer-daneewwith this Rem o „1.sidi r-y to t o uxitf^.se bid po linaur feet of water- .;..o eemplet ir. &ci,, and „ et-h-e,. ,.empe„Wti-jr. will b2 .,i— cz ictribit' that r-equir-o" 1hutJ&wfi--&f a:.n-.,o part�ort>,e , ,, e f system a Tiro 1) 44easUr-eMeR4 ferthiS dK-11! S? -pe o ,.1, , o .: r pleted. b. en 1) The wefiE Peffefmed and the fnatef:iuls fumished in aeoer-danee with this 14c z os1v11'a o unit pnoo Nd „ each «r,.,,n-teetion- t,. &Fisting Water- Can" invW 1 a) Var-ious sizes of existing water distribution main e. T-ho prrvj K3 chop inoluao all . eets f rm4irg tl.N o9ane tie ineludir4, but .t limited t . 4-�jpm-irg-ubmttals 2) Do•n,�--fing n tin and n «;fin 5) 'Rwngbiiizatien WADI MMM- !ess -1) T lm: ,rzgs 4-2) ZLTuling 13) Dicpssal of exess material 1 '7) Testing � 1) MeasuFementfeF this 143rs aW1.1. beeach eopmeetion eompleted. b. Payment 1) Thewer4 nef&fined a -ad the materialsfumished in aeeer-danee with this Ito d.,V.1 ba paid f 4 the unit p ,.0VA rw "Tuaping Sleeve � anR. —NVv@" ir,,31.:l.? d fog assizes of eofineeting main b) Various Sizes of existing wateF distFibutlon main e. The p e bid 4V. 11 inalude all , eet f m Jkdrg the eonneetion ineluding, but t i;.,,;.01 t . ') Llvp arirg cubm4t als 2)- Dewatering 4) Coordination and notification Tapj�ng Sleeve and ',gappprg V41Nl e CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 3 of 8 lP�1T� ri Iizafien 7)TempoFar-y l}gli 8) Polyethylene eneasefRerrt 9) Make up . i T0) 4-2) �IlJ bYA� 13) IIauling 15) Clean " 16) Gleaning 18) Testing 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125 and 250) 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications c. A194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both d. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel. e. A283, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. f. A285, Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low - and Intermediate -Tensile Strength. g. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. h. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C200, Steel Water Pipe - 6 IN and Larger. b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service — Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. c. C213, Fusion -Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. d. C223, Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves. 5. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. b. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 4 of 8 c. C115A21/15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 6. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components —Health Effects. 7. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry Inc. (MSS): a. SP-60, Connecting flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -installation Meetings 1. Required for any connections to an existing, pressurized 16 inel} 8-inch or larger City water distribution system main that requires a shutdown of some part of the water system 2. May also be required for connections that involve shutting water service off to certain critical businesses 3. Schedule a pre -installation meeting a minimum of 3 weeks prior to proposed time for the work to occur. 4. The meeting shall include the Contractor, City Inspector and City Valve Crew. 5. Review work procedures as submitted and any adjustments made for current field conditions. 6. Verify that all valves and plugs to be used have adequate thrust restraint or blocking. 7. Schedule a test shutdown with the City. 8. Schedule the date for the connection to the existing system. B. Scheduling 1. Schedule work to make all connections to existing 16 inek 8-inch and larger mains: a. During the period from November through April, unless otherwise approved by the City b. During normal business hours from Monday through Friday, unless otherwise approved by the City 2. Schedule City Valve Crew by 1:00 P.M. a minimum of 1 business day prior to planned disruption to the existing water system. a. In the event that other water system activities do not allow the existing main to be dewatered at the requested time, schedule work to allow the connection at an alternate time acceptable to the City. 1) If water main cannot be taken out of service at the originally requested time, coordination will be required with the City to discuss rescheduling and compensation for mobilization. 2) No additional payment will be provided if the schedule was altered at the Contractor's request. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 5 of 8 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data, if applicable Tapping Sleeve noting the pressure rating and coating system supplied including: a. Dimensions, weights, material list, and detailed drawings b. Maximum torque recommended by the manufacturer for the valve by size B. Submittals 1. Provide a detailed sequence of work for 16 ine1r8-inch, or larger, connections if required by City that includes: a. Results of exploratory excavation b. Dewatering c. Procedure for connecting to the existing water main d. Time period for completing work from when the water is shut down to when the main is back in service e. Testing and repressurization procedures 2. Welders that are assigned to work on connection to concrete cylinder or steel pipe must be certified and provide Welding Certificates, upon request, in accordance with AWWA C200. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the reauirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT US ill A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) reauirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Protect parts so that no damage or deterioration occurs during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed. 2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. 3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges using wooden flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being exposed to direct sunlight and extremes in temperature. 6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 6600. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 6 of 8 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Section 01 77 19 "Closeout Reauirements" for warranties reauirements. B. Furnish two-vear manufacturer's warranty for connections to existing water mains and accessories. Warrantv to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. C. If the eauipment should fail during the warrantv period due to a defective part(s), replace and restore and the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed by the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Description 1. Regulatory Requirements a. Tapping Sleeves shall meet or exceed AWWA C223 and the requirements of this Specification. b. All valve components in contact with potable water shall conform to the requirements of NSF 61. C. Tapping Sleeve Materials 1. Body a. Body: Carbon Steel per ASTM A283 Grade C, ASTM A285 Grade C, ASTM A36 Steel or equal b. Finish: fusion bonded epoxy coating to an average 12 mil thickness. Fusion applied per AWWA C213. c. All buried tapping sleeves shall be provided with polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA/ANSI CI05/A21.5. 1) Polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 10. 2. Flange a. Carbon Steel per ASTM A36 in accordance with AWWA C207 and ASME B 16.1 Class 125. b. Recessed for tapping valve per MSS SP-60 3. Bolts and Nuts a. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C115 or AWWA C207 depending on pipe material. 2) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 7 of 8 4. Gaskets a. Provide gaskets in accordance with Section 33 1105. 5. Test Plug a. %-inch NPT carbon steel with square head and fusion bonded epoxy coating D. Pipe Material Less Than 4-inches 1. Polvvinvl chloride (PVC) pipe less than 4 inches in diameter shall be Schedule 80, solvent welded, PVC1220 SDR 17 (minimum). PVC pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2241. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions 1. Verify by exploratory excavation, if needed, that existing water main is as depicted in the Drawings and that the location is suitable for a connection to the existing water main. a. Excavate and backfill trench for the exploratory excavation in accordance with 3305 10. 2. Verify that all equipment and materials are available on —site prior to the shutdown of the existing main. 3. Pipe lines shall be completed, tested and authorized for connection to the existing system in accordance with Section 33 04 40. 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Upon disruption of the existing water main, continue work until the connection is complete and the existing water main is back in service. B. Procedure 1. Expose the proposed connection point in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 2. Dewater the existing water line so the chlorinated water is not unlawfully discharged. 3. Maintain the water that may bleed by existing valves or plugs during installation within the work area to a reasonable level. a. Control the water in such a way that it does not interfere with the proper installation of the connection or create a discharge of chlorinated water. 4. If any discharge of chlorinated water occurs, discharged water shall be de - chlorinated in accordance with Section 33 04 40 5. Cut and remove existing water main in order to make the connection. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 1225 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WATER MAINS Page 8 of 8 6. Verify that the existing pipe line is suitable for the proposed connection. 7. Place trench foundation and bedding in accordance with 33 05 10. 8. In the event that a tapping sleeve and valve is used, the coupon from the existing water main shall be submitted to the City. 9. Prevent embedment, backfill, soil, water or other debris form entering the pipeline. 10. Establish thrust restraint as provided for in the Drawings. 11. Clean and disinfect the pipeline associated with the connection in accordance with Section 33 04 40. 12. Place embedment to the top of the pipe zone. 13. Request that the City Valve Crew re -pressurize the pipeline. 14. Directionally flush the connection in accordance with Section 33 04 40. 15. Request that City Valve Crew open all remaining valves. 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 12 40 FIRE HYDRANTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 331240-1 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 1 of 8 1. Dry -barrel fire hydrants with 51/4-inch main valve for use with potable water mains B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. NLia7—Modified 1.1.C. Modified 1.2. 3- Modified 1.6. 4, Modified 1.9. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 4. Section 33 04 40 — Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 5. Section 33 11 10 — Ductile Iron Pipe 6. Section 33 11 11 — Ductile Iron Fittings 7oeetie ? 11 11 Bth4ed-gtcol Pro and 8. Section 33 12 20 — Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lumn Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard pining bid item. Measurement a. Fire Hy,d,-apA and Extensie f en dWl! b in p1k�,�z, 2. Payment a. The work per-feEmed and materials fitmished in meefdanee with this ltefn an A measured er "MeasuremenA ' will be N" at tmitpnees bid per eaeh " t" inter lad-. 3. The p e bid sb\j�d ilti u� a. Fuwi&yi gad iIR teallin *. GW.,rtananees cgs_ b. Dr=-mafr-el �';�t assembly # mi baoa apt Q. 1%i'.I4fig PavemefA Remoev l g. E h. Freight, leading, tmleadiag and handling. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 12 40 - 2 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 2 of 8 'I. Funn��'�, placement and eempaetion of baektill. fi+.--JlJar.i ur, ft. Disinfeetio 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Base: The lateral connection to the fire hydrant lead; also called a shoe B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C502, Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants b. Manual of Water Supply Practices M17 (AWWA Manual M17) —Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants 3. NSF International a. 61, Drinking Water System Components —Health Effects 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. 1963, Standard for Fire Hose Connections 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. 246, Hydrants for Fire -Protection Service 6. Factory Mutual (FM) a. Class Number 1510, Approval Standard for Fire Hydrant (Dry Barrel Type) for Private Fire Service 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to construction. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant stating: a. Main valve opening size b. Nozzle arrangement and sizes c. Operating nut size d. Operating nut operating direction e. Working pressure rating f. Component assembly and materials g. Coatings and Finishes B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicatins compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 331240-3 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 3 of 8 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. 1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. 2. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants shall be in conformance with AWWA C502, UL 246 and FM 1510. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) reauirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Store and handle in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA C502 and AWWA Manual M17. 2. Protect all parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. 4. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 5. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 6. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or extremes in temperature. 7. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 6600. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 12 40 - 4 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 4 of 8 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. 3. The Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant shall be new and the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants having similar service and size. B. Description 1. Regulatory Requirements a. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant shall meet or exceed the latest revisions of AWWA C502 and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification. b. All Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant components in contact with potable water shall conform to the requirements of NSF 61. C. Performance / Design Criteria 1. Capacities a. Rated working pressure of 250 psi or greater. 2. Design Criteria a. Operating nut 1) Uniformly tapered square nut measuring: a) 1 inch at the base b) '/8 inch at the top 2) Open by turning the operating nut to the right (clockwise) a) Provide operating direction clearly marked with an arrow and the word "OPEN". 3) Provide weather shield with operating nut. b. Main Valve 1) Minimum 5'/4-inch opening 2) Compression type a) Opening against pressure b) Closing with pressure c. Nozzles 1) `T' shape, 3 nozzle arrangement 2) Nozzle sizes, threads and configuration in accordance with NFPA 1963 a) Hose nozzles (1) 2 x 21/2-inch (nominal size of connection) (a) 180 degrees apart (b) Thread Designation 2.5-7.5 NH (NFPA 1963) b) Pump nozzle (1) 4-inch (nominal size of connection) (a) Thread Designation 4-4 NH (NFPA 1963) d. Hydrant Barrel Configuration 1) Upper barrel 2) Breakable flange and stem a) To be installed above ground at the connection to the upper barrel 3) Extension barrel (if needed) and lower barrel. a) Extension barrel and stem (1) Lengthen in 6-inch increments. e. Drain Valve 1) Non -corrodible material 2) Spring operated drain valves are not allowed. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 331240-5 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 5 of 8 D. Function 1. Drain Valve a. Drain fire hydrant barrels when main valve is closed. E. Materials 1. Furnish materials in accordance with AWWA C502. 2. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant Assembly a. Internal parts 1) Threads a) Provide operating thread designed to avoid metal such as iron or steel threads against iron or steel parts. 2) Stem a) Stem Nuts (1) Provide bronze stem nuts. (a) Grades per AWWA C502 b) Where needed, stem shall be grooved and sealed with 0-rings. 3. Provide crushed rock for placement around base conforming to Section 33 05 10. F. Finishes 1. Primer Materials a. Furnish primer for Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants in accordance with AWWA C502. 2. Finish Materials a. Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant 1) Exterior a) Above grade (1) Furnish exterior coating for above grade Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant assembly components in accordance with AWWA C502. (2) Coating shall be Flynt Aluminum Paint in Silver. b) Below grade (1) Furnish exterior coating for below grade Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant assembly components in accordance with AWWA C502. 2) Interior a) Interior coating for Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants assemblies in accordance with AWWA C502 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Polyethylene Encasement 1. Provide polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 33 11 10. B. Embedment 1. Provide crushed rock and filter fabric in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections 1. Testing and inspection of Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants in accordance with AWWA C502. B. Markings 1. Provide each Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant marked in accordance with AWWA C502. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 331240-6 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 6 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED] 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install in accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17, manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide vertical installation with braces, rest and blocking in accordance with City Standard Details. 3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with 33 05 10. 4. Embed Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant assemblies in accordance with 33 05 10. a. At the location of the weep holes, wrap barrel with polyethylene encasement and crushed rock with filter fabric to prevent dirt and debris from entering the fire hydrant. 5. Polyethylene encasement installation shall be in accordance with the applicable portion of Section 33 11 10. 6. Install concrete blocking and rest in accordance with Section 03 30 00 as indicated in the Drawings. 7. A minimum 1/3 cubic yard of crushed rock shall be placed around the base, in accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17, to allow drain outlets to operate. a. The crushed rock should extend 6 inches above the drain outlets and a minimum of 1 foot on all sides of the fire hydrant base. 8. Fire hydrant lead line shall be installed with a maximum cover of 7 feet. a. Cover is measured from the invert at the fire hydrant base, vertical to ground elevation. b. Fittings may be used along fire lead line to ensure minimum and maximum cover requirements are met. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD CONTROL A. Field Inspections 1. The Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant and assembly shall perform as intended with no deformation, leaking or damage of any kind for the pressure ranges indicated. 2. City inspector will issue final inspection notice to City staff. 3. City Field Operations Staff and Fire Department Staff shall have the opportunity to inspect and operate the hydrant, to ensure that the fire hydrant was installed in accordance with AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice MIT This includes but is not limited to: a. Operation of Nozzles and operating nut are not obstructed. b. Drain valve is not obstructed or plugged. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 331240-7 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 7 of 8 4. Keep fire hydrant wrapped or covered to identify that it is out of service until the water line it's connected to is put in service. B. Non -Conforming Work 1. If access and operation of the Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrant or its appurtenances do not meet the criteria of the AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practice M17, the Contractor will remedy the situation criteria, at the Contractor's expense. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE 3.14 ATTACHMENTS END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 331240-8 FIRE HYDRANTS Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 3113 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced pipe 18-inch and larger for gravity sanitary sewer applications 2. Adapters, COuplinRs, and specials for Connection of FRP to ductile iron pipe and reinforced concrete pipe. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified I. LA. 2. Modified 1.1.C. 3. Modified 1.2. 4. Added 1.3.A.3 5. Added 1.5.0 6. Added to 1.6. 7. Modified 1.9. 8. Added 2.2.A 9. Added 2.2.B. l .b. La 10. Added 2.2.B.1.b.3 and 2.2.B. Lb.5 11. Modified 2.2.13. Le 12. Added 2.2.B. Lh and 2.2.B. Li 13. Added 2.2.C.6 14. Modified 2.2.C.9. 15. Modified 2.2.C.10. 16. Modified 2.2.C.11. 17. Modified 3A.D. 18. Modified 3.7. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Section 33 0130 - Sewer and Manhole Testing 4. Section 33 0131 - Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 5. Section 33 05 10 - Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 6. Section 33 05 26 - Utility Markers/Locators 7.Sec-tkoxi 33' 3' S on' --and Ea r'jo Trfl:.Q 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. 1. Measurement a. Measur-ed hefizzentally along the suffaee ffem eefAef: line to center- line of th-e for -^rt-nan CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 2 of 10 a. The . o fk per-fefmed and .v..,to,ials f,... ishe,a : aeeeFdaaeo with th'z Ttafn and measered as pFovidedeF"Me-asurement" will be paid foF at unitpnee bid per liiNar bot for"Fibcrglt3 Edo" iryzOi.lad-fer: 4)—Va6ou /zLzBs 3. The p e bid 251mll ix a. Fumis1 ing and installing Fiber -glass gravity pipe with joints . ei fie,l by the Dr-awings. b. Mobilization cPavement reel d. Exc-avation o. LLaulixg f. Disposal of excess material g. Gaskets h. and eempaetion of embedment i. Fu m lxng,- raocmant and , eti n F1.ae! 411 j. Tr-eneh wa4e steps k.Czean-up l. Cleaning M. Testing IIRM4590WN7weral M A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D3236, Standard Test Method for Apparent Viscosity of Hot Melt Adhesives and Coating Materials. b. D3262, Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting -Resin) Sewer Pipe. c. D3681, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of "Fiberglass" (Glass - Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition. d. D4161, Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. e. F477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. AWWA M45 - Fiberglass Pipe Design 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. C. Prior to each shipment of FRP pipe, submit certified test reports that the FRP Dine for this Contract was manufactured and tested in accordance with all ASTM Standards specified and referenced herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 3 of 10 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer 2. Manufacturer Number (identifies factory, location, and date manufactured.) 3. Nominal Diameter 4. Beam load 5. Laying lengths 6. ASTM designation A 7. Anti -seize technical data. B. Shop Drawings 1. Pipe details 2. Joint details a. If ioints above 78-inches I.D. are to be field laminated (butt wrap)ed), provide application thickness internally and externally, application training requirements by the manufacturer, and manufacturing data for anti -corrosion coating. 3. Miscellaneous items to be furnished and fabricated for the pipe 4. Dimensions 5. Tolerances 6. Wall thickness 7. Properties and strengths 8. Pipe calculations a. Calculations confirming the pipe will handle anticipated loading signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas. 9. All buried pipes will be installed with rigid restraints on all _ioints. Thrust blocks are not an acceptable method of restraint. 10. For DiDes determined on the Drawings needing encasement, Drovide anchoring product data and indicate procedure for concrete encasement, including the number of lifts, amount of concrete Der lift, the method used to keep DiDe from floating during the encasement, and the size and spacing of the rebar used for suiwrt. a. If the pipe design is intending to use anchors, provide product information, including anchor spacing, strapping material, and installation guidance. 11. For Steel Coupling Adapter used for FRP to RCP connection a. Provide outside diameter of existing buried pipe to verify couDling compatibility. 12. For 96-inch Primary Clarifier Influent Flow Meter Vault No. 1 (96" PCI-FRP) Pipe, if FRP is used for flow meter spool piece (in PC Influent Flow Meter Vault No. 1), shop drawings shall include DiDe Denetration (drilling) locations and dimensions for installation of 96" ultrasonic flow meter elements and transducers. Coordinate with ultrasonic flow meter manufacturer. 13. Submit all trench details: At a minimum include all kev dimensions including trench width and bedding and backfill laver depths, and materials including bedding and rill. 14. For Plant Sewer No. 1 Flow Meter, if FRP is used for flow meter spool Diece, shop drawings shall include DiDe Denetration (drilling) locations and dimensions for installation of 36" ultrasonic flow meter elements and transducers. Coordinate with ultrasonic flow meter manufacturer. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 4 of 10 15. For 78-inch Primary Clarifier Effluent (78" PCE-FRP), if FRP is used for the referenced spool piece, shop drawings shall include pipe _penetration (drilling) locations and dimensions for all applicable elements. C. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe meets the provisions of this Section and has been tested and meets the requirements of ASTM D3262. D. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each size per project. b. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. c. All pipe furnished shall be in conformance with this specification and ASTM D3262. 2. Inspections of the pipe may also be made by the Engineer or other representatives of the Owner after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the requirements specified herein, even though sample pipes may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the job at once. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Provide adequate strutting during transport to prevent damage to the pipe, fittings and appurtenances. B. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Gravity pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 5 of 10 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Allowable Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Manufacturers are Thompson Pipe Group, HOBAS USA, and Future Pipe Industries. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Other products: a. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. b. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Performance / Design Criteria 1. Pipe a. Design in accordance with ASTM D3262 b. Design pipe for service loads that include: 1) External groundwater and earth loads a) A soil modulus of elasticity of 2,000 psi and a soil weight 130 pounds per cubic foot. 2) Jacking/pushing loads a) The allowable jacking/pushing capacity shall not exceed 40 percent of the ultimate compressive strength or the maximum allowable compressive strength recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less. 3) AASHTO H-20 Live Load 4) Practical considerations for handling, shipping and other construction operations 5) A safety factor of 2.0 or above. c. Design is to be conducted under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, who shall seal and sign the design. d. Standard lay length of 20 feet, except for special fittings or closure pieces necessary to comply with the Drawings. e. Stiffness class that satisfies design requirement on the Drawings, but not less than 46 psi when used in direct bury operations. f. Pressure class that satisfies design requirement on the Drawings, but not less than PN 25/50 when used in direct bury operations. g. Accommodate vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. h. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. i. Maximum initial deflection shall be 3 percent. j. Maximum long-term deflection shall be 5 percent. 2. Dimensional Tolerances CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 6 of 10 a. Inside diameter 1) Pipe shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from the nominal inside diameter. b. Roundness 1) The difference between the major and minor outside diameters shall not exceed 0.1 percent of the nominal outside or'/4 inch, whichever is less. c. Wall thickness 1) Provide minimum single point thickness no less than 98 percent of stated design thickness. d. End Squareness 1) Provide pipe ends square to pipe axis with maximum tolerance of 1/8 inch. e. Fittings 1) Provide tolerance of angle of elbow and angle between main and leg of Wye or tee to f2 degrees. 2) Provide tolerance of laying length of fitting to f2 inches. C. Materials 1. Resin Systems a. Only use polyester resin system with proven history of performance in this particular application. 2. Glass Reinforcements a. Use reinforcing glass fibers of highest quality commercial grade E-glass filaments with binder and sizing compatible with impregnated resins to manufacture components. 3. Fillers a. Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used. b. Use 98 percent silica with maximum moisture contest of 0.2 percent. 4. Additives a. Resin additives, such as curing agents, pigments, dyes, fillers, thixotropic agents, etc., when used, shall not detrimentally affect the performance of the product. 5. Internal liner resin a. Suitable for service as sewer pipe b. Highly resistant to exposure to sulfuric acid c. Produced by biological activity from hydrogen sulfide gases d. Meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D3681 6. Exposed FRP Protection a. For all the exposed FRP piping on the proiect including the Primary Clarifier 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault. provide FRP piping with UV resistant additive in addition to a UV resistant finish coating system per Drawings. 7. Gaskets a. Supply from approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F477 and suitable for service intended. b. Affix gaskets to pipe by means of suitable adhesive or install in a manner so as Ato prevent gasket from rolling out of pre-cut groove in pipe or sleeve coupling. c. Provide the following gaskets in potentially contaminated areas. 1Retm ear (diesE4, gas&Une)—Ntom CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 7 of 10 d. 2)OMer eontaminan& A4W a ieturev ree.mmer anon Gaskets for Sewage Service 1) Material. EPDM, Buna-N a) Buna-N/NBR or EPDM suitable for sewage service and meet the requirements ofAWWA C207. b) Gasket material shall be snecifically recommended for the service by the gasket manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. 2) Gaskets shall be as thin as the finish and accuracv of the flange surface will permit. For general service, flange rubber gaskets shall be 118 inch thick. 3) Supply from approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F477. 4) Materials must exhibit excellent compatibility with wastewater and corrosive process fluid. 5) Supplier must submit compatibility charts exhibiting excellent compatibility over the range of design pressures (150 psi minimum) and temperatures (200 degrees F minimum). 6) Flange gaskets shall be ring type gaskets for pipe larger than 12 inches diameter, and full -face gaskets for nine sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller. 7) Gasket dimensions shall conform to the requirements ofASME B16.21, unless specified otherwise. 8. Couplings a. Field connect pipe with fiberglass sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as sole means to maintain joint water tightness. b. Provide Kevlock restrained push -on couplings for ioinin2 FRP ripe unless noted otherwise. c. For sizes larger than 78-inches I.D. fiberglass welding may be implemented. d. For transition connections between FRP and ductile iron, use restrained transition coupling assembly consisting of a restrained flanged coupling adapter (RFCA) - ROMAC FC400RG, Smith Blair 911 Flange -Lock, or equal with deflection capability on plain end ductile iron nine, connecting to a FRP flanged adapter pipe spool. Gaskets shall be Buna-n or EPDM. RFCA coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy. The RFCA will mate with an FRP flange x flange spool. All bolts, nuts and hardware shall be stainless steel. e. For restrained flexible connections between plain -end FRP pines at vard piping connections to structures and where noted on the Drawings, use restrained sleeve couplings Smith Blair 411, Romac 400 or equal. Sleeve shall be minimum 12-inch long with 2-degree deflection capability for pines up to 72-inch diameter, and minimum 16-inch lone with 1 degree deflection capability for pipes 78-inch and larger diameters. Gaskets shall be Buna-n or EPDM. Coating shall be fusion bonded enoxv. All bolts, nuts and hardware shall be stainless steel. Restraint Svstem: Provide Class 1251150 FRP buildup flanges, stainless steel Smith Blair 907 or Romac 490 harness lugs, stainless steel tie rods and hardware. The FRP buildup flanges shall be designed to handle thrust forces at the test pressure or 50 psi whichever is greater without deformation. Provide CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 8 of 10 minimum 4 tie -rod restraint system for pipe sizes up to 48-inch diameter and 6 tie -rod restraint system for pipe sizes 72-inch and larger: Tie -rod, harness, and restraint system shall be sized by the FRP pipe Manufacturer's engineer meeting these minimum requirements. 9. Closure Couplings and Steel Transition Couplings a. Manufacturer's 1) TeeKav Couplings Ltd., Straub Open Flex Transition COuplina, Smith -Blair 413, or approved ea_ual. b. Description 1) Casing: AISI 316 SS 2) Screws: 316 SS 3) Bolts: 316 SS 4) Sealing Sleeve: EPDM or NBR. 5) Provide anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal 11. FILAMENT WOUND COUPLING a. FWC couplings may be allowed only on a case basis at the discretion of the Engineer. b. Manufacturers 1) HOBAS FWC coupling. 2) Or approved equal. c. Description 1) Adhere to the performance requirements of ASTM D4161. 2) Ensure FWC Joint will remain leak -free from twice the rated class pressure, even when vertically deflected. AA11. Flanges a. Flanged fittings and ioints shall be contact molded, in accordance with AWWA M45 and shall be capable of withstanding all operating conditions when installed. b. Provide stainless steel spacers or reinforcement rings or backer flanges as required. Use flat stainless -steel washers. c. Flange drilling dimensions shall match AWWA C207 Class D (150 psi) and ANSI B16.1 (125 psi). d. Flanges shall be suitable for pressure application. e. Flanged pipe spools shall have a uniform wall thickness as needed for special applications includine flow meter spools. f. Provide anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. 12. Joints a. Joints must meet requirements of ASTM D4161. b. Provide restraints at all joints. c. Refer to couplings Section for restrained couplings at joints 78" ID and below. d. For pipe sizes (ID) above 78", butt wrap joints with Mass lamination internally and externallv in the field. The joints shall at least meet the pressure ratins of the pipe, as determined by the manufacturer. e. Butt wrapping shall be done by a trained and experienced applicator, who has been trained by the manufacturer and is following the manufacturer's recommended thicknesses and application method. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 9 of 10 f. Followimz butt wrapping application, the applicator shall apply an anti- corrosive coat to the butt wrap, according to the manufacturer. g. Before final acceptance, field verification shall be conducted to verifv no bubbles are present internally or externally. 13. Pipe markings shall meet the minimum requirements of ASTM D3236. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: a. Manufacturer b. Manufacturer Number (identifies factory, location, date manufactured, shift and sequence) c. Nominal diameter d. Beam load e. Laying length f. ASTM designation 14. Connections a. Use only manufactured fittings. b. See Su&,um 33 3- 59-. Per manufacturer's recommendations. 15. Detectable Metallic Tape a. See Section 33 05 26. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in Section 33 05 10 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 4. Embed pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10. B. Pipe Handling 1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site. 2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. a. Inspect each joint of pipe and rejector repair any damaged pipe prior to lowering into the trench. b. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the surface of the pipe for handling pipe. 3. At the close of each operating day: a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash — during and after the laying operation. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PIPE FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Page 10 of 10 b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. Pipe Joint Installation a. Clean dirt and foreign material from the gasketed socket and the spigot end. b. Assemble pipe joint by sliding the lubricated spigot end into the gasketed bell end to the reference mark. c. Install such that identification marking on each joint are oriented upward toward the trench opening. d. When making connection to manhole, use an elastomeric seal or flexible boot to facilitate a seal. D. Connection Installation 1 See Seetio,. 3 3 5 Per the manufacturer's recommendation. E. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation 1. See Section 33 05 26. F. Apply anti -seize comnounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoraLe. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection a. Provide a CCTV inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31. 2. Air Test and Deflection Test a. Perform test in accordance with Section 33 0130. 3. Hvdrostatic Pressure Test a. Pressurize all piping per manufacturer's recommendation, but no more than a maximum of 1.5 times the pressure class of pipe (PN). b. Fill the pipeline with non -potable water and pressurize. All taps, valves and accessories required for testing shall be integral to the Contract and be provided at no additional cost. c. Pipe shall hold test pressure for minimum of 12 hours. d. Anv leaks shall be monitored and fixed. There shall be no visible leaks on piping prior to acceptance of test and backfillina. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333115-1 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 3115 BURIED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWED PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 'igk Density Polyethylene (INDPE) fir„ o in 3anibary sewer- r-ehabilita4ien by pipe enlar-gement per- an 2,3 3, 2-3 2. Buried High Densitv Polvethvlene (HDPE) pipe 4-inch and larger for pressure use in scum and vrimary sludge application. 3. Buried Hiah Densitv Polvethvlene (HDPE) slotted drainpipe for stormwater drainage application. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification None. —Modified 1.1 Modified 1.2 3- Modified 1.3 4. Modified 1.6 Modified 1.9. 6. Modified 1.10. Modified 1.11. Modified 1.12. Modified 2.2.B.1 10. Modified 2.2.13.2. Modified 3.7 C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 4. Section 33 0131 — Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 5. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 6. Section 33 05 26 — Utility Markers/Locators 7. Section 33 3121 — Sanitary Sewer Pipe Enlargement 8. Section 33 3150 — Sanitary Sewer Service Connections and Service Line 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard Dipin2 bid item. 1. Meastifefflefft CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 2 of 10 a. 'Rkz ism �", nside,.oa subs a;afy 1.o Exiitary-SeNNw Pipo En1argeme4fw Seetion 3- P1 21. 2. Paymet# a. The work per -formed and materials fumished in aceordance with this item are sttbsidia4=yto tsN uRit"ptize bid per- linear- feat of Apo EnLargafnef4 per- Se rni 3- > 21, and other , s do will be allow a 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials. b. F2620, Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings. c. F714, Standard Specification for Poly_ ethylene (PE) Plastic Pi_be (DR -PR) Based on Outside Diameter. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each size and application of product: 1. Gravity pipe 2. Manufacturer 3. Nominal pipe diameter 4. Pressure Rating 5. Standard Dimension ratio (SDR) 6. Cell classification 7. 8. Laying lengths Anti -seize technical data. B. Manufacturer to provide PE certified calculations supporting the pipe design. C. PE Certified Shop Drawinss: 1. Include piping lavouts and schedules including dimensioning, fittings, types, calculations, and locations of valves and appurtenances, and ioint details. 2. Methods and location of supports, anchorage, gasket material, 2_ rade of material and other pertinent technical information. 3. Restrained ioint locations. 4. Description of testing methods for pipe and fittings including a com_Dlete drawing of mandrel with dimensions for each pipe size. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 3 of 10 Complete description of pipe installation methods. D. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all HDPE gravity pipe meets the provisions of this Section and has been tested and meets the requirements of ASTM standards as listed herein. E. Complete description of pipe installation methods. F. Method of testing the pipe and fittings: include a complete drawing of mandrel with dimensions for each pipe size. G. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storing and installing the pipe and fittings. - H. Certification confirming the stress reeression testiniz has been performed on the specific polvethvlene resin being utilized and conforms to ASTM D2837. I. Prior to each shipment, submit certified test reports that the pipe and fittings for this contract were manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM and AWWA Standards specified herein. J. Certified hvdrostatic field pressure testing reports. K. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. for- eaeh size „Foss ethers �o✓zpooiftedbythe C 6'c-vrdcrS, Sp'ccrccr:rccrmzfield rcriurrgco- may zbcprovided -cry-cc-different b. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. c. All pipe furnished shall be in conformance with and ASTM D3350. 2. Shop drawing certifier: Licensed professional engineer experienced in desi2_ n of specified Work and licensed in the state of Project location. 3. Perform work according to AWWA M55 standards. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Reauirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Pipe and fittings shall be transported, stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 4 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 4 of 10 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. B. Conform to rea_uirements of AWWA M55 Chapter 7, and the rea_uirements given 11Pln\z7 C. Deliverv: Where applicable, deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions: 1. Deliver, store, handle and install pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, referenced standards and as specified herein. D. Inspection: Interior of pipe shall be free of cuts, aouaes and scratches. E. Storage: 1. Store pipe on clean, level ground to prevent any scratching or LouLin of pipe. 2. Handle of Pipe: a. Avoid dragging pipe over hard or sharp objects. b. Avoid cutting of pipe's exterior. Any cut or gouge deeper than 5 percent of pipe's wall thickness shall be removed from site. C. Avoid undue stress in pipe caused by bending. 3. Store gaskets for mechanical and push -on joints in cool and dry location, out of direct sunlight, and not in contact with petroleum products. 4. While stored, adequately support pipe from below at not more than 4 feet intervals to prevent deformation. F. Stored pipe in stacks no higher than that given in AWWA M55 Table 7-1. 1.11 FIELD {SITE} CONDITIONS [NOT USEDI A. Field Measurements: 1. Verifv field locations and sizes of connections to existing piping and equipment prior to submitting pipe lay drawings. 2. Document field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USEDI A. Manufacturer's Special Warrantv: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace HPDE pipe that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warrantv period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 vear(s) from date of Substantial Completion. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 5 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 5 of 10 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Materials Scum and Primary Sludge Pibin2 a. Pipe and Fittings 1) Material shall be minimum DR-4-7 13.5 Extra High Molecular Weight, High -Density Polyethylene sized by ductile iron pine size (DIPS) PR3408 PE 4710, Cell Class PE345464D Of 445574 E (inner wall shall be white or light in color) per ASTM D3350. 2) Pressure Rating: 160 psi 3) Hydrostatic Desim Basis (HDB) of 1600 psi. 4) Maximum Allowable Deflection: 3% 5) Surcharge load: H-20 6) Minimum Soil Densitv: 130 lb/ft3 7) Modulus of Soil Reaction: 2000 Dsi 8) Minimum Buckling Safetv Faction: 2.5 9) Material shall be homogeneous throughout and free of - a) Abrasion, cutting or gouging of the outside surface extending to more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth. b) Cracks c) Kinking (generally due to excessive or abrupt bending) d) Flattening e) Holes f) Blisters g) Other defects 10) Pipe with gashes, nicks, abrasions or any such physical damage which may have occurred during storage and/or handling, which are larger/deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness shall not be used and shall be removed from the construction site. 11) Pipe and fittings shall be uniform in color, opacity, density and other physical properties. a) Pipe and fittings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 12) Pipe Markings a) Meet the minimum requirements of ASTM D3350. b) Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: (1) Marking intervals shall be at 6-inch intervals (2) Manufacturer's Name or Trademark and production record (3) Nominal pipe size (4) ASTM or Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) designation (5) Cell classification CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 6 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 6 of 10 (6) Seal of testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe b. Connections 1) General a) Use only manufactured fittings. b) All HDPE joints shall be A4ie e reciuired, orovide restrained mechanical joint connections and butt connections using bolted mechanical couplers from a nine stub with a volvethvlene and steel stiffener. Mechanical couDlin2s must meet or exceed the Dressure rating of the DiDe. 2) Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands a) Use SIP Industries EZ Gri_D Joint Restraint b) Or aDDroved Equal c) DescriDtion (1) Cast of ASTM A536 ductile iron. (2) Hardware: 316 Stainless Steel. 3) Mechanical Joint Fittings a) Use SIP Industries Mechanical Joint Fittinss b) Or aDDroved ea_ual. c) DescriDtion (1) Material: Cast of ASTM A536 Ductile Iron. (2) Bolts, nuts, and Gaskets: Per Section 33 1105. 4) Plain -end to Dlain-end HDPE DiDe restrained mechanical connections. a) ROMAC A1Dha restrained couDlin2, b) Or aDDroved ea_ual. c) DescriDtion (1) End Rings: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (2) Center Rings: Ductile Iron, meetine ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. (3) Bolt Guides: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (4) GriDDers: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (5) Gaskets: According to Section 33 1105. 5) For Dlain end HDPE DiDe to flanged HDPE connection: a) use ROMAC Stvle Al_Dha FC b) Or aDDroved equal. c) DescriDtion (1) End Rings: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (2) Center Rings: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (3) Bolt Guides: Ductile Iron, meetins ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (4) GriDDers: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (5) Gaskets: According to Section 33 1105. 6) Flanized Connections: a) Provide with pine stub and TvDe 316 stainless -steel back-uD flange. b) DescriDtion (1) Back-UD Flanges: Primed and Dainted with corrosion protected paint recommended and SUDDlied by manufacturer. (2) Weld: Butt fusion, match existing Dressure ratins of DiDe. c) Provide Tvpe 316 Stainless Steel bolts, nuts and washers suitable for corrosive environment. Provide anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts ofmolvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote- G or equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 7 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 7 of 10 d) Flanged ioints shall be made with bolts or bolt studs with a nut on each end. Stud bolts shall be used for all bolting sizes 1-314 inches and larger. e) Bolts, stud bolts, and nuts shall be Tvne 316 Stainless Steel meeting the requirements ofASTMA193/194 Grade B8/B8M. Bolts and stud bolts shall conform to the dimensional requirements of ASME B18.2.1 with rolled threads conforming to ASME BLI. Coarse Series, Class 2 fit, g) Bolts and stud bolts and nuts shall be ofAmerican Standard heavv unfinished hexagonal tvoe. h) Bolts shall be provided with a 1/4-inch proiection bevond the nut when the ioint with gasket is assembled. 7) Hijzh Densitv Polyethylene Flanize Adapters: a) Description (1) Made by manufacturer from same resin as pipe. (2) Weld: Thermallv butt -fused to stub end of pipe. (3) Pressure rated to match pipe DR pressure ratine_ . (4) ComDlies with ASTM D3261. 8) Back-UD Rina: a) Description (1) Material: TvDe 316 Stainless -steel Der ANSI B16.1, fitted to polvethvlene flange adapter and shaped as necessary to suit outside dimension of DiDe. (2) NeoDrene Gasket: Full -face Der ANSI B 16.21. (3) Hardware: Twe 316 stainless steel. (4) Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Der specification 33 1105. (a) Tighten bolts alternatively and evenly_ to manufacturer's specified toraues. 9) Connection to ductile iron or cast iron Dive: will be conducted with ANSI Class 150 Flange with Type 316 stainless -steel backing. a) Manufacturer: (1) Use Romac Alpha restrained couDlin2, or approved equal. (2) Field verify O.D. of cast iron Dive, use Romac Aloha XL if O.D. exceeds the AlDha dimension ranee. b) Description (1) End Rings: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, iarade 65-45-12. (2) Center Rings: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (3) Bolt Guides: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (4) GriDDers: Ductile Iron, meeting ASTM A 536, trade 65-45-12. (5) Gaskets: According to Section 33 1105. 10) See Section 33 3150. 2. Slotted Stormwater Drainpipe a. Material shall be slotted SDR 17. b. Single wall and dual wall corrueated HDPE Dive are not acceptable. c. Perforations shall be slotted type, measuring 0.032 inch wide (max), spaced at 0.25 inch (min), and Drovidin2 a minimum inlet area of 5.0 square inch Der linear foot of DiDe. d. Perforations shall be oriented perpendicular to lone axis of Dive, and evenly spaced around circumference and length of DiDe. e. Bedding and Backfill CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 8 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 8 of 10 1) For HS-20 loading applications. 2) See Section 33 05 10. 3) Provide expansion and construction joints, as needed. 3. Detectable Metallic Tape a. See Section 33 05 26. 4. Polyethylene Repair Clamp a. Smith -Blair Full Circle Clamp Style 228 or 263. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in Section 33 3121, and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 3. If applicable excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10. B. Pipe Handling 1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site. 2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. a. Inspect each joint of pipe and rejector repair any damaged pipe prior to lowering into the trench. b. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the surface of the pipe for handling the pipe. 3. At the close of each operating day: a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash — during and after the laying operation. b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. Pipe Joining a. Join pipe in accordance with ASTM F2620. b. Operators must be certified by the manufacturer to use the fusion equipment. c. Follow the time and temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. d. Joints shall be stronger than the pipe itself, be properly aligned and contain no gaps or voids. e. Remove bead projection on the outside of the pipe to reduce drag during pipe installation process. D. Connection Installation CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 9 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 9 of 10 1. See Section 33 3150. E. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation 1. See Section 33 05 26. F. Apply anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchorage. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection a. Provide a Post -CCTV inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31. 2. Air Test a. Provide an Air Test in accordance with Section 33 01 30. 3. Hvdrostatic Pressure Test a. Pressure test all DiDin2 at a minimum of 115 psi. b. Fill the forcemain with non-Dotable water and pressurize. All taps, valves and accessories required for testing shall be integral to the Contract and be _provided at no additional cost. c. PiDe shall hold test pressure for minimum of 12 hours. d. Anv leaks shall be monitored and fixed. There shall be no visible leaks on piping prior to acceptance of test and backfillina. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3331 15 - 10 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE FOR SANITARY SEWER Page 10 of 10 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 04/23/2019 Walter Norwood L LA referenced Section 33 3121 and was corrected to reflect Section 33 3123. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 1 of 7 SECTION 33 3120 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe ^ inch thf— 1 Q inch for gravity sanitary sewer applications B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None Modified 1.1.A. 2. Modified 1.1.C. 3. Modified 1.2. 4. Added 1.6.C. 5. Added 1.9.B. 6. Modified 2.2.B. 7. Modified 3A.D. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 4. Section 33 0131 — Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 5. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 6. Section 33 05 26 — Utility Markers/Locators 7.Sootion 3-1- 31 £ 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. '.1mo or ,�y�.artaflanee. 2. Payment :tk t�i,3 Iten+-and _--mod a,Tv .v. t tiro unitlw�ieJbid per- liaeai-7 feet of "P3,11C Pipj" lm4allad€ar-: y V s cta-ndar-dDimorA/n': I,,aties 3) Nlmieus embedmelfzs 4) tea' s depths f: miseellaneeus pfe}ee<sefilp 3. pnse bid aul l include - CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 2 of 7 a. Furl ding and4n&t7_llirg PVC Drawings.. b. D'I' ,emeH+i r-emvoya4 Disc d. IIauling c UuNi �zhi�g, �a o ors �a +: r e .i.oa .or. g. Fumn;clhinzplacement and , ..ctio,, of t,aek fil up k. Testing 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. b. D2412, Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel -Plate Loading. c. D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. d. D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. e. F679, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large -Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ): a. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.53 — Pipe Design. b. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.54 — Criteria for Laying Pipe. c. Title 30, Part I, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule 217.57 — Testing Requirements for Installation of Gravity Collection System Pipes. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Product data sheet 2. Manufacturer CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-3 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 3 of 7 3. Nominal pipe diameter 4. Standard dimension ratio (SDR) 5. Cell classification 6. Laying lengths B. Certificates 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all PVC Gravity Pipe meets the provisions of this Section and has been air and deflection tested and meets the requirements of ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS reauirements for all applicable metal products where rea_uired in compliance with the reauirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer for each size per project, unless otherwise approved by the City. 1) Change orders, specials and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. b. Pipe manufacturing operations shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. c. All pipe furnished shall be in conformance with ASTM D3034 (4-inch through 15-inch) and ASTM F679 (18-inch through 48-inch). B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Gravity pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 4 of 7 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Performance / Design Criteria Pipe a. Meet all requirements of TCEQ. b. Design in accordance with ASTM D3034 for 4-inch through 15-inch SDR 26 and ASTM F679 for 18-inch through 48-inch 115PS. c. PVC Gravity Sanitary Sewer Pipe shall be verified by the UL. d. Assume a standard lay length of 14 feet and 20 feet except for special fittings or closure pieces necessary to comply with the Drawings. e. Use green coloring for ground identification as sanitary sewer pipe. f. PVC meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, with a cell classification of 12454 or 12364. g. Deflection Design 1) Base pipe design on pipe stiffness, soil stiffness and load on the pipe. 2) Design pipe according to the Modified Iowa Formula as detailed by the Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association in the Handbook of PVC Pipe, using the following parameters: a) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pounds per cubic foot b) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20 c) Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings d) Maximum (E') = 1,000 max e) Deflection Lag Factor (DL) = 1.0 f) Bedding Factor constant (K) = 0.1 g) Mean radius of the pipe (r), inches, as indicated in Drawings h) Marston's load per unit length (W), pounds per inch, calculate per Drawings i) PVC modulus of elasticity (E) = 400,000 psi j) Moment of inertia of pipe wall per unit length, (1) = t3/12, (in4/in), per pipe type and size (1) Where (t) = pipe thickness, inches k) Maximum Calculated Deflection = 5 percent h. Pipe Flotation: If the pipe is buried in common saturated soil (about 120 pounds per cubic foot) with at least 1'/2 pipe diameters of cover, pipe is generally not subject to flotation. If shallower, check groundwater flotation potential. Flotation will occur if - CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 5 of 7 Fb > Wp + Wf + Wd Where: Fb = buoyant force, pound per foot Wp = empty pipe weight, pound per foot Wf = weight of flooded soil, pound per foot Wd = weight of dry soil, pound per foot Values and formulas for the above variables can be obtained from the pipe manufacturer and site -specific soil conditions. i. Verify trench depths after existing utilities are located. j. Accommodate vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. k. In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. 2. Minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi at 5 percent deflection when test in accordance with ASTM D2412. 3. Pipe markings a. Meet the minimum requirements of ASTM D3034 and ASTM F679. b. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: 1) Manufacturer's Name or Trademark and production record 2) Nominal pipe size 3) PVC cell classification 4) ASTM or Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) designation 5) Seal of testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe 4. Joints a. Joints shall be gasket, bell and spigot, push -on type conforming to ASTM D3212. b. Since each pipe manufacturer has a different design for push -on joints; gaskets shall be part of a complete pipe section and purchased as such. 5. Restraint a. Bends, tees, nluRs or other fittings shall be mechanicallv restrained, corrosion resistant ioints. Provide provisions for restraint at all ioints. 1) Restrain at mechanical joint fittings with ROMAC PVC ROMAGRIP, or annroved equal. 6. Conneetions a. On! uac mawafaetffed fitti g-s a. See Seeticxn 3v 3 59-. 7. Detectable Metallic Tape a. See Section 33 05 26. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-6 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 6 of 7 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pipe, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in Section 33 05 10, and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 3. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 4. Embed PVC pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10. B. Pipe Handling 1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site. 2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. a. Inspect each joint of pipe and rejector repair any damaged pipe prior to lowering into the trench. b. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the surface of the pipe for handling the pipe. 3. At the close of each operating day: a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash — during and after the laying operation. b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. Pipe Joint Installation a. Clean dirt and foreign material from the gasketed socket and the spigot end. b. Assemble pipe joint by sliding the lubricated spigot end into the gasketed bell end to the reference mark. c. Install such that identification marking on each joint are oriented upward toward the trench opening. d. When making connection to manhole, use an elastomeric seal or flexible boot to facilitate a seal. 1oee Section 2-31 3, 59-. E. Detectable Metallic Tape Installation 1. See Section 33 05 26. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333120-7 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE Page 7 of 7 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [oR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Video Inspection a. Provide a Post -CCTV inspection in accordance with Section 33 01 31. 2. Air Test and Deflection (Mandrel) Test a. Perform in accordance with Section 33 0130. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 39 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary Sewer Cast -in -Place Concrete Manholes B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification None. Modified 1.1.C. Modified 1.2. 3- Modified 3.2. 4, Modified 3.3. 5. Modified 3.4.H. C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 4. Section 03 Qn nn >\a l;f; tivizsto ErisVr. 03 74 00 — Modifications to Existing Concrete 5. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 6. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings 7. Section 33 39 60 Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. Tyre a. T ro n s>,.,11��xr attJv unitpr-ieebid per- e-aeh ""�-ahe4o" irea),.Ia€er-.: a) Various ei��s b)—Alw ua tr Tes The pr-ioe bid will inelude.: 2) &i6m,ation 3) r\): 7 4)--E mer-ete 5) Baekffll 6) Foundation 7Drop pipe 8) Stubs CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 2 of 6 9) F,aam 12) Pipe connections 1) Laulirg 15) Dioposal of exee3c n:�t rml. 1 ^\ 71 Clean b. gaymei}t 0 p affefmed t . er�ax�- ranrrsxx0 ill wU' 0 and ir-.QoJa:ed aC p0 ,Aed under- ",MeasuFemei t" willll bepaid for- at the tzir'r.rrcv bid per vet4iealfeet€er "l x*a DW,h Manhole" s eeifie for-: a)Var-ioes site s e. Thepr-iee bid will ine 1) Manhole stvaetere eeffq4et: in p!me Z�Exeav4iee Fofffis 4) Reiniereing steel(if required) 5) Ganerete 6) Baeknll 8) Drop pipe 11) Cove P) Pipe connections !,5) 14L1Ili 1\ 41 Glean 1) Measur-ementfor- thislto-xz`»ill'ao po c>7 Se e ufw-t�--i Pruoa -arming installed. d and nWar»l.s fumished ix avoc measured as provided under- "rl�lireas1'zmt" 9ial1 bJ- paid f at !uxz p Sim& bid per eaeh "Sewer kinetion Struetur-e" leeatien. e iee bid will in ?) Tanetion Stmeter-e eempleto in praea i)EKcavacivon 4) Reinforcing steel (if required) CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 3 of 6 cte 6) Backfill ?) FOUna 8) limp pipe 9) Stubs 11) GEWe 13) Pipe a eetions Hmling 16)-Pispes l 4--ex-,.oiss; ffi—AtoFia 4S}0zian ur 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions Manhole Type a. Standard Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Greater than 4 feet deep up to 6 feet deep. b. Standard Drop Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Same as Standard Manhole with external drop connection (s) c. Type "A" Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Manhole set on a reinforced concrete block placed around 39-inch and larger sewer pipe. d. Shallow Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Less than 4 feet deep with formed invert for sewer pipe diameters smaller than 39-inch. 2. Manhole Size a. 4-foot diameter 1) Used with pipe ranging from 8-inch to 15-inch. b. 5-foot diameter 1) Used with pipe ranging from 18-inch to 36-inch. c. See specific manhole design on Drawings for pipes larger than 36-inch. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. b. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 4 of 6 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data l . Drop connection materials. 2. Pipe connections at manhole walls. 3. Stubs and stub plugs 4. Admixtures 5. Concrete Mix Design 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Materials 1. Concrete — Conform to Section 03 30 00. 2. Reinforcing Steel — Conform to Section 03 2100. 3. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 4. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 5. Pipe Connections a. Pipe connections can be pre -molded pipe adapter, flexible locked -in boot adapter, or integrally cast gasket channel and gasket. 6. Interior Coating or Liner — Conform to Section 33 39 60, if required. 7. Exterior Coating a. Use Coal Tar Bitumastic for below grade damp proofing. b. Dry film thickness shall be no less than 12 mils and no greater than 30 mils. c. Solids content is 68 percent by volume f 2 percent. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 5 of 6 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance with the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Foundation Preparation 1. Excavate 8 inches below manhole foundation. 2. Replace excavated soil with :ems coarse aggregate, creating a stable base for the manhole construction. a. If soil conditions or ground water prevent use of course aggregate base a 2-inch mud slab may be substituted. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Manhole 1. Construct manhole to dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. Cast manhole foundation and wall monolithically. a. A cold joint with water stop is allowed when the manhole depth exceeds 12 feet. b. No other joints are allowed unless shown on Drawings. 3. Place, finish, and cure concrete according to Section 03 30 00. a. Manholes must cure 3 days before backfilling around structure. B. Pipe connection at Manhole 1. Do not construct joints of sewer pipe within wall sections of manhole. C. Invert 1. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe -manhole connections. 2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. a. Provide curves for side inlets. 3. Sewer pipe may be laid through the manhole and the top 1/2 of the pipe removed to facilitate manhole construction. 4. For all standard manholes provide full depth invert. 5. For example, if 8-inch pipe is connected to manhole, construct the invert to full 8 inches in depth. D. Drop Manhole Connection 1. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches above the invert. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3339 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 6 of 6 E. Final Rim Elevation 1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment. a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole. b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings. 2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant. 3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal. 4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the final surface elevation of the manhole frame. F. Internal coating 1. Internal coating application will conform to Section 33 39 60, if required by Drawings. G. External coating 1. Remove dirt, dust, oil and other contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of the coating. 2. Cure for 3 days before backfilling around structure. 3. Coat the same date the forms are removed. 4. Prepare surface in accordance with ASTM D4258 and ASTM D4259. 5. Application will follow manufacturer's recommendation. H. Modifications and Pipe Penetrations 1. Conform to Section 03 80 00. 03 74 00. L Junction Structures 1. All structures shall be installed as specified in Drawings. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Perform vacuum test in accordance with Section 33 0130. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Pagel of 8 1. Sanitary Sewer, Water Appurtenance, or Reclaimed Water Appurtenance Precast Concrete Manholes B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.3.A. 4. Addition of paragraph 1.6 B. 5. Addition of paraeraph 2.2 B. 9. 6. Modification of paragraph 3.4 E. 1. 7. Addition of paragraph 3.4 G. 8. Modified 3.4.H. 9. Addition of paragraph 3.7 A.2. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 4. Section 03 74 00 — Modifications to Existing Concrete Stmetures - 5. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 6. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings 7. Section 33 39 60 Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard pipin,2 bid item. 1.. "ale a A4,�A-vxnznt 1)l I sure el3t- ti T.arls d':� ! ba per- eaeh , .ote ,v hale i:pstaflefi b. ga5�meat CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 2 of 8 1) Thi womh paced dw rrn ,xids fum-Ah2d ; aeeor-danee with this Rem shall be paid for- at the tmit priee bid per oadh "Mankele" installed fon a) Various &izes b) Vai4eus vfpes 1) Manhole " tfuettir-e eampk4o ix pkvo 2) Exeayatlee 4) Rein€ereingsteel (if required) 5)-=cvnciete 6-t Baekf ll dux-.dateon 8Drop pipee 9)Stubs 1 3) Pipe e e etiORS 1 5>, Hauling- 17) Dl.,,.o., e t and G a etio of'1 aekf;ll 1Ql1 Clean up 2. Extfa Depth Manhole 1"casiam -xAmt for- added orh ioy�Zxia 6 foot will be p vertical fog, mjxui �l-te the nearest 1 i1 n feet. asurved ae provided tinder- "Measufementt" will ~^iat tno unite@ ti,4 per=er-tieal-feetfef "E*t-va Depth Manhole" specified for: CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 3 of 8 1) Manhole stmetur-eeass156u in &-ae- 2) E*c^eavation 3) 1) Prsnf , ing stool (if ,-o,, i -ed) 5) Gensr-ete 6)aekfi11 ?) Founiation 9) Stubs 11) 9) Drop pipe 12) r ade rings 1 3) Pipe .. eeti fis 15) Nvaling l 141 Clean 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Manhole Type a. Standard Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Greater than 4 feet deep up to 6 feet deep. b. Standard Drop Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Same as Standard Manhole with external drop connection(s) c. Type "A" Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Manhole set on a reinforced concrete block placed around 39-inch and larger sewer pipe. d. Shallow Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Less than four 4-foot deep with formed invert for sewer pipe diameters smaller than 39-inch 2. Manhole Size a. 4-foot diameter CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 4 of 8 1) Used with pipe ranging from 8-inch to 15-inch. b. 5-foot diameter 1) Used with pipe ranging from 18-inch to 36-inch. 2) See specific manhole design on Drawings for pipes larger than 36-inch. B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C443, Standard Specification for Joint for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets b. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. c. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. d. D1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsion for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal e. D1227, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Manhole 2. Drop connection materials 3. Pipe connections at manhole walls 4. Stubs and stub plugs 5. Admixtures 6. Concrete Mix Design B. Certified Test Reports 1. Antimicrobial additive verification tests. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 5 of 8 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Materials 1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Sections — Conform to ASTM C478. 2. Precast Joints a. Provide gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM C443. b. Minimize number of segments. c. Use long joints at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top. d. Include manufacturer's stamp on each section. 3. Lifting Devices a. Manhole sections and cones may be furnished with lift lugs or lift holes. 1) If lift lugs are provided, place 180 degrees apart. 2) If lift holes are provided, place 180 degrees apart and grout during manhole installation. 4. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 5. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C478. 6. Pipe Connections a. Utilize either an integrally cast embedded pipe connector or a boot -type connector installed in a circular block out opening conforming to ASTM C923. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 6 of 8 1) Provide all AISI 316 stainless hardware, including nuts, bolts, bands, and clamps. 7. Steps a. No steps are allowed. 8. Interior Coating or Liner — Conform to Section 33 39 60. 9. ConShield: Liauid antimicrobial additive by CONSHIELD Technoloiries, Inc. (877-543- 2094). Provide additive in all concrete manholes for sewer air valves and structures where concrete will be exposed to 1-12S lasses. Dose additive at rate recommended by the manufacturer. 10. Exterior Coating a. Coat with non-fibered asphaltic emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187 Type I and ASTM D1227 Type III Class I. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Foundation Preparation 1. Excavate 8-inches below manhole foundation. 2. Replace excavated soil with course aggregate; creating a stable base for manhole construction. a. If soil conditions or ground water prevent use of course aggregate base a 2-inch mud slab may be substituted. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Manhole 1. Construct manhole to dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. Precast Sections CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 7 of 8 a. Provide bell -and -spigot design incorporating a premolded joint sealing compound for wastewater use. b. Clean bell spigot and gaskets, lubricate and join. c. Minimize number of segments. d. Use long joints used at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top. B. Invert 1. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe -manhole connections. 2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. a. Provide curves for side inlets. 3. For all standard manholes provide full depth invert. 4. For example, if 8-inch pipe in connected to manhole construct the invert to fall 8 inches in depth. C. Drop Manhole Connection 1. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches above the invert. D. Final Rim Elevation 1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment. a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole. b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings. 2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant. 3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal. 4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the final surface elevation of the manhole frame. E. Internal coating 1. Internal coating application will conform to Section 33 39 60, if required by Drawings. Internal coatings shall be by Warren. F. External coating 1. Remove dirt, dust, oil and other contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of the coating. 2. Cure manhole for 3 days before backfilling around the structure. 3. Application will follow manufacturer's recommendation. G. ConShield antimicrobial additive may be used in the concrete mix in lieu of an internal coating. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 8 of 8 H. Modifications and Pipe Penetrations 1. Conform to Section 03-80 00. 03 74 00. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests and Inspections 1. Perform vacuum test in accordance with Section 33 0130. 2. Antimicrobial additive verification: Retain two cured nieces of concrete from each batch made with ConShield for verification by an independent lab. The nieces must have a minimum dimension of one sauare inch but need not be uniform: remnants of cvlinder break tests are acceptable provided thev meet the dimension requirements. The specimens shall be placed in elastic bats and clearly labeled with date, batch number, and the specific rp o,ect. 3. Test in accordance with CONSHIELD Technologies, Inc. recommendations. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-1 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 1 of 12 SECTION 33 39 60 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application of a high -build epoxy coating system (or modified polymer line system, , Speet,.aShiela` to concrete utility structures such as manholes, lift station wet wells, junction boxes, Drimary clarifiers, or other concrete facilities that may need protection from corrosive materials. This covers rehabilitation of existing sanitary sewer structures and newly installed sanitary sewer structures. Use of A.W. Chesterton Companv Arc 791, or equivalent produced by Raven or Warren Environmental Svstem. 2. For sanitary sewer mains 8-inch diameter and larger, use of a structural liner system, Warren Environmental System 301, ARC SIHB by A.W. Chesterton Company, is acceptable. 3. For sanitary sewer mains 8-inch diameter and smaller, and less than 6-feet in depth, use of a liner system, SpectraShield, is acceptable. B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 4- Neie-Modified 1.1. Modified 1.2. 3-. Modified 1.3.A. 4, Removed 1.6.B.3. Modified 1.7.A. 6. Modified 2.2.A. Modified 3.3.A. Modified 3A.B. C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 4. Section 33 05 16 — Concrete Water Vaults 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the LumD Sum bid price in the Proposal Form for it's respective concrete protective coatings bid item. 4 Manholes a. T e n CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-2 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 2 of 12 inyer`, thru fl-.,j uoe of flew ,mot el ,1eyiees (.e., *,,-ARpCJmry ,.1ug&, , . b s) to-t-VrlNmnly'alook flow. 140W&�,OA QC a 1X4 ,.--f .,,,a with prior- riwritten approvalfr,,m Water- Field Operations ;f'the flow eannot be 1,1,,, l 1 tempar-arily, then the lining wmild stop 3 inches frofR the edge of the water- in tho papa. Thio item , s the total „eftiea f^^t .o �br flm Te ;f e bid ;te of r.'S rikole sizes (i.e., 4 foot� diameter-, 5 foots diameter-, Speci Manhole Designs for lines larg thsan. 26 ineh, et..) and s ee fie type (Standard Manhole, D op Manhale-hype "^- an hoo, £cello-» Manhole, b. gaymerlt 1) The work perf� a�teri-alsfurnished inaeeerdaneew th this Rem _-El as preNzided;-indor. p id e it priee bid per veftieal-feet of "Manhelebii}er" wppli The priee d dha11 inalude- 1)Removal ets 2) Removal of ooatiegs —r-limirut 4) Removal of steps 5TYcep'ilr4eaYeeirireccioirvrthe 'cxiJcmg-crcrine to cn""mnx"'c`p J RC W.rZ af any e dia 1:4 tho existing struetw a hiF moo„ a -bel (ee moo)al beeuh� ire -kid ng , epl.,,.ome t ofdamaged ,ebu,4 ape 7) Sur aee eleanirlg J Fumishing and installing Li c w opoc�f ,1 by the D 9) hVilirg 10) Disposal of excess material 1 1) Site Clean , 12) Manhole and invert Cleaning 13) Testing 1 4) Re Testing 1) Measurement for- l4cm. 0Mll be p e foot of'., e wher-e the eaatrl+b 10 Qppll b. Paynien 1) Thewer4perf� a�terials furnishedinaeeerdaecew th this Rem and easlur^providedunder- easur-em--Snt" d.V.1 Sa paid for .,t the unit priee bid per square feet of "Straetur-e L e. The priee bid "..l in lode- 1Removal ats 2) Rm anal of ct2tirrrg ooatiegs Eli r. ;&ate 1) Rvmsaval of steps 5) Repai 4 l omwati-jr. ^f•the existing f;;ame to ehim ey J lopairs of any e zlo is tho existing street,, .o ,.1.imne„ ee -bel (eefle), wall, bench, ir>zuAing , epl.,,,eme t of•damaged robaA pipe '')--Surraee eleanirlg Fumishing and installing Liner as speeified by the Tl,-.,w;ngs 9) hVilirg 10) Disposal of exeess material ,�an up CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-3 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 3 of 12 112) Manhole and Im-Nit Jzianirg 1 Z) Testing 14) Re Testing 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents. b. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. c. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. d. D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. e. D4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. f. D4414, Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. g. D7234, Stand Test Method for Pull -Off Adhesion strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion Testers. 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 4. NACE International (MACE). Published standards from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Employ a trench safety system in accordance with Section 3150 00. 6. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, (RCRA). 7. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. This includes monitoring for hydrogen sulfide, methane, or low oxygen. Also includes flow control equipment. Surface preparation equipment may include high pressure water cleaning (3500 psi) and shall be suited to provide a surface compatible for installation of the liner system. Surface preparation shall produce a clean, abraded, and sound surface, with no evidence of loose concrete, loose brick, loose mortar, oil, grease, rust, scale, other contaminants or debris, and shall display a surface profile suitable for application of the liner system. b. SP0188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-4 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 4 of 12 1. Technical data sheet on each product used. 2. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product used. 3. Copies of independent testing performed on the coating product indicating the product meets the requirements as specified herein. 4. Technical data sheet and project specific data for repair materials to be topcoated with the coating product including application, cure time and surface preparation procedures. 5. Material and method for repair of leaks or cracks in the structure. This applies to repair work on both existing structures, manholes and new installed manholes (including Developer projects) that have been identified with cracks, voids, signs of infiltration, other structural defects, or other related construction damage. B. Contractor Data 1. Current documentation from coating product manufacturer certifying Contractor's training (and/or licensed) as an approved installer and equipment complies with the Quality Assurance requirements specified herein. 2. 5 recent references of Contractor indicating successful application of coating product(s) of the same material type as specified herein, applied by spray application within the municipal wastewater environment. References shall include at least the following: owner name, City inspector name and phone number, project name/number, size, and linear footage of sanitary sewer main, manhole diameter, structure dimensions and number of each, square feet (or vertical feet) of product installed, contract cost, and contract duration. Contractor must demonstrate a successful history of installing the product in structures of similar size and scope and update this each time the contractor applies for and renews its Prequalification for the Water Department. 3 For Developer- -Proje is .,t the time of Contractor- seleetio the D,-o.,u lif;c t:on zlrruotura,4ale linef. IN@ athery submik['JlJ 21hoR ba, aeoepted that :,,el l3 jant,-aeto ,,,hose pfe"alifiGatiOfl tonm hvellpire4-or i& not a the active 4fit,.,,,,t,,,. list .,t 0he 64BRe seleetion. if the submitted foFms for- this pr-qjeet not aeeeptabie, the City will r-efe to dhe , opt active contractor- prequalifieatior. ll?t, aria the Contractor aW1 03lect The CentfaetcT dV_1 the -p .ide the revisedD,-o,,u l;fie t:,,n ct.,tem"O It Ecotian 00 4. This Specification (along with the CCTV Specification) and the associated submittals including the work plan, QA/QC, testing, closeout documents, etc. shall be discussed as part of the Pre -Construction Agenda for each project (Developer projects included). 5. For any project, Developer projects included - If the Contractor proceeds with application of an unapproved lining product and/or using an unqualified subcontractor for lining, the City shall recommend either repair and/or removal of any defective lining material and have the Contractor select an approved subcontractor that can apply the approved lining materials. This work shall be at no additional cost to the City. 6. Schedule and Sequence of Construction — Considering this is a specialized installation performed by only certified applicators, the schedule for this work has a lead time that shall be included in the Contractor's schedule. If the Contractor does CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-5 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 5 of 12 not provide written notification and/or fails to schedule the subcontractor in advance, the City shall not be responsible for any additional costs and/or delays caused by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide the updated construction schedule and work plan (including manhole preparation, repairs, lining, testing, etc.) in accordance with Section 0132 16 at least 1 week prior to start of lining activities to the City Inspector, City Project Manager, Water Field Operations, and Water Capital Projects. Equipment shall be on -site and in working order for the testing. If the Contractor is unable to have equipment ready for testing, the test date shall be rescheduled accordingly with the Inspector. The updated construction schedule shall clearly indicate all related construction activities at the manholes before and after lining. All paving activities, including any final grade adjustments for manholes outside pavement, shall be completed before Contractor begins lining work. After liner installation, Contractor shall wait a minimum of 48 hours to allow the liner material to fully cure before returning the system to normal service. CCTV per Section 33 0131 shall be scheduled after the lining has been completed to document and confirm the manholes have been lined. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Testing Documentation Provide test results required in Section 2.4 and Section 3.7 to City. a. Include the following manhole or structure location information: 1) Existing sanitary sewer main/lateral number. , pfevide prep d aaniLzr;-s-ewar li ixurnbar- as docignfaa on the plan provide the o isti g s nit R, � „4.,tomq run btr at conneetion to the existing xanho'e (if.,..,plie.,ble) 2) Station number 3) GIS ID number (if provided during construction). b. Inspection report of each manhole/structure tested (See attached sample reports to be used for Wet Film Thickness, Manhole Holiday/Spark Detection, and Manhole Adhesion Test). 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications Contractor a. Be trained by, or have training approved and certified by, the coating product manufacturer for the handling, mixing, application and inspection of the coating product(s) to be used as specified herein. b. Initiate and enforce quality control procedures consistent with the coating product(s) manufacturer recommendations and applicable NACE or SSPC standards as referenced herein. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials dry, protected from weather and stored under cover. B. Store coating materials between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F. C. Do not store near flame, heat or strong oxidants. D. Handle coating materials according to their material safety data sheets. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-6 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 6 of 12 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS A. Provide confined space entry, flow diversion and/or bypass plans as necessary to perform the specified work. Active flows shall be diverted with flow through plugs as required to ensure that flow is maintained off the surfaces to be lined. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Contractor Warranty 1. Contractor's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 0. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Repair and Resurfacing Products 1. Compatible with the specified coating product(s) in order to bond effectively, thus forming a composite system. 2. Used and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. The repair and resurfacing products must meet the following: a. 100 percent solids, solvent -free epoxy grout specifically formulated for epoxy topcoming top coating compatibility. b. Factory blended, rapid setting, high early strength, fiber reinforced, non -shrink repair mortar that can be toweled or pneumatically spray applied and specifically formulated to be suitable for topcoating with the specified coating product used. B. Coating Product 4—C.apab10 a .biro, installed and , pr-eper-ly , ,:this a4rwnkaleor- eefier-eteutility eat. Canable of being installed and curing properly within an enclosed environment with Door ventilation. concrete utilitv structures such as manholes, lift station wet wells, iunction boxes, l3rimary clarifiers, or other concrete facilities that may need protection from corrosive materials. 3. Resistant to all forms of chemical or bacteriological attack found in municipal sanitary sewer systems; and, capable of adhering to typical manhole structure substrates. 4. The 100 percent solids, solvent -free ultra high -build epoxy system shall exhibit the following characteristics: a. Application Temperature — 50 degrees F, minimum b. Thickness — 125 mils minimum for newly installed structures; 250 mils minimum for rehabilitation of existing structures (Warren Environmental System 301, ARC S 1HB by A.W. Chesterton Company) c. Color — White, Light Blue, or Beige d. Compressive Strength (per ASTM D695) — 8,800 psi minimum e. Tensile Strength (per ASTM D638) — 7,500 psi minimum f. Hardness, Shore D (per ASTM D4541) — 70 minimum CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-7 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 7 of 12 g. Abrasion Resistance (per ASTM D4060 CS 17F Wheel) — 80 mg loss maximum h. Flexural Modulus (per ASTM D790) — 400,000 psi minimum i. Flexural Strength (per ASTM D790) — 12,000 psi minimum j. Adhesion to Concrete, mode of failure (ASTM D4541): Substrate (concrete) failure k. Chemical Resistance (per ASTM D543/G20) all types of service for: 1) Municipal sanitary sewer environment 2) Sulfuric acid, 70 percent 3) Sodium hydroxide, 20 percent Or, the multi -layer modified polyurea and polyurethane shall exhibit the following characteristics: a. Application Temperature — 50 degrees F, minimum b. Thickness — 500 mils minimum (SpectraShield) c. Moisture Barrier and Final Corrosion Barrier 1) Color — Pink 2) Tensile Strength (per ASTM D412) — 2550 psi minimum 3) Hardness, Shore D (per ASTM D2240) — 56 minimum 4) Abrasion Resistance (per ASTM D4060) — 20 mg loss maximum 5) Percent Elongation (per ASTM D412) — 269 d. Surfacer 1) Compressive Strength (per ASTM D1621) — 100 psi minimum 2) Density (per ASTM D1622) — 5 lbs/cu ft minimum 3) Shear Strength (per ASTM C273) — 230 psi minimum 4) Closed Cell Content (per ASTM D 1940) — >95% C. Coating Application Equipment 1. Manufacturer approved heated plural component spray equipment. 2. Hard to reach areas, primer application and touch-up may be performed using hand tools. 3. Applicator shall use approved specialty equipment that is adequate in size, capacity, and number sufficient to accomplish the work in a timely manner. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Coating Thickness Testing 1. Film Thickness Testing for epoxy systems a. Take wet film thickness gauge measurements per ASTM D4414 — Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages at 3 locations within the manhole, 2 spaced equally apart along the wall and 1 on the bench. 1) Document and attest measurements and provide to the City using the form at the end of this specification. 2. Thickness testing for modified polymer liner system a. Upon installation of the Final Corrosion Barrier insert probe into substrate for depth of system measurement at 3 locations within the manhole, 2 spaced equally apart along the wall and 1 on the bench. 3. Document all testing results and provide to the City using the form at the end of this specification. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-8 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 8 of 12 B. Non -Conforming Work 1. City reserves the right to require additional testing depending on the rate of failure. 2. City will select testing locations. C. Testing Frequency 1. Projects with 10 or less manholes and/or structures test all. 2. Projects with greater than 10 manholes and/or structures, test at least 10 and test 25 percent of manholes and/or structures after the first 10. 3. City will select the manholes and/or structures to be tested. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS A. All installers shall be certified applicators approved by the manufacturers. Applicator shall use adequate number of skilled workmen that have been trained and experienced for the approved product. 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Manhole Preparation 1. Stop active flows via damming, plugging or diverting as required to ensure all liquids are maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated. 2. Maintain temperature of the surface to be coated between 40 and 120 degfees 4 0- and 120-de2rees F. 3. Shield specified surfaces to avoid exposure of direct sunlight or other intense heat source. a. Where varying surface temperatures do exist, coating installation should be scheduled when the temperature is falling versus rising. B. Surface Preparation 1. Remove oils, roots, grease, incompatible existing coatings, waxes, form release, curing compounds, efflorescence, sealers, salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. Remove any steps found in the structure. 2. Remove concrete and/or mortar damaged by corrosion, chemical attack, or other means of degradation so that only sound substrate remains. 3. Surface preparation method, or combination of methods, that may be used include high pressure water cleaning, high pressure water jetting, abrasive blasting, shotblasting, grinding, scarifying, detergent water cleaning, hot water blasting, and others as described in SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6. 4. All methods used shall be performed in a manner that provides a uniform, sound, clean, neutralized, surface suitable for the specified coating product. 5. After completion of surface preparation, inspect for leaks, cracks, holes, exposed rebar, ring and cover condition, invert condition, and inlet/outlet pipe condition. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-9 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 9 of 12 6. After defects in the structure have been identified, seal cracks, repair exposed rebar with new rebar to match existing, repair leaks and cracks with grout or other methods approved by the Manufacturer and the City. All new rebar shall be embedded in 1 'h inch epoxy mastic. Replace/seal connection between existing frame and chimney if it is found loose or not attached. 7. The repair materials shall be trowel or spray applied by the lining Contractor utilizing proper equipment on to specified surfaces. The equipment shall be specially designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. The repair mortar and epoxy topcoat must share the same epoxy matrix to ensure a bonded weld. No cementitious repair material, quick setting high strength concrete with latex or curing agent additives, or quick set mortars will be allowed. Proper surface preparation procedures must be followed to ensure adequate bond strength to any surface to be coated. New cement cure time is at least 30 days prior to coating. The repair materials as specified in this Section shall apply to both existing structures and new installed structures. This includes Developer projects, in which new installed structures/manholes have been identified with either cracks, voids, signs of infiltration, other structural defects or other related construction damage. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Perform coating after the sewer line replacement/repairs, grade adjustments and grouting are complete. 2. Perform application procedures per recommendations of the coating product manufacturer, including environmental controls, product handling, mixing and application. B. Temperature 1. Only perform application if surface temperature is between ^n a -a 120 degrees 40- and 120-de2rees F. 2. Make no application if freezing is expected to occur inside the manhole within 24 hours after application. C. Coating 1. Spray apply per manufacturer's recommendation at a minimum film thickness as noted in Section 2.2.B. 2. Apply coating from bottom of manhole frame to the bench/trough, including the bench/trough. 3. After walls are coated, remove bench covers and spray bench/trough to at least the same thickness as the walls. 4. Apply any topcoat or additional coats within the product's recoat window. a. Additional surface preparation is required if the recoat window is exceeded. 5. Allow a minimum of 48 hours of cure time or be set hard to touch before reactivating flow. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-10 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 10 of 12 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Each structure will be visually inspected by the City the same day following the application. B. Groundwater infiltration of the system shall be zero. C. All pipe connections shall be open and clear. D. The inspector will check for deficiencies, pinholes, voids, cracks, uncured spots, delamination, and thin spots. Any deficiencies in the liner shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures outlined by the Manufacturer. E. If leaks are detected they will be chipped back, plugged, and coated immediately with protective epoxy resin coating. 1. Make repair 24 hours after leak detection. F. Post Installation Coating Tests 1. Wet Film Testing 2. Adhesion Testing a. Adhesion test the liner at a minimum of three locations (cone area, mid -section, and bottom of the structure). For structures exceeding 6-feet add one additional test for every additional 6-feet. For example: 6-foot manhole — 3 tests. 6-feet, f- inch manhole thru 11-feet, 11-inch manhole — 4 tests, 12-foot manhole — 5 tests. Etc... Tests performed per ASTM D7234 — Standard Test Method for Pull -Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion Testers. 1) Document and attest all test results repairs made and provide to the City (see structure/manhole report form for adhesion testing at the end of this specification). 2) The adhesive used to attach the dollies shall have a tensile strength greater that the liner. 3) Failure of the dolly adhesive is deemed a non -test and requires retesting. 4) All the pull tests shall exceed 300 psi or concrete failure with more than 50% of the subsurface adhered to the coating. If over 1/31 fail, additional tests may be required by the City. If additional tests fail the City may require removal and replacement of the liner at the contractor's expense. 3. Holiday Detection Testing a. Holiday Detection test the liner per NACE SP0188 —Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. Mark all detected holidays. Repair all holidays in accordance to coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1) Document and attest all test results repairs made and provide to the City (see structure/manhole report for holiday detection testing at the end of this specification). 2) For example, the typical testing requirements are 100 volts per mil to 12,500 volts to test 125 mils. Contractor shall mark any location that shows a spark or potential for a pinhole and repair these locations per manufacturer recommendations. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-11 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 11 of 12 4. CCTV a. Post Construction CCTV recordings shall be made after all other testing is completed, including the repairs that are made to the lining following any test failures. b. After liner installation, conduct post -CCTV in accordance with Section 33 01 31. Video camera shall be lowered from the top of the manhole to the invert, to video all lined surfaces, prior to beginning post -CCTV of the main. Payment for this work is subsidiary to the cost for the post -CCTV of the main. c. A bonded third -party testing company shall perform the testing. d. Or Contractor may perform tests if witnessed by representative of the coating manufacturer. Coating manufacturer representative to provide certification that Contractor performed tests in accordance with noted standards. G. Non -Conforming Work 1. City reserves the right to require additional testing depending on the rate of failure. 2. City will select testing locations. 3. Repair all defects according to the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Testing Frequency 1. Projects with 10 or less manholes and/or structures test all. 2. Projects with greater than 10 manholes and/or structures, test at least 10 and test 25 percent of manholes and/or structures after the first 10. 3. City will select the manholes and/or structures to be tested. I. Test manhole for final acceptance according to Section 33 0130. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide all test results from testing per Section 2.4 and applicator certifications per Section 3.1 and in accordance with Section 1.7. In addition, perform vacuum test and provide results using the test form per Section 33 0130, Sewer and Manhole Testing. B. Upon final completion of the work, the manufacturer and/or the testing firm will provide a written certification of proper application to the City. C. The certification will confirm that the deficient areas were repaired in accordance with the procedure set forth in this Specification. The final report will detail the location of the repairs in the structure and description of the repairs. See attached testing forms. 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 333960-12 LINERS FOR SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Page 12 of 12 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 46 02 TRENCH DRAINS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 334602-1 TRENCH DRAINS Page 1 of 8 1. Construction of pre -cast trench drains, Dura Trench, manufactured by Eric'sons, or approved equal. 2. Construction of cast -in -place trench drains B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. -None. Modified 1.1. 2. Modified 1.2. 3. Modified 1.6. 4. Modified 1.9. 5. Modified 1.10. 6. Modified 1.11. 7. Added 2.2.A 8. Modified 2.2.B. 9. Modified 2.2.D.7. 10. Modified 3.4. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 4. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. BTfvfmi D.%b:4 1) Measur-ed by the-linea LU.1rzg tN oo'itaf4i e of the +..one dr-ain installed l�. gayffient 1) The vedi PeffeR:ned and nWar�&l.s fumished ix ,avoor,lanee with this item and measured as provided ui�ler "Measll=eii3ent" will oa paid for at unit bid per- lire,,,7 feet f T zirxz-. Dmin ir.\j0.kaa as designated i the Drawings. a) No a ditira-l. paw; me t will be made f f f ,-, ing s ,sta s ixaOl e*eess of the length designated. e. Th3 p;zjj Lxd dh,&I ilxilu� 1) epee f�oh Dmin and appw4enan ^o� 1) Mobilization CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334602-2 TRENCH DRAINS Page 2 of 8 1) mvata-Ig 5) DiTasa4 ,.-excess mate.ials- J Fumiahing, rlaeement and , .,etior f o,..bedmer� ?) Func,','rL� pla� J StYuabare 44*0zian ur 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Trench drains: linear drainage structures that are generally used to intercept sheet flow from pavement surfaces B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. c. C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. d. C307, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. e. C579, Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Gouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. f. C580, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical- g. Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. h. C666, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide shop drawings that contain forming details (cast -in -place systems) and manufacturer's installation guidelines. 2. Provide shop drawings with manufacturer's certification stating that trench drain system meets loading requirements. 3. If using proprietary system, provide shop drawings that contain the manufacturer's installation guidelines and any sequential order of construction. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334602-3 TRENCH DRAINS Page 3 of 8 4. Provide shoo drawings with manufacturer's product information for installation and anchoring reauirements, fasteners, and other details. 5. For modular trench drain systems. additionallv submit: a. Product data and installation instructions, including all installation _parts, anchoring connections, stop Dlates. and catch basin. b. Provide certification that the modular installation will maintain minimum slope to Drevent Dondins. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS reauirements for all aDDlicable metal Droducts where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance / Design Criteria 1. The trench drain system shall be designed to meet the requirements of AASHTO HS-20 loading. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USEDI A. Follow manufacturer's instructions on storage and handling Drocedures to Drevent bendins or other damase to occur. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED A. Field Measurements: 1. Verifv field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on ShoD Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the Citv's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00 unless otherwise specified on the Dlans. a. The manufacturer must comDly with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Anv Droduct that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. General CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334602-4 TRENCH DRAINS Page 4 of 8 1. Trench drain frames will be constructed with heavv dutv galvanized steel, with 14 saute bent lees. Anchors will be 3" X 3/8" with snacins at 18" center on center, minimum. 2. Trench drain grates ^nay will conform to ASTM A36 Carbon Steel, hot dinned galvanized. Loading class B. exceeding H-20 loading. A49-,-C)1wF 31,J'�.�e� - - or-n STA4 n 536 C,e& � 5 12 fe>=duati.V ir31+. 3. Trench drain grates will have a minimum oven area of 51.47 in2/ft, with a locking torte. Grates are to fit radius as reauired on the Drawings. of 60 per -cent ^"e„ e of total to . f o area rd will be held rt. e with a fien r4gid—,-faur p3;A2t leskiag—,y4orn in all f ,, . of the grate a. Trench drain grate retaining devices will not obstruct the flow area of the trench. b. Trench grates will be removable. 4. If grates are located in walking surfaces or along accessible routes, then they shall have spaces no greater than 3/4 inch (19.05 millimeters) 1/2 ineh (13 ii4Ylriri4 3 wide in 1 direction. a. If grates have elongated openings, then they shall be placed so that the long dimension is perpendicular to the dominant direction of travel. 5. Connections to structures must not restrict the hydraulic flow of the trench drain. C. Cast -in -place Trench Drain 1. Cast -in -Place trench drain will be cast using concrete with a minimum 28-day design strength of 3,600 psi conforming to Section 03 30 00. 2. Cast -in -Place trench drains will be formed from pre-engineered and factory fabricated expanded polystyrene foam forming system or other acceptable method as approved by the Engineer. a. The forming system will maintain a smooth trench finish and provide a means for easy removal after casting. b. Trench drain will have a radius bottom and built to a minimuml percent slope, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. c. The forms will be capable of maintaining proper alignment during the concrete placement. d. Trench drain will connect to structures with forming system as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. D. Pre -cast Trench Drain 1. Pre -cast trench drains furnished shall be a monolithic polymer concrete made from a composition of aggregate and 2-part polymer resin in accordance with Table 1, "Pre -Cast Concrete Trench Drain Properties". CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334602-5 TRENCH DRAINS Page 5 of 8 Table 1 Pre -Cast Cone •ete Trench Drain Properties Property ASTM TEST VALUE METHOD Minimum Compressive Strength ASTM C579 12,000 psi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM C307 1,200 psi Minimum Bending Strength ASTM C580 2,000 psi Maximum Moisture Absorption ASTM C 140 0.5 percent Freeze/Thaw, Number of Cycles ASTM C666 1,600 Without Weight Loss 2. The pre -cast channels shall be radius bottom and have an inside width as shown on the Drawings. 3. Sloping sections shall have a built-in minimum invert slope of 9.6 0_5 percent or be non -sloping as shown on Drawings or as directed. 4. The pre -cast channels shall have a maximum roughness coefficient of 0.010. 5. The channels shall interlock with tongue and groove connections to adjoining channels. 6. The channels shall also have anchoring ribs to mechanically lock the channel into the encasement concrete. 7. Provide expansion and contraction joints in surroundinia concrete as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Cast -in -Place Trench Drain 1. Excavation will be in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 2. Assemble forming system and install trench drain in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations or as directed by the Engineer. 3. Place a minimum of 15 inches of concrete around the trench drain form. a. Concrete for the trench drain will have a minimum 28-day design strength of 3,600 psi and will be governed by Section 03 30 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334602-6 TRENCH DRAINS Page 6 of 8 4. Make connections to new or existing structures as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 5. Remove trench drain form and dispose of properly. 6. Install grates with retaining pins on all four corners. 7. Remove any construction debris from trench drain. B. Pre -cast Trench Drain 1. Obtain and haul pre -cast trench drain and all necessary fittings, frames, anchors, stop elates. catch basin, and grates from designated locations. 2. Excavation will be in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 3. Pre -cast trench drain frames shall be independent of the channel and shall anchor into the surrounding concrete with a minimum diameter 0.24 inches stainless steel anchoring rod in all four corners of each frame with a maximum spacing of 20 inches between each rod measured in the direction of travel. 4. Assemble and install pre -cast trench drain in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers recommendations or as directed by the Engineer. 5. Shop drawings are required and shall contain manufacturer's installation guidelines. 6. Pre -cast trench drain shall connect to structures with a polymer concrete channel mitered at a 20 degree to 45 degree angle measured parallel to the pavement surface and have a ductile iron solid cover in accordance with ASTM A536. 7. Concrete for the trench drain will have a minimum 28-day design strength of 3,600 psi and will be governed by Section 03 30 00. 8. Install grates with retaining pins on all four corners. 9. Remove any construction debris from trench drain. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 DATE NAME 334602-7 TRENCH DRAINS Page 7 of 8 Revision Log SUMMARY OF CHANGE CITY OF FORT WORTH CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 10329 334602-8 TRENCH DRAINS Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 10329 334910-1 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 4910 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Storm drain cast -in -place concrete manholes and junction boxes B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. None. Modified 1.2. 2. Modified 1.6. 3. Added 1.9. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Division 3 — Concrete 4. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 5. Section 31 23 16 —Unclassified Excavation 6. Section 3150 00 — Excavation Support and Protection 7. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 8. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover and Grade Rings NW.10137\•/u100117Z1Zy0Moil] 7Oki A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard piping bid item. �zm1DioiMManhole a. T iT e 1) MeaswemefA for- this It 31q! be T and will be paid for- at the unit p e bid ro o e «ra.,rhole n;sv» irreeJ.1Q4 €ems s- a-pfieo ✓d 311m11 ink 3) Hmling 5) p;WO:s 7)M-anhole eenstmetieu CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334910-2 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 2 of 6 1) Measur-emepA-'ar thio tjrr,-a1V.! bapw oazh. ur.Qtwn Box eemplete, Dr- b. Payment 1) TL 1 rfe.�,� a a,�..1 m t 1 furnished .1 .1 ;tl. this it The work ccii-arszimr'rori�cci-'rr"r-c'�ccvraisircc=v�zcci=r will be paid the unit pr-ieebid per- e-aehStefm Junetion Box" .;'#A11o,1 f a�xi,ouo �S e. Thepr-iee bid d.mll irahlde- 1)Matien 2)Exeavatien Mmling 4) Dispesao-fexeess materials 5) Fu w'rirg, p�azo� ana , aetio f ealbed e t J FumAning, plaeemext, and sompaetion oft aekf;ll ?) unction R eenstmetion S) Junction Box fr-a-mes 9) Steps 10) Ring and Cove 1 1) Clean up 3. Storm Jurx-.6a a. T ro .mot 1) Measurement for- this Tite•cnrshall be perreach itmecion g%3.Cloir—e complete, oF b. Pay+nea 1) The work peFf fine ater-Ws fuFaished is a[coord. nee with this item will be paid kw At o lump aim prioo yd r ae "Storm T inetion Stmetffe e. The-pfieo ✓A d.mll inalude- 2) Excavation 3) Mmling 4) Dispoaa4of exeess materials 5) Fu ��'rirg, pJk-a--VN. t, and aompaetio f embedment E) Fumizhing, plroc-,-n. , and eomparstion of baek-44 4) hanctien Box ffames Steps 1 m nir,. andCove 11) CleanP 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334910-3 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 3 of 6 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Certificates 1. Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance that their product meets the physical testing requirements of this Specification for the materials referenced. B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal _products where required in compliance with the reauirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USEi D1 A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Concrete 1. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00. B. Reinforcing Steel 1. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334910-4 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 4 of 6 C. Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers 1. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and materials shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13. 2. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and solidly. D. Steps 1. Provide polypropylene supports and steps to the shape and dimensions shown on Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM D4101 and ASTM C478, Section 16, "Steps and Ladders." 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Perform all concrete work in accordance with Division 3. 2. Use of forms is required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face a. Outside form for concrete bases supporting brick walls may be omitted with approval from the Engineer. 3. Cast polypropylene supports and steps into concrete walls when concrete is placed or drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement. B. Excavation and Embedment 1. Conform to the requirements of Section 3123 16, Section 3150 00 and Section 33 05 10, where applicable. C. Manholes for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes. 1. Construct manholes for precast concrete pipe drains as soon as is practicable after drain lines into or through the manhole locations are completed. 2. Neatly cut all drain pipes at the inside face of the walls of the manhole and point up with mortar. D. Manholes for Monolithic Drain Pipes. 1. Construct bases for manholes on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with the drain pipe or after the pipe is constructed. E. Manholes for Box Drains 1. Cast bases for manholes for box drains as an integral part of the drainage system. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334910-5 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 5 of 6 2. Manholes may be constructed prior to backfilling or, if the Contractor so elects, manhole opening may be temporarily covered with timber to facilitate compaction of backfill for the pipe system as a whole with tractor equipment. a. Perform required excavation for manhole, construct manhole and backfill in accordance with Drawings. 3. For manholes that are over 5-feet deep, include all manhole steps required in the wall of the box drain. F. Junction Structures 1. All structures shall be installed as specified in Drawings. G. Inverts 1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the manhole as shown on the Drawings. 2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. H. Curing 1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Division 3. I. Finishing 1. Finish all concrete as required in Division 3. J. Form Removal 1. Remove concrete form as required in Division 3. K. Placement and Treatment of Castings, Frames, and Fittings. 1. Place castings, frames and fittings in positions indicated on Drawings or as directed by Engineer, true to line and correct elevation. 2. Frames or fittings set in new concrete or mortar. a. Place and position anchors or bolts before concrete mortar is placed. b. Do not disturb unit until mortar or concrete has set. 3. Frames or fittings placed upon previously constructed masonry. a. Bring bearing surface or masonry true to line and grade, and present an even bearing surface, so that entire face or back of unit will come in contact with masonry. b. Set unit in mortar beds or anchor to masonry, as indicated on Drawings or as directed and approved by the Engineer. 4. Ensure that units are set firm and secure. 5. Allow concrete or mortar to harden for a minimum 7 days. 6. Replace and fasten down grates or covers. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334910-6 CAST -IN -PLACE STORM DRAIN MANHOLES AND JUNCTION BOXES Page 6 of 6 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 SECTION 33 49 20 CURB AND DROP INLETS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 334920-1 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 1 of 6 A. Section Includes: 1. Construction of inlets, complete in place or to the stage detailed a. Including furnishing and installing frames, grates, rings and covers B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 4. None -Modified 1.2. Modified 1.6. Added 1.9. 4. Modified 2.2.A. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 3. Division 3 - Concrete 4. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition 5. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete 6. Section 03 74 00 03-59 00 - Modifications to Existing Concrete 7. Section 33 05 10 - Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 8. Section 33 05 13 - Frame, Cover and Grade Rings 9.Seetien-33 05 ' 1 Adjusting ManholesInlets, VaWe Boxes t#ef StFI6tmffOs to Oracle 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A-. Measurement and Pavment for this Section shall be at the Lumb Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective vard nipin2 bid item. B. Measurement and Paymen 1. Measuremen a. TReas -o..- e t f his Ttm. d.V.1 1,^ p3f: o.,e inlet eomple o lid p!aaz ��YY Tlae wefk peffefmed a -ad the materials fumished- in- aeeo-f-danee with this item shall be paid� t 1» uxit rvize bper- ch "IWV" il^Il&lea e"Remove and Replace inlet Top": 4���-k1lo b,�es 3. The pr-iee d dhall in a. FumiAhing and installing the s oeifie,l Inlet b. "zatien a. JIIJ:J.'atlAi3 CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334920-2 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 2 of 6 d. LCualirg o. Dicpasa4 of excess materials -f. Fu:nidhing,,.laeemeat �a �orlsfembedment b. Funxizhin� pL no, t an eompae k. Aluminum and-sastings .l F"Umes m. Grates D; n . n. o 0. ar. up 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole and Inlet Sections. b. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. c. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT). a. Departmental Materials Specification (DMS): 1) 7340, Qualification Procedure for Multi -Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Manholes and Inlets. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENT [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Inlet 2. Pipe connections at inlet walls 3. Stubs and stub plugs 4. Admixtures 5. Concrete Mix Design B. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS reauirements for all applicable metal products where rea_uired in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334920-3 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 3 of 6 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 4-.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED A. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) reauirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Snecifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the Citv's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00 unless otherwise specified on the plans. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Anv product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Materials 1. Concrete a. Furnish concrete that conforms to the provisions of Section 03 30 00. 2. Reinforcing Steel a. Furnish reinforcing steel that conforms to the requirements of Section 03 30 00. 3. Mortar a. Furnish mortar per Section 03 80 00. 4. Steps a. Provide polypropylene supports and steps conforming to the shape and dimensions shown on the Drawings that meet the requirements of ASTM D4101 and ASTM C478, Section 16, "Steps and Ladders." 5. Curing Materials a. Curing materials shall conform to the provisions of Division 3. 6. Frames, Grates, Rings and Covers a. Provide frames, grates, rings and covers that conform to dimensions and materials shown on Drawings and Section 33 05 13. b. Ensure that covers and grates fit properly into frames and seat uniformly and solidly. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334920-4 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 4 of 6 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION A. Removal 1. Remove all or portions of existing structures in accordance with Section 02 41 13. 2. Drill, dowel, and grout in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Interface with Other Work 1. All types of inlets may be built either in 1 stage or in 2 stages, described as Stage I and Stage 11. a. Build inlets designed to match the final roadway surface in stages. 2. Construct the Stage I portion of inlets as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. a. Furnish and install a temporary cover as approved by the Engineer. 3. Construct Stage II after the pavement structure is substantially complete unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. a. For Stage II, construct the remaining wall height and top of inlet and furnish and install any frames, grates, rings and covers, manhole steps, curb beams or collecting basins required. B. Cast -In -Place Inlets 1. Construct cast -in -place inlets in accordance with Section 03 30 00. a. Forms will be required for all concrete walls. b. Outside wall forms for cast -in -place concrete may be omitted with the approval of the Engineer if the surrounding material can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. 2. Cast polypropylene steps into the concrete walls when the concrete is placed, or drill and grout steps in place after concrete placement. C. Inlets for Precast Concrete Drain Pipes 1. Construct inlets for precast concrete drain pipes as soon as is practicable after storm drain lines into or through the inlet locations are completed. a. Neatly cut all pipes at the inside face of the walls of the inlet and point up with mortar. D. Inlets for Monolithic Drain Pipes 1. Construct bases for inlets on monolithic drain pipes either monolithically with the storm drain or after the storm drain is constructed. E. Inverts CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334920-5 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 5 of 6 1. Shape and route floor inverts passing out or through the inlet as shown on the Drawings. 2. Shape by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. F. Finishing Complete Inlets 1. Complete inlets in accordance with the Drawings. 2. Backfill to original ground elevation in accordance with Section 33 05 10. G. Finishing Stage I Construction 1. Complete Stage I construction by constructing the walls to the elevations shown on the Drawings and backfilling to required elevations in accordance with Section 33 05 10. H. Stage II Construction 1. Construct subgrade and base course or concrete pavement construction over Stage I inlet construction, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 2. Excavate to expose the top of Stage I construction and complete the inlet in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications, including backfill and cleaning of all debris from the bottom of the manhole or inlet. I. Form Removal 1. Forms used in the construction of "Inlets" which support vertical loads will remain in place at least 24 hours after the concrete is placed. 2. Other forms shall remain in place for a minimum time 24 hours after concrete is placed, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. J. Curing 1. Cure all exposed concrete as required in Section 03 30 00. K. Finishing 1. Conform to Section 03 30 00. 3.5 REPAIR [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 33 05 14. CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 334920-6 CURB AND DROP INLETS Page 6 of 6 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 3/11/2022 M Owen Revised measurement and payment section to include bid item for "Remove and Replace Inlet Top" CITY OF FORT WORTH VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 1 of 8 SECTION 33 5100 - NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Underground Pipe Markers: B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 2123 "Facility Natural -Gas Piping" for product and execution requirements for gas piping above grade and in buildings. 2. Section 3105 15 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork" for soils and aggregate for backfill in trenches. 3. Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill" for product and execution requirements for excavation and backfill required by this Section. 4. Section 33 05 26 "Utility Markers/Locators" for execution requirements for utility markers explained in this Section. 5. Section 33 05 30 "Location of Existing Utilities" for execution requirements for the location of existing utilities specified by this Section. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement and Payment for this Section shall be at the Lump Sum bid price in the Proposal Form under the respective yard piping bid item. 1.4 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Conduct conference at Project site including the Contractor, City Inspector, and the Project Manager. 1. Inspect and discuss existing conditions of proposed yard piping layout. 2. Review and finalize Natural Gas Distribution installation schedule and verify availability of appropriate personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review and finalize protection requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 2 of 8 fff.�to) 3UI10IC' IV A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. D. Qualifications Statement 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. E. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storing and installing pipe and fittings. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record actual locations of pipe alignment, valves, and fittings in project record documents. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. C. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 54/ ANSI Z223.1, local Utility requirements, and City of Fort Worth Public Works standards. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC Section IX and applicable state regulations. C. Comply with ASME B31.8. D. Perform Work according to applicable code 2021 International Fuel Gas Code and local gas company requirements. E. Maintain copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. F. American Iron and Steel (AIS) Requirements 1. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 1.9 A. 1.10 A. NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 3 of 8 J►1[ A A. The pipe material manufacturer shall provide an unconditional extended warranty for the pipe covering the cost of materials for repair or replacement plus installation manpower should the pipe fail within the warranty period. The manufacturer's extended warranty shall be for 10 years after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the pipe furnished is suitable for the purpose intended and free from defects of material and workmanship for the duration of the extended warranty. In the event the pipe fails to perform as specified, the pipe manufacturer shall promptly replace defective pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. QUALIFICATIONS Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements". 1. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. B. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00 "Substitution Procedures". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 OVA 2.3 2.4 2.5 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 4 of 8 IQIWWW"le10aIIWII►lcl A. Polyethylene Piping: 1. Pipe: Comply with ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5. 2. All polyethylene pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F714. 3. Fittings: Comply with ASTM D2513. 4. Joints: Butt, heat Fusion welded. Per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings: Made from the same resin and manufacturer. VALVES A. Manufacturers 1. Polyvalve Poly -Gas Valves, an Andronaco Industries Company 2. Or approved equal. B. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: 1. Comply with ASTM D-2513 and ANSUASME B 16.40 2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig WOG. 3. Body: Polyethylene 4. Ball: Polypropylene 5. Seat Retainer: Polypropylene 6. End Connections: Butt fusion 7. Provide stem extension to grade 8. Furnish cast-iron curb box, cover, and key per Section 331220. 9. Furnish valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. MATERIALS A. Bedding and Cover: 1. Bedding: Fill Type as specified in Section 33 05 10 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". 2. Cover: Fill Type as specified in Section 33 05 10 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". 3. Soil Backfill from Above Pipe to Finish Grade: Soil Type as specified in Section 33 05 10 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". B. Subsoil: No rocks more than 6 inches in diameter, frozen earth, or foreign matter. ACCESSORIES A. Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 5 of 8 a. As specified in Section 33 05 26 "Utility Markers/Locators". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 40 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings. B. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, and remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside of piping before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections with butt, heat fusion joints. D. Correct over -excavation with the specified bedding material as specified for the specific pipe to be installed. E. Remove large stones and other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. INSTALLATION A. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit. B. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D2774. C. Excavation and Bedding: 1. Excavate pipe trench as specified in Section 33 05 10 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". 2. Place bedding material at trench bottom. 3. Level fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth and compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place, and compact to 95 percent maximum density. 5. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density. D. Piping: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 3.4 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 6 of 8 1. Group piping with other Site piping work whenever practical. 2. Route piping in straight line. 3. Install piping to conserve space and to not interfere with use of Site space. 4. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints, as approved by Architect/Engineer. 5. Install valves and other fittings as indicated on Drawings. 6. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 36 inches of cover in non -traveled areas, and 48 inchesof cover in driveways and parking areas. 7. Lay pipe on bedding. 8. Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat -shrink over pipe. 9. Backfilling and Compaction: a. As specified in Section 330510 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". b. Do not displace or damage pipe while compacting. 10. Pipe Markers: a. Install Detectable warning tape continuous over top of pipe buried 3 feet or as close to the grade as is practical for optimum protection and detectability. b. Coordinate with trench Work as specified in Section 330510 "Soils and Aggregates for Earthwork". 11. Valve Boxes: a. Center and plumb valve boxes over valves. b. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. C. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve. d. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink. 12. Installation Standards: Install Work according to NFPA 54 standards. E. Service Connections: 1. Installation Standards: Install Work according to NFPA 54 standards. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. If tests indicate that Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest. 2. Pressure Test: a. Comply with NFPA 54. 3. Compaction Testing: a. Comply with ASTM D698. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 7 of 8 �1 � I �Z�]�.Y�L�J I Y [�] ► idCi.� [IZI CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 33 51 00 NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 1 of 17 SECTION 40 05 06 - COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe sleeves/penetrations. 2. Wall castings. 3. Sealing materials. 4. Miscellaneous materials. 5. Flanged joints. 6. Dismantling joints. 7. Sleeve -type couplings. 8. HDPE Flex Coupling 9. Flexible connections. 10. Flange coupling adapters. 11. Tapping Sleeve 12. Miscellaneous Adaptors 13. Dielectric Connectors 14. Victaulic Coupling B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications": Miscellaneous metalwork and fasteners as required by this Section. 2. Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping": Penetrations through fire -rated materials 3. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 4. Section 33 05 19 "Pressure Piping Tied Joint Restraint System": Pipe restraints. 5. Section 33 13 00 "Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution": Disinfection of potable water piping. 6. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping: Hangers, anchors, sleeves, and sealing of piping to adjacent structures. 7. Section 40 05 19 "Ductile Iron Process Pipe": Ductile -iron piping materials and appurtenances 8. Section 40 05 23 "Stainless Steel Process Pipe and Tubing": Stainless steel piping materials and appurtenances 9. Section 40 05 24 "Steel Process Pipe": Steel piping materials and appurtenances 10. Section 40 05 31 "Thermoplastic Process Pipe": Plastic piping materials and appurtenances CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 2 of 18 11. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Common product requirements for valves for placement by this Section 12. Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation": Piping insulation and heat. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping (Through -Penetration Protection System): The sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire -rated construction. B. FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Company; FM Global is the communicative name of the company. C. WH: Warnock Hersey; indicates compliance to relevant building codes, association criteria, and product safety and performance standards. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with installation of piping, valves and equipment connections specified in other Sections and indicated on Drawings. 1.5 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination": Requirements for preinstallation meeting. 1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer catalog information for each specified product, including installation instructions. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance, and limitation criteria. 3. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to- face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 4. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature, pressure rating, and expansion compensation. A S. Submit anti -seize product technical data sheet. B. Shop Drawings: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 3 of 18 1. Identification: a. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for pipe identification. b. Comply with ASME A13.1. 2. Indicate restrained joint details and materials. 3. Submit layout drawings showing piece numbers and location, indicating restrained joint locations. 4. Indicate layout of piping systems, including flexible connectors, expansion joints and compensators, loops, offsets, and swing joints. C. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings for maintenance of fire -resistance rating of adjacent assembly. D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. l� NlTo] 7uIr0IGHE''lMots] 0VIsoIF.111V A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Welder Certificates: Certify welders and welding procedures employed on Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. C. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. D. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections. E. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 3. Welders: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping appurtenances. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to pipe routing or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF Standards 61 and 372. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 4 of 18 B. Perform Work according to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping systems and according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M for welding materials and procedures. C. Perform Work according to ASME B31.3 for installation of piping systems. D. Through -Penetration Firestopping of Fire -Rated Assemblies: 1. Comply with ASTM E814. 2. Minimum Positive Pressure Differential: 0.1-inch wg to achieve fire F-ratings and temperature T-ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than one hour. 3. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than one hour. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. C. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months for employed weld types. D. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings and maintain in place until installation. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.13 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 5 of 18 1.14 WARRANTY A. Furnish two year manufacturer's warranty for couplings, adapters, specials and accessories. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Specific piping materials and appurtenances are specified in the respective Piping or System Sections. The use of a manufacturer's name and/or model number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Size equipment as indicated on the Drawings or as noted, and as far as possible, provide equipment of the same type from a single manufacturer. C. Provide equipment with the name of the maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows (if applicable), working pressure for which they are designed, and standard referenced specifications with cast, raised letters or indelibly marked upon some appropriate part of the body. D. Unless otherwise noted, provide minimum working pressure of 150 psi or the same working pressure as the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher and suitable for the pressures noted where they are installed. E. All gaskets and joints must be suitable for raw sewage sludge and scum. A F. Anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be of a molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. 2.2 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Performance and Design Criteria: 1. Firestopping Materials: As specified in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping". 2. Firestop interruptions to fire -rated assemblies, materials, and components. 3. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction, indicating approval of materials used. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 6 of 18 2.3 PIPE SLEEVES A. Unless otherwise indicated and detailed on the Drawings or specified in structural specifications, provide pipe sleeves as specified in this Section. B. All construction in the Primary Clarifier area: 1 1. Material. Schedule 40 Stainless Steel conforming to ASTMA312. 2. 2-inch minimum circumference water stop welded to exterior sleeve at midpoint 3. Ends cut and ground to be: a. Flush with ground. b. Flush with ceiling. C. 2 inches above finished floors. d. Sealed with caulking. e. Sized as required. C. New concrete walls with pipes up to 20 inches in diameter: 1. Material: non-metallic High -Density Polyethylene Sleeves (HDPE). 2. Integral hollow molded water stops. a. 4 inches larger than the outside diameter of the sleeve. 3. End caps for forming and reinforcing ribs. 4. Domestically manufactured by: a. Century -Line as manufactured by 1) Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Houston, TX, 2) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). D. New concrete with pipes 20 to 60 inches in diameter: 1. Material: molded HDPE modular interlocking discs to make the width of the wall a. Corrugated. b. Cell -Cast as manufactured by 1) Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Houston, TX, 2) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 7 of 18 E. External wall penetrations: 1. 36-inch diameter and less may be made by means of a ductile iron sleeve capable of being bolted directly to the formwork: 2. Seal of the annular space between the carrier pipe and the sleeve made by means of a confined rubber gasket and be capable of withstanding 350 psi.: 3. Sleeve to have an integrally cast waterstop of 1/2-in minimum thickness, 2-1/2-in minimum height. 4. Manufacturers: a. Omni -Sleeve, b. Malden, MA C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.4 WALL CASTINGS A. Unless otherwise indicated and detailed on the Drawings or specified in structural specifications, provide wall castings as specified in this Section. B. Ductile iron conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.5I/C151, thickness Class 53. C. Diameter as required. D. Flanges and/or mechanical joint bells drilled and tapped for studs where flush with the wall. E. Castings provided with a 2-in minimum circumferential flange/waterstop integrally cast with or welded to the casting. F. Located as follows: 1. For castings set flush with walls: located at the center of the overall length of the casting, 2. For castings which extend through wall: located within the middle third of the wall. 2.5 SEALING MATERIALS A. Mechanical seals: 1. Made of rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the wall opening or sleeve. 2. Link pressure plates molded of glass reinforced nylon: a. Colored throughout elastomer, b. Permanent identification of the size and manufacturer's name molded into the pressure plate and sealing element. 3. Hardware: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 8 of 18 a. Mild steel with a 60,000-psi minimum tensile strength. b. 2-part Zinc Dichromate coating per ASTM B-633. C. Organic Coating, tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 to pass a 1,500-hour salt spray test. d. Use Type 316 Stainless Steel hardware: 1) In entire Primary Clarifier area including process facilities, boxes and vaults.. 2) For submerged service. 3) For penetrations in tanks containing sludge or wastewater. 4. Completed Sealing System: a. Duty pressure rated for 20 psig differential pressure. b. EPDM for all services except fire rated assemblies 1) Fire rated seals use silicone link material. C. Manufacturers: 1) PSI-Thunderline/ Link -Seal as manufactured by Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc., Houston, TX, or pre -approved equal. 2) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 3) Fernco Inc. 4) Flexicraft Industries. 5) GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 6) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Sealant: 1. A two-part foamed silicone elastomer manufactured by: a. Dow Corning Co., Product No. 3-6548 silicone R.T.V. b. 3M brand fire barrier products caulk C.P. 25 and 3M brand moldable putty MP+; C. Flame -Safe fire stop systems FS-900 by Rectorseal. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Sealant Bead Configuration, depth and width in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bonding compound: 1. Sikadur Hi -Mod epoxy by Sika Corp. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 9 of 18 2. Euco 452 by Euclid Chemical Corp.; Master Builders Company. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Non -shrink grout: 1. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders Co. 2. Euco NS by Euclid Chemical Co. 3. Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.7 FLANGED JOINTS A. Unless otherwise specified in individual piping sections, provide flanged joints as specified in this Section. B. Description: 1. Flamed Hardware: a. Made with bolts or bolt studs with a nut on each end. b. Stud bolts shall be used for all bolting sizes 1-314 inches and larger. C. Bolts, stud bolts, and nuts shall be Tvve 316 Stainless Steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A 1931194 Grade B8/B8M. d. Bolts and stud bolts shall conform to the dimensional requirements of ASME B18.2.1 with rolled threads conforming to ASME BLI, Coarse Series, Class 2 rit. Bolts and stud bolts and nuts shall be of American Standard heavv unfinished hexagonal tvve. e. Bolts shall be provided with a 1/4-inch proiection bevond the nut when the ioint with gasket is assembled. 2. Flange gaskets shall be ring type gaskets for pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter, and full -face gaskets for pipe sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller. a. Gasket dimensions shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.21, unless specified otherwise. b. Gaskets shall be as thin as the finish and accuracv of the flange surface will permit. C. For general service, rubber gaskets shall be 118 inch thick, Buna-N/NBR or EPDM suitable for sewage service, and meet the requirements ofAWWA C207. Rated for 150 psi and 200 deerees F. d. Gasket material shall be specifically recommended for the service by the gasket manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. 2.8 DISMANTLING JOINTS A. Restrained dismantling joints for between two flanges. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 2.9 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 10 of 18 1. Manufacturers: a. Style DJ400 by Romac. b. Smith -Blair 971. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00) 2. Description: a. Ductile iron ASTM A536. b. Tie -rods: Hiah strength Tvpe 316 stainless steel. C. Gaskets: Buna-N or as compatible with the fluid service, comply with ASTM D2000. d. Bolts and nuts shall be Tvpe 316 stainless steel. SLEEVE -TYPE COUPLINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Oil & Gas (Dresser). 2. Xylem (Smith -Blair). 3. Baker Hughes Company. 4. Fernco Inc. 5. US Pipe Fabrication. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Description: 1. Comply with AWWA C213, C219. 2. Middle Ring: Steel or Ductile iron. 3. Followers: Ductile iron. 4. Gaskets: a. Material: Buna-N or as Compatible with service conditions. b. Comply with ASTM D2000. 5. Bolts and nuts shall be Tvpe 316 stainless steel. 6. Piping Couplings: Restrained unless otherwise noted. 7. Outside Diameter and Out -of -Round Tolerances: Within limits specified by coupling manufacturer. 8. Where indicated on the Drawings or as required for restraint, anchor sleeve -coupled joints with harness bolts. Weld harness lugs to steel pipe. a. Joint Harness Bolts: Sufficient length, with harness lugs placed so that coupling can be slipped at least in one direction to clear joint. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 11 of 18 b. Provide harnesses of sufficient number and strength to withstand test pressure as recommended in AWWA M-11; provide with a minimum of two 5/8-inch diameter bolts. 9. In addition to those locations indicated on the Drawings, provide sleeve couplings where it connects with a structure or buried directly under a structure at the structure's expansion joints. Provide special treatment where pipe is encased in concrete, as recommended by coupling manufacturer. C. Finishes: Factory fusion bonded epoxy coated. 2.10 HDPE FLEX COUPLINGS A. Manufacturer: 1. Romac — Armor lock. 2. Smith -Blair. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Description: 1. Shell: Type 316L Stainless Steel. 2. Sidebars: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 3. Bolt: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 4. Armor: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 5. Restraint Ring: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 6. Support Ring: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 7. Gasket: EPDM, temperature rating: minus 4 degrees F to 212 degrees F. 8. Welds: GMAW and GTAW welds. 316L Stainless Steel filler wire used as appropriate. All welds are fully passivated for enhanced corrosion resistance. 2.11 HDPE PIPE STIFFENERS A. Manufacturer: 1. Romac. 2. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Application: To provide circumferential inside support of HDPE pipe ends. C. Description 1. Body and Wedge: ASTM 240 type 304 Stainless Steel. 2. Pressure: Up to 150 psi. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 12 of 18 2.12 FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS (FCA) A. Restrained flanged coupling adaptors for plain end pipe at fittings, valves and equipment: 1. Manufacturers: a. FC400 (steel) or RFCA (DI) by Romac Industries. b. Series 2100 by EBAA. C. Model 911 by Smith -Blair. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Description: a. Gland and Body: Ductile iron ASTM A536. b. Restraining Lug and Bolts: Ductile iron ASTM A536. C. Gaskets: Buna-N or as compatible with the fluid service, comply with ASTM D2000. 1 d. Bolts and nuts shall be Tvpe 316 stainless steel.. B. Flanged adaptor connections for grooved or shouldered end pipe compatible with split couplings at fittings, valves and equipment: 1. Manufacturers: a. VIC-Flange Style 341 or 342 as by the Victaulic Company of America. b. Equal by Gustin-Bacon. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.13 TRANSITION COUPLINGS A. Restrained Coupling — To join and restrain HDPE pipe and DI pipe. 1. Manufacturer: a. Romac- Alpha b. Smith Blair — Max Grip C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00) 2. Pipe Material: HDPE DR17 to DIP 3. Description: a. Center Ring: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 13 of 18 1) Cast Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. 2) Finish: Romacoat fusion bonded epoxy certified and listed to ANSI NSF 61 & 372. b. End Ring and Bolt Guide: 1) Cast Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. 2) Finish: Romabond Polyester. C. Segmented Gripper: 1) Cast Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. 2) Machine sharpened, heat treated, and Xylan 1424 coated. d. Gaskets shall be NBR compounded water and sewer service to ASTM D2000. e. Draw hooks, Bolts and Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel with heavy nuts E-coat epoxy. f. Ramp runners: Nylon 66 black, 14 percent Glass filled. g. Maximum deflection per side: 4 degrees. B. Transition Connection: Reinforced Concrete to FRP. 1. Manufacturer: a. Smith Blair, Model 413. b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Description: a. Comply with AWWA C219 Standards. b. Sleeve: ASTM A53, C. Follower Flange: Steel C 1020. d. Gasket: Nitrile (Buna N). e. Finish: Fusion Bond Epoxy Finish. 1 f. Bolts shall be Tvpe 316 stainless steel with fluoropolvmer coated nuts to prevent galling. C. HDPE TO Schedule 40 SST Transition Couplings: 1. Manufacturer: a. Fernco Inc.(Model 1056-66A). b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Description: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 14 of 18 a. Comply with ASTM D 5926, ASTM C 1173, and CSA B602. b. Material: Elastomeric PVC. C. Clamp and Shear rings: Type SS316. 2.14 TAPPING SLEEVE A. Carbon Steel Tapping Sleeve 1. Manufacturer: a. JCM Industries (Model: #412) Dismant. b. Romac Industries (Model: FTS420). C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Description: a. Body: Carbon Steel ASTM A36, A516 Gr70 or equal. b. Flange: Per ANSI/AWWA Standard C207 Class D, ANSI 1501b. Drilling recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60. C. Gasket Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR, Buna-N) per ASTM D2000. d. Bolts and Nuts: Stainless Steel Type 316. e. Finishes: Fusion applied epoxy coating, minimum 12 mils thickness per ANSI/AWWA standard C213 fusion bonded epoxy coatings and linings for steel water pipe and fittings. f. Max Sleeve Width: 12 inches. B. Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeve 1. Manufacturer: a. Romac Industries (Model: SST and SSTIII). b. Powerseal. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Description: a. Body: ASTM A240 Type 304 SS. b. Flange: Type 304 stainless steel per AWWA C228. ANSI Class 125 and 150 drillings and recessed for tapping valve. C. Flange Gasket: SBR in accordance with ASTM D2000. d. Bolts and Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel. e. Shell: Heavy gauge stainless steel Type 304. f. Fully passivated tapping sleeve for enhanced corrosion resistance. Max Sleeve Width: 16 inches. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 15 of 18 2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ADAPTORS A. Provide special adaptors between different types of pipe and/or fittings for proper connection. 1. Some of these may be indicated on the drawings or specified with individual types of pipe or equipment. 2. However, it is contractor's responsibility to ensure proper connection between various types of pipe, to structure and between pipe and valves, gates, fittings and other appurtenances. 3. Provide all adapters as required whether specifically noted or not. B. Provide adaptors suitable for direct bury, with proper dielectric insulation and as a minimum, if metallic (not stainless steel or galvanized), with two coats of Caol Tar Epoxy. 2.16 DIELECTRIC CONNECTORS A. Provide dielectric pipe fittings/insulators and unions to prevent galvanic action wherever valves or piping of dissimilar metals connect. This shall be the case for connecting piping of any metal to other metals. B. Manufacturers 1. Dielectric unions or flanges: a. Epco Inc., Cleveland, OH b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2. Flange insulating kits: a. PSI b. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). C. Description: 1. Connections 2-inch and smaller: Dielectric unions; union nuts to meet ASTM A575 requirements. a. Steel or ductile iron connection end: Steel body, accurately machined taper tapped pipe threads in accordance with ASME B2.1. b. Copper connection end: copper solder joint that meets requirements of ASTM B88. C. Rated for at least 250 psi WOG at 210 degrees F. 2. Connections 2-1/2-inch and larger: Dielectric flanges: a. Cast iron flanges: meet ASTM A126. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 16 of 18 b. Copper solder end: meet ASTM B62 and pipe thread to meet ASME B2.1. C. Dielectric flange unions: rated for at least 175 psi at 210 degrees F. D. Insulated sleeve couplings and flange adaptors to be similar to those units as specified elsewhere. 2.17 VICTAULIC COUPLING A. Applications: 1. For DI Pipe — Style 31 by Victaulic or equal. a. Advanced grooved (AGS) or shouldered ring suitable for Class 53 DI Pipe. b. Gaskets: Flush seal type suitable for abrasive fluids and primary sewage sludge/scum process applications. C. Material: Buna N Grade S d. Provide rigid or flexible type couplings as indicated on the drawings. 2. For HDPE Pipe — Style 905 or 907 by Victaulic or equal a. Gaskets: Flush seal type suitable for abrasive fluids and primary sewage sludge/scum process applications. b. Material: Buna N Grade S C. Provide rigid or flexible type couplings as indicated on the drawings. d. Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy. 3. For Carbon Steel and stainless steel — Style 77 by Victaulic or equal a. Advanced grooved (AGS) or shouldered ring suitable for Carbon steel and stainless -steel pipe. b. Gaskets: Flush seal type suitable for abrasive fluids and primary sewage sludge/scum process applications. C. Material: Buna N Grade S d. Coating: Liquid epoxy conforming with AWWA C210. 4. For Stainless steel — Style 77S a. Advanced grooved (AGS) or shouldered ring suitable for stainless steel pipe. b. Gaskets: Flush seal type suitable for abrasive fluids and primary sewage sludge/scum process applications. C. Material: Buna N Grade S 2.18 FINISHES A. Prepare piping appurtenances for field finishes as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 17 of 18 2.19 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assemblies. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flanges mate properly. C. Verify that openings are ready to receive sleeves. D. Verify that pipe plain ends to receive sleeve -type couplings are smooth and round for 12 inches from pipe ends. E. Verify that pipe outside diameter conforms to sleeve manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean end connections before installation. B. Close pipe and equipment openings with caps or plugs during installation. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to remove foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coating: Finish piping appurtenances as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for service conditions. B. Pipe Penetrations: 1. Flashing: a. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weatherproofed or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 06 COUPLINGS, ADAPTERS, AND SPECIALS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 18 of 18 b. Flash floor drains with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides, with minimum 36-by-36-inch sheet size. C. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. 2. Sleeves: a. Exterior Watertight Entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. b. Set sleeves in position in forms and provide reinforcement around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction and provide for continuous insulation wrapping. d. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level and calk sleeves. e. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent Work with insulation and calk. f. Provide close -fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. C. Applv Anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoraze. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. B. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating. 3.5 CLEANING A. Keep equipment interior clean as installation progresses. END OF SECTION 40 05 06 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 1 of 16 SECTION 40 05 07 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers and supports for piping. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 15 00 "Concrete Accessories" for placement of inserts or sleeves in concrete forms required by this Section. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for placement of concrete housekeeping pads required by this Section. 3. Section 09 96 76 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for product and execution requirements for painting required by this Section. 4. Section 40 05 06 "Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping". 5. Section 40 05 19 "Ductile Iron Process Pipe". 6. Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation" for process piping insulation requirements. 7. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Common product requirements for valves for placement by this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Ferrous Metal: Iron, steel, stainless steel, and alloys with iron as principal component. B. Wetted or submerged: Submerged, less than 1-foot above liquid surface, below top of channel or tank wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other damp locations. C. "Pipe" or "Piping": Piping, piping system(s), hose, tube, fittings, joints, valves, and similar appurtenances. D. Supports: Wherever the word "supports" or "pipe supports" are used, pipe supports, hangers, structural connections, concrete inserts (if allowed), anchors, guides, bolts, expansion units, restraints, and all restraint, hanging, supporting, allowing controlled expansion, or other means of attaching piping along with the necessary appurtenances. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 2 of 16 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with piping and equipment connections specified in other Sections and indicated on Drawings. 1.5 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data including load capacity. B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled piping layouts for each system. Indicate flow stream, pipe size(s) material(s), schedule(s), lining(s), critical dimensions between pipes, equipment and building features. Indicate by schedule pipe hanger/support type and locations. Provide detail of each type of hangers, supports, anchors, and guides. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. D. Submit anti -seize product technical data sheet. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Welders' Certificate: Submit welders' certification of compliance with AWS D1.1, verifying qualification within previous 12 months. C. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, fabricator, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. D. Field Quality Control reports. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All supports and hangers shall be crated, delivered and uncrated so as to protect against any damage. B. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration shall occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 3 of 16 C. Finished metal surfaces not galvanized, that are not of stainless -steel construction, or that are not coated, shall be grease coated, to prevent rust and corrosion. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work according to AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure. 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum Five years' documented experience. B. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating products specified in this Section with minimum Five years' documented experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum Five years' documented experience. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on -Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Protect products from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage by storing in original packaging. 1.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty for pipe hangers and supports and accessories. Warranty to begin from date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 4 of 16 A. Support pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. Comply with manufacturer's requirements regarding piping loads being or not being transmitted to their equipment. Submit certification stating that such requirements have been met. B. Support and secure all pipe and tubing in the intended position and alignment to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves, fittings, and other pipe appurtenances. Supports shall adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe, and personnel contact. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from excessive dislocation shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" and shall be furnished and installed under this Section. C. Contractor may propose minor adjustments to the piping arrangements in order to simplify the supports, or in order to resolve minor conflicts in the work. Such an adjustment might involve minor change to a pipe centerline elevation so that a single trapeze support may be used. D. Where flexible sleeve, split ring, vibration, or other couplings are required at equipment, tanks, etc., the end opposite to the piece of equipment, tank, etc., shall be rigidly supported to prevent transfer of force systems to the equipment. Do not install fixed or restraining supports between a flexible coupling and the piece of equipment. E. Pipe Supports: 1. Shall not induce point loadings but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. 2. Provide supports at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or as specified herein. 3. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. 4. Provide pipe supports to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of flexible split ring type couplings and sleeve type couplings, and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes. 5. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe to be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. F. Insofar as is possible, floor supports shall be given preference. Where specifically indicated, concrete supports, as shown on the Drawings, may be used. Base elbow and base tees shall be supported on concrete pedestals. G. Restraints, flexible connections, expansion items, and related items as included in other specifications (especially Section 40 05 06 SFL - Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping and other individual pipe sections) and shown on the Drawings. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS/DESIGN CRITERIA A. All supports and appurtenances shall be standard products from approved manufacturers wherever possible and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific manufacturer is CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 5 of 16 for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product and shall not be considered as proprietary. Note that different materials required, as specified in Part 2 MATERIALS, may require different figures or model numbers than those shown. 1. The minimum working factor of safety for all items, with the exception of springs, shall be five times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming 10 feet of water -filled pipe being supported and normal test pressures. 2. Design for all loads using a safety factor of 5. B. All items shall be designed with strength and stiffness to support, restrain, and allow expansion of the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations, and all probable externally applied forces. C. Support spacing shall be per ASME B31.3. D. Complete design details of the pipe system components shall be submitted for review and approval as specified in Part 1. No support shall be installed without approved support system Drawings. E. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting structures in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is designed. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Metallic and Non -Metallic Pipe Support: 1. As specified in Sheet G-17 Area Classification and Material Schedule. 2. Pipe support material not found to be classified shall be 304 stainless -steel. 2.4 INSULATION A. See ACCESSORIES Article and Drawings. B. Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation" for process piping insulation requirements. 2.5 SUPPORT AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS A. Steel or Ductile Iron Piping: 1. Cast iron and ductile iron, steel, and stainless -steel piping shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10 feet with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 2. Support spacing for ductile iron, steel, and stainless -steel piping 2-inch and smaller diameter shall not exceed 5 feet. B. Copper Piping: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 6 of 16 1. Supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall have a 1/16 inch plastic coating. 2. Support spacing for copper piping and tubing 2 inch and smaller diameter shall not exceed 5 feet and greater than 2 inch diameter shall not exceed 8 feet. 3. Where pipe supports come in contact with copper piping, provide protection from galvanic corrosion by wrapping pipe with 1/16 inch thick neoprene sheet material and galvanized protection shield; isolators similar to Cooper B-Line B3195CT; or copper - plated or PVC -coated hangers and supports. C. Non -Metallic Piping: All uninsulated non-metallic piping such as PVC, CPVC, HDPE, PVDF, etc., shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection shall be provided by non-metallic protection shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. a. Where pipes are bottom supported 180 degrees, arc shields shall be furnished. Where 360-degree arc support is required, such as U-bolts, protection shields shall be provided for the entire pipe circumference. All U-bolts or clamps for non- metallic pipes shall be plastic coated. b. Protection shields shall have an 18-gauge minimum thickness, not be less than 12 inches in length and be securely fastened to pipe with Type 304 stainless steel straps not less than 1/2 inch wide. 2. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the pipe manufacturer except that support -spacing shall be manufacturers recommendation minus 2-ft. down to 5 ft spacing recommendation, then spacing shall be 3 feet. 3. Supports for horizontal multiple PVC plastic piping: a. Shall be continuous wherever possible. b. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic PVC pipe runs, where possible, shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as: 1) Husky Ladder Flange Out by MPHusky. 2) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). C. Rung spacing shall be 12 inches. Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs and 12 inches for double runs. d. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners similar to: 1) Globe, Series 600; Unistrut Pipe/Conduit Clamps and Hangers. 2) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers, and CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 7 of 16 supports in contact with plastic PVC pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. D. Framing Support System: 1. See Part 2 MATERIALS for materials of construction. 2. Beams: Size such that beam stress does not exceed 25,000 psi and maximum deflection does not exceed 1/240 of span. 3. Column Members: Size in accordance with manufacturer's recommended method. 4. Support Loads: Calculate using weight of pipes filled with water. 5. Maximum Spans: a. Steel and ductile iron pipe 3 inch diameter and larger: 10 feet centers, unless otherwise shown. b. Other pipelines and special situations: Same as noted in previous paragraphs. Supplementary hangers and supports may be required. E. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not more than 12 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests and at all points necessary to ensure rigid construction. All vertical pipes passing through pipe sleeves shall be secured using a pipe collar. 2.6 ANCHOR BOLTS/SYSTEMS A. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear, and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. DO NOTE USE ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS ON ANY PIPE SUPPORT HUNG FROM A ROOF OR CEILING, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. All post -installed anchors in concrete shall have current published ICC-ES Evaluation Report indicating the anchor is approved for installation in cracked concrete. C. The latest edition of the following specification and recommended practices shall become part of this specification as if written herein. Wherever requirements conflict, the more stringent shall govern. 1. ACI 318, Appendix D. 2. ACI 355.2, Mechanical Anchors "Qualification of Post -Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete" 3. Anchor manufacturer's published installation requirements. D. Expansion Anchors: 1. The length of expansion bolts shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a minimum of 1 inch behind the steel reinforcement. 2. Manufacturers: a. Power -Stud+ SD4 and Power -Stud+ SD6 by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 8 of 16 b. Kwik Bolt as manufactured by Hilti USA, Tulsa, Oklahoma. C. Wej-it by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Broomfield, Colorado. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). E. Unless otherwise noted: use Type 316 stainless steel anchoring parts/bolts and hardware for both submerged and non -submerged supports. A I. Anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be of a molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. F. Size of anchor bolts as designed by manufacturer, 1/2 inch minimum diameter, or as shown on the Drawings. G. Anchors to concrete in chemical areas shall be epoxy secured vinyl ester FRP all thread, insertion depth and size as required by the manufacturer for the design loads. Nuts, bolts and hardware shall all be vinyl ester FRP construction. 2.7 HANGER RODS A. The strength of the rod shall be based on its root diameter. 1. Hanger rods shall be attached to concrete structures using single or continuous concrete inserts by the named support manufacturers above. Where use of steel is allowed, inserts shall be malleable iron or steel with galvanized finish. 2. Beam -clamps, C-clamps, or welded -beam attachments shall be used for attaching hanger rods to structural steel members. B. Minimum rod size for metallic rod hangers: (* For pipe diameters less than 14 inch, if using pipe roller, use 2 hanger rods with minimum diameter noted below for pipe's diameter). Nominal Pipe / Tube Diameter 1 Less than 2-1/2 inch 2 3 to 8 inches 3 10 to 14 inches 4 16 to 20 inches 5 24 inches 6 30 inches 2.8 SINGLE PIPE HANGERS Minimum Hanger Rod Diameter 1/4 inch* 1/2 inch 3/4 inch* 2 at 1 inch 2 at 1-1/4 inch 2 at 1-1/2 inch A. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe hangers and supports shall be standard catalogued components, conforming to the requirements of MSS-41, 58, or 69 and shall be of the following type: 1. Anvil International. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 9 of 16 2. Equal models by: Carpenter & Patterson, Inc., Woburn, MA. 3. Cooper B-Line. 4. Gulf State Manufacturing. 5. Unistrut Northeast, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by hanger rods from structural steel members, concrete ceilings, bottom of trapeze hangers, and wall -mounted steel angle brackets. C. Where pipes are near walls, beams, columns, etc., and located an excessive distance from ceilings or underside of beams, welded steel wall brackets similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure Nos. 68, 79, 84, or 139 shall be used for hanging pipe. Where single pipes rest on top of bracket pipe supports, attachments shall meet requirements as specified under multiple pipe hangers. 2.9 MULTIPLE PIPE HANGERS A. Suspended multiple pipes, running parallel in the same horizontal plane that are adjacent to each other, shall be suspended by trapeze type hangers or wall brackets. Where use of steel is allowed, trapeze hangers shall consist of galvanized structural steel channel supported from galvanized threaded rod or attached to concrete walls, columns, or structural steel support members. See previous paragraphs about multiple PVC pipe supports. B. Except as otherwise specified herein, pipe anchors used for attaching pipe to trapeze or multiple pipe wall brackets shall be anchor or pipe chairs similar to: 1. Anvil Fig. 175. 2. Cooper B-Line B3147A or B3147B. 3. Chair U bolts shall be tightened to allow freedom of movement for normal expansion and contraction except where pipe must be anchored to control direction of movement or act as a thrust anchor. 2.10 SINGLE PIPE SUPPORTS FROM BELOW A. Single pipes located in a horizontal plane close to the floor shall be Pedestal type: Schedule 40 pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 37 with U-Bolt. a. Anvil, Figure 259. b. Cooper B-Line, Figure B3090. 2. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp. a. Anvil, Figure 264. b. Cooper B-Line, Figure B3093. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 10 of 16 B. Pipes less than 3 inch in diameter: 1. Hold in position by supports fabricated from steel C channel, welded post base similar to Unistrut, Figure P2072A, where use of steel is allowed; and pipe clamps similar to Unistrut, Figures P 1109 through 26. 2. Where required to assure adequate support, fabricate supports using two vertical members and post bases connected by horizontal member of sufficient load capacity to support pipe. 3. Fasten supports to nearby walls or other structural member to provide horizontal rigidity. 4. More than one pipe may be supported from a common fabricated support. C. Pipes 3 inch in diameter and larger: 1. Support by adjustable stanchions. 2. Provide at least 4-inch adjustment. 3. Flange mount to floor. D. Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18-inch or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. E. Pipe roller type supports shall be used where required to accommodate thermal movement in conjunction with axial supports. 2.11 WALL SUPPORTED SINGLE AND MULTIPLE PIPES A. Single or multiple pipes located adjacent to walls, columns, or other structural members shall be supported using welded steel wall brackets, where use of steel is allowed, as manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 69, 84, or 139. B. Where noted, multiple pipes may be supported on C-channel with steel brackets similar to Unistrut pipe clamps; with pipe anchor chairs; or equal. C. Individual pipes, up to 8-in diameter, where noted, may use MSS Type 8 pipe clamps as noted on the Drawings. D. Securely fasten all members to wall, column, etc., using double -expansion shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. Provide additional wall bearing plates as required. 2.12 BASE ANCHOR SUPPORT A. Bend Support: Where pipes change direction from horizontal to vertical via a bend, install a welded or cast base bend support to carry the load. Fasten to the floor, pipe stanchion, or concrete pedestal using expansion anchors or other method as approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete Supports: Where indicated, securely fasten pipe bends to concrete supports with suitable metal bands as required and approved by the Engineer. Isolate piping from poured concrete with a neoprene insert. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 11 of 16 2.13 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Where vertical pipes are not supported by a Unistrut type system as specified, they shall be supported in one of the following methods. For pipes 1/4 to 2 inch in diameter: a. Provide extension hanger ring with an extension rod and hanger flange. b. The rod diameter shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of pipe to be supported. C. Where use of steel is allowed, the hanger ring shall be steel- or PVC -clad depending on the supported pipe material of construction. The hanger ring shall be equal to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure Nos. 81. d. Where use of steel is allowed, the anchor flange shall be galvanized malleable iron similar to Carpenter and Patterson, Figure No. 85. 2. For pipes equal to or greater than 2 inch in diameter: a. Extended pipe clamps similar to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 267 may be used. b. Attach hanger to concrete structures using double expansion shields, C. Attach hanger to metal support members using welding lugs similar to Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 114. B. Pipe supports shall be provided for closely spaced vertical piping systems required to provide a rigid installation. The interval of vertical support spacing shall be as specified, but in no case shall vertical interval exceed 12 feet. The support system shall consist of a framework suitably anchored to floors, ceilings, or roofs. C. Unless otherwise specified, shown, or specifically approved by the Engineer, vertical runs exceeding 12 feet shall be supported by base elbows/tees, clamps, brackets, wall rests, and pipe collars, all located as required to ensure a rigid installation. D. Pipe riser clamps, per MSS SP58, shall be used to support all vertical pipes extending through floor slabs. Where use of steel is allowed, riser clamps shall be galvanized steel manufactured by: 1. Carpenter & Patterson, Figure No. 128. 2. Anvil, Figure 261. 3. Cooper B-Line, Figure B3373. 4. Or equal. E. Copper -clad or PVC -coated clamps shall be used on copper pipes. Insulation shall be removed from insulated pipes prior to installing riser clamps. Insulation shall not be damaged by clamp installation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 12 of 16 2.14 SPECIAL SUPPORTS A. Framework Supports: 1. Vertical and horizontal supporting members shall be U-shaped channels similar to Unistrut, Series P1000. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe clamps or pipe straps. See pipe clamp and strap requirements. 2. For piping 3 inch and smaller, framework shall be as manufactured by: a. Unistrut Corporation. b. Power -Strut (or Ackinstrut where fiberglass systems are specified). C. Multi -Strut by Carpenter -Paterson. d. Or equal. 3. For piping larger than 3 inch, the support frame shall be fabricated from structural stainless steel or steel shapes, depending upon the support location, and secured through the use of drop in, adhesive or expansion anchors. 4. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and fittings required for a complete assembly including end caps for all Unistrut members. 5. Electrical Conduit Support: Under Division 26. 6. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Submit shop drawings, and show all details of the installation, including dimensions and types of supports. In all instances the completed frame shall be adequately braced to provide a complete rigid structure when all the piping has been attached. See also Article SUPPORT AND RESTRAINT. B. Supports not otherwise described in this Section shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural stainless steel or steel shapes in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications," or Unistrut-type frame; have anchor hardware similar to items previously specified herein; shall meet the minimum requirements listed below; and be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.15 SHOP FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare and prime metallic (except stainless steel) supports in accordance with Division 09. f►AC�To14M,,Rill a�L A. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated non -steel piping. Oversize the rollers and supports, as required. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil, Figure 167. 2. Cooper B-Line, Series B3151. B. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated metal pipe. Oversize the rollers and supports, as required. Manufacturers: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 13 of 16 1. Anvil, Figure 160. 2. Cooper B-Line, Series B3160. C. Vibration Isolation Pad: Install under base flange of pedestal type pipe supports adjacent to equipment, and where required to isolate vibration. 1. Isolation pads to be neoprene, waffle type. 2. Manufacturers: a. Mason Industries, Type W. b. Korfund. D. Dielectric Barrier: 1. Install between carbon steel members and copper or stainless -steel pipe. 2. Install between stainless steel supports and non -stainless steel ferrous metal piping. 3. All stainless -steel piping shall be isolated from all ferrous materials, including galvanized steel by use of neoprene sheet material and protection shields. E. Electrical Isolation: Install 1/4 by 3 inch neoprene rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify field dimensions as indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Obtain permission from Engineer before using powder -actuated anchors. B. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. C. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. Before setting inserts, all drawings and figures shall be checked that have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 in and larger. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through - bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. D. Pipe Hangers and Supports: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 14 of 16 1. Install according to: ASME B31.3. 2. Support horizontal piping as indicated on Drawings, depending upon pipe size. 3. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent Work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inch of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. 6. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. 7. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. 8. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. 9. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 10. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 11. Support piping independently so that equipment is not stressed by piping weight or expansion in piping system. 12. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of connected piping. 13. Provide welded steel brackets where piping is to be run adjacent to building walls or columns. 14. Use beam clamps where piping is to be suspended from building steel. 15. Insulated Piping: Provide two bolted clamps designed to accommodate insulated piping. 16. Use offset clamps where pipes are indicated as offset from wall surfaces. 17. Proceed with installation of piping and supports only after any building structural work has been completed and new concrete has reached its 28-day compressive strength. 18. The installation of pipe support systems shall not interfere with the operation of any overhead bridge cranes, monorails, access hatches, etc. No piping shall be supported from stairs, other pipes, ladders, and walkways unless authorized by the Engineer. 19. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are made. 20. Brace horizontal pipe movements by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing. 21. Where supports are required in areas to receive chemical resistant seamless flooring, install supports prior to application of flooring system. E. Insulation: Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. F. Equipment Bases and Supports: 1. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inch thick and extending 6 inch beyond supported equipment. Comply with Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Provide housekeeping pads as detailed on Drawings. 3. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. 4. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 5. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Comply with Section 40 05 13 - Common Work Results for Process Piping. G. Prime Coat: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 15 of 16 1. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with Section 09 96 76 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". H. Apply anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchoraLye. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All pipe support systems shall be tested after installation in conjunction with the respective piping pressure tests. If any part of the pipe support system proves to be defective or inadequate, it shall be repaired, augmented or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. After the work is installed, but before it is filled for start-up and testing, the Support System Design Engineer shall inspect the work and shall certify its complete adequacy. Each system shall be inspected and certified in the same way. C. Submit a report, including all field modifications and including all certificates. 1. The report shall bear the stamp of a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas. and shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. 3.4 ATTACHMENT SCHEDULE A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Pipe Material: Cast iron, Ductile Iron. a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 5 feet b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch. 2. Pipe Material: Cast Iron/Ductile Iron, with 10-foot length of pipe. a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 feet. b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch. 3. Pipe Material: CPVC. a. Size: 1 inch and smaller. b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 3 feet. C. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch. 4. Pipe Material: CPVC. a. Size: 1-1/4 inches and larger. b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet. C. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch. 5. Pipe Material: Fiberglass: a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 16 of 16 b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch. 6. Pipe Material: PVC. a. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 4 feet. b. Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch. 7. Pipe Material: Steel, Stainless Steel. a. Size: 3 inches and smaller. b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 12 feet. C. Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch. 8. Pipe Material: Steel, Stainless Steel. a. Size: 4 inches and larger. b. Maximum Hanger Spacing: 12 feet. C. Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch. END OF SECTION 40 05 07 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 1 of 12 SECTION 40 05 19 - DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductile -iron pipe. 2. Ductile -iron, malleable -iron, and cast-iron fittings. 3. Accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings": Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 2. Section 33 05 19 "Ductile -Iron Utility Pipe for Water Service" 3. Section 33 11 16 "Site Water Utility Distribution Piping" for installation requirements for buried piping. 4. Section 33 13 00 "Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution" for disinfection requirements for potable water systems. 5. Section 40 05 06 "Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping" for piping appurtenances. 6. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping" for hangers, anchors, sleeves, and sealing of piping to adjacent structures. 7. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" for common product requirements for valves for placement by this Section. 8. Section 40 46 42 "Cathodic Process Corrosion Protection" for passive cathodic protection for buried ferrous piping. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with piping and equipment connections specified in other Sections and indicated on Drawings. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 0131 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstallation meeting. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 2 of 12 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information regarding pipe and fittings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, sizes, and materials lists. 1� C. Submit anti -seize product technical data sheet. lei T403:1U1:MMIs] ►k1W1111100T10011.11V A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Prior to shipment of pipe, submit a certified affidavit of compliance from the pipe manufacturer stating that the pipe fittings, gaskets, linings and exterior coating for this project have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA and ASTM standards and requirements specified herein. B. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop tests and inspections. C. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. D. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. E. American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements. F. Welding certificates. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, valves and other appurtenances, connections, and invert or centerline elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials (including linings) in Contact with Potable Water: Certified according to NSF 61 and NSF 372. B. Hydrostatically test each length of ductile iron pipe at the point of manufacture to 500 psi for a duration of 10 seconds per AWWA C151. Furnish certified test results in duplicate to the Engineer prior to time of shipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 3 of 12 C. Inspect and test by Manufacturer the ductile -iron pipe and fittings at the foundry as required by the AWWA C600, Hydrostatic Testing. Furnish in duplicate to the Engineer sworn certificates of such tests and their results prior to the shipment of the pipe. D. Pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant for compliance with this Section by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner, at the Owner's expense. E. Engineer will inspect the pipe and fittings after delivery. Products are subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the specified requirements, even though accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Immediately mark pipe rejected after delivery and remove from the job site. F. Permanently mark pipe and fittings with the following information: 1. Manufacturer name and trademark. 2. Manufacturing date. 3. Size, type, class, or wall thickness. 4. Production Standard (AWWA, ASTM, etc.). 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' documented experience.. C. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. Photograph and provide written documentation of damaged materials. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Coverall openings to prevent entrance of dirt, water, and debris. 3. Protect piping and appurtenances by storing off ground. 4. Limit stacking height to manufacturers specified maximum. 5. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 4 of 12 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for ductile iron process pipe and accessories. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore and the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FAQ 1814iIIaaI Z*)►1917�1:11►13aIaII►lcl A. Piping: 1. Comply with AWWA C115. 2. Thickness Class: 53 per AWWA C150. 3. Ductile Iron pipe as manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc.; American Cast Iron Pipe Company; all divisions of the McWane Company or an approved equal who is a member of the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA). B. Fittings: 1. Material: AWWA C110, ductile iron. 2. Class: Same as that of connected piping. 3. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: As manufactured by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Inc., American Cast Iron Pipe Company; all divisions of McWane Company, or Sigma, Co., as specified on the City of Fort Worth Standard Products List. 4. Restrained Joints: Comply with AWWA C111. 5. Flanged Fittings: Comply with ASME B 16.1 Class 125. a. Flamed ioints shall be made with bolts or bolt studs with a nut on each end. Stud bolts shall be used for all bolting sizes 1-314 inches and larger. b. Bolts, stud bolts, and nuts shall be Twe 316 Stainless Steel meeting the reauirements of ASTM A 1931194 Grade B8/B8M. C. Bolts and stud bolts shall conform to the dimensional requirements of ASME B18.2.1 with rolled threads conforming to ASME B1.1, Coarse Series, Class 2 fit. Bolts and stud bolts and nuts shall be of American Standard heavv unfinished hexagonal tvpe. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 5 of 12 d. Bolts shall be provided with a 1/4-inch proiection bevond the nut when the ioint with gasket is assembled. e. Anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be of a molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. 6. Grooved joints: Comply with AWWA C606 a. Rigid couplings: Style 31 couplings as manufactured by Victaulic, Anvil International, or approved equal. b. For direct connection of ductile pipe to steel pipe of IPS sizes: Victaulic Style 307 transition coupling with offsetting, angle -pattern, bolt pads; For direct connection of 30-inch ductile iron pipe to existing 30-inch steel pipe at the Plant Sewer No.1 Meter Vault: Victaulic Style W77 with Victaulic Type "D" Vic -Rings or approved equal. C. Grooved end fittings for AWWA ductile iron pipe: Conform to ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110 for center -to -end dimensions and ANSI A21.10/AWWA C110 or AWWA C 15 3 for wall thickness, with AWWA C606 grooved ends. 7. Sleeve type couplings: Dresser Style 38 or 138 as manufactured by Dresser Industries, or equivalent products of Smith -Blair, Romac Industries, Ford Meter Box Co or approved equal. 8. Tapping Sleeves at Scum Pump Stations No.1 and 2: Smith -Blair 622 carbon steel tapping sleeve, Romac FTS419 Fabricated Steel Tapping Sleeve, Ford Steel Tapping Sleeves or approved equal. 9. Eccentric Reducer Expansion Joints at Scum Pump Stations No.1 and 2: Flexicraft rubber eccentric reducer expansion joint with stainless steel control rods 125 flanges or approved equal. C. Epoxy Lining: a. Line ductile iron pipe and fittings with a ceramic -filled amine -cured epoxy, Protecto 401 by Induron. b. Lining thickness of 40 mils minimum. Applicator approved by the coating manufacturer and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and under controlled conditions at the applicator's shop or the pipe manufacturer's plant. C. Submit a certified affidavit of compliance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements specified herein. D. Exterior Coating: 1. Exposed Service: As specified in Section As specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings": Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 2. If required, coatings "hold -backs" to be provided at pipe and fitting ends for satisfactory installation for joint connections in the field. 3. Provide all necessary coating materials to perform field coating applications at joints compatible with or equal to the shop applied material. 4. Field repair of pipe with damaged coating shall receive prior approval of the Engineer. If, in the opinion of the Engineer coating damage is beyond repair, pipe to be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 5. All flange bearing surfaces shall be uncoated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 6 of 12 6. Mechanically clean or brush blast all surfaces to have exterior coating applied to ductile iron surfaces. Chemical cleaning or wiping with solvent is not acceptable. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Flange Gaskets: 1. Shall be ring type gaskets for pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter, and full -face gaskets for pipe sizes 12 inches diameter and smaller. 2. Gasket dimensions shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.21, unless specified otherwise. 3. Gaskets shall be as thin as the rinish and accuracv of the flange surface will permit. For DI Pipe, rubber gaskets shall be 118 inch thick. EPDM or Buna-NI NBR suitable for sewage service, and meet the requirements ofAWWA C111. 4. Gasket material shall be suitable for a minimum pressure rating of 150 psie and temperature rating of 200 degrees F. Gasket material shall be specifically recommended for the service by the gasket manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flange mate properly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings before installation. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces to remove loose rust, mill scale, and other foreign substances by power wire brushing. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 7 of 12 2. Touch up shop -primed surfaces with primer as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" Solvent -clean surfaces that are not shop primed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Buried Service Piping: As specified in Section 33 11 16 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping. B. Exposed Service Piping: 1. According to ASME B31.3. 2. In compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Run piping straight along alignment as indicated on Drawings, with minimum number of joints. 4. Clean each length prior to installation. 5. Support per Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping". 6. Do not use equipment flanges for support; support pipe separately. C. Fittings: 1. According to manufacturer instructions. 2. Clean gasket seats thoroughly, and wipe gaskets clean prior to installation. 3. Tighten bolts progressively, drawing up bolts on opposite sides until bolts are uniformly tight; use torque wrench to tighten bolts to manufacturer instructions. 4. Flanged joints to be made using gaskets, bolts, bolt studs with a nut on each end, or studs with nuts where the flange is tapped. The number and size of bolts to conform to the same ANSI Standard as the flanges. 5. Provide required upstream and downstream clearances from devices as indicated on Drawings. 6. Applv anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchorase. D. Make taps to ductile iron piping only with service saddle, tapping boss of a fitting or valve body, or equipment casting. E. Install piping with sufficient slopes for venting or draining liquids and condensate to low points. F. Support exposed piping as specified in Section 40 05 07 - Hangers and Supports for Process Piping. G. Provide expansion joints as specified in Section 40 05 06 - Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping, and pipe guides as specified in Section 40 05 07 - Hangers and Supports for Process Piping, to compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. H. Dielectric Fittings: Provide between dissimilar metals. I. Field Cuts: According to pipe manufacturer instructions. Cutting by abrasive saw only, leaving a smooth cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Damage to the lining repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Seal Field cut ends approved epoxy coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Finish primed surfaces according to Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 8 of 12 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Deflection at joints not to exceed that recommended by the pipe manufacturer. B. Supply and install fittings, in addition to those shown on Drawings, in areas where conflict exists with existing facilities. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Inspect for damage to pipe lining or coating and for other defects that may be detrimental as determined by Engineer. 2. Repair damaged piping or provide new, undamaged pipe at no additional cost to the project. 3. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. 4. Inspect and field test the glass lined piping and fittings to verify the delivered products meeting the criteria specified. Submit field test reports for spark testing [and straightness testing] showing compliance with the following criteria. a. Perform glass lining inspection and testing of pipe and fitting prior to installation. b. Visually inspect pipe in storage on site for damage and defects. C. The Engineer will select 10% of the pipe and fittings delivered to the site for field testing. d. Perform a spark test on the selected glass lined pipe pieces using testing firm/team acceptable to the manufacturer of the pipe and fittings. Perform the tests in accordance with ASTM B 1000. e. The field spark test results not to exceed 15 percent variation in the number of pinholes detected during the factory test. If the field test results show greater than 15 percent variation in the number of pinholes detected when compared to the factory spark test, perform the field testing on the entire load of the glass lined pipe and fittings delivered to the site. £ Perform field test for straightness on 10 percent of 4-inch to 8-inch pipes. If the test results reveal deviation exceeds the maximum limits specified in ASTM B 1000, perform the test on all the 4-inch to 8-inch pipes. g. All pieces which fail the field test specified herein or do not meet the maximum allowable pinhole requirement specified in ASTM 131000 to be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Pressure Testing: Test Pressure: a. Service Water "SW" Piping: 90 psig. 2. Conduct hydrostatic test for minimum two hours. 3. Filling: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 9 of 12 a. Fill section to be tested with water slowly and expel air from piping at high points. b. Install corporation cocks at high points. C. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled. d. Raise pressure to specified test pressure. 4. Observe joints, fittings, and valves under test. 5. Remove and renew cracked pipe, joints, fittings, and valves showing visible leakage and retest. 6. Leakage: a. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two hours to determine leakage rate. b. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi of test pressure. C. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to maintain test pressure during period of test. d. Compute maximum allowable leakage by following formula: 1) L = SD x sgrt(P)/C. 2) L = testing allowance in gph. 3) S = length of pipe tested in feet. 4) D = nominal diameter of pipe in inches. 5) P = average test pressure during hydrostatic test in psig. 6) C = 148,000. 7) If pipe under test contains sections of various diameters, calculate allowable leakage from sum of computed leakage for each size. e. If test of pipe indicates leakage greater than allowed, locate source of leakage, make corrections, and retest until leakage is within allowable limits. f. Correct visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage. A. Keep pipe interior clean as installation progresses. B. After installation, clean pipe interior of soil, grit, and other debris. END OF SECTION 40 05 19 (References follow) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 Description: CEMENT MORTAR DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 10 of 12 EXHIBIT A Use as a Reference LININGS AVAILABLE FOR DUCTILE PIPE Maximum Service Common Use: Thickness: Temp. (Degree F): [I ] With Sealcoat - 150 De- Drinking Water grees Salt Water Without Sealcoat - 212 Degrees GLASS Grit 10 Mil (Min) PETROLEUM ASPHALT 150 Degrees Air 1 Mil COATING PROTECTO 401 (ceramic- 120 to 150 Degrees [2] Septic Sewer 40 Mil (nom- filled amine -cured epoxy) Acids [3] inal) Alkali Waste Pickling Brine Scum Sludge Non -Septic Gravity Sewers Sanitary Sewer Force Mains EPDXY SUITABLE FOR 120 to 150 Degrees [2] Drinking Water 24 Mil (Min) DRINKING WATER [4] Food Processing POLYETHYLENE 120 to 150 Degrees [5] Septic Sewer 40 Mil (nom- Acids [3] inal) Alkali Waste Pickling Brine [ 1 ] Maximum service temperatures listed are intended as general guidelines. For higher service temperatures, con- sult manufacturer for specific recommendations. [2] Maximum service temperature for epoxies depends on service conditions and specific formulation. Consult manufacturer for recommendations for elevated temperature service. [3] Consult manufacturer for specific acid service use. [4] All epoxies are not suitable for conveying drinking water. Consult manufacturer for recommendations. [5] Maximum service temperature for polyethylene for acids and alkali waste depends on the specific acid or alkali waste and service condition(s). Consult manufacturer for recommendations for elevated temperature service. END OF EXHIBIT A CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 11 of 12 EXHIBIT B Use as a Reference GASKET MATERIALS USED FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE IN WATER AND SEWERAGE SERVICE Description: Maximum. Service Temperature (Degree F): [ 11 [2] Push -on: Mechanical Joint Gaskets: Gaskets: SBR (Styrene Butadiene) 150 Degrees 120 Degrees EPDM (Ethylene Propylene 250 Degrees 225 Degrees Diene Monomer) Nitrile (NBR) (Acrylonitrile Bu- 150 Degrees 120 Degrees tadiene) Neoprene (R) (CR) (Polychloro- 200 Degrees 200 Degrees prene) Viton (R); Fluorel (R) 300 Degrees 225 Degrees (FPM) [4] (Fluorocarbon) Common Uses: [3] Fresh Water Salt Water Sanitary Sewage Fresh Water Salt Water Sanitary Sewage Hot Water Hydrocarbons Fats Oils Greases Chemicals Fresh Water Salt Water Sanitary Sewage Hydrocarbons Acids Petroleum Vegetable Oils [1] Maximum service temperatures listed are intended as general guidelines for ductile iron pipe gas- kets. For service temperatures greater than those listed, consult manufacturers for specific rec- ommendations. [2] Minimum service temperature is not usually a meaningful parameter for piping gaskets; however, low temperatures during pipeline installation may necessitate precautions. Consult manufacturer for pertinent recommendations. [3] Water, including sanitary sewage, with low levels of the listed contaminants. [4] Consult manufacturer for availability of FPM push -on gaskets. END OF EXHIBIT B CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4005 19 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE Page 12 of 12 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 05 31 - THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. PVC pipe. 2. PVC tube. 3. CPVC pipe. 4. Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) pipe and tube. 5. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe. 6. Polyethylene (PE) pipe 7. Fittings. 8. Accessories for plastic piping. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 33 11 16 "Site Water Utility Distribution Piping": Pipe laying requirements and tolerances, excavation, backfill, and thrust restraints. 2. Section 33 13 00 "Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution": Disinfection requirements for potable -water systems. 3. Section 40 05 06 "Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping": Pipe penetrations, restrained joints, flexible connections, expansion joints and loops, and sleeve -type couplings. 4. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping": Hangers, anchors, sleeves, and sealing of piping to adjacent structures. 5. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Common product requirements for valves for placement by this Section. 1M.131106) ► A. Coordinate Work of this Section with piping and equipment connections specified in other Sections and indicated on Drawings. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 2 of 10 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information regarding pipe and fittings. B. Professional Engineer Certified Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including equipment, critical dimensions, sizes, materials lists, location of all fittings, valves, and in -line accessories, joints, fittings, adapters, couplings, supports, a detailed material schedule of all materials used in the piping layout. Submittal of mark-ups on contract drawings will not be acceptable. C. Submit anti -seize product technical data sheet. f�'�1►M�C�77uIrY[�]►k��. : uMYWr_��I.`! A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's recommended butt fusion welding procedures identifying all quality control checks during the fusion procedure including the minimum and maximum allowable bead formation during the heat soak process and the final weld roll back process for the various size pipes. C. Manufacturer to provide a sample joint for each size pipe to be supplied that is 12-in long and has two heat fusion welds that identifies the manufacturer's minimum and maximum allowable bead thicknesses. Provide documentation that the sample was pressure tested to 150 psi or the specified pressure. D. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop and factory tests and inspections. E. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, valves and other appurtenances, connections, and centerline elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Permanently mark each length of pipe with manufacturer's name or trademark and indicate conformance to standards. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 3 of 10 B. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified according to NSF 61. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' documented experience.. C. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: 1. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. 2. Manufacturer's Packaging: Comply with ASTM D3892. B. Storage: Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from puncture, abrasion, moisture, dust, and UV by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Protect piping and appurtenances by storing off ground. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Minimum and Maximum Temperatures: Do not install pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F if pipe is exposed to direct sunlight. B. UV Protection: Provide pipe installed above ground or outside with UV protection. 1.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 4 of 10 1.13 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Thermoplastic Process Pipes. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. 17_\711fG ' : 6I1180 161 2.1 GENERAL A. Do not use Van Stone flanges with pinch valves, industrial butterfly valves; elastomer bellows style expansion joints or other piping system components having an elastomer liner (rubber seat) that is used as a gasket. 2.2 CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe and Fittings: a. Comply with ASTM D 1785, Class 12454. b. Schedule: 80. C. Fittings: ASTM D2467, Schedule 80, socket. 2. Fittings: ASTM D2467, Schedule 80, socket. 3. Joints: ASTM D2855, socket, solvent welded. 4. Flanges: Comply with ASME B 16.5, rated for maximum 150 psig working pressure. a. Do not use Van Stone flanges with pinch valves, industrial butterfly valves; elastomer bellows style expansion joints or other piping system components having an elastomer liner (rubber seat) that is used as a gasket. B. Description: 1. Pipe: a. Comply with ASTM F441/17441M. b. Schedule: 80. 2. Fittings: a. Socket Type: Comply with ASTM F439, Schedule 80. 3. Joints: Socket welded and Flanged. 4. Materials: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 5 of 10 a. Comply with ASTM D1784. b. Minimum Cell Classification: 23447. 5. Do not use Van Stone flanges with pinch valves, industrial butterfly valves; elastomer bellows style expansion joints or other piping system components having an elastomer liner (rubber seat) that is used as a gasket. 6. Threaded ioints shall be as specified under the applicable ASTM standard for the pipe and fittings being used. Thread sealer shall be thread tape which shall be standard industrial quality Teflon, Tvpe 1. 7. Fittings, specials, unions and flanges shall be of the same schedule number and manufactured of the same materials as the pipe. Provide flamed ioints and adapters for connections to all in- line valves and equipment includink those with unions. Whenever unions are called out on the Drawings, flanged connections may be substituted, provided that dimensional controls do not preclude use of flanges. 2.3 PE PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. HDPE Pipe and Fittings: 1. Pipe: ASTM D3035 / AWWA C901 for sizes up to 3-inch and ASTM F714 / AWWA C906 for sizes 4-inch and greater 2. SDR: SDR 17.0, rated for a maximum 125 psig working pressure SDR 11.0, rated for a maximum 200 psig working pressure 3. Fittings: a. Comply with AWWA C901 and C906. b. Type: Molded to comply with ASTM D3261. C. Minimum pressure rating equal to or greater than the pipe to which they are joined. 4. Joints: Butt fusion Flange adaptor with Type 316 SS 150 lb backer flange. 5. Materials: a. PE 4710 high density polyethylene resin. b. Comply with ASTM D3350. C. Minimum Cell Classification: 445574-C-C. 6. Molded Wall pipe or Thrust Collar: a. Manufacturer: 1) Performance Pipe. 2) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). b. Material: PE4710 in accordance with AWWA C906. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 6 of 10 2.4 FINISHES A. Coat machined faces of metallic flanges with temporary rust -inhibitive coating. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. PVC Piping: 1. Flange Bolting: a. Hex -Head Bolts: Stainless steel; ASTM F593 Grade 316. b. Hex -Head Nuts: Stainless steel; ASTM F594 Grade 316. C. Provide Bolts, nuts and washers suitable for corrosive environment. Provide anti -seize compound for stainless steel bolts and nuts of molvbdenum disulfide base such as Molvkote-G or equal. d. Flame bolt spacine. number and dimensions shall conform to the requirements of ANSI 16.5. PVC flames shall be suitable for solvent cementing to the pipe. 2. Flange Gaskets: a. Type: Full faced. b. Material: EPDM, Viton. Gasket material to exhibit excellent compatibility with process fluid. C. Comply with ASME B16.21. d. Thickness: 1/8 inch. e. Design Temperate: 200 degrees F. f. Design Pressure: 150 psi. 3. Push -On Joint Seals: a. Material: EPDM, Viton, Buna-N. 1) Materials must exhibit excellent compatibility with wastewater and corrosive process fluid. 2) Supplier must submit compatibility charts exhibiting excellent compatibility over the range of design pressures (150 psi minimum) and temperatures (200 degrees F minimum). 3) Provide EPDM material meeting specification for NPW service water applications and buna-n for drain applications. b. Comply with ASTM F477. 4. Solvent Cement: a. Comply with ASTM D2564. b. Formulated for use with sodium hypochlorite and other caustic solutions. C. Primers: Comply with ASTM F656. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 7 of 10 d. Industrial grade low VOC EP42 Heavy Duty Gray by Oatey or Weld -On 724. Exhibits excellent compatibility with the corrosive process fluid and wastewater are specified, and suitable for operating pressure of 150 psig. e. Manufacturer: 1) Oatey Corp., Cleavland OH. 2) Weld -on, IPS corporation. 3) Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed pipe sections and tubes. B. Owner Inspection: At their discretion: 1. Make completed pipe sections and tubes available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspection is allowed. C. Owner Witnessing: At their discretion: 1. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and test at manufacturer's test facility. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled. D. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flange mate properly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends, remove burrs, and bevel plain -end pipe. B. Thoroughly clean pipe and fittings before installation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 8 of 10 C. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to remove foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASME B31.3 and B31.9. B. Run piping straight along alignment as indicated on Drawings, with minimum number of joints. C. Fittings: 1. According to manufacturer instructions. 2. Gaskets: a. Clean seats thoroughly. b. Wipe gaskets clean prior to installation. 3. Tighten bolts progressively, drawing up bolts on opposite sides until bolts are uniformly tight; use torque wrench to tighten bolts to manufacturer instructions. D. Provide required upstream and downstream clearances from devices as indicated. E. Install piping with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. F. Support exposed piping as specified in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping". G. Provide expansion joints as specified in Section 40 05 06 "Couplings, Adapters, and Specials for Process Piping", and provide pipe guides as specified in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping", to compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. H. Field Cuts: According to pipe manufacturer instructions. I. Joining: 1. Heat Joining: Comply with ASTM D2657. a. Butt -fusion joints to be done by a factory -qualified joining technician as designated by the pipe manufacturer. b. Field Samples: join two sample welds on each size of pipe to be installed using the same fusion welding equipment that will be used for completion of the entire work. These sample welds will be compared to the manufacturer's sample previously submitted in accordance with Part 1. C. Pipe joints with beads in excess of 3/16-in will not be approved by the Engineer. 2. Electrofusion: Comply with ASTM F1290. 3. Primers and Cleaners: Comply with ASTM F402. 4. PVC Solvent -Cemented Joints: Comply with ASTM D2855. J. Insulation: As indicated on Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 9 of 10 K. Underground Piping: As specified in Section 331116 "Site Water Utility Distribution Piping". L. Apply anti -seize compounds to all stainless -steel hardware and anchorage. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Laying Tolerances: As specified in Section 331116 "Site Water Utility Distribution Piping". 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Inspect for piping defects that may be detrimental as determined by the Engineer. 2. Repair damaged piping, or provide new, undamaged pipe. 3. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. B. Pressure Testing: 1. Test Pressure: Not less than 150 psig or 1.5 times the system's working pressure, whichever is greater. 2. Conduct hydrostatic test for minimum two hours. 3. Filling: a. Fill section to be tested with water slowly and expel air from piping at high points. b. Install corporation cocks at high points. C. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled. d. Raise pressure to specified test pressure. 4. Observe joints, fittings, and valves under test. 5. Remove and renew cracked pipe, joints, fittings, and valves showing visible leakage and retest. 6. Leakage: a. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two hours to determine leakage rate. b. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi of test pressure. C. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to maintain test pressure during period of test. d. Correct visible leaks and repeat test to verify no leaks at the required test pressures. A. Keep pipe interior clean as installation progresses. B. Clean pipe interior of soil, grit, shavings, and other debris after pipe installation. END OF SECTION 40 05 31 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 05 51 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Common requirements for valves. 2. Common requirements for valve actuators. 3. Valve tags. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3 000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for execution requirements for placement of concrete as required by this Section. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous metalwork and fasteners specified by this Section. 3. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". 4. Section 33 11 16 "Site Water Utility Distribution Piping" for valve boxes, covers, extensions, and valve extensions specified in this Section. 5. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping" for product and execution requirements for valve supports specified by this Section. 6. Section 40 05 57 "Actuators for Process Valves and Gates." 7. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for single- and three-phase motor requirements for equipment specified in this Section. 8. Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation" for valve insulation as required by this Section. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with individual process valve specifications. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 2 of 10 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Valve Schedule: 1. Submit valve schedule populated with all Division 40 process valves specified for this project. Include all information shown on the Sample Valve Schedule included in this project. 2. Approval of valve schedule submittal to precede all individual valve submittals. All subsequent individual valve submittals to include the approved valve tag number or group on the submittal cover sheet. B. Valve Tags: 1. Materials, dimensions and thickness of tags, materials and gauge of cable and splicing hardware. 2. Color palate for Owner selection. 3. Full scale drawing of sample with lettering dimensions and scribe depth. 4. Valve tag lettering provided with Valve Schedule above. C. Power Actuator Data: 1. Sizing Calculations: a. Provide fluid pressure and velocity sizing basis. b. Provide maximum valve torque based on disc shape and flow direction. C. Clearly indicate safety factors and mechanical ratios of any intermediate gearing. 2. Maximum output torque of actuator and intermediate gearing. 3. Details of actuator mounting, including orientation of actuator and intermediate gearing. 4. Dimensional drawing of actuator assembled on valve. 5. Pneumatic/Hydraulic pressure requirements, electrical power supply, plumbing connection sizes and locations. 6. Wiring diagram, control wiring and protocol. 7. Valve cavitation limits for positioning, modulating and control valves mated to power actuator. D. Shop Drawings: Valve and actuator model number and size, valve parts list, materials of each part including material standard designation (ASTM or other), position indicators, limit switches, actuator mounting. E. Provide certified hydrostatic test data, per manufacturer's standard procedure or MSS-SP-61 for all valves. F. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 3 of 10 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit installation and operation instructions for each component including valve, actuator, gearbox, and any included instrumentation. B. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of integrators facility tests and manufacturers factory tests and inspections. C. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. D. Manufacturer Certification of Installation: Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0178 39 "Project Record Documents" for record actual locations of valves and actuators. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain clearances as indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Mate valves to actuators at manufacturer's or integrator's facility. Fully test assembled product and certify ready for installation prior to shipment to the job site. 1. Only in special cases for extremely large assemblies where installation requires disassembly, may actuators be mounted to the valves in the field. D. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. E. Furnish affidavit of compliance with testing and manufacturing standards referred in this specification and the individual valve specifications. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing valves and actuators with minimum ten years' documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Deliver factory mated power actuated valves on rigid wooden skids, fully braced and strapped to prevent damage to valve, actuator or coupling system. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 4 of 10 C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Protect valve ends from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers and plugs. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to materials ordering or any fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for process valves and accessories. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore and the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. Description: Valves, operator, actuator, handwheel, chainwheel, extension stem, floor stand, worm and gear operator, operating nut, chain, wrench, and other accessories as required. B. Provide all valves of the same type by same manufacturer. C. Valve Ends: Compatible with adjacent piping system and as indicated on valve schedule. D. Operation: 1. Close by turning clockwise. 2. Cast directional arrow on valve or actuator with OPEN and CLOSE cast on valve in appropriate location. E. Valve Marking and Labeling: 1. Marking: Comply with MSS SP-25. 2. Labeling (valve tags): CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 5 of 10 a. Fiberglass reinforced plastic, ASTM D709, 70 mil thick, 2 1/2-inch diameter or 2 1/2-inch by 1 1/4-inch. b. Lettering 1/16-inch thick of silk screening or other permanent embedment of subsurface printed graphics, permanently sealed. C. Colors of lettering and backing as selected by Owner. d. Two, 1/4-inch clear opening 316 stainless steel grommets at each end, center of hole 3/8-inch from tag edge. e. 3/32-inch Type 316 SS cable and splice hardware. F. Valve Construction: As Specified in Valve Sections. G. Do not use Van Stone flanges with pinch valves, industrial butterfly valves; elastomer bellows style expansion joints or other piping system components having an elastomer liner (rubber seat) that is used as a gasket. 2.2 VALVE ACTUATORS A. Provide actuators as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Provide mechanical position indicators for power actuated and gearbox actuated valves. C. Comply with AWWA C541 (Pneumatic and Hydraulic actuators) and C542 (Electric Motor Actuators) as applicable. D. Provide chain actuators for shutoff valves mounted greater than 7 feet above operating floor level. E. Gear and Power actuators as specified in Section 40 05 57.00 "Actuators for Process Valves and Gates". 2.3 INSULATION A. Insulate all valves installed in insulated piping systems as part of the Work. B. As specified in Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation". 2.4 FINISHES A. Valve Coating: Comply with AWWA C550. B. Factory finishes are included in individual valve sections. C. Exposed Valves: As specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings " D. Stainless Body Valves: Do not coat. E. Do not coat flange faces of valves unless otherwise specified. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 6 of 10 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test valves according to manufacturer's standard testing protocol, including hydrostatic, seal, and performance testing. B. Owner Inspection: 1. Make completed valves available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspection is allowed. C. Owner Witnessing: 1. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and test at manufacturer's test facility. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled. D. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system is ready for valve installation. B. Fully examine valves for debris, damage and interior finish blemishes prior to installation. Do not install valves with soiled interior or any visible damage to seats, discs or interior finish. C. Identify any piping, plant or equipment clearance issues prior to installation, bring to Engineer's attention via job meetings, submittal process or request for information process. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install valves, actuators, extensions, valve boxes, and accessories according to manufacturer instructions. B. Inspect valve interiors before line closure for the presence of debris. At the option of the Engineer, internal inspection of valve and appurtenances may be required any time that the likelihood of debris is a possibility. Clean connecting pipes prior to installation, testing, disinfection and final acceptance. C. Disinfect valves installed in potable water lines with approved pipeline disinfection process. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 7 of 10 D. Rigidly support valves to avoid stresses on piping. E. Coat studs, bolts and nuts with anti -seizing lubricant. F. Dielectric Fittings: Provide between dissimilar metals. G. Clean field welds of slag and splatter to provide a smooth surface. H. Mate, adjust and fully test gearboxes, electric, hydraulic and pneumatic actuators to valves at manufacturer's or integrator's facility. Only in special cases for extremely large assemblies where installation requires disassembly may actuators be mounted to the valves in the field. These circumstances require preinstallation meetings. I. Do not install stems vertically downward. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1. Install Gate, Globe, Ball valves with stem vertical in the 12 o'clock position. 2. Install Plug valves with stem horizontal and plug opening to the top of the body unless position will not allow proper actuator access, in which case stem may be vertical in the 12 o'clock position. 3. Install Control valves in horizontal pipelines with top works vertically upward. K. Install all brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and appurtenances as indicated. Before properly setting these items, check all drawings and figures which have a direct bearing on their location. L. Inspect all materials for defects in construction and materials. Clean debris and foreign material out of openings, etc. Verify valve flange covers remain in place until connected piping is in place. Verify operability of all operating mechanisms for proper functioning. Check all nuts and bolts for tightness. Repaired or replace valves and other equipment which do not operate easily or are otherwise defective. M. Where installation is covered by a referenced standard, install and certify in accordance with that standard, except as herein modified. Also note additional requirements in other parts of this Section. N. Unless otherwise noted, provide joints for valves and appurtenances utilizing the same procedures as specified under the applicable type connecting pipe joint. Install valves and other items as recommended by the manufacturer. Verify manufacturers' torqueing requirements for all valves. O. Coordinate direction of flow through offset type and shaped butterfly valve discs with the mated actuator torque capacity. P. Rotate valve operators and indicators to display toward normal operation locations. Consult with Engineer prior to installing valves with handwheels to confirm final position of handwheel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 8 of 10 Q. Vertically center floor boxes, valve boxes, extension stems, and low floor stands over the operating nut, with couplings as required. 1. Adjust elevation of the box top to conform to the elevation of the finished floor surface or grade at the completion of the Contract. 2. Support boxes and stem guides during concrete placement to maintain vertical alignment. R. Install brass male adapters on each side of valves in copper -piped system and solder adapters to pipe. S. Install 1-inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shutoff valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and equipment. T. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and to allow access. U. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. V. Pipe Hangers and Supports: As specified in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping". W. Comply with Division 40 - Process Interconnections for piping materials applying to various system types. X. Install insulation as specified in Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation". 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified and factory -trained service representative of the manufacturer to provide installation inspection and check out, and operational and maintenance instruction, for each type of the following equipment for the following durations: Equipment Valve Installation O and M Instruction Sizes Inspection 480 volt electric actuators N/A 1 day, 8 hr. 1 day, 8 hr. B. Valve Field Testing: 1. Test for proper alignment. 2. If specified by valve Section, field test equipment to demonstrate operation without undue noise, vibration, or overheating. 3. Engineer will witness field testing. 4. Functional Test: a. Prior to system startup, inspect valves and actuators for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection and satisfactory performance. b. After installation, open and close all manual valves in the presence of the Engineer to show the valve operates smoothly from full open to full close and without leakage. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 51 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS VALVES Page 9 of 10 C. Cycle valves equipped with electric, pneumatic or hydraulic actuators 5 times from full open to full closed in the presence of the Engineer to exhibit operation without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating. d. Operate pressure control and pressure relief valves in the presence of the Engineer to show they perform their specified function at some time prior to placing the piping system in operation and as agreed during construction coordination meetings. 5. Field test pipelines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed. During these tests, adjust, remove or replace defective valve or appurtenance, or otherwise make acceptable to the Engineer. Test regulating valves, strainers, or other appurtenances to demonstrate conformance with the specified operational capabilities. Correct deficiencies, replace device or otherwise made acceptable to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 40 05 51 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 ATTACHMENT A SAMPLE VALVE SCHEDULE (See Paragraph 1.5) Valve Actuator Model / Operator Duty Remote Enclosure Rating Cycle Voltage / Gearbox and Valve Size Service Connection Tag Description Service Open Model Lining (Manual / Control (NEMA) and Torque Time Phase Reduction Type (in) Line Tag Type / Spec No. / Close or / Make Motorized) Station Submergence Rating (Sec) / HP Ratio Modulating (Yes/No) Rating (IP) 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Stencils. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Ceiling tacks. 6. Labels. 7. Lockout devices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings": Requirements for painting as specified by this Section. 2. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods for valves. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each specified product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate list of wording, symbols, letter size, spacing of labels, and color -coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule. 2. Indicate valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 2 of 8 C. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping Color Scheme and Lettering Size: Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Perform Work according to City of Fort Worth Standards. C. Comply with recommended water treatment plant color codink- from the Texas Commission on Environmental Ouality (TCEO) unless otherwise requested by the Owner. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 3 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 3. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, inc.). 4. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. R&R Identification Co. f Seton Identification Products. 2. Description: a. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color. b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 2 inches; square. C. Provide with brass hooks suitable for attaching the tag to the valve operator. d. Stamp or etch tags with the valve number and information on the valve schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, Inc.). f R&R Identification Co. g. Seton Identification Products. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 4 of 8 2. Description: a. Aluminum construction; stamped letters. b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 2 inches; square with finished edges. C. Provide with brass hooks suitable for attaching the tag to the valve operator. A d. Stamn or etch tags with the valve tag numbers from the P&ID Drawings, valve size, tvve, and manufacturing standard/specification info in a system required by Owner. C. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Seton Identification Products. 2. Description: a. Clear plastic with printed text and message.. b. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches. C. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties. 3. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter -size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum frame. 2.3 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 2. Marking Services, Inc. 3. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, Inc.). 4. R&R Identification Co. 5. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: 1. Quality: Clean-cut symbols. 2. Letters: OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE 3/4-in to 1-1/4-inch 1-1/2-in to 2-inch 2-1/2-in to 6-inch 8-in to 10-inch Over 10-inch SIZE OF LETTERS 1/2-inch 3/4-inch 1-1/2-inch 2-1/2-inch 3-inch CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 5 of 8 3. Flow direction arrows. C. Stencil Paint: 1. Description: Semigloss enamel. 2. As specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Marking Services, Inc. d. R&R Identification Co. e. Seton Identification Products. 2. Description: a. Factory -fabricated, flexible, and semi -rigid plastic. b. Preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. C. Larger sizes may be of maximum sheet size, with spring fastener. d. Letter sizes per Paragraph 2.313. e. Color shall be white or black depending on background color. 1 f. Flow direction arrows. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, Inc.). f. Seton Identification Products. 2. Description: a. Flexible, 3.5 mil vinyl film tape with pressure -sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. b. Letter sizes per Paragraph 2.3B. C. Color shall be white or black depending on background color. 1 d. Flow direction arrows. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 6 of 8 2.5 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady ID. 2. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inches. 3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification. 2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Master Lock Company, LLC. 2. Description: a. Material: Anodized aluminum. b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface. C. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches. B. Valve Lockout Devices: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Master Lock Company, LLC. 2. Description: a. Material: Steel. b. Furnish device to restrict access to valve operator and to accept lock shackle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 7 of 8 B. Stencil Painting: Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". 3.2 INSTALLATION A. According to manufacturer instructions. B. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". C. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. D. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion -resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive. E. Labels: 1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. 3. Titles: a. Locate a maximum 26 feet apart. b. Locate directly adjacent to pipeline breaches on each side wall. C. Locate adjacent to each side of the valve regulator, flow meter, strainer, cleanout and all pieces of equipment. d. Identify the contents by complete name at least once in each room or space and thereafter may be labeled by generally recognized abbreviations. F. Tags: 1. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 2. Install tags using corrosion -resistant chain. 3. Number tags consecutively by location. G. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. H. Piping: 1. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, plastic tape pipe markers, or stenciled painting. 2. Use tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller. 3. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 4. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 5. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs, including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. END OF SECTION 40 05 53 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 1 of 14 SECTION 40 05 57 - ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: Following types of actuators for linear, multi -turn, and quarter turn valves and gates: 1. Manual actuators. 2. Electric motor actuators. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous metalwork and fasteners as required. 2. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping" for hangers, anchors, sleeves, and sealing of piping to adjacent structures. 3. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" for common product requirements for valves for placement by this Section. 4. Section 40 05 93 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment": Motors for electric actuators. 5. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for touch up painting. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Where the term "valve" alone is used in this Section, it applies to both valves and gates as the corresponding text context dictates. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" for valve schedule requirements. B. Coordinate Work of this Section with installation of valves, gates, and accessories. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer information for actuator with model number and size indicated. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 2 of 14 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Parts list, materials, sizes, position indicators, limit contacts ,control system actuator mounting, wiring diagrams, control system schematics with external interfaces on assembly drawings. 2. Actuator Shop Drawings with respective valve and gate submittal. 3. Certified sizing calculations for the actuator including design, dvnamic, and rated 1 output torques, clearly listing valve pressure class, maximum operating design pressure or head, safety factors, rim pull and handwheel diameter (for manual actuators), turns to open, and cavitation calculations (for modulating dutv). Dvnamic torque calculations shall include the normal and worst case torques for the tvne of service — open/close and modulatinz For slide gates include calculations for ultimate thrust loads and moments transferred to structure. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer Instructions: Special procedures and placement requirements. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Results of factory tests and inspections and provide required certifications. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Qualifications Statements: 1. Qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Documentation of actual locations and types of actuators. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valve Actuators in NEC Class 1, Division 1 or 2, Group C & D, Hazardous Locations: Comply with NFPA 70. B. Minimum NEMA Enclosure Classification: 1. Non -submergence Installations: NEMA 4X. 2. Submergence Installations: NEMA 6P/IP68. C. Maintain a copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. D. Single Source Requirements: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 3 of 14 1. Furnish electric motor actuators in the scope of the project by the same manufacturer. Coordinate this requirement with actuated valves and gates included in scope of vender furnished equipment. 2. Furnish actuators, floor stands, stem guides, stems, extensions, and accessories for slide gate assemblies by slide gate manufacturer. E. Mate actuators to equipment at equipment manufacturers or integrators facility. 1. Test assembled product. Certify ready for installation prior to shipment to job site. 2. For extremely large assemblies requiring disassembly for installation, the actuator may be disassembled for shipment and remounted in the field. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings and maintain in place until installation. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Submit standard written warranty against manufacturing defects for manual and electric motor actuators. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 4 of 14 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. 2. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide COUNTERCLOCKWISE closed actuation on the valve and gate specifications, schedules or the Drawings. B. Actuators: 1. Move valve or gate from full open to full closed position and back again and hold valve or gate at any position part of the way between full open and closed. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide valves and gates with manual actuators that utilize an operating wheel, handle or lever. 3. Where noted, provide appropriate accessories to operate valves or gates provided with 2- inch operating nuts. 4. Provide gear manual actuators where manual operator effort is greater than 40 ft-lb rim pull. C. Supply chain actuators for manual valves located 7 feet or higher above fmished floor. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Floor Stands: 1. Materials: a. Stand: Cast iron or fabricated steel. b. Stem Bushing: Sintered bronze. C. Position Indicator: Bronze. d. Floor Stands: Epoxy coated. 2. Height to input shaft or handwheel: 32 inch or as scheduled or indicated in the Drawings. 3. Base Mounting Requirements: a. Concrete Floor Mounting: Type 316 stainless -steel anchor bolts. b. Face of Basin or Offset Mounting: Heavily reinforced, adjustable wall bracket with required anchor hardware using Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Actuator Mounting Requirements: a. Manual Actuator: Cast iron handwheel on top of floor stand with dual ball type thrust bearings, grease fitting on bearing bowl, hardened machined alloy bronze lift CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 5 of 14 nut (for rising stem). Where manual effort is greater than 40 lb rim pull with 2 feet diameter wheel, provide geared actuator with a handwheel or crank. 1) Handwheel casting to include the word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction of operation. b. Gearbox or Direct Powered Actuator: Through bolt holes matched to actuator or gearbox bolting pattern. 5. Non -rising stem position indicator: Mechanical indicator connected to and driven by stem extension and cast position marks on floor stand with the word "OPEN" cast at the top of the travel, and a field mounted aluminum "CLOSED" tag supplied with drive rivets, installed based on number of valve turns. 6. Rising Stem Position Indicator: Permanent markings on transparent stem covers. B. Stem Covers: Fracture -resistant clear butyrate plastic stem covers for rising stems. Closed top with markings to indicate valve/gate position. position indicator markings. C. Extension Stems and Stem Guides: 1. Extension stems and couplings to actuate recessed, buried, below slab valves and gates via operating nut or floor stand mounted actuator. 2. Stem Extensions and Stem Couplings: Type 316 stainless steel unless specified otherwise in the respective slide gate specification. 3. Stem and Stem Couplings: Rated for five times the maximum input torque capacity of the actuator. 4. Adjustable, Cast Iron Wall Bracket Type Stem Guides: Include bronze bushing. 5. Spacing: 10 feet spacing or at spacing calculated by manufacturer to prevent buckling with a safety factor of 2 based on design thrust, shaft material and shaft size. D. Torque Tubes: 1. Supply where shown on the Drawings or Valve and Gate Schedule. 2. Supported by/mated to valve bonnet/yoke. 3. Sized by supplier for the required actuator torque. 4. Drilled specifically for valve and actuator bolt pattern. 5. Internal extension keyed or shaped specifically to mate to valve shaft and fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Internal extension designed for axial adjustment for mating purposes. 2.3 MANUAL ACTUATORS A. Operating Nuts: 2-inch cast iron AWWA design. a. Painted Carbon Steel Tee Handle Operator: 2-inch AWWA nut socket end extension length for nut actuated valves where nuts are recessed in valve boxes. b. Tee Extension Length: Determine based on nut height as shown on Drawings with handle height approximately 3 feet above operating surface. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 6 of 14 2. Operating Nuts Recessed on Concrete: Cast iron floor box with cover and tee handle operator with 2-inch AWWA nut socket end. 3. Nut Operated Non -Rising Stem Buried Valves: Cast iron bonnet skirts, extension pipes valve box and cover. Stem extensions with AWWA nut end to elevation shown on the Drawings or scheduled. 4. Two tee handles for every ten buried or encased non -rising stem application with 2-inch AWWA operating nut. B. Gear -Assisted Manual Valve Actuators: 1. Provide: a. For manually actuated valves and gates larger than 8-inch nominal diameter and for ball and plug valves 6 inch and larger. b. With power actuators where torque requirements dictate. 2. Comply with AWWA C504. 3. Handwheel Diameter: 8-inch minimum. 4. Maximum Handwheel Pull: 40 lbs maximum. 5. Housings: Cast or ductile iron. 6. Worm or helical gear type. 7. Gears: Hardened steel, machine cut and mated. 8. Bearings: Permanently lubricated bronze. 9. Input and Output Shafts: Sealed with greased, waterproof machine shaft seals. 10. Filled with waterproof grease and designed for submerged service where scheduled. 11. Handwheel: Removable. a. Diameter: 8 inch up to 12 inch valve size. b. Diameter: 12 inch diameter up to 16 inch valve size. C. Diameter: 18 inch diameter for larger than 16 inch valve size. d. Maximum Diameter: 24-inch diameter. 12. Include mechanical top mounted valve position indication, opening direction, and adjustable stops. C. Chain Wheels: 1. Supply for manual valves 3 inch diameter or larger mounted 7 feet and greater above operating floor level. 2. Type: Sprocket rim with chain and floating chain guide. 3. Chain Wheel and Guides Materials: Cast iron with hot -dip galvanized chain. 4. Chain Length: Extend to 5-1/2 feet above operating floor level. 5. Chain Storage: Include where chains may interfere with personnel egress, made with high -strength thermoplastic polymer in safety orange color. a. Basis -of -Design: Trumbull, Model `Chain Up' as manufactured by Trumbull Manufacturing. Inc., or equal. 6. Chain Wall Hooks: Provide where feasible to prevent chain from impeding personnel egress. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 7 of 14 D. Direct Manual Slide Gate Actuators: 1. Small Gates not Requiring Gear Reduction to Achieve Rim Pull Requirements: Yoke or floor stand mounted handwheel with dual ball type thrust bearings, grease fitting on bearing bowl, hardened machined alloy bronze lift nut. E. Gear -Assisted Manual Slide Gate Actuators: 1. Provide manually actuated slide gates where direct mount actuators cannot meet rim pull requirements and design safety factors. 2. Include power actuators where torque requirements dictate. 3. Comply with AWWA C504. 4. Yoke mount for self-contained gates and floor stand mount for non -self-contained gates. 5. Accessories specified hereinabove where pertinent to the application. 6. Handwheel or crank style operator with maximum rim or crank pull of 40 lbs. a. Crank operators of cast iron construction with revolving brass grip. b. Handwheel casting to include the word "OPEN" and an arrow indicating the direction of operation. 7. Gear Boxes: a. Bevel or parallel shaft as required by installation geometry. b. Fully enclosed cast or ductile iron housings. C. Suitable for pedestal or yoke (bench) mounting. d. Mechanical seals on input shafting. e. Shafting fully supported with anti -friction ball or roller bearings throughout. f. Precision machined high strength bronze lift nuts. g. Precision cut steel gears. h. Input Shafts: Type 316 stainless steel. i. AWWA drive nut for removable crank, wheel or portable power operator to be 2 inches. j. Single or compound reduction as required to achieve rim pull requirements. k. No damage to gearbox components with 100 lbs rim pull. 1. Coordinate with gate stem design such that catastrophic failure occurs at stem nut prior to stem buckling. 8. Tandem gear drives where indicated on Gate Schedule. Tandem drives include parallel gear boxes, Type 316 stainless -steel interconnecting shafting, and flexible couplings furnished by the manufacturer. 2.4 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS A. General: 1. Where specified on the Valve and Gate Schedule. 2. Comply with AWWA C542. 3. Actuators for Valves 3 inches and Smaller: 120 Volt, 1 Phase, 60 Hertz power supply. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 8 of 14 a. Actuators for Valves Larger than 3 inches and for slide gates and weir gates: 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz power supply. B. Source Limitations: To minimize spare part inventories and training requirements, obtain 480 VAC electric motor operators from single electric motor operator manufacturer. C. 120 Volt Power Actuators: I Phase. 60 hz supply rated Actuators to have reversing motor, reduction gearing, local 3 position indicator, position limit contacts, provision for manual override, 100 to 1000 in- lbs torque range and motor thermal and electronic control protection. Enclosure: a. Cast aluminum or steel alloy. b. Powder coated or fusion bonded epoxy finish. C. Enclosure Ratings: 1) NEMA 4X or 7 for Class 1, Division 1 or 2 environment. 2. Power Train: a. Hardened steel and or hardened bronze alloy gears with bronze bearings. b. Disengageable manual override. C. Permanently lubricated. d. Housing Penetrations: Seal with mechanical seals. e. Housing: Equip with anti -condensation space heaters. f. Mounting System: ISO 5211. 3. Actuator for Open/Close/Jog Reversing Service: Proportional/modulating service where required in the equipment specifications or Instrumentation Drawings. 4. Motors: a. Design for valve actuation service. b. Insulation: Class F. C. Split phase capacitor protection. 1 d. Dutv Cvcle: 50 percent at 50 decrees C for open/close duty, and 50 percent for modulatine dutv. e. 90-Degree Travel Time: 3 to 20 seconds depending on actuator size. f. Actuator Switches: Have two SPDT 15 Amp rated switches for remote open/close valve position indication. 5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Series 92 as manufactured by Asahi/America. b. P Series as manufactured by Promation Engineering, Inc. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 9 of 14 AD. 480 Volt Power Actuators: 1. General: 3 phase 60 hz supply rated, self-contained, totally enclosed with motor, integral 3 reversing starters, local controls, reduction gearing, reduction gearing, limit contacts, control power transformer, torque sensing, bored and keyed drive sleeve for non -rising stems, declutch lever, auxiliary handwheel, and local position indication. 2. Separately seal motor and control compartments with space heaters in limit contact, motor, and control compartments. 3. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use, fully functional in ambient temperature range from 40 to 140 degrees F at 100 percent relative humidity. 4. Size to guarantee full travel, seating and unseating torque or thrust as specified by the valve or gate manufacturer. 5. Size to provide 1 %2 times the torque required to operate the valve or gate. 6. Duty rated as required for open/close or modulating service. 7. Designed to have control functionality as described herein and shall be factory. 8. configured to interface with field control and signal wiring as indicated on the Drawings. 9. Size to provide torque required to operate valve or gate at 90 percent of nominal voltage. 10. Design Travel Rate: a. As indicated on valve and gate schedule, and if not so indicated: 1) Gate Valves and Slide Gates: 12 inches per minute. 2) Globe Valves: 4 inches per minute. 3) Quarter Turn Valves: 30 seconds per 1 foot of throat diameter. 11. Enclosure: a. Cast iron construction. 0-ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 4X/6 and submersible to IP 68-8, 26 feet for 96 hours per EN 60529, if required. b. NEMA 4X for watertightness from pressure hose. C. NEMA 6 for submergence up to 6 feet for 30 minutes. d. NEMA 6P for submergence up to 15 feet for 72 hours. e. IP 68-8 for submergence up to 26 feet for 96 hours per EN 60529. f. NEMA 7 or FM XP for Class 1, Division 1 & 2, Groups C & D hazardous environment. g. Operate successfully a minimum of 10 full cycles under submersion. h. External Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. i. Include anti -condensation heater, suitable for continuous operation with alarm output to indicate heater failure. 12. Motors: a. High -starting torque; low stall torque, low inertia, total enclosed non -ventilated type (TENV), designed and built by actuator manufacturer. b. Embed thermistor in each motor winding for thermal protection. 1 C. Insulation: Class H, with a duty rating of at least 30 minutes at SO degrees C ambient temperature. d. Electrical disconnection by means of plug and socket. Allow motor removal without loss of lubricant. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 10 of 14 e. Hardware to ensure motor runs with correct rotation for required direction of valve travel regardless of power supply connection sequence. f. Modulating Service: Class 4, 1200 starts per hour. g. Actuator to include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct rotation for the required direction of valve travel regardless of the connection sequence of the power supply. 13. Motor Protection: a. De -energize without damage in the event of a stall condition when attempting to move a jammed valve. b. De -energize in the event of an over -torque condition. C. Imbed a minimum of three thermal devices in motor windings to de -energize the motor in case of overheating. d. Lost phase protection algorithm. 14. Gear Train: a. Grease filled, O-ring sealed in cast or ductile iron gear case. b. Suitable for operation in any orientation. C. Hardened, machine cut steel gears, and precision machined alloy bronze worm gear. d. Reduction gearboxes as specified in Part 2 "Manual Actuators" Article. 15. Manual Operation: a. Handwheel which does not rotate during motor operation. b. Output contact with declutch mechanism to indicate manual operation. C. Utilize actuator worm shaft/worm wheel to maintain self-locking gearing and to facilitate changeover from motor to manual operation when the actuator is under load. Do not use designs that bypass actuator worm gear or break valve load at worm gear. d. Automatic return from manual to motor operation upon starting motor. e. Manual operation capable with seized motor. 16. Position and Torque Calibration: a. Sensing by absolute encoder using hall effect sensors. Incremental encoders requiring batteries to retain settings upon loss of power are not acceptable. Settings stored in permanent non-volatile memory. b. Torque and travel adjustment parameters: 1) Position Setting Range: Resolution of 2.81 degrees and accuracy to 5.0 degrees of actuator output. 2) Torque Setting: 40 to 100 percent of rated torque. Torque switch bypass for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque switch trip during unseating or during starting in mid -travel against high inertia loads. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 11 of 14 17. Wiring and Terminals: a. Tropical grade insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the control and 3- phase power. b. Include a removable plug and socket head for termination of all external wiring. Include actuators without plug and socket terminal connections having power and control disconnect switches for ease of maintenance and safety. 18. Controls: a. Microprocessor: Based with mechanically and electronically interlocked reversing contactors for Open/Close duty and solid-state contactors for modulating duty. b. Local/Off /Remote Selector Switch and Open/Stop/Close Pushbuttons: Mount on actuator face with red and green indication lights for open/close and amber for fault. C. Remote On/Off Service: Actuator to accept one remote signal to open and a second remote signal to close. d. Modulating Service: When in remote mode, actuator to accept a 4 to 20 mA DC position control signal and position valve 0 to 100 percent of travel in proportion to control signal. e. Monitoring Relays: Remotely indicate fault signal for indication of power failure, phase failure, thermal switch tripped, torque switch tripped between travel stops, and Local -Off -Remote selector switch position. f. Gear Actuated Position Transmitter: On modulating duty actuator that is a two - wire device, produce 4 to 20 mA DC signal proportional to 0 to 100 percent travel. g. Transmitter: Have easily accessible zero and span adjustment potentiometers. h. DC Power Supply: Integral with operator and powered from I I0-volt AC internal transformer. Positioner board to provide repeatable accuracy to 0.15 percent of span and have separate trim pots for zero, span, and dead band adjustment. 19. Where noted in valve and gate schedules, actuators to have a digital control module to allow valves or gates to be positioned remotely via a 2-wire non-proprietary field bus protocol. Equip digital control module with serial communication ports to allow actuation by the Plant's SCADA system linked by a 2-wire local area network utilizing function code (report by exception). Arrange in a self -healing ring configuration with multi -drop taps to each actuator. 20. Position Indication: Continuous mechanical dial indication of valve and gate position in step with the actuator at all times in both the hand wheel and motor operation. For modulating applications, graduations on mechanical dial position indicator to be 0 to 100 percent scale. 21. Limit Contacts: a. Adjustable type to trip at any point between fully opened and fully closed. b. Do not allow set position to be lost if over travel occurs in either manual or electric modes of operation. C. Four independent and fully adjustable rotary type position limit contacts each with 15 Amp DPDT contacts for remote open/close position indication and remote alarms. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 12 of 14 22. Torque Sensing: Actuator with adjustable torque sensing responsive to load encountered in either direction of travel. 23. Terminal Compartment: a. Separate from the inner electrical components of actuator with a watertight seal. b. Three threaded cable entries. C. Stud -type Terminals: Embed in a terminal block of high tracking -resistance compound. d. Three-phase Power Terminals: Shroud from control terminals by means of an insulating cover. 24. Remote Control Stations: a. For actuators located below the operating floor or located more than 7 feet above the operating floor, provide a UL Listed remote control station at the operating floor level with the same enclosure rating as the actuator. Provide remote control stations for motorized valves at Scum Pump Station No. I and 2. b. Include a Local/Off/Remote selector switch, Open/Stop/Close pushbuttons and Open/Close indicating lights. 1) Local/Off/Remote selector to include padlock mount for the Off position. C. Include auxiliary contacts for remote indication of switch position. d. Control Station: Match the controls of the unit and allow for remote control settings including limits, torque sensing and other required adjustments that can be made on the actuator. 25. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following. a. Model 80-6000-27 Group 88 as manufactured by Beck. b. Model IQ as manufactured by Rotork, Plc. 1 C. Model AUMA SIPOS as manufactured by AUMA Reister GmbH & Co. KG. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Shop inspect and test completed assemblies. 2. Factory performance test each actuator and supply individual test certificates. Submit test certificates prior to shipment of valve actuators. Test equipment to simulate a typical valve and gate load, and record the following parameters: a. No load current. b. Current at maximum torque setting. C. Stall current. d. Torque at maximum torque setting. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 13 of 14 e. Stall torque. f. Test voltage and frequency. g. Flash test voltage. h. Actuator output speed. B. Owner Inspection: 1. Make completed valve and actuator assembly available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. 2. Notify Owner at least fourteen days before inspection is allowed. C. Owner Witnessing: 1. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and test at manufacturer's test facility. 2. Notify Owner at least fourteen days before inspections and tests are scheduled. D. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's published installation instructions. B. Securely mount actuators using brackets or hardware specifically designed for attachment to valves. C. Extend chain actuators to 5 — 1/2 feet above operating floor level. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. B. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 57 ACTUATORS FOR PROCESS VALVES AND GATES Page 14 of 14 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within the warranty period from the date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Perform adjustments during normal occupancy hours. 3.5 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain actuators. Time Duration: Allow four hours during a single day per type of actuator. 19121 Z6]1.y916iIto]►01Z11WA CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 05 59.17 - COMPOSITE STOP LOGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Composite Stop Logs. 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install the composite stop logs and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 03 - Concrete includes concrete work 2. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Fasteners, brackets, and other miscellaneous metal fabrications as required by this Section. 3. Section 09 96 76.23 Wastewater Treatment Coatings. 4. Section 46 05 53 - Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment: Nameplates for equipment specified in this Section". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operating Head: Distance from centerline of log set to maximum water level of channel, or top of structure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for system materials and component equipment. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate system materials and component equipment. 2. Complete description of all materials cross-referenced to a sectional drawing listing material by trade name and ASTM reference number. 3. Certified shop and installation Drawings showing all details of construction, dimensions, spacing, clearances, and anchor bolt locations. Submit installation and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. CDM Smith Village Creek Water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 2 of 10 4. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 5. The weight of each component. 6. Description of surface preparation and shop prime painting of stop logs and accessories. 7. Indicate identification number, location, service, type, size, design pressure, operator details, stem details, and loads. 8. A listing of all forces transmitted to floor stands if applicable. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. Certify that installation is completed according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions for seating and unseating pressure. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For stop logs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. B. Welding certificates. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop inspections and certificate of compliance as specified herein. D. Field Quality -Control Reports: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: 1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Indicate activities on Site, adverse findings, and recommendations. F. Qualifications Statements: Submit qualifications for manufacturer and licensed professional. G. Insert other kinds of informational submittals such as design data and manufacturer's field reports as necessary for the Section. CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 3 of 10 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 0177 19 - Closeout Procedures: Requirements for closeout procedures. B. Section 0178 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed stop logs and components. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Sections 0178 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data and 0177 19 - Closeout Requirements for maintenance materials requirements. 1. Instructions prepared specifically for this installation to include all required catalog cuts, drawings, equipment lists, and descriptions necessary to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. Installation drawings, wiring diagrams, and maintenance requirements and schedules, and safety information. B. Spare Parts: 1. Furnish one set of manufacturer's recommended spare parts. C. Tools: Furnish special tools and other devices required for Owner to maintain equipment. Provide special tools and spare parts required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience. B. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. C. All welds to be performed by welders with AWS D1.6 certification. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND DANDLING A. Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 4 of 10 C. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote for construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer's instructions. 3. Protect unpainted finished iron and steel surfaces to prevent rust and corrosion. 4. Protect finished surfaces of exposed flanges with wood or equivalent blank flanges. 5. Protect bearings against formation of rust in accordance with bearing manufacturer's recommendations. Apply lubricant or corrosion inhibiting treatment during transportation, storage, handling, installation, and lapse of time prior to start-up. Intermittently manually rotate equipment prior to start-up to ensure distribution of lubricant/protection. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify all field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Section 0177 19 - Closeout Requirements: warranty requirements. B. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for stop log equipment and accessories. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Plasti-Fab 2. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Stop Log Schedule at the end of this specification and the Drawings. B. Stop logs shall be designed for severe duty, raw sewage / wastewater service. The materials shall exhibit excellent resistance to corrosion from sewage wastewater and associated gases CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 5 of 10 including H2S, ammonia and mercaptans. Logs shall also exhibit excellent UV resistance (with inhibitors or additives added to resin) and shall not de -laminate. C. Operating Head: 1. Safety Factor: Design to operate under specified operating seating and unseating head with a minimum safety factory of four. This applies to stop logs, and framing. Use a safety factor of five minimum for anchorage. 2. Calculate safety factors for each log under maximum head and shear at the log/seal interface. 3. Include in comprehensive safety factor calculations bending moments, buckling stress, bonding stress with thermal expansion factors as referenced in NASA CR-1457, "Manual for Plates and Shells." D. Stiffness: Design each log for a deflection of less than 1/750 of the span. Submit drawings and comprehensive design criteria to show that the required deflection figure for each log has been achieved. E. Design internal log reinforcing members to withstand the hydraulic forces and/or mechanical operating loads to be imposed upon the individual log. Base data upon horizontal support members. F. Provide room and facilities for inspection, repairs, and adjustments. 2.3 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS A. Frame Construction: 1. Guides shall be styled for wall surface (face) mounting or in -channel mounting as needed to meet project requirements. Guides shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel and shall have a slot suitable for mating with the stop log. Guides to be bolted to the head wall shall be equipped with heavy duty mounting angle for ease of mounting to the channel wall by means of Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Inverts shall be flush with the channel bottom or pipe inverts per drawings 2. Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 3. Frames shall provide a smooth sealing face that extends the full depth of the clear opening on both sides and bottom of the frame assembly. 4. Anchorage: Use Type 316 Stainless Steel Hilti RE500 for frame mounting or other approved safety anchor bolts. 5. Grout: nominal one inch base. B. Seals: 1. Multi -finger independent type. 2. Seals shall be made of molded or extruded virgin Neoprene having a hardness of 55 - 65 Shore A Durometer, conforming to ASTM D-2000, with a maximum compression set of 25 %, and low temperature brittleness 3. Side Seals: have a coefficient of friction of 0.10 or less. 4. Fit the sides and bottom of each log with multi -flap, low leakage, water activated, resilient elastomeric seals. CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 6 of 10 a. Logs shall be designed for sealing under bi-directional flow (seating and unseating) scenarios for Primary Effluent Junction Box I. Provide side seals at both faces of the bi-directional logs b. Logs shall be designed for sealing under uni-directional flow (unseating) for Primary Clarifier Effluent / Outlet boxes. Provide single side seal w/water side markings for uni-directional logs. 5. Provide dual seals at the bottom of all logs. 6. Leakage Rate At design seating head, under normal operating conditions, do not exceed 0.05 gallons per minute per foot of sealing perimeter. C. Logs: 1. Material: Aramid fiber reinforced homogeneous composite plastic material. Composition of the stop log laminate shall be in accordance with the recommendations shown in the Quality Assurance Report for Reinforced Thermoset Plastic (RTP) Corrosion Resistant Equipment prepared under the sponsorship of the Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (SPI). And the Material Technology Institute (MTI) of the Chemical Process Industry for "Hand Lay-up Laminates," and shall meet the specifications for Type 1, Grade 10 laminates shown in Appendix M-1 of said report. 2. Stop log shall consist of corrosion resistant metal structural matrix and cover fabricated so as to totally surround the internal structural matrix and protect it against corrosion from moisture or chemical deterioration. Stop log covers that are fabricated from pressed or laminated sheet material and glued to a substructure shall not be acceptable. 3. GRP, PVC coated steel, Co -polymer, UHMWPE fabrications or any other reinforcement fibers are unacceptable. 4. Outer Skin: minimum thickness of 1/4-inch and be non -toxic, ultraviolet light -stabilized and in accordance with Class One fire resistance. 5. Log requirements: a. Tensile Strength 15,000 psi b. Young's Modulus 1,200,000 psi C. Flexural Strength 23,000 psi d. Flexural Modulus 1,497,000 psi e. Compressive Strength 22,000 psi f. Impact Strength 9 ft-lbs/in. g. Water Absorption <0.13% (in 24 hours) h. Specific Gravity 1.72 i. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 1.6 x 10-5 per °C j. Heat Distortion Point (ASTM D648) 88°C k. Low Temperature Impact Strength 93% at —200C 1. Notch Sensitivity None in. Weathering Properties Excellent n. Flammability (ASTM D635-56T) Self -extinguishing o. Chemical Resistance 56 R (Organic, alkaline, ozone (2-3 ppm)) p. Weight Not to exceed 2,000 lb per log piece* *If additional weight is required, Contractor to coordinate the supply of larger crane at no additional cost to the Owner. See M-sheets. Also see Table 40 05 60-A at the end of this Section. D. Minimum log thickness shall be 4.5-inches, and shall meet the specified design criteria. Each log shall be molded individually to the exact dimensions specified. Stop logs shall be CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 7 of 10 manufactured of reinforced thermoset plastic containing ultraviolet absorbers. The surface shall be resin -rich to a depth of 0.010 inches to 0.020 inches and reinforced with C-glass or polymeric fiber surfacing material. The surface shall be free of exposed reinforcing fibers. The composition of these layers shall be approximately 95% (by weight) resin. The remaining laminate shall be made up of copolymer composite and reinforcing fibers in a form, orientation and position to meet the mechanical requirements. Structural reinforcing shall be utilized to attain the necessary stiffness to meet deflection requirements, and shall be well encapsulated with a laminate not less than 1/4 inch thick on each side to insure against any permeation by water to the core area. Type 316 stainless steel lifting (pins/eyes) shall be fastened to the log with sufficient reinforcing to withstand the lifting force. E. All stop logs shall be flat and level. Defects such as cracks, crazing, chips, pits, blisters, dry spots, fish eyes, burned areas, entrapped air, scratches (>0.002 inches depth), exposed glass, cut edges, wrinkles, blisters, surface porosity, foreign matter entrainment are not acceptable. F. Fit logs into position in the framework in any order and all contact faces shall be made in materials designed to avoid the possibility of seizure or sticking. G. Lifting Pins: Four stainless steel type 316 into each log to aid in lifting the logs. H. Lifting Beam: The lifting beam shall be built in such a manner as to automatically latch on to the stop logs when lowered into the guide frame. The lifting beam shall also have a tagline release mechanism. 1. Beam shall be carbon steel, epoxy coated. 2. Manufactured from continuously welded carbon steel which has been sand blasted (SA 2.5, Near White), 3. Primer: Flame -sprayed zinc (4-6 mils). 4. Finish: As specified in Division 9. 5. Dry Film Thickness: As specified in Division 9. I. Hook pins shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel. Provide four (4) racks for storing the stop logs. Each rack constructed of 316 Stainless Steel. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assemblies. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. When fabricator is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. 2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Surface preparation and shop painting: Section 09 96 76.23. CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 8 of 10 B. Stainless -Steel Surfaces: Mill finish. C. Welds: sandblasted to remove weld burn and scale. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0177 19 - Closeout Procedures B. Verify that facilities are ready to receive stop logs. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install stop logs according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure that products are installed plumb, true, and free of warp or twist. C. Field verify all dimensions and conditions to avoid interference with handrails and other Work. Field verify sufficient clearances for adequate lifting and removal of stop log equipment. Contractor to coordinate with crane selection. D. Frames and guides installed in a true vertical plane with 90 degree corners. E. Guides: 1. Recessed: a. Cut slot in concrete to receive guides. b. Position guides at elevation as required. C. Grout guides in place according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Verify alignment of stop log and components. 2. Verify that stop log operates smoothly and does not bind or scrape. B. Manufacturer Services: CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 9 of 10 Furnish services of manufacturer's representative factory trained, certified, and experienced with complete knowledge of proper operation, maintenance, and installation of products furnished under this Section: a. One (1) 8-hour day on -Site for installation and inspection (to assist location of anchor bolts; setting, leveling, field erection, etc.). b. One (1) 8-hour day for startup, and field testing. C. One (1) 8-hour day for instructing Owner's personnel in maintenance of equipment. 1) Training to include theory of operation, troubleshooting guidance, recognizing normal and abnormal operating conditions, step-by-step startup and shutdown procedures, and operational limitations. d. Specified time requirement listed is exclusive of travel time and does not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. e. Manufacturer and Contractor to coordinate as required within the Contractor's specified construction schedule. C. Prior to start-up, furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for start-up and testing. D. Testing: 1. Comply with AWWA C563. Latest edition. 2. Leakage: Not exceeding 0.05 gallons per minute per foot for stop logs. 3. After installation, field test all stop logs to ensure that all items of equipment are in compliance with the Specifications, including the leakage requirements. 4. In the event that any unit fails to meet the above requirements, make necessary changes and retest. If the unit remains unable to meet the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, remove and replace with a satisfactory unit. E. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. 2. There shall be no visible leakage between blocks. 3. Stay under the leakage allowance between logs and guide frame (ie 50% of AWWA C563 standard) F. Submit the manufacturer's Certificate of Field Testing. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stop logs to provide smooth leakage free operation. 3.6 ATTACHMENTS CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.17 COMPOSITE STOP LOGS Page 10 of 10 f f ? TABLE 40 05 59.17-A - Schedule of Composite Stop Logs Width Sets of F Number of Tall Logs Operator Location Equipment Mounting of Frame and Invert Seating Unseating Floor Tag Frames & Guide Elevation Head Head Elevation Logs Frame provided* Primary 13 Logs+ Clarifier STL- Surface 1 84_ Guide 448.33 13-ft 13-ft 462.00 No.2 3100-02 Mount inch Effluent Frame Primary 13 Logs+ Clarifier STL- Surface 1 84 Guide 448.33 13-ft 13-ft 462.00 No.3 3100-03 Mount inch Frame Effluent Primary Guide Clarifier STL- Surface 1 84_ Frame 448.33 13-ft 13-ft 462.00 No.4 3100-04 Mount inch only Effluent Box I 78„ PE STL- Surface 96- 15 Logs+ Pipe to 3100-01 Mount 1 inch Guide 445.50 15-ft 15-ft 461.50 PEPS IA Frame & 1B) Box I 15 Logs+ (E 72" PE STL- Surface 1 96- Guide 445.50 15-ft 15-ft 461.50 Pipe to 3100-02 Mount inch Frame PEPS 2) Box I Guide " (S 90" PE STL- Surface 1 96- Frame 445.50 15-ft 15-ft 461.50 Pipe from 3100-03 Mount inch Onl PC 3, & 4) —Y Box I Guide (W 72" PE STL- Surface 96- A Pipe from 3100-04 Mount 1 inch Frame 445.50 15-ft 15-ft 461.50 PC 2) Only *If required to stay within 2,000-lb weight limit for removal using specified crane, log portions may be provided at smaller heights/intervals than 2 feet. END OF SECTION 40 05 59.17 CDM Smith Village Creek water Reclamation Facility Grit Removal Process CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 05 59.23 - STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless steel slide gates. 2. Delegated design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 03 "Concrete" includes concrete work. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications": Fasteners, brackets and other miscellaneous metal fabrications as required by this Section. 3. Section 26 05 03 "Equipment Wiring Connections": Conduit and electrical power to gate actuators. 4. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" 5. Division 40 "Process Interconnections" for instrumentation and controls". 6. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment": Electric motors and accessories normally supplied as a part of equipment assemblies. 7. Section 40 6196 "Process Control Descriptions". 8. Section 40 05 23 "Common Work Results for Process Valves" for powered lifting devices. 9. Section 46 05 53 "Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment' for nameplates for equipment specified in this Section. 10. Section 40 05 57 "Actuators for Process Valves and Gates." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operating Head: Distance from centerline of gate to maximum water level of channel. f� �14 [fill 211 01VON 0 to] ►1 A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections. 1.5 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 2 of 10 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product information for system materials and component equipment. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System materials and component equipment. 2. Description of materials cross-referenced to a sectional drawing listing material by trade name and ASTM reference number. 3. Certified shop and installation drawings showing details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 4. Installation and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. 5. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. 6. The weight of each component. 7. Description of surface preparation and shop prime painting of gates and accessories. 8. Gate identification number, location, service, type, size, design pressure, operator details, stem details, and loads. 9. Listing of forces transmitted to floor stands if applicable. C. Submit actuator sizing calculations for each valve size, and application (open/close and 1 modulatin-). Include with a free bodv diazram additional calculations for ultimate thrust loads and moments transferred to structure. D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittals: Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design Acalculations and assumptions for seating and unseating pressure. B. Oualifcations of the Manufacturer's P.E.. 1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Results of shop tests and inspections. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: 1. Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer's instructions. 2. Document activities on Site, adverse findings, and recommendations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 3 of 10 F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and licensed professional. 1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed slide gates and components. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: 1. Furnish one set of manufacturer's recommended spare parts. B. Tools: Furnish special Tools and other devices required for Owner to maintain equipment. Provide special tools and spare parts required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. C. O&M Manual: Two copies of manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Include required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 2. Include trouble shooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF Standard 61 and NSF Standard 372. B. Maintain a copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. 1.12 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience. B. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND 14ANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect materials from physical damage, moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from areas involved in construction operations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 4 of 10 1. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer's instructions. 1.14 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Document field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty for slide gates. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty that clear plastic stem covers will not crack, discolor, or become opaque. C. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stainless steel slide gates. B. Refer to Slide Gate Schedule at the end of this specification section and the Drawings. C. Minimum Vertical Loading: 50 percent of force on the gate from operating head acting on horizontal centerline of gate, multiplied by effective gate area, plus weight of slide and stem. D. Gate Reinforcement: As required for deflection not greater than 1/360 of span. E. Operating Head: 1. Safety Factor: Design gate to operate under specified operating head with safety factory of five. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Whipps, Inc. 2. RW Gate. 3. Fontaine/Aquanox. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 5 of 10 B. Description: 1. Comply with AWWA C561. a. Leakage shall not exceed 0.05 gpm/ft of wetted seal perimeter in seating head and unseating head conditions. 2. Non -Self -Contained Gates. a. Non self-contained stainless steel slide gate, with extended frame, yoke, lifting stem attached to yoke, lift and lift support, stem, stem guide, and stem block. A3C. Gates: Type 316 stainless steel, self-contained type with disc arranged to lower or raise to open and with guides designed to mount on the face of or embedded in concrete. The ffate slide shall seal on all sides of the opening - top, bottom, and vertical. Disc or Sliding Member: Type 316 and the stainless -steel plate reinforced with "U" or angle -shaped stainless -steel members welded to the plate not more than 16 inch apart. a. Deflection: 1/320 of span of the gate under the design head. b. Reinforcing Ribs: Extend into guides so they overlap seating surface of the guide. C. A Specially Molded Resilient Seal: 1) Mounted on bottom of embedded unit discs or on the edge of the disc to provide flush bottom closure. 2) Seal Shape: Produce a seating surface with minimum width of 3/4 inch and extend into secondary slot of the guide. 3) Vertical Seal Face: In contact with seating surface of guide providing a proper seal at the corners. d. Reinforcements, Retainer and Bolts: Same material as disc. e. The invert of embedded unit frames to have an angle welded to the lower ends of the guides forming a seating surface for a resilient seal mounted on the disc. Angle to be the same material as the guides. Slide closing on a flush invert seat/seal secured within the bottom member of the gate frame will be acceptable. Sealing 3 system shall retain specified performance even after 25.000 operating cvcles. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Configuration: Removable. 4. Emergency Lifting Eyebolts a. Provide eyebolts to enable lifting slide gates manually in emergency situations. b. 316 stainless steel wire rope with 2' of slack when gate is fully closed. Rope and its components to be designed to withstand 5 times the weight of the gate. A D. Guides: Type 316 stainless -steel construction, designed for maximum rigidity, weighing a 3 minimum of 10 lbs per foot. The gate frame shall seal on all sides of the opening - top, bottom, and vertical. Holes for anchor bolts every 18 inches for face mounted units or embedding keyways for embedded units. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 6 of 10 2. Guides to extend beneath opening a sufficient amount to support the disc in fully down or open position for downward opening gates. 3. Weld angle to guides across the invert of the opening on face -mounted gates and up both sides of all gates. Attach a hollow bulb "J" or "P"-seal to angle with stainless steel strips and attaching bolts. Arrange seal so it deflects 1/16 inch minimum. Angle, strips and bolts to be the same material as the guides. UMHWPE slide seals with compression cords will be acceptable. Sealinz shall retain specified performance even after 25,000 30 operating cvcles. 4. Where Guides extend above operating floor, they must be sufficiently strong, so no further reinforcing is required. 5. Where required, the yoke supporting the operating bench stand will be formed by two angles welded at top of the guides providing a one-piece rigid frame. E. Yokes: Structural steel. Welded or bolted to gate frame. Arrangement: Disc and stem to be removable without disconnecting the yoke. F. Seats: Impacted into dovetail slots and held in position without use of screws or other fasteners. Maximum Clearance between Seating Faces: 0.004 inch when gate is fully closed. G. Wedges: Machined brass blocks with angled faces and secured with a stud bolt to prevent slippage during operation. Wedge Types: Side, top, and bottom. H. Frames: One-piece configuration. 1. Mounting: As indicated at the schedule at the END OF SECTION. 2. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Furnish continuous embed or mounting flange. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Seats: Ultra -high -molecular -weight polymer. 6. Bottom Flush Closure: Resilient seal securely attached to frame along invert. I. Lifting Nut: Brass. 1. Grease fitting. 2. Polymer bearing pads above and below lifting nut. Lifting Stem: Type 316 stainless steel for the entire length. 1. Tensile Strength: 60,000 psi. 2. Diameter: Of sufficient size at base of thread to lift the weight of the gate, offset the resistance of the gate to the maximum unbalanced head and fully allow for starting impact. 3. Transmit in compression at least two times the rated output of the crank operated floor stand with a 40 effort on the crank. 4. Stems More Than One Section: Joined by stainless steel couplings pinned and bolted to the stems. 5. Threaded and Keyed Couplings of Same Size: To be interchangeable. 6. Bronze Stop Collars: On the stem preventing over closing of the gate. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 7 of 10 7. Minimum Diameter: 1-1/2 inch to withstand twice the rated output of the operator. 8. Slenderness Ratio (1/r): Less than 200. 9. Non -Rising Stems: Non -rising stems shall have a bronze nut. Equip stems with adjustable bronze stop collars above and below the lift nut preventing over opening or over closing the gate. 10. Stem Guides: Provide as recommended by manufacturer. Stainless -steel matching gate 3 material grade, or high nickel content cast iron, bronze brushed, mounted in a high nickel content cast iron bracket. Adjustable in two directions and spaced at sufficient intervals to adequately support the stem. Spacing not to exceed 10 feet. 11. Configuration: As indicated at the schedule at the END OF SECTION. 12. Thread: Machine cut threads, Acme type, double lead. Cut threads are not acceptable. 13. Diameter: 1-1/8 inch. 14. Fully lubricated. 15. Maximum Number of Turns: 16 per foot of travel. 16. Stem Covers: Provide rising stem gates with clear fracture resistant butyrate plastic covers. a. Will not discolor or become opaque for a minimum of 5 years after installation. b. Capped, vented, and of a length to allow full travel of gate. C. Bottom end mounted in a housing or adapter plate for easy field mounting. d. Indicator markings showing gate position. A. Stainless -Steel Surfaces: Mill finish. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. Conform to ASTM A193/A194 and F593/F594 unless otherwise specified. B. Attaching Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. Furnished by slide gate manufacturer. C. Nameplates: Per Section 46 05 53, "Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment." 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop inspection and testing of completed assemblies. B. Owner Inspection: Make completed clarifier equipment available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Owner seven days before inspection is allowed. C. Owner Witnessing: Allow witnessing of factory inspections and test at manufacturer's test facility. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled. D. Certificate of Compliance: When fabricator is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 8 of 10 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify facilities are ready to receive slide gates. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install slide gates according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure products are installed plumb, true, and free of warp or twist. C. Locate operators to avoid interference with handrails and other Work. D. Gate Installation: Under the supervision of the gate manufacturer's factory representative. 1. Factory Representative: Furnish services for one day. Who has complete knowledge of proper installation, startup and operation of cast iron slide gates. Inspect the final installation and supervise a test of the equipment. E. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's fabrication or Contractor's installation, additional service will be provided at no cost to the Owner. F. Guides: Surface and Flange Mounted. 1. Install guides with expansion anchors. 2. Position guides at elevation as indicated on Drawings. G. Guides: Recessed. 1. Cut slot in concrete to receive guides. 2. Position guides at elevation as indicated on Drawings. 3. Grout guides in place according to manufacturer's instructions. H. Sealant: 1. Apply 1/8 inch thick layer of elastomeric sealant to back of frame. 2. Tighten nuts snug until sealant begins to flow beyond frame. 3. Remove excess sealant. 4. Cure sealant for minimum seven days. 5. Tighten nuts to their final positions. I. Lubricants: Oil and grease as required for initial operation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 9 of 10 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Verify gate and components alignment, smooth operation, with no binding or scraping. B. Testing per AWWA C561: 1. Leakage Under 20 feet of Seating or Unseating Head: 0.05 gpm/ft. of seating perimeter 2. After installation, field test slide gates ensuring items of equipment are in compliance with Specifications, including leakage requirements. 3. For units failing to meet specified requirements, make necessary change and retest units. If unit remains unable to meet test requirements to Engineer's satisfaction, it will be replaced with a satisfactory unit at no additional cost to Owner. C. Manufacturer Services: Manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished per this Section for a minimum of 8 days on Site for installation, inspection, field testing, and instructing and training Owner's personnel in maintenance of equipment. D. Equipment Acceptance: Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and re -inspect. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. E. Furnish physical checkout and installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. F. Submit the equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Field Testing. G. Submit the equipment manufacturer's Certificate of Functional Testing. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust slide gates to provide smooth operation. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment operation, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. 3.7 ATTACHMENTS A. Slide Gate Schedule: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 59.23 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES Page 10 of 10 GATE SIZE GATE DESIGN HEAD (FEET) OPENING TYPE OF TYPE OF RISING OR THIMBLE ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT WxH TYPEA SEATING/UNSEATINGB DIRECTION CLOSUREC ACTUATION NON -RISING REQUIREDB REQUIREMENTS TAG NO. (INCHES) STEMD SG-3001-01 72 x 78 NSC 19 19 Upward FM Modulating R Yes 1 SG-3001-02 72 x 78 NSC 19 19 Upward FM Modulating R Yes SG-3000-01 72 x 72 NSC 14 14 Upward FM Open/Close R Yes 1 SG-3000-02 72 x 72 NSC 14 14 Upward FM Open/Close R Yes SG-3000-03 72 x 72 NSC 14 14 Upward FM Open/Close R Yes SG-3000-04 72 x 72 NSC 14 14 Upward FM Open/Close R Yes Notes: 1. All gates are single stem construction. 2. All gates are motor operated by actuator. A Gate Type: SC = Self-contained, NSC = non -self-contained. s Design head: Measured from surface of water to centerline of gate, in feet. c Type of closure: W = weir service; FB = flush bottom (embedded); FM = face mounted D Rising or non -rising stem: R = rising; NR = non -rising E Wall Thimble: Wall Thimble is required = Yes; Wall Thimble is not required = No. END OF SECTION 40 05 59.23 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 05 61.43 - KNIFE GATE VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw► WI1LS1u1F."IWA A. Section Includes: 1. Open bonnet resilient seat design knife gate valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" Administrative requirements and basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Section 0122 00 "Unit Prices" for Contract Measurement and Payment procedures. B. Knife Gate Valves: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes valve, fittings, and accessories. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Obtain approval by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 2 of 6 D. Provide certl%led valve actuator sizing calculations and reouired torque ratlnQs to enable sizin,- the portable drill actuator to be supplied with the valve. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test valves in accordance with AWWA C520. B. Provide Installation Inspection and Operator Training per Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". C. Provide testing and inspection certificates. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. 1. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements". 2. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Knife Gate Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPEN BONNET RESILIENT SEAT KNIFE GATE VALVES — Tag Type KGV2, VPKGV2 A. Manufacturers: 1. ITT Fabri-Valve Model C67. 2. Hilton Model H 202-SC, SCV. 3. DeZURIK KGC. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Minimum Working Pressure: 100 psi. 2. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 200 degrees F. 3. Process Fluid: Raw sewage, primary sewage sludge and scum 4. Body: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 3 of 6 a. One-piece. b. Marked for direction of flow with cast wedges and gate guides in the body to force the gate against the seat. C. V Port knife gate valves (VPKGV) include a 45-degree V-port fully seal welded in place of the same material as the body. 5. Design: a. Open bonnet. b. Opening: 1) Full port for up to 12-inch pipe size. 2) 95 percent port for 14-inch through 30-inch pipe size. C. Radiused gate edges to mate with the seat. d. Provide valve with positive travel stop to prevent seat damage. 6. Packing: a. Design yoke to support the operator without any movement or twisting at the stall thrust capability of the operator. b. Energize packing gland by Belleville springs to provide constant force on the packing. C. Sealing Packing: Chevron type. d. Include minimum four rows of packing. 7. Stem: a. 1/4-inch pitch. b. 1/4-inch lead. 8. Seats: a. Recessed elastomer seat capable of providing bubble tight shutoff to the full rated pressure. b. O-Ring seals on the face of the disc or body not permitted. C. Elastomeric valve seat seal mechanically retained in a trapezoidal groove around the perimeter of the valve body. d. Relieve seat groove to minimize compression set of seat material. 9. End Connections: a. Raised Face Flanged: 1) ANSI 125/150 drilling. 2) Machine groove flange faces to comply with MSS SP-6. 10. Actuator: a. Per Drawings: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 4 of 6 1) Handwheel sized to seat and unseat the knife gate valve at the specified operating pressure with a maximum rim pull of 40 lb. 2) If necessary to achieve 40 lb rim pull, provide a bevel gear operator. a) Bevel gear operators are fully enclosed and permanently lubricated, with a sealed housing to prevent contamination. b) Meet the requirements of 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". c) Provide bevel gear operators with a stem cover to protect the stem when the valve is in an open position. 3) Provide chainwheel operators for valves mounted over 6 feet above operating floor. C. Materials: 1. Sleeve: Buna-N. 2. Body: Type 304 Stainless Steel. 3. Gate: Type 304 stainless steel. 4. Seat: Polychloroprene or Buna-N. 5. Lining: Elastomer suitable for process fluid. 6. Connecting Hardware: Type 304 stainless steel. 7. Stem: Type 304 stainless steel. 8. Stem Nut: acid resistant bronze. 9. Yoke: Type 304 stainless steel. 10. Packing Gland & Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel. 11. Sealing Packing: a. Acrylic/PTFE/silicone. b. Bottom row: Teflon impregnated Kevlar. D. Finishes: 1. Coordinate with Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" Part 2 Finishes. 2. Polish gate to a surface finish of 32 micro -inch RMS or better. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. As specified in Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 5 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." B. According to Manufacturer's Instructions. END OF SECTION 400561.43 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 61.43 KNIFE GATE VALVES Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES Page 1 of 5 SECTION 40 05 62 - PLUG VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: Eccentric plug valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test valves in accordance with AWWA C517. B. Provide Installation Inspection and Operator Training per Section 40 05 51"Common Requirements for Process Valves". C. Provide testing and inspection certificates. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES Page 2 of 5 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish two year manufacturer's warranty for Plug Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 100 PERCENT FULL PORT PLUG VALVES Tag Type PV 1 A. Manufacturers: 1. DeZurik PEF. 2. Henry Pratt Company; a Mueller brand. 3. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 1 4. Crispin Valve 5. M&H Valve 3 6. Kennedv Valve 7. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) B. Description: 1. As specified in Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 2. Duty: Certified for severe duty and raw sewage service. 3. Type: a. Offset disc type. b. Non -lubricated C. Serviceable (able to be repacked) under full line pressure. d. Eccentric. e. Capable of sealing in both directions at the rated pressure. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES Page 3 of 5 f. Unobstructed flow path when open. g. Drop tight shut-off to the full valve rating with pressure on either side of the plug. a. 30,000-psi tensile strength. b. Top entry, bolted bonnet. C. Body shall be cast with integral piping connections. 5. Plug: a. To be removable without removing the valve from the line. b. To have an integral upper and lower shaft: 1) Seals on the upper and lower journals to prevent entrance of solids into the journals. C. One piece for all valves. 6. Bearings: a. Permanently lubricated. 7. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig at deg. F. a. At the above rated minimum working pressures, certified by the manufacturer as permitting zero leakage for a 5-minute duration with full pressure applied in either direction. 8. Maximum Process Fluid Temperature: 200 deg. F. 9. Ports: a. Configuration: Rectangular or Round. b. Port area: 100 percent open area viewing the open valve from the end. 10. Seats: a. Full 360-degree seating by contact of a resilient seating material on the plug mating with welded -in seating surface in the body. b. Screw in body seats not acceptable. C. Resilient and of the continuous interface type having consistent opening and closing torques. d. Non jamming in the closed position. 11. Stem Bearings: Self-lubricating. 12. Stem Seals: a. Type: V-ring. b. Externally adjustable and repackable without removing the bonnet from the valve, or self-adjusting. 13. Packing and Gland: Accessible and externally adjustable. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES Page 4 of 5 14. End Connections: a. Mechanical Joint: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 b. Flanged: Comply with ASME B 16.1 and B 16.42. C. Operation: 1. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 2. A suitably sized steel actuator mounting bracket shall be provided to provide an air gap between the actuator and the valve stem seal. Under no circumstance shall the gear box be mounted directly to the top body flange such that leakage could directly enter the gear box. 3. Provide adjustable limit stops for both opening and closing and a clearly marked position indicator. 4. 4 Inches and Smaller: Manual, provided with its own securely attached lever or Electrically actuated as shown on drawings. 5. Greater Than 4 Inches: Worm gear manual operators with handwheel and position indicator. 6. Furnish chain wheel operators for valves mounted over 7 feet above operating floor. D. Materials: 1. Body: a. Ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. bA. Interior Lining and Exterior Coating: 12 mils Fusion Bonded Epoxv, as 2 recommended by valve manufacturer for severe service conidition. 2. Plug: a. Ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. b. Lining: Resilient coating, as recommended by valve manufacturer for service conditions. 3. Seats: High Nickel. 4. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Stem Bearings: Bronze (Alloy C95400) or 316 Stainless steel 6. Seals: PTFE. 7. Packing: NBR, adjustable V-ring. 8. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. E. Finishes: As specified in Section 40055: "Common Requirements for Process Valves". QF. Valve Coatings and Linings: 1 1. Fusion Bonded Epoxv coated interior and exterior. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 62 PLUG VALVES Page 5 of 5 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Testing: Hydrostatic Test Per ANSI B 16.1 and B 16.5. C. Submit an affidavit of compliance stating that the valves have been manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C504-00, Section 5.2.4 and specifically list all exceptions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. According to AWWA C517. B. Horizontal Piping: Stem horizontal, Plug opening to crown of body. Plug seat shall face upstream for Pump discharee valves. C. Vertical Piping: Plug at top when closed. D. Plugs: On top when open and on pressure side when closed. END OF SECTION 40 05 62 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 40 05 63 BALL VALVES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 40 05 63 - BALL VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic ball valves. 2. Stainless steel ball valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 05 23 "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping": Miscellaneous plumbing valves as required by Project. 2. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test valves in accordance with API 598, MSS SP61 as applicable for types listed herein. B. Provide Installation Inspection and Operator Training per Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". C. Provide testing and inspection certificates. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 63 BALL VALVES Page 2 of 4 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.8 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Ball Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. George Fischer. 2. Spears. 3. ASAHI. 4. Hayward Flow Control 5. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig at 200 deg. F. 2. Maximum Process Fluid Temperature: 200 deg. F. 3. Ports: Full size. 4. End Connections: a. Flanged: Comply with ASME B 16.5. C. Operator: Hand lever. D. Materials: 1. Body and Ball: PVC, ASTM D1784. 2. Seats: PTFE. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 63 BALL VALVES Page 3 of 4 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES TAG TYPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Apollo. 2. Nibco. 3. Worcester Controls. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Comply with MSS SP 72, ANSI B16.10, B16.34, B16.5, ASTM A380. 2. Cleaned, tested, and passivated per ASTM A380. 3. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psi. 4. Body: Two-piece, bolted. 5. Ball: Full port, floating, self-adjusting. 6. Seats: Resilient and replaceable. 7. Stem: Blow out proof, O ring sealed. 8. End Connections: a. Smaller than 3-inch: Threaded with flange adapters. b. 3-inch and greater: ANSI Class 150 Flange. C. Actuator: 1. Lever or as shown on Drawings. D. Materials: 1. Body: ASTM A351 CF8M Type 316 SS. 2. Ball: ASTM A276 Type 316 SS. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Stem: Type 316 SS. 5. Stem Seal: PTFE. 6. Actuator lever: 300 series stainless steel with vinyl grip 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Testing: Test ball valves according to AWWA C507. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 63 BALL VALVES Page 4 of 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. According to AWWA C507. B. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 1110MIXOM1OKOW"A 1111011C] CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.16 GLOBE VALVES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 40 05 65.16 - GLOBE VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Globe valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 05 23 "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping": Miscellaneous plumbing valves as required by Project. 2. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 3. Section 40 05 67.36 "Specialized Pressure and Flow Control Valves" 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with piping and equipment connections as specified in other Sections and as indicated on Drawings. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. f��l�l�C�] 7uI:111M[�]►G\rf.Yi1:3�IylYr:�r1.� A. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections and provide required certifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.16 GLOBE VALVES Page 2 of 4 B. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, valves and other appurtenances, connections, and centerline elevations. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish One year manufacturer's warranty for Globe Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLOBE VALVES Tag Type — GLV 1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Walworth Figure 3245P. 2. Jenkins (Crane Valve Group) Figure 2050J. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.16 GLOBE VALVES Page 3 of 4 3. Stockham Figure B-62. 4. Lunkenheimer Figure 73-PS. 5. Fairbanks Figure 0505. 6. Flowserve Corporation. 7. NIBCO INC. 8. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. 3 Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: 1. Comply with MSS SP-80, Class 150. 2. Body and Trim: Bronze or cast steel. 3. Bonnet: Bolted. 4. Operator: Handwheel. 5. Disc: Renewable, Type 316 SS w/Buna-N composition. 6. Seat: Hardened Stainless Steel. 7. Stem: Silicon Bronze. 8. End Connections: Flanged. C. 3-1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: 1. Comply with MSS SP-85, Class 150. 2. Body: Cast iron or cast steel. 3. Trim: Bronze. 4. Operator: a. Handwheel. b. OS&Y. C. Furnish gear operators for valves 10 inches and larger, and chainwheel operators for valves mounted over 7 feet above operating floor. 5. End Connections: a. Flanged: Comply with ASME B 16.5. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.16 GLOBE VALVES Page 4 of 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to remove loose rust, mill scale, and other foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Dielectric Fittings: Provide between dissimilar metals. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Pressure test valves with piping. 3.5 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". END OF SECTION 40 05 65.16 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 05 65.33 — RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber flapper check valves 3 inches and larger. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09: Coating and touchup of shop -primed surfaces with primer. 2. Section 22 05 23 "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping": Miscellaneous plumbing valves as required by Project. 3. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves" for valve schedules. B. Coordinate Work of this Section with piping and equipment connections as specified in other Sections and as indicated on Drawings. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information, indicating materials of construction and compliance with indicated standards. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections and provide required certifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 2 of 6 D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. B. Qualification Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, valves and other appurtenances, connections, and centerline elevations. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Quality Management System: Certified to ISO 9001. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Protect valves and appurtenances by storing off ground. 3. Protect valve ends from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers and plugs. 4. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Rubber Flapper Check Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 3 of 6 B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES 3-INCH AND LARGER - Tag Type RFCV A. Manufacturers: 1. Val-Matic Sureebuster. A 2. Crispin RF ASR. 3. DeZurik APCO CRF IOOSA. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Comply with AWWA C508. 2. Size: 3 inches and larger. 3. Type: Full flow area, swing, rubber encapsulated metal disc, movement provided via flexing of reinforced rubber tab. 4. Seat: Resilient, integral with rubber disc encapsulation. 5. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig 6. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 200 degrees F. 7. Accessories: a. Type 316 stainless spring assist. b. Position limit switches. C. Manual position indicators. 8. Mounting: Horizontal or vertical. 9. End Connections: Flanged, ASME B 16.1. 10. Lining: 1/8 inch thick minimum. 11. Solid Size: 3 inch C. Materials: 1. Body and Cover: Ductile iron, ASTM A536 65-45-12. 2. Disc: Steel encapsulated with reinforced NBR rubber. 3. Seat: Integral to disc encapsulation. 4. Cover Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Lining Material: NBR. D. Controls A1. Limit Switches: lever type. NEMA 4X enclosure. SPDT. or approved equal. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 4 of 6 2. Bracket and hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. E. Finishes: As specified in Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." B. Testing: 1. Hydrostatically test check valves at twice rated pressure according to AWWA C508. 2. Permitted Leakage at Indicated Working Pressure: None. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt -hole configurations or design and verify that new valve and flange mate properly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean valves before installation. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Touch up shop -primed surfaces with primer as specified in Division 09. 2. Solvent -clean surfaces that are not shop primed. 3. Clean surfaces to remove loose rust, mill scale, and other foreign substances by power wire brushing. 4. Prime surfaces as specified in Division 09. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. According to AWWA C508 and manufacturer instructions. B. Dielectric Fittings: Provide between dissimilar metals. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Inspect for damage to valve lining or coating and for other defects that may be detrimental as determined by Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 5 of 6 2. Repair damaged valve or provide new, undamaged valve. 3. After installation, inspect for proper supports and interferences. B. Pressure test valves with piping. 3.5 CLEANING A. Keep valve interior clean as installation progresses. B. After installation, clean valve interior of soil, grit, loose mortar, and other debris. END OF SECTION 40 05 65.33 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 65.33 RUBBER FLAPPER CHECK VALVES Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 67.36 PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES Page 1 of 5 SECTION 40 05 67.36 - PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: 1. Pressure -reducing valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings " Coating and touchup of shop - primed surfaces with primer. 2. Section 22 05 23 "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping": Miscellaneous plumbing valves as required by Project. 3. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping": Anchors and supports. 4. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with installation of process piping and equipment connections as specified in other Sections and as indicated on Drawings. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer catalog information. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 67.36 PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES Page 2 of 5 E. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. F. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. G. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pressure -regulating valves. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Installation Inspection and Operator Training per Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Provide testing and inspection certificates. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." B. Cavitation Damage: Warrant that valves will not suffer cavitation damage within a five-year period from date of installation when exposed to specified operating conditions. C. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Pressure Regulating Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 67.36 PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES Page 3 of 5 D. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE -REDUCING VALVES — Tag Type PCV1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts Model. 2. Zurn Model. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Normally open valves to maintain constant downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate or varying inlet pressure. 2. Type: One-piece construction; Spring -operated. C. End Connections: 1. NPW line to Clarifiers: Flanged, ASME B16.24, Class 150 for 3 inches 2. Scum Pump seal water: Threaded connection ASME B 1.20.1 up to 2.5 inches D. Performance and Design Criteria: 1. Scum Pump Seal water lines: a. Coordinate with selected pump manufacturer to confirm pressure setting for seal water. Outlet pressure may be lower than 10 psig. with inlet pressures that may exceed 50 psig. b. Flow rate: Approximately 3 gpm, confirm with selected pump manufacturer. C. Upstream pressure range: 40-60 psig. d. Set point downstream pressure: 10 psig or less. Field adjustable from near zero to 20 psig. 2. NPW lines to Clarifiers: a. Flow rate: Approximately 50 gpm, coordinate with spray nozzle manufacturer. b. Upstream pressure range: 40 -60 psig. C. Set point downstream pressure: 40 psig or less. E. Materials: 1. Body: Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel 2. Disc and Diaphragm: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 67.36 PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES Page 4 of 5 a. Buna-N rubber. b. Disc Retainer and Diaphragm Washer: Stainless steel. 3. Trim: Viton or Stainless steel. 4. Stem, Nut, and Spring: Stainless steel. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flanges mate properly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean end connections before installation. B. Close pipe and equipment openings with caps or plugs during installation. C. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to remove foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. According to manufacturer instructions and local code requirements. B. Install with nameplate and test cock accessible. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, inspect for interferences and proper supports. B. Testing: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 67.36 PRESSURE -REGULATING VALVES Page 5 of 5 1. Hydrostatic: Test each assembled valve, except control piping, hydrostatically at 1-1/2 times rated working pressure for minimum five minutes. 2. Leakage: a. Test each valve for leakage at rated working pressure against closed valve. b. Test Duration: Minimum 15 minutes. C. Permitted Leakage: Zero. 3. Perform functional test on each valve to verify specified performance. C. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating. 3.5 CLEANING A. Keep interior of valves clean as installation progresses. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 05 67.36 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 40 05 71.13 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE Page I of 4 SECTION 40 05 71.13 —DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Duckbill Check Valve. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 05 23 "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping": Miscellaneous plumbing valves as required by Project. 2. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections and provide required certifications. B. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 71.13 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE Page 2 of 4 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping, valves and other appurtenances, connections, and centerline elevations. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Furnish One year manufacturer's warranty for Duckbill Check Valve. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE A. Manufacturers: 1. Tideflex a. Slip-on Duckbill check valve: Series TF-1 or TF-2 b. Flanged Check Valve: Series 35-1 2. Proco a. Slip on Duckbill Series 730 or 731. b. Flamed Duckbill Series 710 or 711. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.2 DESCRIPTION CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 71.13 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE Page 3 of 4 A. 3 Inches and Smaller 1. Flow operated check type with a slip-on connection unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Slip over the specified pipe outside diameter and attach by means of vendor furnished stainless steel clamps. 3. Where shown on the Drawings, provide valves as flanged with back-up Type 304 SST flange -ring. 4. Port area: Contour down to a duckbill, which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. 5. Materials of construction a. Elastomer: NBR Elastomer b. Mounting clamps: 316 stainless steel 6. Line Working Pressure: 1-10 psi 7. Backpressure: 0-2 psi 8. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 120-degree F 9. Opening Pressure: 10. As needed per installation, offset duckbill so that the bottom line of the valve is flat, keeping the pipe and valve inverts parallel. 11. When line pressure inside the valve exceeds the backpressure outside the valve by a certain amount, the line pressure forces the bill of the valve to open, allowing flow to pass. When backpressure exceeds the line pressure, the bill of the valve closes. 12. Process Fluid: Raw sewage, primary sewage sludge and scum. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Testing: 1. Provide test data confirming valve capability under specified line working pressure and back pressure. 2. Provide test data confirming opening pressure as specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 EXAMINATION As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. PREPARATION CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 71.13 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVE Page 4 of 4 A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Submittal requirements for compliance with this Section. B. Dielectric Fittings: Provide between dissimilar metals. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. According to manufacturer instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Inspect for damage to valve that may be detrimental as determined by Engineer. 2. Repair damaged valve or provide new, undamaged valve. B. Testing: During facility startup and operational testing, confirm required opening pressure for the rubber check valves. END OF SECTION 400571.13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 05 78.21 - AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Air release valves for wastewater treatment facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings.": Preparing, priming, and painting surfaces, including field -applied and equipment finishing. 2. Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping": Anchors and supports. 3. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Typical product and installation requirements for valves specified in this Section. 4. Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation": Insulation applied to process piping systems. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with installation of process piping. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer catalog information. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate on assembly drawings materials, dimensions, weights, and end connections. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 2 of 6 B. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections and provide required certifications. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions. F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air release valves. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Quality Management System: Certified to ISO 9001. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings and maintain in place until installation. 3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 3 of 6 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Air release valves and accessories. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Tag Type ASR A. Manufacturers: 1. RF Valves, Inc. (Vent-O-Mat). 2. A.R.I. USA, Inc. Model D025L 3. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 4. Dezurik / APCO. 5. Crispin Model S. 6. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Stems and Bodies: Long -float type to minimize clogging. 2. Small orifice assembly air release valves shall automatically release air accumulations from pipe while under positive pressure. When valve body fills with air, float mechanism shall fall to open small orifice and exhaust air to atmosphere. When air has been exhausted, float mechanism shall be buoyed up and shall tightly close small orifice. 3. Shall be specifically designed for grit and sewage service without the need for backwashing. 4. Air release valves shall be supplied with shutoff gate, butterfly or ball valves. C. Materials: 1. Body and Cover: Stainless steel or composite special corrosion resistant polymer 2. Float: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Seat: EPDM. 4. Internal Trim: Type 316 stainless steel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 4 of 6 5. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. D. Working Pressure: 65 psig maximum service pipeline pressure. E. Size: As indicated on Drawings. F. End Connections: 1. Size 1/2 to 3 Inches: Threaded. 2. Size 4 Inches and Larger: Flanged. 2.2 INSULATION A. As specified in Section 40 42 13 "Process Piping Insulation". 2.3 FINISHES A. Prepare piping appurtenances for field finishes as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings." 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If fabricator is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Inspect existing flanges for nonstandard bolt hole configurations or design and verify that new pipe and flanges mate properly. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean end connections before installation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 5 of 6 B. Close pipe and equipment openings with caps or plugs during installation. C. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to remove foreign substances. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. According to manufacturer instructions. B. Provide access for operation, removal, and maintenance, and to avoid discharge to occupied areas or other equipment. C. Vent the valve properly and pipe outlet to nearest drain or as directed by the Engineer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect for interferences and proper support. B. Testing: 1. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". 2. Demonstrate operation without undue noise or vibration. C. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than 3 days on Site for installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. D. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. 3. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating. E. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. 3.5 CLEANING A. Keep interior of air release valves clean as installation progresses. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 78.21 END OF SECTION 40 05 78.21 AIR RELEASE VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE Page 6 of 6 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 05 82 SOLENOID VALVES FOR PROCESS SERVICE Page 1 of 5 SECTION 40 05 82 - SOLENOID VALVES FOR PROCESS SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Solenoid valves for process applications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves": Basic materials and methods related to valves commonly used for process systems. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with process piping Work as specified in other Sections and as indicated on Drawings. B. Note that solenoid valves may be shown on Electrical and/or Mechanical Drawings, or may only be specified, but if so specified or shown, shall be provided. C. Solenoid valves located in hazardous classified areas shall be provided with electrical enclosures which satisfy the electrical classification as specified or shown on the electrical drawings. 1.4 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information, indicating materials of construction, wiring diagrams, and compliance with indicated standards. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 82 SOLENOID VALVES FOR PROCESS SERVICE Page 2 of 4 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. B. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop and factory tests and inspections. C. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. D. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. As specified in Section 400551 "Common Requirements for Process Valves." 1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. :7:7_6111 A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Solenoid Valves. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore and the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 82 SOLENOID VALVES FOR PROCESS SERVICE Page 3 of 4 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLENOID VALVES — Tag Type SV A. Manufacturers: 1. ASCO RedHat (Emerson). 2. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: 1. Type: a. Pilot operated diaphragm and disc (Asco 8210 series). b. Piston -only valves are not acceptable. 2. Media: Aggressive liquids/gases, hot water, water, treated WWTP effluent/service water (SW) up to 200 degrees F. 3. Pipe/Port Size: 1/2 inch, 3/8 inch, 3/4 inch, 1 inch, 1 1/4 inch, 1 %2 inch, 2 inch 2 1/2 inch. 4. Minimum Working Pressure: vacuum to 200 psi ( MPa) at 200 degrees F. 5. Minimum Working Pressure Differential: 0 psig. 6. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 200 degrees F. 7. Coil: Continuous duty. 8. Operation: Two way normally open or two way normally closed depending on the project application. 9. Operating environment: Corrosive, Hazardous. 10. Electrical Characteristics: a. Voltage: 120 VAC or per Drawings. b. Enclosures: Minimum NEMA 4X. Provide NEMA 7 explosion proof enclosures per electrical area classification drawings. 11. End Connections: Threaded or flanged. 12. Conduit Connection: Threaded. 13. Valves 2 inch in size or larger shall include a manual override actuated by a handle - levered plunger mounted to the bottom of the valve body. These valves must be mounted in a horizontal run of piping, with the solenoid up in the vertical position. C. Materials: 1. Body: Stainless Steel. 2. Core Tube: 305 Stainless Steel. 3. Core and Plugnut: 430F stainless steel. 4. Spring: 302 Stainless steel. 5. Shading Coil: Copper. 6. Seal, Discs and Diaphragm: EPDM. 7. Discs: EPDM. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 82 SOLENOID VALVES FOR PROCESS SERVICE Page 4 of 4 8. Seals: EPDM. D. Accessories: 1. Wye Strainer: a. Provide a stainless -steel wye strainer with mesh size as recommended by the Solenoid valve manufacturer. b. Mesh Size: No larger than 60 mesh size unless recommended otherwise. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". B. Install protective strainers upstream of solenoid valves, pressure -reducing valves, and pressure - sustaining valves. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 40 05 51 "Common Requirements for Process Valves". END OF SECTION 40 05 82 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 12 SECTION 40 05 93.23 — LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single- and three-phase motors for application on process equipment provided under other Sections. B. The manufacturer of the driven equipment shall provide the associated motor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems". 2. Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification. B. VFC: Variable -frequency motor controller. See VFD. C. VFD: Variable -frequency drive. Used interchangeably with the term VFC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of motor indicated. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include nameplate data, compliance with specified standards, electrical ratings and characteristics, physical dimensions, frame size, weights, mechanical performance data, support points and the following: 1. Descriptive bulletins, including full description of insulation system. 2. Bearing design data. 3. Efficiency at 3/4 and full load. 4. Power factor at 11/2, 3/4 and full load. 5. Conduit entry points and sizes. 6. Special features and accessories (i.e., space heaters, temperature detectors, etc.). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 12 7. Power factor correction capacitor rating and type (when required). B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric motors driving identical equipment shall be identical. B. Motors shall be listed under UL recognized component file as applicable. C. Motor manufacturer to maintain a documented ISO 9001 quality assurance program implementing suitable procedures and controls to monitor all aspects of production and testing. D. When electrically driven equipment differs from that indicated, adjust the motor size, wiring and conduit systems, disconnect devices, and circuit protection to accommodate the equipment actually installed. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship motor fully assembled, capable of being lifted in one piece. Comply with Section 0160 00, "Product Requirements" for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Inspection: Accept materials on site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. C. Storage: 1. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. 2. Energize motors furnished with space heaters to prevent condensation throughout the storage and construction period. Perform periodic motor insulation resistance tests per manufacturer's storage recommendations. 3. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 4. Maintain bearings during storage and construction period, and periodically rotate the motor shaft per manufacturer's storage recommendations. 5. Lubricate per manufacturer's recommendations and inspect purged grease for water, rust, or other contaminants. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 12 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of motors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three-year(s) from date of Substantial Completion for inverter duty motors. 2. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion for constant speed severe -duty motors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i►A�uIFA0l81KxtJI11I17a1 W A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Nidec (US Motors). 2. ABB (Baldor-Reliance). 3. TECO-Westinghouse. 4. Toshiba. 5. WEG 6. General Electric. 7. Or equal. B. Source Limitations: Manufacturer of driven equipment to provide associated motor. 2.2 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with the latest revision of the following as applicable: 1. NEMA MG 1, "Motors and Generators". 2. IEEE 841 for TEFC motors where driven equipment specification indicates equipment requires motors to be severe -duty, chemical duty, or mill duty. C. Unless otherwise noted, all motors %2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 Volt, three-phase, 60 Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower and above shall be rated 460 Volt, three-phase, 60 Hertz; and motors below %2 horsepower shall be rated 115/230 Volt, single phase, 60 Hertz A.C. D. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 50 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 12 E. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. F. Horsepower rating: Size for operation within the full load nameplate rating without applying the service factor, throughout the full range of mechanical or hydraulic operating condition. G. Specific motor application data such as Hp, rpm, enclosure type, accessories, etc., are specified under the detailed driven mechanical equipment specification. H. Nameplates: Engrave or emboss on 316 stainless steel fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins with information per NEMA MG 1. I. Space heater: Include 120-volt space heater for moisture control on all motors rated 50 horsepower and larger. J. Service Factor: 1.15 service factor on sine wave power and 1.0 service factor on VFD power in a 40 degrees C ambient, unless otherwise noted. K. Motors and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. L. Enclosures: Conform to one of the NEMA standard enclosure designs as specified under the detailed driven mechanical equipment specification. If no enclosure type is specified, provide TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled) enclosures. M. Motors connected to VFCs: Inverter duty rated and comply with NEMA MG 1, Part 31. First or second torsional critical speed shall be outside the operating speed range for all VFC controlled motors. N. Three-phase motors: 1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 2. Efficiency: Meet or exceed requirements for NEMA MG 1, Part 12 for Premium Efficient motors 1 HP and larger. 3. Service Factor: 1.15. 4. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. a. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. b. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. 5. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage. 6. Code Letter Designation: a. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. b. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 7. Accessories: Where specified herein, or under process mechanical specification. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 12 2.3 THREE PHASE MOTOR CONSTRUCTION A. Enclosure and Frame: 1. NEMA enclosure type as specified in the process equipment specification. 2. NEMA frame for the associated horsepower. 3. Motor frames: Cast iron or welded heavy plate steel construction, stiff enough to withstand the rotating forces and torques generated and designed to limit or avoid any undesirable harmonic resonances. 4. Provide a threaded, forged steel, shouldered eyebolt blind tapped into the motor frame for lifting on all frames 254T and larger. 5. Condensate drain openings: Locate drain holes at the low points in the end brackets to allow removal of accumulated moisture from enclosures. Provide corrosion resistant, breather drain plugs for severe -duty motors. 6. Hardware: Hex head, SAE Grade 5 or better, plated for corrosion protection. 7. Nameplates: Engraved or embossed stainless steel plates fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Clearly indicate all items of information listed in the applicable part of NEMA MG 1. 8. Main terminal box: Fabricated steel or cast iron, sized per the NEC for number and size of conduit connections and conductor bending and terminations as indicated on the Drawings. Split box top to bottom with capability to rotate entry point to any quadrant. Provide gaskets between the box and motor frame and between box and its cover. Include ground lug for equipment grounding conductor termination. 9. Bearing housings: Provide machined surfaces for attaching a magnet mounted accelerometer to monitor the motor vibration in the vertical, horizontal, and axial directions at each bearing housing. 10. Frame grounding: provide motor frame grounding pad or threaded stud where supplemental grounding to frame is indicated on the drawings. B. Windings: 1. Copper 2. Insulation rating: Class F. 3. Temperature rise: Class B at 1.0 SF, Class F at 1.15 SF. 4. Insulation: Non -hygroscopic, epoxy encapsulated windings for enclosure types WP I and WP II. Provide upgraded insulation by additional dips and bakes to increase moisture resistance for totally enclosed designs. Provide vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) epoxy insulation for moisture resistance for outdoor motors. 5. Provide chemical and humidity resistance insulation system when IEEE 841 motors are specified. 6. Provide winding surge withstand capability per NEMA 1, Part 31 for VFC driven motors. 7. Provide specified temperature sensing devices for VFC driven equipment. If not specified, provide a winding temperature detector per the accessories paragraph. C. Motor leads: Tinned Copper, Non -wicking type, minimum Class F temperature rating and permanently numbered for identification. D. Stator: Built up core using high grade, low loss silicon steel laminations keyed or dovetailed to the stator frame and securely held in place at each end. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 12 E. Rotor: 1. Forged or rolled steel shaft, machined, smooth finished, with sufficient strength for operation including 25 percent overspeed condition. 2. Shaft end coordinated with driven equipment coupling. 3. Entire assembly coated with protective coating. 4. Inpro seals on both ends of the shaft to prevent grease leakage and entrance of foreign materials, such as water and dirt, into the bearing area while running, coasting, or at rest. Severe duty motors to have improved sealing per IEEE 841. 5. Vertical Motor Shafts: 1. Provide hollow shaft and P flange mounting to allow driven shaft to extend through provide for vertical pump applications. 2. Coupling for connecting the motor shaft to the driven shaft is located in the top of the motor. 3. Where solid shaft is provided couple the driven shaft below the P flange face. 6. Rotor Core: 1. Solid, built-up stack of fully processed and coated, high-grade, low -loss silicon steel laminations. 2. Die cast aluminum or fabricated copper bars or their respective alloys. 3. Rotors on frames 213T and above to be keyed to shaft and rotating assembly dynamically balanced. 7. Rotor Assembly: 1. Coated with corrosion resistant epoxy insulating varnish or other protective coating, thermally stable, statically and dynamically balanced. 2. Balance weights securely attached to the rotor resistance ring by welding or similar permanent method. F. Horizontal Bearings: Roller type, grease lubricated. 1. Bearings: Anti -friction open or single -shield, vacuum-degassed steel ball or roller bearings, electric motor quality, designed for 45 degrees C maximum temperature rise. Metric size bearings are not acceptable. 2. Life: L 10 life of 100,000 hours for direct coupled applications and 26,000 hours for belted applications based. IEEE 841 motors, L 10 life increased to 150,000 and 50,000 hours respectively. 3. Shaft seals: Provide to prevent grease leakage and the entrance of foreign materials, such as water and dirt, into the bearing area while running, coasting, or at rest. 4. Shaft currents: Provide mitigation per process equipment specification. 5. Comply with ABMA and refer to process equipment specification for stricter or additional requirements. G. Vertical Bearings: per manufacturer, thrust type. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 7 of 12 1. Bearings: Manufacturer's standard design, constructed with thrust bearings on top to allow inspection and/or replacement without requiring complete disassembly of motor, of type and size to satisfy thrust loading requirements. 2. Life: Rated for an in-service L 10 life of 50,000 hours, designed to support the weight of the rotor plus, if required, the weight of the rotating driven equipment parts and the hydraulic thrust created by the driven equipment, with a 40 degrees C maximum temperature rise. Metric bearings are not acceptable. 3. Shaft seals: Provide to prevent grease leakage and the entrance of foreign materials, such as water and dirt, into the bearing area while running, coasting, or at rest. 4. Shaft currents: Provide mitigation per process equipment specification. 5. Comply with ABMA and refer to process equipment specification for stricter or additional requirements. H. Class 1 Division 2 Locations: Mark motors located in Class 1, Division 2 with a temperature code label suitable for use in the hazardous area classification where installed. Provide motors complying with IEEE 841 severe duty requirements and the following: The Class, Group and Temperature Code: Provide one of the following: 1. Class I Group D — T213 (260°C). 2. Class I Group D, Class II Groups F and G — T313 (165°C). 3. Class I Groups C and D, Class IT Groups F and G — T3C (160°C). 2. Thermostats: Where winding thermostats are used to obtain surface temperature limitation, connect thermostats in series with the starter holding coil (stop button). Provide UL listed winding temperature detectors and switches for use in Class 1 Division 2 locations. 3. Exposed Surface F Motor Condensation Heaters: Not to exceed 80 percent of the nameplate temperature code value. 4. Ventilation Fan: Corrosion -resistant, non -sparking material such as bronze. 2.4 THREE PHASE MOTOR ACCESSORIES A. Space heaters: Silicone rubber strip type, accessible for inspection, rated 120 Volt, single phase, designed to prevent condensation inside the enclosure when the motor is idle, with leads brought out to a separate terminal box. Emboss the heater wattage and voltage on the motor nameplate. B. Winding temperature switch: Three embedded bi-metallic temperature thermostat switches with normally open or normally closed per process equipment specification and leads terminating in the main conduit box. C. Winding temperature relay: Three embedded PTC thermistors with epoxy -encapsulated 115 VAC, single-phase, solid-state control relay with dual Form C contacts. Wire thermistor leads brought out to separate terminal box on the motor frame. D. Winding temperature RTDs: Six 100 Ohm platinum (PT 100), three -wire resistance -type temperature detectors (RTDs) embedded in the stator windings, two per phase, symmetrically installed between stator coils where highest temperature will occur. RTD leads brought out to CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 8 of 12 separate terminal box on the motor frame. One RTD set in each phase to be operational and one RTD set to be spare. E. Bearing temperature sensing: Number, type, and location for motor and driven equipment per process equipment specification. 1. RTD: Replaceable 100 Ohm platinum (PT 100) three -wire RTD's, with spring loaded tip. Mount RTD as close as possible to outer surface of each bearing. RTD includes conduit connection head, terminal block, and cabling brought out to a common terminal box. 2. Dial type thermometer. 3. Temperature relay, furnished with indicating scale. 4. Iron or copper constantan thermocouple. F. Motor shaft currents: insulate the ODE bearing and provide a shaft grounding strap. Insulate bearing probes to prevent shorting out bearing insulation. G. Shaft grounding rings: maintenance free, circumferential micro fiber type, AEGISTM SGR by electro Static Technology or equal to discharge shaft currents to ground. H. Vibration Sensors: Number, type, and location for motor and driven equipment per process equipment specification. Provide machined surfaces at each bearing housing for attaching a magnetic mounted accelerometer in order to monitor motor vibration in vertical, horizontal and axial directions. Coordinate with the supplier of the machine monitoring equipment. I. Anti -Backspin Device: Provide shaft mounted, mechanical non -reverse ratchet rated at 100 percent of motor full load torque for immediate protection against reversing due to phase reversals or from backspin at shutdown. J. Encoder for vector drive motors: Provide encoder on opposite drive end to sense rotor speed and provide closed loop feedback (quadrature signal with line driver output) to a control device. Provide sufficient length of encoder cable to connect encoder to variable frequency controller. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 9 of 12 E. Insulation: Class F or better, with Class B temperature rise of 80 degrees C above ambient, 1.15 service factor. Locked rotor current to be no greater than specified in NEMA MG 1, Design "N" F. Standard enclosure: Fully gasketed, totally -enclosed air over or fan cooled in conformance with NEMA MG 1. G. Washdown duty enclosure: Where motor is installed in wet or corrosive areas routinely exposed to washdowns, high humidity or caustic chemicals, provide stainless steel, paint free washdown motors with Inpro bearing isolators, stainless steel T-type condensation drains, nitrile conduit box gasket, and corrosion resistant fans. H. Bearings: Sealed ball bearings permanently lubricated for 10 years normal use, furnished with shaft Slinger. I. Class 1, Division 1 and 2 locations: Explosion proof, marked with a T313 temperature code label, and UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D, and Class II, Groups E, F, & G hazardous location. The temperature code marking to appear on the nameplate. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment perform manufacturer's standard tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and IEEE 112. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Upon delivery of motor and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage. B. Comply with DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING article within this specification. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Prepare rigid foundation or mounting surface to minimize vibration and maintain alignment between motor and load shaft. B. Install the motors per manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Anchor motor base to load bearing surface with grade 5 steel bolts or better. D. Align the motor shaft with driven equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Adjust axial position of motor frame with respect to load shaft. E. Accurately adjust flexible couplings for direct drive according to machine manufacturer's guidelines. Check alignment to minimize vibrations. Coupling spacing shall be according to coupling manufacturer guidelines. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 10 of 12 F. Install motor branch circuit conduits and conductors in accordance with NEC and local code requirements. Connect motors to rigid conduit system by a short section of liquid -tight flexible conduit to isolate the conduit system from motor vibration. Where motors are installed outdoors, bring conduit into bottom of motor terminal box to avoid standing water at connection point. G. Terminate the motor leads as shown on the connection diagrams using products intended for vibration applications. H. Ground equipment according to Section 26056, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." I. Tighten electrical connections and terminals according to manufacturers' published torque values. J. Install conduit and wiring between motor auxiliary devices and associated indicators, controllers and protective devices in accordance to installation drawings. K. Connect devices sensitive to electromagnetic interferes such as RTD's, thermistors, thermal protector switches, vibration sensors with shielded instrumentation wiring per installation drawings. L. Comply with NECA 1. M. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until motors are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Lubrication and Shaft Rotation: Lubricate parts and rotate shaft periodically according to manufacturer's written instructions until motors are ready to be energized and placed into service. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspections and tests Inspect and test according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Rotating Machinery state in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification paragraph 7.15.1. Options tests are not required unless called for within the process equipment specification. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 11 of 12 B. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, for all motors [250] [Insert number] hp and larger, and prepare reports: 1. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each motor exterior for detection of hot spots in stator or bearings. 2. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each motor 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 3. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Motors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the motor and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. 3.6 STARTUP AND ADJUSTMENT A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Confirm motor is structurally, mechanically, and electrically ready for start-up. Checks include support system, vibration isolation, alignment, lubrication system, and cleanliness. B. Start-up motor in accordance with process equipment specification. C. Verify correct phase rotation at motor with driven equipment uncoupled. Correction for phase rotation to be made in the motor terminal box. D. Prepare inspection and test reports. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION / SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS A. Run motor for system testing as required in motor controller and driven equipment specifications. B. Confirm correct operation of all protective and metering devices. C. Measure voltage and motor running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full load amperes. Corrective action is required for any current imbalance 10 percent or greater. D. Prepare driven equipment system testing report. Include results of all tests and check made, meter readings and recordings, and summary adjustments made. Clearly identify any discrepancies and concerns. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 05 93.23 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS EQUIPMENT Page 12 of 12 END OF SECTION 40 05 93.23 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page I of 8 SECTION 40 41 13.13 - PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Self-regulating cables. 2. Heat -tracing controls. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 404213 "Process Piping Insulation" for insulation and jacketing of process piping. 2. Section 267226 "Wiring Devices" for execution requirements for electrical connection to equipment specified in this section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Self -Regulating Index (SRI): The rate of change of power output in Watts per degree F, as measured between the temperatures of 50 and 100 degrees F. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with installation of process piping and, installation of piping insulation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information for system materials and component equipment, including thermal properties, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements. 1. Heat loss and operating power calculations based on site conditions. 2. Heat tracing circuit design and loading schedule. 3. Bill of materials. B. Shop Drawings: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 2 of 8 1. Indicate system materials and component equipment. 2. Submit wiring and control diagrams, installation and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: Certify that equipment has been installed according to manufacturer instructions. F. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping and appurtenances receiving heat tracing, and locations of source power and controls. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 3 of 8 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for heat tracing and components. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SELF-REGULATING CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Chromolox. 2. Raychem/Pentair Thermal/Chemelex, 3. Then -non. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Standards: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. C. Description: 1. Bus Wires: a. Quantity: Two. b. Orientation: Parallel. C. Material: Nickel -coated copper. d. Minimum Size: 16 gage. 2. Heating Element: Self-regulating polymeric core. 3. Jacketing: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 4 of 8 a. Description: Tinned copper braid with resistance less than cable bus wire resistance. b. Insulating Jacket: Fluoropolymer. 4. Cable Temperature Identification Number (T-Rating): a. T6, without use of thermostats. b. Comply with NEC. 5. Output: a. As indicated on Drawings. b. Minimum 3 W/ft. D. Performance and Design Criteria: 1. Power Output: Vary relative to temperature of surface of pipe or appurtenance. 2. Cable can be cut to length on Site. 3. Minimum SRI: a. Cable Rating 3 W/ft.:0.038 W/degrees F. b. Cable Rating 5 W/ft.: 0.060 W/degrees F. C. Cable Rating 8 W/ft.: 0.074 W/degrees F. d. Cable Rating 10 W/ft.:0.100 W/degrees F. E. Operation: 1. Electrical Characteristics: a. Voltage: _120 V, single phase, 60 Hz. b. Maximum Circuit Breaker Size: 20 A. C. Ground -Fault Protection Device: Set at 30 mA, with nominal 100-ms response time, to protect each circuit. 2. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted in control panel. F. Accessories: 1. Splicing connectors. 2. End terminations. 3. T-connectors. 4. Power termination kits. 2.2 HEAT -TRACING CONTROLS A. Control and Monitoring Panel: 1. Materials: Nonmetallic. 2. Rating: NEMA 250 Type 4X. 3. Configuration: Wall mounted. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 5 of 8 4. Temperature Controller: a. Microprocessor based. b. Diagnostic self -testing capability. 5. Communications Port: Modbus ASCII via RS 485. 6. ON -OFF Control: Soft start. 7. Real -Time Data Indication: a. Temperature. b. Heater current. C. Ground leakage current. d. 8. Stored Data: a. Highest and lowest temperature encountered. b. 9. Alarms: a. LOW TEMPERATURE. b. HIGH TEMPERATURE. C. LOW HEATER CURRENT. d. HIGH HEATER CURRENT. e. GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT. f. DAMAGED RTD SENSOR. 9. < >. B. Single Thermostat: 1. Description: Stainless -steel remote bulb with 6-foot capillary encased in flexible stainless -steel armor. 2. Housing: a. FM approved. b. Rating: NEMA 250 Type 4X. 3. Set -Point Range: 35 to 235 degrees F. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Retain at least 75 percent of rated power after 20 years of operation at maximum published continuous exposure temperature. 2. Retain at least 90 percent of rated power after 1,000 hours of operation at maximum published intermittent exposure temperature. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 6 of 8 3. Cable Dielectric Test: Passing 2.5 kV dielectric test for one minute according to ASTM D2633 after undergoing a 0.5 kg-m impact. 4. Before shipment, demonstrate cable insulation resistance of 20 megohms minimum bus to braid using a 2,500-V do megger, and demonstrate tolerance for one minute at voltage equal to twice rated plus 1,000 V applied bus to braid. 5. Thermal Runaway: a. Ensure that cable produces less than 0.5 W/ft. when energized and heated to 350 degrees F for 30 minutes. b. After testing and reenergizing, demonstrate that cable does not have an increasing power output leading to thermal runaway. B. Owner Inspection: 1. Make completed heat -tracing assembly available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspection is allowed. C. Owner Witnessing: 1. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. 2. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled. D. Certificate of Compliance: 1. If manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces of pipes, valves, and fittings are clean and dry. B. Verify that piping has been inspected and is ready for insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install heat tracing after pipe system is complete, but before insulation is installed. B. Install cable and control in accordance with: 1. Manufacturer instructions. 2. NFPA 70 Article 427. 3. NECA 202. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 7 of 8 C. If required, spiral heat -trace cable around piping to obtain proper heating per length of piping. D. Do not overlay cable over cable. E. After confirming correct operation, cover installed heating cable with thermal insulation and waterproof jacketing as soon as possible. F. Affix following label to exterior of thermal insulation every 15 feet and readily visible from ground level: CAUTION: ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation, inspect for proper operation. B. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than 4 hours on Site for installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. D. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Check control functions and adjust as required. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 404113.13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4041 13.13 This page intentionally left blank. PROCESS PIPING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT TRACING Page 8 of 8 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 42 13 - PROCESS PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Process piping insulation. 2. Jacketing. 3. Accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping" for product requirements for firestopping and placement by this Section. 2. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for execution requirements for painting insulation jackets and coverings as specified by this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials, and thickness for each service and location. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's published literature indicating recommended installation procedures. C. Qualifications Statements: 1. Qualifications for manufacturer and applicator. 2. Manufacturer's approval of applicator. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame -spread index of 25 and maximum smoke -developed index not exceeding 50, according to ASTM E84. B. Comply with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters of pipe insulation. C. Factory -fabricated fitting covers according to ASTM C450. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on -Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Inspection: Accept insulation on -Site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Store insulation according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.8 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within ranges as recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain recommended temperature and humidity before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. 1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 3 of 6 A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for Process piping insulation. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Closed -Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Aeroflex USA. 2. Armacell LLC. 3. K-Flex USA. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). PIPE INSULATION A. Type P-5: Flexible, closed -cell elastomeric and tubular. 1. Performed flexible elastomeric closed cell foam tube. 2. Comply with ASTM C534, Type I. 3. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu-in./h.-ft.-deg. F at 75 degrees F. 4. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F. PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: Use on all process piping unless noted otherwise. 1. Comply with ASTM B209. 2. Sheet Thickness: 0.020 inches. 3. Finish: Smooth or Embossed. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints with 2-inch laps. 5. Fitting Covers: Description: Die -shaped, with factory -attached protective liner. a. Thickness: 0.016 inches. 6. Polyethylene Sheet: a. Thickness: 0.003-inches. b. Laminated to create a moisture barrier. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 4 of 6 B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket (only where PVC jacket is noted on Drawings): One-piece, molded - type fitting covers and sheet material. 1. Color: Off-white. 2. Comply with ASTM D1785. 3. Thickness: 30 mils. 4. Connections: Pressure -sensitive, color -matching vinyl tape. A. Vapor -Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. C. Piping 1-1/2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1. Galvanized -steel insulation protection shield. 2. Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 40. 3. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Piping 2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 1. Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. 2. Inserts Length: Not less than 6 inches. 3. Thickness and Contour: Match adjoining insulation. E. Closed -Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hangers: I . Polyurethane insert with aluminum single -piece construction and self-adhesive closure. 2. Thickness: Match pipe insulation. F. Tie Wire: 0.048-inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers. G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449. H. Insulating Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C195. 2. Hydraulic setting on mineral wool. I. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 5 of 6 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Closed -Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Push insulation onto piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. If application requires multiple layers, apply with staggered joints. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. C. Piping Exterior to Building: 1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass -mesh -reinforced, vapor -retarder cement. 2. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3- or 9-o'clock position on side of horizontal piping, with overlap facing down to shed water, or on bottom side of horizontal piping. D. Buried Piping: 1. Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be installed in trench or tunnel, or direct buried. 2. Install factory -fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket, with self-sealing lap, and asphalt -impregnated open -mesh glass fabric with 1-mil-thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound. 3. Face outer surface with polyester film. E. Heat -Traced Piping Interior to Building: 1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. 2. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracing. F. Heat -Traced Piping Exterior to Building: 1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. 2. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracing. 3. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3- or 9-o'clock position on side of horizontal piping, with overlap facing down to shed water. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 42 13 PROCESS PIPING INSULATION Page 6 of 6 3.3 ATTACHMENTS A. Process Piping Insulation Schedule: 1. Service and Potable Water (PVC and Stainless Steel): a. Type: P-5. b. Thickness: 1) Pipe Sizes 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: 1/2 inch. 2) Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Larger: 1 inch. 2. Scum Pump Station Piping (Ductile Iron): a. Type P-5. b. Thickness: 1) Pipe Sizes 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: '/2 inch. 2) Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: linch 3) Pipe Sizes 8 Inches or Larger: 1.5 inch. END OF SECTION 40 42 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 1 of 14 SECTION 40 6100 - PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes procurement of the services of a Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to provide all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein, in "Related Requirements" under this Article, and in related drawings, except for those services and materials specifically noted. B. Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS) programming services will be performed by the PCSS to supply the scope of services defined herein. 1. Coordination with the Owner during construction is required to successfully integrate PCSS and Vendor provided equipment and control system programming services. Reserve the appropriate time for coordination and testing with the Owner and Vendor Equipment suppliers in the PCSS project schedule as specified throughout Division 40. 2. The PCSS to provide SCADA/DCS programming services of the Ovation system. They are to program all signals, monitoring, status and provide new SCADA screens related to monitoring and control of hardwired I/O from primary clarifiers, scum pump stations, sludge pump station no.1, plant sewer flow meter station no.1, ancillary process treatment systems, and miscellaneous HVAC and Electrical systems as shown in the contract drawings. Utilize Owner standard for all SCADA/DCS programming services as specified through Division 40. Refer to specification section 40 61 96 "Process Control Descriptions" and 40 68 63 "Configuration of HMI Software". C. The PCSS is to furnish, install, and calibrate all instrumentation as listed in the Division 40 PCSS instrument list. Provide calibration sheets of all instrumentation. D. The PCSS is to provide new Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) panel RTU-001, consisting of all terminal block, surge suppression, isolators, intrinsically safe barriers, and other ancillary equipment for control of all hardwired equipment and instrumentation associated with new primary clarifiers, scum pump stations, sludge pump station no.1, ancillary process treatment systems, and miscellaneous HVAC and Electrical systems as shown in the contract drawings. Where listed, RTU panel(s) refers to enclosures containing only electrical and hardwire I/O components utilized for control, monitoring, and status. There are no PLC/IO racks contained within. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 2 of 14 E. The PCSS is to modify existing RTU panel, RTU-009, with I/O signals from plant sewer flow meter station no.1. F. The PCSS to coordinate with Electrical, General Contractor, and Owner for all new and 1 modified hardwired UO signal wiring from RTU-001 and RTU-009 to be terminated at SCADA Ovation DCS marshalling cabinets located within Owner Administration Building utilized for control, monitoring, and status. Perform field investigation to determine condition and status of control signal wiring from Owner marshalling cabinets to DCU-1 unit. Per field investigation, should control signal wiring not exist from marshaling cabinets to DCU-1 unit, provide control signal wiring to account for new and modified hardwired I/O as shown in the drawings and specifications. It is acceptable to repurpose abandoned and existing control signal wiring terminated from marshalling cabinets to DCU-1 unit. Repurposed control signal wiring to receive clear and new tags. New or modified hardwired UO signal wiring to be rung out at the marshalling cabinets prior to termination. G. The PCSS to provide testing and training as outlined in specification sections 40 61 21.20 "Process Control System Testing" and 40 6126 "Process Control System Training". H. Include auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, signal isolators, software, and drivers to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by others under other Sections of these specifications, whether indicated on the Drawings or not. I. All equipment and installations to satisfy applicable Federal, State and local codes. Refer to General drawings for area classifications for Class and /Division ratings. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme indicated on the Drawings and in the specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate from or modify the numbering scheme. K. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6121.20 "Process Control System Testing". 2. Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training". 3. Section 40 6196 "Process Control Descriptions". 4. Section 40 67 17 "Industrial Enclosures". 5. Section 40 67 33 "Panel Wiring". 6. Section 40 68 63 "Configuration of HMI Software". 7. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems". 8. Section 40 70 OOA "Instrumentation List". 9. Section 40 71 13 "Magnetic Flow Meters". 10. Section 40 7166 "Transit Time Flow Meters". 11. Section 40 7179 "Flow Switches". 12. Section 40 72 23 "Radar Level Meters". 13. Section 40 72 76 "Level Switches". 14. Section 40 73 13 "Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges". 15. Section 40 73 36 "Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches". 16. Section 40 73 63 "Diaphragm Seals". 17. Section 40 78 13 "Indicators and Meters". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 3 of 14 18. Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsically Safe Barriers and Surge Suppressors". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. B. Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS): The entity who provides all programming, configuration, and related services for the control system equipment provided by the PCSS and is qualified agency with Emerson Ovation DCS programming expertise. C. Maintenance of Plant Operations (MOPO): A construction plan which prevents or limits process disruptions during construction. D. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU): Enclosure or panel containing electrical components and hardwire I/O for control, monitoring, and status. These enclosures do not contain PLC/IO components. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Conduct a project kickoff coordination meeting within two weeks after submitting the Project Plan. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss the PCSS's Project Plan, to summarize the PCSS's understanding of the project; discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives; schedule testing and delivery deadline dates; provide a forum to coordinate hardware and software related issues; and request any additional information required from the Owner. The meeting will last up to one business day. B. As needed on -site and conference call coordination meetings with Engineer, Contractor, Vendors, and Owner as required prior to any field start-up or activity testing begins. C. Schedule the mandatory coordination meetings as described herein. Hold the meetings at the Owner's designated location and include attendance by the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor, and the PCSS's Project Engineer. Other Division 40 specifications may require additional meetings. Prepare and distribute an agenda for this meeting a minimum of one week before the scheduled meeting date. Schedule the meeting for a minimum of one week before the requested meeting date. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 4 of 14 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, mountings, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of control equipment, control panels, and instrumentation as specified herein. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 5. Submit certification indicating compliance with American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements for all applicable metal products were required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00, 01, and 40 herein. C. Qualifications Submittal: For non -listed PCSS' candidates not listed by name in Section 1.9 "Quality Assurance" herein, submit, within 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, detailed information on staff and organization to indicate compliance with the Quality Assurance requirements of this Section. The Qualifications submittal is required to be submitted and approved before any further submittals will be accepted. Failure to meet the minimum requirements is grounds for rejection as a PCSS. The Qualifications Submittal to contain the following: a. Copies of ISA CCST Level 1 certificates for all field technicians or resumes demonstrating field experience. b. Notarized statement from the firm's financial institution demonstrating ability for the firm to meet the obligations necessary for the performance of the work. C. Copy of UL-508A certificate for panel fabrication facilities. d. Project references for water or wastewater projects as defined in the "Quality Assurance" paragraphs. e. Documentation to demonstrate the ability to complete this project including resumes of key staff, financial capacities, details on engineering, design, fabrication, and field service capacity, and location of staff responsible for responding to the site within four hours to resolve startup issues. D. Project Plan, Deviation List, and Schedule Submittal: Submit, within 45 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, a Project plan. Submit for approval the Project Plan before further submittals are accepted. The Project Plan to contain the following: a. Overview of the proposed control system describing the understanding of the project work, a preliminary system architecture drawing, interfaces to other systems, schedule, startup, and coordination. Include a general discussion of startup, replacement of existing equipment with new, approach to testing and training, and other tasks as required by these specifications. b. Project personnel and organization including the PCSS project manager, project engineer, and lead project technicians. Include resumes of each of these individuals CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 5 of 14 and specify their roles within project. These do not need to be submitted again if already submitted in the Qualification submittal. Sample formats of the shop drawings to be submitted and in conformance with the requirements of the Specifications. At a minimum include samples of panel fabrication drawings, loop drawings, and I/O wiring diagrams. 2. Define Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings in a Deviation List consisting of a paragraph -by -paragraph review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the Engineer. Specifically state if no exceptions are taken to the specifications or drawings. If there is no statement by the PCSS, then it is acknowledged that no exceptions are taken. Q PCSS is required to prepare a project schedule in Gantt chart format clearly showing task linkages for all tasks and identifying critical path elements. PCSS schedule is based on the General Contractor schedule and meets all field installation, testing, and start-up milestones in that schedule. The project schedule illustrates I&C related major project milestones including the following: a. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals. Include the time required for Contractor's submittal preparation, Engineer's review time, and a minimum of two complete review cycles. b. Proposed dates for all project coordination meetings. C. Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly (following approval of related submittals). d. Shipment of instrument and control system equipment. e. Installation of instrument and control system equipment. f. Testing: Schedule for all testing. g. Schedule for system cutover, startup, and/or going on-line for each major system. h. Schedule for all training including submittal and approval of O&M manuals, factory training, and site training. 5. Component and Wiring Identification and Tagging Plan: a. All components provided by PCSS require a tag, label, or nameplate. Review specifications and provide a drawing indicating the tagging and labeling scheme used by the PCSS: 1) Instruments. 2) Panel Hardware. 3) Standalone hardware or communication equipment. 4) Wires and communication cables. b. Provide detailed information so Engineer can review the following characteristics for each type of tag, label, or nameplate for the different types of components provided above: 1) Size or range of size of the tag, label or nameplate. 2) Font style. 3) Material. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 6 of 14 4) Color(s). E. Input/Output (I/O) List Submittal: 1. Submit, within 60 days after Notice to Proceed, a complete system Input/Output (1/0) address list for equipment connected to the control system under this Contract. 2. Base the I/O list on the P&ID's, the Drawings, the design 1/0 list (if included), and requirements in the Specifications. 3. Submit the I/O list in both a Microsoft Excel readable electronic file format and an 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch hard copy. 4. Reflect all active and spare 1/0 points on the 1/0 list. Add points to accommodate spare I/O's as required in the specifications. 5. Arrange the I/O list so that each control panel has a dedicated worksheet, which includes the following information: a. TAG NUMBER(S): As indicated on the Drawings, the identifier assigned to a device that performs a function in the control system. As part of this information, break out the tag loop number to allow for sorting by loop. b. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device (text that includes signal source, control function, etc.) Include the text "Spare Points" for all I/O module points that are not connected to equipment. C. PHYSICAL LOCATION: The Control Panel designation of where the I/O point is wired to. d. I/O TYPE: use DO - Discrete Output, DI - Discrete Input, AO - Analog Output, Al - Analog Input, PI - Pulse Input, or PO - Pulse Output. e. ENGINEERING UNITS: The engineering units associated with the Analog I/O. f. ALARM LIMITS: Include alarm limits based on the control descriptions and the Drawings. g. P&ID - the P&ID or drawing where the 1/0 point appears on. Mark as "NA" (Not Applicable) if the UO point is derived from a specification requirement and is not on the P&IDs. 6. Sort the I/O list in order by: a. Physical location. b. I/O Type. C. Loop Number. d. Device Tag. 7. Once the I/O list is approved, the PLC I/O addresses are not to be modified without approval by the Engineer. F. Field Instruments Submittal: Refer to the Instruments section for submittal requirements. G. Panel Layout Drawings and Wiring Diagrams Submittal: Panel Layout Drawings: Submit Drawings for all panels specified, inclusive of new and modified panels as described in PART 1 - GENERAL herein. Draw to scale panel CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 7 of 14 assembly and elevation drawings and detail all equipment in or on the panel. Use 11 "x 17" sheet size for panel drawings and include the following: a. Clearly indicate a legend sheet with all symbols used on drawings and with voltage, color and size of each wire and in accordance with requirements of Section 40 67 33 "Panel Wiring." b. Interior and exterior panel elevation drawings to scale. C. Nameplate schedule. d. Conduit access locations. e. Panel construction details. f. Cabinet assembly and layout drawings to scale. Include a bill of material on the assembly drawing with each panel component clearly defined. Cross-reference the bill of material to the assembly drawing so that a non -technical person can readily identify all components of the assembly by manufacturer and model number. g. Fabrication and painting specifications including color (or color samples). h. Construction details, NEMA ratings, intrinsically safe barrier information, gas sealing recommendations, purging system details, etc. for panels located in hazardous locations or interfacing to equipment located in hazardous areas. i. For every control panel, heating and cooling calculations for each panel supplied indicating conformance with cooling requirements of the supplied equipment and environmental conditions. Include on calculations the recommended type of equipment required for both heating and cooling. j. Submit evidence that all control panels are constructed in conformance with UL 508A and bear the UL seal confirming the construction. Specify if UL compliance and seal application accomplished at the fabrication location or by field inspection by UL inspectors. Costs associated with obtaining the UL seal and any inspections are be borne by Contractor. k. Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for all Class and Division ratings/requirements. 2. Wiring Diagrams Submittal: a. PCSS to provide complete wiring diagrams showing all wiring connections in the I/O system where direct hardwired interfaces exist between the PCSS control panels and vendor provided control panels furnished under other Divisions. This includes but is not limited to terminal block numbering, relay contact information, instruments, equipment, and control panel names. Include drawings in Final O&M submittal. Leaving this information blank on Final Documentation drawings is not acceptable. b. Panel wiring diagrams depicting wiring within and on the panel as well as connections to external devices. Panel wiring diagrams include power and signal connections, UPS and normal power sources, all panel ancillary equipment, protective devices, wiring and wire numbers, and terminal blocks and numbering. Field device wiring includes the device ISA-tag and a unique numeric identifier. Diagrams identify all device terminal points that the system connects to, including terminal points where I/O wiring lands on equipment not supplied by the PCSS. Wiring labeling used on the drawings match that shown on the Contract Documents or as developed by the PCSS and approved by the Engineer.1/0 wiring numbered with rack number, slot number, and point number. Two -wire and four- CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 8 of 14 wire equipment to be clearly identified, and power sources noted. Submit final wire numbering scheme. Provide panel drawings that are 11-inch x 17-inch in size. H. Testing Plan Submittals: 1. Refer to Section 406121.20 "Process Control System Testing" for specific testing submittal requirements. I. Training Plan Submittals: 1. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for specific training submittal requirements. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For any named PCSS, submit a statement on company letterhead indicating that the requirements in the "Quality Assurance" paragraph below are met by the firm. B. Product Test Reports: Refer to individual instrument, component or hardware specifications for specific requirements. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For all PCSS supplied hardware to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Submit in accordance with Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 2. Include the following information on the operations and maintenance manuals: a. Table of Contents: 1) Provide a Table of Contents for the entire manual with the specific contents of each volume clearly listed. Include the complete Table of Contents in each volume. b. Instrument and Equipment Lists: 1) Develop the following lists in Microsoft Excel format: a) An instrument list or spreadsheet for all instruments supplied including tag number, description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, calibrated range, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. b) An equipment list or spreadsheet for all non -instrument devices supplied listing description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, location, manufacturer phone CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 9 of 14 number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data. Equipment Operations and Maintenance Information: 1) Provide ISA-TR20.00.01-2007 (updated in 2004-2006) data sheets for all field instruments. For non -field instrumentation devices, provide a cover page for each device, piece of equipment, and OEM software that lists date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA- TR20.00.01-2007 (updated in 2004-2006), general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information. 2) Provide either new documentation written specifically for this project or modified standard vendor documentation to the vendor O&M documentation for each device, piece of equipment, or OEM software. Indicate with arrows or circles all portions that apply to all standard vendor documentation furnished. Neatly line out or cross out all portions that do not apply. Remove groups of pages or sections that do not apply to the specific model supplied. 3) Provide the record documentation of the system audit and completed test forms with sign -offs as specified in Section 406121.20 "Process Control System Testing." 4) Include instrument/equipment calibration and configuration forms. d. As -Built Drawings: 1) Complete as -built drawings, including all drawings and diagrams specified in this section under the "Submittals" section. Include on the drawings all termination points on all equipment the system is connected to, including terminal points of equipment not supplied by the PCSS. Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Provide drawings in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. 2) Include on as -built documentation information from submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as -built system. Incorporate errors in or modifications to the system resulting from the Factory and/or Functional Acceptance Tests. B. Operations and Maintenance Data - Software Maintenance Manual 1. Include these manuals as part of "Final System Documentation." 2. PID Loop Tuning Parameters — Submit annotated chart recorder traces or computer system trend screen printouts showing tuned control loop response to plus and minus 40 percent of full span step changes of loop setpoint for each individual loop. For cascade loops, submit charts showing response of the secondary loop with secondary setpoint on manual and also response of the entire cascade control loop in automatic mode. Include a description of tuning methodology used. 3. Machine Readable Documentation — Provide two sets of as -built software documentation on DVDs or USB thumb drives in original electronic format for all HMI systems, CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 10 of 14 reporting systems, and any other programs developed under this Contract. Incorporate all changes made during or after testing, start-up, and commissioning. 4. Include final version of the system standards and conventions manual reflecting as - programmed conditions and in accordance with Owner programming standards. C. Operations and Maintenance Data - Operators' Manual: 1. Provide Operator's Manuals prior to final acceptance of the system. 2. Separately bind and include in the manual all information necessary for the operator to monitor and control the plant from the control system. Write the manuals in non -technical terms and organize for quick access to each detailed description of the operator's procedure. Include the following information: 3. A comprehensive table of contents of the manual. 4. A simple overview of the entire system indicating the function and purpose of major control system components described by area or building. 5. A detailed description of the operation of the SCADA/DCS including all appropriate displays. Including a screenshot of each SCADA/DCS display screen and annotating each function in text is an acceptable format for presenting this information. 6. Complete, step-by-step procedures for printing reports and entering manual data. 7. A complete glossary of terms and definition of acronyms. 8. List of personnel to be contacted for warranty and emergency services, including name, address, telephone number, pager or cell phone number, fax number, and email address. D. Electronic O&M Information: 1. In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic version of all equipment manuals and data sheets, along with any software back-up of configuration files, on DVD or USB thumb drive. Supply electronic documents in Adobe Acrobat format. 2. Provide electronic files for all custom -developed manuals including training manuals. Supply text in Microsoft Office and Adobe Acrobat formats. 3. Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Supply drawings in AutoCAD ".dwg" and in Adobe Acrobat formats. Provide drawings using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind external references, pen/line styles, fonts, and the drawing file into individual zip files. 4. Back up each computer system hardware device onto DVD or USB thumb drive after Substantial Completion and turn over to the Owner. 5. If specified in the training section, provide digital copies of all training videos. Format videos so they are readable by standard DVD players and by standard PC DVD drives, a minimum of 800 by 600 pixels, and include sound. E. Include information as specified in Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" on the cover and edge of each volume. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTAL A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 11 of 14 Refer to individual specification sections in Division 40 for spare equipment requirements and provide one comprehensive spare parts submittal for project. B. Pack all spare parts in individual cartons and label with indelible markings clearly indicating component(s) inside. Supply with the required spare parts complete ordering information paperwork including manufacturer's contact information (address and phone number), part name, part number, equipment name and tag number(s) for which the part is to be used (if applicable). Deliver and store the spare parts in a location directed by the Owner or Engineer. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to be a "systems integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a "systems integrator" means an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or manufacturer's training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel to hold ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable plant startup experience. Key personnel includes, as a minimum, the lead field technician. 2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion is defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the PCSS. Potential references for projects where the PCSS's contract was of similar size to this project. 3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Section for a minimum of five years. B. Maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 200 miles of the project site with full-time employees capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. Respond to on -site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on -site response within four hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion. C. Listed suppliers will not be required to submit a qualifications proposal (see "Informational Submittals"). Contractors interested in listing an equal to the above listed suppliers to submit PCSS' qualifications for review and approval as specified herein. D. Select a PCSS from one of the following: 1. Prime Controls, Lewisville, TX (972)-221-4849. 2. RLC Controls Inc., McKinney, TX (972)-542-7375. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer, entity, or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 12 of 14 E. Being listed in this specification does not relieve any potential PCSS from meeting the qualifications specified in this Section. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section and related Division 40 specifications to meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 10V► a 1210 4161) 1310to] ►ki A. Environmental Requirements: Refer to General and Electrical Drawings for specific environmental and hazardous area classifications. B. Elevation: Design equipment to operate at the project ground elevation. C. Temperature: 1. Outdoor area equipment to operate between -4 to 122 degrees Fambient. 2. Equipment in indoor locations operate between 50 to 95 degrees Fdegrees ambient minimum. 3. Storage temperatures range from 32 to 122 degrees F degrees ambient minimum. 4. Furnish additional cooling or heating if required by the equipment specified herein. 5. Relative Humidity. Air-conditioned area equipment operates between 20 to 95 percent relative, non -condensing humidity. All other equipment operates between 5 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity. D. Do not ship control system equipment located in the control room until the control room areas comply with specified ambient temperature and humidity and free of dust and debris. 1.13 WARRANTY A. As described in 00 72 00 General Conditions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Electrical Requirements for Control System: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 13 of 14 1. Operate equipment on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source at a nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. Regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above to be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Supply constant voltage transformers where equipment requires voltage regulation. 2. With the exception for field device network connected devices, all electronic instrumentation utilizes linear transmission signals of isolated 4 to 20 mA DC (milliampere direct current) capable of driving a load up to 750 ohms, unless specified otherwise. However, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 VDC (volts direct current). 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero -based signals will be allowed. 4. All switches have double -pole, double -throw (DPDT) contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless noted otherwise. 5. Switches and/or signals indicating an alarm, failure or upset condition wired in a fail-safe manner as shown on the P&IDs. A fail-safe condition is when an open circuit generates an alarm state (i.e., contact opens). 6. Materials and equipment UL approved whenever such approved equipment and materials are available. 7. All equipment furnished designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption, the systems specified all go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of memory and resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored, unless otherwise noted. 8. Indicators and meter requirements for control system control are specified in Section 40 78 13 "Indicators and Meters". 9. Surge protection requirements for control system power, signal, and communication lines are specified in Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsically Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors." PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine instruments and devices before installation. Reject any product that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where RTU panels and instrumentation will be installed. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 00 PROCESS CONTROL AND ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 14 of 14 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. The shield on each process instrumentation cable to be continuous from source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shield. B. Provide sunshades for equipment mounted outdoors in direct sunlight. Include sunshades standoffs to allow air circulation around the cabinet. Orient equipment outdoors to face to the North to minimize the impact of glare and ultraviolet exposure on digital readouts. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to individual hardware and instrument specification sections. K EA .y'l I_M 71rI]964 AT/[01:1 A. Refer to Section 406121.20 "Process Control System Testing." B. Refer to Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training." C. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service as specified in individual hardware and instrument specification sections. D. Weekly on -site coordination meetings with Engineer, Contractor, Vendors, and Owner as required during active construction period. END OF SECTION 40 61 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 1 of 11 SECTION 40 6121.20 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw► WI1LTJ1LTA/:1ZOVA A. Section includes process control system testing, where the Applications Engineering services are performed by the PCSS. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." C. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to complete the testing of all devices and systems furnished and installed as detailed on Drawings, and as specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. B. Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS): The entity who provides all programming, configuration, and related services for the control system equipment provided by the PCSS and is qualified agency with Emerson Ovation DCS programming expertise. C. Input/Output (I/O): Analog or digital field instrument signals to be received and interpreted by a PLC. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Refer to Section 40 61 000 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 2 of 11 B. Testing Submittals - Submit, in one submittal, the following testing related documents: Status Signoff Forms: a. Develop and submit project specific 1/0 Status and Automatic Control Strategy signoff forms to be used during factory and field testing to organize and track each loop's inspection, adjustment, calibration, configuration, and testing status and sign off. Include sign -off forms for each testing phase showing all loops. 1) Example forms are shown in the Appendices. 2) Separate forms for factory and field testing can be used, or they can be combined, at the discretion of the PCSS. 3) Submit testing forms prior to start of testing. 2. Testing Procedures: a. Submit detailed procedures proposed to be followed for each of the tests specified herein. The test procedures serve as the basis for the execution of the required tests to demonstrate that the system meets and functions as specified. At a minimum, provide the following test procedures: 1) I/O Testing. 2) RTU panel power, indictors, and hardwired logic tests. 3) All SCADA/DCS screens, control logic, and control interface as seen in specification section 40 68 63 "Configuration of HMI Software" with PCSS supplied equipment. b. Structure documents in an orderly and easy to follow manner to facilitate an efficient and comprehensive test. C. Indicate in test procedures all pre -testing setup requirements, all required test equipment, and simulation techniques to be used. d. Structure test procedures in a cause -and -effect manner where the inputs are indicated, and the outputs are recorded. e. Include in test procedures the demonstration and validation under normal operating conditions and under various failure scenarios as specified in Contract Documents. f. Do not start testing until all Testing Submittals have been approved. C. Test Documentation: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off Testing Status forms. Testing is not considered complete until the signed -off forms have been submitted and approved. Submittals of other test documentation, including "highlighted" wiring diagrams with field technician notes, are not acceptable substitutes for the formal test documentation. D. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up: Calibrate, configure, and set-up all components and instruments to perform specified functions. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 3 of 11 2. Calibration form: a. For any component or instrument requiring dip switch settings, calibration, or custom configuration, maintain a calibration form in field documenting this information. These forms provide a summary of the actual settings used in the field to allow an Instrument technician to replace the device entirely and configure it to function as it did before. b. Add this information to Instrument data sheet and to a copy of manufacturer's standard "Configuration Sheet" or create a separate form. 1) If a separate form, list Project Name, Loop Number, ISA Tag Number, 1/0 Module Address, Manufacturer, Model Number/Serial Number, Output Range and Calibrated Value. C. Some examples of required information are: 1) For Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. 2) For Instruments: Any configuration or calibration settings entered into instrument. d. Maintain a copy of these forms in field during testing and make them available for inspection at any time. 3. For any device that allows a software back-up of configuration files to a laptop, make configuration files available to Engineer/Owner for inspection. Submit as part of Final System Documentation as specified in Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.7 COST OF TRAVEL A. Scheduled tests will only be attended once by Engineer /Owner. If test is not successful, all subsequent tests will be performed at Contractor's expense. Reimburse Owner for all costs, including labor and expenses, invoiced by Engineer and incurred by Owner for subsequent retests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 4 of 11 3.1 TESTING - GENERAL A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." B. Track results of all testing on a project specific status sign -off form or similar document. The PCSS is responsible for maintaining the sheet. Appendix of this Section has an example template for this sheet. Tests the PCSS is required to perform are as follows: Field Testing: a. Operational Readiness Test (ORT). b. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT). C. Site Acceptance Test (SAT). C. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide all special testing materials and equipment required for a suitable means of simulation. D. PCSS to coordinate all required testing with Contractor, affected Subcontractors, Engineer, and Owner. E. Do not ship equipment to jobsite until Engineer or Owner has received all Factory Testing results and approved the system as ready for shipment. F. Engineer reserves the right to test or re -test any functions. G. Correction of Deficiencies: 1. Correct deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repeat testing, as specified herein, after correction of deficiencies is made until specified requirements are met. Perform work at no additional cost to Owner. 3.2 FIELD TESTING - OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Purpose of ORT is to check that process equipment, instrument installation, instrument calibration, instrument configuration, field wiring, control panels, and all other related system components are ready to monitor and control the processes. This test determines if equipment is ready for operation. B. This test to take place prior to FDT and startup. Prior to starting this test, install relevant process equipment and mechanically test instruments installed, control panels installed, and field wiring complete. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 5 of 11 C. Required Documents for Test: 1. Master copy of the PCSS developed field testing sign -off forms. 2. Testing procedures. 3. Calibration forms. 4. Panel hardware/fabrication drawings. D. These inspections, calibrations, and tests do not require witnessing. However, Engineer may review and spot-check testing process periodically. All deficiencies found to be corrected by PCSS prior to commencement of Functional Demonstration Test. E. PCSS to maintain Sign -off forms and Calibration forms at job site and make them available to Engineer/Owner at any time. F. The PCSS to perform the following tests as part of ORT: 1. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up. 2. Input/Output (I/O) Hardwired Testing to SCADA/DCS . 3. Validation of Input/Output (I/O) Hardwired Testing at SCADA/DCS. 4. Validation of control strategies at field device(s) and equipment. 5. Testing of control strategies. 6. Validation of all status monitoring and alarming at SCADA/DCS. G. Instrument calibration, configuration, and set-up: 1. Calibrate, configure, and set-up all components and instruments to perform specified functions. 2. Calibration form: a. For any component or instrument requiring dip switch settings, calibration, or custom configuration, maintain a calibration form in field documenting this information. These forms provide a summary of the actual settings used in the field to allow an Instrument technician to replace the device entirely and configure it to function as it did before. b. Add this information to Instrument data sheet and to a copy of manufacturer's standard "Configuration Sheet" or create a separate form. 1) If a separate form, list Project Name, Loop Number, ISA Tag Number, I/O Module Address, Manufacturer, Model Number/Serial Number, Output Range and Calibrated Value. Some examples of required information are: 1) For Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. 2) For Instruments: Any configuration or calibration settings entered into instrument. d. Maintain a copy of these forms in field during testing and make them available for inspection at any time. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 6 of 11 For any device that allows a software back-up of configuration files to a laptop, make configuration files available to Engineer/Owner for inspection. Submit as part of Final System Documentation as specified in Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." H. 1/0 Testing: 1. Purpose of 1/0 testing is to check that process equipment, instrument installation, calibration, configuration, field wiring, and control panels are set-up correctly to monitor and control the processes. This test is commonly referred to as a "loop test" or an I/O checkout. 2. PCSS in conjunction with Owner and Contractor, to test signals under process conditions. Preferred test method will always be to execute test wherever possible to end elements. For example, preferred test will prove valve open/close limit switches by operating valve, not by installing a jumper on limit switch contacts. However, if equipment or process is not available to test a signal over its entire calibrated range, PCSS may test using a simulation method and make a note on sign -off form. 3. Perform the following 1/0 tests: a. Discrete Input: At device or instrument, change signal condition from inactive to active state. Observe results on all indicators within loop such as HMI screens, OIT screens, pilot lights, horns, beacons, etc. b. Analog Input: Test analog signal over entire engineering range at various intervals including 0, 50%, and 100% as well as on increasing and decreasing range. Observe results on all indicators within loop such as HMI screens, recorders, digital indicators, etc. C. Test discrete output signals by switching equipment to manual control at the HMI and turning output on or using other means to turn output on. Then verify equipment responds accordingly. d. Test analog output signals by switching equipment to manual control at HMI and turning output on or other means to turn output on. Then verify equipment responds accordingly. I. Testing of Automatic Control Strategies: PCSS (acting as the AESS) in conjunction with Owner and Contractor, is to verify all automatic control strategies using actual process equipment and instruments, or other means, to verify logic performs as expected. Verify faults and logical failure scenarios for control strategies such as instrument failures, equipment failures, loss of communication at HMI Server, out of range testing for analog inputs, loss of power, and all other strategies specified in control strategy document. Repeat all systems tests specified under factory testing. K. For all panels with enclosures modified by this Contract, test internal control panel temperature under full running conditions to ensure proper cooling/ventilation is being provided. L. All panels and enclosures provided to undergo a thorough inspection to verify integrity of cabinet enclosures, frame structure, paint work and finish, etc. Review panel drawings to ensure they accurately reflect panel layout and wiring. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 7 of 11 M. Perform panel wire pull tests to ensure all wiring has been connected with appropriate torque to prevent wires from coming loose. N. Upon successful completion of ORT, PCSS to submit a record copy of test results as specified in PART 1 and request scheduling of FDT. 3.3 FIELD TESTING - FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. After facility is started -up and running treatment process in automatic control to extent possible, perform a Functional Demonstration Test. Purpose of FDT is to allow Engineer or Owner representatives to witness actual functionality, performance, and stability of system while connected to process equipment. B. Required Documents for Test: 1. Set of panel drawings and wiring diagrams from ORT with corrections noted. 2. Set of Contract Documents - all drawings and specifications. 3. All design -change related documentation. 4. Signed -off master copy of the PCSS developed field testing signoff forms. 5. Testing procedures. 6. Copy of completed calibration forms. 7. One copy of all O & M Manuals for PCSS supplied equipment. C. The PCSS to perform the following tests as part of FDT: Same as the ORT list of tests. D. Perform a witnessed FDT on each process area. To extent possible, repeat testing performed during ORT. E. Follow specified daily schedule during factory tests and FDT. F. Document punch list items and resolutions noted during test on Punch list/Resolution form. In event of rejection of any part or function test procedure, PCSS to perform repairs, replacement, and/or retest within 10 days. G. Upon successful completion of the FDT, PCSS to submit a record copy of test results as specified in PART 1. 3.4 FIELD TESTING - SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of FDT, and system is started -up and running treatment process in automatic control to extent possible, system to undergo seven (7) consecutive days (24 hour day period) of successful operation of the new facilities as a prerequisite of Substantial Completion and Acceptance test as defined in Section 0145 27 "Equipment Testing and Start-up" Section. B. While this test is proceeding, Engineer and Owner have full use of system. Only allow plant operating personnel to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Plant operations CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 8 of 11 remain the responsibility of Owner and decision of plant operators regarding plant operations are final. C. During this test, PCSS personnel to be present as required to address any potential issues that would impact system operation. PCSS are expected to provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of hardware and software associated with the system. When PCSS personnel are not on -site, PCSS to provide cell phone/pager numbers that Owner personnel can use to ensure that support staff is available by phone and/or on -site within four hours of a request by operations staff. D. PCSS to analyze and correct any malfunctions during test. In event of rejection of any part or function, PCSS to perform repairs or replacement within 5 days. E. Throughout duration of SAT, do not make software or hardware modifications to the system without prior approval from Owner or Engineer. END OF SECTION 40 6121.20 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 21.20 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING [CONTRACTOR PERFORMS PROGRAMMING] Page 9 of 11 APPENDIX 40 61 21-A: EXAMPLE INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) STATUS SIGN OFF FORM An example template for VO Status signoff form to be used for documenting testing results to Owner is attached. PCSS is required, prior to testing, to create a project specific I/O Status signoff form based on attached template or approved equal. PCSS may obtain an electronic copy of template from Engineer or develop it on their own. APPENDIX 40 61 21-13: EXAMPLE AUTOMATIC CONTROL STRATEGIES SIGN OFF FORM An example template for Automatic Control Strategies signoff form to be used for documenting testing results to Owner is attached. PCSS is required, prior to testing, to create a project specific Automatic Control Strategies signoff form based on attached template or approved equal. PCSS may obtain an electronic copy of template from Engineer or develop it on their own. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 1/ [Project Name] Appendix A - InputfOutput WO] Status Sign -Off Forn Oil SecHPne below are royu 1104 to 4e filled 0u by PC?4 ay�rt pf Field T-s ncr- nSlrunlent Ala rm 5 n Serjj�Int far anj' alarms Eeh6V m Afi-q Complete - Signal wired rn field device 1o,PLC / ?O Tesie! • Sanal lead rrpm 5eld dgvlce to ^ YTDA NMI \his �,/r� Instru• Calibrate, Range or mom Asllwe&sale $lgn Conn Alarm and Wlring %'�MllO fhe PiG Siggriel Tad DeecHogon when oI—d MID al Rack Slot nel M.Wnl complete Oafe tabtl no gate .HMI INN.1bas I LC -SC LfT-0ODO-1 odwv Clarifier No. 1 S ,e Laval 0-10 ft 8 Al 2 1 0 I PLC -SC LIT•4010.3 rds- Clarifier No. 3 S u e Le,e1 0.10 It 8 AI 2 1 1 \ \ PLC -SC St-4 00-1 Pump No f Speed Fee ack 0-100% 14 A] 2 1 2 PLC -SC SF41004 Pum No. 4 3Agap Feedoac* FAI 0.100% 15 At 2 1 3 PLC -SG FIT4102-1SFlow pumps'-3 0.190n GPM 14 At 2 1 4 I PLCSC $f-u1141 Pump Nv- 1 Speeo >-eedpadc n-100% 14 A] 2 1 s I PLC -SC NA ,Spare Slat WA WA tpare 2 5 WA PLC-SC SC-4100-1 S Pumb No. 1 Soead Selnt�"t o-m0% 14 AO 2 7 11 / 1 \ ✓ ./ PLCSC SC-4100-2 �AS Pump Np. 2 Syy�1�d Sel.1t(� 0.100% 16 AO 2 7 X \ PLCSC SC-4 DO-3 8 Pumo No. 33oaed 8eroalIt 0-100% 14 AO 2 7 I2 I \ i l PLCSC SC�110.1 S Pump No.l Speed Seipoim 0-1 90% 14 AO 2 7 E3 \ \ I PLC -SC Spare WA WA AO 2 7 } It \ t \ I PLC 5G Spare +Svare Share WA MA AD 2 7 PLC -SC TSI.44)M 1 .ecanda^�Clarifrer Na 1 h 7amq Nurmar 8 gr 1 0 ► i \ PLC -SC PLC XAJ000.1 iecond., {"I,ff-r No. 1 otor Overload Normal 8 e DI 3 �8 rl, i 1 � -SC PLCSC WM+ DM-1 1VAHH-0000-t :oconda V@rrtar No.1H hTur ue i—dar�lariBer No.l nmue Normal Normal 6 8 OI %D1 $!1 3 "al ► I PLCSC YRI-4000-1 Iecgadl v Clarifier No. 1 MnD1 On 8 OL 3 \ t� d f I PLC -SC YC I-40W-1 ;amnda Ciarirmr No. 1 In Remale In Remelt 8 bI \ 3 1p r. 1 I PLC -SC YFI-41110-1 iAS Pump No 1 VFO Fault Npfiel` 11 al �8 0. 8 � l PLC -SC FAL•4100.1 lAS Pump No. }Law Flew fiJormat �Vd 01 3\ I \7 50 COMM RWM U01M Olj rAS I=Z2011 MPO 1212W2011 _xamplg COMDIeWd lore PLC SC S�an3 prmaL 14101 3 \1 PI YR(dtp0-1 {� Pump No, I Runrunv nnr� 14 M�, 3 k B i I PLCSC YC 14100-1 tAS Pumo No. 1 in Remole n l& 1x1-- 01 -3,- l L-C I PLCSC VF14110-1 VAS Pump No. 1 VFO Faun / l o e1 ►, 1d/ DI 3 t1 I PLC -SC FAL•41 f0-i VAS Pump Ng. 1 Low Flow L 1 Nor ai ' t A Df\ 3 ) 42 I PLCSC ��jj�� re ► N.-1W 14 / ❑1 3" 1 13 PLCSC Yf2�111 o-1 1'AS Ppmp No. 1 fxunnin� � 1 flunnink 'LY PI 3 1 14 I PLCSC YCI.4110.1 WAS Pumo No. 1 in Rem Ii ► In R it OI 3 1 15 PLC -SC HSSd -2 condery Clarifier No. 2 Stan mand Start 8 DO 4 '6 0 PLCSC Spqa�re pare ./t . t -YC f NX ❑O 4 6 1 1 PLCSC HS.5 W-2 AS PV��vv N9, 2 Start fi6mms3d 1 Start —14 ❑0 6 6 2 1 PLC -SC HSS•7000-2 a o1d1inc WqXank BwSGer No. 2 Stan Coniland� �.Slan / 17 00 4 6 3 PLC -SC Hfi5d100Sump Np. y6isn CpFunand 1 SfarF- 15 DO 1 6 i PLCSC 3 are °m°�are ! C R NIA N+A 00 4 6 5 I PLCSC HS5%105-1 SAS---,W PumylVo-2514rtI5to Start 15 ❑❑ i 6 8 I PLCSC I-ISSI1 f0-2 ASPump tj �rt131o�Cn F� Start 15 DO d 6 7 PLCSC i760•Fal-i A ikrdae Loadoull umana lndfcafor / P Ina 17 DO 4 6 8 PLC -SC Spero ipare \ ! t Nd NSA no 8 6 & I PLC -SC HSS-7115.2 3luaae Holdmc Tank MixAs,No. 2 sun ! ! Stan 17 DO 4 6 10 I PLC -SG re Snare \ "' i WA WA 00 4 6 11 1 PLCSC K 717-2 Audya HpldingTank ❑iycharq Valve No Open CMLI Qpp�en 17 ❑O d 6 12 1 PLC -SC HSC-7111-2 3ludad HoldirpS 1, elarna a Vabre k6. Cloae CM❑ Cfase 11 00 4 6 is PLC -SC HSS-7120-2 iS Transfer Pump ldo-2 Siawnmand Start 17 0❑ d S 14 1 PLC -SC Spero ,Spare WA WA 00 4 6 15 Page 1 of i C)C) O t7 C•1 � O z b tTJ C� '17 n H °z l� 5O S z Cn 14 [Project Name] Appendix B - Automatic Control Strategies Sign -Off Form All Sections below are required to he ed by PCSS as part of Testing Auto. Control Strategies. - Loop operati final i uto tic as defined in Control Stateqies Auto. Control Strategies Loop Control # Control Strategy Description P&D Strategy to o LOOP 281 - 284 LOW FLOW PUMPS 8 LOOP 290 LOW EQ CHANNEL FLOW NOA 8 N, LOOP 300 MICROFILTRATION AIR SUPPLY LOW PRESSURE 10 ` J i 4 _ l LOOP 351, 352 SITE LIFT STATION PUMP NO-1 AND NO. 2 12 `- ( I LX LOOP 355 SITE LIFT STATION HIGH AND LOW LEVEL CONTROL -Iit\ LOOP 371, 372 SLUDGE HOLDING TANK NOA AND NO, 2 LEVEL ( 14 LOOP 381, 382 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS REMOTE STARTISTOP LOOP 385 COMMAND 14 LOOP 700 EFFLUENT PUMPING STATION Ll VEL / ` 4 \ LOOP 701, 702, 703 EFFLUENT PUMP NO-1 LOOP 840 POST AERATION CHANNEL AIR FLOW �NT C-� LOOP 900 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMPS DISCHARGE F%,OW 8 1 LOOP 971 CENTRIFUGE SLUDGE FEE NO.1 \ $ LOOP 1401 CENTRIFUGE N0.1 SLUR FEED CONTROL S, 8 LOOP 1411, 1412 SODIUM HYPOCHLORIT£aTO T hiR EVEL\ 8 SODIUM LOOP 1421, 1422 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE R ITSTI�Palm E 8 LOOP 1430 CONTAIN HIGH LEL ET TIO 14 LOOP 2051, 2052, 2053 DIESEL ENGINE'GE i�ATOR A,TAT 14 LOOP 2055 TRANSFER 311fU�{H fATUS 1 `� 14 LOOP 2060 GENEfOR KILOW TT�10N1 RIyG 14 M MENT TA DU N ER LOSS WITH APPENDIX ONE /� TtW R� 14 e UIP� NT RES R WITH P WI_K rcca i'urccJ APPENDIX T "' T A WER S 14 NIA SELF-F1� ING CA Ai31LITIES OF NETWORK NIA NIA N/A SERVER FAILOVER AND ,/ N/A Page 1 of 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING Page 1 of 4 SECTION 40 6126 - PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes process control system training for provided devices and systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Training Plan Submittal: 1. Prior to preparation of Final Training Plans, submit outlines of each training course including course objectives and target audience, resumes of instructors, prerequisite requirements for each class, and samples of handouts for review. B. Final Training Plan Submittal: 1. Upon receipt of Engineer's comments on preliminary training plan, submit specific proposed training plan with the following: a. Definitions, objectives, and target audience of each course. b. Schedule of training courses including proposed dates, duration, and locations of each class. C. Complete copy of all proposed handouts and training materials bound and logically arranged with all materials reduced to a maximum size of 11 inch by 17 inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion into the binder. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING Page 2 of 4 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Directly relate the training and instruction to the system being supplied. Training program represents a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the system. B. Coordinate all training schedules with and at the convenience of Owner, including shift training required to correspond to Owner's working schedule. C. All onsite instructors must be intimately familiar with the operation and control of Owner's facilities. D. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses including specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. Provide the manuals in hardcopy for each student. Provide electronic copy of each training manual in PDF format for Owner's future use. E. Make use of teaching aids, manuals, or slide/video presentations as required. After training services, deliver training materials to Owner. F. Owner reserves the right to videotape all custom training sessions. Training tapes become sole property of Owner. G. Cost of Travel for off -site training: 1. Cost of Travel for off -site training is paid directly by entity employing the staff doing the traveling. 3.2 TRAINING SUMMARY A. Provide following training courses listed in the summary table below: Description Minimum Maximum Number of Intended Course Number of Times Audience Duration Trainees Course to (hours) per Course be Given Onsite Training Installed Control System 2 2 1 Maintenance, Administrator CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING Page 3 of 4 Instrument manufacturer 4 2 1 Maintenance training - analyzers (add a row for each specific instrument requiring manufacturer's training) Instruments 4 2 1 Maintenance Instruments - Operator 2 8 1 Operations familiarity B. Definitions of Audience Roles: 1. Administrator: Personnel responsible for maintaining the HMI / SCADA system. 2. Maintenance: Personnel responsible for maintaining the field controller hardware and instrumentation system. 3. Operations: Personnel responsible for daily plant operations. 4. Management: Non -daily operations personnel. A. Training personnel are required to be intimately familiar with the control system equipment, its manipulation, and configuration. Training personnel are required to command knowledge of system debugging, program modification, troubleshooting, maintenance procedure, system operation, and programming, and capable of transferring this knowledge in an orderly fashion to technically oriented personnel. B. Installed Control System Training: 1. Provide training for Owner's personnel in the functionality, maintenance, and troubleshooting, of the installed Control System. Conduct training before Functional Demonstrator Test (FDT), but not more than 2 months before. 2. Provide training for Owner's personnel in the new functionalities, control, alarms, and status/monitoring of clarifiers, scum pump station, primary sludge pump no. 1, ancillary process control systems, and miscellaneous HVAC and Electrical systems supplied. 3. Provide training and instruction specific to the system that is being supplied. 4. Provide training consisting of classroom instructions and hands-on instruction utilizing Owner's system. 5. Provide detailed training on the actual configuration and implementation for this Contract covering all aspects of the system that will allow Owner's personnel to maintain, modify, troubleshoot, and develop future additions/deletions to the system. Provide training covering the following subjects: a. System overview. b. System hardware components and specific equipment arrangements. C. Periodic maintenance. d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis. C. Instrument Manufacturer Training: Provide manufacturer instrument training for those instruments where specifically indicated in the Instruments section. This is on -site training provided by an authorized CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 26 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING Page 4 of 4 representative of the manufacturer. Manufacturer's representative is required to be fully knowledgeable in equipment operation and maintenance. D. Instrument Training: Provide instruction on the maintenance of the field and panel instrumentation for Owner's instrumentation technicians. Conduct this training before FDT, but no more than 1 month before and at a time suitable to Owner. This training takes place at Owner's facility. Training program is required to include the following elements: a. Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided. b. Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract. C. Testing, adjustment, and calibration procedures. d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis. e. Maintenance and frequency. E. Instruments - Operator familiarity: 1. Provide operator level instruction on the use of the field and panel instrumentation for Owner's operations staff. Conduct training before the 30-day site acceptance test, but no more than 1 month before and at a time suitable to Owner. This training takes place at Owner's facility. Include hands on demonstration of information each transmitter indicates, and method used to retrieve any operator information from transmitter, including use of pushbuttons and interpretation of international graphic symbols used on the instruments. END OF SECTION 40 6126 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 1 of 26 1 SECTION 40 61 96 - PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Applications Engineer System Supplier (AESS) Programming Scope 1. Develop the control system applications to implement the process control descriptions for new primary clarifier and existing systems. This Section is provided to define control strategies to be used for DCS Ovation programming and hardwired controls of the system. 2. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such, all Drawings, Specifications Divisions and Specifications Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and Subcontractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 3. The PCSS is cautioned to read this Section and all related Sections and their entirety prior to starting any programming. Many general control strategies and requirements are defined once in the body of this Section with the specific requirement called out in the individual control strategy. Implement these general strategies throughout this Contract unless specifically directed otherwise in the individual loop process control descriptions. The PCSS to provide AESS programming services. 4. Follow loop and device tagging criteria shown on the Drawings without exception. 5. Establish programming approach and database/variable identification standards prior to performing any programming work. Review the proposed standards and conventions with the Owner during the coordination workshop required by Section 406863 "Configuration of HMI Software." Utilize Owner standard explicitly for all related programming services defined herein and throughout Division 40. Upon request, copies of Owner standard to be made available. B. Related Requirements: Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." Section 406863 "Configuration of HMI Software." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS): The entity who provides all programming, configuration, and related services for the control system equipment provided by the PCSS and is a qualified agency with experienced Emerson Ovation programming services. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 2 of 26 B. Human Machine Interface (HMI): A software -based user interface with supervisory level control of machine level equipment. C. Input/Output (I/O): Analog or digital field instrument signals to be received and interpreted by a PLC. D. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. E. Supervisor Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): Hardware and software components used for high-level supervisory monitoring of industrial processes. Typical devices that are part of the SCADA network include computers (OWS), PLCs, Ethernet switches, OITs, and HMIs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Loop Numbering 1. The control descriptions are separated into areas and sorted by loop number. The following is a list of areas and the loop numbers associated with each area. Note, there are sub -loops within each area loop numbers. a. West Diversion Box G, PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault, and PC 1-4 Distribution Box..............................................................3000-3006 b. Primary Clarifiers and Scum Pump Stations..............................3100-3210 C. Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1.......................................3050-3350 3.2 GENERAL CONTROLS AND MONITORING A. Overview 1. The hardware and/or software functions noted by this paragraph reference are to be implemented in the SCADA/Ovation control system. 2. Setpoints, as defined by this section, refer to numerical values adjustable from the HMI. 3. Refer to Owner programming standards for general control and monitoring overview. B. Interlocks 1. Hardwired interlocks will interlock the controls locally and at the vendor controls. If the interlock occurs, the shutdown will cause the equipment to be inoperable at all levels of control. 2. Refer to Owner programming standards for software and hardware interlock overview. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 3 of 26 C. Motors 1. Provide monitoring and control of the signals shown on the P&IDs. 2. Refer to Owner programming standards for motor equipment overview. D. Valves 1. Provide monitoring and control of the signals shown on the P&IDs. 2. Refer to Owner programming standards for valve equipment overview. E. Analog Instruments 1. Analog instruments refer to indicating devices capable of providing a continuous output relative to time. 2. Provide monitoring of the analog signals shown on the P&IDs. 3. Refer to Owner programming standards for analog instruments. F. Discrete Instruments 1. Discrete instruments refer to indicating devices with any number of non -continuous defined states (e.g., ON/OFF, 0 or 1) 2. Provide monitoring of the discrete signals shown on the P&IDs. 3. Refer to Owner programming standards for discrete instruments. G. Input Validation 1. Provide input validation for setpoints used in process control (e.g., speed setpoints, pump flow setpoints). 2. Refer to Owner programming standards for input validation of setpoints utilized in process control. 3.3 HISTORICAL DATA COLLECTION A. Refer to Owner programming standards for historical data collection and historization methodology. 3.4 ACCUMULATORS AND TOTALIZERS A. Accumulators 1. Refer to Owner programming standards for accumulators for all equipment with Running status. B. Flow Totalizers 1. Refer to Owner programming standards for flow totalization (units, time of day, auxiliary flow, etc.) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 4 of 26 3.5 ALARMING AND EQUIPMENT FAILURES A. Analog Alarms 1. Refer to Owner programming standards for analog alarming. B. Discrete Alarms Refer to Owner programming standards for discrete alarming. C. Motor Failure Alarms 1. Refer to Owner programming standards for motor failure alarming. D. Valve Failures 1. Refer to Owner programming standards for valve failure alarming. 3.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS A. Refer to Owner programming standards for overview of automatic control strategy philosophy for lead/lag and duty/standby strategies. B. PID Control Refer to Owner programming standards for overview of PID control and any other PID tuning/control. 3.7 INDIVIDUAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND CONTROL SEQUENCES LOOP No. LOOP DESCRIPTION PAGE No. LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 INFLUENT FLOW METER VAULT FLOW METER ............................9 LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 INFLUENT FLOW METER VAULT SUMP PUMP .............................10 LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.1...................................10 LOOP 3000-02 PC 1-4 DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.2..........................................10 LOOP 3000-03 PC 1-4 DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.3..........................................10 LOOP 3000-04 PC 1-4 DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NOA..........................................10 LOOP 3001-01 WEST DIVERSION BOX G SLIDE GATE NO.1.................................. 11 LOOP 3001-02 WEST DIVERSION BOX G SLIDE GATE NO.2.............................................11 LOOP 3005-01 PLANT SEWER FLOW METER STATION NO.1 FLOW METER ......12 LOOP 3005-01 PLANT SEWER FLOW METER STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMP ..........12 LOOP 3050-01 EXHAUST FAN NO.1 LOW FLOW AND SMOKE ALARM ..........................13 LOOP 3050-01 EXHAUST FAN NO.1 STATUS........................................................................13 LOOP 3055-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 VENTILATION ALARM PANEL.............................................................................................................................14 LOOP 3060-01 MAKEUP AIR TO SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 STATUS ......................14 LOOP 3060-01 MAKEUP AIR TO SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 LOW FLOW AND SMOKEALARM.............................................................................................................................14 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 5 of 26 LOOP 3060-01 SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 ROOM TEMPERATURE .....................13 LOOP 3070-01 SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SEAL WATER BOOSTER PUMP .............14 LOOP 3070-01 SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SEAL WATER BOOSTER PUMP DISCHARGEPRESSURE......................................................................................................................14 LOOP 3100-02 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO.2.......................................................................14 LOOP 3100-03 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO.3..........................................................15 LOOP 3100-04 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NOA ............................................................................15 LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 HIGH LEVEL ............................................... 16 LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 LOW LEVEL.....................................................16 LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 HIGH -HIGH LEVEL........................................16 LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 LEVEL...............................................................16 LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 HIGH LEVEL..........................................................16 LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 LOW LEVEL...........................................................17 LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 HIGH -HIGH LEVEL...............................................17 LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 LEVEL.....................................................................17 LOOP 3117-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 IN -LINE GRINDER................................87 LOOP 3117-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 IN -LINE GRINDER........................................17 LOOP 3200-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SCUM PUMP NO.1......................................18 LOOP 3200-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SCUM PUMP NO.28....................................19 LOOP 3200-03 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SCUM PUMP NO.3.........................................19 LOOP 3200-04 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SCUM PUMP NOA .........................................19 LOOP 3204 -01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 RECIRCULATION VALVE ...........................19 LOOP 3204 -02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 RECIRCULATION VALVE ...........................20 LOOP 3206 -01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 DISHCARGE VALVE....................................19 LOOP 3206 -02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 DISCHARGE VALVE....................................20 LOOP 3210-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMPS..........................................21 LOOP 3210-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SUMP PUMPS.................................................21 LOOP 3212-01 & 3213-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SEAL WATER CONTROL.....................21 LOOP 3213-01 & 3214-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SEAL WATER CONTROL ....................21 LOOP 3300-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.2........................................................................................................................................21 LOOP 3300-03 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.3........................................................................................................................................23 LOOP 3300-04 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NOA.............................................................................................................................23 LOOP 3300-05 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.5 .............................................................................................................................23 LOOP 3300-06 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO. IPRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.6 .............................................................................................................................23 LOOP 3309-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE FLOW.................................24 LOOP 3309-03 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.3 DISCHARGE FLOW.................................24 LOOP 3309-04 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NOA DISCHARGE FLOW.................................24 LOOP 3309-05 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.5 DISCHARGE FLOW.................................24 LOOP 3309-06 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.6 DISCHARGE FLOW.................................24 LOOP 3310-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMPS .........................25 LOOP 3310-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMPS .........................25 LOOP 3312-04 & -08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.2 SEAL WATER CONTROL .......................25 LOOP 3313-04 & -08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.3 SEAL WATER CONTROL .......................25 LOOP 3314-04 & -08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NOA SEAL WATER CONTROL .......................25 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 6 of 26 LOOP 3315-04 & -08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.5 SEAL WATER CONTROL .......................25 LOOP 3316-04 & -08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.6 SEAL WATER CONTROL .......................26 LOOP 3350-01 SLUDGE PUMP STATION IN -LINE GRINDER NO.1....................................26 LOOP 3350-02 SLUDGE PUMP STATION IN -LINE GRINDER NO.2....................................26 LOOP 3350-03 SLUDGE PUMP STATION IN -LINE GRINDER NO.3....................................26 LOOP 3350-04 SLUDGE PUMP STATION IN -LINE GRINDER NOA....................................27 LOOP 3401-01 MCC-PS1A POWER AND CURRENT READINGS.........................................28 LOOP 3402-01 MCC-PS1B POWER AND CURRENT READINGS.........................................28 LOOP 3411-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFA1-SS3 STATUS...................................................28 LOOP 3412-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFB1-SS3 STATUS...................................................28 LOOP 3413-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFA1-SS4 STATUS...................................................28 LOOP 3414-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SF131-SS4 STATUS...................................................29 LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 INFLUENT FLOW METER VAULT FLOW METER A. General: 1. Continuous flow measurement by means of an ultrasonic clamp -on flow meter of influent raw sewage to primary clarifiers. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Flow (FIT) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Flow (FI) LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 INFLUENT FLOW METER VAULT SUMP PUMP A. General: 1. The Influent Flow Meter Vault Sump Pump activates via integral float switch. B. Control 1. The Influent Flow Meter Vault Sump Pump activates via float switch. There are no remote controls at SCADA/DCS. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. High Level (LAH) once activated. LOOP 3000-01 PC 1-4 DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.1 A. General: 1. The gate has a motorized actuator and is used for controlling influent flow to the bank of primary clarifiers. The actuator can only be operated locally and status monitored at SCADA/DCS. B. Control: 1. Local: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 7 of 26 a. Local: When the Local -Off -Remote selector switch is in the "Local "position the gate can be opened or closed through the local "Open" or "Close" pushbutton on the actuator. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None. b. Auto: None. C. Alarms/Monitoring Local: a. Indication on Actuator. 1. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: b. Gate Opened Status (ZSO) C. Gate Closed Status (ZSC) LOOP 3000-03 PRIMARY CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.2 A. General: 1. Functionally identical to loop 3000-01. LOOP 3000-04 PRIMARY CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NO.3 A. General: Functionally identical to loop 3000-01. LOOP 3000-04 PRIMARY CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION BOX SLIDE GATE NOA A. General: Functionally identical to loop 3000-01. LOOP 3001-01 WEST DIVERSION BOX G SLIDE GATE NOA A. General: 1. The gate has a motorized actuator and is used for controlling influent flow from headworks into the West Diversion Box. The actuator can be operated locally or remotely at SCADA/DCS. B. Control: 1. Local: a. Local: When the Local -Off -Remote selector switch is in the "Local' position, the gate can be opened or closed through the local "Open" or "Close" pushbutton on the actuator. b. Remote: When the Local -Off -Remote selector switch is in the "Remote" position, control of the gate is transferred to the SCADA DCS. 2. SCADA OVATION/ DCS: a. Manual: The gate position can be modulated by the operator providing a position setpoint at SCADA. b. Auto: None. C. Alarms/Monitoring: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 8 of 26 1. Local: a. Indication on actuator. 2. SCADA OVATION/DCS/RTU-001: a. Gate in Remote Status (YCI) b. Gate Opened Status (ZSO) C. Gate Closed Status (ZSC) d. Gate Position Feedback (ZI) e. Gate Position Setpoint (ZIC) LOOP 3001-02 WEST DIVERSION BOX G SLIDE GATE NO.2 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3001-01. LOOP 3005-01 PLANT SEWER FLOW METER STATION NO.1 FLOW METER A. General 1. Continuous flow measurement by means of a magnetic flow meter of sewage to primary effluent header. B. Control 1. None C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Flow (FI). 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-009: a. Flow (FI) LOOP 3005-01 PLANT SEWER FLOW METER STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMP A. General 1. The Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Sump Pump activates via integral float switch. B. Control 2. The Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Sump Pump activates via float switch. There are no remote controls at SCADA/DCS. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-009: a. High Level (LAH) once activated. LOOP 3050-01 EXHAUST FAN NO.1 LOW FLOW AND SMOKE ALARM A. General 1. Monitoring of smoke alarm and low flow on air duct from exhaust fan no. 1 in the primary sludge pump station no.l area by means of smoke detection device and low flow switch. Status of smoke alarms and low flow (exhaust) at SCADA Ovation DCS. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 9 of 26 B. Control 1. Hardwired Interlocks: a. When the smoke device is tripped the exhaust fan to stop. C. Alarms/Monitoring: 1. Ventilation Alarm Panel ALP-3055-01: a. Low Flow (FAL) b. Smoke Alarm (XA) C. Smoke Trouble (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Low Flow Alarm (FAL) b. Smoke Alarm (XA) C. Smoke Trouble (XA) LOOP 3050-01 EXHAUST FAN NO.1 STATUS A. General 1. Monitoring of exhaust fan no.1 in the primary sludge pump station no.1 area status at SCADA Ovation/ DCS. B. Control 1. Local: a. The exhaust fan can be controlled locally at the motor starter panel. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. When the smoke device is tripped the exhaust fan to stop. C. Alarms/Monitoring: 1. SCADA OVATION DCS-RTU-001: a. Running (YRI) b. Common Fault (YFI) LOOP 3055-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 VENTILATION ALARM PANEL A. General 1. Flow switches and smoke duct detectors associated for Exhaust Fan No.l (EF-3050- 01) and Make-up Air (MAU-3 060-0 1) Handling units primary sludge pump station no.l area status at SCADA Ovation/ DCS. In the event of low flow or smoke detected at the pump station, it will be alarmed at the Alarm Panel (ALP-3055-01) via pilot lights. Horn and strobes are also provided to alarm these signals throughout the area. B. Control 1. Local: a. None. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. When low air flow is detected from either Exhaust Fan No.l or Make -Up Air Unit, it will alarm at the panel via hardwired signals. b. When smoke is detected in the ducts from either Exhaust Fan No.1 or Make -Up Air Unit, it will alarm at the panel via hardwired signals. c. When low air flow or smoke detected is alarmed at the pane, horn and strobe lights will energize to alarm these signals throughout the area. d. A silence/reset button is provided at the Alarm Panel to silence the horn when it is active and reset the lights once the alarm condition is cleared. e. A test button is provided at the Alarm Panel to test functionality and safety of panel for active maintenance. C. Alarms/Monitoring: a. Local: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 10 of 26 a. Low Flow (FAL-3050-01) b. Smoke Alarm (XA-3050-01A) c. Smoke Trouble (XA-3050-01B) d. Low Flow (FAL-3060-01) e. Smoke Alarm (XA-3060-01A) f. Smoke Trouble (XA-3060-01B) b. SCADA OVATION DCS-RTU-001: a. Low Flow (FAL-3050-01) b. Smoke Alarm (XA-3050-01A) c. Smoke Trouble (XA-3050-01B) d. Low Flow (FAL-3060-01) e. Smoke Alarm (XA-3060-01A) f. Smoke Trouble (XA-3060-01B) LOOP 3060-01 MAKEUP AIR TO PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 STATUS A. General 1. Monitoring of Make-up Air Handling Unit in the primary sludge pump station no.1 area status at SCADA Ovation/ DCS. B. Control 1. Local: a. When the Hand -Off -Auto selector switch at the local control panel is in the "Auto" position, the Make-up Air Unit to run continuously. b. When the Hand -Off -Auto selector switch at the local control panel is in the "Off' position, the Make-up Air Unit to stop. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. When the smoke device on the duct switch is tripped, the makeup fan to stop. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Running (YRI) b. Common Fault (YFI) LOOP 3060-01 MAKEUP AIR TO PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 AREA SMOKE AND NO FLOW ALARM A. General 1. Monitoring of smoke alarm and low flow on air duct from Make-up Air Handling Unit in the primary sludge pump station no.1 area by means of smoke detection device and low flow switch. Status of smoke alarms and low flow (exhaust) at SCADA Ovation DCS. B. Control 1. Hardwired Interlocks: a. When the smoke device is tripped the exhaust fan to stop C. Alarms/Monitoring: 1. Ventilation Alarm Panel ALP-3055-01: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 11 of 26 a. Low Flow (FAL) b. Smoke Alarm (XA) c. Smoke Trouble (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Low Flow Alarm (FAL) b. Smoke Alarm (XA) c. Smoke Trouble (XA) LOOP 3060-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 ROOM TEMPERATURE A. General 1. The ambient room temperature to be measured with a temperature sensor. B. Control 1. None. C. Alanns/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Temperature (TT). 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Temperature (TI) LOOP 3070-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SEAL WATER BOOSTER PUMP A. General 1. Booster pump will be on the seal water pipeline to provide water to the primary sludge pumps. This is to operate as an On/Off constant speed pump. The operation of the pump is at the Local Control Station (LCS). B. Control 1. Local Panel at the Pump: a. If the On/Off (O/O) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the On position the pump can be started and stopped by using the on/off pushbutton at the local panel. b. If the On/Off (O/O) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Off position the pump will not run. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None b. Auto: None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Running (YR) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Running Status (YRI) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 12 of 26 b. Common Fault Alarm (YFI) LOOP 3070-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SEAL WATER BOOSTER PUMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE A. General 1. Monitoring of Booster Pump discharge pressure of the seal water pipeline to provide water to the primary sludge pumps to SCADA OVATION/DCS. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Pressure (PIT). 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Pressure (PI) LOOP 3100-02 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO.2 A. General 1. Water from the Primary Clarifiers Distribution Box to be diverted to the three Primary Clarifiers. A vendor provided Local Control Panel (LCP-3 1 00-XX) to be provided to control the Clarifiers locally. High, high -high torque, and loss of motion switches to be provided on the Clarifier for alarming and shutting down the equipment. B. Control 1. Local: a. The Clarifier can be controlled locally through the Vendor provided LCP. The equipment can be start and stopped using the start and stop pushbuttons at the LCP. A "Reset' pushbutton to be provided to reset any alarm after the condition has been cleared. An emergency stop push button to be provided at the LCP to shut down the equipment in case of an emergency. b. The operator to perform field check of the following before operation of each clarifier: 1) Positive Flow from influent PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter (FIT-3000-01). 2) Slide gate(s) at Primary Clarifier West Diversion Box G are Opened (SG-3001-XX). 3) Slide gate (s) at PC 1-4 Distribution Box are Opened (SG-3000-XX). C. Hardwired Interlocks: 1) When a high -high torque condition is met for a clarifier motor, the clarifier to stop running. 2) When either clarifier motor (1 or 2) fault condition is met, the clarifier to stop running. 3) When a clarifier is called to start by the local control panel (LCP), the LCP will fist command the skimmer arm to begin rotating along with sludge collector mechanism and will rotate continuously during the operation of a clarifier. When the skimmer arm approaches the scum beach whisker switch (ZS-3100-XX), the scum beach spray bar solenoid valve to open for a preset amount of time (initially set at 120 seconds) to start the scum beach flush spray bar and to remain open. Once the timer has expired the scum beach flushing will end. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 13 of 26 4) When the manual override switch at the local control panel (LCP) is put to into the "on" position, the solenoid valve to remain closed and manual bypass valve opened for continuous flushing. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: No remote control of the Clarifier to be provided from SCADA. b. Auto: None. 3. Software Interlock/Permissive: a. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Clarifier Running (YR) b. Clarifier Motor 1 Fault (XA) c. Clarifier Motor 2 Fault (XA) d. Clarifier Off (YR) e. Clarifier E-stop Activated (XA) £ Clarifier Motor 1 High Torque (WAH) g. Clarifier Motor 1 High -High Torque (WAHH) h. Clarifier Motor 2 High Torque (WAH) i. Clarifier Motor 2 High -High Torque (WAHH) 2. SCADA Ovation DCS/RTU-001: a. Clarifier Common Fault Alarm (YFI) b. Clarifier Running Status (YRI) LOOP 3100-03 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO.3 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3100-02. LOOP 3100-04 PRIMARY CLARIFIER NOA A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3100-02. LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 HIGH LEVEL A. General 1. Scum Wet Well No.1 high level to be monitored at SCADA Ovation DCS system by means of a high-level float. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. High Level Alarm (LAH) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 14 of 26 LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 LOW LEVEL A. General 1. Scum Wet Well No.1 low level to be monitored at SCADA Ovation DCS system by means of a low-level float. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Low Level Alarm (LAL) LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 HIGH -HIGH LEVEL A. General 1. Scum Wet Well No.l high -high level to be monitored at SCADA Ovation DCS system by means of a high -high level float. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitorinir 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. High -High Level Alarm (LAHH) LOOP 3115-01 SCUM WET WELL NO.1 LEVEL A. General 1. A scum well to be provided next to the clarifier where the scum from the clarifier will be collected. Scum Wet Well No.1 level to be monitored at SCADA Ovation DCS system by means of a radar level transmitter. Float switches to be provided in the well which will be used for shutting down the scum in the case of high or low level. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Level (LIT). 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Level (LI) LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 HIGH LEVEL A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3115-01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 15 of 26 LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 LOW LEVEL A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3115-01. LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 HIGH -HIGH LEVEL A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3115-01. LOOP 3115-02 SCUM WET WELL NO.2 LEVEL A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3115-01. LOOP 3117-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 IN -LINE GRINDER A. General 1. An In -line Grinder to be provided before the scum pumps to break down the scum before pumping. The grinder to be provided with a vendor control panel and is intended to run in operation with the scum pumps. B. Control 1. Local Panel at the Grinder: a. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Local position the grinder will start by using the start/stop pushbutton at the local panel. b. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Off position the grinder will not run. C. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Remote position the grinder will be called to run when its associated scum pump is started at the local panel. d. An emergency stop push button to be provided at the LCP to stop the grinder in case of emergency. e. A reset push button to be provided at the LCP to clear and acknowledge any alarms that stop operation. £ When operator pushes start/stop at the local control panel for the scum pump, and the scum pump local panel is in the remote position, the associated grinder will start when in the remote position. The grinder will run for an operator determined amount of time (x seconds) before the pumps to be allowed to automatically start. The grinder will continue to run during pumping operations, once the pump is stopped, the grinder will continue to run for an operator determined amount time (x seconds) and then shut off. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The grinder will operate when the associated scum pumps are running. If the pumps stop running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. b. When a high motor temperature condition is detected while the grinder is running, the grinder will stop. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 16 of 26 3. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None b. Auto: None C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Grinder Running (YR). b. Grinder Motor Fault (XA) C. Grinder Power On (YL) d. Grinder Jammed (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Grinder Running (YRI) b. Grinder Common Fault (YFI) LOOP 3117-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 IN -LINE GRINDER A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3117-01. LOOP 3200-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NOA SCUM PUMP NOA A. General 1. Two dry pit, progressing cavity type (duty & standby) scum pumps to be provided to pump the scum from the scum well to the existing Scum Holding Tanks. Duty pump to be dedicated a set of Clarifiers (Future No.1 & No.3, No.2 & No.4). The pump(s) to operate based on timer and level in the scum well. The operation to be sequential across all pumps and a high level at the scum pump to override the sequence. The operator to be able to set the pump sequence and control locally in the field as required. The starter for the pumps to be located at the vendor provided Local Control Panel (LCP-3 200-0 1). B. Control 1. Local Panel at the Pumps: a. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Local position the pump to be start and stopped by using the pushbuttons at the local panel. b. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Off position the pump will not run. C. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Remote position the pumping system cycle to initiate. d. An emergency stop push button to be provided at the LCP to stop the pump in case of emergency. e. The scum pump(s) to be controlled locally and based on timers and level at the scum wet well. The operator to set and alternate the duty and standby sequence via selector switch and runtime for the dedicated duty pump. The pump to stop once the timer has timed out. £ When a pump is called to start by the local control panel (LCP), the LCP will fist command the seal water solenoid valve to open for a present amount of time (initially set at 15 seconds) before the pump starts. Once the timer has expired the pump will be started. The solenoid valve will be kept open when the pump is running. When the pump is commanded to stop the seal water solenoid valve will be closed for a preset amount of time (initially set at 15 seconds) after the pump has stopped. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 17 of 26 g. When the hand switch at the local panel is in the remote position, the pumping system cycle to initiate upon receiving a high-level signal from radar level (LIT/LE-3115-XX) or back-up high-level float switch (LSH-3115-XX) at the scum wetwell for recirculation mixing. The high-level signal is to take precedence over a timer at the local control panel. The pumping system cycle to end and recirculation mixing is complete upon receiving a low-level signal from radar level or back-up low-level float switch (LSL-3115-XX) at the scum wetwell and the pumps are called to stop. The low-level signal is to take precedence over a timer at the local control panel. During the pumping system cycle for recirculation mixing, both pumps to operate simultaneously, while maintaining a duty and standby pump arrangement. h. When the hand switch at the local panel is in the remote position, both the recirculation valve (PV-3204-XX) and discharge valve (PV-3206-XX) are in the remote position at the valve actuator, grinder is running, and a pump is called to run to the initiate the pumping system cycle, recirculation valve to open for scum wetwell mixing and simultaneously the discharge valve to begin to close. The duration of mixing to be determined via an operator adjustable timer. When the recirculation timer has elapsed, a scum pump will be called to stop, the recirculation valve to close, and simultaneously the discharge valve to begin to open. i. While in forward pumping, during a pumping system cycle, the pumps to operate in an alternate duty and standby sequence. Should the duty pump be called to stopped for any condition, the standby pump to automatically be called to start to complete the pumping cycle and continuing pumping upon receiving a low-level signal and the pump is called stop. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The associated grinder will operate when the scum pump is running. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. b. A low-pressure switch to be provided on the suction side of the common header of the pumps. In event of a low-pressure condition, the pump to be turned off via hardwired interlock. C. A high-pressure switch to be provided on the discharge side of the pump. In event of a high-pressure condition, the pump to be turned off via hardwired interlock. d. When a low flow condition is detected by FSL-3211-X while the pump is running, the pump will be requested to stop. e. When a motor winding high temperature condition is detected while the pump is running, the pump will be requested to stop. f. When a high temperature condition is detected via integral pump sleeve of the stator while the pump is running, the pump will be requested to stop. 3. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None b. Auto: None C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Scum Pump Running (YR). b. Scum Pump Fault (XA) C. Scum Pump Low Suction Pressure (PAL) d. Scum Pump High Discharge Pressure (PAH) e. Scum Pump Motor Winding High Temperature (TAH) f. Scum Pump Stator High Temperature (TAH) g. Seal Water Low Flow Switch (FAL) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 18 of 26 h. Recirculation Valve Opened (ZSO) i. Recirculation Valve Closed (ZSC) j. Recirculation Valve Fault (XA) k. Discharge Valve Opened (ZSO) I. Discharge Valve Closed (ZSC) M. Discharge Valve Fault (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Scum Pump Running (YRI) b. Scum Pump Common Fault (YFI) LOOP 3200-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NOA SCUM PUMP NO.2 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3200-01. LOOP 3200-03 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SCUM PUMP NO.3 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3200-01. LOOP 3200-04 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SCUM PUMP NOA A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3200-01. LOOP 3204-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NOA RECIRCULATION VALVE A. General 1. One recirculation valve to be provided for the scum wet well. Scum pumped from the Scum wet well is recirculated back into the well to mix up the contents inside it before the discharge valve is opened and the contents from the scum wet well are discharged outside to the existing Scum Holding Tank. The recirculation valve to open when the pump starts running and to close based on a timer. B. Control Local Hardwired Control: a. The motorized plug valve to be provided with an actuator to control the valve locally. A Local -Off -Remote switch to be provided at the actuator and wired to and from the scum pump local control panel. b. When the switch at the actuator is set to Local position, the operator to open and close the valve as required from the actuator. C. When the switch at the actuator is set to Remote position the valve to be controlled based on scum pump running signal. When the scum pump is set to run based on timer, the recirculation valve to open. The operator to set the timer for the duration the valve to remain open. Once timed out, the valve will close and discharge valve to open. d. In event of a high-level signal at the scum wet well and the scum pump is started, the recirculation valve will not open, and the discharge will open instead. 2. Hardwire Interlocks: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 19 of 26 a. The valve is interlocked with the scum pump running signal. In the event the pump stops running the valve will close. 3. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None. b. Auto: None. C. Alarms/Monitoring: 1. Local: a. Recirculation Valve Opened (ZSO). b. Recirculation Valve Closed (ZSC) C. Recirculation Valve Fault (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. None LOOP 3204-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 RECIRCULATION VALVE A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3204-01. LOOP 3206-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 DISCHARGE VALVE A. General 1. One discharge valve to be provided to discharge the scum from the scum pumps to the existing Scum Holding Tank. The discharge valve to be provided on the discharge header from each scum pump. The valve to operate based on a timer when the scum pump run. B. Control 1. Local Hardwired Control: a. The motorized plug valve to be provided with an actuator to control the valve locally. A Local -Off -Remote switch to be provided at the actuator and wired to and from the scum pump local control panel. b. When the switch at the actuator is set to Local position, the operator to open and close the valve as required. C. When the switch at the actuator is set to Remote position the valve to be controlled based on scum pump running signal. When the scum pump is set to run based on timer, the recirculation valve to open. The operator to set the timer for the duration the valve to remain open. Once timed out, the valve will close and discharge valve to open. d. The discharge valve to remain open as long as the scum pump is running. e. In event of a high-level signal at the scum wet well and the scum pump is started, the discharge valve will open and begin discharging scum. 2. Hardwire Interlocks: a. The valve is interlocked with the scum pump running signal. In the event the pump stops running, the valve will close. b. The pump will not start unless the recirculation or discharge valves are open. 3. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None. b. Auto: None. C. Alarms/Monitoring: 1. Local: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 20 of 26 a. Discharge Valve Opened (ZSO). b. Discharge Valve Closed (ZSC) C. Discharge Valve Fault (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. None. LOOP 3206-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 DISCHARGE VALVE A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3206-01. LOOP 3210-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMP NO.1 A. General 1. The Scum Pump Station No.l Sump Pumps activate via integral float switch. B. Control 1. The Scum Pump Station No.1 Sump Pumps activate via float switch. There are no remote controls at SCADA/DCS. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. High Level (LAH) once activated. LOOP 3210-02 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SUMP PUMP NO.2 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3210-01. LOOP 3211-01 & 3212-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NOA SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3200-01 for scum pump station seal water control. LOOP 3213-01 & 3214-01 SCUM PUMP STATION NO.2 SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3200-X for scum pump station seal water control. LOOP 3300-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION NO.1 PUMP NO.2 A. General 1. Recessed -impeller, centrifugal type sludge pump to be provided to pump the sludge from the Primary Clarifier to Primary Sludge Holding Tanks or to Grit Facility. Two duty pumps to be dedicated to a set of Clarifiers, with one pump as standby. An In -Line Grinder, dedicated to each duty pump, to be provided upstream of the sludge pumps to CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 21 of 26 break down sludge before pumping. The pump(s) to be controlled by variable speed, eddy current drives. B. Control 1. Local Eddy -Current Panel at the Pumps: a. A panel to be provided to control the pumps locally. A On/Off Hand Switch (HS) and Local Control Station (LCS) to be provided at the pump. The Operator to be able to turn the pumps on and off as required. b. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local ECP is in the local position the sludge pump will start by using the start/stop pushbutton at the LCS. C. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local ECP is in the off position the sludge pump will not run. d. When the pump is turned on, the speed will be set and controlled at the ECP when the ECP is in the Local position. e. An emergency stop push button to be provided at the LCS to stop the pump in case of emergency. f. A Reset Hand Switch (HS) to be provided at the motor starter to reset the pump as required. g. When a pump is called to start by the motor starter panel (MS), the MS will fist command the seal water solenoid valve to open for a present amount of time (initially set at 15 seconds) before the pump starts. Once the timer has expired the pump will be started. The solenoid valve will be kept open when the pump is running. When the pump is commanded to stop the seal water solenoid valve will be closed for a preset amount of time (initially set at 15 seconds) after the pump has stopped. 2. Remote: a. When the Local -Off -Remote selector switch is in the "Remote" position, remote speed control of the pumps is transferred to the SCADA Ovation/ DCS. 3. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The associated grinder will operate when the duty sludge pump is running. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. b. If the standby sludge pump is called to run, the associated grinder for the former duty pump will now operate with the standby pump. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. C. A motor -winding high -temperature switch to be provided at the pump motor. In even of a high -temperature condition, the pump to be stopped to protect the pump motor. d. When a low flow condition is detected by FSL-331X-XX while the pump is running, the pump will be requested to stop. 4. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None. b. Auto: The speed of the pumps to be controlled based on a flow setpoint that is to be entered at SCADA Ovation. A magnetic flowmeter (FIT-3309-XX) is provided at the discharge of each pump. The operator to enter a flow setpoint that is to be maintained at each pump. The operator to judge the discharged sludge on each line as to not pump diluted sludge. A selector switch at SCADA to be provided to indicate which clarifier the pump(s) services. Duty and standby sequence to be set at SCADA Ovation. C. Software Interlocks/Permissive: 1) None. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 22 of 26 C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Motor Starter: a. Primary Sludge Pump Running (YR). b. Primary Sludge Pump Overload (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Primary Sludge Pump Running (YRI) b. Primary Sludge Pump Common Fault (YFI) C. Primary Sludge Pump Speed Indication (SI) d. Primary Sludge Pump Speed Setpoint (SIC) LOOP 3300-03 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION NO.1 PUMP NO.3 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3300-02. LOOP 3300-04 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION NO.1 PUMP NOA A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3300-02. LOOP 3300-05 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION NO.1 PUMP NO.5 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3300-02. LOOP 3300-06 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION NO.1 PUMP NO.6 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3300-02. LOOP 3309-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE FLOW A. General 1. Monitoring of the discharged primary sludge flow pumped from the sludge pump by means of a magnetic flowmeter. The flow to be monitored and recorded at SCADA. The flow to be used as a feedback signal to control the speed of the sludge pump. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring: 2. Local: a. Flow (FIT) 3. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Flow (FI) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 23 of 26 LOOP 3309-03 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.3 DISCHARGE FLOW A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3309-02. LOOP 3309-04 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NOA DISCHARGE FLOW A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3309-02. LOOP 3309-05 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.5 DISCHARGE FLOW A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3309-02. LOOP 3309-06 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.6 DISCHARGE FLOW A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3309-02. LOOP 3310-01 & 3310-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 SUMP PUMPS A. General 1. The Primary Sludge Pump Station Dry Pit Vault Sump Pumps activate via integral float switch. B. Control 1. The Primary Sludge Pump Station Dry Pit Vault Sump Pumps activate via float switch. There are no remote controls at SCADA/DCS. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. None. 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. High Level (LAH) once activated. LOOP 3312-04 & 3312-08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.2 SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3300-02 for primary sludge pump seal water control. LOOP 3313-04 & 3313-08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.3 SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3300-02 for primary sludge pump seal water control. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 24 of 26 LOOP 3314-04 & 3314-08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NOA SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3300-02 for primary sludge pump seal water control. LOOP 3315-04 & 3315-08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.5 SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3300-02 for primary sludge pump seal water control. LOOP 3316-04 & 3316-08 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO.6 SEAL WATER CONTROL A. General 1. Refer to loop 3300-02 for primary sludge pump seal water control. LOOP 3350-01 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP STATION NO.1 IN -LINE GRINDER NO.1 A. General 1. An In -line Grinder to be provided before the primary sludge pumps to break down the sludge before pumping. The grinder to be provided with a vendor control panel and is intended to run continuously. B. Control 1. Local Panel at the Grinder: a. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Local position the grinder will start by using the start/stop pushbuttons at the local panel. b. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Off position the grinder will not run. C. If the Local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Remote position the grinder will be called to run when its associated sludge pump is started at the local control station. d. An emergency stop pushbutton to be provided at the LCP to stop the grinder in case of emergency. e. A reset push button to be provided at the LCP to clear and acknowledge any alarms that stop operation. £ When operator pushes on/off at the local control station (LCS) panel, and the eddy current panel is in the remote position for the sludge pump, the associated grinder will start when in the remote position. The grinder will run for an operator determined amount of time (x seconds) before the pumps to be allowed to automatically start. The grinder will continue to run during pumping operations, once the pump is stopped, the grinder will continue to run for an operator determined amount time (x seconds) and then shut off. 2. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The grinder will operate when the associated sludge pumps are running. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. b. When a high motor temperature condition is detected while the grinder is running, the grinder will stop. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 25 of 26 3. SCADA OVATION DCS: a. Manual: None b. Auto: None C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Grinder Running (YR). b. Grinder Motor Fault (XA) C. Grinder Power On (YL) d. Grinder Jammed (XA) 2. SCADA OVATION DCS/RTU-001: a. Grinder Running (YRI) b. Grinder Common Fault (YFI) LOOP 3350-02 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION IN -LINE GRINDER NO.2 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3350-01. LOOP 3350-03 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION IN -LINE GRINDER NO.3 A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3350-01. LOOP 3350-04 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPSTATION IN -LINE GRINDER NOA A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3350-01. LOOP 3401-01 MCC-PS1A POWER AND CURRENT READINGS A. General 1. Monitoring of the power and current of an MCC. B. Control 1. None. C. Alarms/Monitoring 1. Local: a. MCC Indication 2. SCADA Ovation DCS/RTU-001: a. KW reading (JI) b. Current reading (II) LOOP 3402-01 MCC-PS1B POWER AND CURRENT READINGS A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3401-01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 61 96 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 26 of 26 LOOP 3411-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFA1-SS3 STATUS A. General 1. Monitoring of the opened and closed status of the switch at SCADA Ovation/DCS. B. Control 1. None. C. Alanns/Monitoring 1. Local: a. Indication at the Switch 2. SCADA Ovation DCS/RTU-001: a. Opened (ZSO) b. Closed (ZSC) LOOP 3412-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFB1-SS3 STATUS A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3411-01. LOOP 3413-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFA1-SS4 STATUS A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3411-01. LOOP 3414-01 ELECTRICAL SWITCH SFB1-SS4 STATUS A. General 1. Functionally identical to loop 3411-01. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 67 17 — INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes industrial enclosures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 67 33 "Panel Wiring." 3. Section 40 78 13 "Indicators and Meters". 4. Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsically Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES Page 2 of 10 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with UL 508A. B. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. C. Provide UL 508A label on complete assembly. D. Maintain one copy of panel drawings on site. 1.7 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturers CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES Page 3 of 10 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. nVent: Hoffinan. b. Rittal. C. Saginaw. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Structure and Enclosure 1. Panels in indoor, dry, non -corrosive environments: a. Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for enclosure ratings and materials of construction. 2. Panels in outdoor, wet, or chemically corrosive environments: a. Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for enclosure ratings and materials of construction. 3. Panels located in hazardous locations: a. Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for enclosure ratings and materials of construction. 4. Construction: a. Freestanding and floor -mounted vertical panels: 1) Panels of 12-gauge sheet steel. 2) Front panels or panels containing instruments: provide 10-gauge stretcher - leveled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion. b. Wall and Unistrut mounted panels: 1) Panels no less than 14-gauge steel. C. Consoles: 1) Panels of 12-gauge sheet steel. 2) Front panels: provide 10-gauge stretcher -leveled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion. 5. Provide angle stiffeners on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation, as follows: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 1011 DIM INV.11 0Q0WG1__J *1 Page 4 of 10 a. Structural framework internal to the panel allows for instrument support and panel bracing. b. Interior structure framework to permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. C. Removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation. 6. Full height and fully gasketed access door with full-length, continuous, piano type stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. a. Provide doors with three-point stainless steel latch and heavy-duty stainless -steel locking handle. b. Provide front access doors of sufficient width to permit instrument or control device mounting without interference from flush mounted instruments. C. Clamp -type door latches are not permitted. 7. Avoid kinks and sharp bends in wiring. a. Route wiring for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection purposes. 8. Panel suitable for top and bottom conduit entry as required by the Electrical Drawings a. For top mounted conduit entry, provide panel top with nominal one -foot square removable access plates, which may be drilled to accommodate conduit and cable penetrations. b. Provide all conduit and cable penetrations with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts, and other accessories as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of the conduit system. C. General Requirements: UL labeled control panels and cabinets. a. UL listing includes enclosure, specific equipment supplied with enclosure, and equipment installation and wiring within and on the enclosure. If required for UL labeling, provide ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses and other equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508A requirement. The Drawings do not detail all UL 508A requirements. 2. Panel door handles with lock, or a hasp and staple for padlocking: key the locks for all control panels provided under this Contract alike. 3. Arrange devices for rear of panel mounting within the panel according to respective panel drawings and in a manner to allow for ease of maintenance and adjustment. a. Locate heat generating devices, such as power supplies, at or near the top of the panel. 4. Mount all components in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURES Page 5 of 10 a. Mount interior panel components on removable plates (sub -panels) and not directly on the enclosure. b. Unless shock mounting is required by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration, provide rigid and stable mounting. C. Mount and orient components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. Identify internal components with suitable plastic or metal engraved nametags mounted adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 5. Mount all panel components on a single rear -of -panel sub -panel unless the density of devices exceeds the panel mounting space permitted by the minimum panel dimensions specified. Side panel mounted components are not permitted without review and approval by Engineer. 6. Type 316 stainless -steel hardware and fasteners: a. Provide drilled and tapped mounting screws; self -tapping screws are not permitted. 7. Install suitable gaskets and faceplates, required to maintain NEMA rating of the panel. D. Mounting Elevations: 1. Refer to ISA Recommended Practice RP60.3 for guidance on layout and arrangement of panels and panel mount components. Account for housekeeping pad dimensions. 2. Locate centerline of indicators and controllers no lower than 48 inches or higher than 66 inches above the floor on a panel face. 3. Locate centerline of lights, selector switches, and pushbuttons no lower than 32 inches or higher than 70 inches above the floor on a panel face. 4. Locate tops of annunciators no higher than 86 inches above the floor on a panel face. 5. Install panel components in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines. 2.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Provide force air ventilation or air conditioning units as required to prevent temperature buildup inside of panel. B. Heat Load Calculations: 1. Submit heat load calculations for all control panels located in areas where either venting is not possible due to NEMA rating of panel or control panel is located in an area or building without air conditioning. 2. Utilize manufacturer available thermal calculators to determine heating/cooling requirements (i.e., Saginaw SCE thermal calculator, nVent Hoffinan cooling selection tool, or equivalent). 3. Ensure the internal temperature of the panel is regulated between 45 to 104 degrees F under all conditions. 4. Account for the following conditions in the heat load calculations: a. Loading and dissipation effects on all surfaces of the enclosure. Account for surfaces not available for heat transfer (e.g., against a wall). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 1011 DIM INF.11 0Q0WG1--J *1 Page 6 of 10 b. Internal heat load of components (load and duty cycle). C. For outside temperature limits, refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." C. Sun Shields: Provide custom fabricated sun shields for all outdoor panels in accordance with the following requirements: a. Fabricate sun shields from a material suited for the area classification rating of its environment. b. Design, fabricate, install, and support the unit to fully cover and shade the top, sides, and back of the enclosure, and to partially shade the front panel of the enclosure from direct exposure to sunlight from sunrise to sunset. C. Depending on overall size, sun shields may be fabricated in single or multiple segments for attachment to the enclosure support framing or to separate free standing framing around the enclosure, to preserve rigidity. d. Design and mount sun shields with a minimum 3-inch air gap around the enclosure for air circulation and heat dissipation. e. Drilling holes or welding studs directly to the enclosure for sun shield mounting is not permitted. f. Slope the top section of the sun shield a minimum angle of 5 degrees from horizontal. 1) Wall mounted enclosures: slope the top section downward away from the wall and towards the front of the enclosure. 2) Free standing, floor mounted, and frame mounted enclosures: slope the top section downward towards the back side of the enclosure. g. Incorporate a narrow and more steeply sloped drip shield segment on the front edge of the top section to shed water away from the front of the enclosure and prevent dripping or running directly onto the front panel of the enclosure. h. Fabricate sun shields with continuous seam welds that are ground smooth. i. Smooth round or chamfer exposed corners, edges, and projections to prevent injury. D. Louvers 1. If louvers are used, provide louver plate and filter kit. 2. Provide louver plates of stamped sheet metal construction. 3. Provide washable and replaceable filters. 4. Install louvers on the rear, top, or bottom of the panel, as required by the panel installation location. 5. For wall mounted enclosures with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, install louvers on the sides. E. Forced Air Ventilation: 1. Provide forced air ventilation fans to create positive internal pressure within the panel. 2. Provide washable and replaceable filters. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 121 Dien ING1110Q KOW-8J lFI Page 7 of 10 3. Fan motors operate on 120-volt, 60-Hz power. F. Air Conditioning: 1. For panels with internal heat that cannot be adequately dissipated with natural convention and heat sinks, or forced air ventilation, provide an air conditioner sized to deliver sufficient cooling. 2. NEMA rating equivalent to the NEMA rating of the panel. Maintain NEMA rating of panel when installed. 3. Provide air conditioner with conformal coating on exposed surfaces. 4. Mount air conditioners on panel side. If provided, cut sun shields to accommodate air conditioner. G. Heating: 1. Provide an integral heater, fan, and adjustable thermostat for outdoor enclosures and enclosures located in unheated areas indoors or in areas subject to humidity and moisture, to reduce condensation and maintain the minimum internal panel temperature. a. Mount unit near enclosure bottom with discharge away from heat -sensitive equipment. b. Provide Hoffman DAH series, Stego PTC series, or equal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Nameplates: 1. Identify the panel and individual devices as required, unless otherwise indicated: a. Include up to three lines: 1) First line containing the device tag number as shown on the Drawings. 2) Second line containing a functional description (e.g., Recirculation Pump No. 1). 3) Third line containing a functional control description (e.g., Start). 2. Unless escutcheon plates are specified or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: a. Furnish nameplates as 3/32-inch thick, black against white background unless otherwise noted, Lamicoid with engraved inscriptions. Bevel and smooth edges of nameplate. b. Nameplates with chipped or rough edges are not acceptable. 3. Mount or fasten cabinet mounted nameplates with epoxy adhesive or stainless -steel screws. 4. Provide a panel nameplate with a minimum of 1-inch-high letters for every panel. 5. Provide legend plates or 1-inch by 3-inch engraved nameplates with 1/4-inch lettering for identification of door mounted control devices, pilot lights, and meters. 6. Use single Lamicoid nameplates with multiple legends for grouping of devices such as selector switches and pilot lights that relate to one function. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 1011 DIM INV.11 0W0WG1__J *1 Page 8 of 10 B. Print Storage Pockets: 1. Provide print storage pockets of steel construction, welded onto the door of the enclosure. 2. Size storage pockets to accommodate all prints required to service the equipment, and to accommodate 8.5-inch by 11-inch documents without folding. C. Corrosion Control: 1. Protect panels from internal corrosion by use of corrosion -inhibiting vapor capsules. Size and quantity as necessary per manufacturer recommendations. 2. Manufacturer: a. Zerust VC. b. Hoffman Model AHCI. C. Or equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Descale, degrease, fill, grind and finish sections. B. Finish steel -fabricated enclosures with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish which are applied by either hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods. 1. Brushed anodized aluminum, stainless steel, and FRP panels do not require a paint finish. C. Grind smooth, sandblast and then clean with solvent. Fill surface voids and grind smooth. D. Immediately after cleaning, apply one coat of a rust -inhibiting primer inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and topcoat of a two -component type epoxy enamel. 1. Apply final sanding to the intermediate exterior coat before top coating. E. Apply a minimum of two coats of manufacturer's standard, flat light-colored lacquer, on the panel interior after priming. F. Unless otherwise noted, finish exterior colors as ANSI 61 gray with textured finish. G. Finish products after assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and rooms for suitable conditions where industrial enclosures will be installed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 1011 DIM INV.11 0Q0WG1__J *1 Page 9 of 10 B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for cable trays as specified in Division 26. 3. Comply with requirements for boxes and covers specified in Section 26 05 33.16 "Boxes and Covers for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.3 ADJUSTING Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 INDUSTRIAL ENCLOSURE SCHEDULE A. Provide the following industrial enclosures: Table 1. Industrial Enclosure Schedule Panel Minimum Size Maximum Size Designation 48-inch high by 60-inch high by RTU-001 48-inch wide by 48-inch wide by 18-inch deep 24-inch deep END OF SECTION 40 67 17 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Enclosure Construction General Requirements Rating Refer to Refer to Free-standing, single door general general front -access only. sheets. sheets. VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 67 17 I 1011 DIM INV.11 0 me0WG1-81 *1 Page 10 of 10 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 67 33 - PANEL WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section includes requirements for internal wiring of control panels and consoles. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 67 17 "Industrial Enclosures." 3. Section 40 78 13 "Indicators and Meters". 4. Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsic Safety Barriers, and Surge Suppressors." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. American Wire Gage (AWG): Measurement of the cross -sectional area of a conductor. B. Input/Output (I/O): Analog or digital field instrument signals to be received and interpreted by a PLC. C. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions" 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 2 of 6 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with UL 508A. B. Provide components compatible with functions required to form a complete working system. C. Provide UL 508A label on complete assembly. D. Maintain one copy of panel drawings on site. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. a1210 4161 1311016 ►1 A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL PANEL - INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION A. Internal Electrical Wiring: 1. Provide stranded, tinned copper, type MTW interconnecting wiring: a. Use 600-volt insulation rated for not less than 90 degrees Celsius. b. Segregate wiring for systems operating at voltages in excess of 120 VAC from other panel wiring. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 3 of 6 1) Locate either in a separate section of a multi -section panel or behind a removable Plexiglas or similar dielectric barrier. C. Develop panel layout such that technicians have complete access to 120 VAC and lower voltage wiring systems without direct exposure to higher voltages. 2. For power distribution wiring on the line side of fuses or breakers: a. Use 12 AWG minimum. b. For control wiring on the secondary side of fuses: 1) Use 16 AWG minimum. 2) Utilize 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair cable insulated for not less than 600 volts for electronic analog circuits. 3. Cover power distribution blocks with protective guards to meet "finger -safe" requirements of IP20. 4. Route power and low voltage DC wiring systems in separate wireways. a. Cross different system wires at right angles. b. Separate different system wires routed parallel to each other by at least 6-inches. C. Terminate different wiring systems on separate terminal blocks. d. Do not fill wiring troughs to more than 60 percent visible fill. 5. Terminations: a. Terminate wiring onto single tier terminal blocks: 1) Uniquely and sequentially number each terminal block. 2) Direct wiring between field equipment and panel components is not acceptable. 3) Multi -level terminal blocks or strips are not acceptable. b. Arrange terminal blocks in vertical rows and separated into groups (power, AC control, DC signal). 1) Provide each group of terminal blocks with a minimum of 25 percent spares. C. Use compression type, fused, unfused, or switched terminal blocks. 1) Use two terminals per point for discrete inputs and outputs (DI and DO) with adjacent terminal assignments. d. Use three terminals per point for analog inputs and outputs (Al and AO) per shielded pair connection with adjacent terminal assignments for each point. 1) The third terminal is for shielded ground connection for cable pairs. a) Ground the shielded signal cable at the RTU cabinet. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 4 of 6 e. Use sleeve -type wire and tube markers with heat impressed letters and numbers. f. Use only one side of a terminal block row for internal wiring. 1) Field wiring side of the terminal not to be within 6-inches of the side panel or adjacent terminal or within 8-inches of the bottom of free-standing panels, or within 3-inches of stanchion mounted panels, or 3-inches of adjacent wireway. 6. Clearly identify wiring to hand switches and other devices, which are live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection as such. 7. Clearly tag and color code wiring. a. Tag numbers and color coding to correspond to panel wiring diagrams and loop drawings prepared by the PCSS. b. Power wiring, control wiring, grounding, and DC wiring to utilize different color insulation for each wiring system used. C. Color coding scheme to be in accordance with UL 508A. 8. Provide surge protectors on all incoming power supply lines at each panel per requirements of Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsic Safety Barriers, and Surge Suppressors." 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring: a. Plastic type with snap -on covers. b. Side walls to be open top type to permit wire changing without disconnecting. C. Trough to be supported to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. d. Do not bond trough to the panel with glue or adhesives. 10. Each panel to be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for all signal and shield ground connections. a. Shield grounding to be in accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 11. Provide each panel with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 12. Each panel to have control, signal, and communication line surge suppression in accordance with Section 40 78 56 "Isolators, Intrinsic Safety Barriers, and Surge Suppressors." 13. Provide each panel with a circuit breaker to interrupt incoming power. 14. Additional electrical components including transformers, motor starters, switches, circuit breakers, etc. to be in compliance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Relays not provided under Division 26 and required for properly completing the control function specified in Division 40, Division 26 or shown on the Drawings to be provided under this Section. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 5 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." END OF SECTION 40 67 33 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 67 33 PANEL WIRING Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 68 63 - CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. If referred to anywhere else in the project manual, AE or AESS services include, but are not limited to, those services specified in this Section. The AESS services are to be provided by the PCSS. B. Provide all programming, configuration, and related services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system. Control of all equipment to be in conformity with the Contract Drawings, process control descriptions, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Coordinate the control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other Sections of these specifications and with related existing equipment. Include the following information: 1. Configuration of the SCADA/DCS System Software, and drivers provided for all equipment shown on the drawings, including equipment provided by vendor package systems. 2. Provide for and test functionality between new SCADA/DCS graphic screens and supplied PCSS and Vendor equipment. a. For RTU-001, the Emerson Ovation DCS SCADA to do some of the following control and monitoring of the new I/O points on new graphic screens listed below. 1) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.l Remote (YCI-3001-01) 2) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.I Opened (ZSO-3001 -0 1) 3) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.I Closed (ZSC-3001-01) 4) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.l Position Feedback (ZI-3001-01) 5) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.I Position Setpoint (ZIC-3001 -0 1) 6) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.2 Remote (YCI-3001-02) 7) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.2 Opened (ZSO-3001-02) 8) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.2 Closed (ZSC-3001-02) 9) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.2 Position Feedback (ZI-3001-02) 10) West Diversion Box G Slide Gate No.2 Position Setpoint (ZIC-3001-02) 11) PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault Sump High Level (LAH-3000-01) 12) PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault Ultrasonic Flow (FI-3000-01) 13) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.I Opened (ZSO-3 000-0 1) 14) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.I Closed (ZSC-3000-01) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 2 of 8 15) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.2 Opened (ZSO-3000-02) 16) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.2 Closed (ZSC-3000-02) 17) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.3 Opened (ZSO-3000-03) 18) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.3 Closed (ZSC-3000-03) 19) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.4 Opened (ZSO-3000-04) 20) PC 1-4 Distribution Box Slide Gate No.4 Closed (ZSC-3000-04) 21) Scum Pump Station No.1 Sump High Level (LAH-32 10-0 1) 22) Scum Pump No.I Running (YRI-3200-01) 23) Scum Pump No.I Common Fault (YFI-3200-01) 24) Scum Pump No.2 Running (YRI-3200-02) 25) Scum Pump No.2 Common Fault (YFI-3200-02) 26) Scum Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder Running (YRI-3117-01) 27) Scum Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder Common Fault (YFI-3117-01) 28) Scum Wet Well No.1 Level (LI-3115-01) 29) Scum Wet Well No.I High -High Level (LAHH-3115-01) 30) Primary Clarifier No.2 Running (YRI-3100-02) 31) Primary Clarifier No.2 Common Fault (YFI-3100-02) 32) Primary Clarifier No.3 Running (YRI-3100-03) 33) Primary Clarifier No.3 Common Fault (YFI-3100-03) 34) Primary Clarifier No.4 Running (YRI-3100-04) 35) Primary Clarifier No.4 Common Fault (YFI-3100-04) 36) Scum Pump Station No.2 Sump High Level (LAH-3210-02) 37) Scum Pump No.3 Running (YRI-3200-03) 38) Scum Pump No.3 Common Fault (YFI-3200-03) 39) Scum Pump No.4 Running (YRI-3200-04) 40) Scum Pump No.4 Common Fault (YFI-3200-04) 41) Scum Pump Station No.2 In -Line Grinder Running (YRI-3117-02) 42) Scum Pump Station No.2 In -Line Grinder Common Fault (YFI-3117-02) 43) Scum Wet Well No.2 Level (LI-3115-02) 44) Scum Wet Well No.2 High -High Level (LAHH-3115-02) 45) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 Booster Pump No.I Running (YRI- 3070-01) 46) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 Booster Pump No.1 Common Fault (YFI-3070-01) 47) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 Booster Pump No.I Discharge Pressure (PI-3070-01) 48) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder No.I Running (YRI- 3350-01) 49) Primary Sludge Pump Station No. I In -Line Grinder No.1 Common Fault (YFI-3350-01) 50) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.I In -Line Grinder No.2 Running (YRI- 3350-02) 51) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder No.2 Common Fault (YFI-3350-02) 52) Primary Sludge Pump Station No. I In -Line Grinder No.3 Running (YRI- 3350-03) 53) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder No.3 Common Fault (YFI-3350-03) 54) Primary Sludge Pump Station No. I In -Line Grinder No.4 Running (YRI- 3350-04) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 3 of 8 55) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 In -Line Grinder No.4 Common Fault (YFI-3350-04) 56) Primary Sludge Pump No.2 Running (YRI-3300-02) 57) Primary Sludge Pump No.2 Common Fault (YFI-3300-02) 58) Primary Sludge Pump No.2 Speed (SI-3300-02) 59) Primary Sludge Pump No.2 Speed Setpoint (SIC-3300-02) 60) Primary Sludge Pump No.2 Discharge Flow (FI-3309-02) 61) Primary Sludge Pump No.3 Running (YRI-3300-03) 62) Primary Sludge Pump No.3 Common Fault (YFI-3300-03) 63) Primary Sludge Pump No.3 Speed (SI-3300-03) 64) Primary Sludge Pump No.3 Speed Setpoint (SIC-3300-03) 65) Primary Sludge Pump No.3 Discharge Flow (FI-3309-03) 66) Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Running (YRI-3300-04) 67) Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Common Fault (YFI-3300-04) 68) Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Speed (SI-3300-04) 69) Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Speed Setpoint (SIC-3300-04) 70) Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Discharge Flow (FI-3309-04) 71) Primary Sludge Pump No.5 Running (YRI-3300-05) 72) Primary Sludge Pump No.5 Common Fault (YFI-3300-05) 73) Primary Sludge Pump No.5 Speed (SI-3300-05) 74) Primary Sludge Pump No.5 Speed Setpoint (SIC-3300-05) 75) Primary Sludge Pump No.5 Discharge Flow (FI-3309-05) 76) Primary Sludge Pump No.6 Running (YRI-3300-06) 77) Primary Sludge Pump No.6 Common Fault (YFI-3300-06) 78) Primary Sludge Pump No.6 Speed (SI-3300-06) 79) Primary Sludge Pump No.6 Speed Setpoint (SIC-3300-06) 80) Primary Sludge Pump No.6 Discharge Flow (FI-3309-06) 81) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.I Sump High Level (LAH-3310-01) 82) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 Room Temp (TI-3060-01) 83) Exhaust Fan EF-3050-01 Running (YRI-3050-01) 84) Exhaust Fan EF-3050-01 Common Fault (YFI-3 05 0-0 1) 85) Exhaust Fan EF-3050-01 Low Flow (FAL-3050-01) 86) Exhaust Fan EF-3050-01 Duct Smoke Alarm (XA-3050-01) 87) Exhaust Fan EF-3050-01 Duct Smoke Detection Trouble (XS-3050-01) 88) Make-up Air Unit MAU-3060-01 Running (YRI-3 060-0 1) 89) Make-up Air Unit MAU-3060-01 Common Fault (YFI-3060-01) 90) Make-up Air Unit MAU-3060-01 Low Flow (FAL-3060-01) 91) Make-up Air Unit MAU-3060-01 Duct Smoke Alarm (XA-3060-01) 92) Make-up Air Unit MAU-3060-01 Duct Smoke Detection Trouble (XS- 3060-01) 93) MCC -PS IA Kilowatts (JI-3401-01) 94) MCC -PS IA Amps (11-3401-01) 95) MCC-PS1B Kilowatts (JI-3402-01) 96) MCC-PS1B Amps (11-3402-01) 97) SFA1-SS3 Switch Opened (ZSO-341 1 -0 1) 98) SFA1-SS3 Switch Closed (ZSC-341 1 -0 1) 99) SFB1-SS3 Switch Opened (ZSO-3412-01) 100) SFB1-SS3 Switch Closed (ZSC-3412-01) 101) SFA1-SS4 Switch Opened (ZSO-3413-01) 102) SFA1-SS4 Switch Closed (ZSC-3413-01) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 4 of 8 103) SFB1-SS4 Switch Opened (ZSO-3414-01) 104) SFB1-SS4 Switch Closed (ZSC-3414-01) b. For RTU-009, the Emerson Ovation DCS SCADA to provide monitoring of the new I/O points on modified graphic screens listed below. 1) Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Mag Flow (FI-3005-01) 2) Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Sump High Level (LAH-3005-01) C. Coordinate all work with plant operating personnel to minimize impacts on daily operation. Note delays caused for any reason and formally submit to the Engineer and the Owner in the form of a letter. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS): The entity who provides all programming, configuration, and related services for the control system equipment provided by the PCSS and is qualified agency with Emerson Ovation DCS programming expertise. B. Input/Output (I/O): Analog or digital field instrument signals to be received and interpreted by a PLC. C. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." The meetings below are in addition to the meetings specified in that section. B. Schedule and conduct a standards and conventions workshop. The purpose of this workshop is to review the standards, conventions, and methodologies that will be used to program and develop the programs (i.e., HMI databases and graphics, etc.) and will solicit Engineer and Owner's input. Submit an agenda with examples for items to be discussed at client workshop. Owner standards to be explicitly used if not otherwise stated. No deviations from Owner standards will be accepted without submission for approval. C. Schedule and conduct a draft graphics review meeting. The purpose of this meeting is to present draft graphics for the Owner's and Engineer's review and feedback prior to creating the full set of graphics for review. For repetitive graphics such as graphics for multiple process trains, include an example of the first graphic only for discussion. Include discussion of process and overview displays, examples of pop -ups, trends, and system navigation tools. Expect major comments and incorporate any changes resulting from those comments. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 5 of 8 D. Schedule and conduct a historical data management and reports workshop. The purpose of this workshop is to discuss and solicit Engineer/Owner input for storage and management of historical data; format of daily, monthly, and yearly reports; development of data entry templates; report formats and layouts; and user interface displays for accessing and generating reports. Bring examples of these documents for review and discussion. E. Schedule and conduct a factory -testing coordination meeting, two weeks prior to factory testing. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss the specifics of proposed tests and provide a forum for coordinating required factory testing. F. Schedule and conduct a field-testing coordination meeting, two weeks prior to field testing. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss specifics of proposed tests and provide a forum for coordinating required field-testing. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittal Procedures." Provide the submittals listed below at a minimum: 1. System Standards and Conventions. 2. Operator Interface. 3. Reports. 4. Historical Data Management B. System Standards and Conventions Submittal: Following the standards and conventions workshop, submit standards and conventions to be used on this project. Define the submittal, at a minimum: a. Graphic display standards, including color conventions, equipment symbols, display format, equipment control pop-up displays, trend displays, and display navigation. Include samples of each proposed type of graphic display (i.e., overview, detail, diagnostic, tabular, etc.). b. System naming conventions, such as graphic displays naming, database naming, tag names, and computer naming. C. System configuration, including network addressing. d. Alarm configuration standards, including priorities and logging. e. Security configuration standards, including user groups and privileges. 2. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, use the submitted standards and conventions as basis for programming and configuration of the system. Do not begin the system programming and configuration prior to the System Standards and Conventions Submittal. C. Operator Interface: Following the approval of the standards and conventions submittal, submit a draft of all proposed graphic displays, examples of each type of pop-up (faceplate) displays, and CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 6 of 8 examples of trends. For those graphics, which will be duplicated more than once for similar type of equipment, submit graphics for the first equipment only. 2. Following the draft graphics review meeting and prior to the factory test, submit a ready - for testing version of all graphic displays. These graphics should be completely finished other than the incorporation of comments and changes resulting from testing. 3. Submitted graphic displays and trends are to be no less than 8.5 inches by 11 inches and in full color. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The system specified performs the following generalized functions: 1. Allows the operator to control equipment such as pumps and valves as shown on the Drawings and as defined in Section 40 6196 "Process Control Descriptions." 2. Perform real-time process control, including proportional integral derivative control action, sequencing, and process calculations. 3. Collect, calculate, and store accurate, reliable operating information for present and future uses. 4. Assist remote site operating personnel by noting and communicating of normal operating conditions and equipment failures. 5. Accumulate and store equipment running times for use in preventative maintenance. 6. Provide color graphic displays and reports for use by the system operating and supervisory personnel. 7. Provide trending for analog values. 8. Provide control system diagnostics. 9. Perform process control functions including PID, calculations, sequencing, timing, in the process controller. The HMI software performs the real-time database, report generation, graphic screens, program development, set point modification, data archiving, etc. 10. Allow the operator to manually control (by keyboard entry and mouse type pointing device) the status of pumps, valves, e.g., on/off, open/close, setpoint value,) when viewing the appropriate graphic screen on the HMI. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 7 of 8 3.2 SPECIFIC GRAPHIC SCREENS A. At a minimum, provide the following types of graphic screen indicated below. 1. Modified plant overview screen including a site plan representation of new Primary Clarifiers 1-4, Scum Pump Station No.l and 2, Primary Sludge Pump Station no.1, existing Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1, PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault, West Diversion Box G, PC 1-4 Distribution Box, miscellaneous HVAC and Electrical. 2. Modified main menu screen linking all screens and process areas, complete and logical listing names and number of all screens. 3. New Primary Clarifier screen(s) overview detailing three (3) new primary clarifiers and one future. 4. New Scum Pump Station No.I and 2 screen(s) detailing complete scum pump station, in - line grinder, seal water system, scum wet well, sump pump, and associated status and alarm information for each complete system. 5. New Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 screen(s) overview detailing five (5) primary sludge pumps, 1 future, seal water systems, four (4) in -line grinders, booster pump, sump pump, and associated status and alarm information. 6. Modify existing Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 showing status and alarms. 7. New PC 1-4 Influent Flow Meter Vault showing status and alarms. 8. New West Diversion Box G and PC 1-4 Distribution Box showing status and alarms. 9. Exhaust Fan and make-up air unit screen showing status and alarms. 10. MCC and Switchgear screen showing status and alarms. 11. Individual pump, clarifier, etc., and instrumentation pop -ups that will show all controls, status, and alarms for that equipment. 12. Provide trending of all new process equipment and instrumentation. B. The SCADA/DCS programmer to follow and adhere to Owner's graphic standards utilized at VCWRF. C. The SCADA/DCS programmer to provide trends that adhere to Owner's standards utilized at VCWRF. D. The SCADA/DCS programmer to incorporate I/O point information into Plant's Historian system. 3.3 TESTING A. Refer to Section 40 6121.20 "Process Control System Testing". 3.4 TRAINING A. Refer to Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training" for general training requirements. 1:301 1XII&30iI[ORI MIX&= CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 68 63 CONFIGURATION OF HMI SOFTWARE Page 8 of 8 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 40 70 00 - INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the general requirements to furnishing, installing, and servicing PCSS provided instruments. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 71 13 "Magnetic Flow Meters". 3. Section 40 7166 "Transit Time Flow Meters". 4. Section 40 7179 "Flow Switches". 5. Section 40 72 23 "Radar Level Meters". 6. Section 40 72 76 "Level Switches". 7. 8. Section 40 73 36 "Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches". 9. Section 40 73 63 "Diaphragm Seals". 10. Section 40 78 13 "Indicators and Meters". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Process Control System Supplier (PCSS): The entity responsible for providing all materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational control system. B. Section 4071XX "Sections for flow measurement": The XX in the number indicates all spec sections starting with the first 4 numbers (indicating a category described in the accompanying text) are included in the reference. C. Section 4072XX "Sections for level measurement". The XX in the number indicates all spec sections starting with the first 4 numbers (indicating a category described in the accompanying text) are included in the reference. D. Section 4073XX "Sections for pressure measurement". The XX in the number indicates all spec sections starting with the first 4 numbers (indicating a category described in the accompanying text) are included in the reference. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 4 f =fflft IIQ Will plwr:I 0 A. Submit complete documentation for all field instruments in one comprehensive submittal. Use ISA-TR20.00.01-2007 data sheet format as a cover sheet for each instrument prior to data sheets. Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) or Index that lists all instrumentation equipment, sorted by Loop Number. B. Submit separate data sheets for each instrument type: 1. Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Drawings. 2. Product (item) name used herein and on the Drawings. 3. Manufacturer's complete model number. 4. Location of the device. 5. Input - output characteristics. 6. Range, size, and graduations in engineering units. C. Submit the following information for each instrument type: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. 2. Sizing calculations where applicable. 3. Indicate which instruments will be provided with certified calibration data (i.e., all flow metering devices) as part of O&M manual. 4. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics and furnished specialties and accessories. 5. Two -wire or four -wire device type as applicable. 6. Indicate which instruments will be provided with manufacturer's maintenance services if specified. D. Instrument Vendor Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of instrument. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. E. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Submit certification indicating compliance with American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements for all applicable metal products were required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 2. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." F. Submit catalog cuts for all instruments. Submit descriptive literature for each hardware component, which fully describes the units being provided. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 4 G. Submit index and data sheets in electronic format as well as hard copies on 8-1/2" x II" formats. Submit electronic copies in Microsoft Excel or Word format on DVD disk or USB thumb drive. A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." f lr'�y 11633:161811 Will 1.101101F."I M1 A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to individual instrument specifications for spare parts requirements. B. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for PCSS requirements regarding submission of maintenance materials. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to individual instrument specifications for quality assurance requirements as well as which specific instruments require manufacturer's start-up and training services. B. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. C. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for overall quality assurance requirements for PCSS scope of work. 1.9 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section and related Division 40 instrumentation specifications to meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 70 00 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 4 A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1nF�4TK'l9 ►M A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUMENT TAGS A. Permanent stainless steel or other non -corrosive material tag firmly attached and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as indicated in the Drawings. Tag equipment before shipping to the site. B. Provide 1/8-in by 3/8-in, Type 316 stainless -steel button head machine screws. C. All supplied instrument transmitters and instrument transmitter elements require a stainless -steel identification tag. Attach tag via stainless steel chain or stainless -steel wire (24-gauge min) to a non -removable part of the device. Stamp the ISA alphanumeric instrument number as indicated on the P&ID, loop, or detail drawings into the tag. Minimum tag size is 1" H x 3" W with 3/16" high alphanumeric characters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See installation requirements in individual specification sections. B. Mount instrumentation on instrumentation racks or stands, unless otherwise indicated. Provide shutoff and drain valves on all instrumentation connections. 3.2 FIELD INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE A. The field instrument schedule Section 40 70 00 APPENDIX A itemizes field instruments being provided by the PCSS (Division 40). END OF SECTION 40 70 00 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 Villaae Creek Water Reclamation Facility- Primary Clarifier Imorovements Aooendix A to Section 407000 Instrumentation Eauioment List 000%) Drawing SA I gname Loop No.l I LSuffioop � Description ' Size I Range I Setpoint I Units Location & Decription Spec. Ref. I Installation Detail No. Ta na x I-A-1 FE 3000 01 Ultrasonic Flow Sensor 96" N/A N/A MGD From Transmitter PC 1-4 Influent Meter Vault Ultrasonic Flow Meter 407166 Detail E I-A-1 FIT 3000 01 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 24-254 N/A MGD 120 VAC PC 1-4 Influent Meter Vault Ultrasonic Flow Meter 407166 Detail E I-A-1 FE 3005 01 Magnetic Flow Sensor 30" N/A N/A MGD From Transmitter Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-A-1 FIT 3005 01 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 5-25 N/A MGD 120 VAC Plant Sewer Flow Meter Station No.1 Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-1 PI 3070 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Booster Pump No.1 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail B I-D-1 PIT 3070 01 Pressure Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-100 N/A psig 120 VAC Booster Pump No.1 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail J I-B-1 PI 3150 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-10 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump Station No. 1 Common Header Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-1 PSL 3150 01 Pressure Swtich Low N/A N/A 0.2 psig N/A Scum Pump Station No. 1 Common Header Pressure Low 407276 Detail F I-B-1 PI 3200 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No. 1 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-1 PSH 3200 01 Pressure Swtich High N/A N/A 70 psig N/A Scum Pump No. 1 Discharge Pressure High 407276 Detail F I-B-1 PI 3200 02 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No. 2 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-1 PSH 3200 02 Pressure Swtich High N/A N/A 70 psig N/A Scum Pump No. 2 Discharge Pressure High 407276 Detail F I-B-1 PI 3104 03 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Breakup Spray Bar Plant Water Pressure to Clarifier No.3 407313 Detail B I-B-1 LE 3115 01 Radar Level Element N/A 0-15.25 N/A ft 120 VAC Scum Wetwell No. 1 Level 407223 Detail G I-B-1 LIT 3115 01 Radar Level Transmitter N/A 0-15.25 N/A ft 120 VAC Scum Wetwell No. 1 Level Transmitter 407223 Detail G I-B-1 LSL 3115 01 Level Float Swtch Low N/A N/A 0.75 ft N/A Scum Wetwell No. 1 Low Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-1 LSH 3115 01 Level Float Swtch High N/A N/A 6.25 ft N/A Scum Wetwell No. 1 High Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-1 LSHH 3115 01 Level Float Swtich High -High N/A N/A 6.33 ft N/A Scum Wetwell No. 1 High -High Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-2 PI 3150 02 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-10 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump Station No. 2 Common Header Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-2 PSH 3150 02 Pressure Swtich Low N/A N/A 0.2 psig N/A Scum Pump Station No. 2 Common Header Pressure Low 407276 Detail F I-B-2 PI 3200 03 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No. 3 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-2 PSH 3200 03 Pressure Swtich High N/A N/A 70 psig N/A Scum Pump No. 3 Discharge Pressure High 407276 Detail F I-B-2 PI 3200 04 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No.4 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail F I-B-2 PSH 3200 04 Pressure Swtich High N/A N/A 70 psig N/A Scum Pump No.4 Discharge Pressure High 407276 Detail F I-B-2 PI 3104 02 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Breakup Spray Bar Plant Water Pressure to Clarifier No.2 407313 Detail B I-B-2 PI 3104 04 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Breakup Spray Bar Plant Water Pressure to Clarifier No.4 407313 Detail B 1 Villaae Creek Water Reclamation Facility- Primary Clarifier Imorovements Aooendix A to Section 407000 Instrumentation Eauioment List 000%) Drawing I ISA I Loop No.l Loop Description , Size I Range I Setpoint I Units I Locatio n & Decription Spec. Ref. I Installation Detail No. Ta name Suffix I-B-2 LE 3115 02 Radar Level Element N/A 0-15.25 N/A ft 120 VAC Scum Wetwell No. 2 Level 407223 Detail G I-B-2 LIT 3115 02 Radar Level Transmitter N/A 0-15.25 N/A ft 120 VAC Scum Wetwell No. 2 Level Transmitter 407223 Detail G I-B-2 LSL 3115 02 Level Float Swtich Low N/A N/A 0.75 ft N/A Scum Wetwell No. 2 Low Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-2 LSH 3115 02 Level Float Swtich High N/A N/A 6.25 ft N/A Scum Wetwell No. 2 High Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-2 LSHH 3115 02 Lewl Float Swtich High -High N/A N/A 6.33 ft N/A Scum Welwell No.2 High -High Level Float 407276 Detail H I-B-3 PI 3231 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump Station No.1 Seal Water Header Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 PI 3232 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump Station No.2 Seal Water Header Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 PI 3211 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No.1 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 PI 3212 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No.2 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 PI 3213 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No.3 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 PI 3214 01 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Scum Pump No.4 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-B-3 FSL 3211 01 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 3 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Scum Pump No. 1 407179 Detail D I-B-3 FSL 3212 01 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 3 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Scum Pump No. 2 407179 Detail D I-B-3 FSL 3213 01 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 3 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Scum Pump No. 3 407179 Detail D I-B-3 FSL 3214 01 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 3 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Scum Pump No. 4 407179 Detail D I-D-1 PI 3305 02 Pressure Gauge N/A -15 - 30 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-1 PI 3306 02 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-1 FE 3309 02 Magnetic Flow Sensor 6" N/A N/A gpm From Transmitter Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-1 FIT 3309 02 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-1000 N/A gpm 120 VAC Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-1 PI 3312 07 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-D-1 FSL 3312 08 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 1 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Primary Sludge Pump No. 2 407179 Detail D I-D-1 PI 3305 03 Pressure Gauge N/A -15 - 30 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-1 PI 3306 03 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-1 FE 3309 03 Magnetic Flow Sensor 6" N/A N/A gpm From Transmitter Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-1 FIT 3309 03 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-1000 N/A gpm 120 VAC Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-1 PI 3313 07 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B 2 Villaae Creek Water Reclamation Facility- Primary Clarifier Imorovements Aooendix A to Section 407000 Instrumentation Eauioment List 000%) Drawing I 9SA I Loop No.l LSuffixoop Description I Size I Range I Setpoint I Units I Location & Decription� Spec. Ref. I Installation Detail No. Taname I J I-D-1 FSL 3313 08 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 1 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Primary Sludge Pump No. 3 407179 Detail D I-D-2 PI 3305 04 Pressure Gauge N/A -15 - 30 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 4 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 PI 3306 04 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 FE 3309 04 Magnetic Flow Sensor 6" N/A N/A gpm From Transmitter Primary Sludge Pump No. 4 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 FIT 3309 04 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-1000 N/A gpm 120 VAC Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 PI 3314 07 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No.4 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-D-2 FSL 3314 08 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 1 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Primary Sludge Pump No.4 407179 Detail D I-D-2 PI 3305 05 Pressure Gauge N/A -15 - 30 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 PI 3306 05 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 FE 3309 05 Magnetic Flow Sensor 6" N/A N/A gpm From Transmitter Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 FIT 3309 05 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-1000 N/A gpm 120 VAC Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 PI 3315 07 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-D-2 FSL 3315 08 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 1 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Primary Sludge Pump No. 5 407179 Detail D I-D-2 PI 3305 06 Pressure Gauge N/A -15 - 30 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 Suction Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 PI 3306 06 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-60 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 Discharge Pressure 407313 Detail C I-D-2 FE 3309 06 Magnetic Flow Sensor 6" N/A N/A gpm From Transmitter Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 FIT 3309 06 Flow Indicating Transmitter N/A 0-1000 N/A gpm 120 VAC Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 Discharge Magnetic Flow Meter 407113 Detail A I-D-2 PI 3316 07 Pressure Gauge N/A 0-100 N/A psig N/A Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 Seal Water Pressure 407313 Detail B I-D-2 FSL 3316 08 Flow Switch Low N/A N/A 1 gpm N/A Seal Water Flow Detection to Primary Sludge Pump No. 6 407179 Detail D 3 Villaae Creek Water Reclamation Facility- Primary Clarifier Imorovements Aooendix A to Section 407000 Instrumentation Eauioment List 000%) Drawing ISA Loop No. Loop Description Size Range Setpoint Units Power Location & Decription Spec. Ref. Installation Detail No. Tagrame Suffix Villaae Creek Water Reclamation Facility- Primary Clarifier Imorovements Aooendix A to Section 407000 Instrumentation Eauioment List 000%) Drawing ISA Loop No. Loop Description Size Range Setpoint Units Power Location & Decription Spec. Ref. Installation Detail No. Tagrame Suffix THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 7113 - MAGNETIC FLOW METERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section includes magnetic flow meters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each magnetic flow meter, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.7 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish sensors, field preamplifiers, signal conditioners, offset and span adjustments, amplifiers, transducers, transmitters, control devices, interconnecting cables, and unit conversions and algorithms as required for application. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 3 of 6 2.2 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Endress+Hauser. b. Rosemount. C. Siemens. d. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. General: Low -frequency, electromagnetic induction -type flow meter, pulsed DC type, producing a linear signal directly proportional to flow rate, consisting of flow tube, signal cable, and transmitter. C. Type: 1. Between -flange mounting. 2. Comply with AWWA M33. D. Performance and Design Criteria: 1. Process Fluid: Refer to instrument list, specification section 407000A, and contract drawings. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of actual flow rate over a 30:1 range, within velocity limits of 0.1 to 10 feet per second. 3. Size: As shown on instrument list, specification section 40700A, and contract drawings. 4. Flow Tubes: a. Body Material: Carbon Steel. 5. Liner: To be suitable for the application and compatible with the process fluid. 6. Flanges: ANSI 1501b or DIN PN 16. 7. Flange Material: Stainless -steel. 8. Environment: For meters with remote mounted transmitters, meters below grade to be suitable for submergence for up to 48 hours to a depth of 30 feet (9 m). Meters above grade to be NEMA 4X (IP65). 9. Measurement at constant accuracy with 0 x DN inlet run and no pressure loss. E. Electrodes: 1. Type 316L stainless steel. 2. Self -Cleaning type, flush with inner surface of insulating liner. 3. Number of measuring electrodes sufficient to meet performance and design criteria as stated in Section 2.2.D. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 4 of 6 F. Accessories: 1. Provide manufacturer cable between transmitter and receiver. 2. Furnish stainless -steel grounding rings, wires, and gaskets as recommended by the manufacturer. All materials must be suitable for the process and surrounding pipe. 3. For classification and division rating, refer to general and electrical drawings of contract specifications. 4. Integrated verification and build-up detection. 2.3 TRANSMITTERS A. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as meter. B. Transmitter Output: 1. 4- to 20-mA DC analog signal. C. Housing: NEMA 4X (IP65), suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. D. Display: 1. Touch -screen programming, functioning through enclosure window without opening enclosure. 2. Size: Four lines by 16 characters. 3. Type: Backlit digital display. 4. User -selectable engineering units. 5. Readout of diagnostic error messages. E. Control Power: 1. 120VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. 2. Wire in accordance with Section 26 05 03 "Equipment Wiring Connections." 3. Provide local transformers as required. F. Mounting: 1. Mounting: Remote, up to 100 feet from flow meter. 2. Remote Mounting Locations Less Than 4 feet (1.2 m) above Grade: Provide stainless - steel mounting posts. G. Transmitter Communication Interface: HART. H. Required Accessories: 1. A fully configurable and locally viewable totalizer integral to the transmitter. 2. Current signal output simulation. 3. Empty pipe detection. 4. Self -diagnostics. 5. Signal Cable: Provided by flow meter manufacturer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 5 of 6 6. Automatic zero adjust. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of meters according to AWWA M6. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where magnetic flow meters will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: 1. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to drawings and instrument list for tagging designations. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4071 13 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS Page 6 of 6 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." C. Magnetic flow meters will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface. Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. 1. How to calibrate, install, troubleshoot, read the diagnostics, and maintain the sensor and transmitter. 2. Provided 1 times and last up to 2 hours in the field. END OF SECTION 40 71 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 66 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 7166 - TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes transit time flow meters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each flow meter, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 66 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.7 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions." 1.9 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish sensors, offset and span adjustments, transmitters, interconnecting cables, and unit conversions and algorithms as required for application. 2.2 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide the following: a. E&H Proline Prosonic Flow P 500. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 66 B. Type: TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 3 of 6 b. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). Separate and nonintrusive transmitting and receiving transit time transducers, clamped to outside of process pipe. C. Performance and Design Criteria: 1. Process Fluid: Raw Sewage with bubbles and solids < 3%. 2. Designed according to AWWA M33. 3. Flow Rate Range: 0.75 to 5.5 ft/sec (0 to 12.2 meters/sec). 4. Nominal Size: As shown on contract drawings and instrument schedule in Section 40 70 OOA. 5. Sensor (Transducer) Requirements: a. Rated NEMA 6P suitable for submergence when inserted into a vault. b. Rated for pipe material as shown on contract drawings. C. Provide integral spring mechanism to maintain correct contact pressure with mating pipe surface during operation. D. Required Accessories: 1. Stainless -steel mounting straps and hardware. The flow measuring system to consist of clamp -on sensor pair(s), sensor holders, transducer coupling pads, installation aids, etc. 2. Provide manufacturer cable between transmitter and receiver. 3. Provide flow measuring system with two (2) sensor sets (four -transducers) capable of measuring within specified accuracy within a minimum of 2xDN pipe diameters up and down stream (Flow Disturbance Compensation, Flow DC) 4. Provide sensor locking mechanism to prevent improper installation or movement cause by vibration. 2.3 TRANSMITTER A. Manufacturers: Same manufacturer as flow sensor. B. Type: Microprocessor based, compatible with sensor provided. C. Function/Performance: 1. Outputs: 4 to 20 mA DC output adjustable over the flow range and scaled in engineering units. One alarm contacts configurable over the output range. 2. Linear with flow rate and flow totalizer. 3. Linearity: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. 4. Repeatability: 0.2 percent under simulated flow. 5. Long -Term Drift: Less than 0.1 percent. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 66 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 4 of 6 6. Operating Temperature: -4 to 131 degrees F (-20 to 55 degrees Q. 7. Storage Temperature: -40 to 158 degrees F (40 to 70 degrees Q. 8. Current signal output simulation. 9. Empty pipe detection. 10. Self -diagnostics. 11. Automatic zero adjustment. 12. D. Physical: 1. Suitable for surface, pipe stand, or wall mounting. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP65) E. Display: 1. Touch -screen programming, functioning through enclosure window without opening enclosure. 2. Size: Four lines by 16 characters. 3. Type: Backlit digital display. 4. User -selectable engineering units. 5. Readout of diagnostic error messages. F. Power Requirements: 1. 120VAC, 60 Hz or as indicated on the drawings. G. Mounting: 1. Remote mounting, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Mounting Locations as indicated on the drawings. Provide stainless -steel mounting posts. H. Transmitter Communicatio I. Required Accessories: 1. Provide signal cable for installation between the flow sensor and the transmitter. Length as required by installation indicated on the Drawings. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of meters according to AWWA M6. PART 3 - ECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where transit time flow meters will be installed. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 66 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 5 of 6 B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. D. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for undisturbed straight run diameters before and after the point of measurement. E. Ultrasonic sensors mounted on horizontal piping to be orientated from the top (0 deg) or bottom (180 deg) on pipe circumference as recommend by manufacturer. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to instrument list and drawings for tagging designations. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and in- spect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Provide comprehensive field check at time of installation to ensure correct operation. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing." C. Transit time flow meters will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3.6 3.7 40 71 66 TRANSIT TIME FLOW METERS Page 6 of 6 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing." STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instru- ment. Work with the Owner, PCSS, and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct in- formation to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instru- ment and on the control system's operator interface. Submit an instrument calibration re- port in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Vendor Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service in- cludes 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include semi-annual preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies to be manufacture's authorized replacement parts and supplies. DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 40 61 26 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 7166 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 79 FLOW SWITCHES Page 1 of 5 SECTION 40 71 79 - FLOW SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes flow switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT): A switch with 2 inputs and 4 outputs. Each input has 2 corresponding outputs to control. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: I . Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 79 FLOW SWITCHES Page 2 of 5 B. Product Test Reports: For each flow switch, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." lwI Iuv Olei 0WIF.Ile[y40VRN011901.11 W11810UTIhelF.110 A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Flow switches: Provide six spare flow switches, five for each installed seal water line to sludge pump, and one for future pump line. Flow switches to replace instrument FSL- 331X-08. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.9 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.12 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 79 FLOW SWITCHES Page 3 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VANE ACATUATED FLOW SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Ameritrol Inc. b. Dwyer — Flotect Series. C. Magnetrol - F50 and F10. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Type 1. Vane or disc actuated flow switch. 2. Switch magnetically linked to vane or disc actuated mechanism. C. Function/Performance: 1. Output: Form 2C (DPDT) snap action, hermetically sealed switch, rated for 10 amps, 125/250 volts AC. D. Physical: 1. Provide flow body for switches for process pipe sizes of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 40 mm). Mount switches directly on process pipe for pipe sizes greater than 1-1/2 inch (40 mm). Provide mounting assembly for pipe. 2. Provide Type 316 stainless steel flow body and all wetted parts. 3. Switch housing: NEMA 4X (IP65) and where installed in hazardous areas, approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where flow switches will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 79 FLOW SWITCHES Page 4 of 5 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to instrument list and drawings for tagging designations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and in- spect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." C. Flow switches will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface). Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3. Coordinate with pump manufacturers to ensure compatibility with supplied seal water systems as indicated in instrument list, 40 70 OOA. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 71 79 FLOW SWITCHES Page 5 of 5 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Own- er's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 71 79 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 72 23 - RADAR LEVEL METERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw► W11LSlu1F."IWA A. Section includes radar level meters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each level meter, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.7 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON- CONTACT RADAR -LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICE A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Endress+Hauser. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 3 of 6 b. Siemens Automation Technology; Siemens AG Industry Sector. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Type: 1. Non -contact, microwave type level meter. 2. 80 GHz radar frequency for continuous level measurement of liquid, slurry and sludge processes in storage vessels that may be turbulent, have heavy vapors and foaming conditions in nominal pressure and temperature. 3. Antenna: Rod, Horn, Parabolic, or Encapsulated. C. Function/Performance: 1. Measuring Range: As shown in the instrument schedule in Section 40 70 OOA. 2. Beam Angle: Narrow beam, less than 6 degrees. 3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.32 inches (8 mm). 4. Operating Temperature: -40 to 149 degrees F (-40 to 65 degrees Q. 5. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA output. 6. Display: Digital indicator displaying level or volume in engineering units or percent, as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. 7. Diagnostics: On -screen instructions and display of self -diagnostics. 8. Provide foam or build-up detection capability suitable for foaming conditions in nominal operating conditions. D. Physical: 1. Antenna: PVDF, Type 316 stainless -steel, Hastelloy C or other material depending upon its compatibility to the process in which it is measuring. 2. Provide integral antenna with transmitter. 3. Provide with a minimum Class 150 pound (DN 80, PN16) mounting flange to match vessel flange size, material and class when mounted on vessel. 4. NEMA 4X (IP66) housing. Where the instrument is installed in a hazardous area, provide explosion -proof housing, approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D installation and certified for installation of the antenna in a Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D (Zone 0) environment. 5. Power Requirements: 24 VDC loop powered with intrinsically safe barriers. 6. Remote Display: Digital indicator displaying level or volume in engineering units or percent, as indicated on the Drawings or in the instrument schedule. Display unit used to remotely program the transmitter. E. Required Accessories: Hand-held programmer where required for configuration and calibration of the instrument. F. Manufacturer Start-up and Training Services: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 4 of 6 1. Provide manufacturer's start-up and training services as specified in the start-up and training services paragraph. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 0:I:\uIOR'%0Mel A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where radar level meters will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to drawings for tagging designations and instrument list. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." C. Radar level meters will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 5 of 6 D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions." 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing." 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface. Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 407223 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 23 RADAR LEVEL METERS Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 76 LEVEL SWITCHES Page 1 of 5 SECTION 40 72 76 - LEVEL SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes level switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Single Pole Double Throw (SPDT): A switch with one input and two output contacts. B. Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT): A switch with two inputs and two output contacts. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 76 LEVEL SWITCHES Page 2 of 5 B. Product Test Reports: For each level switch, for tests perfonned by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provi- sions." fw�IuI:1lei 0Qr:lerejaulrY11901.11 W111110UTINN lF.110 A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Level Switches: One level float switch for switches tagged LSH-3115-XX. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.9 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions." 1.12 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 76 LEVEL SWITCHES Page 3 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOAT SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Contegra FS 90. b. Endress+Hauser Liquifloat series. C. Siemens Water Technologies Model 9G-EF. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Type: 1. Mercury free ball float switch. C. Function/Performance: a. Differential: Less than 8-inch. b. Type of Switch: SPDT snap switch C. Switch Rating: IA at 120 VAC or 100 VA @ 120 VAC. D. Physical: 1. Type 316 stainless steel, Teflon or non-stick coating, minimum 5 in diameter. 2. Totally encapsulated switch. 3. Heavy-duty cable, PVC or equivalent jacketed integral to float. E. Required Accessories: 1. Provide stainless steel hardware. 2. Lead wire to be a waterproof cable of sufficient length so that no splice or junction box is required in the vault. 3. Provide cast -aluminum weatherproof junction box outside the sump pit with terminals for all floats and tapped as required for conduit connections. 4. Provide mounting equipment as shown on the drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 76 LEVEL SWITCHES Page 4 of 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where level switch will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to drawings for tagging designations and instrument list for tagging designations. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and in- spect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions.". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". C. Level switches will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 72 76 LEVEL SWITCHES Page 5 of 5 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instru- ment. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface). Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Own- er's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 72 76 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 4073 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 73 13 - PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lW► W81LTHu1&'%A11 A. Section includes pressure and differential pressure gauges. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 3. Section 40 73 63 "Diaphragm Seals." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each pressure gauge, for tests performed by manufacturer and wit- nessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4073 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provi- sions." 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges: One for each type of pressure gauge installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.8 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions." :7:7_6(1 A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4073 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Ametek US Gauge. b. Ashcroft. C. Weksler. d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Type: 1. Bourdon tube actuated dial face pressure gauge. C. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.0 percent of full-scale range. 2. Provide for zero -reading adjustment. 3. Adjusting Screws: Accessible from rear of case without need for disassembly. 4. Comply with ASME B40.100. D. Physical: 1. Dial: a. Nominal Diameter: 4-1/2 inches. b. Face: White, laminated plastic dials with black graduations. C. Scale: Extend over arc not less than 200 and not more than 270 degrees. d. Ranges and Graduation Units: As indicated on instrument schedule. 2. Cases: a. Liquid filled. b. Material: Type 316 stainless -steel. C. Provide removable rear plate. d. For gauge pressure, vented case for temperature/atmospheric compensation e. Windows: 1) Material: Clear acrylic or shatterproof glass. 2) Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3) Provide gasket. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4073 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 4 of 6 3. Bourdon Tubes: a. Material: Stainless steel, to brass socket. b. Provide welded, stress -relieved joints. 4. Connection: a. Location: Bottom. b. Socket: 1) 1/2-inch NPT male thread. 2) Material: Brass forging. 3) Extend minimum 1-1/4 inches below gage cases. 4) Provide wrench flats. C. Mounting: Stem or surface. E. Required Accessories: 1. Pressure Snubber: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Provide isolation valve. C. For sludge applications provide needle -type isolation as shown on the contract drawings. 2. Shutoff Cocks: Furnished by gauge manufacturer. 3. Provide annular seals as shown on the contract drawings. 4. Special scales: Engineer reserves the right to require special scales and/or calibration if the manufacturer's standard is not suitable for the application. 5. Liquid fill gauges at the factory. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where pressure gauges will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4073 13 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 5 of 6 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to drawings for tagging designations and instrument list. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Training". C. Pressure gauges will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Training". 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 73 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4073 13 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES Page 6 of 6 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 73 36 - PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 11181u1F."I .A A. Section includes pressure and differential pressure switches. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 3. Section 40 73 63 "Diaphragm Seals." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each pressure switch, for tests performed by manufacturer and wit- nessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 2 of 6 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provi- sions." 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Pressure Switches: One for each type/range of switch installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.8 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions." :7:7_6(1 A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 3 of 6 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. [Provide one of the following: a. Ashcroft. b. Mercoid. C. Static-O-Ring (SOR). d. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). B. Type: 1. Pressure: Diaphragm actuated. C. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: a. Pressure: Plus or minus 5 percent of operating range. 2. Range: a. Pressure: Refer to instrument schedule in Section 407000. 3. Type of Switch: SPDT snap action. 4. Switch Rating: 10A at 230VAC. 5. Repeatability: Better than 1 percent of full scale. 6. Dead band: Fixed deadband. 7. Set Points: Adjustable between 20 and 80 percent of adjustable range. 8. Automatic reset type. 9. Over Range Protection: Provide positive over range protection to 150 percent of the maximum pressure of the system being monitored. D. Physical: 1. Hermetically sealed switches. 2. Enclosures shall meet the area classification of the location where the device is being installed. 3. Materials: a. Diaphragm: Stainless steel. b. Wetted parts: Type 316L Stainless Steel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 4 of 6 C. Seals: Viton. d. Connection Port: Type 316L Stainless Steel. 4. Connection: a. Location: Bottom. b. Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Furnish taps for sensing lines. E. Required Accessories: 1. Pressure: Provide Type 316L stainless -steel shutoff or needle -type isolation valve as shown on the contract drawings. Provide manifold by D/A Manufacturing, Anderson Greenwood, or equal. 2. Provide annular seals as shown on the contract drawings. 3. Where indicated on the drawings, provide Type 316 stainless -steel pressure snubber for pulsation dampening. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where pressure and differential pressure switches will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to drawings and instrument list for tagging designations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 5 of 6 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". C. Pressure switches will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface). Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 40 73 36 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES Page 6 of 6 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 DIAPHRAGM SEALS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 40 73 63 - DIAPHRAGM SEALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes diaphragm seals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 3. Section 40 73 13 "Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges." 4. Section 40 73 36 "Pressure and Differential Pressure Switches" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." C. American Iron and Steel Requirements: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each annular diaphragm seal, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 DIAPHRAGM SEALS Page 2 of 4 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provi- sions." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. B. Ensure that materials of construction of wetted parts are compatible with process liquid. C. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61 and NSF 372. 1.7 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling require- ments. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Pro- visions." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provi- sions." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DIAPHRAGM SEALS — ANNULAR FLANGE MOUNTED A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Ashcroft CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 DIAPHRAGM SEALS Page 3 of 4 b. Red Valve C. Wika. d. Siemens. e. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type: 1. Line mounted, between two flanges, wafer -isolation ring type. C. Function/Performance: 1. Pressure Limit: Correspond to flange ratings. 2. Inside diameter conforms to the dimensions of the pipe where the seal is installed. 3. ANSI or DIN Flange Class: Equivalent to the flange class of the piping where the seal is installed. Bolting dimensions conform to ANSI or DIN drilling specifications as required by the installation. D. Physical: 1. Body material and Flange: Type 316L stainless -steel and compatible with process connections suitable for sludge and scum type applications as shown in the drawings. 2. Process connection: 1/4-inch NPT. 3. Wetted Parts and Bolt Materials: 316L stainless -steel end plate material with Buna or Viton flexible liner, corrosion resistant to process fluid. 4. Non -Wetted Parts: 316L stainless -steel adapters and needle -valve. 5. Sensing Liquid: Silicone Oil (50Cst). E. Diaphragm Seals: 1. Factory -assemble, fill, and calibrate entire assembly, including gauge and switch, prior to shipment. 2. Field filling is not acceptable. F. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where diaphragm seal will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 73 36 DIAPHRAGM SEALS Page 4 of 4 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". C. Diaphragm seals will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management General Provisions". 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing". 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the Owner and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface). Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 406126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 407363 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 407813 INDICATORS AND METERS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 407813 - INDICATORS AND METERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes indicators and meters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 67 17 "Industrial Enclosures." 3. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." f�c� 7�1�M1►111Y[�]►F.y A. Not used. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. B. Product Test Reports: For each indicator and meter, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 407813 INDICATORS AND METERS Page 2 of 4 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Indicators and Meters: One per each type of indicator or meter installed. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." f�f�5r/::::\►1111.1 A. Refer to Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL -MOUNTED DIGITAL INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Precision Digital ProVu Series. b. Red Lion Controls PAXDP Series. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 407813 INDICATORS AND METERS Page 3 of 4 C. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type: 1. Digital indicator. C. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of calibrated range. 2. Operating Temperature: -4 to 158 degrees F (-20 to 70 degrees C). 3. Input: One (1) 4 to 20 mA. 4. Output: One (1) 4 to 20 mA. 5. Digital Outputs: Two (2) Form C programmable contacts rated for 5A at 120/240 VAC. 6. Display: 0.56-inch-high efficiency, 5-digit LED display. 7. Indicator Failure: Failure of the indicator will not cause failure of the 4-20 mA loop. D. Physical: 1. Suitable for panel mounting. 2. Case size nominal 2.5-inch-high by 5-inch-wide by 6 inch deep. 3. NEMA 4X and explosion -proof approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D areas. 4. Programmable via integrated keypad. 5. Power Requirements: 120 VAC/60 Hz. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and process area for suitable conditions where indicators and meters will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 407813 INDICATORS AND METERS Page 4 of 4 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to contract drawings for tagging designations. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing.". C. Indicators and meters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports in accordance with the following: 1. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 2. Section 40 6121 "Process Control System Testing." 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. The start-up services include calibration, oversight of installations of the sensor, and start-up of the sensor/transmitter in order to provide reliable measurement at the instrument. Work with the PCSS and AESS to verify the transmitter sends correct information to the control system (i.e., that the scaling and units are the same at the instrument and on the control system's operator interface/PLC). Submit an instrument calibration report in order to document the calibration procedure of the instruments. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training" for training to be provided to Owner's personnel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 78 56 - ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes isolators, intrinsically safe barriers, and surge suppressors for RTU Cabinets. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for submittal requirements. 2. Section 40 67 17 "Industrial Enclosures." 3. Section 40 67 33 "Panel Wiring". 4. Section 40 78 13 " Indicators and Meters". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." B. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems." 2. Clearly indicate which instruments will have surge protection and either separate enclosures or conduit mounts. Provide listings and/or tables indicating location for both building and field devices. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for any PCSS requirements regarding informational submittals for instruments. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 2 of 8 A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions." f10'�uI:1lei 0;I0/:le[yaulrM11:1F.111 Y11:3uINN C:0 A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Isolators, Intrinsically Safe Barriers, and Surge Suppressors: Two of each type installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide components compatible with functions required to form complete working system. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" for general quality assurance requirements. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 40 6100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Gems — 54800 (4-20mA) and 65800 (dry contacts). b. R. Stahl — Intrinspak. C. Siemens Water Technologies — IS (4-20mA) and IS6 (dry contacts). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 3 of 8 d. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type: 1. Solid state electronic type in which the energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to allow safe usage in hazardous areas. C. Function/Performance: 1. Provide a barrier for instrumentation and equipment transmitting analog or digital signals that originate in a hazardous area as indicated in the design documents. 2. Locate in non -hazardous areas. 3. Match power supply provided. D. Physical: 1. Mounting: DIN Rail. 2.2 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS (FOR 2-WIRE TRANSMITTER SYSTEMS) A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Gems. b. P&F. C. Unitech. d. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Type: 1. Passive devices requiring no external voltage supply. C. Function/Performance: 1. Supplied with series resistors, series fuse and shunt zener diodes to limit the transfer of energy to levels required by intrinsically safe protection between safe and hazardous locations. 2. Factory Mutual approved and certified for use in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 493). D. Physical: 1. Mounting: DIN Rail. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 4 of 8 2.3 SURGE PROTECTION FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers and their products are subject to compliance with requirements. Provide one of the following: a. Citel. b. MTL Surge Technologies. C. Phoenix Contact. d. Transtector. e. Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Function/Performance: 1. Provides surge protection of electronic instrumentation from induced surges propagated along the signal and power supply lines from lightning, utility, or the plan electrical systems. 2. Protection system lower than the instrument withstand level, while not interfering with normal operation. 3. Maintenance free and self -restoring. 4. Response time: Within nanoseconds. C. Required Surge Protection: 4-Wire Field Instrument Power: a. Provide surge protection at the field device to protect 120 VAC power and 24 VDC power to analog instrument. b. Mount transmitter surge protectors in separate NEMA 4X enclosure for field installations. C. Nominal Discharge surge current: 2.5kA (at an 8x20µs impulse waveform). d. Provide Field Mounted (at instrument) surge protector from one of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact BoxTrab BXT-N4X Series. 2) MTL Surge Technologies SDyyX series. 3) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 2. Analog Signal (4-20mA) Circuits: a. Provide surge protection where any part of the circuit is outside of the building envelope. b. Mount transmitter surge protectors in separate NEMA 4X enclosure or conduit mount for field installations. C. Protect circuits at both the transmitter side and the control system side of the circuit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 5 of 8 d. Nominal Discharge surge current: lOkA (at an 8x20µs impulse waveform). Provide Field Mounted (at instrument) surge protector from one of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact SurgeTrab S-PT Series. 2) MTL Surge TechnologiesTP48. 3) Citel TSP M series. 4) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). Provide panel mounted surge protector for Field Mounted Instruments from one of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact TermiTrab TTC Series. 2) MTL Surge Technologies SD series. 3) Citel DLA series. DLC series. 4) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). Discrete Inputs: a. Provide surge protection at the control system for discrete signal connections. b. Nominal Discharge Current (24 VDC circuit): 5kA (at an 8x20µs impulse waveform) C. Nominal Discharge Current (120 VAC circuit): 2.5kA (at an Wogs impulse waveform) d. Provide surge protector from one of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact TermiTrab TTC Series or PT series. 2) MTL Surge Technologies SD series. 3) Citel DLA series. DLC series. 4) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 4. Inductive Loads: a. Provide coil surge suppression devices, such as varistors or interposing relays, on all process controller outputs or switches rated 120VAC or less that drive solenoid, coil, or motor loads. b. Nominal Discharge surge current: 20kA (at an 8x20µs impulse waveform) C. Provide surge protector from one of the following: 1) Citel DS240S series. 2) Phoenix Contact PT series. 3) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). 5. Non -Fiber Based Data Highway or Communications Circuits: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 6 of 8 a. Provide protection on all communication and data highway circuits that leave a building or are routed external to a building. b. Provide circuit protection at both ends of the line. C. Nominal Discharge surge current: 2kA (at an k20µs impulse waveform) d. Provide surge protector from one of the following based on specific application: 1) Phoenix Contact DATA Trab or P1ugTrab PT Series. 2) Transtector FSP Series, CPX series. 3) MTL Surge Technologies ZoneBarrier NC Series. 4) Citel DLA series, MSP Series 5) Substitutions: Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and rooms for suitable conditions where products will be installed. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions". 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections in accordance with the following: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 7 of 8 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions". 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing". C. Isolators, intrinsically safe barriers and surge suppressors will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports with the following: 1. Section 406100 "Process Control and Enterprise Management System General Provisions". 2. Section 406121 "Process Control System Testing". 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 40 78 56 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 40 78 56 ISOLATORS, INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIERS, This page intentionally left blank. AND SURGE SUPPRESSORS Page 8 of 8 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 1 of 12 SECTION 4122 13.13 - BRIDGE CRANES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Bridge crane systems with following components: a. Runway. b. Bridge: including drive, supplementary framing, support members and anchorage to building. C. Electric -powered hoists and components with wire rope hoists. 2. Delegated Design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications". 2. Section 09 96 79 "Atmospheric Protection and Plant Service Area Coatings". 3. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for Electric motors and accessories normally supplied as part of equipment assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Runway: Structural supporting system attached to or part of building/structure to support bridge wheels. B. Bridge: Part of traveling crane consisting of supporting girders, end trucks/trolleys, wheels, and drive mechanism, carrying trolley -mounted hoist; of single- or double -girder construction. Bridge mobility by electric motor drive or hand chain drive. 1. Top -Running Crane: Traveling crane bridge running on top of support girders. 2. Under -Running Crane: Traveling crane bridge suspended below crane runway; also known as underhung crane. C. Hoist: Electric motor or manually powered hoist with load hook to raise and lower a freely suspended load. Hook supported by one or more wire rope strands that reel from a drum mounted on hoist, or by one or more strands of metal chain. Standard headroom or close headroom construction. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 2 of 12 D. Pendant: Hand -operated controller for bridge, trolley, and hoist that hangs from crane by a cable or portable. E. Trolley -Mounted Hoist: Assembly consisting of a wheeled trolley with electric or manual drive that moves along bridge girder(s), supporting hoist. 1. Top -Running Hoist: Hoist trolley running on top of bridge girder(s). 2. Underhung Hoist: Hoist trolley suspended from bridge girder(s). 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. 1.5 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. B. If any portion or the entirety of the system be exempt from meeting AIS requirements, the manufacturer shall submit the reasoning for exclusion. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: I. Manufacturer catalog information for rail, trolley, hoist, motors, controls, description of operation, crane capacity, equipment layout, and dimensions including hoist coverage limits. 2. Equipment data sheets for hoist selection indicating capacity, lift distance, lift speed, motor data, weight, dimensions, and materials of construction. 3. Equipment data sheets for hoist trolley selection indicating capacity, speed, motor data, dimensions, weight, and materials of construction. 4. Equipment data sheets for bridge trolley selection indicating capacity, speed, motor data, dimensions, weight, and materials of construction. 5. List of manufacturer's recommended spare parts. 6. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensional drawings and details crane and runway, including clearances, principal dimensions, details of structural connections, and component details. 2. Erection drawings. 3. Support details and loads at each support. 4. Control panel layout, location, control schematics, and wiring diagrams. 5. Bill of materials of crane components. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 3 of 12 1.7 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS 1. Submit signed and sealed design calculations and assumptions for: a. Sizing of bridge girders and supports. b. Selection and sizing of hoist brakes. C. Sizing of bridge and trolley brakes. d. Tabulation of crane rail stop load reaction on structure. 1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify that products meet or exceed standards referenced in this Section. 2. Certify that final installation meets or exceeds standards referenced in this Section and standards of each manufacturer providing components for system. B. Test and Evaluation Reports: 1. Mill Test Reports: Indicate for bridge. 2. Inspection and Rated -Load Test Reports: Indicate according to ASME B30.2. 3. Crane certification documentation. C. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. D. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections. E. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, installer, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 3. Welder certificates: Submit certifications of welders and welding procedures employed on Work verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual locations of gantry cranes. 2. Record schematic, wiring, and layout information for crane and radio controls. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit assembly views and replacement part numbers and availability. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 4 of 12 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: 1. Furnish following spare parts for each bridge crane: a. One complete set of linings for each type and size of brake. b. One set of collector shoes. C. One wire rope with end fittings. d. One NiCad battery with battery charger. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and Fabrication: Comply with AISC 325, ASME B30.11, M1127.1 ASME B30.17, CMMA 74, ASME B30.2, CMAA 70, and OSHA 1910.179. B. Welding: Comply with AWS D14.1/D14.1M. C. Components to be UL listed where UL listed components are available. 1.12 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. 2. Member of Hoist Manufacturers Institute. 3. Member of Monorail Manufacturers Association. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Licensed Professional: Professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. D. Welders: AWS qualified within the previous 12 months for employed weld types. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 5 of 12 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Crane Systems: Whiting Corp., American Monorail, Inc., ACCO Louden Systems, or equal. B. Hoist Equipment: Prosery Crane Group, Yale Hoists, Coffing Hoists, Harnischfeger, Wright, Shaw Box, or equal. C. Bridge Crane Systems Assemblers: Prosery Crane Group, Capco Crane and Hoist, Platnick Steel and Engineering, The Cooke Corp, or equal. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Sections 01 33 00 "Submittals" and 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements", to submit items listed in the DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS Article. B. Service: Indoor, Unclassified. C. Duty Rating: C. D. System Capacity: 2 tons. E. System Electric Power Supply: 460 Volt, 60 Hz, 3 Phase. F. Runway: 1. As shown in Contract Plans G. Runway Track: 1. Steel structural beam ASCE#30. 2. Ends: Factory prepared. 3. Comply with CMAA 74 and MH27.1. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 6 of 12 4. Bolted trolley stops at every open end. 5. Provide end stop limit switch tripping bars and fasteners. 6. Provide additional steel supporting members required for support of monorail runway from structure. H. Bridge: 1. Type: Top -running. 2. Construction: Single -girder. 3. Bridge Capacity: 2 tons. 4. Bridge Drive: Electric. 5. Drive Type: Dual on each end truck. 6. Bridge Speed: Single 100 fpm. 7. Bridge Drive Power: 0.5 hp. 8. Bridge Motor: TEFL, single speed. 9. Electrification: Festoon. a. Provide junction box to connect power feeder from disconnect switch (Division 26). b. Festoon System: 1) Description: a) Multi -Conductor power supply cables suspended from trolleys mounted on heavy-duty C-track parallel to hoist monorail. b) Construction: Non -sparking. 2) Cables: a) UL-listed neoprene jacketed, stranded multi -conductor flat cables. b) Conductor Sizing/Rating: Comply with CMAA 74 and MH27.1. c) Length: 110 percent of required length. 3) Trolleys: a) Furnish towing and manufacturer's standard trolleys. b) Furnish stainless steel tow cable assembly for trolley spacing. c) Furnish strain -relief cable between first trolley and adjacent wall. 4) Festoon Runway: a) Material: Aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel. b) End Clamps: Furnish fixed end clamps with outrigger arms. I. Control Panel: 1. Construction: a. NEMA 250 Type 4X. b. Single -point power connection and grounding lug. C. Location: Factory mounted on crane bridge. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 7 of 12 2. Limit Switches: a. Description: 1) Automatically stop hoist motion when block reaches its highest position. 2) Prevent trolley and bridge from striking bumpers. b. Comply with NEMA ICS 2. C. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250 Type 4X. J. Controls: 1. Description: Push-button pendant station. 2. Comply with NEMA ICS 8 and CMAA 70/74. 3. Push -Button Pendant: a. Location: Suspended from fixed location on bridge with festoon control connection to hoist/trolley. b. Elevation: Pendant Reel: Furnish pendant reel with cable to reach to 3 feet above floor levels traversed by crane. C. Controls: 1) Key operated POWER ON -OFF switch. 2) POWER ON light. 3) RAISE /LOWER hoist control. 4) LEFT/RIGHT trolley control. 5) FORWARD/REVERSE bridge control. 6) Limit switch BYPASS button. 7) Speed control for functions incorporating two -speed. 2.3 ELECTRIC HOIST A. Main Hoist: 1. Configuration: Underhung. 2. Headroom: Close. 3. Hoist Type: Electric wire rope. 4. Hoist Duty Class: H3. 5. Reeving: Double. 6. Hoist Wire Rope Material: Type 316 stainless steel ASTM A580/A580M. 7. Hoist Suspension: Trolley. 8. Hoist Capacity: 2 tons. 9. Hoist Lift Distance: 40 feet. 10. Maximum allowable headroom: 2.16 feet. 11. Hoist Lifting Speed: Two 20/3.3 fpm. 12. Hoist Motor: TEFL, two -speed. 13. Hoist Motor Power: 2 hp. 14. Trolley Type: Integral to hoist. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 8 of 12 15. Trolley Drive: Electric. a. Wheels: Comply with CMAA 74 and MH27.1. b. Brakes: 1) Magnetic -release disc type. 2) Integrally mounted to motor. C. Furnish rubber bumper devices to maintain separation if two or more hoists are located on same monorail track. 16. Trolley Speed: Single 65 fpm. 17. Trolley Motor: TEFL, single speed 18. Trolley Drive Power: 0.5 hp 19. Hoist/Trolley Control Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 4X. B. Comply with ASME HST-4. C. Motor: Direct -Coupled. 1. As specified in Section 40 05 93.13 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 2. Comply with CMAA 74 and MH27.1. D. Brakes: Solenoid type. E. Control Panel: 1. Factory mounted. 2. Single -point power connection and grounding lug. F. Controls: 1. Pendant Push -Button Station: a. Comply with NEMA ICS 8. b. Furnish mounting bracket on hoist to stow pendant when not in use. C. Push Buttons: RAISE/LOWER, FORWARD/REVERSE. d. Pendant cable reel suspension: Adjustable, self -holding in last position. 2. Controls to permit inching in both directions under full load, automatically regulated acceleration, and rapid brake response. G. Hoist/Trolley Limit Controls: 1. Adjustable upper and lower overtravel limit stops. 2. Adjustable overload limit control. 3. Trolley stop limit switch control at each terminus of runway. H. Sheaves: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 9 of 12 1. Material: Forged steel. 2. Bearings: Permanently lubricated roller type; ABMA 11. 3. Minimum Diameter: 20 times rope diameter. I. Electrification: 1. Provide junction box to connect power feeder from disconnect switch (by Division 26). 2. Festoon System: a. Description: 1) Multi -Conductor power supply cables suspended from trolleys mounted on heavy-duty C-track parallel to hoist monorail. 2) Construction: Non -sparking. b. Cables: c 2.4 FINISHES A. Labeling: 1) UL-listed neoprene jacketed, stranded multi -conductor flat cables. 2) Conductor sizing/rating: Comply with CMAA 74 and MH27.1. 3) Length: 110 percent of required length. Trolleys: 1) Furnish towing and manufacturer's standard trolleys. 2) Furnish stainless steel tow cable assembly for trolley spacing. 3) Furnish strain -relief cable between first trolley and adjacent wall. Festoon Runway: 1) Material: Aluminum or Type 316 stainless steel. 2) End Clamps: Furnish fixed end clamps with outrigger arms. 1. Safety Signs: Comply with NEMA 535. 2. Clearly label capacity of bridge and hoist(s) on each piece of equipment. B. Factory Coatings: 1. Apply factory finish paint or coatings to exposed component surfaces. 2. Apply rust inhibitive coatings to ferrous surfaces not designated to be painted. 3. Factory surface preparation, priming, and painting to be manufacturer's standard and as specified in Division 09. 4. Finish coat colors to conform to industry standard. Submit color selections as offered. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 10 of 12 2.5 ACCESSORIES: A. Hook: 1. Comply with ASME B30.10. 2. Material: Forged steel. 3. Swivel: Anti -friction type, allowing 360-degree rotation of load. 4. Furnish spring loaded safety latch. 5. Furnish nuts keyed to hook shanks by setscrew. B. Mounting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory -assemble individual crane components and perform shop inspection and testing of completed assemblies. B. Testing: 1. Perform "no-load" running test of controls and drive machinery to ensure proper operation. 2. Proof -test load chains. Comply with applicable ASME HST Standard. 3. Comply with OSHA 1919.71. 4. Electrical: a. Test hoist, trolley, and bridge controls. b. Verify independent operation of pendant and radio controls. C. Verify operation of limit switches and bypass controls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are ready to receive Work. B. Verify that field dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation and Start -Up: Comply with OSHA 1919.71, and ASME 1330.16. B. According to manufacturer instructions and as indicated on Drawings. C. Construction: Comply with referenced standards and OSHA 1920.179. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 3.3 3.4 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 11 of 12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Check hoist and motor for excessive vibration and noise. B. Testing: 1. Notify Engineer and perform testing in presence of Engineer. 2. Perform initial "no-load" running test of controls and drive machinery to ensure proper operation. a. Operate crane through complete lift and lowering cycle and through complete travel of bridge and trolley under full -load and no-load conditions. b. Verify that equipment performs smoothly and safely. C. Verify independent operation of pendant and radio controls. d. Verify that pendant cable length is sufficient to permit operation from desired floor levels. e. Verify that hoist and bridge motions operate as required. £ Verify that limit switches operate as required. Perform load tests on bridge, hoist, and trolley through -out full range of access of bridge crane. a. Load Test Certification: Comply with OSHA Part 1910.179. b. Unit Proof Test: Comply with OSHA Part 1919.71, and ASME B30.16. C. Verify that temperature within enclosures is within tolerance after full -load tests. C. Manufacturer Services: Furnish services of manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than 3 days on Site for installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. D. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. E. Repair damaged coatings with material equal to original coating and as specified in Section 09 96 79 "Atmospheric Protection and Plant Service Areas Coatings". ADJUSTING A. Field -calibrate local controls and indicators. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate crane operation, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4122 13.13 BRIDGE CRANES Page 12 of 12 3.6 PROTECTION A. Construct temporary protection for equipment and installations, consisting of canvas, heavy plastic, plywood, or other suitable materials, closed tightly and dustproof. END OF SECTION 4122 13.13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 1 of 6 SECTION 43 21 50 - SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged Seal Water Booster Pump System: One booster pump, control panel and instruments, and interconnecting piping and valves, assembled and mounted on a single base. 2. The components of the packaged seal water booster pump system form an integrated system and are to be furnished by a single supplier, who shall provide all equipment and appurtenances required regardless of manufacture and is responsible for the satisfactory operation of the entire system. 3. The necessary components for a complete seal water booster pump system as shown on the drawings shall be furnished as part of this package. B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete Work is included in Division 03. 2. Recessed Impeller Pumps are included in Section 43 23 35. 3. Instrumentation is included in Division 40. 4. Electrical Work is included in Division 26. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications will be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. Submittals will include at least the following: 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of each size pump. Data will include guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests of duplicate units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, allowable NPSHR, allowable suction lift, and horsepower. Curves will be submitted on 8-1/2-inch x 11-inch sheets 4. The total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 2 of 6 5. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment. 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the manufacturer's current price for each item. 7. Complete control diagram and control panel details. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Operating and maintenance manuals will be furnished as specified in the General Conditions. The manuals will be prepared specifically for this installation and will include all required catalog cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment shall be furnished by manufacturers who are fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for assuring the quality and compatibility of the component parts of the system. The work shall comply with the detailed process, mechanical materials and construction requirements of this specification and shall include all appurtenances necessary for a complete and operable system. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The seal water booster pump shall be a factory -built package pressure boost pumping system. The seal water booster pump system shall be capable of supplying non -potable plant water to each of the recessed impeller sludge pumps when operating to meet the minimum flow and pressure requirements for packing seals. B. The system shall be installed in line with the non -potable plant water service line. C. The package system shall include the booster pump, valves, piping, instruments and controls necessary to provide a complete and operable pressure boost pumping system which will automatically provide seal water at elevated pressure to each sludge pump. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 3 of 6 2.2 GENERAL A. The packaged seal water booster pump system shall be factory prefabricated on a common structural steel skid with all components mounted and all interconnecting wiring and piping completed and factory tested prior to shipment. The only field connections are to be the connection of the system to the seal water supply, connection of the discharge piping, and single or three phase power connection. B. The packaged seal water booster pump system shall be equipped with integral speed controls such that the pump will maintain a desired discharge pressure setpoint over a range of flows. The suction and discharge connections required for connection to the seal water line, a pump bypass connection, as well as the pressure gauges and valves as indicated on the drawing shall be furnished assembled. C. All electrical wiring shall be complete between the components and the control panel except the main power feed to the panel. D. Brass or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed, serial number, model number, horsepower, voltage, amperes, and all other pertinent data will be attached to each pump. E. The nameplate ratings of the motors will not be exceeded, nor will the design service factor be reduced when the pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve at maximum speed. 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Service Conditions: 1. Number of pumps: One duty. 2. Type of drive: Integrated variable frequency drive. 3. Pump primary design point: 12 gpm @ 30 ft TDH 4. Minimum available inlet pressure to the pump: 35 psi. 5. Pressure Boost System Flow Demand: 5 - 20 gpm. 6. Pressure Boost System Maximum Operating Pressure (pump on): 70 psi. 7. Maximum skid dimensions: 2' wide x 2' long. B. System Base: All mechanical and control components shall be factory installed and wired on a common structural steel base, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36. The base shall be constructed of structural channel and tubing and shall be covered with a steel plate floor. Lifting lugs shall be provided in the system base adequate for offloading and handling of the skid at the site. Anchor points shall be provided and shall be clearly indicated on all drawings. C. Pumps shall meet the following requirements: 1. Type: Multistage Vertical In -Line Centrifugal Pump. 2. Manufacturers: Grundfos model CRE, or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) 3. Impeller: Type 304 stainless steel impeller, centrifugal, precision machined, balanced. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 4 of 6 4. Case: Cast iron, coated, ASTM A48 Class 30. 5. Shaft Seal: Mechanical seals with Ni-resist seat and carbon washer, Buna-N elastomer and stainless steel metal parts. 6. Pump/Motor Shaft: Type 304 stainless steel shaft. 7. Fittings: All wetted parts to be Type 304 stainless steel. 8. Locate discharge connections to allow removal of the rotating element without disturbing the system piping connections. D. Motors: 1. Horsepower: 2 hp (maximum). 2. RPM: 4000 RPM. 3. Voltage: 240V, three-phase, 60 hertz. 4. Enclosure: Totally Enclosed Fan -Cooled (TEFC). 5. Service Factor: 1.15. 6. Classification: Unclassified. E. Valves and Accessories: Furnish and install the accessories and as shown on drawings. 1. By-pass piping and isolation ball valve. 2. Isolation ball valve and check valve on seal water booster pump discharge. 3. Isolation valve on seal water booster pump suction. 4. Pressure gauge on seal water booster pump suction 5. Pressure transmitter on seal water booster pump discharge. 6. Flexible connectors at seal water booster pump discharge. 7. Unions or Dresser style connections to facilitate removal of equipment. 8. All field piping pressure rated and capable of handling seal water booster pump shutoff head to accommodate the above items, pursuant to the piping schematic shown on the drawings. 2.4 CONTROLS A. The system supplier shall furnish a control panel in a NEMA 4X. Control panel shall be provided with the following minimum components: 1. Motor starter with a motor circuit protector and overload protection for each pump. 2. H-O-A switch for each pump. 3. Run lights. 4. Elapsed time meter for pump. 5. Power on lights. 6. Pump fail lights. 7. Dry contacts for remote monitoring of pump run and fault status. 2.5 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. One set of all special tools if required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided by the manufacturer. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 5 of 6 B. All spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed in containers which are clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation will be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the drawings. Installation will include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease will be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts will be set in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Supply all anchor bolts, temporary lift equipment, power, water, labor, and all other incidentals required for the proper installation of the pump. COATINGS A. Factory Coatings: Prepare and shop prime all equipment surfaces. B. Field coat equipment in accordance with section 09 96 79, "Atmospheric Protection and Plant Service Areas Coatings". FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Vendor Training: The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for a period of not less than two days as follows: 1. At least one trip of one day check and supervise the equipment installation and field tests. 2. One trip of one day to supervise initial start-up and operation and to instruct the City's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. B. Vendor Test and Start -Up Services: 1. The equipment manufacturer(s) shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced representative(s), who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance of the equipment to inspect the installed equipment, supervise the initial test runs, provide start-up support, and perform field performance testing. A representative should be provided for —at a minimum —one eight -hour day (excluding travel time). 2. The above stated times are minimums and are exclusive of travel time and time required for training City's personnel. If there are difficulties in start-up, testing, or operation of the equipment additional services may be required and shall be provided at no travel additional cost to the City. Freese and Nichols CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS June 2024 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 Issued for Bid 43 21 50 SEAL BOOSTER PUMP WATER SYSTEM Page 6 of 6 C. The completed seal water booster pump system installation shall be fully tested for proper operation of the complete system, by experienced personnel prior to being placed in service. D. Upon completion of installation of equipment piping, valves shall be tested for a two-hour period. All leaks, malfunctions or defects shall be repaired at the CONTRACTOR'S expense prior to acceptance. END OF SECTION 43 21 50 Freese and Nichols CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS June 2024 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 1 of 14 SECTION 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Recessed impeller pumping system, including, but not limited to, pumps, motors, starters, controllers, and eddy current drives. 2. Supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3. Pumps, complete with motor, eddy current clutches, eddy current drive controller, V- Belt, baseplate, necessary guards, and all other specified accessories and appurtenances shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer to insure compatibility and integrity of the individual components, and provide the specified warranty for all components. The pump manufacturer accepts unit responsibility for each pump assembly. B. Application: 1. Pumping units pump primary sludge from primary clarifiers to the primary sludge holding tanks or the grit building. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0173 00 "Execution". 2. Section 05 50 00 "Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications": Fasteners, brackets, and other miscellaneous metal fabrications as required by this Section. 3. Section 09 96 79 "Atmospheric Protection and Plant Service Areas Coatings". 4. Section 26 05 23 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for connections and terminations. 5. Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for connections and terminations. 6. Section 26 29 23.26 "Eddy Current Drive Controllers". 7. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment": Electric motors and accessories normally supplied as part of equipment assemblies. 8. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions". 9. Section 40 6121.20 "Process Control System Testing". 10. Section 40 6126 "Process Control System Training". 11. Section 40 6196 "Process Control Descriptions". 12. Section 40 70 00 "Instrumentation for Process Systems". Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 2 of 14 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. AESS: Applications Engineering System Supplier; refer to Section 40 61 00 for additional information. B. AOR: Allowable Operating Region C. Failsafe: Normally closed contacts that open on alarm condition. D. ECP: Eddy -Current (Drive) Panel. E. I/O: Input/Output (signals). F. LCP: Local Control Panel. G. LCS: Local Control Station. H. PCSS: Process Control System Supplier; refer to Section 40 6100 for additional information. I. POR: Preferred Operating Region. J. P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram. K. Unit Responsibility: Sole responsibility for all components provided as part of pumping system. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation and startup of Work of this Section with Owner's operations as shown on Drawings and in accordance with Division 01 Specifications. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. If manufacturing techniques differ, completely describe all aspects that do not conform to specifications. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature, which may include drawings, describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the specifications. 1. Descriptive literature, bulletins, or catalogs. 2. Equipment total weight, including weight of single largest item. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified shop and erection drawing showing parts arrangement, details and materials of construction and dimensions. 2. Complete Bill of Materials, establishing compliance with this Section. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 3 of 14 Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump. a. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves covering full range selection of impeller diameter. b. Guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests on similar units, showing the specified requirements for head, capacity, efficiency, NPSHR, and brake horsepower. 1) Curves plotted on 8 %Z-inch by 11-inch sheets at as large a scale as practical specifically for the pump proposed from no flow at shut off head to pump capacity at minimum specified TDH. 2) For variable speed pumps, submit variable speed curves with five speeds plotted from maximum to minimum recommended speed. 4. Equipment base drawing: a. Indicate size and location of bolt holes for anchorage plus details of anchorage of equipment to foundation including anchor bolt type, size, materials, embedment depth, and minimum edge distance. b. Summary of external weight and thrust loads applied to the supporting structure. C. Summary of maximum vertical and horizontal reactions at each anchor bolt considering all applicable loads and load combinations. d. Submit manufacturer's specification and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics for the selected anchors to the concrete foundation. 5. Description of painting and protective coatings. 6. Complete master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics, including coordination with electrical equipment and control devices, and suitable outline drawings showing such details as are necessary to locate conduit stub -ups and field wiring. 7. Data for electric motors in accordance with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 8. Data for variable speed drives in accordance with Section 26 29 23.26 "Eddy Current Drive Controllers". INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Certify bearing life. 3. Certify setting plan with details of anchorage. B. Manufacturer Instructions: 1. Storage and handling instructions. 2. Installation instructions, including anchoring layout and details. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 1.7 1.8 1.9 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 4 of 14 1. Certified results of hydrostatic testing. 2. Shop testing procedures, pump and piping set up, equipment to be used and testing tolerances. 3. Shop performance curves plotted at maximum size possible on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: 1. Field testing procedures, equipment to be used, and testing tolerances. 2. Field testing results. E. Manufacturer Reports: Certificate from manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed according to manufacturer's instructions and is ready for startup and testing. F. Qualifications Statement: Manufacturer Qualifications, as required by Article Quality Assurance. G. Manufacturer's letter certifying that provided pump and motor assembly is fully compatible with the provided eddy current drive make and model. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Provide an Operating and Maintenance Manual for the equipment specified herein, specifically prepared for this installation and including all required drawings, equipment and materials information, descriptions, complete bill of materials, etc., as required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit Project Record Documents recording actual locations and final orientation of all equipment and accessories. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Recommended Spare Parts List: 1. Include gaskets, packing, and related materials. 2. List all bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 3. Include Manufacturer's current price for each item; pricing to remain in effect for not less than one year after final acceptance. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 5 of 14 1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. 2. Minimum of 10 operating installations with pumps of the same size or larger and in the same service as specified herein. B. Conform to applicable Standards of the Hydraulic Institute for Rotodynamic Pumps, ANSI/HI 1.1 — 1.4. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. As necessary, provide inspection report to Manufacturer identifying any damage and rework necessary prior to installation. B. Storage: Store pumps and all appurtenances according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not disassemble factory assembled parts and components for shipment unless written permission received from Engineer. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote for construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer's instructions. 3. Protect unpainted finished iron and steel surfaces to prevent rust and corrosion. 4. Protect finished surfaces of exposed flanges with wood or equivalent blank flanges. 5. Protect bearings against formation of rust in accordance with bearing manufacturer's recommendations. Apply lubricant or corrosion inhibiting treatment during transportation, storage, handling, installation, and lapse of time prior to start-up. Intermittently manually rotate equipment prior to start-up to ensure distribution of lubricant/protection. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer List: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 2.2 2.3 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 6 of 14 1. Weir Group, Wemco Torque -Flow Pump Model CE. 2. ESSCO HDP Ring Cup. 3. Grundfos Morris 6100 CT. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance: 1. Pumps of same service type shall be identical in every respect with all parts interchangeable. 2. Design each pump for design conditions listed herein. 3. Head — Capacity Performance Curve: continuously rising from runout to shutoff with no points of inflection at any operational speed for stable operation within the AOR. 4. Operate throughout the specified range without excessive vibration. B. Design Criteria: See Attachment A — Pump Schedule. DRIVER A. Motor: 1. Comply with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 2. Pump power not exceeding motor nameplate rating at 1.0 service factor at any point on pump characteristic curve. 3. Power Data: a. Horsepower: As indicated in Pump Schedule. b. 460 Volt, three phase, 60 Hz. C. Variable Speed. d. Service Factor: 1.15 (Inverter Duty). e. Motor nameplate stamped Inverter Duty Rated when VFD driven. f. Starting Method: Eddy Current Drive. 4. Environmental Data: a. Load type: Variable Torque. b. Continuous duty, 50 degrees C ambient, 3300 feet maximum elevation. C. Space Classification: In accordance with general sheets of contract drawings. 5. Physical Data: a. Construction and nameplate: comply with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". b. Orientation: horizontal. C. Solid Shaft. d. Speed: 1800 RPM. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 7 of 14 Enclosure: TEFL. 6. Features and Accessories: a. Winding Temperature Protection: Three embedded bi-metallic temperature thermostat switches with normally open or normally closed per process equipment specification and leads terminating in the main conduit box. b. Space heaters. B. Fixed Ratio Belt Drive: Manufacturer List: a. Dodge Division of ABB Motors and Mechanical Inc. b. T. B. Woods Inc. C. Gates Corp. 2. Multi V-Belt drive. 3. Horsepower rating of V-Belt drive equal or exceeding motor nameplate horsepower with 1.5 service factor. 4. V-Belts heavy duty, oil and heat resistant, static conducting, minimum life rating of 8000 hours. 5. Sheaves of high -tensile close -grained cast iron. 6. Sheaves keyed and locked to the respective shafts or taper locking wedge bushings. 7. OSHA compliant, fabricated steel or expanded metal belt guard, galvanized after fabrication. 8. Adjustable motor mount to adjust belt tension. C. Eddy Current Drive Controller: provide in accordance with Section 26 29 23.26 "Eddy Current Drive Controllers". D. Controls: General: a. One (1) Eddy Current Panel (ECP), one (1) Motor Starter (MS) Panel, and one (1) Local Control Station (LCS) will be dedicated to each primary sludge pump No.2 — No.6. b. Panel Construction: Each panel to be provided by Division 26, `Electrical", supplier and conform to general requirements found in those sections and related requirements as seen in Section 1. LC herein. C. Location: As shown in the in the contract drawings. d. Primary Sludge Pump Tag Numbers: 1) Primary Sludge Pump No.2: PMP-3300-02 2) Primary Sludge Pump No.3: PMP-3300-03 3) Primary Sludge Pump NoA: PMP-3300-04 4) Primary Sludge Pump No.5: PMP-3300-05 5) Primary Sludge Pump No.6: PMP-3300-06 e. Refer to contract drawings for dedicated eddy -current, motor -starter, and local control station panel locations and tag numbers. f. Space Classification: In accordance with general sheets of the contract drawings. g. Cable and Conduit entry: As shown in electrical drawings. h. Hardwired Interlocks: Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 2.4 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 8 of 14 1) Each duty primary sludge pump to have a dedicated in -line grinder associated with its operation. When the sludge pump is running, the grinder will run. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. 2) When a stand-by primary sludge pump is started to replace the duty pump, it will run when the associated in -line grinder is running. If the new duty pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped via hardwired interlock. 3) A motor -winding high -temperature switch to be provided at the pump motor. In the event of a high -temperature condition, the pump shall be stopped to protect the pump motor. 4) When a pump is called to start by the motor starter panel (MS), the MS will first command the seal water system solenoid valve to open for a present amount of time (operator adjustable) before the pump starts. Once the timer has expired the pump will be started. The seal water system solenoid valve will be kept open when the pump is running. 5) When the pump is commanded to stop, the seal water system solenoid valve shall be closed for a preset amount of time (operator adiustable) after the pump has stooej! 6) When a low flow condition is detected by the seal water system low flow switch while the pump is running, the pump will be requested to stop. 2. Refer to control logic in Section 40 61 96 "Process Control Descriptions" for coordination with plant control system. PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Flow path clearances within pump equal to or greater than discharge diameter. 2. Pump with base, motor and belt drive fully factory assembled and delivered to the project site fully assembled ready for installation. 3. Provide stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, rated capacity, lift, speed and other pertinent data permanently attached to each pump. 4. Provide lifting lugs on all major equipment/components. 5. All pump components interchangeable in pumps of same size. 6. Provide access for maintenance of all pump components. B. Casing: 1. Material: Ni-Hard or 28 percent chrome cast iron conforming to ASTM A532 with minimum Brinell hardness of 500 to 550. 2. Ribbed and of sufficient thickness to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure and accounting for internal wear from abrasive pumping. 3. Volute to be separate casting from back head, back pull-out arrangement allowing pump rotating element, including impeller, seal and bearings, to be removed with pump remaining installed and connected to piping. End Connections: Flanged, ASME B16.1, Class 125. 4. Provide a removable Ni-Hard or 28 percent chrome cast iron wearplate behind impeller, designed to direct flow from behind impeller to center of volute and reduce wear of volute. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 9 of 14 5. Stationary guides not permitted on either suction or discharge side of casing. No clearance wear rings. C. Impeller: 1. Fully recessed, slurry type design, mounted completely out of flow path between the pump inlet and discharge such that solids do not to flow through impeller. 2. Recessed cup -shaped design, to direct flow toward the center of the volute. 3. Material: Ni-Hard or 28 percent chrome cast iron conforming to ASTM A532 with minimum Brinell hardness of 500 to 550. 4. Attached to shaft with key and lock bolt. D. Shaft: 1. Shaft proportioned for operating thrusts and moments. 2. Material: Steel, ASTM A108, Grade AISI 1141 or 1045. 3. Sleeve: a. Removable. b. Material: Hardened Stainless -steel, ASTM A582 Type 416. C. Internally ground to tolerance and positively secured to shaft to prevent relative rotation. Prevent passage of water between shaft and sleeve by use of 0-rings or other approved means. E. Bearings (radial and thrust): 1. Type: Anti -friction, ball and angular contact ball bearings. 2. Minimum L-10 Life: 100,000 hours at continuous maximum load and speed, according to ABMA 9 3. Lubrication: Oil bath lubricated, with oil level, fill, and drain taps, and level indicator. F. Bearing Housing: 1. Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 30 or better of sufficient thickness and suitably ribbed to withstand all stresses and strains of service at full operating pressure. 2. Arrange bearing housing to provide access to stuffing box. 3. Dust and moisture proof. G. Stuffing Box: 1. Separate casting bolted to the bearing housing. 2. Material: Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or better. 3. Collect leakage in a reservoir with a 3/4-inch NPT tapped drain outlet. 4. Packing Gland of cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30 or Type 316 stainless steel with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and silicon bronze nuts. 5. Packing: a. Die -formed, interlaced braided packing rings treated with a high temperature lubricant, packaged in sets to maintain their shape. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 10 of 14 b. Lantern ring to be split ring machined 25 percent glass filled TFE type, of sufficient strength for the intended service, drilled and tapped for easy removal and positioned to assure uniform distribution of the sealing medium. C. Packing retained by a split, adjustable, bronze packing gland with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and bronze nuts. d. Manufacturer: 1) John Crane. 2) A.W. Chesterton. H. Pump Base: 1. Mount pump and motor assembly on a base of welded structural steel or cast iron to support all weight and operating loads of pump and motor. 2. Machine -finish all pump, motor, and base mating surfaces. 3. Provide drip rim and drain connection. 4. Anchorage: a. Provide all foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and setting templates required for installation. b. Anchors: Type 316 stainless steel with silicon bronze or Monel nuts, conforming to the requirements of Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications". I. Factory Coatings: Prepare and shop prime all equipment surfaces as part of the work of this Section. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Notify Owner and Engineer at least fourteen days before inspections and tests are scheduled. C. Shop Test: 1. Perform shop test of each pump to be furnished under this Work in accordance with ANSI/HI 14.6, American National Standard for Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests, Acceptance Grade IU, for pump hydrostatic test and performance test. 2. The pumps should be shop tested with eddy current drive and controller provided by the pump manufacturer. 3. Submit certified test results including pump performance curves showing head, flow, brake horsepower and pump efficiency for each pump. D. Motor shop testing in accordance with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". E. Eddy Current Drive testing in accordance with Section 26 29 23.26 "Eddy Current Drive Controllers". Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 11 of 14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 EXAMINATION A. Verify that items provided by other Section of Work are ready to receive Work of this Section. B. Verify layout, orientation and connections. INSTALLATION A. Install pumping units as shown and according to Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pumping units on concrete foundation to elevation to align with piping as shown. C. Equipment Base Anchorage: 1. Rigidly and accurately anchor equipment base into position on concrete foundation with cast -in -place anchors. 2. Use expansive, non -shrink low exothermic epoxy grout, Five Star DP Epoxy Grout or equal, mixed and applied according to manufacturer's directions. 3. Remove or back down jacking nuts prior to placing grout. 4. Protect all bolt threads during placement of grout. 5. Fill space between anchor bolts and bolt sleeves with expanding urethane foam. D. Connect piping accurately aligned with pump flanges, imposing no external loading on the PUMP. E. Provide and connect power and control conduit and wiring to make system operational and ready for startup. F. Provide lubricants in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G. Flush piping with clean water. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to system startup, submit installation documentation from equipment Manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. SYSTEM STARTUP A. Prior to operating system or components, perform the following: 1. Check pump and motor alignment. 2. Check for proper motor rotation. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 12 of 14 Check pump and drive units for proper lubrication. B. Startup and Performance Testing: 1. Operate pump at design point for continuous period of two hours, under supervision of manufacturer's representative and in presence of Engineer. 2. Confirm pump operation at secondary design points, as applicable, with period of operation at Engineer's discretion. 3. For variable speed application, confirm pump performance at three reduced speeds: 75 percent, 50 percent, and 25 percent of maximum speed, including the speed required to meet all of the design points as specified in the pump schedule. Period of operation at Engineer's discretion. 4. At 15 minute intervals, record flow, head, pump speed and power required. Utilize approved field test data log sheets. 5. Flow Measurement: Utilize timed-drawdown test or timed -fill test, installed flow meter, or temporary flow meter provided by Contractor. 6. Head (Pressure) Measurement: Utilize installed or Contactor furnished pressure gauges on pump suction and pump discharge. 7. Pump Speed: Utilize tachometer. 8. Power: Utilize volt and ampere (or kilowatt) meters. 9. Check pump and motor for high bearing temperature and excessive noise or vibration according to Manufacturer instructions. Check for motor overload by taking ampere readings. 10. Under direction of Manufacturer's representative, adjust, repair, modify, or replace system components that fail to perform as specified and rerun tests. 11. Submit written report tabulating equipment tested, test results, problems encountered, and corrective action taken within two weeks after test completion. C. Long Term Performance Testing: 1. Operate each pump for a total period of 24 hours. 2. Confirm that each pump operates without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating. D. Vibration Testing: 1. Upon completion of startup and performance testing, retain services of an independent mechanical testing firm to perform a detailed vibration signature analysis of each pump, including both "Bump Tests" and X-Y vibration profiles. 2. Demonstrate compliance with specified vibration limitations. 3. Demonstrate that there are no field installed resonant conditions due to misalignment, the foundation, or connecting piping and its supports, when operating within the specified operating range. 4. Prepare and submit a written report including the following: a. Sketch of pumps indicating location and direction of vibration measurements b. For each test point: 1) Peak to peak displacement, in mils. 2) Frequency. 3) Peak velocity level in inches per second. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 13 of 14 C. A complete analysis of findings, any issues encountered, probable causes, and specific recommendations for corrective actions. E. Manufacturer Services: 1. Provide on -site services of manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of equipment provided under this Section. 2. Services include equipment installation, inspection, start-up, field testing and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. Services on -site shall meet minimum time requirements listed below. Time requirements do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. 4. Installation/Inspection: a. 1 day. b. Inspect grouting, location of anchor bolts, setting, leveling, alignment, field erection, coordination of piping, electrical and miscellaneous utility connections. 5. Startup/Testing: a. 1 day. b. Place equipment into operation and make necessary adjustments. C. Complete functional and performance testing. 6. Operation and Maintenance Instruction: a. 2 days. b. Instruct representatives of the Owner on proper operation and maintenance. Provide training agenda and utilize approved O&M manuals. 7. Service Inspection: a. 2 days. b. During the first year of operation, provide additional Service Inspection at Owner's request, exclusive of repair, malfunction, or other trouble shooting service calls. 3.5 ATTACHMENTS A. Pump Schedule is attached detailing location, service, configuration and performance criteria for each pump type. END OF SECTION 43 23 35 Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 35 RECESSED IMPELLER PUMPS Page 14 of 14 ATTACHMENT A — PUMP SCHEDULE Design Criteria: Pumped Fluid: a. Primary Sludge. b. Specific Gravity: 1.02. C. Solids Concentration: 0.5 to 2 percent. d. Temperature Range: 55 to 70degrees F. 2. Number of Units: 5. 3. Location: Primary Sludge Pump Station. 4. Service: Municipal Primary Sludge. 5. Pump Equipment Tag Numbers: a. PMP-3300-02. b. PMP-3300-03. c. PMP-3300-04. d. PMP-3300-05. e. PMP-3300-06. 6. Configuration: Horizontal. 7. Type of Drive: Belt, Eddy Current Drive. 8. Design Point 1 (Rated) Flow Rate: 660 gpm. 9. Design Point 1 (Rated) Flow Total Dynamic Head: 91 feet. 10. Design Point 1 (Rated) Flow Minimum Efficiency: 45 percent. 11. Design Point 1 (Rated) Flow Max Operating Speed: 1,800 rpm. 12. Design Point 2 Flow Rate: 685 gpm 13. Design Point 2 Total Dynamic Head: 77 feet 14. Design Point 3 Flow Rate: 734 gpm. 15. Design Point 3 Flow Total Dynamic Head: 60 feet. 16. Design Point 4 Flow Rate: 141 gpm. 17. Design Point 4 Flow Total Dynamic Head: 15 feet. 18. Shutoff Head: 100 feet. 19. Max Motor Operating Speed: 1800 rpm. 20. Motor Rated Power: 50 hp. 21. Suction Connection Size: Max 8 inches, Min 4 inches 22. Discharge Connection Size: Max 6 inches, Min 4 inches 23. Maximum NPSH Required at Maximum Flow: 20 feet. 24. Minimum NPSH Available at Maximum Flow: 38 feet. Freese and Nichols VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 June 2024 Issued for Bid 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 1 of 20 SECTION 43 23 57 - PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Progressing cavity pumping system, including, but not limited to, pumps, motors and starters, vibration and temperature monitoring. 2. Supervisory services during installation and field testing of each unit and instructing the regular operating personnel in the proper care, operation and maintenance of the equipment. B. Application: 1. Pumping units are progressing cavity positive displacement, self -priming type. 2. Pumping units pump primary scum from primary clarifier scum pump station wet wells to scum holding tanks. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for fasteners, brackets, and other miscellaneous metal fabrications as required by this Section. 2. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" 3. Section 26 05 19 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" 4. Section 26 25 05 "480V Control Panels". 5. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for electric motors and accessories normally supplied as part of equipment assemblies. 6. Section 40 61 00 "Process Control and Enterprise Management Systems General Provisions" 7. Section 40 6121.20 "Process Control System Testing." 8. Section 40 6196 "Process Control Descriptions." 9. Section 46 24 23 "Inline Grinder" 10. Section 46 4121.31 "Jet Mixing Equipment - Wastewater" 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. AESS: Applications Engineering System Supplier; refer to Section 40 61 00 for additional information. B. Failsafe: Normally closed contacts that open on alarm condition. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 1.4 1.5 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 2 of 20 C. I/O: Input/Output (signals). D. LCP: Local Control Panel. E. PCSS: Process Control System Supplier. Refer to Section 40 6100 for additional information. F. P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram. G. Unit Responsibility: Sole responsibility for all components necessary to provide a complete and operable pumping system. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation and startup of Work of this Section with Owner's operations as shown on Drawings and in accordance with Division 01 Specifications. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. If manufacturing techniques differ, completely describe all aspects that do not conform to specifications. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature, which may include drawings, describing the equipment in sufficient detail, including materials of construction, to indicate full conformance with the specifications. 1. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. Equipment total weight, including weight of single largest item. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Certified shop and erection drawing showing parts arrangement, details and materials of construction and dimensions. 2. Complete Bill of Materials, establishing compliance with this Section. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump: a. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves covering full range available. b. Guaranteed performance curves, based on actual shop tests on similar units, showing the specified requirements for capacity, discharge pressure, speed, and brake horsepower. 1) Plot curves on 8 '/2-in by 11-in sheets at as large a scale as practical. 2) For variable speed pumps, submit catalog performance curves showing maximum and minimum recommended speeds for specified operating conditions and service. 4. Equipment base drawing and Anchorage Design: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 3 of 20 a. Indicate size and location of bolt holes for anchorage plus details of anchorage of equipment to foundation including anchor bolt type, size, materials, embedment depth, and minimum edge distance. b. Provide certified anchor bolt calculations. C. Summary of external weight and thrust loads applied to the supporting structure. d. Summary of maximum vertical and horizontal reactions at each anchor bolt considering all applicable loads and load combinations. e. Submit manufacturer's specification and data including recommended design values and physical characteristics for the selected anchors to the concrete foundation. 5. Description of gear reducer performance rating. 6. Description of painting and protective coatings. 7. Complete master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics, including coordination with electrical equipment and control devices, and suitable outline drawings showing such details as are necessary to locate conduit stub -ups and field wiring. 8. Data for electric motors in accordance with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Certify bearing life. 3. Certify setting plan, with details of anchorage. B. Manufacturer Instructions: 1. Storage and handling instructions. 2. Installation instructions, including anchoring layout and details. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: 1. Certified results of hydrostatic testing. 2. Shop testing procedures, pump and piping set up, equipment to be used and testing tolerances. Shop performance curves plotted at maximum size possible on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets. 3. Mill certificates confirming hardness of rotors and stators. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: 1. Field testing procedures, equipment to be used, and testing tolerances. 2. Field testing results. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 1.7 1.8 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 4 of 20 E. Manufacturer Reports: Certificate from manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed according to manufacturer's instructions and is ready for startup and testing. F. Qualifications Statement: Manufacturer Qualifications, as required by Article Quality Assurance. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Comply with Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 2. Provide an Operating and Maintenance Manual for the equipment specified herein, specifically prepared for this installation and including required drawings, equipment and materials information, descriptions, complete bill of materials, etc., as required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. B. Warranty Documentation: Submit warranty complying with requirements herein and Section 01 77 19 "Closeout Requirements." C. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit Project Record Documents recording actual locations and final orientation of all equipment and accessories. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Recommended Spare Parts List: 1. Include gaskets, packing, and related materials. 2. List all bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 3. Include Manufacturer's current price for each item; pricing to remain in effect for not less than one year after final acceptance. B. Provide spare parts and any special tools according to Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." C. Provide one set per pump of the following: 1. One mechanical seal cartridge kit and throat bushing. 2. One complete set of gaskets, "O"-rings, etc. 3. One rotor and one stator for each pump size furnished. 4. One set of shaft universal joints for each pump size furnished. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 5 of 20 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish progressive cavity pumps, all appurtenances and controls from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of this type of equipment for wastewater treatment. B. Equipment specified in this Section is to be furnished by a manufacturer of progressive cavity pumps who has sole responsibility for designing and furnishing the parts and components required for a complete and operable system. Factory assemble the progressive cavity pumps, base, coupling and accessories as a single coordinated unit on a common base. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. 2. Minimum of ten operating installations with pumps in North America of the same size or larger and in the same service as specified herein, which have been operating for at least ten years. D. Conform to applicable Standards of the Hydraulic Institute for Rotary Pumps: ANSUHI 3.1-3.5. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in Manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. As necessary, provide inspection report to Manufacturer identifying any damage and rework necessary prior to installation. B. Storage: Store pumps and all appurtenances according to Manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not disassemble factory assembled parts and components for shipment unless written permission received from Engineer. D. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Protect unpainted finished iron and steel surfaces to prevent rust and corrosion. 4. Protect finished surfaces of exposed flanges with wood or equivalent blank flanges. 5. Protect bearings against formation of rust in accordance with bearing manufacturer's recommendations. Apply lubricant or corrosion inhibiting treatment during transportation, storage, handling, installation, and lapse of time prior to start-up. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 6 of 20 Intermittently manually rotate equipment prior to start-up to ensure distribution of lubricant/protection. 1.12 SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient temperature range: 0 to 120 degrees F. B. Field Measurements: as applicable confirm field measurements and interferences prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Furnish Two-year manufacturer's warranty for progressing cavity pumps. Warranty to begin from the date of Final Acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in the following paragraph. B. Manufacturer List: 1. Moyno. 2. Seepex. 3. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00) PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Performance: 1. Pumps of same service type identical in every respect with parts interchangeable. 2. Design each pump for design conditions listed herein. 3. Design each pump for continuous service. 4. Operate through the specified range within the vibration limitations specified in HI standards. 5. Completely self -priming. B. Design Criteria: 1. Pump Equipment Tag Numbers: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 2.3 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 7 of 20 a. Scum Pump Station No. 1: 1) Scum Pump No. 1: PMP-3200-01. 2) Scum Pump No.2: PMP-3200-02. b. Scum Pump Station No.2: 1) Scum Pump No.3: PMP-3200-03. 2) Scum Pump No.4: PMP-3200-04. 2. Pumped Fluid: a. Primary Scum. b. Specific Gravity: 1.0. C. Solids Concentration: 3 percent. d. Viscosity: Typical viscosities for sewage scum rheology with up to 3 percent solids. e. Temperature Range: 40 to 105 degrees F. 3. Number of Units: a. Scum Pump Station No. 1: Duty: One; Standby: One. Alternate duty b. Scum Pump Station No.2: Duty: One/Standby: One. Alternate duty 4. Location: Scum pump stations No. 1 and No. 2. 5. Configuration: Horizontal pump with horizontal motor. 6. Type of Drive: Belt and Reducer combination, constant speed. 7. Design Flow Rate: 120 gpm (Min), 150 gpm (Max). 8. Design Pressure: 150 ft H2O. 9. Motor Speed: 1750 rpm. 10. Maximum Motor Operating Speed: 170 rpm. 11. Maximum Motor Rated Power: 15 hp. 12. Maximum Suction Connection Size: 8 inches. 13. Maximum Discharge Connection Size: 8 inches. DRIVER AND CONTROLS 1. Comply with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment." 2. Pump power not exceeding motor nameplate rating at 1.0 service factor at any point on pump characteristic curve. 3. Power Data: a. Horsepower: 15 HP. b. 460 Volt, three phase, 60 Hz. C. Constant speed. d. Service Factor: 1.15 (constant speed). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 8 of 20 e. Starting Method: Full Voltage. 4. Environmental Data: a. Load type: Constant Torque. b. Continuous duty, 50 degrees C ambient. C. Space Classification: Unclassified. d. Moist and corrosive environment exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in wastewater treatment plants. 5. Physical Data: a. Construction and nameplate: comply with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment." b. Orientation: Horizontal. C. Solid Shaft. d. Speed: 1750 RPM. e. Enclosure: Outdoor damp/wet/corrosive area rated TENV. f. Severe duty. g. Premium Efficiency. h. Temporary submergence rated. 1. Space heater. j. VPI coatings on windings. k. Class F insulation Class B temp (50C) rise. 6. Features and Accessories: a. Winding Temperature Protection: Bi-metallic Winding Temperature Switches. Refer to pump accessories for pump stator temperature protection. B. Fixed Ratio Belt Drive: 1. Manufacturer List: a. Dodge Division of ABB Motors and Mechanical Inc. b. T. B. Woods Inc. C. Gates Corp. 2. Multi V-Belt drive. 3. Horsepower rating of V-Belt drive to equal or exceed motor nameplate horsepower with 1.5 service factor. 4. V-Belts heavy duty, oil and heat resistant, static conducting, minimum life rating of 8000 hours. 5. Sheaves of high -tensile close -grained cast iron. 6. Sheaves keyed and locked to the respective shafts or taper locking wedge bushings. 7. OSHA -compliant fabricated steel or expanded metal belt guard, hot dip galvanized or bake -on coated after fabrication. 8. Adjustable motor/gearbox mount to adjust belt tension. 9. Manufacturer shall provide the belt and sheave assembly that are designed to accept future sheaves and belt to reduce the flow rate to 120 gpm as needed by Owner. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 9 of 20 C. Gear Reducer: 1. Manufacturer List: a. Nord. b. Sew Eurodrive. C. Siemens. 2. Parallel in -line helical reducer. 3. Service factor of 1.5 for over 10-hour daily operation/continuous duty. 4. Comply with AGMA 6001, Class II. 5. Minimum Efficiency: 95 percent. 6. Submergence rated. 7. Bearings: a. Type: Ball, ABMA 9 or Roller, ABMA 11. 8. Minimum ABMA L-10 Life: 100,000 hours. 9. Motor Coupling: a. Description: Stainless Steel, lubricated, removable. b. Guard: Stainless steel. Comply with OSHA. 10. Motor and Reducer Base: Stainless steel elevated base designed for the motor, and drive reducer static and dynamic loading. D. Control Panel: 1. Factory mounted. 2. Enclosure: Type 316 Stainless steel. 3. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 4. Single -point power connection and grounding lug. 5. Main circuit breaker disconnects with a flange mounted operating handle. 6. Transformer for 120 Volt control power. 7. Full voltage reversing combination magnetic motor starter Scum Pumps. 8. Breather assemblies. 9. Space heater. 10. Refer to Control Panel Section 26 25 05 "480V Control Panels". E. Controls: 1. General: a. One (1) Local Control Panel (LCP) to be dedicated to each Scum Pump Station No.1 and 2. b. Panel Construction: Each panel to be provided by Division 26, "Electrical", supplier and conform to general requirements found in those sections and related requirements as seen in Section 1.1.C. C. Location: As shown in the contract drawings. d. Control Panel Tag Numbers: 1) LCP-3200-01 2) LCP-3200-02 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 10 of 20 e. Space Classification: In accordance with general sheets of the contract drawings. £ Cable and Conduit Entry: As shown in electrical drawings. 2. System Description: a. The progressive cavity pump control panel to control the operation of the complete scum pumping system at each Scum Pump Station No. 1 and 2. The system consists of in -line grinder, seal water flush system, level and pressure instrumentation, recirculation mixing system, and associated valves and actuators. 1) The pumping system cycle to start upon sensing wetwell level high signal from the radar level transmitter or the backup float switches. The first step in the sequence is the recirculation mixing system. The pumps to stop at the end of the pumping cycle upon sensing wetwell level low signal or float switch. 2) A hardwired -interlock to be provided for the in -line grinder on -status at the pump local control panel. When the grinder is taken offline for maintenance an over -ride to be utilized in pump local/manual mode for pump operation. 3) The grinders will be controlled primarily from the grinder control panel and have a hardwired interlock to start and stop when its associated pump is running or stopped. 4) An operator adjustable timer to be set for the pump seal water solenoid valve to energize before the pump startup occurs. The pumps to start once the solenoid valve is energized open. Seal water solenoid valve to remain energized open while pumps are on and de -energize closed when an operator adjustable timer elapse after the pumps have stopped. In the event the solenoid valve is not functional a manual over -ride of the solenoid valve to occur (Owner will use the bypass until solenoid valve is replaced). 5) The pumps to operate in an alternate duty and standby configuration in the forward pumping mode. Both pumps to operate simultaneously in the recirculation mixing mode to meet additional flow requirements for mixing. Each pump to have its own pump operating status and fault indications at the control panel. 6) In remote control at the pump local control panel, after grinders are confirmed on, the pump control panel to open the electric valve actuator on the recirculation line to run the wetwell mixing system. The duration of mixing to be set with an operator adjustable timer. After the mixing timer has elapsed, pump control panel to turn off one of the scum pumps and the recirculation valve actuator, and simultaneously begin to open the discharge valve electric actuator; If the valve actuators do not reach their open or close limits (within the pre-set timer) then a fault to be indicated at local panel and common fault relayed to SCADA. 7) The low-pressure switch on the suction pipe, high-pressure switch on the discharge pipe, seal water flush flow switches, and the individual pump stator & motor temperature switches to operate as hardwired interlocks with the pump control panel to stop both pumps (during mixing mode) and a 2a pump (during forward pumping mode) upon being tripped. When a pump is stopped due to interlock in the forward pumping mode the standby pump to automatically start to complete the pumping cycle until the wetwell is drawn down. The common fault alarm shall be sent to SCADA in either case. 8) The local control panel to be designed to enable indication of run and fault status of every component equipment to enable Owner to identify the CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 2.4 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 11 of 20 function and issues in the system. The run status and fault indicators from each individual valve actuator (two, 1 recirculation valve and 1 discharge valve), and each pump (two, Pump Tag 1 and 2) shall be individually included at the control panel. Pump fault indications to include high and low pressure, high motor temperature and stator TSE temperature alarm/trips, and over -torque faults. Pump may be reversed to troubleshoot clogging strictly in local manual mode (anti -reversal will need to be disabled). 9) Local control panel to allow all faults to be reset manually. b. Refer to control logic in Section 40 61 96 "Process Control Descriptions" for complete control description and coordination with plant control system Refer to the P&IDs for 1/0 signals to plant control system. Ia ►11SIIZ419W.91IRlllomIMel A. General: 1. Forward and reverse rotation capabilities. 2. Pump with base, motor and shaft coupling fully factory assembled and delivered to the project site ready for installation. 3. Provide stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, rated capacity, speed and other pertinent data permanently attached to each pump. 4. Provide lifting lugs on all major equipment/components. 5. All pump components are interchangeable in pumps of same size. 6. Provide access for maintenance of all pump components. B. Pump Body: 1. Designed for the type of service specified. 2. Sufficient strength, weight, and metal thickness to ensure long life, accurate alignment, and reliable operation. 3. Furnish a top inspection cover. The cover to be integral to the design and to allow inspection of rotor joint and clean out of the suction body. No more than five bolts shall be used to attach the cover. 4. Furnish two square handhole side plates for inspection of the rear drive shaft joint and mechanical seal and servicing of pump. Located on each side of the pump, 180 degrees apart. 5. Furnish threaded connections of the suction side and discharge side for vents and gauges with plugs. Connections to be integral to the casing. Discharge flange to have a vent/gauge connection capable of 360-degree rotation in 90 degrees increments. 6. Furnish threaded drain connections with plugs. Connection to be integral to the casing. A drain port to be at the lowest level of the suction body. 7. Furnish support feet on either end of the suction body. Feet to be independent of the rotor/stator discharge flange. 8. Furnish discharge support feet. Feet to be separate from the discharge flange. 9. End Connections: Flanged, 150 lb ANSI B 16.1. 10. Suction flange capable of 360-degree rotation in 90 degrees increments. 11. Material: Close Grain Cast Iron, ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30 or higher. 12. Surface preparation, minimum: SSPC-SP 10 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 12 of 20 C. Rotor: 1. Convoluted design. 2. Ceramic coatings not acceptable due to ease at which this coating will crack and the lack of diffusion into the rotor base metal. 3. Removal of the rotor shall not require disconnection of the suction or discharge piping. Pump shall be full service in place. Deviations or special adaptors not acceptable. 4. Furnish an extra quarter stage on both ends of the rotor and stator to increase the sealing length and reduce slip. 5. Material: High -carbon, hard high -chrome tool steel chrome plated with minimum Brinell hardness of 550 or 1 percent aluminum nitriding steel hardened to excess of Rockwell 70C. D. Stator: 1. Convoluted design. 2. Seal: Integral to the stator sleeve at the suction and discharge to prevent leakage. 3. Separate o-rings or flat rings for stator sealing not required. 4. Stator designs that limit nominal pump pressure capability to less than 90 psi per stage not acceptable. 5. Removal of the stator shall not require disconnection of the suction or discharge piping. Pump shall be full service in place. Deviations or special adaptors not acceptable. 6. List all pump applications included in this Section and specify required material of construction. 7. Material: Buna-N synthetic rubber with a minimum shore durometer hardness of 60 bonded to carbon -steel tube. E. Universal Joint: 1. Type 1: Pin Joint. a. Material: High-speed drill bit steel, air hardened to 60-65 HRc. b. Positively sealed with Type 316 stainless steel hose clamps. C. Grease lubricated with a high temperature (450 degrees F). d. PTFE filled synthetic grease. e. Covered with an elastomeric sleeve. f. Stainless steel shell protecting the elastomer sleeve. 2. Type 2: Double sealed gear Joint. a. Material: Chrome alloy tool steel. b. Precision machined crowned joint. C. Sealed steel shell protecting joint against the entrance of dirt, sludge, and other foreign objects. F. Shaft: 1. Material: High -alloy, stainless steel, chrome plated. 2. Design: Solid. 3. Maximum shaft deflection under normal operating conditions not exceeding 0.002-inch. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 2.5 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 13 of 20 4. Sleeves: a. Removable. b. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. G. Pump Bearings: 1. Permanently lubricated. 2. Minimum L-10 Life: 100,000 hours at specified operating conditions. 3. Type: Ball, ABMA 9. or Roller, ABMA 11. H. Seals: 1. Type: Double Mechanical. 2. Furnish flushing water connection. 3. Seal Faces: Tungsten Carbide. 4. Seal Metal Parts: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Piping, Valves, and Accessories: Provide in conjunction with Contractor a complete seal water flush system including Type 316 Stainless Steel piping (to pumps and from pumps to drain), pressure regulator, flow regulating globe valves, stainless steel ball isolation valves, bypass valves, flow switches, stainless steel solenoid valves (ASCO), stainless wye-strainer (60 mesh). I. Pump Base: 1. Mount pump and motor assembly on a base of stainless steel to support all weight and operating loads of pump and motor. 2. Machine finish all pump, motor, and base mating surfaces. 3. Provide drip rim and drain connection. 4. Provide for grouting of pump base to foundation. 5. Anchorage: a. Provide all foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and setting templates required for installation. b. Anchors: Type 316 stainless steel with silicon bronze or Monel nuts, conforming to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." Factory Coatings: 1. Prepare and shop prime all equipment surfaces in accordance with 3. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". 2. Apply rust preventative compound to all machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces not to be painted. 3. Provide finish coatings in accordance with Section 09 96 76.23. ACCESSORIES A. Anti -Reversal Holdback: Each pump gearbox shall be equipped with a differential friction type holdback designed to prevent reversal of flow when the pump is not in operation. Unless otherwise specified, the holdback shall act directly on the pump shaft and shall be equipped CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 2.6 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 14 of 20 with a housing to protect the unit against the entrance of dust, dirt, and moisture. Anti -reversal holdbacks shall be adequately sized for the specified service. Shaft extensions shall be provided where required. 1. Where a gear reducer is direct connected, the holdback shall be incorporated into the gearbox. 2. In lieu of friction type holdbacks, each pump may be provided with electric brake motors to prevent anti -rotation of the pump. Brake shall release when motor starts and shall engage when motor shuts down or on power failure. B. Dry Run Protection/Pump Stator Temperature: 1. A pump dry run protection system shall monitor the stator temperature using a temperature sensor, and initiate shutdown through the use of a temperature safety element (TSE). Pump shutdown shall be initiated when the stator's temperature reaches the manufacturer's programmed set point level in the TSE. Include local reset function. 2. Provide a stator temperature sensor with sensor sleeve, and TSE to be field mounted on the pump control panel. Terminate wiring at the temperature sensor and at the TSE locations. The temperature alarm/trip setting shall be field verified to respond to actual field conditions. The TSE shall utilize the supplied 120 VAC source. The alarm/trip signal shall be a contact closure available to alarm/trip the remote soft starter at pump control panel. When the pump is running under low flow or dry conditions, the high stator temperature detected by temperature sensor and TSE will initiate pump shutdown via an soft starter hardwired interlock. Dry run high temperature alarm will be generated at the plant SCADA system. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Notify Owner and Engineer at least fourteen days before inspections and tests are scheduled. C. Shop Test: 1. Witnessing of shop test is not required. Complete unwitnessed testing reports shall be submitted. 2. Driver: Job Motor. 3. Perform shop test of each pump to be furnished under this Section in accordance with ANSI/HI 3.6, American National Standard for Rotary Pump Tests. Testing to include Performance Test to Type IV, Acceptance Level A, and Hydrostatic Test. 4. Submit certified test results including pump performance curves showing pump inlet and outlet pressure, rate of flow, pump speed, noise dB at full load, vibration, pump input power and total input power. D. Motor shop testing in accordance with Section 40 05 93.23 "Low Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 15 of 20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify that items provided by other Sections of Work are ready to receive Work of this Section. B. Verify layout, orientation and connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. Install pumping units as shown and according to Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pumping units on concrete foundation to elevation to align with piping as shown. C. Equipment base anchorage: 1. Rigidly and accurately anchor equipment base into position on concrete foundation with post -installed adhesive anchors. 2. Use expansive, non -shrink low exothermic epoxy grout, Five Star DP Epoxy Grout or approved equal (submit substitution request), mixed and applied according to manufacturer's directions. 3. Remove or back down jacking nuts prior to placing grout. 4. Protect all bolt threads during placement of grout. 5. Fill space between anchor bolts and bolt sleeves with expanding urethane foam. D. Interface with Other Work: 1. Connect piping to assure that piping accurately aligns with pump flanges and imposes no external loading on the pump. 2. Provide and connect power and control conduit and wiring to make system operational and ready for startup. 3. Complete all control interfaces including I/O signals and network connections to plant control system with the PCSS and AESS. 4. Complete all hardwired and software interlocks associated with the system. E. Provide lubricants in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to system startup, submit installation documentation from equipment Manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 16 of 20 3.4 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Prior to operating system or components, perform the following: 1. Check pump and motor alignment. 2. Check for proper motor rotation. 3. Check pump and drive units for proper lubrication. 4. Flush pump and piping with clean water. 5. Hydrostatically test system piping. 6. Test all control interfaces. 7. Test all hardwired and software interlocks associated with the system. 8. Complete point to point I/O check. 9. Calibrate and test all instrument functions and settings. 10. Supply power necessary to complete the field tests via Project -installed power supply system or alternative sources provided by Contractor. B. Startup and Performance Testing: 1. Complete tests as necessary to confirm that pump operation and performance conforms to the requirements of this Section. 2. Place pumps into operation, making all necessary adjustments. 3. Respond to network communication/configuration, programming, or signal problems between the plant control system and vendor equipment. 4. Utilizing process fluid, operate each pump for a minimum of 2 hours. 5. Record operating performance data at 15 minute intervals while operating at the full range of speed in 25 rpm increments. Utilize approved field test data log sheets. Record the following: a. Pump speed. b. Discharge capacity. C. Discharge pressure. d. Motor power input. 6. Check pump stator and motor for high bearing temperature and excessive noise or vibration according to manufacturer instructions and HI Standards. Check for motor overload by taking ampere readings. 7. Under direction of manufacturer's representative, adjust, repair, modify, or replace system components that fail to perform as specified and rerun tests. 8. Submit written report tabulating equipment tested, test results, problems encountered, and corrective action taken within two weeks after test completion. C. Long Term Performance Testing: 1. Utilizing process fluid, operate each pump for a total period of 24 hours at the maximum speed and pump capacity, and no less than eight hours at minimum speed and pump capacity. 2. Confirm that each pump operates without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 17 of 20 3.5 MANUFACTURER SERVICES: A. Related Requirements: B. Manufacturer's technical representative is required to attend the submittal kick-off workshop. C. Provide the services of a factory -certified service engineer who has complete knowledge of proper installation, startup, testing, operation, and maintenance of specified equipment. Submit qualifications of service representative for approval who is a direct, full-time employee of the manufacturer. D. The grinder and scum pumps will operate in tandems. Coordinate with manufacturers of the scum pumps specified in Section 46 23 57 "Progressive cavity pumps", primary sludge pumps specified in Section 432335 "Recessed Impeller Pumps" and grinders to have their factory representatives on site at the same time during pump station start up and testing. E. Manufacturer shall advice, consult, and instruct the Contractor on: 1. Installation procedures and adjustments and inspect the equipment during installation as a condition of acceptance of the work. 2. Startup and testing of the finished installation. F. Provide classroom training and hand -on demonstrations. 1. Develop and submit to Engineer and Owner a training lesson plan. Submit proposed lesson plans for scheduled instruction 30 days prior to the commencement of training. Lesson plans will be approved by the Engineer a minimum of seven days prior to scheduled instruction. 2. Lesson Plans: Detail specific instruction topics. Where applicable, reference and attach training aids to be utilized in the instruction. Describe "Hands-on" demonstrations planned for the instruction, including estimated duration for each training segment. G. Provide Owner's training including operational and maintenance instruction to two separate operational and maintenance teams over two separate time periods. Give training at times convenient to operational or maintenance teams being trained in coordination with the Owner. Accordingly, some training may be conducted during hours outside a normal Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. workday. Provide operational personnel two sessions of training, 8 hours each. Provide maintenance personnels two sessions of training, 8 hours each. Include following operational training as a minimum: a. Theory of operation. b. Process flow description. C. Unit capacity and design criteria. d. Operational troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. e. Step-by-step startup and shutdown procedures. f. System operation and optimization practices. g. Local control set point modification procedures. 2. Minimum maintenance training topics: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 18 of 20 a. Step -by step, "hands-on" assembly and disassembly procedural instructions. b. Replacement part identification and ordering procedures. C. Lubrication procedures, including drain -down and refill procedures. d. Recommended routine maintenance procedures. e. Troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures. H. Man-hour requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the manufacturer of the obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. Manufacturer's factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation, testing and initial operation of the equipment. Minimum time on site per trip based on 8-hour working days. The number of hours and trips specified reflects the minimum requirement, additional hours and trips shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer to ensure a complete and functional system that is satisfactory to the owner. Supervise Installation: a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip - 1. b. Manufacturer shall be on site to supervise the contractor's work during installation of these pumps. 2. Inspect, Supervise Initial Adjustment and Approve Installation: a. Trips - 8 Hours/Trip — 2. b. Inspect grouting, location of anchor bolts, setting, leveling, alignment, field erection, coordination of piping, electrical and miscellaneous utility connections. C. Manufacturer's factory representative shall submit to the Engineer a written certification that the system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper startup and O&M: a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip — 1. b. Instruction may be given upon completion of Item 2, provided that the O&M manuals have been submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. 4. Supervise Startup and Assist in Testing: a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip — 2. b. Place equipment into operation and make necessary adjustments. C. Complete functional and performance testing. d. May be done upon completion of Item 3 if acceptable to the Engineer. The time required for performance testing is in addition to the above specified hours. 5. Service Inspection: a. 2 days. b. During the first year of operation, provide additional Service Inspection at Owner's request, exclusive of repair, malfunction, or other trouble shooting service calls. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 19 of 20 END OF SECTION 43 23 57 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 23 57 PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS Page 20 of 20 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page I of 26 SECTION 43 4163 - WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANK (BID ALTERNATE 713) BID ALTERNATE 713 - NOT SELECTED PART 1 - GENERAL f0�C.141UkUINo11D16140JUlg1\U11.`! A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals required to design, construct, test, and disinfect 190-foot diameter circular precast wire wrapped prestressed concrete clarifier tank(s) with side water depth and sloped bottom, complete, in accordance with AWWA D 110, Type III, as shown on the Drawings, and as specified. 2. Furnish and install all piping and fittings to the limits as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 3. All pipe supports and grout pads for piping attached to the tank. 4. All ladders, guardrails, stairs and other accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 5. Delegated design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Sections 01 33 00 "Submittals" and 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for Delegated Design Services. 2. Excavation, dewatering, and backfill are included in Division 31. 3. Waterproofing, dampproofing and caulking are included in Division 07. 4. Pipe, valves, and fittings are included in Division 40. 5. Clarifier equipment, launder covers and other wastewater equipment are included in Division 46. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" specifies requirements for coordination. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 2 of 26 Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following: a. Condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Structural load limitations. C. Hung loads from tanks. d. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials and erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. e. Required tests, inspections, and certifications. f. Unfavorable weather and forecasted weather conditions and impact on construction schedule. g. Special Inspection requirements. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's information, specifications, and installation instructions for the tank appurtenances. This submittal will be reviewed for operational requirements only. Appurtenances include the following: 1. Inlet, outlet, overflow, subdrains and drainpipes. 2. Ladders and railings. 3. Pressure relief valves. B. Construction Submittals for Review Prior to Use: 1. Design proportions for all concrete and shotcrete. Concrete strengths of trial mixes. 2. Admixtures to be used in the concrete and shotcrete, their purpose and Safety Data Sheets (SDSs). 3. Reinforcing steel shop drawings showing fabrication and placement. Include manufacturer's information and ASTM certifications. 4. Mortar fill and non -shrink grout materials, including manufacturer's information, compressive strength and ASTM certifications. 5. Steel diaphragm materials including cut sheets indicating dimensions, gauge and form. Include certified copies of mill tests and ASTM certifications. 6. Prestressing steel including the following: a. Manufacturer's information, tensile strength and ASTM certifications. b. Certified copy of mill test on each heat or reel of prestressing wire showing physical and chemical analysis must be submitted at the time of shipment of prestressing wire as Record Data. C. Methods and procedures for prestressing prior to operation. 7. Elastomeric materials including manufacturer's information and ASTM certifications. 8. Sealants and joint fillers including manufacturer's information and ASTM certifications. 9. Catalog cuts or shop drawings of all appurtenances, i.e., hatch, vent, ladders, waterstops. Include manufacturer's information, ASTM certifications, drawings, materials utilized, etc. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 3 of 26 10. Painting and coating submittals to be provided within two weeks of the Notice to Proceed. Include manufacturer's information, application data for coatings, SDSs for coatings, color and selection charts for coatings. C. Certifications: American Iron and Steel (AIS): Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Design Data: 1. Analysis data documenting compliance with design data. 2. Upon the completion of the construction of the tank(s), provide a separate submittal of the design calculations of the "as -built tank(s)" for the Project Records only. The calculations will not be reviewed by the Engineer. Calculations submitted prior to tank construction will be returned for re -submittal upon completion of construction. 3. Certification from the tank manufacturer's geotechnical engineer stating that the submitted foundation design is appropriate based on observed subsurface conditions. If deemed necessary by the tank manufacturer's geotechnical engineer, additional geotechnical subsurface investigation shall be performed at no cost to the Owner and findings submitted to the Engineer. B. Shop Drawings: Detailed erection shop drawings and construction procedures. 2. Provide complete details for the foundation, floor slab, walls, piping, and all other details and accessories necessary to build the tanks. 3. The submittal will be reviewed for operational requirements only and will be used in the field by the Owner's representative during construction. The Engineer's general review and approval shall not relieve the tank manufacturer of their design responsibility. 4. Include the following as part of a single submittal: a. Design calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas. b. Design drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas. C. Delegated design professional to provide necessary additional special tests and inspection requirements covering the work of their submittal. Identify items that exceed minimum Codes or that necessitate inspections not already identified in Contract Documents. D. Certification: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 4 of 26 1. The tank manufacturer's delegated design engineer responsible for the design and construction of the prestressed concrete tank(s). Submit written certification that the design, details, and construction conform to the requirements of AWWA D110, this Section, and applicable Codes. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Statement of Qualification 1. Submit experience record in the design and construction of wire wrapped prestressed concrete tanks as specified. 2. Submit experience record in shotcrete work of each nozzleman and foreman to be employed on the project as specified. B. Test and Evaluation Reports: 1. Performance data for all approved concrete and shotcrete mix designs. 2. Estimate maximum chloride ion content in the hardened concrete and shotcrete in contact with reinforcing. Maximum chloride ion content shall not exceed that allowed by ACI 350. Perform all tests as required for estimating chloride content, but not less than: a. Mix water tested in accordance with ASTM C1602, Table 2, regardless of whether water is potable or not. b. All aggregates tested in accordance with ASTM C 1524. 3. Performance data for concrete, flowable fill and shotcrete placed during construction. Compressive strength reports shall be provided to the Owner within 7 days of test. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Indicate results of shop and/or factory tests and inspections. D. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer, fabricator, applicator, installer, erector, and licensed professional. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator, fabricator and installer. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit a full set of signed and sealed drawings in PDF format with all changes made during construction identified and incorporated. 2. Submit signed and sealed calculations for final, as -built tank(s). 3. Post -construction foundation survey. 4. Results of watertightness testing of tank(s) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 5 of 26 B. Closeout submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0177 19, "Closeout Requirements". 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The tank manufacturer must be a specialist in the design and construction of circular, precast, wire wound prestressed, AWWA D110 Type III concrete tanks and must have constructed a minimum of thirty tanks of similar size as specified in this Project or larger, which have been in successful service for a minimum of 5 years. B. Singular Responsibility: It is the intent of this Section to require single party responsibility for the design and the construction of the precast wire -wound prestressed concrete tanks. The tank design and construction to be performed by an established Tank Contractor of recognized ability, having at least ten years of experience in the design and construction of tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III wire wound prestressed concrete core wall as specified. The design and construction of all aspects, including but not limited to the foundation, floor slab, wall, prestressing, and shotcrete of the wire or strand wound circular prestressed tank is the sole responsibility of the tank manufacturer. C. The Tank Contractor to have in its employ a design professional engineer with a minimum of ten years' experience in the design of AWWA D110, Type III tanks, and registered in the state the tank is to be constructed. The design engineer to have been the engineer of record for a minimum of ten tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III core wall. D. The Tank Contractor to have in its employ for this project a team consisting of a tank superintendent, project manager, certified shotcrete foreman, prestressing foreman, and precast erection foreman, each of whom have constructed a minimum of five tanks with an AWWA D110 Type III core wall and a capacity of not less than 75 percent nor more than 150 percent of the diameter and capacity of the proposed tank. E. The Tank Contractor's construction superintendent to have a minimum of four years of experience with prestressed concrete tanks of similar design. The tank manufacturer must furnish a superintendent on the Site at all times during construction of the tank work. Tank manufacturer may designate a subcontractor's superintendent during the Work described in Paragraph 1.0l.G.1. Tank manufacturer must submit proposed designated superintendent to the Engineer in writing with a resume indicating experience in excavation and foundation work F. Perform Work according to City of Fort Worth, Texas standards. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 6 of 26 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in tank design and construction specified in this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience in the design and construction of wire wrapped circular prestressed, AWWA D110, Type III concrete tanks and must have constructed a minimum of thirty tanks of similar size of those specified in the Project or larger, which have been in successful service for a minimum of five years. B. The design and construction of all aspects of the floor slab, walls, prestressing, and shortcrete of the wire -wound circular prestressed concrete tank to be performed by the tank manufacturer and not be subcontracted or otherwise assigned. C. All excavation, backfill, grading and concrete work to be under the supervision and responsibility of the tank manufacturer, including the base slab and foundation. The manufacturer shall have designed and constructed at least 10 wire -wrapped prestressed concrete tanks conforming to AWWA D110 with Type III core wall(s) that have been put into service within the last 10 years. The tanks to have a diameter and capacity of not less than 75 percent nor more than 150 percent of the diameter and capacity of the proposed tank. D. Foreman supervising the placing of the shotcrete to have a minimum of 3 years' experience as a nozzleman. Each shotcrete nozzleman to have a minimum of 2 years' experience on similar applications and be able to demonstrate by tests, if required, his/her ability to satisfactorily gun shotcrete of the required quality. E. Delegated Design Engineer: Delegated Design Engineer to have a minimum of 10 years' experience in design of specified Work and licensed in State of Texas. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements" specifies requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. 1.13 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Subsurface and Physical Conditions: The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site of Work: 1. Geotechnical Report: Prepared by CDM Smith, Inc., dated March 29, 2024. (Project Number: 0515-267161) CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 7 of 26 a. The technical data contained in the report upon which the Contractor may rely is subsurface data. Contractor recognizes that the technical data listed reflects only the conditions for the day the data was collected and reflects only conditions existing at the exact location of samples. b. Copies of geotechnical data are included in the Appendix to specifications. This data is not part of the Contract Documents. Tank manufacturer is not entitled to rely upon other information and data utilized by Engineer and Engineer's Consultants in preparation of the Contract Documents 2. No additional geotechnical information will be provided by the Owner or Engineer. It will be the complete responsibility of the tank manufacturer to satisfy itself of the geotechnical conditions at the proposed tank site. If the tank manufacturer deems it necessary for additional geotechnical investigations and analysis, such investigations and analysis must be provided by the tank manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner and no additional time will be added to the contract for such investigations. All changes to the tank manufacturer's design based on any additional geotechnical information acquired after the Project is bid is to be included in the project cost and no additional payment or time is due to the Contractor. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Workmanship and Materials Guarantee: Warranty the tank structure against any defective materials or workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of tank(s) acceptance. If any materials or workmanship prove to be defective within that period, they are to be replaced or repaired by the tank Manufacturer. B. Design Warranty: The tank manufacturer must warrant its design of the proposed facility to be structurally and functionally applicable to serve the intended use of the Project. Such intended use is exemplified by the criteria of design, workmanship, and material expressed by the requirements of the Contract Documents prepared by the Engineer. The Owner's or Engineer's review of the tank manufacturer's design, or the Owner's acceptance and final payment for the Work will not relieve the tank manufacturer of design responsibility. The Owner must be the direct beneficiary of the warranty. 1.15 STANDARDS A. Comply with the provisions of the following standards as if written here in their entirety. B. In the event of a conflict between the published standards, codes and this Specification, the provisions of this Specification will govern. C. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301; Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 304 R; Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 305 R; Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 306 R; Cold Weather Concreting. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 8 of 26 5. ACI 309 R; Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 6. ACI 347 R; Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 7. ACI 350 R; Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 8. ACI 372 R; Design and Construction of Circular Wire- and Strand -Wrapped Prestressed Concrete Structures. 9. ACI 506 R; Guide to Shotcrete. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A185; Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A366; Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. 3. ASTM A416; Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven Wire for Prestressed Concrete. 4. ASTM D471; Test Method for Rubber Property -Effect of Liquids. 5. ASTM A475; Specification for Zinc Coated Steel Wire Strand. 6. ASTM A615; Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A821; Specification for Steel Wire, Hard Drawn for Prestressing Concrete Tanks. 8. ASTM A996; Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A1008; Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 10. ASTM A1011; Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. 11. ASTM C42; Test Method for Obtaining Drilled Cores and Sawed Beam of Concrete. 12. ASTM C 143; Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 13. ASTM C172; Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 14. ASTM C173; Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 15. ASTM C231; Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 16. ASTM C881; Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 17. ASTM C920; Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 18. ASTM C1218; Standard Test Method for Water -Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 19. ASTM D1056; Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 20. ASTM D6938-10; Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil - Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 21. ASTM D 1752; Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Placing and Structural Construction. 22. ASTM D2000; Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 9 of 26 23. ASTM D698; Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Standard Effort 12,400 ft.-lb./ft3. 24. ASTM D1557; Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Standard Effort 56,000 ft.-lb./ft3. 25. ASTM D2240; Test Methods for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness. E. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA D110; Standard for Wire -and -Strand -Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks. 2. AWWA C152; Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 3. AWWA C220; Standard for Stainless -Steel Pipe. F. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1; Structural Welding Code — Steel. 2. AWS D1.2; Structural Welding Code — Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.6; Structural Welding Code — Stainless Steel. G. Miscellaneous Standards: 1. ASCE/SEI 7; Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. MIL R 219 31(A) OS; Military Specification Resin, Epoxy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Sections 013300 "Submittal Procedures" and 014000 "Quality Requirements" to design prestressed concrete tank(s). 2.2 SYSTEMS A. Tank: 1. Wire wrapped prestressed concrete tank with a Type III core wall. 2. All equipment and coatings to be suitable for use with raw sewage wastewater. B. Manufacturers: 1. DN Tanks Wakefield, MA. 2. Preload Inc., Hauppauge, NY. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 10 of 26 f►.�c�9a.91To] :Sul:10140IF N0313964 eXII1911111:]ON A. Tank Construction: 1. The prestressed concrete tank to be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of AWWA D110 Standard for Wire Wound Circular Prestressed -Concrete Water Tanks, Type III core wall, IBC, ACI 350, ACI 350.3, ASCE 7 and requirements of this Section. 2. Floor: Non -prestressed cast -in -place reinforced concrete. 3. Minimum thickness of the floor slab is 6 inches. 4. Provide thickened edge for the exterior wall footing. 5. Floor Slabs less than 6 inches: Provide single layer of reinforcement in each direction. 6. Floor Slabs greater than 6 inches: Provide top and bottom reinforcement in each direction. 7. The transition from the bottom of the footings and pipe encasements to the underside of the floor slab shall be as shown in the Drawings. 8. Floor/Wall Joint - Fixed. 9. Wall: Type III, Precast concrete core wall with metal diaphragm 10. Horizontal prestressing to be continuous. Discontinuous prestressing tendons or strands will not be allowed. 11. Tank Manufacturer to coordinate support of external walkways, landings and launder covers with the manufacturer and the General Contractor. B. Design Loads: 1. The Tank Contractor to use the following loadings and requirements in the design calculation: a. Dimensions: 190 feet inside diameter x 14 feet side water depth. b. Dead Load, estimated weight of all permanent imposed loads, including: 1) Unit weight of concrete: 150 pounds per cubic foot. 2) Steel: 490 pounds per cubic foot. 3) Soil: 120 pounds per cubic foot. C. Live Load: the weight of all the liquid when the tank is filled to overflowing. Unit weight of liquid 62.4 pounds per cubic foot. d. Minimum Backfill Height: 18 feet. e. Maximum Backfill Height: 19 feet. f. Backfill Pressure: earth loads determined by rational methods of soil mechanics. Backfill pressure shall not be used to reduce the amount of required prestressing. g. Foundation Loads: the tank foundation to be proportioned so that soil pressure to be less than the soil bearing capacity. Allowable Bearing Pressure: 2.2 ksf. h. Design Subsurface Water Depth: Finished grade elevation around the tanks. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 11 of 26 2. The Tank Contractor to design the composite concrete wall with steel diaphragm and closure steel slot plate in combination with vertical mild steel reinforcement based on the following design criteria and requirements: a. The prestressed tank wall to be considered as a cylindrical shell with partial edge restraint. b. The prestressed tank wall to be reinforced vertically by deformed steel reinforcing bars. The steel diaphragm can be taken as effective vertical reinforcing. C. The prestressed tank wall to be of precast construction. The minimum core wall thickness to be 6 inches. The core wall is that area of the wall interior to all circumferential prestressing. Shotcrete or cast -in -place concrete core walls are not permitted. d. For wire wound tanks, a stress plate to be required at all above grade locations where prestress wires are displaced 24 inches or greater. The stress plate to be designed to transfer stress across the opening. e. No reduction in ring compression or tension in the wall will be taken due to restraint at the bottom. f. The long-term prestressing losses caused by shrinkage, creep, and relaxation in the prestressed reinforcement of the tank walls to not be assumed less than 25,000 psi. g. Lateral soil pressures to not be considered in resisting seismically generated shear forces between the wall footing and the wall. 3. Floor Slab: a. The floor slab to be designed as a membrane floor not less than 6 inches thick. Construction joints will only be allowed as shown on the shop drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Construction joints to incorporate a horizontal 6 inch PVC waterstop. b. Wall footings may be constructed above or below floor grade. If required, the floor to have thickened regions to facilitate transitions from under slab concrete pipe encasements into the floor, appurtenance loadings and temporary bracing requirements. C. Poly -propylene or cellulose fibers may be used at the Tank Contractor's discretion. 4. Overflow weir box: a. Design overflow weir box as shown in drawings and specified. Design to be in accordance with ASCE 7 and AISC. Sizes shown on drawings are minimum. Design scenarios as follows: 1) Box is full and tank empty. 2) Box is empty and tank full. b. Materials to be Type 316L stainless steel. C. Tank manufacturer to incorporate reaction loads into the tank wall. 5. Snow Load: Determined in accordance with ASCE 7-16 using the following minimum parameters: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 12 of 26 a. Risk Category:IV. b. Ground Snow Load (pg):5 psf. C. Exposure Category: C. d. Exposure Factor: 0.9. e. Thermal Factor: 1.2. f. Importance Factor: 1.20. 6. Live Load: a. Floor: 62.4 psf times the height of water to overflow plus 6-in 7. Wind Load: a. Wind Loads: as required by ASCE 7. b. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph. C. Exposure Category: C. 8. Earth Pressure: a. Equivalent fluid pressure above groundwater level: 75 pcf. b. Equivalent fluid pressure below groundwater level: 105 pcf. C. Live Load surcharge equivalent to 2 feet of earth. 9. Allowable Bearing Pressure: 2.2 ksf. C. Seismic Criteria: 1. Seismic Design Criteria: Seismic design to be based on the applicable sections of AWWA D110-13, ACI 350.3, ASCE 7, TID 7024 and the local jurisdictional building code. The comparative value of 80 percent as specified in ASCE 7, Section 15 .4 .1 paragraph 6 to be used to determine the total base shear from ASCE 7. Impulsive and convective forces, as well as, fluid spectral velocity to be calculated utilizing each code and the maximum value of each component to be used to calculate the total base shear. Refer to the Drawings for design criteria. 2. Dynamic Effects of Backfill: Seismic design to consider the additive effects of the dynamic backfill loading. 3. Base Restraint Cable Design: a. When allowable shear resistance of the bearing pad is less than the total base shear obtained from the maximum values of impulsive and convective components and the dynamic effects of backfill, base restraint cables to be utilized. The allowable cable stress is 0.75 fpu. b. For the total base shear obtained from the loading conditions of ASCE 7 that incorporate an overstrength factor (Omega Factor), the allowable bearing pad shear or seismic cable stress (if required by design) to be increased by 20 percent. The Omega factor to be incorporated in accordance with ASCE 7 for all loading cases. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 13 of 26 4. Seismic Forces: a. Calculate forces and moments resulting from water sloshing and seismic accelerations of roof, wall and water loads in accordance with AWWA D110. b. If sufficient freeboard height is not provided to prevent uplift forces due to sloshing, the tank roof and its connections to be designed for the uplift forces in accordance with AWWA D110. 5. Inner Wall Loading Criteria: a. Inner wall: Design with the outer chamber full and the inner chamber empty. b. Inner wall: Design with the outer chamber empty and the inner chamber full.. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Materials: New, of domestic manufacture, and conforming to AWWA D110 and the following material standards. B. Concrete and reinforcing steel for the tank core wall: 1. Conform to the requirements of AWWA D110. 2. Concrete and reinforcing steel for all other structural elements, conform to the requirements of DIV 03. 3. Concrete to conform to ACI 350.5. 4. Cement to be Portland cement Type II, modified. 5. Admixtures causing accelerated or retarded set of the concrete, not allowed unless approved in writing by the Engineer. 6. The coarse and fine aggregate to meet the requirements of ASTM C33. Coarse aggregate to be No. 467 with 100 percent passing the 1 1/2 inch sieve. Superplasticizers, water - reducing, and shrinkage reducing (if applicable) admixtures to be incorporated into the floor concrete. If fibers are used, they are to be virgin poly -propylene or cellulose fibers, Microfiber by Grace, Fibermesh 150 by Propex, U1traFiber 500 by Buckeye, or equal. Fiber lengths to be a maximum of 3/4 inches. The amount of fibers added to the concrete mix to conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Proportioning for concrete to be in accordance with ACI 350.5. 8. All precast wall concrete to be air -entrained. 9. Concrete Strength: Minimum concrete strength at 28 days. a. Pipe Encasement fc = 3,500 psi b. Footing and floors fc = 4,500 psi C. Precast Wall Panels fc = 4,500 psi d. Cast -in -place walls fc = 4,500 psi e. Wall cap construction fc = 4,500 psi C. Prestressed Wire: Conform to ASTM A821, suitable for redrawing and having a minimum ultimate strength of 210,000 psi, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 14 of 26 D. Prestressed Strand: 1. Galvanized seven -wire stress -relived strand conforming to ASTM A416, Grade 250 prior to galvanizing and ASTM A603 after galvanizing, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. 2. Zinc Coating: ASTM A475, Table 4, Class A. 3. Single wire prestressing strands not allowed. E. Vertical Tendons: 1. Conform to ASTM A722, Type II. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of 150,000 psi. Deformations to form a screw -thread suitable for mechanical coupling. Bars and their deformations to be hot rolled. 2. Anchor Pockets: Steel cans, hot -dipped galvanized after cutting and subsequently welded to the top bearing plate. Sealed from moisture and concrete intrusion by wooden lids and 2 inch wide plastic adhesive tape. Provide for flushing of ducts with water during concrete placement. 3. Duct Enclosures: Standard 1.25 inch or 1.375 inch diameter PVC pipe Class 160 or Class 200, respectively, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. All ducts to be provided with expandable valves to facilitate the injection of epoxy after prestressing. 4. Injection Grout: 2 component epoxy -resin grout conforming to ASTM C881, of the type, grade, and class recommended by the Manufacturer. F. Shotcrete: 1. In accordance with ACI Standard 506 and AWWA D110. 2. The wet mix process to be employed for shotcreting. 3. Shotcrete used for covering prestressed wire or strand to consist of not more than three parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Additional coats of shotcrete to consist of not more than four parts sand to one part Portland cement by weight. Polypropylene fibers to be included in the Shotcrete used for the finish cover coat. Fibers to be Fibercast 500 by Propex, Fibermesh or equal. Fibers to be virgin polypropylene and comply with ASTM C-1116 performance level 1. Fiber length to be 1/4 inch. The amount of the fibers added to the shotcrete used for the finish cover coat to conform to the Manufacturer's recommendations. Fly ash may be incorporated into the finish cover coat. Fly ash to conform to ASTM C618, Type F. Shotcrete to have a minimum strength of 4,500 psi at twenty-eight days and have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42. 4. Rebound material to not be reused in any form for shotcrete. 5. If used by the Tank Contractor, the total volumetric air content of the shotcrete before placement to not exceed 7 percent (f 1 percent) as determined by ASTM C 173 or ASTM C231. 6. Fine Aggregates: a. The fineness modulus to be between 2.7 and 3.0. A well -graded coarse sand to be used for all shotcrete applications. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 15 of 26 b. The gradation for the fine aggregates to adhere to the "Grading No. 1" requirements listed in "Table 1.1 — Grading Limits for Combined Aggregates" of ACI 506. 7. All shotcrete to have a maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration of 0.06 percent by weight of cementitious material. 8. Steel Diaphragm: a. Conform to ASTM A366 steel. Minimum 26-gauge thickness, vertically ribbed with reentrant angles spaced not more than 3 inches apart and depth of 3/8 inch. G. Elastomeric Materials: 1. Waterstops: a. Extruded from elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinyl chloride as the basic resins. b. Meet the performance criteria in the Corps of Engineers Specifications CRD-0572. 2. Elastomeric Bearing Pad: a. Neoprene or Natural Rubber Pad conforming to ASTM D2000, line call -outs 2BC415A141314 and 4AA420AB respectively. H. Moisture Barrier: 1. Polyethylene Class A conforming to ASTM E1745. The thickness to not be less than 15 mil. I. Seismic Cables Assembly: 1. Seismic Cables: Galvanized seven -wire stress -relieved wire meeting the requirements of ASTM A416, Grade 270 prior to galvanizing. 2. Zinc Coating for Galvanizing: ASTM A475, Table 4, Class A. 3. Seismic Cable Sleeves: Medium grade closed cell neoprene conforming to 2A3 of ASTM D1056. J. Appurtenances: 1. As required per Drawings and equipment specifications. 2.5 MORTAR FILL AND NON -SHRINK GROUT A. Mortar fill and non -shrink grout to have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at twenty-eight days, have a maximum water to cementitious ratio of 0.42 and meet all requirements for concrete contained in this specification. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 16 of 26 B. Portland cement grout will not be accepted. 2.6 CEMENTITIOUS FINISH A. Exterior exposed surfaces to receive a cementitious finish in accordance with Section 099726. Cementitious finish to extend down the tank wall to at least 1 foot below finish grade. 2.7 EXTERIOR COATINGS A. A decorative coating to be applied to the above grade exterior wall surfaces using two coats of a non-cementitious, high build, 100 percent acrylic resin polymer such as "Tammscoat Smooth" textured protective coating, "Tnemec Envirocrete 156" or equal. 2.8 INTERIOR COATINGS A. Interior protective coatings, as recommended by tank Manufacturer, to protect tank from flow requirements. B. Finish surfaces in contact with fluids to receive concrete protective coating in accordance with Section 33 39 60. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SAFETY A. Take every precaution to keep personnel and visitors outside the prestressing area. Submit a safety plan to the Owner two weeks prior to starting work. B. At no time can anyone stand in the line of stressed wire or strand. C. No personnel is allowed outside of the tank, other than the prestressing crew, within 100 feet from the wrapping operation. Additional precautions to be taken by Tank Contractor should specify clearance may not be available. D. Where access to the site by unauthorized persons is outside the Tank Contractor's control, while prestressing work is in progress, Tank Contractor to erect protective fencing. E. Tank Contractor to conform and enforce all Local and Federal OSHA safety rules and regulations. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 17 of 26 3.2 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING A. All trees, shrubs, brush, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable material to be removed to a minimum distance of 12 feet outside the edge of the tank foundation, plus additional areas necessary for the tank construction. The limits of clearing to be as shown on the drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer. B. All topsoil to be stripped from the proposed construction work area and stockpiled on site. Kk�WIMI\Il_rI[e]a/:I►17:3ITyC4aIaI A. The Tank Contractor to coordinate excavation with Contractor to such depths and widths to provide adequate room for tank construction. B. The excavation to be dewatered as required during construction. Use a dewatering method to prevent disturbance of the tank foundation soils. C. In the event the subgrade material is disturbed or over excavated by the Tank Contractor during excavation, remove and replace with compacted engineered fill as required by the tank manufacturer's geotechnical engineer at the Tank Contractor's expense. D. Soil preparation and backfill provided per tank manufacturer's geotechnical report. 3.4 FLOOR A. The floor and wall footings to be constructed to the dimensions shown on the Approved Shop Drawings. B. Prior to placement of the floor concrete, all piping that penetrates the floor to be set and encased in concrete. C. The vertical waterstop to be placed and supported so that the bottom of the center bulb is at the elevation of the top of the footing. The waterstop to be supported without puncturing any portion of the waterstop other than pre -manufactured holes, grommets or hog rings for tying at 12 inches o.c. The waterstop to be spliced using a thermostatically controlled sealing iron and each splice successfully spark tested prior to encasement in concrete. D. Floors over 20,000 sq. ft. in surface area, at the option of the Tank Contractor, may have one or more construction joints. Such construction joints to be approved by the Engineer prior to placement and include a continuous waterstop and reinforcement through the joint. Floors less than 20,000 sq. ft. in surface area to not have construction joints. E. The floor to be cured by applying one coat of curing compound, curing blankets and/or flooding with water, and remain saturated for a minimum of seven days. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 18 of 26 A. The precast wall panel to be constructed with a continuous waterproof steel diaphragm embedded in the exterior of the precast panel. Horizontal joints in the diaphragm will not be allowed. B. No holes for form ties, nails, or other punctures will be permitted in the wall. C. Temporary wall openings may be provided for access and removal of construction materials from the tank interior subject to the approval of the Engineer. D. Wall beds to be constructed to provide finished panels with the proper curvature of the tank. E. Place polyethylene sheeting between successive pours to provide a high moisture environment and a long slow cure for the concrete. F. The erecting crane and lifting equipment to be capable of lifting and placing the precast panels to their proper location without causing damage to the panel. G. The precast panels to be erected to the correct vertical and circumferential alignment. The edges of adjoining panels to not vary inwardly or outwardly by more than 3/8 inch and be placed to the tank radius within + 3/8 inch. H. Joints between precast wall panels to be bridged with a 10 gauge steel plate edge sealed with polysulfide or polyurethane and filled with mortar as shown on the drawings. No through -wall ties will be permitted. 3.6 CONCRETE A. All concrete to be conveyed, placed, finished, and cured as required by pertinent ACI standards. B. Weather Limitations: 1. Unless specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer, concrete to not be placed without special protection during cold weather when the ambient temperature is below 35 degrees F and when the concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures before initial set has occurred and the concrete strength has reached 500 psi. Concrete to be protected in accordance with ACI 306. The temperature of the concrete to be maintained in accordance with the requirements of ACI 350.5 and ACI 306. All methods and equipment for heating and for protecting concrete in place to be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2. During hot weather, concreting to be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 305. 3. Placement of concrete during periods of low humidity (below 50 percent) to be avoided when feasible and economically possible, particularly when large surface areas are to be finished. In any event, surfaces exposed to drying wind to be covered with polyethylene sheets immediately after finishing, or flooded with water, or be water cured continuously CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 19 of 26 from the time the concrete has taken initial set. Curing compounds may be used in conjunction with water curing, provided they are compatible with coatings that may later be applied, or they are degradable. C. Finishes: The tank to be given the following finishes: 1. The floor slab to receive a bull float finish or Fresno finish. The top of the wall footing, exterior to the waterstop, to receive a steel trowel or magnesium trowel finish. 2. The interior of the precast wall panels to receive a light broom finish. 3. Exterior shotcrete to receive a natural gun / nozzle finish. D. Curing: Concrete to be cured using water methods, sealing materials, or curing compounds. Curing compounds to not be used on surfaces to which decorative coatings, mortar, or shotcrete is to be applied. Curing compounds used within the tank to be suitable for use with potable water. E. Testing: 1. For concrete placed in precast panels or wall slots, make a set of at least six cylinders for each truck load of concrete placed. For concrete placed in the floor, two sets of six cylinders for the first 50 cubic yards, and one set of six cylinders for every 100 cubic yards thereafter placed in the same day. Two cylinders to be tested at seven days, three at twenty-eight days, and one held as a spare. 2. Perform slump, air content and temperature testing on each truck where cylinders are taken. 3. All concrete testing to be in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39, at the expense of the Tank Contractor, and be conducted by an independent testing agency approved by the Engineer. 4. All testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 23, "Testing and Inspection Services". 3.7 SHOTCRETING A. Weather Limitations: 1. Do not place shotcrete in freezing weather without provisions for protection against freezing. Shotcrete placement can start without special protection when the temperature is 35 degrees F and rising, and be suspended when the temperature is 40 degrees F and falling. The surface to which the shotcrete is applied to be free from frost. Cold weather shotcreting to be in accordance with ACI 506, ACI 350.5 and ACI 306. 2. Hot weather shotcreting to be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 506, ACI 350.5 and ACI 305. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 20 of 26 B. Coating of Steel Diaphragm: 1. The steel diaphragm to be covered with a layer of shotcrete at least 1/2 inch thick prior to prestressing. 2. Total minimum coating over the steel diaphragm to be 1 1/2 inches including diaphragm cover, wire or strand cover, and finish cover coat. C. Coating Over Prestressing Wire or Strand: 1. Each prestress wire or strand to be individually encased in shotcrete. Shotcrete thickness to be sufficient to provide a clear cover over the wire and strand of at least 1/4 inch and 3/8 inch, respectively. 2. Finish cover coat shotcrete to be applied as soon as practical after the last application of wire or strand coat. 3. The minimum final shotcrete cover over the outermost prestressing wire or strand layer to be 1 inch. D. Placement of Shotcrete: 1. Shotcrete to be applied by an ACI 506 certified nozzleman. 2. Manually applied shotcrete to be applied with the nozzle held at a small upward angle not exceeding five degrees and constantly moving during application in a smooth motion with the nozzle pointing in a radial direction toward the center of the tank. The nozzle distance from the prestressing to be such that shotcrete does not build up or cover the front face of the wire or strand until the spaces behind and between the prestressing elements are filled. 3. Unless applied by an automated shotcrete process, total cover coat thickness to be controlled by shooting guide wires. Vertical wires to be installed under tension and spaced no more than two feet apart to establish uniform and correct coating thickness. Monofilament line (100 lb. test) or 18 or 20 gauge high tensile strength steel wire to be used. Guide wires to be removed after placement of the cover coat. 4. Shotcrete applied by an automated shotcrete process to be applied using the wet mix only. Nozzles to be kept mounted on power driven machinery enabling the nozzle to travel parallel to the surface to be sprayed at a uniform linear or bi-directional speed. Keep nozzle at a uniform constant distance from the surface, always insuring a right angle spray of the material to the surface. The high velocity impact to be developed pneumatically by injecting compressed air at the nozzle. E. Curing: Cure Shotcrete using water curing methods, sealing materials or curing compounds at the option of the Tank Contractor. Curing compounds to not be used on surfaces to which decorative coatings, mortar or shotcrete is to be applied. Curing compounds used within the tank wall to be suitable for use with potable water. Intermediate layers of shotcrete to be kept damp by water curing or other means no sooner than twelve hours after the shotcrete has been applied. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 21 of 26 2. Water curing is not required should additional shotcrete be applied on the entire wall surface within the following twelve hours. 3. Avoid indiscriminate use of continuous water cure for intermediate layers. 4. Complete shotcrete surfaces, which do not receive any additional coatings, may be water cured for a period of at least seven days by encapsulating the shotcrete inside of plastic sheeting. F. Testing: 1. Testing of shotcrete to be in accordance with ACI 506, except as specified. One test panel to be made for each of the following operations: core wall, wire or strand cover, and cover coat. Test panels to be made from the shotcrete as it is being placed, and as nearly as possible, represent the material being applied. The method of making a test sample to be as follows: Secure a frame of wire fabric (1 foot square, 3 inches in depth) to a plywood panel and hung or placed in the location where shotcrete is being placed. Fill this form in layers simultaneously with the nearby application. After twenty-four hours, remove the fabric and plywood backup and place the sample slab in a safe location at the site. 2. Moist cure the sample slab in a manner identical with the regular surface application. Send the sample slab to the testing laboratory. Cut nine 3 inch cubes from the sample slab and subject to compression tests in accordance with current ASTM Standards. Three cubes to be tested at the age of seven days, three to be tested at the age of twenty-eight days, and three to be retained as spares. Testing to be by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer and at the Tank Contractor's expense. 3. At the Tank Contractor's option testing of shotcrete applied with an automated process to be in accordance with ACI 350.5 of these specifications in lieu of that indicated in Section 3.06.F.1. 3.8 CIRCUMFERENTIAL PRESTRESSING A. Prestressing to be performed utilizing continuous wire or strand. Prestressing wire/strand will be placed on the wall with a machine capable of consistently producing a stress in the wire/strand within a range of minus 7 percent to plus 7 percent of the stress required by the design. No circumferential movement of the prestressing along the tank wall will be permitted during or after stressing. Stressing may be accomplished by drawing the wire through a die or by another process that results in uninterrupted elongation, thus assuring uniform stress throughout its length and over the periphery of the tank. B. Each coil of prestressing to be temporarily anchored at sufficient intervals to minimize the loss of prestress in case a wire/strand breaks during wrapping. C. Minimum clear space between prestressing wires is 5/16 inch or 1.5 wire diameters, whichever is greater. Minimum clear distance between prestressing strands is 3/8 inch or 1.5 strand diameters, whichever is greater. Any wires or strands not meeting the spacing requirements to be respaced. Prestressing to be placed no closer than 2 inches from the top of the wall, edges of openings, or inserts, nor closer than 3 inches from the base of walls or floors where radial movement may occur. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 22 of 26 D. The band of prestressing normally required over the height of an opening to be displaced into circumferential bands immediately above and below the opening to maintain the required prestressing force. Bundling of the prestressing steel is prohibited. E. For wire wound tanks, a stress plate to be used at all permanent wall penetrations above grade that results in displacement of wire/strand equal to or greater than 24 inches in height. The stress plate to accommodate a portion of the prestressing normally required for the height of the opening. The remaining prestressing normally required to be displaced into circumferential bands immediately above and below the penetration. Take account the effect of banded prestressing in the design. F. Ends of individual coils to be joined by suitable steel splicing devices capable of developing the full strength of the prestressing wire/strand. G. The Tank Contractor to furnish a calibrated stress recording device, which can be recalibrated, to be used in determining wire/strand stress levels on the wall during and after the prestressing process. At least one stress reading per vertical foot or one stress reading for every roll of prestressing, whichever is greater, to be taken immediately after the wire or strand has been applied on the wall. Readings to be recorded and refer to the applicable height and layer of the prestressing for which the stress is being taken. The Tank Contractor to keep a written record of stress readings. All stress readings to be made on straight lengths of wire/strand. If applied stresses fall below the design stress in the steel, additional wire or strand will be provided to bring the force on the core wall up to the required design force. If the stress in the steel is more than 7 percent over the required design stress, the wrapping operation should be discontinued, and satisfactory adjustment made to the stressing equipment before proceeding. H. When a mechanical stressing system is utilized a continuous electronically (or substantial equivalent) monitored permanent recording of the applied force to be made during the entire circumferential prestressing application. All such recordings to be based on a continuous sensing of the applied force on the wire/strand between the tensioning system and the wall when, and as, the strand is being wrapped and laid on the wall. 3.9 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST A. Upon completion, the tank to be tested to determine watertightness. Water test tank in accordance with ACI 350.1 and AWWA D110, and Section 01 88 19, "Tightness Testing Performance Requirements". 3.10 CLEAN-UP A. Keep the premises clean and orderly at all times during the work. Upon completion of construction, the Tank Contractor to remove or otherwise dispose of all rubbish and other materials caused by the construction operation. The Tank Contractor to leave the premises in as good a condition as it was found. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 23 of 26 lMI1F:1 a W.1%I Mei A. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel: Install in accordance with the CRSI, Code of Standard Practice. B. Placing Concrete: General Placement: a. Cast -in -place concrete floor: Install in accordance with ACI 350 and ACI 350R except as specified. b. No concrete to be mixed or placed during freezing weather without explicit permission. When placing concrete when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, the water, sand and gravel to be heated so that the temperature of the concrete will be at least 50 degrees F. This temperature to be maintained for 72 hours after placing. No concrete to be placed on frozen ground. C. In hot weather, concrete, when deposited, to have a placing temperature that will not cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or formation of cold joints. In no case the temperature of concrete being placed exceed 90 degrees F. 2. Floor Slab: a. The floor slab including the thickened portion for the wall footing to be placed in one continuous concrete placement. Construction joints between the floor slab and footings not to be allowed. Where a construction joint is approved in writing by the Engineer, the joint to have 6 inch wide, 3/8 inch thick PVC waterstop conforming to the same requirements as the wall - base slab waterstop. b. The tank floor to be wood/bull float finished first. Subsequently the floor to receive a hard, durable fine finish by the steel trowel method or by use of power finishing machines. No water to be added to the slab during finishing. Curing of the tank floor to be accomplished by ponding the entire area within the waterstops with 2 inch minimum of water within 24 hours after concrete placement. The floor to be kept ponded for a minimum of 7 days. C. Core Walls Prestressed Core Wall(s): a. Exterior wall details including the steel diaphragm, PVC waterstops, elastomeric bearing pads, sponge rubber fillers, prestressing steel, prestressing earthquake cables, and shotcrete to conform to the requirements of AWWA D110. b. A PVC waterstop to be installed in the wall to base joint as shown on the Drawings. Field splices to be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The waterstops to be installed so as to form a continuous watertight dam. Adequate provisions to be made to support and protect the waterstop during the progress of the work. Where the waterstop is placed in a concrete cove attached to the inner CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 24 of 26 face of the wall, the cove to attain 60 percent of its 28-day strength prior to the start of prestressing the wall. Circumferential Prestressing: 1) Stress readings on a calibrated stressometer, furnished by the tank manufacturer, to be made on every tenth prestressing wire [or strand], or a minimum of one reading per vertical foot for each layer. A running log to be maintained by the tank manufacturer of the stress readings and used to determine the final number of wires required. 2) In computing the final tension in the wires, an allowance for prestress loss due to creep, shrinkage, elastic deformation, and residual compression to be provided for. The tank manufacturer to submit an "as -built" revision to the design diagram showing the location and number of wires actually used for the project records only. 3) D. Inner Tank Wall 1. Vertical and horizontal joints are to be sealed to minimize leakage. E. Installation Standards: Install Work according to City of Fort Worth, Texas standards. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Precast core wall panels shall be fabricated to the curvature of the tank radius. The tolerance in panel wall thickness shall be 0 to 1/4-inch. Concrete for each panel shall be placed in one continuous operation. B. The maximum out -of -round tolerance for precast -concrete panel walls shall be based on the ratio of plus 1/2 inch, minus 0 per 100 feet diameter circle, and the circumference shall be a smooth curve. Tolerance in wall thickness shall be plus 1/2 inch, minus 0. Wall thickness shall not be less than specified. All transitions shall be gradual and smooth. Walls shall be plumb within a tolerance not exceeding 3/8 inch per 10 feet of vertical dimension. 3.13 FIELD TESTING A. Completed Tank Survey: Survey the tank foundation and obtain the foundation elevation at 10-foot intervals around the perimeter of the tank before and after the tank is filled. Survey must be conducted by a licensed surveyor. B. Testing: A minimum of one test panel for each 20 cu yds of shotcrete to be made as directed by the Engineer. Additional panels to be made if deemed necessary by the Engineer. The test panels to be made from the shotcrete as it is being placed and, as nearly as possible, represent the material being applied. The method of making the test samples to be as follows: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 25 of 26 a. A rectangular frame of 4-mesh wire fabric 1 foot square and 4 inch depth to be secured to a plywood panel and hung or placed in the location where shotcrete is being placed. This form to be filled in layers simultaneously with the nearby application. After 24 hours, remove the fabric and plywood back up and place sample slab in a safe location at the site. The sample slabs to be sent to a recognized testing laboratory and tested at the age of 7 days. Cut nine 3 inch cubes or cores from each sample slab and subject to compression tests in accordance with current ASTM Standards. Three cubes or cores to be tested at the age of 7 days, three to be tested at the age of 28 days, and the remaining three held in reserve. 2. Testing the Completed Tank(s). a. After the tank(s) have been completed, but before any backfill is placed, the tank(s) to be filled slowly in the presence of the Engineer. Make careful observation for leaks and any leaks that occur to be immediately repaired. b. After the tank(s) have been completed, but before any backfill is placed, the tank(s) to be filled slowly in the presence of the Engineer. Careful observation for leaks to be made and any leaks that occur to be immediately repaired. C. The tank(s) to be kept full of water until the Engineer is satisfied that all defects have been discovered and repaired. There to be no flowing water allowed through the walls or floor slab. Damp spots that glisten on the surface of the tank(s) and spots where moisture can be picked up on a dry hand will not be allowed. Damp spots on the top of footing projections that are not from flowing water not be considered to be leakage. d. The maximum allowable leakage for a 24 hour period, after a 48 hour period, in which the entire tank interior surface has been wetted, not exceed 0.05 percent of the tank volume. If the liquid volume loss exceeds this amount, leakage to be considered excessive and the tank to be repaired and retested. e. All water for the first test will be furnished by the Owner. The Owner to be reimbursed for water required for retesting at the normal water rate. The use of this water supply to be such that it does not adversely affect the normal pressure and flow in the distribution system. 3.14 CLEANING A. Tank shall be cleaned by power washing. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION 43 4163 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 43 41 63.00 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS WIRE AND STRAND WRAPPED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE TANKS Page 26 of 26 VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 46 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Stencils. 4. Labels. 5. Lockout devices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings": Execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. B. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, spacing of labels, and color coding for equipment identification and schedule, including equipment number, location, function, and manufacturer's name and model number. C. Samples: Submit one Sample for each size used on Project. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Qualifications Statement: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work according to Texas Commission on Environmental Quality standards. B. Maintain a copy of each standard affecting the Work of this Section on -Site. A. Comply with recommended water treatment plant color coding from the latest version of Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, Chapter 217. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 3. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, inc.). 4. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. R&R Identification Co. £ Seton Identification Products. g. Description: h. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color. i. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2-inch. j. Stamp or etch tags with identifying information on schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 B. Metal Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Craftmark Pipe Markers. C. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. d. Marking Services, Inc. e. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, Inc.). f R&R Identification Co. g. Seton Identification Products. 2. Description: a. Stainless steel construction; stamped letters. b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2-inch square with finished edges. C. Provide with brass hooks suitable for attaching the tag. d. Stamp or etch tags with identifying information on schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. C. Information Tags: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Seton Identification Products. C. Description: d. Clear plastic with printed DANGER, CAUTION or WARNING message. e. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inch. f. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties. 1. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter -size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum frame. 2.3 STENCILS A. Manufacturers: 1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 2. Marking Services, Inc. 3. Pipemarker.com (Brimar Industries, Inc.). 4. R&R Identification Co. 5. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: 1. Clean-cut symbols. 2. Letter Height: 1-3/4 inch. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings'; semi- gloss enamel. 2.4 LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady ID. 2. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: 1. Aluminum construction. 2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inch. 3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification. 2.5 LOCKOUT DEVICES A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady ID. b. Master Lock Company, LLC. 2. Description: a. Anodized aluminum construction. b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface. C. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Identify equipment with plastic nameplates. B. Identify inline pumps and other small devices with tags. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 C. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. D. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". E. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting. F. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion -resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive. G. Labels: 1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels. H. Install tags using corrosion -resistant chain. END OF SECTION 46 05 53 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 1 of 11 SECTION 46 24 23 - INLINE GRINDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. lw►• 18181u/1'19&11 A. Section Includes: Inline grinders. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for fasteners, brackets, and other miscellaneous metal fabrications as required by this Section. 2. Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings" for product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 3. Section 262505 "480V Control Panels" 4. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for electric motors and their accessories normally supplied as part of equipment assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. B. Inline Grinder: A type of sewage grinder that uses hardened cutters to shred objects into smaller pieces, installed upstream of pumps and unit processes to protect equipment. An inline grinder is installed in a wastewater -treatment plant pipeline using standard pipe fittings. C. TENV: Totally enclosed, non -ventilated. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Division 00 and Division 0 1 requirements for preinstallation meeting. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer information, including installation instructions, accessories, capacities and pressure differentials, power, rotational speed, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 1.6 1.7 1.8 INLINE GRINDERS Page 2 of 11 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish wiring and ladder diagrams. 2. Size and configuration of assembly, mountings, weights, and accessory connections. 3. The total weight of the equipment including the weight of the major components. 4. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. 5. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts. Include gaskets, packing, etc, on the list. 6. Complete data on motors as specified in Section 400593.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment". 7. Complete drawings of control panels showing components, both doors mounted and internal and complete wiring schematics, completely illustrating equipment supplied. Typical diagrams are not acceptable. 8. Description of surface preparation and shop prime painting. 9. A statement indicating and supporting bearing life. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer Instructions: Detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Results of shop tests and inspections. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: Certify equipment is installed according to manufacturer instructions. F. Qualifications Statements: 1. Qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Manufacturer's approval of installer. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Div 00 and 01 for submittals requirements. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. The following spare parts (as applicable) shall be provided. 1. Bearings, upper and lower. 2. Seal Assemblies, upper and lower. 3. One complete set of cutters. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 1.9 INLINE GRINDERS Page 3 of 11 4. One complete set of spacers. 5. One complete set of gaskets, seals and O-rings. 6. One rotor. 7. One bottom liner. 8. One set of shims. B. Spare parts shall be packaged and labeled. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish grinders, all appurtenance and motor controls by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. Design, construct and install the equipment in accordance with the best practices and methods. B. Equipment substitutions for this Section determined equivalent of equipment specified, may be accepted only if revisions in design and construction of the structure, piping, appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc. required to accommodate the substitution are made at no additional cost to Owner and is done as approved by the Engineer. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions. C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from construction operations areas. 2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions. 3. Protect finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden bland flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 4 of 11 1.13 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Furnish two-year manufacturer's warranty for inline grinders. Warranty to begin from the date of final acceptance as defined in Division 00 of the Contract Documents. B. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to a defective part(s), replace (including shipment) and restore the unit(s) to service at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 1NL1NE GRINDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. JWC Environmental, Santa Ana, CA. 2. Franklin Miller, Livingston, NJ. 3. Vogelsang Ravenna, OH. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: Heavy-duty units, dual -shafted, slow -speed, high -torque grinder shreds the toughest solids, including rags, rocks, wood, wipes, hair, clothing, plastic and other debris. The inline grinder should protect pumps and other critical equipment from costly clogs and damage from trough solids. Organic stay in the treatment process and protect pumps from clogging. C. Performance and Design Criteria (Primary Clarifier Scum Pump Stations No.I and 2): 1. Quantity: 2 (1 for each scum pump station). 2. Equipment Tag Number: GND-3117-0(2). 3. Design Flow Rate Range: 240 - 300 gpm. 4. Total Dynamic Head: 150 ft. 5. Head Loss: 1 ft. 6. Suction/Discharge Flange Diameter: 8 inches. D. Performance and Design Criteria (Primary Sludge Pump Station): 1. Quantity: 4. 2. Equipment Tag Number: GND-3350-0(4). 3. Maximum Flow Rate (per unit): 800 gpm. 4. Suction/Discharge Flange Diameter: 8 inches. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 5 of 11 5. Head Loss at Max Flow Rate: 4 ft. E. Housing: 1. Ductile iron, ASTM A536 or Cast iron, ASTM A395 or AISI 1018 carbon steel. 2. Provide interior corrosion resistant lining. 3. Provide covered access port for equipment inspection. 4. End Connections: Flanged, 125 lbs. ANSI B 16.1. 5. Ensure the capture off all items in the waste stream and drive debris into the cutter stack to prevent buildup and enhance high flow. F. Shafts: 1. Two -shaft configuration. 2. 2-inch hexagon heat treated AISI 4140 alloy steel or similar high -strength corrosion resistant alloy. 3. Minimum tensile strength of 170,000 psi. 4. Minimum output torque: 4000 ft-lbs. 5. Seals: Reverse pressure. G. Cutting Elements: 1. Incorporate easy -to -remove cutter cartridges. 2. Two way cutting to reduce particle size to be less than 0.8-inch that the proposed progressive cavity pumps are capable of handling. 3. 17-tooth blade design by JWC or equal. 4. Self-cleaning design. 5. Prevents long strips. 6. Material: Stainless Steel. 7. Cutters: 45-52 HRC 8. Spacers: Through hardened to 34-52 HRC. 9. Configuration: Adjustable and removable. 10. Orientation: Vertical. 11. Provide certification that the cutter blade design is suitable for shredding rags, stringy materials in addition to wastewater sludges and scum. H. Bearings and Seals: 1. Housing: a. Replaceable cartridges requiring no external seal flush or lubricants to operate wet or dry. b. Material: AISI Type 304 Stainless Steel. 2. Max Operating Pressure: 90 psi. 3. Bearings minimum rating: 11,000 lbs (49kN) (dynamic). 4. Dynamic and Static seal faces to be Tungsten carbide with 6% nickel binder. 5. Type: Ball. 6. Comply with ABMA 9. 7. L-10 Life: 100,000 hours under continuous operation. 8. Protection: replaceable seals and end face mechanical seals. 9. O-rings: Buna-N (Nitrile). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 6 of 11 10. Lubrication (if applicable): a. Oil or Grease. b. Provide sight glass for determining oil level. I. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Power Capacity: 5 hp. 2. Voltage: 460V, three phase, 60 Hz. 3. Maximum Circuit Breaker Size: As recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Minimum Power Factor: 115 percent at rated load. 5. Motor and Drive: a. Motor as specified in Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment." b. Motor horsepower: 5 hp. C. Constant speed, outdoor damp/wet/corrosive area rated TENV. d. Class F insulation Class B temp (50C) rise. e. Space heater. f. Provide vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) epoxy insulation for moisture resistance for outdoor motors. g. Speed Reducer: Continuous duty, AGMA Class III, 24-hour, heavy shock duty with 2.0 service factor. 6. Control a. General: 1) Provide one (1) Local Control Panel (LCP) for each Primary Scum Pump Station No.1 and No.2. 2) Provide four (4) Local Control Panels (LCP) for Primary Sludge Pump Station No.1 3) Panel Construction: Conform to general requirements as seen in Section 26 25 05 "480V Control Panels" 4) All equipment and installations to satisfy applicable Federal, State, and local codes. a) Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for area classification for Class and Division ratings. b. Local Control Panels (LCP) 1) Tag Numbers: a) Primary Scum Pump Station No. 1: LCP-3117-01 b) Primary Scum Pump Station No.2: LCP-3117-02 c) Primary Sludge Pump Station No.l: LCP-3350-01, LCP-3350-02, LCP-3350-03, & LCP-3350-04. 2) Location: a) Primary Scum Pump Station No.1 & No.2: Outdoors, as located in the contract drawings. b) Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 1: Indoors, as located in the contract drawings. 3) Space Classification: In accordance with general sheets of the contract drawings. 4) Conduit entry: As shown in electrical drawings. 5) Factory pre -assembled and pre -wired. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 7 of 11 6) Enclosure type: In accordance with general sheets for area classification for Class and Division ratings. 7) Single -point power connection and grounding lug. 8) Main circuit breaker disconnects with a flange mounted operating handle. 9) Transformer for 120V control power. 10) Full voltage reversing combination magnetic motor starter inline grinder. 11) Breather assemblies 12) Space heater. 13) Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted in control panel. C. Provide the following face mounted devices. Provide each operator device with a faceplate describing the device: 1) Selector Switch: Local -Off -Remote. 2) Pushbuttons: Start -Stop & Reset. d. Provide the following pilot lights and indicators in color as listed below. Provide each light with a faceplate describing the indicator: 1) Power On (White). 2) Running (Red). 3) Motor Fault (Amber). 4) Jammed (Amber). e. Load -sensing control system automatically reverses to clear jams. 7. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The grinders will operate when an associated scum or sludge pump is running. If the pump stops running, the grinder will be stopped. b. When an operator starts or stops a pump (scum or sludge pump), the associated grinder will start. The pump will not start until the associated grinder is running. 8. Local Panel at the Grinder: a. If the local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Local position the grinder will start by using the start/stop pushbuttons at the local panel. b. If the local/Off/Remote (LOR) Hand Switch (HS) at the local panel is in the Off position the grinder will not run. 9. Sense Overload (Jam) Conditions: Momentarily reverses to clear condition and return to a forward direction. 1) If overload clears, return to normal operation. 2) If overload does not clear, repeat procedure. 3) If overload does not clear within 30 seconds, unit will reverse, shut down and energize a light and alarm circuit. b. Resetting Overload Condition: Only at local control panel. C. Include thermal motor overload protection and single-phase protection in the control panel. d. Refer to Section 40 6196 Process Control Descriptions. Surface preparation, minimum: SSPC-SP 10 K. Finishes: Two factory -applied finish coats as specified in Section 09 96 76.23 "Wastewater Treatment Coatings". L. Accessories: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 8 of 11 1. Fasteners and Supports: As specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 2. Anchor Bolts and Nuts: a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Comply with ASTM F593. 3. Motor Shaft Extension (if applicable): 6 inch increments. 4. Scraper (if applicable): Steel. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly. B. Certificate of Compliance: 1. When manufacturer is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at manufacturer's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 2. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify that designated areas, clearances, structural requirements, piping, utility connections, and electronic signals are ready to receive equipment. INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and perform Work according to manufacturer instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Ensure grinder is installed correctly, there is no objectionable heat or vibration, and bearings are adequately lubricated. B. Test for proper alignment. C. Manufacturer Services: Manufacturer's representative experienced in installation of products furnished under this Section for not less than 7 days on Site for installation, inspection, startup, field testing, and instructing Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment. D. Equipment Acceptance: 1. Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified and rerun tests. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 3.4 3.5 INLINE GRINDERS Page 9 of 11 2. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. E. Furnish installation certificate from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. FIELD TESTING A. Provide the services of a factory representative, who has complete knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect and adjust the installed equipment prior to operation of the units and to final inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment. The grinder and scum pumps will operate in tandems. Coordinate with manufacturers of the scum pumps specified in Section 46 23 57 "Progressive cavity pumps", primary sludge pumps specified in Section 432335 "Recessed Impeller Pumps" and grinders to have their factory representatives on site at the same time during pump station start up and testing. B. After the grinders and their associated pumps are installed and their piping completed and ready for operation, conduct test runs in the presence of the Engineer and under the supervision of the manufacturer's factory representative, using water to demonstrate the unit's ability to operate as specified, without noise, vibration or overheating. Correct deficiencies noted during the testing at no additional cost. C. When scum and sludge becomes available, test again in the presence of the Engineer under regular operating conditions, to further demonstrate that the grinder performance conforms to this Section. Demonstrate that each grinder control system performs repeatedly as specified. D. The grinder will not be accepted until the grinder passes a one -month performance test under normal operating conditions with scum and sludge. If the grinder shuts down due to a jam condition four times during the one -month performance test the grinder will be considered unacceptable. May modify equipment completely at own expense and repeat tests, as described above. E. If after the completion of the additional period, the equipment, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not meet the performance specifications, the Engineer retains the option to require further tests and evaluations under the supervision of the Engineer, a grinder of similar design and capacity of another manufacturer chosen by the Engineer. Should tests using this grinder meet the performance criteria specified herein, replace the installed grinders with the accepted grinder at no additional cost to the Owner. F. In the event of improper installation or improper operation, correct defects at no additional cost, until the equipment operates to the satisfaction of the Engineer. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's technical representative is required to attend the submittal kick-off workshop. B. Provide the services of a factory -certified service engineer who has complete knowledge of proper installation, startup, VFD settings, testing, operation, and maintenance of specified equipment. Submit qualifications of service representative for approval who is a direct, full-time employee of the manufacturer. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 10 of 11 C. Manufacturer shall advise, consult, and instruct the Contractor on: 1. Installation procedures and adjustments and inspect the equipment during installation as a condition of acceptance of the work. 2. Startup and testing of the finished installation. D. Provide classroom training and hand -on demonstrations. 1. Develop and submit to Engineer and Owner a training lesson plan. Submit proposed lesson plans for scheduled instruction 30 days prior to the commencement of training. Lesson plans will be approved by the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to scheduled instruction. 2. Lesson Plans: Detail specific instruction topics. Where applicable, reference and attach training aids to be utilized in the instruction. Describe "Hands-on" demonstrations planned for the instruction, including estimated duration for each training segment. E. Provide Owner's training including operational and maintenance instruction to two separate operational and maintenance teams over two separate time periods. Give training at times convenient to operational or maintenance teams being trained in coordination with the Owner. Accordingly, some training may be conducted during hours outside a normal Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. workday. Provide operational personnels two sessions of training, 8 hours each. Provide maintenance personnels two sessions of trainings, 8 hours each. Include following operational training as a minimum: a. Theory of operation. b. Process flow description. C. Unit capacity and design criteria. d. Operational troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. e. Step-by-step startup and shutdown procedures. f. System operation and optimization practices. g. Local control set point modification procedures. 2. Minimum maintenance training topics: a. Step -by step, "hands-on" assembly and disassembly procedural instructions. b. Replacement part identification and ordering procedures. C. Lubrication procedures, including drain -down and refill procedures. d. Recommended routine maintenance procedures. e. Troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures. F. Man-hour requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the manufacturer of the obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. Manufacturer's factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation, testing and initial operation of the equipment. Minimum time on site per trip based on 8-hour working days. The number of hours and trips specified reflects the minimum requirement, additional hours and trips shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer to ensure a complete and functional system that is satisfactory to the owner. Supervise Installation: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 24 23 INLINE GRINDERS Page 11 of 11 a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip - 2. b. Manufacturer shall be on site to supervise the contractor's work during installation of these grinders. 2. Inspect, Supervise Initial Adjustment and Approve Installation: a. Trips — 8 Hours/Trip — 2. b. Inspect grouting, location of anchor bolts, setting, leveling, alignment, field erection, coordination of piping, electrical and miscellaneous utility connections. C. Manufacturer's factory representative shall submit to the Engineer a written certification that the system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper startup and O&M: a. Trips — 4 Hours/Trip — 2. b. Instruction may be given upon completion of Item 2, provided that the O&M manuals have been submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. 4. Supervise Startup and Assist in Testing: a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip - 4. b. Place equipment into operation and make necessary adjustments. C. Complete functional and performance testing. d. May be done upon completion of Item 3 if acceptable to the Engineer. The time required for performance testing is in addition to the above specified hours. 5. Service Inspection: a. 4 days. b. During the first year of operation, provide additional Service Inspection at Owner's request, exclusive of repair, malfunction, or other trouble shooting service calls. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 1 of 10 SECTION 46 4121.31 — JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER PART 1 - GENERAL f��7�1�k11M�1�S�Z�Z�1�1u1�1►M11.`! A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tapered nozzles to provide mixing of the Scum Wet Well No.1 and 2 contents. 2. The scum pumping/mixing system supplier shall provide equipment specified in this section. The scum pumping/mixing system supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the appropriate sizing and design of the nozzles for the application in conjunction with the progressing cavity pump design flows and pressures as specified in Section 43 23 57 "Progressing Cavity Pump". 3. Delegated design. — Mixing system will be a delegated design, but limited to the elevation, orientation, and structural design of the two mixing nozzles. 4. Refer to Section 43 23 57 "Progressing Cavity Pumps" for pumping and mixing system control. B. Other technical specifications specifically related to this specification include: Section 05 50 00 "Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications". Section 43 23 57 "Progressing Cavity Pumps". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: System brochure, data sheets and performance information for all nozzles, including but not limited to nozzles, system hydraulics, nozzle assembly support details, and anchor bolts. B. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment. C. Solids capacity of nozzles. D. Shop Drawings: Outline dimensions and weights, general arrangement, installation plans and sections, complete mixing assembly with wall pipes, collars, pipe fittings, anchor bolt sizes and locations and support materials of construction. Drawings to include nozzle locations, layout of wet well, elevations, interior piping sizes and configuration and isometric /31) orientation of the nozzle system and supports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 2 of 10 E. The required grades of lubricants shall be specified together with alternative references to equal products of other manufacturers. F. Provide control narrative describing mixing system. G. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Submit signed and sealed Shop Drawings with design calculations and assumptions for nozzle structural pedestal or wall bracket support design and nozzle pipe support design by a licensed professional engineer registered in Texas: 1. Design Calculations: Flow rate and total head required at design circulating flow rates, and performance curves at design progressing cavity pump speed. Recommended mix piping configuration. 2. The mixing nozzle design shall be modeled by CFD for empirical validation of design for the proposed mixing system; acceptable designs shall be based upon CFD modeling. CFD modeling shall be performed by the nozzle manufacturer and result in the following confirmations, and conclusions: a. Confirmation that the mixing, stirring, and blending action will be achieved, b. The optimum mixing time setting range (minutes) C. Confirmation of the location, elevation and orientation of the nozzles shown on Drawings and make practical recommendations to make minor adjustments to the piping within the wetwell as necessary. Final nozzle location shall be determined to ensure clog -free and low maintenance operation. d. Model shall run until full mixing is achieved, for a few minnutes. Full mixing shall be defined as 95% of scum wet well active volume having solids values within 5% of the scum wet well average. e. System shall be capable of holding a fully mixed condition. For physical configurations and dimensions, see the contract drawings. f. Submit the final CFD report with complete back-up data, underlying CFD computer files and 3-D geometric domain image that shows all features and obstructions, to substantiate the results obtained in the report. CFD to contain horizontal plane velocity plots at a minimum of 3 levels throughout the scum wet wells, vertical plane velocity plots across the centerline of the scum wet wells, streamline plots over 30 minutes time span taken from a single point located at various places in the scum wet well. At least 3 plots shall be provided with the point moved to 3 different places. Vector plots of all the horizontal planes and vertical plane listed above shall be provided. Iso-surface plots of velocity at 0.1 m/sec, 0.2 m/sec and 0.4 m/sec shall also be provided. B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications and experience for a licensed professional and Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) firm and principal modeler. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 3 of 10 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Qualifications Data: Installation list with number of units, size and model of each unit, number of years in operation, and contact information. 2. Test Reports: Pre -start documentation and reports generated in field, functional, and performance testing in accordance with Section 01 45 23 "Testing and Inspection Procedures". 3. Certificates: Materials compliance. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Installation and Start-up Instruction Manuals 5. Commissioning and Acceptance Testing. B. Field quality control reports/certificates. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations and final orientation of equipment and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Service representative reports conforming to Section 01 45 23 "Testing and Inspection Services". C. Letter from equipment manufacturer confirming proper installation, proper commissioning, performance limits, covered components, and warranty effective dates. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Tools: Furnish special tools and other devices required for Owner to maintain and calibrate equipment. Provide two (2) sets of special tools required for maintenance of the nozzle assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of Project location. 2. Coordinate following Paragraph with requirements specified in SUBMITTALS Article. 3. Manufacturer: Minimum five (5) reference installations of mixing systems (nozzle and pump combinations) in similar service applications and in continuous successful service for a period of no less than three (3) years. 4. CFD Mixing Analysis: Firm with a minimum of two years' experience in three dimensional, multi variable flow input and output computer modeling analysis. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 4 of 10 1.9 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. B. Accept mixing system components on -Site in original packaging and inspect for damage. C. Store mixing system components according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect mixing system components from water and wet weather. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Furnish ten-year manufacturer's warranty for jet mixing systems, including nozzles. B. Performance Affidavit: Provide affidavit certifying that the system as provided shall meet or exceed the Performance Requirements for the specific application. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCUM WET WELL MIXING SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: a. Evoqua jet mixing system with Moyno pumps. b. JDV jet mixing system with SEEPEX pumps. C. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00). d. Any changes to the design due to a different manufacturer shall be borne by the Contractor and must be approved by the Engineer. B. Description: The nozzle mixing system shall be operated as part of the scum pump discharge recirculation piping, and controlled automatically with a control valve as shown on Drawings as part of the scum pump controls. Refer to Section 43 23 57 "Progressing Cavity Pumps" for detailed scum pump station control. The equipment shall be provided, designed and procured by a single supplier who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the system and the equipment to be furnished. These Specifications call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into the design and construction of the equipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 5 of 10 2. Components: Each System shall consist of two progressing cavity pumps with total flow rate of 300 gpm as specified in Section 43 23 57 "Progressive Cavity Pumps" and a dedicated set of nozzles as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 3. Operation: The nozzle mixing system will be a passive mixing system and activated by control signals to the recirculation motorized valve as shown on drawings. This mixing system will be used to instantaneously stir and blend scum wetwell contents at the beginning of each pumping cycle. The scum layer (0.5 to 2% solids, —1 S.G., up to 500 cP viscosity) consisting of foam, fats, oils and greases will naturally float on top of the wetwell. If a churning action is created by the nozzle jets then the top layers of scum should get tossed and beaten fairly quickly to a homogeneous fluid. 4. Mixing System Nozzles: a. The nozzle will pass the recirculated scum solids from the scum pump discharge after passing through in -line grinders. b. Provide a minimum of two jet nozzles for each scum pump satation as shown on the Drawings. All piping and nozzles required within the wetwell shall be provided by the mixing nozzle manufacturer. Each nozzle shall be a mimimum 1.5" diameter size designed to deliver a jet velocity between 25 - 30 ft/s each with both scum pumps on at a mixing intensity enough to rapidly stir, blend, and maintain solids in suspension for the entire volume of the scum wetwell when the "pump on" level is reached. The mixing time may be adjustable between 1 to 5 minutes. d. Keep the usable scum wet well volume below the max liquid level, and break-up foam and surface scum as the wet well process fluid with fats oils and grease is guided into the scum pump suction piping at the scum wet well. Allow passage of 1.25-inch spherical solids. f. Compatible with the pumping system design hydraulics and function with the pumps as a system. g. The nozzle shall be equipped with a flange or swivel to enable rotation or fine tuning of the nozzle orientation (X,Y,Z) at its installation location. h. Manufacturer to provide nozzle support design to be tied into scum wet well wall. C. Accessories: swivel, or flanges `as applicable'. D. Performance and Design Criteria: Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design mixing system to complete mixing of the scum wet wells and break up foam and surface scum as the wet well process fluid with fats oils and grease is guided into the scum pump suction piping. Scum Wet Wells No.I and 2 configurations are indicated on the DRAWINGS M-C-1 to M-C-8 and Attachment A. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2.2 2.3 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 6 of 10 2. Assumed sludge characteristics are provided in Attachment A. 3. System Performance: a. Scum Wet Wells No.l and 2 Mixing System (Each): 1) Minimum two (2) wall mounted scum nozzles. 2) Number of Pumps: 2. 3) Maximum Mixing Flow Rate per Pump: 150 gpm. 4) Maximum Pressure Head: 150 ft b. Nozzles and nozzle assemblies in the scum wet well shall require no scheduled maintenance. MATERIALS A. All mixing system components installed internal to each scum wet well shall be severe duty, corrosion and abrasion resistant high-grade ASTM A276 or ASTM A480, AISI Type 316 stainless steel or cast nickel iron. B. Nozzles shall be constructed for severe duty, corrosion and abrasion resistant high-grade ASTM A276 or ASTM A480, AISI Type 316 stainless steel or cast nickel iron. C. Long straight taper length. 1. Nozzle Base Minimum''/z-inch thick, with mounting holes for anchor bolts. 2. Anchor Bolts: Minimum of 5/8-inch diameter, with construction and length sufficient to support thrust loads from nozzles. 3. Equipped with 150 lb. flanged piping connections. 4. Joints: Watertight and capable of withstanding the pressures generated by the static head of the scum wet well plus the discharge pressure of the recirculation pump. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Inspection and Tests: 1. Demonstrate that all equipment is capable of continuous operation in satisfactory manner without mechanical or electrical defects or operational difficulties. If necessary, tests shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. All defects revealed by or noted during tests shall be corrected or replaced promptly at no additional compensation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 7 of 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. 1. Anchor Bolts: Set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Submit manufacturer's certification of installation. State that the installation of the mixing system is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the system. MaI_T4 I1101Wa12109:14 IY163►/:11►171$* IIl.`1 A. Factory Inspection and Tests: 1. Demonstrate that all equipment is capable of continuous operation in satisfactory manner without mechanical or electrical defects or operational difficulties. Repeat tests ff necessary until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Correct or replace equipment if defects are revealed or noted during testing at no additional compensation. 3. Tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. B. Provide certified copies of test reports, including documentation of certification/calibration of test instruments for review by the Engineer. Do not ship equipment until reports have been approved. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's technical representative is required to attend the submittal kick-off workshop. B. Provide the services of a factory -certified service engineer who has complete knowledge of proper installation, startup, testing, operation, and maintenance of specified equipment. Submit qualifications of service representative for approval who is a direct, full-time employee of the manufacturer. C. Manufacturer shall advise, consult, and instruct the Contractor on: 1. Installation procedures and adjustments and inspect the equipment during installation as a condition of acceptance of the work. 2. Startup and testing of the finished installation. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 8 of 10 D. Provide classroom training and hand -on demonstrations. 1. Develop and submit to Engineer and Owner a training lesson plan. Submit proposed lesson plans for scheduled instruction 30 days prior to the commencement of training. Obtain lesson plans approval by the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to scheduled instruction. 2. Lesson Plans: Detail specific instruction topics. Where applicable, reference and attach training aids to be utilized in the instruction. Describe "Hands-on" demonstrations planned for the instruction, including estimated duration for each training segment. E. Provide Owner's training including operational and maintenance instruction to two separate operational and maintenance teams over two separate time periods. Give training at times convenient to operational or maintenance teams being trained in coordination with the Owner. Accordingly, some training may be conducted during hours outside a normal Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. workday. Include following operational training as a minimum: 1. Theory of operation. 2. Process flow description. 3. Unit capacity and design criteria. 4. Operational troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. 5. Step-by-step startup and shutdown procedures. 6. System operation and optimization practices. 7. Local control set point modification procedures. F. Minimum Maintenance Training Topics: 1. Step -by step, "hands-on" assembly and disassembly procedural instructions. 2. Replacement part identification and ordering procedures. 3. Lubrication procedures, including drain -down and refill procedures. 4. Recommended routine maintenance procedures. 5. Troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures. G. Man-hour requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the manufacturer of the obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in satisfactory operation. Manufacturer's factory representative shall be present at frequent enough intervals to ensure proper installation, testing and initial operation of the equipment. Minimum time on site per trip based on 8-hour working days. The number of hours and trips specified reflects the minimum requirement, additional hours and trips shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer to ensure a complete and functional system that is satisfactory to the owner. Supervise Installation: a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip - 1. b. Manufacturer shall be on site to supervise the contractor's work during installation of these pumps. 2. Inspect, Supervise Initial Adjustment and Approve Installation: a. Trips - 8 Hours/Trip — 2 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER Page 9 of 10 b. Inspect grouting, location of anchor bolts, setting, leveling, alignment, field erection, coordination of piping, electrical and miscellaneous utility connections. C. Manufacturer's factory representative shall submit to the Engineer a written certification that the system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper startup and O&M a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip — 1 b. Instruction may be given upon completion of Item 2, provided that the O&M manuals have been submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. 4. Supervise Startup and Assist in Testing a. Trips - 4 Hours/Trip — 2 b. Place equipment into operation and make necessary adjustments. C. Complete functional and performance testing. d. May be done upon completion of Item 3 if acceptable to the Engineer. The time required for performance testing is in addition to the above specified hours. 5. Service Inspection: a. 1 day. b. During the first year of operation, provide additional Service Inspection at Owner's request, exclusive of repair, malfunction, or other trouble shooting service calls. END OF SECTION 4 6 4121.31 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 41 21.31 JET MIXING EQUIPMENT - WASTEWATER ATTACHMENT A SCUM WET WELL MIXING SYSTEM Length (ft): Width (ft) Sidewall Height (ft): Normal Max. Sidewater Depth(ft): Normal Min Sidewater Depth (ft): Freeboard Above Max Water Level (ft): Active Volume (ft x ft x ft) Normal Scum wet well Contents Normal Percent Dry Solids Range (%) Solid Size — Spherical (Inch) Mixing Nozzle Outlet Size (Inch) Mixing Nozzle Flange Size (Inch) Page 10 of 10 Scum Wet Well Scum Wet Well No.1 No.2 13 13 5 5 16.5 16.5 7.58 7.58 1.58 1.58 8.92 8.92 13x5x5.5 13x5x5.5 Raw sewage contains fat oil and grease; scum 5 5 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.5 3 3 CDM Smith CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 46 43 13.11 — FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. FRP V-notch weirs, scum baffles, inboard launders (troughs), transition areas from inboard launders to outboard launders, and supports as shown on the Drawings. 2. Delegated Design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for fasteners, brackets, and other miscellaneous metal fabricators. 2. Concrete is included in Division 03. 3. Section 46 43 21 "Circular Clarifier Equipment". 4. Section 46 6120.13 "Launder Covers" for FRP launder covers to be supplied in the same package as the FRP weirs, baffles and troughs specified herein. C. Related Sheets: 1. M-B sheets for Primary Clarifier plans, sections, and details. 2. S-B Sheets for Primary Clarifier Top of Concrete and Top of Wall Elevation 3. C-P Sheets for Grade Elevation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the items of this section with Section 46 6120.13 "Launder Covers" for supply of entire system of FRP products under one package. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for troughs, weir, baffles, transition areas, and supports. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 2 of 10 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Complete installation instructions. 4. Complete description of materials and resins used, including physical properties and methods of manufacture for the fiberglass troughs, weirs, baffles, transition areas, and supports. 5. Statement that fabrication is in accordance with these Specifications 6. Complete bill of materials. 7. Complete assembly drawings. 8. Submit certified test reports of manufactured laminates, as specified herein. 9. Special shipping, storage and protection and handling instructions. B. Samples: Submit one 6 in by 1/4 inch sample of polyester laminate to be used in the fiberglass troughs, weirs, baffles, etc. C. Shop Drawings: Texas PE Signed and Sealed. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details, including support details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Complete description of materials and resins used, including physical properties and methods of manufacture for the fiberglass weirs. 4. Connection points to FRP launder covers specified under 46 6120.13 (and provided under the same package). D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.5 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittal: For weirs, baffles and troughs. Refer to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for additional delegated design requirements. B. Delegated Design Submittal Requirements: 1. Prior to the delivery of the fabricated material, provide certification of the satisfactory inspection of the shop fabricated components and supports. 2. Design Calculations for flat bottom troughs configuration, baffles, weirs, and supports and other components signed and sealed by Texas PE. Utilize advanced numerical techniques to determine the design for specified operating conditions. Follow the standard approach of using strength of materials, coupled with computerized classical lamination theory, to calculate displacements, stresses, and factors of safety. Include factors of safety for each lamina used in high -stress areas, using the Tsai -Hill or equivalent approach, to determine the minimum safety factor for each ply. 3. Hydraulic capacity of each trough signed and sealed by Texas PE. 4. Anchor bolt locations and load bearing calculations signed and sealed by Texas PE. 5. Structural support calculations signed and sealed by Texas PE. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 3 of 10 6. Written Narrative: Clearly state basic design assumptions and parameters used in computerized calculations. 7. Design Criteria: a. Gravity Load: Include weight of trough and appurtenance attachments, such as covers, weir plates, density and scum baffles, and spreader bars in downward vertical loads. Consider weight of water required to fill trough, and include additional loads, such as those from algae sweep mechanisms and piping. b. Buoyant Load: For upward vertical loads, consider weight of displaced water (neglecting the trough weight). Ensure line of action passes through centroid of submerged cross -sectional area. C. Lateral Load: Loads acting against sidewalls by differential water levels on either side of walls. Calculate deflection, fiber stress, etc using the maximum possible differential, when trough is empty and surrounding wall is full, or when trough is full, and surrounding tank is empty. d. Thermal Stresses: Design troughs, weir and baffles to accommodate temperature - induced stresses caused by differences in coefficients of thermal expansion over temperature range of -10 deg F to 100 deg F and contraction between FRP and tank material or support members. e. Torsional Stability: Design troughs, weir and baffles to resist torsional oscillations induced by flow of water over edges. Consider any or all the following stabilization techniques: 1) Trough -to Trough Stabilization. 2) Torsional Stiffeners. 3) Supporting Spacing and/or Shell Stiffening Methods. f. Deflection Under Load: Ensure maximum vertical deflection under full buoyant or gravity load does not exceed L/1,000, with L defined as the unsupported trough length in inches. Never permit maximum vertical deflection, measured at the midpoint between trough supports, to exceed 3/16-inch. 1) Ensure maximum sidewall horizontal deflection under full lateral load does not exceed D/100, with D is defined as trough depth, in inches. Never allow maximum sidewall deflection to exceed 3/16-inch. 2) Keep trough bottom deflection under full buoyant or gravity load less than or equal to W/100, where W is defined as trough width in inches. Make sure maximum bottom deflection never surpasses 3/16-inch. g. Fiber Stress Limitations: In addition to deflection criteria, design troughs, weir, and baffles so that the maximum wall stress under the most severe loading condition does not exceed 1,500 psi. This stress criterion is approximately equivalent to an 8:1 factor of safety as applied to the tensile and flexural properties of contact -molded troughs. h. Thermal Expansion/Contraction: Design troughs, weirs, and baffles to accommodate thermally induced expansion and contraction of 1/8-inch per 20-feet length of launder over a temperature range of minus 10 degrees F to 100 degrees F, without exceeding the deflection or strain limitations specified above. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 4 of 10 i. Governing Criteria: Incorporate the following design requirements over and above the AWWA standard to yield a trough design with enhanced performance and endurance characteristics. 1) Blind End Stress if applicable: Anchor blind or closed end of trough to wall using 3/8-inch thick FRP spacer washers to accommodate thermal expansion along trough's length. Utilize thermal excursion specified in AWWA F101 to calculate maximum thermal displacements. Apply these displacements to mounting area on blind end to assess plate bending stresses. Calculate plate thickness to ensure that stresses remain within the limits specified in AWWA standards. C. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional licensed in the State of Texas. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Material and Product Certificates: Provide statement certifying that materials and products are in accordance with the requirements of this section. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For troughs, baffles, weirs, transition areas, and supports to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Include: 1. All required cuts. 2. Drawings. 3. Descriptions required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 4. Trouble shooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Furnish FRP troughs, weirs, baffles, transition areas, supports system, and all appurtenances from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of this type of equipment for wastewater treatment. Additionally, furnish FRP launder covers specified under Section 46 61 20.13 as part of the same package. C. Equipment specified in this Section is to be furnished by a manufacturer of weirs, baffles, and inboard effluent launders who has sole responsibility for designing and furnishing the parts and components required for a complete and operable system. Factory assemble the equipment and accessories as a single coordinated unit. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 5 of 10 D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years' documented experience, at a minimum of ten installation in North America of equal or greater size, which have been operating for at least five years. E. Coordinate support design requirements in conjunction with FRP cover supports (Section 46 61 20.13) and associated loading on the FRP launder supports. F. The FRP weir and baffle plate loadings should be considered integral to the design of the FRP launder support system. G. Provide material certifications. H. Engage a qualified representative of the manufacturer to be onsite to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the weirs and baffles. I. Provide certification that equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 1.9 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in Manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. As necessary, provide inspection report to Manufacturer identifying any damage and rework necessary prior to installation. B. Storage: Store products and all appurtenances according to Manufacturer's instructions C. Protection: 1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location. 2. Provide additional protection according to Manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide flanges with wood. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty from acceptance including installation and startup testing. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace launder covers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 6 of 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Protectolite Composites Inc, ON. 2. Nefco, Inc., Palm Beach Gardens, FL. 3. Fiberglass Fabricators, Inc., Smithfield, RI. 4. Or Approved Equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00.) 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design weirs, baffles, troughs, supports and butt plates. B. Supply troughs, weirs, baffles and support brackets shown on the Drawings for the new Primary Clarifiers No. 2, 3 and 4 and supply weirs, baffles and support brackets shown on the Drawings for existing Primary Clarifiers No. 15 and 18. C. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP): Resistant to attack from sewage and associated corrosive gases including but not limited to hydrogen sulfide (H2S), ammonia (NH3), and mercaptans. Design shall be based on typical concentrations of corrosive gases present in domestic wastewater. 2.3 FIBERGLASS WEIRS AND BAFFLES A. Weirs, Baffles and Associated Supports: Fiber reinforced, polyester plastic resin molded by die- cast method. Surfaces: a. Smooth. b. Resin -rich. C. Free of dry spots, crazes, or unreinforced area. d. Corrosion -resistant. e. Weather -resistant. f. Oversize mounting holes to allow for adjustment. g. Resin seal cut ends of non-standard length. 2. Laminate: a. Plastic, Weir Plate, Baffle Plate, Splice Plate, Weir Washer, and support thickness: minimum 1/4-inch thick. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 7 of 10 b. AWWA Type 1 Isophthalic resin. C. Glass content: Based on AWWA 102. d. Type "C" surfacing mat with silane finish on both sides. e. Type "E" glass with chrome or silane finish. f. Inorganic Fillers: Based on AWWA 102. g. Powder Reinforcement: Based on AWWA 102. h. Includes ultraviolet inhibitors. i. Final Thickness: +_ 10 percent of the nominal specified thickness. Minimum Physical Properties at a Temperature of 70 degrees F: a. Per AWWA F102. b. Average coefficient of thermal expansion: 0.000015 inch per inch degree F in accordance with ASTM E 831. 4. Weir Notches: 90 degrees notches with the elevations, depths, and on -center dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 5. Weir Mounting Holes: Minimum 2 1/2-in square to provide a minimum 2-in vertical and horizontal adjustment. 6. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Other Mounting Hardware: ASTM A276, Type 316 SS. 7. Expansion Anchor Bolts and Weir Washers: Minimum %2-in diameter, ASTM A276, Type 316 with 5-in FRP cover plates/washers to cover mounting holes. 8. Caulking: Two-part sealant conforming or exceeding Federal Specification TT-S227B 9. Scum Baffle Height: As shown on the Drawings. 10. Scum Baffle and Supports: Able to withstand constant forces exerted by skimming mechanisms of the clarifier. Gusseted brackets with slotted holes to provide a minimum of 1 1/2-in vertical and horizontal adjustment. 11. Scum Baffle Mounting Holes: Countersunk to accommodate flat head Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. 12. Weir and Scum Baffle Plate Splices: As shown on the Drawings. 13. Weir Stop Plate Height: As shown on the Drawings. 14. Weir Stop Plate Installed in Locations as Indicated on the Drawings. 2.4 FIBERGLASS LAUNDERS (TROUGHS) A. Description: Fiber reinforced polyester plastic, curved with vertical walls to fit the full inside perimeter of the inside diameter as shown in new Primary Clarifier drawing. B. Top Edges: Straight with no more than 1/8-in deviation from true plane. Inner trough wall fitted with weirs and baffles as specified above in "Fiberglass Weirs and Baffles" Article. C. Cross Braces or Spreaders or Spacer rods within the launders (troughs) are not allowed. D. Trough Connection and Flange Connection: Each with a 1/4-inch neoprene foam rubber gasket to ensure a tight non leaking seal. E. Internal FRP launder shall have 1/16" per foot slope from launder high points to low points as shown. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 8 of 10 F. Surfaces: 1. Smooth. 2. Resin -rich. 3. Free of dry spots, crazes, or unreinforced area. 4. Corrosion -resistant. 5. Weather -resistant. G. Laminate: 1. Finished Trough Thickness: minimum 1/4-inch :L 10 percent of nominal specified thickness. 2. Glass Content: Based on AWWA 101. 3. Type "C" surfacing mat with saline finish on both sides. 4. Type "E" glass fiber reinforcement with chrome or silane finish. Structural layers to consist of plies of chopped strand mat with a maximum of 2 ounces per square foot. Provide adequate contact molding pressure to ensure complete resin wet -out of glass fibers. 5. Powdered Reinforcements: Based on AWWA 101. 6. Outer surface to consist of a resin rich layer not less than 0.02-in thick. Outer layer resin to be applied after cure of the structural layer and no glass reinforcing fibers exposed. 7. Inorganic Fillers: Based on AWWA 101. 8. Includes ultraviolet inhibitors to protect the laminate from deterioration from sunlight. H. Minimum physical properties at a temperature of 70 deg F: Minimum physical properties at a temperature of 70 degrees F: a. Per AWWA F101. b. Average coefficient of thermal expansion: 0.000015 inch per inch degree F in accordance with ASTM E 831. I. Trough Supports: 1. Trough manufacturer to be responsible to the design and fabrication of supports for the installation of the troughs. 2. Trough supports to be wall brackets of contact molded FRP. 3. All support system shall be designed without interrupting the weir flow and channel flow in the trough. Provide oversize mounting holes on 12-inch centers on the weir plate plastic laminate for vertical and horizontal adjustment of at least f 2- inch. K. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Other Mounting Hardware: ASTM A276, Type 316 SS. L. Caulking Compound: Acrylic polymer or a two-part sealant equal to or exceeding Federal Spec. TT-S227B. M. Troughs with Attached Scum Baffles: Withstand constant forces exerted on it by scum skimming mechanisms of primary clarifiers. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 9 of 10 N. Thoroughly wet each ply of reinforcement with resin and roll it out to exclude all air pockets and bubbles before applying the next ply. O. Apply a layer of paraffinated resin not less than 0.020-inch thick to the exterior or outer surface after curing the structural layer to embed all reinforcing fibers and prevent air inhibition. P. Sand smooth and seal all cut edges with paraffinated resin solution when cutting the laminate, drilling holes, or machining slots to prevent water penetration or wicking into the laminate. Q. Ensure that the top edges of the troughs are level and parallel within a tolerance of f 1/8-inch measured when the trough is unloaded. R. Trough Section Length: Tolerance of 11/8-inch per 10 feet length. S. Thickness at Locations of Supports, such as Saddles: Minimum 1-1/2 times the nominal thickness of trough and complies to fiber stress limitations specified in "Action Submittals" Article. T. End Flanges and Blind Ends: Minimum of 1-1/2 times the nominal thickness of the trough and ensure they conform to the fiber stress limitations specified in "Action Submittals" Article. 17_171Iam WX00]10Mel 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer instructions in installation of launders, weirs and baffles. B. Weirs, Troughs and Baffles: 1. Coordinate baffles with the skimming boxes of the tank equipment to assure fitting between the baffles and the skimming boxes, and to assure the proper action of the skimming blade to collect and discharge the skimming to the boxes. 2. Coordinate weir, trough, baffle, and transition area locations with launder cover design. Coordinate supports of entire system including launder covers supplied under 46 61 20.13. 3. Weir stop plate locations shall be installed only in locations as indicated on the Drawings. 4. After installation and adjustment of the weirs caulk the entire perimeter of the weir and weir stop plates to prevent flow of liquid up between the trough wall and the weir plate. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Between notches of weir plates: 1/8-inch maximum. B. Average Deviation Between Adjacent Weir Quadrants: 1/16-inch maximum. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 4643 13.11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WEIRS, BAFFLES AND TROUGHS Page 10 of 10 A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Manufacturers Responsibilities and Man -day requirements: 1. Man -day requirements are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, provide additional services at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Supervise and approve installation. Provide Engineer written certification system has been installed per manufacturer's recommendations. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. 3. Supervise initial adjustment. May be done upon completion of installation if acceptable to the Engineer. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. 4. Supervise and assist in testing. May be done upon completion of initial adjustment if acceptable to the Engineer. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time on Site per Trip: 8 Hour. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Fill each tank with water to observe the leveling of the weir plates. 2. Ensure proper operation of scum collector mechanisms and weir cleaning mechanisms to demonstrate proper installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, weirs, and baffles, and replace defective components at no additional cost to the owner so that the system functions smoothly. Lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 46 43 13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 18 SECTION 46 43 21 - CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access bridge and walkway. 2. Clarifier drive mechanism. 3. Solids collecting mechanisms. 4. Influent energy dissipating inlet (EDI) and feedwell. 5. Scum collection and removal devices. 6. Delegated design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 33 39 60 "Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures" for lining of all concrete in contact with raw sewage, 2. Section 40 05 93.23 "Low -Voltage Motor Requirements for Process Equipment" for electric motors and their accessories normally supplied as part of equipment assemblies. 3. Division 40, "Instrumentation" for general instrumentation requirements for instrumentation specified in this Section. 4. Section 46 05 48, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Water and Wastewater Equipment" for requirements for vibration and seismic control for equipment specified in this Section. 5. Section 46 05 53, "Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment" for Nameplates for equipment specified in this Section. 6. Section 46 6120 "Launder Covers" for FRP launder covers specified in this Section. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for preinstallation meeting requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for system materials and component equipment, including electrical characteristics and connection requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 1.5 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 18 B. Shop Drawings: 1. System materials and component equipment including complete bills of materials. 2. Certified shop and erection drawings showing details of construction, dimensions weld requirements, and anchor bolt locations. 3. The clarifier structural arms, framing, and truss designs, and mechanical arrangement shall be submitted in the form of certified design calculations and drawings from a qualified professional engineer with the product manufacturer. 4. The center turn table, access bridge, platforms, guardrails, and other structural components of the packaged system shall be submitted with calculations and design drawings stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 5. Installation and anchoring requirements, fasteners, and other details. 6. Detailed drawings of center column and inlet ports, EDI and outlets, and feedwell. 7. Documentation of design torque rating of collector mechanism. 8. Coatings: a. Description of surface preparation and shop prime paint. b. Provide a final 3' party paint and priming inspection by a certified NACE coatings inspector of all coated clarifier equipment and appurtenances from the factory. Submit factory coating inspection report. C. Contractor to provide a final 3rd party finish paint inspection by a certified NACE coatings inspector of all coated clarifier equipment and appurtenances in the field. Submit field coating inspection report. C. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. D. Instrumentation and Controls: 1. Instrumentation, control, and power wiring diagrams. Sufficient detail to allow installation of the instrumentation, controls, and electrical components. Include a detailed sequence of operation for manual operation. 2. Master power and control wiring diagrams with suitable outline drawings of the local control panel(s) layout. 3. Complete bill of materials and other appurtenances necessary for fabrication of the local control panel(s). DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittal: For center turn table, access bridge, platforms, guardrails, and other structural components of the packaged system. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for additional delegated design requirements. B. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 1.7 W CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 18 1121TOk9iUVWN0 M a :'lW11810MY10w1F.111 � A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed instructions on installation requirements, including storage and handling procedures. C. Source Quality -Control Submittals: Results of shop tests and inspections. D. Field Quality -Control Submittals: Results of Contractor -furnished tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer Reports: 1. Equipment has been installed and completed per manufacturer's instructions. F. Qualifications Statement: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing of the clarifier equipment who has sole responsibility for designing and furnishing the parts and components required for a complete and operable system. Factory -assemble the equipment and accessories as a single coordinated unit. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed clarifiers and components. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Maintenance instructions for equipment and accessories. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Spare Parts: Furnish for each size unit specified in this section: 1. Rake blade squeegees (for all scrapers in the tank): One set. 2. Gaskets, seals, sealing strips, etc., (including felt seals for the spur gear, if applicable): 3. Two sets of Z-shaped scum collector wiping edges.: 4. Drive chain (if used): One set. 5. Heat treated bearing strip liner inserts: One set. 6. Retaining springs for the sludge collector boxes (if used): One set. 7. Drive bearings and seals: One set. B. Tools: Furnish special wrenches and other devices required for Owner to maintain and calibrate equipment. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 18 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the jurisdiction of Project location. B. Maintain a copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site. C. Iron and steel products supplied under this Section must comply with the American Iron and Steel provisions of the Contract. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the same type and similar size to those specified in this Section with minimum five years' documented experience. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage. B. Store materials according to manufacturer's instructions. 1.13 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 2. Document field measurements on Shop Drawings. A. Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty for circular clarifier equipment and accessories in lieu of standard warranty requirements. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 2.1 2.2 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 18 CIRCULAR PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. WesTech. 2. Ovivo. 3. Walker Process. 4. Or approved equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00). B. Description: Drive mechanism rotates sludge collector assembly, which moves settled solids to collection hopper near center column. Settled solids are removed from clarifier by pumps, for further processing. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design center turn table, access bridge, platforms, guardrails, and other structural components of the packaged system.. B. Primary Clarifier Design Criteria: 1. All dimensions and design criteria not listed under this section are to follow contract drawing and design criteria data tables located within the general sheets. C. Clarifier Drive Mechanism: 1. Continuous use under design load: a. Design continuous working torque output: 200,000 ft-lb. b. Momentary peak torque: 400,000 ft-lb. 2. No operating mechanisms (except drive cage) below or in contact with liquid surface. 3. Drive: Dual pinion Constant speed. D. Scraper Arms Rotational Speed: Maximum 2 revolutions per hour. E. Access Bridge Superimposed Live Load: 100 psf with deflection limited to 1/360 of span. F. Turntable Bearing Assembly: Arrange components for easy replacement of balls, rollers or raceways. G. Center Column and Drive Cage: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 18 Center Drive Cage: A box truss all -welded construction, fastened to the turntable base and main spur gear assembly with Type 316 stainless steel machine screws or a corrosion resistant high strength bolted connection. a. Material: Epoxy coated structural steel, 1/4 inch minimum thickness. b. Operation: Support and rotate the solids collector arm assemblies, the influent EDI, feedwell, and the scum removal device. C. Strength and Rigidity: No member to be stressed beyond the allowable limits set forth in the AISC standards when the full stalled torque load of the drive assembly is applied at one point at the tip of one rake collector arm, in either the forward or reverse direction. d. Full Stall Torque: Defined as 200 percent of design continuous working torque output. 2. Center Column: Supports the entire sludge collector mechanism including the operating platform and inner end of access bridge. b. Material: Epoxy coated structural steel. C. Wall thickness: Sized to support dead and live loads, 3/8 inch minimum. d. Discharge Ports: Size and elevation as shown on the Drawings. H. Solids Collector Assembly: 1. Scraper Type: Spiral. Two full -radius and two half -radius rake arms, each pair located 180 degrees apart. Rigidly connected to the center drive cage as shown on the Drawings. a. Conform rake arms to the slope of the tank floor and extend arms from the center drive cage. b. Scraper Rake Arms: Structural steel. 1) Rake arms to have inward raking blades to scrape settled solids along the tank bottom, to the hopper located near the center of the tank where the collected solids are removed from clarifier for further processing. C. Scraper Blades: 1) Material: Steel plate. 2) Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3) Provide squeegees, bolted to scraper blades with 2 inches vertical adjustment. 4) Number of Scrapers: As shown on the Drawings. 5) Angle of Attack: 30 degrees. d. Squeegees: 1) Material: Type 316 Stainless steel. 2) Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch. Strength and Rigidity: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 7 of 18 1) Rake Arm Components: 1/4 inch thick (minimum) steel plate and angle. 2) Suitably reinforced such that no portion of rake arms will be stressed beyond the allowable limits set forth in the AISC standards when the full stall torque load of the drive assembly is applied on one of the rake arms, in either the forward or reverse direction. 3) Full Stall Torque: Defined as 200 percent of the design continuous working torque output. I. Drive Assembly: An electric motor connected directly, dual pinion gear, turntable base and main spur gear, and complete automatic overload actuating system. 1. Factory assembled and shipped as complete units. 2. Acceptable Drive Types: Helical and worm gear, hydraulic gear, and cycloidal gear reducers. 3. Motor: As specified in Section 46 05 13, "Common Motor Requirements for Water and Wastewater Equipment." 4. Size: 1.5 Hp per motor. 5. Speed: 1200 or 1800 rpm. 6. Power: 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz. 7. Enclosure: TENV Speed Reduction and Turntable Gearing: a. Comply with AGMA 6113 or 6013 or 6034. b. Primary and Intermediate Speed Reducers: Helical gearing. C. Turntable: Worm gear reduction unit or Pinion -and -spur -gear reduction unit. d. Worm Gears: Cast bronze. e. Helical Gears: Cast alloy steel. f. Spur Gear: 1) Type: Internal. 2) Material. Forced Allov Steel or Ductile Iron. 2. g. Shaft Material: Steel. h. Gear Shafts and Bolting: Comply with AGMA 6001. i. Housings: 1) Fully enclosed. 3 2) Material. Steel or Cast Iron with corrosion resistant coating system as specified herein. 3) Provide dust and oil seals. 8. Turntable Assembly: a. Base: Steel. b. Turntable: Bolted to spur gear. C. Diameter: 80 inch minimum. The turntable shall bolt directly to the drive cal-e A without anv tapering or cage adapters. 9. Drive Assembly Bearings: Ball type per ABMA 9 or Roller type per ABMA 11. a. L-10 Life: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 8 of 18 1) Worm and Primary Helical Gearbox: 30,000 hours. 2) Spur and Intermediate Helical Gearbox: 200,000 hours. 3) Main Turntable (Bull Gear): 1,000,000 hours. 1A0. Lubrication: Grease fittings or Oil lubricated. Where not readilv accessible, provide 3 extension to accessible location. J. Scum Removal Assembly: Continuously moves surface scum to tank periphery and automatically flushes scum into scum trough. 1. Skimmer Assembly: Consisting of two "Z" shaped, tangentially mounted scum collecting arms as shown on the Drawings. a. Scum collecting arms have scum deflector blade assemblies. 1) Support legs and a hinged plow blade with synthetic rubber strips on the bottom and inner edges to seal entrapped scum and water when discharging into the scum trough. b. At end of deflector blades where hinged plow blades are located, provide a scum pocket to trap scum that has been channeled by the deflector blade assembly to the end of the scum collecting arm. C. Scum Pocket: The same width as the scum beach and be as shown on the drawings. d. Support scum removal mechanism with structural steel members, bolted through field adjustable connections to the rake arms. Extend from the feedwell to the scum baffle on the effluent trough. 1) Deflector Blade Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 2) Deflector Blade Depth: Accommodate both high and low water surface elevations in the clarifier. 3) Install so top of blade is 2 inches above the maximum water surface elevation, and bottom of blade at least 5 inches below the minimum water surface elevation. e. Replaceable PVC wear block or neoprene wiper strip on the outer edge of each hinged plow blade. 1) Constantly force wear blocks against the scum baffle using a coiled spring arrangement to effectively keep the scum baffle clean. 2) Scum Spray Bar Mechanism: Scum breakup on the surface of the clarifier by spray nozzles attached along the length of the primary clarifier bridge as shown on the drawings. a) Minimum requirements for spacing and auantity of sprav bar and 2 nozzles for the clarifier and scum beach are shown on the DrawinL-s. Clarifier Manufacturer's engineer shall detail the lavout of the sprav bar assembly including associated support and accessories for their clarifier and bridge design lavout. All proposed CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 9 of 18 lavouts, and material product data shall be coordinated for submittal under this specification. 3) Force Between the Scum Baffle and PVC Wear Block: Adjustable from 1 to 5 lbf. f. Plow Blade Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel. g. Wiper Blades Material: Neoprene. 1) Grease and oil resistant. 2A) Backing Plate: 316 Stainless Steel. 2 3) Replaceable. h. Support Legs Material: Steel. i. Coiled Spring: Type 316 stainless steel and no housing. 2. Scum Trough and Scum Beach: Type 316 Stainless Steel. a. Material Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Scum Discharge Pipe Wall Connection: Flanged. C. Scum Trough to Pipe Connection: Flexible. d. Scum Beach: 6-inch adjustment in elevation. e. Outer Edge of Scum Trough: 3 inches above scum baffle. f. Dimensions: as shown on the Drawings and in the design criteria table. g. Provide a flap gate triggered by scum skimmer arm. h. Solenoid controlled spray nozzles for scum beach cleaning. 1) The Solenoid shall be 1.5" stainless steel pilot operated diaphragm type, explosion proof design by ASCO Redhat Series 8210 or equal. 2) Furnish and install limit switch, actuating rod, mounting bracket, and hardware. All materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel and enclosures explosion proof. 3) The limit switch and the solenoid shall be wired, powered, and controlled from the clarifier manufacturer provided control panel. 4) The scum beach solenoid shall open (normally closed) when the limit switch is tripped each time the scum skimmer arm passes across. Each time the limit switch is tripped the scum beach spray bars shall be flushed based on a user adjustable timer -based operation. 5) The solenoid shall have the ability to be operated in automatic mode based on the limit switch. The manufacturer control panel shall also include a switch to override the solenoid -based operation in manual mode and flush the scum beach. K. Walkway and Operating Platform: Removeable aluminum checkered plating bolted to framing. 1. Minimum Walkway Width: 36 inches clear between railings. 2. Operating Platform Minimum Walkway Clearance: 28 inches between railings and clarifier drive mechanisms. 3. Double Railing and Kick Plate: Aluminum. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 10 of 18 a. Railing: 1-1/2 inch diameter minimum. b. Minimum Height: 42 inches, on both sides of walkway and around outside of operating platform. C. Kick plates to be an integral part of the railing. d. Walkway trusses may serve as the handrail and kickplate if the top chord is 42 inches above the walking surface. 4. Structural Framing: a. Coated Steel with coatines as specified herein, desit-ned by a reeistered PE in the State of Texas. L. Influent Energy Dissipating Inlet (EDI) and Feedwell: Efficiently and Evenly disperses the influent liquid into the tank without disturbance and provides a flocculation zone. 1. Diameter: 20-24 feet based on manufacturer recommendations. 2. All other dimensions are shown on the drawings or located in the design criteria tables. 3. EDI: A rotating circular energy dissipating inlet with bottom. Dimensions as shown on Drawings. Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch. a. Supported by the center drive cage and diffuses the liquid into the feedwell without excessive disturbance or formation of vertical velocity currents. b. Prevents sludge from depositing within the EDI and includes bottom drain holes. C. Provide discharge port near water surface to allow scum to migrate to feedwell. Accommodate both high and low water surface elevations. 4. Feedwell: Steel plate and structural steel construction suitably reinforced with a top rim angle and vertical stiffening angles. a. Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.6 mm). b. Supported by and rotates with the center drive cage or rake arms. C. Structural supports and braces below the liquid surface must not be inside the feedwell. d. Locate feedwell supports above the liquid surface. e. Provide slots, complete with baffles, for continuous or periodic removal of scum and floating material from inside the feedwell without allowing short circuiting. 1) Slots and baffles must be accessible from the walkway/operating platform. 5. Top of EDI and feedwell dimensions are shown on the Drawings. M. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the clarifier equipment with structural elements and other equipment. (PRV's, FRP launder covers, supports, pipping as shown on drawings and as specified.) N. Coating Materials: 1. Primary Clarifier Structural Steel and Steel Mechanical Components: Epoxy coated as specified. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 11 of 18 a. First Coat: Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner applied at 10 to 12.0 dry mils. By Clarifier Manufacturer's Painter — must be trained applicator per TNEMEC with at least 5 years' experience. b. Second Coat: Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner applied at 10 to 12.0 dry mils. By Contractor's Painter — must be trained applicator with at least 5 years' experience (Dobbs or sim). C. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner applied at 10 to 12.0 dry mils. By Contractor's Painter — must be trained applicator with at least 5 years' experience (Dobbs or sim). 2. Primary Clarifier Ductile Iron or Cast Iron drive housing and covers: Epoxv coated 3 similar to the three -coat system specified in Paragraph 2.2.N.1., except using Tnemec Series 431 Perma-Shield or G435 Perma-Glaze applied in three coats for a total thickness of 40 mils dry mils, at 14 to 15 dry mils per coat. O. Controls: General: a. Provide one (1) Local Control Panel (LCP) for each Primary Clarifier. b. Panel Construction: Conform to general requirements as seen in Division 26, "Electrical". C. All equipment and installations to satisfy applicable Federal, State, and local codes. 1) Refer to general sheets of contract drawings for area classification for Class and Division ratings. 2. Local Control Panels (LCP): a. Tag Numbers: 1) LCP-3100-02 2) LCP-3100-03 3) LCP-3100-04 b. Location: Outdoors, as located in the contract drawings. C. Space Classification: In accordance with general sheets of the contract drawings. d. Conduit Entry: As shown in Electrical Drawings. e. Factory pre -assembled and pre -wired. f. Single -point power connection and grounding lug. g. Refer to Section 262505-480V Control Panels for general electrical requirements. h. Contain control wiring, timers, relays, motor starts, etc. for manual starting and stopping of the clarifier equipment. i. Provide the following face mounted devices. Provide each operator device with a faceplate describing the device: 1) Pushbutton, Start. 2) Pushbutton, Stop. 3) Pushbutton, Reset. 4) Emergency stop (E-stop) pushbutton. Push to stop, pull to operate type. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 12 of 18 5) Hand switch, On -Off for manual override of solenoid valve and opening of bypass valve for flushing. j. Provide the following pilot lights and indicators in color as listed below. Provide each light with a faceplate the describing the indicator. 1) Clarifier Running (Red). 2) Clarifier Off (Green). 3) Clarifier Motor 1 Fault (Amber). 4) Clarifier Motor 2 Fault (Amber). 5) Clarifier E-stop Activated (Amber). 6) Clarifier Motor 1 High Torque (Amber). 7) Clarifier Motor 1 High -High Torque (Amber). 8) Clarifier Motor 2 High Torque (Amber). 9) Clarifier Motor 2 High -High Torque (Amber). 10) Elapsed Time Meter (timer) k. The elapsed time meter (ETM) shall be resettable and Provided for each clarifier 2ALCP to totalize clarifier run time. 1. The a -stop shall be mounted to the Panel -front for emergencv immediate stop of the clarifier drive. When e-stop is activated. Power supply to the drive shall not be restored until the RESET button is engaged. 3. Torque Overload Protection Assembly: a. Torque Overload Warning and Shut Down Switches: Incorporate into the drive assembly. 1) Switches to have a weather-proof NEMA rating. b. Indicating Meter: Load on the mechanism can be visually monitored from the platform at all times during operation. C. Assembly Enclosure: Weatherproof NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. Exposed 2 linkage bars are not acceptable. 1) Access panels for field adjustment or removal of parts when necessary. 2) Field Adjustable Thermostat: 0 to 60 deg F and 120 Volt heaters to prevent condensation. d. Overload Warning Switch: Pre-set at factory allowing transmission of a remote signal in case of impending excessive load. 1) Set switch to energize an alarm in the case of impending excessive load over 100 percent of the continuous torque. e. Motor Cutout Switch: Pre-set at factory allowing transmission of a remote signal in case of impending excessive load. 1) Set switch to shut off power to motor and energize an alarm in the case of impending excessive load over a field adjustable up to 120 percent of the maximum design continuous working output. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 2.3 2.4 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 13 of 18 f. Alarm: Audible horn or bell, relay, reset button, test circuit, and ON -OFF switch. g. Provide auxiliary contacts in alarm circuit. 4. Disconnect Switch: Factory -mounted in control panel. 5. Refer to Section 40 61 96 "Process Control Descriptions" for Clarifier control descriptions. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Inspection: Make completed clarifier equipment available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. 1. Notify Owner at least ten working days before inspection is allowed. B. Owner Witnessing: Allow witnessing of factory inspections and test at manufacturer's test facility. 1. Notify Owner at least fifteen working days before inspections and tests are scheduled. C. Certificate of Compliance: When fabricator is approved by authorities having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING A. Coating Systems: As specified in paragraph 2.2.N. Coordinate the finish coating systems with the coatings sub -contractor. B. Clarifier Mechanism Color: Tan per TCEQ chapter 217.329. Final color shade selection to be finalized during submittal review phase. Submit color charts for review. C. Surface Preparation and Prime Coat: Minimum DFT 10-12 mils per coat. Minimum one coat. Surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP-10/ NACE 2 near white blast cleaning for immersion service with a minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils. D. Finish Coat: Minimum DFT 30-36 mils total, three coat system. E. Application Procedures: In accordance with the manufacturer's data sheets for each coating. F. Galvanized, aluminum and stainless -steel surfaces do not require painting. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 14 of 18 17:11 7199M W14x41820to] 0I 3.1 UK 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verify clarifier basin is installed and ready to receive circular clarifier equipment. IIe131l:IarLVIto] ►I A. Install circular clarifier equipment according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Coatings: 1. Shop Priming: Completed by manufacturer prior to shipment. Shop prime coats to be inspected and touched up upon delivery by coatings sub -contractor. 2. Engineer shall have access to inspect the materials during and after surface preparation prior to application of the prime coating. Engineer may request a video tape of the prepared surfaces in lieu of in -person inspection. 3. Final 3' party inspection to be performed by a NACE certified inspector. Submit coatings inspection report. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Torque Test: Conduct prior to placement of cement mortar finish of floors. B. Prior to system startup, submit installation documentation from equipment manufacturer's representative attesting that equipment has been properly installed and is ready for startup and testing. C. Anchor Bolts Furnished by Equipment Manufacturer: 1. Embedded in concrete floor at points near the outer portion of the rake arms. 2. Suitable for loads applied and cut off flush with the rough concrete surface after tests are completed. 3. Arrange bolts so that a single cable is used at the apex of the cables connecting panel points of the rake arm. 4. Test one arm at a time. 5. Hydraulic Cylinder: Sufficient capacity with a known piston diameter, complete with pressure gauge. 6. Connect cylinder to the anchor bolts to determine the horizontal load developed. 7. The Required Gauge Reading: Must indicate a force at the anchor bolts, which, when multiplied by the distance from the center of the tank to the cable connecting point on the arm, will equal twice the specified continuous working output torque. a. Maintain this force for 15 seconds duration assuring the equipment is capable of withstanding the required loading under static test conditions (i.e., without the drive motor in operation). CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 15 of 18 b. Verify or correct the setting of the overload device prior to the actual testing of the equipment with the drive motor. C. Adjust the overload warning torque setting specified in PART 2. d. Alternative methods of producing the required torque will be considered. 1) Details of alternative test procedures must be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Test methods must not apply impact loading or jerky loading conditions to the mechanism, which may reduce the life of the equipment. 8. After the tests, adjustments, and settings to the overload device have been made, switch on the drive motor and load mechanism to an overload condition ensuring the sludge collector mechanism will alarm. Stop when a predetermined overload condition occurs in the tank. 9. Upon Completion of Static and Operating Torque Tests: Run the mechanism dry for a period of 8 hours and operate without vibration, noise, jamming, or overheating. a. Pay special attention during the dry test run of the equipment for the operation of the scum removal device. 10. Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer and Owner. 11. Contractor to supply power, water, equipment, and appurtenances required for testing. 12. If mechanisms fail testing, make the necessary changes and retest. a. If mechanisms remain unable to meet the test requirements to the satisfaction of the Engineer, remove and replace equipment and components with satisfactory items at no expense to the Owner, and retest. D. Dry Startup: Run equipment without liquid in basins and inspect for: 1. Alignment of sprockets, chain, flights, and wearing surfaces. 2. Binding and excessive heat buildup in drive units. E. Wet Startup: Run equipment with water in basins and verify proper operation. F. Manufacturer Services: Provide the services of a factory certified service engineer specifically trained in the installation, start-up, testing, operation, and maintenance of the system specified. 1. Representative to be a direct, full-time employee of the Manufacturer or local representative certified by the Manufacturer in installation and startup of the equipment. 2. This service representative or others with similar qualification must provide instruction to the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in this section. 3. The Manufacturer's Representative (Training dates and times to be amended to Owner's needs): a. Will be made available during installation for assistance to the Contractor for adjusting and checking equipment. b. Advise, consult, and instruct the Contractor on installation procedures and adjustments and inspect the equipment during installation as a condition of acceptance of the Work. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 16 of 18 C. Verify location of anchor bolts, placement, leveling, alignment, field erection of equipment, as well as control panel operation and electrical connections. d. Be present during start-up and testing operations to make final adjustments as a condition of acceptance of the work. 4. Do not energized or "bump" equipment to check the electrical connection for motor rotation without the representative present. 5. Owner's Training Requirements: a. Training dates and times must be requested in writing to the Owner. b. Include operational instruction to 3 separate operational teams over a minimum of 3separate time periods. 1) Train at times convenient to the operational team being trained in light of operational shifts and duties on shift. 2) Accordingly, some operational training will have to be conducted during hours outside a normal Monday through Friday, 8:00 am to 5:00 pm work day (i.e., 7:00 pm and later). Operational training to include the following, at a minimum: 1) Theory of operation. 2) Process flow description. 3) Unit capacity and design criteria. 4) Operational troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. 5) Step-by-step start-up and shut -down procedures. 6) System operation and optimization practices. 7) Control set -point modification procedures. d. Maintenance Training: To one maintenance team on two occasions to accommodating personnel unable to attend the first training session. 1) Conducted during the hours of 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday. 2) Determine exact schedule in light of ongoing maintenance team duties. 3) Include the following, at a minimum: a) Step -by step, "hands-on" assembly and disassembly procedural instructions. b) Replacement part identification and ordering procedures. c) Lubrication procedures, including drain -down and refill procedures. d) Recommended routine maintenance procedures. e) Troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures. f) Video record the onsite training and provide the video as a construction submittal. Man -day requirements are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, provide additional services at no additional cost to the Owner. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 17 of 18 6. Manufacturer Representative's Duties: One trip minimum to ensure proper installation, testing, and initial operation of each unit. a. Supervise and approve installation. Provide Engineer written certification system has been installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 1) Minimum Number of Trips: 3. 2) Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. b. Supervise initial adjustment. May be done upon completion of installation if acceptable to the Engineer. 1) Minimum Number of Trips: 3. 2) Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. C. Supervise and assist in testing. May be done upon completion of initial adjustment if acceptable to the Engineer. 1) Minimum Number of Trips: 3. 2) Minimum Time on Site per Trip: 8 Hour. d. Instruct Owner and Engineer in proper startup and O&M. Instruction may be given upon completion of testing, provided testing is successful and O&M manuals have been submitted to and accepted by the Engineer. 1) Minimum Number of Trips: 3. 2) Minimum Time on Site per Trip: 4 Hour. e. Manufacturer must video record onsite training and provide the video as a construction submittal. G. Equipment Acceptance: Adjust, repair, modify, or replace components failing to perform as specified, and rerun tests. 1. Make final adjustments to equipment under direction of manufacturer's representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Check control module functions and adjust as necessary. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment startup, shutdown, routine maintenance, and emergency repair procedures to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION 46 43 21 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 43 21 CIRCULAR CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT Page 18 of 18 This page intentionally left blank. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 1 of 11 SECTION 46 6120.13 — FRP LAUNDER COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. FRP walk-on launder covers as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Supports, appurtenances and necessary anchorage hardware. 3. FRP V-notch weirs (including inner, middle, and outer), FRP scum baffles, and FRP inboard effluent launder, all specified under Section 46 43 13.11, to be supplied in the same package as the FRP launder covers. Coordinate supply of supports for the entire system of FRP products supplied in the package. 4. Delegated design. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 03 for concrete requirements. 2. Division 05 for miscellaneous metals. 3. Section 46 43 13.11 "FRP Weirs, Troughs and Baffles". 4. Section 46 43 21 "Circular Primary Clarifier Equipment". 5. Section 23 31 16 "Non -Metal Ducts". C. Related Sheets: 1. M-B sheets for Primary Clarifier plans, sections, and details. 2. S-B Sheets for Primary Clarifier Top of Concrete and Top of Wall Elevation 3. C-P Sheets for Grade Elevation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Length: Outer Circumferential Distance for each module. B. Width: The Distance from the outer tank wall over the effluent outer trough, inner trough (including trough platform), weir and scum baffle. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the Project site. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 2 of 11 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Scope of supply and bill of materials and spares. B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, including physical properties, dimensions of individual components and profiles, methods of manufacture, and finishes for launder covers and supports. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Special shipping, storage and protection and handling instructions. 4. Statement that fabrication is in accordance with these Specifications. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1. Cover Modules: One 6 x 6-inch sample. 2. Polyester Laminate (Supports): One 4 x 4-inch x 1/4-inch sample. D. AIS: Submit certification indicating compliance with AIS requirements for all applicable metal products where required in compliance with the requirements of Division 00 and 01. 1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SUBMITTALS A. Delegated Design Submittal: For launder covers. Refer to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for additional delegated design requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Texas PE Signed and Sealed. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details, including support details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components/dimensions, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Detail fabrication and assembly of FRP launder covers and cover supports. 4. Connection points to FRP launders, weirs, and baffles supplied under Section 46 43 13.11 (and provided under the same package). 5. Connection details to odor control ducts. C. Certification that the cover design is in compliance with local building code specifications for wind load, including uplift and deflection (including scenarios when the tank is in and out of service). D. Live load factory test results. E. Texas Professional Engineer (PE) stamped and sealed design calculations, shop drawings, fabrication and installation details for the covers, cover supports, anchoring, and all other components furnished. F. Submit a written narrative that clearly states all the basic design assumptions and parameters that were used in the computerized calculations shall accompany the calculations. Approval by CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 3 of 11 the Engineer shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for providing material and designs conforming to the intent of this Section. G. Qualifications Statement: Submit qualifications for licensed professional. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material and Product Certificates: Provide statement certifying that materials and products are in accordance with the requirements of this section. B. List of ten installations of comparable size in operation for at least five years. C. Material Test Reports: For manufactured laminates; by a qualified testing agency. D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Bill of materials. 2. Operating and maintenance instructions prepared specifically for this installation. 3. Include all required cuts, drawings, descriptions that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 4. Include trouble shooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design Engineer: Licensed professional engineer experienced in design of specified Work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Fiberglass Covers and Supports: Furnished by a single manufacturer, experienced, reputable and qualified in the fabrication of such equipment. C. Installer Qualifications: Workers skilled in the installation of this type of work. D. Manufacturer shall coordinate Launder Cover design and installation requirements with the primary clarifier mechanism, scum box, scum skimmer sweep arm, and launder effluent channel box. E. Provide certification that equipment has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build full-scale mockup of two to three cover modules as shown on Drawings. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 4 of 11 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL (AIS) REQUIREMENTS A. Products submitted under this section shall meet American Iron and Steel (AIS) requirements as described in Division 00 and 01 Specifications. A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish five year manufacturer's warranty from acceptance including installation and startup testing. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace launder covers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Protectolite Composites, Inc, ON. 2. Nefco, Inc., Palm Beach Gardens, FL. 3. Fiberglass Fabricators, Inc., Smithfield, RI. 4. Or Approved Equal (any manufacturer or product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00.) 2.2 LAUNDER COVERS A. System Description: A series of cover modules attached together including access hatches, angles, brackets, gaskets, hardware, anchors and fasteners, odor control duct connections, and other items necessary to form a continuous cover over the primary clarifier effluent inboard launder, outboard launder, area between inboard launder and outboard launder, effluent channel box, weirs and scum baffle within the clarifier tank, and transition areas from inboard launders to outboard launders. Include "lip" or trim at inside edge of cover to seal the air gap as much as feasible. 1. Design cover platform and access hatches to seal properly for odor control, including foul air withdrawal and supply ventilation. For the existing Primary Clarifier Nos.15 and 18, Contractor shall field verify all dimensions. Dimensions and elevations of Primary Clarifier Nos. 15 and 18 are based on record drawings and best available data from the Owner. Field verify all structural dimensions, elevations, and clearances for the new CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 5 of 11 system. Contractor shall coordinate the clearance between the new scum baffle and existing scum beach and clarifier mechanism scum skimmer arm. 2. Support system including brackets constructed of fiberglass reinforced polyester resin with Type 316 stainless steel hardware per ASTM A276-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. Support system may include supports attached to the outboard launder weir wall. Provide outer perimeter supports for the cover (from the outer launder inner face) as necessary to meet loading criteria and to prevent separation of the covers from the perimeter wall. Coordinate cover support system with the FRP inboard launders, scum baffles, and weirs that are provided under the same package. 3. Provide ASTM D3982 flanged nozzles for gooseneck vent and odor control duct connection. B. Characteristics: General: a. FRP, walk-on type, slip -resistant, providing access to weirs, launders, baffles, and clarifier components including scum skimmer and scum beach. b. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP): Resistant to attack from sewage and associated corrosive gases including but not limited to hydrogen sulfide (H2S), ammonia (NH3), and mercaptans. Design shall be based on typical concentrations of corrosive gases present in domestic wastewater. C. Designed and manufactured to inhibit incident sunlight (UV -protected; opaque to sunlight) from striking surfaces of launder and weir for algae control. d. Intended to contain odors and prevent debris from entering the launder. 2. Shape and Dimensions: a. Walk-on type, slip -resistant, with no raised surfaces, with a minimum slope of 1.5% from outer wall inwards to ensure no ponding on top of the cover. b. Individual Module Circumferential Length: Sufficient to accommodate hatches of type and dimensions as shown. C. Individual Module Width: Sufficient to span the distance from the outer wall of the outboard launder to the scum baffle as shown. d. FRP Thickness: Nominal 1/4-inch, minimum. Hatches: a. Size and Spacing: Sufficient sized and arranged to allow cleaning by hosing or brushing of outboard and inboard launders and weir surfaces, as well as provide access to the space between the outboard and inboard launders to allow debris removal as necessary. b. Hatch Openings: 1) Provide access by plant personnel for inspection and maintenance of outboard and inboard launders, space between launders, transition areas, effluent box and isolation gate. 2) Primary Clarifier Nos. 2, 3, 4: Minimum 3 feet-0 inch (circumferential) by 4 feet-7 inch (radial) as shown. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 6 of 11 3) Existing Primary Clarifier Nos. 15 and 18: Minimum 3 feet-8 inch (circumferential) by 4 feet-3 inch (radial) as shown. 4) Minimum of two hatches over the outboard launder and two hatches over the inboard launder, per individual module, except for modules with vent or duct connections, as shown. 5) Outer hatches open radially towards the center of the clarifiers. 6) Inner hatches open similar to a French door. C. Modules and Frames: Recessed, for flush fit with cover platform doors in closed position. d. Hinges: Embedded in the cover module, oriented as shown, robust, allowing a swing angle of 105-110 degrees from closed position. When full open, hatch shall resist unintentional closing prematurely due to wind or other natural forces. Provide wire or chain stop to prevent hatches from opening 180 degrees. e. Handles: Mounted in recessed, molded pockets on the hatch or fixed cover platform, posing no tripping hazard. Design latches and hinges to allow locking in closed position and to prevent flopping or rattling due to differential pressures above and below launder cover. f. Operator Standing Access: Maintain at least 2 feet of clearance between outer wall and hatch opening. 4. Finish: Molded -in anti-skid surface. C. Materials: Covers, General: Molded, FRP composite construction consisting of gel coat„ fiberglass reinforcement, polyester resin and marine plywood core, and steel tubing if applicable. Steel tubing shall not be exposed and subjected to potential corrosion. a. Fiberglass: 1) Reinforcement: Chopped strand roving, 357-211 PLN CTC, or equivalent, with a minimum 1/2-inch strand length. Add additional reinforcement in the form of stiffening ribs when necessary. 2) Glass Content: Not less than 30 percent by weight. b. Composite Laminate: 1) Exterior 20 mil layer of marine -quality, white or grey gel -coat followed by a minimum 1/4-inch-thick fiberglass (chopped strand roving) outer layer, 1/4- inch-thick inner layer followed by a resin -rich finishing layer. 2) The top laminate will be high UV resistant and will prevent discoloration. 3) Dense and free of voids, dry spots, cracks or crazes. Resin: 1) Industrial quality isophthalic polyester resin appropriate for regional low and high temperature extremes with UV additives for necessary UV resistance. Gel coats for UV resistance is not acceptable. 2) Pigmented to ensure that the resulting part is opaque. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 7 of 11 d. Resins and Fiberglass Reinforcing Materials: Consistent with the environmental conditions and structural requirements of the application. Exhibit excellent UV resistance, corrosion resistance to sewage, and gases but not limited to hydrogen sulfide (H2S), ammonia (NH3), and mercaptans, not disintegrating with age and exposure. Manufacturers: Dow Chemical, Ashland, or Reichhold. Or Engineers approved equal. e. Fiberglass Laminate: 1) Tensile Strength: 18,900 psi; ASTM D638. 2) Flexural Strength: 24,200 psi; ASTM D790. 3) Flexural Modulus: 1.07 x 106 ; ASTM D790. 4) Impact, Notches, Izod, foot pound per inch: 7; ASTM D256. 5) Barcol Hardness: 45; ASTM D2583. 6) Water Absorption Percent in 24 hours: 0.1%; ASTM D570. 7) Average Coefficient of Thermal Expansion inch per inch per degrees F: 1.5 x 10-5 ASTM D696. 8) Compressive Strength: 30,000 psi; ASTM D695. 9) Compressive Modulus: 3,372,000 psi; ASTM D695. 10) Glass Content: Not less than 30% by weight; ASTM D2584. 2. Hatches: Composite construction, same as cover platform. a. Hatch Hinges, Handles and Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Fasteners, Handles and Latches: Type 316 stainless steel. Brackets may be stainless steel or FRP. C. Tether or Restraint Cable: Stainless steel cable secured with stainless steel eyebolts to tank wall and hinged cover section to limit travel of hatch cover. d. Provide EPDM/Neoprene/Buna-N gasket material around perimeter of hatch cover openings to effectively seal the hatch covers. D. Finish: 1. Interior Surface: Resin -rich coating to prevent wicking of the fibers. 2. Exterior (Exposed) Surface: Molded anti-skid finish. Corrosion resistant gel -coat surface which is free from pits, porosity or dry glass. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements," and licensed in the State of Texas, to design walk-on odor control cover system. 1. Use advanced numerical techniques to determine design for the specified operating conditions. a. As a standard, use strength of materials approaches coupled with computerized classical lamination theory to determine displacements, stresses, and factors of safety. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 8 of 11 b. Factors of safety for each lamina used in high stress areas will include values using the Tsai -Hill or equivalent approach to determine the minimum factory of safety for each ply. B. Loading Criteria: Include the dead weight of the covers and anticipated live loads on the covers. Design one module (dimensions as shown on the Drawings specified herein) to support the weight of plant personnel. For modules with gooseneck vent, consider a weight of up to 350 pounds in addition to all other loads specified. The nozzle reaction values for the gooseneck vent and OC duct connection are as follows: a. Rx = +/- 250 lbf. b. Ry = 400 lbf. c. RZ= +/- 250 lbf. d. Mx = +/- 900 ft-lbf. e. My=+/- 850 ft-lbf. f. MZ = +/- 1,500 ft-lbf. 2. Design Live Load: 50 psf. 3. Concentrated Load: 300 psf. 4. Point Load: 300 psf over 12 square inches of surface area. Each hatch shall be designed for two -point loads and each cover module shall be designed for four -point loads. 5. Minimum Safety Factor: 3.5. C. Thermal Stresses: Designed to accommodate temperature induced stresses resulting from differences in coefficients of thermal expansion and contraction between the FRP and tank material or support members. D. Deflection Criteria Under Load: 1. Maximum Vertical Deflection: Less than or equal to L/360 for live load and L/240 for live load plus dead load, where L is defined as the unsupported cover length in inches. 2. Do not allow, under any circumstances, maximum vertical deflection measured at the midpoint between the cover supports, to exceed 3/16-inch. 3. The seals shall not be compromised at any location in the cover system due to deflection or deformation under the design loading. E. Thermal Expansion/Contraction: Design to accommodate thermally induced expansion and contraction of 1/8-inch per 20- feet length of cover over a temperature range of minus 10 degrees F to 100 degrees F, without exceeding the deflection or strain limitations specified above. F. Wind Uplift Load: 40 psf. G. Vacuum Load: 10 psf. H. Ground Snow Load: 5 psf. CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 9 of 11 I. Lifting Force of Individual Hatch Door: Not to exceed 50 pounds force. J. Cover and Hatches: Airtight to the fullest extent possible. The covers serve as an integral a part of the odor control system for the clarifiers. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Sand and seal factory -trimmed edges. Ensure even, smooth appearance of finished laminate. B. Coordinate odor control walk-on covers with the primary clarifier sludge and scum collection mechanism, effluent box, and odor control system ductwork connections. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. At manufacturer's facility, conduct a live load test on the cover system prior to shipment. 1. Apply Design Live Load (defined under Part 2) maintained over a period of 24 hours with a deflection not to exceed L/240. 2. Set height gauge at "Zero (0)" at start of test and read and record every 500 pounds until completion of the test. Record a reading after 24-hour period has expired. Submit test results and photos of test for OWNER'S review. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Before fabrication, field measure the radius of the inside face of the clarifier wall by way of the radius or total circumference. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer instructions in installation of launder covers. B. Coordinate launder cover installation with installation of supports, troughs, baffles, and weirs, transition areas, and odor control duct connections. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full-time factory representative qualified by launder cover manufacturer to inspect the installation of supports and covers and supervise testing of the cover system. B. Manufacturers Responsibilities and Man -day requirements: CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295 46 61 20.13 FRP LAUNDER COVERS Page 10 of 11 1. Man -day requirements are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve Contractor of obligation to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, provide additional services at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Supervise and approve installation. Provide Engineer written certification system has been installed per manufacturer's recommendations. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. 3. Supervise initial adjustment. May be done upon completion of installation if acceptable to the Engineer. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time On Site per Trip: 8 Hour. 4. Supervise and assist in testing. May be done upon completion of initial adjustment if acceptable to the Engineer. a. Minimum Number of Trips: 5. b. Minimum Time on Site per Trip: 8 Hour. C. Air tightness testing is performed with colored smoke. The odor control system is activated and colored smoke is released under the covers to determine if there are any leaks. D. If there are difficulties in operation of the launder covers due to the manufacturer's fabrication or Contractor's installation, provide additional service at no additional cost. END OF SECTION 46 61 20.13 CDM Smith VCWRF Primary Clarifier Improvements CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project No. 103295